5 61 17866 MQ12 FM 4E Book

4TH EDITION
MATHS QUEST 12
Further
Mathematics
MATHS QUEST 12
Further
Mathematics
ANTHONY NOVAK | RUTH BAKOGIANIS | KYLIE BOUCHER
JENNIFER NOLAN | GEOFF PHILLIPS
CONTRIBUTING AUTHORS
ELENA IAMPOLSKY | MARK BARNES | STEPHEN HEAMES | ROBERT CAHN
JANET HEFFERNAN | CHRIS LONGHURST | NICK SIMPSON
SUPPORT MATERIAL
JOHN DOWSEY | DENNIS FITZGERALD | EMILY HUI | CAROLINE MEWS | VINOD NARAYAN
PETER SWAIN | DAVID TYNAN | IAN YOUNGER | WAYNE YOUNGS
SIMONE RICHARDSON | DINA ANTONIOU | NORRENE HILL
4T H EDITION
VCE M AT H EM AT I CS U N I T S 3 & 4
Fourth edition published 2013 by

John Wiley & Sons Australia, Ltd
42 McDougall Street, Milton, Qld 4064
Third edition published 2010
Second edition published 2006
First edition published 2000
Typeset in 10/12 pt Times LT Std
John Wiley & Sons Australia, Ltd 2000, 2006, 2010, 2013
The moral rights of the authors have been asserted.
National Library of Australia
Cataloguing-in-Publication data
Novak, Anthony.
Author:
Title: Maths Quest 12 Further Mathematics/
Anthony Novak.
4th ed.
Edition:
Publisher: Milton, Qld: John Wiley & Sons Australia,
2009.
ISBN:
978 1 1183 1786 0 (student pbk.)

978 1 1183 1793 8 (flexisaver)

978 1 1183 1787 7 (student eBook)
Includes index.
Notes:
Target Audience:
For secondary school age.
Subjects: Mathematics Textbooks.

Mathematics Problems, exercises, etc.
Dewey Number:
510
Reproduction and communication for educational purposes
The Australian Copyright Act 1968 (the Act) allows a maximum
of one chapter or 10% of the pages of this work, whichever
is the greater, to be reproduced and/or communicated by any
educational institution for its educational purposes provided that
the educational institution (or the body that administers it) has
given a remuneration notice to Copyright Agency Limited (CAL).
Reproduction and communication for other purposes
Except as permitted under the Act (for example, a fair dealing
for the purposes of study, research, criticism or review), no part
of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system,
communicated or transmitted in any form or by any means
without prior written permission. All inquiries should be made to
the publisher.
Cover and internal design images: vic&dd/Shutterstock.com
Cartography by MAPgraphics Pty Ltd Brisbane
Illustrated by Aptara and Wiley Composition Services
Typeset in India by Aptara
Printed in China by
Shenzhen Donnelley Printing Co., Ltd.
109876543
Contents
2G Calculating r and the coefficient of
Introduction ix
About eBookPLUS xi
Acknowledgements xii
Chapter 1
Univariate data
1A Types of data
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
1G
1H
1I
1J
1
Exercise 1A 2
Stem plots 3
Exercise 1B 5
Dot plots, frequency histograms and
bar charts 7
Exercise 1C 10
Describing the shape of stem plots and
histograms 11
Exercise 1D 12
The median, the interquartile range, the
range and the mode 15
Exercise1E 18
Boxplots 19
Exercise 1F 23
The mean 24
Exercise 1G 27
Standard deviation 28
Exercise 1H 30
The 689599.7% rule and z-scores 31
Exercise 1I 36
Populations and simple random
samples 40
Exercise 1J 42
determination 76
Exercise 2G 79
Summary 43
Chapter review 45
ICT activities 52
Answers 53
Chapter 3
Introduction to regression
Fitting straight lines to bivariate data 95

95
Exercise 3A 96
3B Fitting a straight line the 3-median
method 97
Exercise 3B 100
3C Fitting a straight line least-squares
regression 102
Exercise 3C 104
3D Interpretation, interpolation and
extrapolation 106
Exercise 3D 108
3E Residual analysis 109
Exercise 3E 112
3F Transforming to linearity 114
Exercise 3F 117
2C
2D
2E
2F
Summary 120
Chapter review 122
ICT activities 125
Answers 126
Chapter 4
Time series
129
4A Time series and trend lines
Exercise 4A
129
132
4B Fitting trend lines and forecasting
57
4C
2A Dependent and independent
2B
95
3A Fitting a straight line by eye
Chapter 2
Bivariate data
Summary 82
Chapter review 84
ICT activities 89
Answers 90
variables 57
Exercise 2A 58
Back-to-back stem plots 59
Exercise 2B 61
Parallel boxplots 62
Exercise 2C 64
Two-way frequency tables and segmented bar
charts 65
Exercise 2D 67
Scatterplots 69
Exercise 2E 72
Pearsons productmoment correlation
coefficient 73
Exercise 2F 75
4D
4E
4F
Exercise 4B 135
Smoothing time series 137
Exercise 4C 140
Smoothing with an even number
of points 141
Exercise 4D 144
Median smoothing 145
Exercise 4E 147
Seasonal adjustment 148
Exercise 4F 153
Summary 156
Chapter review 157
ICT activities 163
Answers 164
ExAm PrACtICE 1
Based on Chapters 14
169
133
Chapter 5
Arithmetic and geometric sequences

Introduction
171
171
5A Recognition of arithmetic sequences

5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
5G
5H
5I
171
Exercise 5A 173
Finding the terms of an arithmetic
sequence 175
Exercise 5B 177
The sum of a given number of terms of an arithmetic
sequence 178
Exercise 5C 181
Recognition of geometric sequences 183
Exercise 5D 185
Finding the terms of a geometric
sequence 186
Exercise 5E 189
The sum of a given number of terms of
a geometric sequence 191
Exercise 5F 193
Applications of geometric sequences 194
Exercise 5G 197
Finding the sum of an infinite geometric
sequence 198
Exercise 5H 201
Contrasting arithmetic and geometric sequences
through graphs 202
Exercise 5I 204
Summary 206
Chapter review 208
ICT activities 212
Answers 213
ExAm PrACtICE 2
Based on Chapters 16
Geometry: similarity and mensuration

Geometry
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
vi
Exercise 7A 256
Area and perimeter 258
Exercise 7B 261
Total surface area 263
Exercise 7C 266
Volume of prisms, pyramids and spheres
Exercise 7D 272
Similar figures 275
Exercise 7E 277
Similar triangles 279
Exercise 7F 281
Area and volume scale factors 283
Exercise 7G 288
253
268
Summary 291
Chapter review 293
ICT activities 297
Answers 298
Trigonometry
301
301
8A Pythagoras theorem
301
Exercise 8A 303
8B Pythagorean triads 305
Exercise 8B 306
8C Three-dimensional Pythagoras theorem
Exercise 8C 308
8D Trigonometric ratios 310
Exercise 8D 314
Introduction sine and cosine rules 316
8E The sine rule 317
Exercise 8E 320
8F Ambiguous case of the sine rule 322
Exercise 8F 324
8G The cosine rule 324
Exercise 8G 326
8H Special triangles 328
Exercise 8H 330
8I Area of triangles 331
Exercise 8I 333
215
215
by a first order difference equation 215

Exercise 6A 217
The relationship between arithmetic sequences and
first order difference equations 218
Exercise 6B 220
The relationship between geometric sequences and
first order difference equations 221
Exercise 6C 222
Setting up first order difference equations to
represent practical situations 223
Exercise 6D 227
Graphical representation of a sequence defined by a
first order difference equation 228
Exercise 6E 231
Interpretation of the graph of first order difference
equations 232
Exercise 6F 234
Fibonacci sequences as second order difference
equations 237
Exercise 6G 239
Contents
253
Chapter 8
6A Generating the terms of a sequence defined
6B
253
7A Properties of angles, triangles and polygons
Trigonometry
Difference equations
251
Chapter 7
Chapter 6
Introduction
Summary 242
Chapter review 244
ICT activities 247
Answers 248
Summary 336
Chapter review 338
ICT activities 343
Answers 344
307
11D Applications
Chapter 9
Exercise 11D
Applications of geometry and

trigonometry 347
Introduction 347
347
Exercise 9A 350
9B Angles of elevation and depression 352
Exercise 9B 354
9C Bearings 356
Exercise 9C 360
9D Navigation and specification of locations 361
Exercise 9D 366
9E Triangulation cosine and sine rules 368
Exercise 9E 372
9F Triangulation similarity 375
Exercise 9F 376
9G Contour maps 378
Exercise 9G 382
9A Angles
Based on Chapters 14, 1011
Loans and investments
399
Chapter 10
Construction and interpretation of

graphs 401
10A Constructing and interpreting straight-line
10B
10C
10D
10E
Summary 427
Chapter review 428
ICT activities 432
Answers 433
414
475
Introduction to growth and decay in

business 475
12A Simple interest 476
Exercise 12A 479
12B Bonds, debentures and term
deposits 480
Exercise 12B 482
12C Compound interest 483
Exercise 12C 488
Introduction to annuities 490
12D Reducing balance loans the annuities
formula 491
Exercise 12D 493
12E Reducing balance loans further
calculations 495
Exercise 12E 505
12F Hire-purchase 508
Exercise 12F 510
12G Reducing balance and flat rate loan
comparisons 512
Exercise 12G 514
12H Effective rate of interest 516
Exercise 12H 517
12I Perpetuities 518
Exercise 12I 520
12J Annuity investments 521
Exercise 12J 526
Summary 529
Chapter review 532
ICT activities 537
Answers 538
Chapter 13
Financial transactions and asset

value 541
Chapter 11
13A Bank accounts
Linear inequations and linear

programming 439
439
Exercise 11A 441
11B Simultaneous linear inequations
Exercise 11B 444
11C Linear programming 445
Exercise 11C 451
473
Chapter 12
ExAm PrACtICE 3
graphs 401
Exercise 10A 407
Line segments and step functions 409
Exercise 10B 411
Simultaneous equations and break-even point
Exercise 10C 417
Interpreting non-linear graphs 418
Exercise 10D 420
Constructing non-linear relations and
graphs 422
Exercise 10E 424
Summary 462
Chapter review 463
ICT activities 467
Answers 468
ExAm PrACtICE 4
Summary 385
Chapter review 387
ICT activities 394
Answers 395
Based on Chapters 14, 79
454
459
11A Linear inequations
442
541
Exercise 13A 545
13B Financial computations 548
Exercise 13B 552
Depreciation 554
13C Flat rate (straight line) depreciation 555
Exercise 13C 557
13D Reducing balance depreciation 558
Exercise 13D 561
Contents
vii
13E Unit cost depreciation
563
15D Network flow
647
Exercise 15D 652
15E Assignment problems and bipartite graphs
Exercise 15E 659
Exercise 13E 564

13F Inflation 566
Exercise 13F 568
Summary 569
Chapter review 571
ICT activities 575
Answers 576
Based on Chapters 14, 14 and 15
579
Undirected graphs and networks
581
581
Exercise 14A 585

14B Planar graphs and Eulers formula
Exercise 14B 591
14C Paths and circuits 592
Exercise 14C 596
14D Trees and their applications 599
Exercise 14D 605
587
Summary 609
Chapter review 611
ICT activities 616
Answers 617
Directed graphs and networks
683
16A Matrix representation
16C
16D
16F
621
networks 621
Exercise 15A 624
15B Critical path analysis 626
Exercise 15B 633
15C Critical path analysis with backward scanning and
crashing 634
Exercise 15C 643
683
687
16B Addition, subtraction and scalar operations with
16E
15A Reachability and dominance in directed
Contents
Matrices
Exercise 16A
Chapter 15
viii
681
Chapter 16
Chapter 14
14A Basic concepts of a network
Summary 663
Chapter review 665
ICT activities 673
Answers 674
ExAm PrACtICE 6
ExAm PrACtICE 5
Based on Chapters 14, 12 and 13
654
matrices 688
Exercise 16B 694
Multiplying matrices 696
Exercise 16C 701
Multiplicative inverse and solving matrix
equations 704
Exercise 16D 707
Application of matrices to simultaneous
equations 709
Exercise 16E 712
Transition matrices 715
Exercise 16F 721
Summary 726
Chapter review 728
ICT activities 733
Answers 734
ExAm PrACtICE 7
Based on Chapters 14 and 16

Exam practice answers
Index
745
743
739
Introduction
Maths Quest 12 Further Mathematics Fourth edition is specifically designed for the VCE Further
Mathematics course and based on the award-winning Maths Quest series. The suite of resources for this
title include:
a student textbook with accompanying eBookPLUS
a TI-Nspire CAS calculator companion
a Casio ClassPAD calculator companion
a Solutions Manual
Flexi-saver versions of all print products
teacher support material available on the eGuidePLUS.
Student textbook
studyON icons provide links to Concept screens, See mores and Do mores for online study, revision and
exam practice.
Full colour is used throughout to produce clearer graphs and headings, to provide bright, stimulating
photos and to make navigation through the text easier.
Clear, concise theory sections contain worked examples and highlighted important text and remember
boxes.
Icons appear for the eBookPLUS to indicate that interactivities and eLessons are available online to help
with the teaching and learning of particular concepts.
Worked examples in a ThinkWrite format provide clear explanation of key steps and suggest
presentation of solutions. Many worked examples have eBookPLUS icons to indicate that a Tutorial is
available to elucidate the concepts being explained. Worked examples also have calculator icons that
indicate support in the Calculator Companion books, which contain comprehensive step-by-step CAS
calculator instructions, fully integrated into the examples, for the TI-Nspire CAS and Casio ClassPad
calculators.
Exercises contain many carefully graded skills and application problems, including multiple choice
questions. Cross-references to relevant worked examples appear with the first matching question
throughout the exercises.
A selection of questions are tagged as technology-free to indicate to students that they should avoid
using their calculators or other technologies to assist them in finding a solution.
Exam practice sections contain exam-style questions, including time and mark allocations for each
question. Fully worked solutions are available on the eBookPLUS for students.
Each chapter concludes with a summary and chapter review exercise containing examination-style
questions (multiple choice, short answer and extended response), which help consolidate students learning
of new concepts. Also included are questions from past VCE exams along with relevant exam tips.
Student website eBookPLUS

The accompanying eBookPLUS contains the entire student textbook in HTML plus additional exercises.
Students may use the eBookPLUS on laptops, tablets, school or home computers, and cut and paste
material for revision, assignments or the creation of notes for exams.
Career profiles and History of mathematics place mathematical concepts in context.
Investigations, often suggesting the use of technology, provide further discovery learning opportunities.
WorkSHEET icons link to editable Word documents, and may be completed on screen or printed and
completed by hand.
SkillSHEET icons link to printable pages designed to help students revise required concepts, and contain
additional examples and problems.
Interactivity icons link to dynamic animations, which help students to understand difficult concepts.
Introduction
ix
eLesson icons link to videos or animations designed to elucidate concepts in ways that are more than
what the teacher can achieve in the classroom.
Tutorial icons link to one-way engagement activities which explain the worked examples in detail for
students to view at home or in the classroom.
Test Yourself tests are also available. Answers are provided for students to receive instant feedback.
teacher website eGuidePLUS

The accompanying eGuidePLUS contains everything in the eBookPLUS and more. Two tests per
chapter, fully worked solutions to WorkSHEETs, the work program and other curriculum advice in
editable Word format are provided. Maths Quest is a rich collection of teaching and learning resources
within one package.
Maths Quest 12 Further Mathematics provides ample NEW material, such as application tasks, analysis
tasks and semester exams, from which teachers may set school-assessed coursework (SAC), as well as
additional investigations, worksheets and technology files.
Introduction
About eBookPLUS
Next generation teaching and learning
This book features eBookPLUS:
an electronic version of the
entire textbook and supporting
multimedia resources. It is
available for you online at the
JacarandaPLUS website
( www.jacplus.com.au ).
Using the JacarandaPLUS

website
To access your eBookPLUS
resources, simply log on to
www.jacplus.com.au using your
existing JacarandaPLUS login and enter the registration
code. If you are new to JacarandaPLUS, follow the three
easy steps below.
Step 1. Create a user account
The first time you use the JacarandaPLUS system, you will
need to create a user account. Go to the JacarandaPLUS
home page ( www.jacplus.com.au ), click on the button
to create a new account and follow the instructions on
screen. You can then use your nominated email address
and password to log in to the JacarandaPLUS system.
Step 2. Enter your registration code
Once you have logged in, enter your unique registration
code for this book, which is printed on the inside front
cover of your textbook. The title of your textbook will
appear in your bookshelf. Click on the link to open your
eBookPLUS.
Step 3. View or download eBookPLUS
resources
Your eBookPLUS and supporting resources are provided
in a chapter-by-chapter format. Simply select the desired
chapter from the drop-down list. Your eBookPLUS contains
the entire textbooks content in easy-to-use HTML. The
student resources panel contains supporting multimedia
resources for each chapter.
Using eBookPLUS references

eBookPLUS logos are used throughout
the printed books to inform you that a
multimedia resource is available for the
content you are studying.
Searchlight IDs (e.g. INT-0001) give
you instant access to multimedia
resources. Once you are logged in,
simply enter the searchlight ID for that
resource and it will open immediately.
Minimum requirements
JacarandaPLUS requires you to use a supported
internet browser and version, otherwise you will
not be able to access your resources or view all
features and upgrades. Please view the complete
list of JacPLUS minimum system requirements
at http://jacplus.desk.com/customer/portal/
articles/463717.
Troubleshooting
Go to the JacarandaPLUS help page at
www.jacplus.com.au/jsp/help.jsp.
Contact John Wiley & Sons Australia, Ltd.
Email: support@jacplus.com.au
Phone: 1800 JAC PLUS (1800 522 7587)
Once you have created your account, you can use the same
email address and password in the future to register any
JacarandaPLUS titles you own.
About eBookPLUS
5_61_17866_MQ12_FM_4E_Prelims.indd 11
xi
8/05/13 1:36 PM
Acknowledgements
The authors and publisher would like to thank the following copyright holders, organisations and
individuals for their assistance and for permission to reproduce copyright material in this book.
Images
Banana Stock: 29, 63 Brand X Pictures: 724 Corbis Royalty Free: 73, 209, 417, 453 Creatas
Images: 412 Design Pics Inc.: 223, 630 Digital Stock: 241, 301, 369, 373; 607, 714/Corbis
Corporation Digital Vision: 132, 176, 269, 276, 351, 454, 463, 503, 528; 228 (top)/Stephen Frink; 647/
Sunset Avenue Productions EyeWire Images: 592 Fancy: 494 Getty Images: 715/Science Photo
Library Image Source: 661, 700 Image 100: 141, 536 iStockphoto: 12/ DOUGBERRY; 25/
Andrey Popov; 113/ Anne Clark; 154/ Koray ISIK; 188/ Irina Behr; 730/ THEPALMER
John Foxx Images: 237 (top right) John Wiley & Sons Australia: 24, 174, 550/Photo by Renee Bryon;
145, 476, 511 (centre), 517, 556, 565, 582/Taken by Kari-Ann Tapp; 294 (bottom); 688/Jo Patterson
MAPgraphics Pty Ltd, Brisbane: 378 Newspix: 409/Glenn Miller Peter Storer: 237 (bottom right)
Photodisc: 17, 118, 153, 177, 186 (bottom right), 189, 197 (bottom), 201, 202, 225, 228 (bottom),
237 (centre right), 262, 264 (top), 267, 271, 275, 290, 295, 322, 364, 374, 384, 406, 410, 423, 425,
426, 445, 459 (bottom), 480, 483, 506, 511 (top), 533, 559, 634, 637, 644, 655, 671 (centre), 671 (left,
right), 702 (left, right), 711, 723 Pixland: 421 PureStock: 237 (top left) Radius Images: 95 (right)
Rubberball Productions: 41 Shutterstock: 5/ Darren Baker; 14/ Joyce Marrero; 28/ Attl Tibor;
31/ Tyler Olson; 37/ Subbotina Anna; 38/ thieury; 39/ mocagrande; 48/ Dimon; 50/ Andresr;
62/ AISPIX by Image Source; 64/ Jan Kratochvila; 71/ wavebreakmedia ltd; 77/ Neale Cousland;
80/ Serhiy Kobyakov; 81/ iodrakon; 86/ Dmitriy Shironosov; 87/ Ferenc Szelepcsenyi;
95 (centre)/ Blend Images; 95 (left)/ Monkey Business Images; 101/ Serhiy Kobyakov; 106 (top)/
R-photos; 106 (bottom)/ Alexander Raths; 124/ Iraidka; 133/ Excellent backgrounds; 137/
Richard Peterson; 144/ Nikola Bilic; 155/ CyberEak; 157/ Irina Fischer; 161/ Losevsky Pavel;
162/ joyfull; 178/ Margo Harrison; 182/ Pshenichka; 190/ Fotokostic; 197 (top)/ mangostock;
210/ max blain; 227/ auremar; 246/ Stephen Aaron Rees; 264 (bottom)/ Swapan; 278/ Monkey
Business Images; 294 (top left)/ rook76; 316/ dani92026; 327/ perspectivestock; 339/ Valeria73;
368/ Jerry Zitterman; 391/ Wiktor Bubniak; 392/ Tischenko Irina; 393/ Anna Omelchenko;
429/ Valeriy Lebedev; 430/ Mayovskyy Andrew; 431/ Alistair Rennie; 456/ Mikhail Sergunin;
459 (top)/ Serhiy Shullye; 505/ Daniel Korzeniewski; 508/ CLM; 511 (bottom)/cobalt88; 526/
Yuri Arcurs; 527/ wavebreakmedia ltd; 543/ Tyler Olson; 549/ Gina Sanders; 562/ Adrian
Matthiassen; 573/ Ritu Manoj Jethani; 614/ Flashon Studio; 625/ muzsy; 672/ J. Helgason;
695/ Eric Issele; 696/ Neale Cousland; 703 (top)/ testing; 703 (bottom)/ Robert Davies; 720/
Aija Lehtonen Stockbyte: 3, 186 (top left, bottom left, centre left, centre, centre right, top right,
lower right), 237 (bottom left) Viewfinder Australia Photo Library: 60
text
Australian Bureau of Statistics: 9, 10/ABS 2010, Year book Australia 200910, cat. no. 1301.0; 11/
Participation in Sport and Physical Activities, Australia, 200506. Cat No. 4177.0
Every effort has been made to trace the ownership of copyright material. Information that will enable the
publisher to rectify any error or omission in subsequent editions will be welcome. In such cases, please
contact the Permissions Section of John Wiley & Sons Australia, Ltd.
xii
Acknowledgements
ChapTer 1
Univariate data
diGiTal doC
doc-9399
10 Quick Questions
ChapTer ConTenTS
1a
1B
1C
1d
1e
1F
1G
1h
1i
1J
Types of data
Stem plots
Dot plots, frequency histograms and bar charts
Describing the shape of stem plots and histograms
The median, the interquartile range, the range and the mode
Boxplots
The mean
Standard deviation
The 689599.7% rule and z-scores
Populations and simple random samples
1a
Types of data
Univariate data are data that contain one variable. That is, the information deals with only
one quantity that changes. Therefore, the number of cars sold by a car salesman during one week
is an example of univariate data. Sets of data that contain two variables are called bivariate data and
those that contain more than two variables are called multivariate data. You will learn more about
bivariate data in chapter 2.
Data can be numerical, categorical, discrete or continuous. The methods we use to display data
depend on the type of information we are dealing with.
numerical and categorical data

Examples of numerical data are:
1. the heights of a group of teenagers
2. the marks for a maths test
3. the number of universities in a country
4. ages
5. salaries.
As the name suggests, numerical data involve quantities which are, broadly speaking, measurable
or countable.
Examples of categorical data are:
1. genders
2. AFL football teams
3. religions
4. finishing positions in the Melbourne Cup
5. municipalities
6. ratings of 15 to indicate preferences for 5 different cars
7. age groups, for example 09, 1019, 2029
8. hair colours.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with classification
of data.
ChapTer 1 Univariate data
Such categorical data, as the name suggests, have categories like masculine, feminine and neuter
for gender, or Christian, Islamic, Buddhist and so on for religious denomination, or 1st, 2nd, 3rd for
finishing position in the Melbourne Cup.
Note: Some numbers may look like numerical data, but are actually names or titles (for example,
ratings of 1 to 5 given to different samples of cake This ones a 4; the numbers on netball players
uniforms shes number 7). These titles are not countable; they place the subject in a category
(with a name), and so they are categorical.
discrete and continuous data

Data are said to be discrete when a variable can take only certain fixed values. For example, if
we counted the number of children per household in a particular suburb, the data obtained would
always be whole numbers starting from zero. A value in between, such as 2.5, would clearly not
be possible.
Other examples of variables that produce discrete data are the number of crayfish caught in a
fishermans pots each day and the number of people that attend a restaurant each day. If objects can
be counted, then the data are discrete.
Continuous data are obtained when a variable takes any value between two values. If the heights
of students in a school were obtained, then the data could consist of any values between the smallest
and largest heights. The values recorded would be restricted only by the precision of the measuring
instrument.
Other examples of variables that produce continuous data are weight, length and the time to complete
a certain task. If variables can be measured, then the data are continuous.
exercise 1a
Types of data
1 Write whether each of the following represents numerical or categorical data.

a The heights, in centimetres, of a group of children
b The diameters, in millimetres, of a collection of ball-bearings
c The numbers of visitors to an exibit each day
d The modes of transport that students in Year 12 take to school
e The 10 most-watched television programs in a week
f The occupations of a group of 30-year-olds
g The numbers of subjects offered to VCE students at various schools
h Life expectancies
i Species of fish
j Blood groups
k Years of birth
l Countries of birth
m Tax brackets
2 For each set of numerical data identified in question 1 above, state whether the data are discrete or
continuous.
3 mC An example of a numerical variable is:
a
B
C
d
e
attitude to 4-yearly elections (for or against)

year level of students
the total attendance at Carlton football matches
position in a queue at the pie stall
television channel numbers shown on a dial
4 mC The weight of each truck-load of woodchips delivered to the wharf during a one-month period
diGiTal doC
doc-9400
WorkSHEET 1.1
was recorded. This is an example of:

a categorical and discrete data
B discrete data
C continuous and numerical data
d continuous and categorical data
e numerical and discrete data
Maths Quest 12 Further Mathematics
1B
Stem plots
A stem-and-leaf plot, or stem plot for short, is a way of displaying a set

of data. It is best suited to data which contain up to about 50observations
(or records).
The stem plot below shows the ages of people attending an advanced
computer class.
The ages of the members of the class are 16, 22, 22, 23, 30, 32, 34, 36,
42, 43, 46, 47, 53, 57 and 61.
A stem plot is constructed by splitting the numerals of a record into
two parts the stem, which in this case is the first digit, and the leaf,
which is always the last digit.
Stem
1
2
3
4
5
6
Leaf
6
2 2 3
0 2 4 6
2 3 6 7
3 7
1
Key: 2|2 = 22 years old
Worked example 1
The number of cars sold in a week at a large car dealership over a 20-week period is given below.
16
19
12
11
8
6
7
15
26
32
32
18
15
43
51
31
29
23
45
23
Construct a stem plot to display the number of cars sold in a week at the dealership.
Think
WriTe
In this example the observations are one- or

two-digit numbers and so the stems will be the
digits referring to the tens, and the leaves will
be the digits referring to the units.
Work out the lowest and highest numbers in
the data in order to determine what the stems
will be.
Lowest number = 6
Highest number = 51
Use stems from 0 to 5.
Before we construct an ordered stem plot,

construct an unordered stem plot by listing the
leaf digits in the order they appear in the data.
Stem
0
1
2
3
4
5
Now rearrange the leaf digits in numerical

order to create an ordered stem plot.
Include a key so that the data can be
understood by anyone viewing the stem plot.
Stem Leaf
0 6 7 8
1 1 2 5 5 6 8 9
2 3 3 6 9
3 1 2 2
4 3 5
5 1
Key: 2|3 = 23 cars
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Leaf
8 7 6
6 2 5 9 1 5 8
6 9 3 3
2 2 1
5 3
1
Worked example 2
The masses (in kilograms) of the members of an Under-17 football squad are given below.
70.3
72.4
68.3
65.1
74.1
69.7
72.9
75.3
71.3
66.9
75.6
68.3
68.6
69.7
70.5
69.6
66.2
72.4
70.8
71.2
71.8
Display the data in a stem plot.

Think
WriTe
In this case the observations contain 3 digits. The

last digit always becomes the leaf and so in this case
the digit referring to the tenths becomes the leaf and
the two preceding digits become the stem.
Work out the lowest and highest numbers in the
data in order to determine what the stems will be.
Lowest number = 65.1

Highest number = 75.6
Use stems from 65 to 75.
Construct an unordered stem plot. Note that the

decimal points are omitted since we are aiming
to present a quick visual summary of data.
Stem
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
Construct an ordered stem plot. Provide a key.
Leaf
1
9 2
6
6
3
2
9
3
7
8
3
4
3
7
5
8
4
1
3 6
Stem Leaf
65 1
66 29
67
68 3 3 6
69 6 7 7
70 3 5 8
71 2 3 8
72 4 4 9
73
74 1
75 3 6
Key: 74|1 = 74.1 kg
Sometimes data which are very bunched make it difficult to get a clear idea about the data variation. To
overcome the problem, we can split the stems. Stems can be split into halves or fifths.
Worked example 3
A set of golf scores for a group of professional golfers trialling a new 18-hole golf course is shown
on the following stem plot.
Stem Leaf
6 1 6 6 7 8 9 9 9
7 0 1 1 2 2 3 7
Key: 6|1 = 61
Produce another stem plot for these data by splitting the stems into:
a halves
b fifths.
4
Think
WriTe
a By splitting the stem 6 into halves, any leaf
a Stem
digits in the range 04 appear next to the 6, and

any leaf digits in the range 59 appear next to
the 6*. Likewise for the stem 7.
b Alternatively, to split the stems into fifths,
b Stem
each stem would appear 5 times. Any 0s or

1s are recorded next to the first 6. Any 2s or
3s are recorded next to the second 6. Any 4s
or 5s are recorded next to the third6. Any 6s
or 7s are recorded next to the fourth 6 and,
finally, any 8s or 9s are recorded next to the
fifth 6.
This process would be repeated for those
observations with a stem of 7.
exercise 1B
Leaf
6* 1
6* 6 6 7 8 9 9 9
7* 0 1 1 2 2 3
7* 7
Key: 6|1 = 61
Leaf
6 1
6
6
6 6 6 7
6 8 9 9 9
7 0 1 1
7 2 2 3
7
7 7
7
Key: 6|1 = 61
Stem plots
1 In each of the following, write down all the pieces of data shown on the stem plot.
a Stem Leaf
b Stem Leaf
0*
0*
1*
1*
2*
2*
3*
c Stem
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 2
5 8
2 3 3
6 6 7
1 3 4
5 5 6 7
0 2
Leaf
1 2
5 8
2 3 3
6 6 7
1 3 4
5 5 6 7
e Stem Leaf
0*
0*
1*
1*
2*
2*
1
5
0
6
1
5
4
8
2
9 9
1
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
3
0
1
5
2
1
3
5 9
2 7
d Stem Leaf
5
5
5
5
5
0
3
4
6
9
1
3
5 5
6 7
The key used for each

stem plot is 3|2 = 32.
2 We1 The money (to the nearest dollar) earned each week
by a busker over an 18-week period is shown below. Construct

a stem plot for the buskers weekly earnings. What can you
say about the buskers earnings?
5
19 11 27 23 35 18 42 29
31 52 43 37 41 39 45 32 36
3 The ages of those attending an embroidery class are given below. Construct a stem plot for these data
and draw a conclusion from it.

39
63
68
49
51
52
57
61
63
58
51
59
37
49
Stem
0
1
2
3
4
4 mC The observations shown on the stem plot at right are:

a
B
C
d
e
42
53
4 10 27 28 29 31 34 36 41
14 10 27 28 29 29 31 34 36 41 41
4 22 27 28 29 29 30 31 34 36 41 41
14 22 27 28 29 30 30 31 34 36 41 41
4 2 27 28 29 29 30 31 34 36 41
Leaf
4
2 7 8 9 9
0 1 4 6
1 1
Key: 2|5 = 25
5 The ages of the mothers of a class of children attending an inner-city kindergarten are given below.
Construct a stem plot for these data. Based on your display, comment on the statement Parents of
kindergarten children are very young.
32
28
37
30
29
33
19
34
29
28
32
35
25
35
38
29
39
33
32
30
6 The number of hit outs made by each of the principal ruckmen in each of the AFL teams for Round11
is recorded below. Construct a stem plot to display these data. Which teams had the three highest
scoring ruckmen?
Number of
hit outs
Team
Collingwood
Bulldogs
Kangaroos
Port Adelaide
Geelong
Sydney
Melbourne
Brisbane
Number of
hit outs
Team
19
41
29
24
21
31
40
25
32
34
31
26
29
22
33
28
Adelaide
St Kilda
Essendon
Carlton
West Coast
Fremantle
Hawthorn
Richmond
7 We2 The heights of members of a squad of basketballers are given below in metres. Construct a stem
plot for these data.

1.96
1.95
1.85
2.03
2.03
2.09
2.21
2.05
2.17
2.01
1.89
1.96
1.99
1.97
1.87
1.91
8 The 2008 median house price of a number of Melbourne suburbs is given below. Construct a stem plot
for these data and comment on it.

Suburb
Ashburton
Ashwood
Blackburn
Bulleen
Burwood
Caulfield East
Chadstone
Chettenham
Clayton
Cobury
Price
( $1000)
670
600
670
628
652
653
608
576
525
526
Suburb
Collingwood
Dancaster
Essendon
Highett
Huntingdale
Ivanhoe
Moonee Ponds
Newport
Oakleigh
Preston
Price
( $1000)
583
620
670
600
517
633
638
536
548
515
9 We3 The data below give the head circumference (to the nearest cm) of 16 four-year-old girls.
48
50
49
50
47
53
52
52
51
43
50
47
49
49
48
50
Construct a stem plot for head circumference, using:

a the stems 4 and 5
b the stems 4 and 5 split into halves
c the stems 4 and 5 split into fifths.
10 A random sample of 20 screws is taken and the length of each is recorded to the nearest millimetre below.
23 15 18 17 17 19 22
19 20 16 20 21 19 23
17 19 21 23 20 21
Construct a stem plot for screw length using:
a the stems 1 and 2
b the stems 1 and 2 split into halves
c the stems 1 and 2 split into fifths.
Use your plots to help you comment on the screw lengths.
dot plots, frequency histograms

andbar charts
1C
Units: 3 & 4
Dot plots, frequency histograms and bar charts display data in graphical form.
AOS: DA
dot plots
In picture graphs, a single picture represents each data value. Similarly, in dot plots, a single dot
represents each data value. Dot plots are used to display discrete data where values are not spread out
very much. They are also used to display categorical data.
Dot plots have a scaled horizontal axis and each data value is indicated by a dot above this scale. The
end result is a set of vertical lines of evenly-spaced dots.
10
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
12
Score
Worked example 4
The number of hours per week spent on art by 18 students is given below.
4
4
0
1
3
3
1
2
3
5
4
3
2
2
2
1
3
0
Units: 3 & 4
Display the data as a dot plot.
Represent each score by a dot on the scale.
Determine the lowest and highest scores and

then draw a suitable scale.
AOS: DA
draW
Think
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Hours/week
Frequency histograms
A histogram is a useful way of displaying large data sets (say, over 50 observations). The vertical axis
on the histogram displays the frequency and the horizontal axis displays class intervals of the variable
(for example, height or income).
When data are given in raw form that is, just as a list of figures in no particular order it is
helpful to first construct a frequency table.
Worked example 5
The data below show the distribution of masses (in kilograms) of 60 students in Year 7 at
Northwood Secondary College. Construct a frequency histogram to display the data more
clearly.
45.8
43.5
39.8
54.6
45.9
57.2
42.5
58.7
48.2
38.7
42.9
58.7
48.3
48.5
59.2
39.7
48.4
49.6
53.2
43.1
34.2
56.9
48.2
56.2
Think
1
52.4
43.8
36.2
43.0
52.3
58.3
47.2
56.3
51.8
52.4
46.7
62.3
45.7
54.3
58.7
46.3
56.8
48.6
53.1
52.4
56.3
53.7
52.1
61.2
60.2
58.7
54.3
48.2
44.2
57.6
51.3
58.3
WriTe/draW
First construct a frequency table. The

lowest data value is 34.2 and the highest is
62.3. Divide the data into class intervals.
If we started the first class interval at, say,
30 kg and ended the last class interval at
65 kg, we would have a range of 35. If
each interval was 5 kg, we would then have
7 intervals which is a reasonable number of
class intervals.
While there are no set rules about how
many intervals there should be, somewhere
between about 5 and 15 class intervals is
usual. So, in this example, we would have
class intervals of 3034.9 kg, 3539.9 kg,
4044.9 kg and so on. Complete a tally
column using one mark for each value in
the appropriate interval. Add up the tally
marks and write them in the frequency
column.
Check that the frequency column totals 60.

The data are in a much clearer form now.
A histogram can be constructed.
Class interval
3034.9
3539.9
4044.9
4549.9
5054.9
5559.9
6064.9
Tally
|
||||
||||
||||
||||
||||
|||
||
|||| |||| |
|||| ||||
|||| ||||
Total
Frequency
45.7
53.8
45.7
51.9
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
Frequency
1
4
7
16
15
14
3
60
30 3540 45 50 55 60 65
Mass (kg)
Worked example 6
The marks out of 20 received by 30 students for a book-review assignment are given in the
frequency table below.
Mark
Frequency
12
2
13
7
14
6
15
5
16
4
17
2
18
3
Display these data on a histogram.

In this case we are dealing with integer values
(discrete data). Since the horizontal axis should
show a class interval, we extend the base of each
of the columns on the histogram halfway either
side of each score.
draW
Frequency
Think
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
12 1314 15 16 17 18 19 20
Mark out of 20
19
0
20
1
Bar charts
2 4 6 8 10 12
Number of students
25
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
20
Topic:
15
Concept:
10
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
5
0 1 2 3 4 5
Number of children in family
In bar charts, the frequency is graphed

against a variable as shown in both figures above.
The variable may or may not be numerical. However, if it
is, the variable should represent discrete data because the scale
is broken by the gaps between the bars. The numerical values
are generally close together and have little spread, for example,
consecutive years.
The bar chart at right represents the data presented in
Worked example 6. It could also have been drawn with
vertical bars (columns).
Mark out of 20
Dog
Cat
Rabbit
Snake
Bird
Goldfish
Number of families
Student pet preferences
A bar chart is similar to a histogram. However, it consists of bars of equal width separated by small,
equal spaces and may be arranged either horizontally or vertically. Bar charts are often used to display
categorical data.
Do more
Interact
with bar charts.
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Frequency or number of students
Segmented bar charts

A segmented (divided) bar chart is a single bar which is used to represent all the data being studied.
It is divided into segments, each segment representing a particular group of the data. Generally, the
information is presented as percentages and so the total bar length represents 100% of the data.
Consider the following table, showing fatal road accidents in Australia.
Year
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
NSW
483
471
469
453
405
376
Year
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
NSW
539
522
518
500
435
397
Road traffic accidents involving fatalities

Accidents involving fatalities
Vic.
Qld
SA
WA
Tas.
294
284
136
155
39
313
288
128
162
52
316
294
127
151
48
309
314
104
183
42
289
338
107
214
39
278
293
87
189
38
Persons killed
Vic.
Qld
SA
WA
Tas.
330
310
157
180
41
343
311
139
178
58
348
328
148
163
50
337
336
117
202
54
332
360
124
235
45
303
327
99
209
40
NT
44
34
51
39
49
67
ACT
10
10
25
12
14
14
Aust.
1445
1458
1481
1456
1453
1342
NT
53
35
55
42
58
75
ACT
11
10
26
13
14
14
Aust.
1621
1596
1636
1601
1603
1464
diGiTal doC
doc-9401
Spreadsheet
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch
a video about
segmented graphs.
Source: Australian Bureau of Statistics 2010, Year book Australia 200910, cat. no. 1301.0, ABS, Canberra,
table 24.20, p. 638.
It is appropriate to represent the number of accidents involving fatalities in all states and territories
during 2008 as a segmented bar chart.
First, we convert each states proportion of accidents out of the total to a percentage.
diGiTal doC
doc-9402
SkillSHEET1.1
Converting a
fraction to a
percentage
State
Number of accidents
Percentage
NSW
376
376 1342 100% = 28.0%
Vic.
278
278 1342 100% = 20.7%
Qld
293
293 1342 100% = 21.8%
SA
87
87 1342 100% = 6.5%
WA
189
189 1342 100% = 14.1%
Tas.
38
38 1342 100% = 2.8%
NT
67
67 1342 100% = 5.0%
ACT
14
14 1342 100% = 1.0%
The segmented bar chart is drawn to scale. An appropriate scale would be constructed by drawing the
total bar 100 mm long, so that 1 mm represents 1%. That is, accidents in NSW would be represented by
a segment of 28 mm, those in Victoria by a segment of 20.7 mm and so on. Each segment is then labelled
directly, or a key may be used.
NSW 28%
Vic. 20.7%
QLD 21.8%
SA 6.5%
WA 14.1%
Tas. 2.8%
NT 5.0%
ACT 1.0%
dot plots, frequency histograms

and bar charts
exercise 1C
diGiTal doC
doc-9403
Spreadsheet
Frequency
histograms
1 We5
Construct a frequency table for each of the following sets of data.
a 4.3 4.5 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 5.5 5.6 5.2 3.6 2.5 4.3 2.5 3.7 4.5 6.3 1.3
b 11 13 15 15 16 18 20 21 22 21 18 19 20 16 18 20 16 10 23 24 25 27 28 30 35
28 27 26 29 30 31 24 28 29 20 30 32 33 29 30 31 33 34
c 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.0 1.3 0.4 0.3 0.9 0.6
2 Using the frequency tables from question 1, construct a histogram for each set of data.
3 Using a CAS calculator, construct a histogram for each of the sets of data given in question 1. Compare
this histogram with the one drawn for question 2.
4 We4 The data below represent the number of hours each week that 40 teenagers spent on household
chores. Display these data on a bar chart and a dot plot.

2 5 2 0 8 7 8 5 1 0 2 1 8 0 4 2 2 9 8 5
7 5 4 2 1 2 9 8 1 2 8 5 8 10 0 3 4 5 2 8
5 Using the information provided in the table below:
a calculate the proportion of residents who travelled in 2005 to each of the countries listed
b draw a segmented bar graph showing the major destinations of Australians travelling abroad in
2005.
Short-term resident departures by major destinations
New Zealand
United States of America
United Kingdom
Indonesia
China (excluding Special
Administrative Regions
(SARs))
10
2004
( 1000)
2005
( 1000)
2006
( 1000)
2007
( 1000)
2008
( 1000)
815.8
376.1
375.1
335.1
182.0
835.4
426.3
404.2
319.7
235.1
864.7
440.3
412.8
194.9
251.0
902.1
479.1
428.5
282.6
284.3
921.1
492.3
420.3
380.7
277.3
2004
( 1000)
2005
( 1000)
2006
( 1000)
2007
( 1000)
2008
( 1000)
188.2
175.4
159.0
152.6
202.7
196.9
188.5
185.7
288.0
202.4
210.9
196.3
374.4
200.3
221.5
206.5
404.1
236.2
217.8
213.1
144.4
159.8
168.0
181.3
191.0
Thailand
Fiji
Singapore
Hong Kong (SAR of
China)
Malaysia
Source: Australian Bureau of Statistics 2010, Year book Australia 200910, cat. no. 1301.0, ABS, Canberra,
table 23.12, p. 621.
6 Presented below is information about adult participation in sport and physical activities in 200506.
Draw a segmented bar graph to compare the participation of all persons from various age groups.
Comment on the statement, Only young people participate in sport and physical activities.
Participation in sport and physical activities(a) 200506
Males
Females
Persons
Age
group
(years)
Number
( 1000)
Participation
rate
(%)
Number
( 1000)
Participation
rate
(%)
Number
( 1000)
Participation
rate
(%)
1824
735.2
73.3
671.3
71.8
1406.4
72.6
2534
1054.5
76.3
1033.9
74.0
2088.3
75.1
3544
975.4
66.7
1035.9
69.1
2011.2
68.0
4554
871.8
63.5
923.4
65.7
1795.2
64.6
5564
670.1
60.4
716.3
64.6
1386.5
62.5
65 and
over
591.0
50.8
652.9
48.2
1243.9
49.4
64.6
5033.7
64.4
9931.5
64.5
Total
4898
(a) Relates
to persons aged 18 years and over who participated in sport or physical activity as a player during the
12 months prior to interview.
Source: Participation in Sport and Physical Activities, Australia, 200506 (4177.0). Viewed 10 October 2008
<http://abs.gov.au/Ausstats>
describing the shape of stem plots

and histograms
Symmetric distributions
The data shown in the histogram at right can be described as

symmetric.
There is a single peak and the data trail off on both sides of
this peak in roughly the same fashion.
Similarly in the stem plot at right, the distribution of the data
could be described as symmetric.
The single peak for these data occur at the stem 3. On
either side of the peak, the number of observationsreduces in
approximately matching fashion.
Frequency
1d
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Stem
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Leaf
7
2 3
2 4
0 2
4 7
2 7
1 3
5
3
8
8
7
6
9
9
8
9
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
11
Skewed distributions
Each of the histograms shown below are examples of skewed distributions.
The figure below left shows data which are negatively skewed. The data in this case peak to the right
and trail off to the left.
The figure below right shows positively skewed data. The data in this case peak to the left and trail off
to the right.
Negatively skewed distribution
Positively skewed distribution
Worked example 7
The ages of a group of people who were taking out

their first home loan is shown below.
Stem Leaf
1 9 9
2 1 2 4 6 7 8 8 9
3 0 1 1 2 3 4 7
4 1 3 5 6
5 2 3
6 7
Key: 1|9 = 19 years old
Describe the shape of the
distribution of these data.
Think
TUTorial
eles-1254
Worked example 7
WriTe
Check whether the distribution is symmetric

or skewed. The peak of the data occurs at the
stem 2. The data trail off as the stems increase in
value. This seems reasonable since most people
would take out a home loan early in life to give
themselves time to pay it off.
The data are positively skewed.
describing the shape of stem plots

and histograms
exercise 1d
1 We7 For each of the following stem plots, describe the shape of the distribution of the data.
a Stem Leaf
0 1 3
1 2 4 7
2 3 4 4 7 8
3 2 5 7 9 9 9 9
4 1 3 6 7
5 0 4
6 4 7
7 1
Key: 1| 2 = 12
12
b Stem Leaf
1 3
2 6
3 3 8
4 2 6 8 8 9
5 4 7 7 7 8 9 9
6 0 2 2 4 5
Key: 2|6 = 2.6
c Stem Leaf
2 3 5 5 6
3 0 2 2 3
4 2 2 4 5
5 0 3 3 5
6 2 4
7 5 9
8 2
9 7
10
Key: 10|4 = 104
7 8 9 9
4 6 6 7 8 8
6 6 6 7 9
6
d Stem Leaf
1*
1* 5
2* 1 4
2* 5 7 8 8 9
3* 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4
3* 5 5 5 6
4* 3 4
4*
Key: 2|4 = 24
e Stem Leaf
3
3 8 9
4 0 0 1 1 1
4 2 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 5 5 5
4 6 7
4 8
Key: 4|3 = 0.43
Stem Leaf
60 2 5 8
61 1 3 3 6 7 8 9
62 0 1 2 4 6 7 8 8 9
63 2 2 4 5 7 8
64 3 6 7
65 4 5 8
66 3 5
67 4
Key: 62|3 = 623
2 For each of the following histograms, describe the shape of the distribution of the data and comment
on the existence of any outliers.
Frequency
f
Frequency
Frequency
e
Frequency
c
Frequency
b
Frequency
3 mC The distribution of the data shown in this stem plot could
be described as:
a negatively skewed
B negatively skewed and symmetric
C positively skewed
d positively skewed and symmetric
e symmetric
Stem Leaf
0 1
0 2
0 4 4 5
0 6 6 6
0 8 8 8
1 0 0 0
1 2 2 2
1 4 4 5
1 6 7 7
1 8 9
Key: 1|8 = 18
7
8 9 9
1 1 1 1
3 3 3
5
Frequency
the histogram at right could be described as:

a negatively skewed
B negatively skewed and symmetric
C positively skewed
d positively skewed and symmetric
e symmetric
5 The average number of product enquiries per
day received by a group of small businesses
who advertised in the Yellow Pages telephone
directory is given at right. Describe the shape of the
Frequency
4 mC The distribution of the data shown in
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 111213 1415
Number of enquiries
13
6 The number of nights per month spent interstate by a
group of flight attendants is shown on the stem plot

at right. Describe the shape of distribution of these
data and explain what this tells us about the number of
nights per month spent interstate by this group of flight
attendants.
Stem
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Leaf
0 0 1
2 2 3
4 4 5
6 6 6
8 8 8
0 0 1
4 4
5 5
7
1
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
5 5 5 5
6 7
9
Key: 1|4 = 14 nights
7 The mass (to the nearest kilogram)
of each dog at a dog obedience

school is shown on the stem plot
below.
a Describe the shape of the
b What does this information
tell us about this group of
dogs?
Stem
0*
0*
1*
1*
2*
2*
Leaf
4
5 7 9
1 2 4 4
5 6 6 7 8 9
1 2 2 3
6 7
Key: |40 = 4 kg
8 The amount of pocket money (to the nearest 50 cents) received each week by students in a
Frequency
Grade 6 class is illustrated in the histogram below.

a Describe the shape of the distribution of these data.
b What conclusions can you reach about the amount of pocket money received weekly by this
group of students?
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
5.5 6 6.5 7 7.5 8 8.5 9 9.51010.5

Pocket money ($)
9 Statistics were collected over 3 AFL games on the number of goals kicked by forwards over 3 weeks.
This is displayed in the histogram below.

a Describe the shape of the histogram.
b Use the histogram to determine:
i the number of players who kicked 3 or more goals over the 3 weeks
ii the percentage of players who kicked between 2 and 6 goals over the 3 weeks.
Frequency
Number of goals kicked by

players over 3 weeks
diGiTal doC
doc-9404
WorkSHEET 1.2
14
5
4
3
2
1
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Number of goals
The median, the interquartile range,

the range and the mode
1e
After displaying data using a histogram or stem plot, we can make even more sense of the data by
calculating what are called summary statistics. Summary statistics are used because they give us an idea
about:
1. where the centre of the distribution is
2. how the distribution is spread out.
We will look first at four summary statistics the median, the interquartile range, the range and the
mode which require that the data be in ordered form before they can be calculated.
inTeraCTiViTY
int-0084
The median, the
interquartile range, the
range and the mode
Units: 3 & 4
The median
AOS: DA
The median is the midpoint of an ordered set of data. Half the data are less than or equal to the
median.
Consider the set of data: 2 5 6 8 11 12 15. These data are in ordered form (that is, from lowest to
highest). There are 7 observations. The median in this case is the middle or fourth score; that is, 8.
Consider the set of data: 1 3 5 6 7 8 8 9 10 12. These data are in ordered form also; however, in
this case there is an even number of scores. The median of this set lies halfway between the 5th score (7)
7+8
and the 6th score (8). So the median is 7.5. (Alternatively, median = 2 = 7.5.)
n + 1
th pos ition.
When there are n records in a set of ordered data, the median can be located at the
2
Checking this against our previous example, we have n = 10; that is, there were
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
10 + 1
10 observations in the set. The median was located at the 2 = 5.5th position; that is, halfway between
the 5th and the 6th terms.
A stem plot provides a quick way of locating a median since the data in a stem plot are already
ordered.
Worked example 8
Consider the stem plot below which contains 22 observations. What is the median?
Stem
2*
2*
3*
3*
4*
4*
Leaf
3 3
5 7 9
1 3 3 4 4
5 8 9 9
0 2 2
6 8 8 8 9
Think
1
Find the median position, where n = 22.
Key: 3|4 = 34
WriTe
n + 1
Median =
th position
2
22 + 1
=
th position
2
= 11.5th position
Find the 11th and 12th terms.
The median is halfway between the 11th and

12th terms.
11th term = 35
12th term = 38
Median = 36.5
15
The interquartile range

Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
We have seen that the median divides a set of data in half. Similarly, quartiles divide a set of data in
quarters. The symbols used to refer to these quartiles are Q1, Q2 and Q3.
The middle quartile, Q2, is the median.
The interquartile range IQR = Q3 Q1.
The interquartile range gives us the range of the middle 50% of values in a set of data.
There are four steps to locating Q1 and Q3.
Step 1. Write down the data in ordered form from lowest to highest.
Step 2. Locate the median; that is, locate Q2.
Step 3. Now consider just the lower half of the set of data. Find the middle score. This score is Q1.
Step 4. Now consider just the upper half of the set of data. Find the middle score. This score is Q3.
The four cases given below illustrate this method.
Case 1
Consider data containing the 6 observations: 3 6 10 12 15 21.
The data are already ordered. The median is 11.
Consider the lower half of the set, which is 3 6 10. The middle score is 6, so Q1 = 6.
Consider the upper half of the set, which is 12 15 21. The middle score is 15, so Q3 = 15.
Case 2
Consider a set of data containing the 7 observations: 4 9 11 13 17 23 30.
Consider the lower half of the set, which is 4 9 11. The middle score is 9, so Q1 = 9.
Consider the upper half of the set, which is 17 23 30. The middle score is 23, so Q3 = 23.
Case 3
Consider a set of data containing the 8 observations: 1 3 9 10 15 17 21 26.
The data are already ordered. The median is 12.5.
Consider the lower half of the set, which is 1 3 9 10. The middle score is 6, so Q1 = 6.
Consider the upper half of the set, which is 15 17 21 26. The middle score is 19, so Q3 = 19.
Case 4
Consider a set of data containing the 9 observations: 2 7 13 14 17 19 21 25 29.
Consider the lower half of the set, which is 2 7 13 14. The middle score is 10, so Q1 = 10.
Consider the upper half of the set, which is 19 21 25 29. The middle score is 23, so Q3 = 23.
Worked example 9
The ages of the patients who attended the casualty department of an

inner-suburban hospital on one particular afternoon are shown below.
14
60
33
3
62
19
27
21
81
42
23
59
19
2
25
17
5
17
73
58
69
TUTorial
eles-1255
Worked example 9
Find the interquartile range of these data.

Think
16
WriTe
Order the data.
2 3 5 14 17 17 19 19 21 23
25 27 33 42 58 59 60 62 69 73 81
Find the median.
The median is 25 since ten scores lie below it and

ten lie above it.
Find the middle score of the lower half of

the data.
For the scores 2 3 5 14 17 17 19 19 21 23,

the middle score is 17.
So, Q1 = 17.
Find the middle score of the upper half of

the data.
For the scores 27 33 42 58 59 60 62 69

73 81, the middle score is 59.5.
So, Q3 = 59.5.
Calculate the interquartile range.
IQR = Q3 Q1
= 59.5 17
= 42.5
A CAS or graphics calculator can be a fast way of locating quartiles and hence finding the value of the
interquartile range.
Worked example 10
Parents are often shocked at the amount of money their

children spend. The data below give the amount spent
(to the nearest whole dollar) by each child in a group that was
taken on an excursion to the Royal Melbourne Show.
15 12 17 23 21 19 16
11 17 18 23 24 25 21
20 37 17 25 22 21 19
Calculate the interquartile range for these data.
Think
WriTe
Enter the data into a calculator. (There is no

need to order it.) Use the calculator to generate
one-variable statistics. Copy down the values of
the first and third quartiles.
Q1 = 17 and Q3 = 23
Calculate the interquartile range.
So, IQR = Q3 Q1
= 23 17
=6
The range
The range of a set of data is the difference between the highest and lowest values in that set.
It is usually not too difficult to locate the highest and lowest values in a set of data. Only when there
is a very large number of observations might the job be made more difficult. In the previous worked
example, the minimum and maximum values were 11 and 37, respectively. The range, therefore, can be
calculated as:
Range = maxX minX
= 37 11
= 26.
While the range gives us some idea about the spread of the data, it is not very informative since it
gives us no idea of how the data are distributed between the highest and lowest values.
Now let us look at another measure of the centre of a set of data: the mode.
17
The mode
The mode is the score that occurs most often; that is, it is the score with the highest frequency. If there is
more than one score with the highest frequency, then all scores with that frequency are the modes.
The mode is a weak measure of the centre of data because it may be a value that is close to the
extremes of the data. If we consider the set of data in Worked example 8, the mode is 48 since it occurs
three times and hence is the score with the highest frequency. In Worked example 9 there are two modes,
17 and 19, because they equally occur most frequently.
The median, the interquartile range, the

range and the mode
exercise 1e
1 We8 Write the median, the range and the mode of the sets of data shown in the following stem plots.
The key for each stem plot is 3|4 = 34.
diGiTal doC
doc-9405
Spreadsheet
one-variable
statistics
a Stem Leaf
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
2
0
4
2
1
3
4
2
7
7
3
b Stem Leaf
5 7 9
3 6 8 8
8 9 9
8
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
2
4
6
8
0
3
5
7
d Stem Leaf
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
1
3
5
6
8
1
1
3
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 7
9
e Stem Leaf
1
6
8
0
2
4
6
9
0
2
4
6
8
0
3
5
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
9
0 1 1 1
2 3 3 3 3
5 5 5
7
2
1
0
2
3
4
3
4
5
3
1
2
6
5
5
c Stem Leaf
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
6
8
0
2
4
6
8
4
6
8
0
2
4
7
9
5
6
8
0
2
5
7
7
8 9 9
1 1 1 1
3 3 3
5
8
3 6 7 8 9
2 4 6 7 8 8 9
4 5 7 8
7
8
2 For each of the following sets of data, write the median and the range.
a 2 4 6 7 9
b 12 15 17 19 21
c 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
d 3 5 7 8 12 13 15 16
e 12 13 15 16 18 19 21 23 24 26
f 3 8 4 2 1 6 5
g 16 21 14 28 23 15 11 19 25
h 7 4 3 4 9 5 10 4 2 11
i 29 23 22 33 26 18 37 22 16
3a
We9 The number of cars that used the drive-in at a McBurger restaurant during each hour, from
7.00 am until 10.00 pm on a particular day, is shown below.
14 18 8 9 12 24 25 15 18 25 24 21 25 24 14
Find the interquartile range of this set of data.
b On the same day, the number of cars stopping during each hour that the nearby Kennys Fried
Chicken restaurant was open is shown below.
7 9 13 16 19 12 11 18 20 19 21 20 18 10 14
Find the interquartile range of these data.
c What do these values suggest about the two restaurants?
18
4 Write down a set of data for which n = 5, the median is 6 and the range is 7. Is this the only set of data
with these parameters?

5 Is it possible to have a set of data in which the:
a lower quartile equals the lowest score?
b IQR is zero?
Give an example of each.

6 mC The quartiles for a set of data are calculated and found to be Q1 = 13, Q2 = 18 and Q3 = 25. Which
of the following statements is true?

The interquartile range of the data is 5.
The median is 12.
The median is 19.
a
B
C
d
e
7 We10 For each of the following sets of data find the median, the interquartile range, the range and the
mode.
a 16
19
b 22
23
c 1.2
6.1
12
11
25
25
2.3
3.7
8
6
27
21
4.1
5.4
7
15
36
19
2.4
3.7
26
32
31
29
1.5
5.2
32
18
32
28
3.7
3.8
15
43
39
31
6.1
6.3
51
31
29
27
2.4
7.1
29
23
20
22
3.6
4.9
45
23
30
29
1.2
8 For each set of data shown on the stem plots, find the median, the interquartile range, the range and the
mode. Compare these values for both data sets.

a Stem Leaf
b Stem Leaf
2 3 5 5 6 7 8 9 9
1* 4
3 0 2 2 3 4 6 6 7 8 8
1*
4 2 2 4 5 6 6 6 7 9
2* 1 4
5 0 3 3 5 6
2* 5 7 8 8 9
6 2 4
3* 1 2 2 2 4 4 4 4
7 5 9
3* 5 5 5 6
8 2
4* 3 4
9 7
4*
10
Key: 2|1 = 21
11 4
Key: 4|2 = 42
2*|5 = 25
1F
Boxplots
The five number summary statistics that we looked at in the previous section can be illustrated very
neatly in a special diagram known as a boxplot (or box-and-whisker diagram). Thediagram is made up
of a box with straight lines (whiskers) extending from opposite sides of the box.
A boxplot displays the minimum and maximum values of the data together with the quartiles and is
drawn with a labelled scale. The length of the box is given by the interquartile range. A boxplot gives us
a very clear visual display of how the data are spread out.
Minimum
value
Whisker
Q1
Q2
Median
Box
Maximum
value
Q3
Whisker
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch a
video about how to
construct boxplots.
25%
of data
25%
of data
25%
of data
25%
of data
A boxplot
19
Boxplots can be drawn horizontally or vertically.
Horizontal boxplot
Vertical boxplot
Worked example 11
The boxplot at right shows the distribution of the part-time

weekly earnings of a group of Year 12 students. Write down
the range, the median and the interquartile range for
these data.
Think
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Part-time weekly earnings ($)
WriTe
Range = Maximum value Minimum value.

The minimum value is 20 and the maximum
value is 90.
Range = 90 20
= 70
The median is located at the bar inside the box.
Median = 50
The ends of the box are at 40 and 80.

IQR = Q3 Q1
Q1 = 40 and Q3 = 80
IQR = 80 40
= 40
Earlier, we noted three general types of shape for histograms and stem plots: symmetric, negatively
skewed and positively skewed. It is useful to compare the corresponding boxplots of distributions with
such shapes.
In the figures below, a symmetric distribution is represented in the histogram and in the boxplot. The
characteristics of this boxplot are that the whiskers are about the same length and the median is located
about halfway along the box.
Symmetric histogram
Symmetric boxplot
The figures below show a negatively skewed distribution. In such a distribution, the data peak to the
right on the histogram and trail off to the left.
In corresponding fashion on the boxplot, the bunching of the data to the right means that the left-hand
whisker is longer and the right-hand whisker is shorter; that is, the lower 25% of data are sparse and
spread out whereas the top 25% of data are bunched up.
The median occurs further towards the right end of the box.
Negatively skewed histogram

20
Negatively skewed boxplot
In the figures below, we have a positively skewed distribution. In such a distribution, the data peak to
the left on the histogram and trail off to the right.
In corresponding fashion on the boxplot, the bunching of the data to the left means that the left-hand
whisker is shorter and the right-hand whisker is longer; that is, the upper 25% of data are sparse and
spread out whereas the lower 25% of data are bunched up.
The median occurs further towards the left end of the box.
Positively skewed histogram
Positively skewed boxplot
Worked example 12
Explain whether or not the histogram and the boxplot shown below could represent the same data.
Think
WriTe
The histogram shows a distribution which is

positively skewed.
The boxplot shows a distribution which is
approximately symmetric.
The histogram and the boxplot could not represent the

same data since the histogram shows a distribution
that is positively skewed and the boxplot shows a
distribution that is approximately symmetric.
Worked example 13
The results (out of 20) of oral tests in a Year 12 Indonesian class are:
15
12
17
13
18
14
16
17
13
11
12
Display these data using a boxplot and discuss the shape obtained.
Think
1
Find the lowest and highest scores, Q1, the

median (Q2) and Q3 by first ordering the
data.
Using these five number summary

statistics, draw the boxplot.
TUTorial
eles-1256
Worked example 13
WriTe/draW
8 11 12 12 13 13 14 15 16 17 17 18
The median score is 13.5.
The lower half of the scores are
8 11 12 12 13 13.
So, Q1 = 12
The upper half of the scores are
14 15 16 17 17 18.
So, Q3 = 16.5
The lowest score is 8.
The highest score is 18.
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Results
3
Consider the spread of each quarter of the

data.
The scores are grouped around 12 and 13, as well as

around 17 and 18 with 25% of the data in each section.
The scores are more spread elsewhere.
CAS calculators can also be used to draw boxplots.

21
outliers
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Frequency
Units: 3 & 4
When one observation lies well away from other

25
observations in a set, we call it an outlier.
20
Sometimes an outlier occurs because data
15
have been incorrectly obtained or misread.
10
5
For example, at right we see a histogram
0
showing the weights of a group of 5-year-old
16 17 1819 20 21222324 25 26 2728 29 30313233
boys.
Weight (kg)
The outlier, 33, may have occurred because
a weight was incorrectly recorded as 33 rather
than 23 or perhaps there was a boy in this group who, for some medical reason, weighed a lot more than
his counterparts. When an outlier occurs, the reasons for its occurrence should be checked.
To identify possible outliers, we can apply a simple rule.
An outlier is a score, x, which lies outside the interval:
Q1 1.5 IQR x Q3 + 1.5 IQR.
An outlier is not included in the boxplot but simply plotted as a point beyond the end of the whisker.
Worked example 14
The times (in seconds) achieved by the 12 fastest runners in the 100-m sprint at a school athletics
meeting are listed below.
11.2 12.3 11.5 11.0 11.6 11.4
11.9 11.2 12.7 11.3 11.2 11.3
Draw a boxplot to represent the data, describe the shape of the distribution and comment on the
existence of any outliers.
Think
WriTe/draW
Determine the five number summary statistics

by first ordering the data and obtain the
interquartile range.
11.011.211.211.211.311.311.411.5
11.611.912.312.7
Lowest score = 11.0
Highest s core = 12.7
Median = Q2 = 11.35
Q1 = 11.2
Q3 = 11.75
IQR = 11.75 11.2
= 0.55
Identify any outliers by applying the outlier

rule.
Q1 1.5 IQR = 11.2 1.5 0.55

= 10.375
The lowest score lies above 10.375, so there is
no outlier below.
Q3 + 1.5 IQR = 11.75 + 1.5 0.55
= 12.575
The score 12.7 lies above 12.575, so it is an outlier
and 12.3 becomes the end of the upper whisker.
Draw the boxplot with the outlier.

11.0
22
Describe the shape of the distribution. Data

peak to the left and trail off to the right with
one outlier.
12.0
Time (s)
13.0
The data are positively skewed with 12.7 seconds

being an outlier. This may be due to incorrect
timing or recording but more likely the top eleven
runners were significantly faster than the other
competitors in the event.
exercise 1F
Boxplots
1 We11 For the boxplots shown, write down the range, the interquartile range and the median of the
diGiTal doC
doc-9406
Spreadsheet
Boxplots
distributions which each one represents.

b
a
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
c
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
100
200
300
400
500
d
20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110120 130 140
10 15 20 25 30 35
2 We12 Match each histogram below with the boxplot which could show the same distribution.
a
ii
iii
iv
3 We13 For each of the following sets of data, construct a boxplot.

a 3 5 6 8 8 9 12 14 17 18
b 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 12
c 4.3 4.5 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 5.5 5.6
d 11 13 15 15 16 18 20 21 22 21 18 19 20 16 18 20
e 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.0 1.3
4 mC For the distribution shown in the boxplot below, it is true to say that:
a
B
C
d
e
the median is 30
the median is 45
the interquartile range is 10
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
5 The number of clients seen each day over a 15-day period by a tax consultant is:
3 5 2 7 5 6 4 3 4 5 6 6 4 3 4
Represent these data on a boxplot.
6 The maximum daily temperatures (in C) for the month of October in Melbourne are:
18 26 28 23 16 19 21 27 31 23 24 26 21 18 26 27
23 21 24 20 19 25 27 32 29 21 16 19 23 25 27
Represent these data on a boxplot.
7 We14 The number of rides that 16 children had at the annual show are listed below.
8 5 9 4 9 0 8 7 9 2 8 7 9 6 7 8
Draw a boxplot to represent the data, describe the shape of the distribution and comment on
the existence of any outliers.
b Use a CAS calculator to draw a boxplot for these data.
a
23
8 A concentration test was carried out on 40 students in Year 12 across Australia. The test involved
the use of a computer mouse and the ability to recognise multiple images. The less time required to
complete the activity, the better the students ability to concentrate.
The data are shown by the parallel boxplots below.
Males
Females
20
40
60
Time (s)
100
a Identify two similar properties of the concentration spans for boys and girls.
b Find the interquartile range for boys and girls.
c Comment on the existence of an outlier in the boys data.
1G
Units: 3 & 4
The mean
The mean of a set of data is what is referred to in everyday language as the average.
For the set of data {4, 7, 9, 12, 18}:
4 + 7 + 9 + 12 + 18
5
= 10.
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
mean =
The symbol we use to represent the mean is x, that is, a lower-case x with a bar on top. So, in this
case, x = 10.
The formal definition of the mean is:
x=
x
n
where x represents the sum of all of the observations in the data set and n represents the number of
observations in the data set.
Note that the symbol, , is the Greek letter, sigma, which represents the sum of.
The mean is also referred to as a summary statistic and is a measure of the centre of a distribution.
The mean is the point about which the distribution balances.
Consider the masses of 7 potatoes, given in grams, in the photograph below.
160 g
170 g
145 g
130 g
190 g
100 g
120 g
The mean is 145 g. The observations 130 and 160 balance each other since they are each 15 g from
the mean. Similarly, the observations 120 and 170 balance each other since they are each 25 g from
the mean, as do the observations 100 and 190. Note that the median is also 145g. That is, for this set
of data the mean and the median give the same value for the centre. This is because the distribution is
symmetric.
Now consider two cases in which the distribution of data is not symmetric.
24
Case 1
Consider the masses of a different set of 7 potatoes, given in grams below.
100 105 110 115 120 160 200
The median of this distribution is 115 g and the mean is 130 g. There are 5 observations that are less
than the mean and only 2 that are more. In other words, the mean does not give us a good indication
of the centre of the distribution. However, there is still a balance between observations below the
mean and those above, in terms of the spread of all the observations from the mean. Therefore, the
mean is still useful to give a measure of the central tendency of the distribution but in cases where
the distribution is skewed, the median gives a better indication of the centre. For a positively skewed
distribution, as in the previous case, the mean will be greater than the median. For a negatively skewed
distribution the mean will be less than the median.
Case 2
Consider the data below, showing the weekly income (to the nearest $10) of 10 families living in a
suburban street.
$600 $1340 $1360 $1380 $1400 $1420 $1420 $1440 $1460 $1500
In this case, x =
13320
= $1332, and the median is $1410.
10
One of the values in this set, $600, is

clearly an outlier. As a result, the value of
the mean is below the weekly income of the
other 9 households. In such a casethe mean
is not very useful inestablishing the centre;
however,the balance still remains for
thisnegatively skeweddistribution.
The mean is calculated by usingthe
values of the observationsand because
of this it becomes a less reliable
measureofthe centre of thedistribution
when the distribution is skewed or contains
an outlier. Because themedianis based
on the orderoftheobservations rather
than their value, it is a better measure of
thecentre of such distributions.
Worked example 15
Calculate the mean of the set of data below.

10, 12, 15, 16, 18, 19, 22, 25, 27, 29
Think
WriTe
x
n
10 + 12 + 15 + 16 + 18 + 19 + 22 + 25 + 27 + 29
=
10
x = 19.3
Write the formula for calculating the mean,

where x is the sum of all scores; n is the
number of scores in the set.
x=
Substitute the values into the formula and

evaluate.
The mean, x, is 19.3.
25
When data are presented in a frequency table with class intervals and we dont know what the
raw data are, we employ another method to find the mean of these grouped data. This other method
is shown in the example that follows and uses the midpoints of the class intervals to represent the
raw data.
Recall that the Greek letter sigma, , represents the sum of. So, f means the sum of the
frequencies and is the total of all the numbers in the frequency column.
To find the mean for grouped data,
x=
( f m)
f
where f represents the frequency of the data and m represents the midpoint of the class interval of the
grouped data.
Worked example 16
The ages of a group of 30 people attending a superannuation seminar are

recorded in the frequency table below.
Age (class intervals)

2029
3039
4049
Frequency f
1
6
13
TUTorial
eles-1257
Worked example 16
Age (class intervals)
Frequency f
5059
6069
7079
6
3
1
Calculate the mean age of those attending the seminar.

Think
1
26
Since we dont have individual raw

ages, but rather a class interval,
we need to decide on one particular
age to represent each interval. We
use the midpoint, m, of the class
interval. Add an extra column to the
table to display these.
The midpoint of the first interval is
20 + 29
= 24.5, the midpoint of the
2
second interval is 34.5 and so on.
Multiply each of the midpoints by
the frequency and display these
values in another column headed
fm. For the first interval we have
24.5 1 =24.5. For the second
interval we have34.56=207 and
soon.
Sum the product of the midpoints

and the frequencies in the
f m column.
24.5 + 207 + 578.5 + 327 +193.5
+ 74.5 = 1405
Divide this sum by the total number

of people attending the seminar
(given by the sum of the frequency
column).
WriTe
Age
(class
intervals)
2029
3039
4049
5059
6069
7079
Frequency
f
1
6
13
6
3
1
Midpoint of
class interval
m
24.5
34.5
44.5
54.5
64.5
74.5
f = 30
1405
30
46.8 (correct to 1 decimal place).
So, x =
fm
24.5
207
578.5
327
193.5
74.5
(f m)
= 1405
exercise 1G
The mean
1 We15 Find the mean of each of the following sets of data.

a 5 6 8 8 9
b 3 4 4 5 5 6 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 12
c 4.3 4.5 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 5.5 5.6
d 11 13 15 15 16 18 20 21 22
e 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.0 1.3
2 Calculate the mean of each of the following and explain whether or not it gives us a good indication of
the centre of the data.

a 0.7 0.8 0.85 0.9 0.92 2.3
b 14 16 16 17 17 17 19 20
c 23 24 28 29 33 34 37 39
d 2 15 17 18 18 19 20
3 The number of people attending sculpture classes at the local TAFE college for each week during the
first semester is given below.
15 12 15 11 14 8 14 15 11 10
7 11 12 14 15 14 15 9 10 11
What is the mean number of people attending each week? (Express your answer to the nearest whole
number.)
4 mC The ages of a group of junior pilots joining an international airline are
Key: 2|1 = 21 years
Stem
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
Leaf
1
2
4 5
6 6 7
8 8 8 9
0 1 1
2 3
4 4
6
8
Key: 2|4 = 24 people
Stem
0*
0*
1*
1*
2*
2*
Leaf
4
7
2 4
5 5 6 7 8
1 2 4
7 7 7
indicated on the stem plot at right.

The mean age of this group of pilots is:
a 20
B 28
C 29
d 29.15
e 29.5
5 mC The number of people present each
week at a 15-week horticultural course is given by

the stem plot at right.
The mean number of people attending each week
was closest to:
a 17.7
B 18
C 19.5
d 20
e 21.2
6 For each of the following, write down whether the mean or the median would provide a better
indication of the centre of the distribution.

a A positively skewed distribution
b A symmetric distribution
c A distribution with an outlier
d A negatively skewed distribution
7 We16 Find the mean of each set of data given below.
a
Class
Frequency,
interval
09
1019
2029
3039
4049
5059
f
1
3
6
17
12
5
Class
interval
04
59
1014
1519
2024
2529
Frequency,
f
2
5
7
13
8
6
27
Class
interval
049
5099
100149
150199
200249
250299
Frequency,
f
2
7
8
14
12
5
Class
interval
16
712
1318
1924
2530
3136
Frequency,
f
14
19
23
22
20
14
8 The ages of people attending a beginners course in karate
are indicated in the following frequency table.

a What is the mean age of those attending the course?
(Express your answer correct to 1decimal place.)
b Calculate the median. What does this value, compared to
the mean, suggest about the shape of the distribution?
Frequency,
f
5
5
7
4
3
2
2
1
Age
1014
1519
2024
2529
3034
3539
4044
4549
1h
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Standard deviation
The standard deviation gives us a measure of how data are spread around the mean. For the set of data
{8, 10, 11, 12, 12, 13}, the mean, x = 11.
The amount that each observation deviates (that is, differs) from the mean is calculated and shown in
the table below.
Particular observation, x
Deviation from the mean, (x x)
8
10
11
12
12
13
8 11 = 3
10 11 = 1
11 11 = 0
12 11 = 1
12 11 = 1
13 11 = 2
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with standard
deviations.
The deviations from the mean are either positive or negative depending on whether the particular
observation is lower or higher in value than the mean. If we were to add all the deviations from the mean
we would obtain zero.
If we square the deviations from the mean we will overcome the problem of positive and negative
deviations cancelling each other out. With this in mind, a quantity known as sample variance (s2) is
defined:
( x x )2
s2 =
.
n 1
Technically, this formula for variance is used when the data set is a sub-set of a larger population.
Variance gives the average of the squared deviations and is also a measure of spread. A far more
useful measure of spread, however, is the standard deviation, which is the square root of variance (s).
One reason for it being more useful is that it takes the same unit as the observations (for example, cm
or number of people). Variance would square the units, for example, cm2 or number of people squared,
which is not very practical.
Other advantages of the standard deviation will be dealt with later in the chapter.
28
In summary,
s=
where
x
x
n
( x x )2
n 1
represents sample standard deviation
represents the sum of
represents an observation
represents the mean
represents the number of observations.
While some of the theory or formulas associated with standard deviation may look complex, the
calculation of this measure of spread is straightforward using a statistical, graphics or CAS calculator.
Manual computation of standard deviation is therefore rarely necessary.
Worked example 17
The price (in cents) per litre of petrol at a service station was recorded each Friday over a
15-week period. The data are given below.
152.4
161.0
160.2
156.4
159.6
159.0
168.6
160.2
161.4
162.6
156.6
168.4
164.8
166.8
162.6
Calculate the standard deviation for this set of data, correct to 2 decimal places.
Think
1
On a CAS calculator, enter the data into the

first list in the spreadsheet and label it price.
Select One-Variable Statistics option and
choose price for the X1 List.
Press OK to see all statistics.
The entry, SX: = Sn 1, gives us the standard

deviation. Round the value correct to
2 decimal places.
WriTe
Sx = 4.515 92
s = 4.52 cents/L
Worked example 18
The number of students attending SRC meetings during the term is

given in the stem plot at right. Calculate the standard deviation for this
set of data, correct to 3 decimal places.
Stem Leaf
0* 4
0* 8 8
1* 1 3 4
1* 5 6 8
2* 3
2* 5
Key: 1|4 = 14 students
29
Think
WriTe
On your calculator, enter the data from the

stem plot into a spreadsheet.
Using the given key, the scores are: 4, 8, 8, 11,
13, 14, 15, 16, 18, 23 and 25.
To calculate the summary statistics, repeat the
instructions for Worked example 17.
The entry, SX, gives us the standard deviation.

Round the value correct to 3 decimal places.
SX = 6.363 25
s = 6.363 students
Frequency
Frequency
The standard deviation is a measure of the spread of data from the mean. Consider the two sets of data
shown below.
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Score
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Score
Each set of data has a mean of 10. The set of data above left has a standard deviation of 1 and the set
of data above right has a standard deviation of 3.
As we can see, the larger the standard deviation, the more spread are the data from the mean.
exercise 1h
Standard deviation
1 We17 For each of the following sets of data, calculate the standard deviation correct
to 2decimal places.
3 4 4.7 5.1 6 6.2
7 9 10 10 11 13 13 14
12.9 17.2 17.9 20.2 26.4 28.9
41 43 44 45 45 46 47 49
0.30 0.32 0.37 0.39 0.41 0.43 0.45
2 First-quarter profit increases for 8 leading companies are given below as percentages.
2.3 0.8 1.6 2.1 1.7 1.3 1.4 1.9
Calculate the standard deviation for this set of data and express your answer correct
to 2decimal places.
a
b
c
d
e
3 The heights in metres of a group of army recruits are given below.
1.8 1.95 1.87 1.77 1.75 1.79 1.81 1.83 1.76 1.80 1.92 1.87 1.85 1.83
to 2decimal places.
Stem Leaf
4 We18 Times (to the nearest tenth of a second)
11 0
for the heats in the 100m sprint at the school sports
11 2 3
carnival are given at right.
11 4 4 5
Calculate the standard deviation for this set of data
11 6 6
and express your answer correct to 2decimal places.
11 8 8 9
12 0 1
12 2 2 3
12 4 4
12 6
12 9
Key: 11|0 = 11.0 s
30
5 The number of outgoing phone calls from an office each day over a 4-week period is shown on the
stem plot below.

Stem Leaf
0 8 9
1 3 4 7 9
2 0 1 3 7 7
3 3 4
4 1 5 6 7 8
5 3 8
Key: 2|1 = 21 calls
to 2decimal places.
6 mC A new legal aid service has been operational for only 5weeks.
The number of people who have made use of the service each day during
this period is set out at right.
The standard deviation (to 2 decimal places) of these data is:
a 6.00
B 6.34
C 6.47
d 15.44
e 16.00
rule and z-scores
The heights of a large number of students at a graduation

ceremony were recorded and are shown in the histogram at right.
This set of data is approximately symmetric and has what is
termed a bell shape. Many sets of data fall into this category
and are often referred to as normal distributions. Examples are
birth weights and peoples heights. Data which are normally
distributed have their symmetrical, bell-shaped distribution
centred on the mean value, x .
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Frequency
1i The 689599.7%
The 689599.7% rule
Stem Leaf
0* 2 4
0* 7 7 9
1* 0 1 4 4 4 4
1* 5 6 6 7 8 8 9
2* 1 2 2 3 3 3
2* 7
Key: 1|0 = 10 people
1*|6 = 16 people
150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220

Height (cm)
An astounding feature of this type of distribution is that we can predict what percentage of the
data lie 1, 2 or 3 standard deviations either side of the mean using what is termed the 689599.7%
rule.
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch a
video about normal
distributions.
The 689599.7% rule for a bell-shaped curve states that approximately:

1. 68% of data lie within 1 standard deviation either side of the mean
2. 95% of data lie within 2 standard deviations either side of the mean
3. 99.7% of data lie within 3 standard deviations either side of the mean.
31
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
68%
inTeraCTiViTY
int-0182
The 689599.7%
rule and z-scores
_
xs
_
x
99.7%
95%
_
x+ s
_
x 2s
_
x
_
x + 2s
_
x 3s
_
x
_
x + 3s
In figure 1 above, 68% of the data shown lie between the value which is 1 standard deviation
below the mean, that is x s, and the value which is 1 standard deviation above the mean, that
is, x + s.
In figure 2 above, 95% of the data shown lie between the value which is 2 standard deviations
below the mean, that is, x 2s, and the value which is 2 standard deviations above the mean, that
is x + 2s.
In figure 3 above, 99.7% of the data shown lie between the value which is 3 standard deviations
below the mean, that is, x 3s, and the value which is 3 standard deviations above the mean, that
is, x + 3s.
The wrist circumferences of a group of people

were recorded and the results are shown in the
histogram at right. The mean of the set of data
is 17.7 and the standard deviation is 0.9. Write
down the wrist circumferences between which
we would expect approximately:
a 68% of the group to lie
b 95% of the group to lie
c 99.7% of the group to lie.
Think
a The distribution can be described as
approximately bell-shaped and therefore the

689599.7% rule can be applied.
Approximately 68% of the people have a
wrist circumference between x s and x +s
(or one standard deviation either side of the
mean).
Frequency
Worked example 19
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
15 15.5 16 16.5 17 17.5 18 18.5 19 19.5 20 20.5

Wrist circumference (cm)
WriTe
a x s = 17.7 0.9 = 16.8
x + s = 17.7 + 0.9 = 18.6

So approximately 68% of the people have a
wrist size between 16.8 and 18.6 cm.
b Similarly, approximately 95% of the people have
b x 2s = 17.7 1.8 = 15.9
c Similarly, approximately 99.7% of the people
c x 3s = 17.7 2.7 = 15.0
a wrist size between x 2s and x + 2s.
have a wrist size between x 3s and x + 3s.
x + 2s = 17.7 + 1.8 = 19.5

Approximately 95% of people have a wrist size
between 15.9 cm and 19.5 cm.
x + 3s = 17.7 + 2.7 = 20.4
Approximately 99.7% of people have a wrist
size between 15.0 cm and 20.4 cm.
Using the 689599.7% rule, we can work out the various

percentages of the distribution which lie between the
34% 34%
mean and 1 standard deviation from the mean and
between the mean and 2 standard deviations from
13.5%
13.5%
2.35% 0.15%
the mean and so on. The diagram at right
0.15% 2.35%
_
_
_
_
_
_ _
summarises this.
x 3s x 2s x s x x + s x + 2s x + 3s
Note that 50% of the data lie below themean and
68%
50% lie above the mean due to the symmetry of the
95%
99.7%
distribution about the mean.
32
Worked example 20
The distribution of the masses of packets of Fibre-fill breakfast cereal is

known to be bell-shaped with a mean of 250 g and a standard deviation of 5 g.
Find the percentage of Fibre-fill packets with a mass which is:
a less than 260 g
b less than 245 g
c more than 240 g
d between 240 g and 255 g.
Think
1
TUTorial
eles-1258
Worked example 20
WriTe/draW
Draw the bell-shaped curve. Label the axis.

x = 250, x + s = 255, x + 2s = 260 etc.
34% 34%
13.5%
0.15% 2.35%
235 240 245
a 260 g is 2standard deviations above the
mean. Using the summary diagram, we

can find the percentage of data which is
less than 260 g.
b 245 g is 1 standard deviation below the
mean.
c 240 g is 2standard deviations below the
mean.
d Now, 240 g is 2 standard deviations
below the mean while 255 g is 1 standard

deviation above the mean.
13.5%
250
255
2.35% 0.15%
260
265
a Mass of 260 g is 2 standard deviations above the
mean. Percentage of distribution less than 260 g is

13.5% + 34% + 34% + 13.5% + 2.35% + 0.15%
= 97.5%
or 13.5% + 34% + 50%
= 97.5%
b Mass of 245 g is 1 standard deviation below the
mean. Percentage of distribution less than 245 g is

13.5% + 2.35% + 0.15%
= 16%
or 50% 34%
= 16%
c Mass of 240 g is 2 standard deviations below the
mean. Percentage of distribution more than 240 g

is 13.5% + 34% + 34% + 13.5% + 2.35% + 0.15%
= 97.5%
or 13.5% + 34% + 50%
= 97.5%
d Mass of 240 g is 2 standard deviations below the
mean. Mass of 255 g is 1 standard deviation above

the mean. Percentage of distribution between
240 g and 255 g is 13.5% + 34% + 34% = 81.5%
Worked example 21
The number of matches in a box is not always the same. When a sample of boxes was studied it
was found that the number of matches in a box approximated a normal (bell-shaped) distribution
with a mean number of matches of 50 and a standard deviation of 2. In a sample of 200 boxes,
how many would be expected to have more than 48 matches?
Think
WriTe
Find the percentage of boxes with more than

48 matches. Since 48 = 50 2, the score of
48 is 1 standard deviation below the mean.
48 matches is 1 standard deviation below the

mean. Percentage of boxes with more than
48matches
= 34% + 50%
= 84%
Find 84% of the total sample.
Number of boxes = 84% of 200

= 168 boxes
33
Standard z-scores
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
To find a comparison between scores in a particular distribution or in different distributions, we use

the z-score. The z-score (also called the standardised score) indicates the position of a certain score in
relation to the mean.
A z-score of 0 indicates that the score obtained is equal to the mean, a negative z-score indicates that the
score is below the mean and a positive z-score indicates a score above the mean.
The z-score measures the distance from the mean in terms of the standard deviation. A score that is
exactly one standard deviation above the mean has a z-score of 1. A score that is exactly one standard
deviation below the mean has a z-score of 1.
To calculate a z-score we use the formula:
xx
z=
s
where x = the score, x = the mean and s = the standard deviation.
Worked example 22
In an IQ test, the mean IQ is 100 and the standard deviation is 15. Dales test results give an IQ
of 130. Calculate this as a z-score.
Think
WriTe
z=
xx
s
Write the formula.
Substitute for x, x and s.
Calculate the z-score.
=2
130 100
15
Dales z-score is 2, meaning that his IQ is exactly two standard deviations above the mean.
Not all z-scores will be whole numbers; in fact most will not be. A whole number indicates only that
the score is an exact number of standard deviations above or below the mean.
Using the previous example, an IQ of 88 would be represented by a z-score of 0.8, as shown below.
xx
s
88 100
=
15
= 0.8
z=
The negative value indicates that the IQ of 88 is below the mean but by less than one standard
deviation.
Worked example 23
To obtain the average number of hours of study done by Year 12 students per week, Kate surveys
20students and obtains the following results.
12 18 15 14
9 10 13 12 18 25
15 10
3 21 11 12 14 16 17 20
a Calculate the mean and standard deviation (correct to 2 decimal places).
b Robert studies for 16 hours each week. Express this as a z-score based on the above results.
(Give your answer correct to 2 decimal places.)
Think
a 1 Enter the data into your calculator.
34
WriTe
Obtain the mean from your calculator.
x = 14.25
Obtain the standard deviation from your

calculator.
s = 4.88
b z=
b 1 Write the formula for z-score.
Substitute for x, x and s into the formula and

evaluate.
xx
s
16 14.25
4.88
= 0.36
Comparing data
An important use of z-scores is to compare scores from different data sets. Suppose that in your maths
exam your result was 74 and in English your result was 63. In which subject did you achieve the better
result?
At first glance, it may appear that the maths result is better, but this does not take into account the
difficulty of the test. A mark of 63 on a difficult English test may in fact be a better result than 74 if it
was an easy maths test.
The only way that we can fairly compare the results is by comparing each result with its mean and
standard deviation. This is done by converting each result to a z-score.
If, for maths, x = 60 and s = 12, then
xx
z=
s
74 60
12
= 1.17
=
And if, for English, x = 50 and s = 8, then
z=
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with comparisons
of data values.
xx
s
63 50
8
= 1.625
The English result is better because the higher z-score shows that the 63 is higher in comparison to the
mean of each subject.
Worked example 24
Janine scored 82 in her physics exam and 78 in her chemistry exam. In physics, x = 62 and s = 10,
while in chemistry, x = 66 and s = 5.
a Write both results as a standardised score.
b Which is the better result? Explain your answer.
Think
a 1 Write the formula for each subject.
WriTe
a Physics: z =
xx
s
82 62
10
Substitute for x, x and s.
Calculate each z-score.
=2
b Explain that the subject with the highest
z-score is the better result.
Chemistry: z =
=
xx
s
78 66
5
= 2.4
b The chemistry result is better because of the
higher z-score.
In each example the circumstances must be analysed carefully to see whether a higher or lower z-score
is better. For example, if we were comparing times for runners over different distances, the lower z-score
would be the better one.
35
exercise 1i
b
Frequency
d
Frequency
Frequency
Frequency
1 In each of the following, decide whether or not the distribution is approximately bell-shaped.
f
Frequency
Frequency
2 Copy and complete the entries on the horizontal scale of the following distributions, given that x = 10
and s = 2.
b
68%
95%
10
10
c
99.7%
10
3 Copy and complete the entries on the horizontal scale of the following distributions, given that x = 5
and s = 1.3.
b
68%
95%
c
99.7%
5
4 We19 The concentration ability of a randomly selected group of adults is tested during a short task
Frequency
which they are asked to complete. The length of the concentration span of those involved during the
task is shown at right.
The mean, x , is 49 seconds and the standard
deviation, s, is 14 seconds.
Write down the values between which we would
expect approximately:
a 68% of the groups concentration spans to fall
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
b 95% of the groups concentration spans to fall
Concentration span (seconds)
c 99.7% of the groups concentration spans to fall.
36
5 A research scientist measured the rate of hair
Frequency
growth in a group of hamsters. The findings

are shown in the histogram below.
The mean growth per week was 1.9 mm and
the standard deviation was 0.6 mm. Write
down the hair growth rates between which
approximately:
a 68% of the values fall
b 95% of the values fall
c 99.7% of the values fall.
1
2
3
Growth per week (mm)
6 The force required to break metal fasteners has a distribution which is bell-shaped. A large sample
of metal fasteners was tested and the mean breaking force required was 12 newtons with a standard
deviation of 0.3 newtons.
Write down the values between which approximately:
a 68% of the breaking forces would lie
b 95% of the breaking forces would lie
c 99.7% of the breaking forces would lie.
7 The heights of the seedlings sold in a nursery have a bell-shaped distribution. The mean height is 7 cm
and the standard deviation is 2.
Write down the values between which approximately:
a 68% of seedling heights will lie
b 95% of seedling heights will lie
c 99.7% of seedling heights will lie.
8 mC A set of scores in a competition has a mean of 15 and a standard deviation of 3. The distribution
of the scores is known to be bell-shaped. Which one of the following could be true?
a 68% of the scores lie between 3 and 15.
B 68% of the scores lie between 15 and 18.
C 68% of the scores lie between 12 and 15.
d 68% of the scores lie between 13.5 and 16.5.
e 68% of the scores lie between 12 and 18.
9 mC A distribution of scores is bell-shaped and the mean score is 26. It is known that 95% of scores lie
between 21 and 31.

It is true to say that:
a 68% of the scores lie between 23 and 28.
B 97.5% of the scores lie between 23.5 and 28.5.
C The standard deviation is 2.5.
d 99.7% of the scores lie between 16 and 36.
e The standard deviation is 5.
10 We20 The distribution of heights of a group of Melbourne-based employees who work for a
large international company is bell-shaped. The data have a mean of 160 cm and a standard deviation
of 10 cm.
Find the percentage of this group of employees who are:
a less than 170 cm tall
b less than 140 cm tall
c greater than 150 cm tall
d between 130 cm and 180 cm in height.
11 The number of days taken off in a year by employees of a large company has a distribution which is
approximately bell-shaped. The mean and standard deviation of this data are shown below.
Mean = 9 days
Standard deviation = 2 days
Find the percentage of employees of this company who, in a year, take off:
a more than 15 days
b fewer than 5 days
c more than 7 days
d between 3 and 11 days
e between 7 and 13 days.
37
12 mC The mean number of Drool-mints in a packet is 48. The data have a standard deviation of 2. If
the number of mints in a packet can be approximated by normal distribution. The percentage of packets
which contain more than 50 Drool-mints is:
a 0.15%
B 2.5%
C 16%
d 50%
e 84%
13 We21 The volume of fruit juice in
diGiTal doC
doc-9407
SkillSHEET 1.2
percentages
a certain type of container is not

always the same. When a sample of
these containers was studied it was
found that the volume of juice they
contained approximated a normal
distribution with a mean of 250 mL
and a standard deviation of 5 mL.
In a sample of 400 containers, how
many would be expected to have a
volume of:
a more than 245 mL?
b less than 240 mL?
c between 240 and 260 mL?
14 A particular bolt is manufactured such that the length is not always the same. The distribution of the
lengths of the bolts is approximately bell-shaped with a mean length of 2.5 cm and a standard deviation
of 1 mm.
a In a sample of 2000 bolts, how many would be expected to have a length:
i between 2.4 cm and 2.6 cm?
ii less than 2.7 cm?
iii between 2.6 cm and 2.8 cm?
b The manufacturer rejects bolts which have a length of less than 2.3 cm or a length of greater than
2.7 cm. In a sample of 2000 bolts, how many would the manufacturer expect to reject?
15 We22 In a maths exam, the mean score is 60 and the standard deviation is 12. Chifunes mark is 96.
Calculate her mark as a z-score.

16 In an English test, the mean score was 55 with a standard deviation of 5. Adrian scored 45 on the
English test. Calculate Adrians mark as a z-score.

17 IQ tests have a mean of 100 and a standard deviation of 15. Calculate the z-score for a person with an
IQ of 96. (Give your answer correct to 2 decimal places.)

18 The mean time taken for a racehorse to run 1 km is 57.69 s, with a standard deviation of 0.36 s.
Calculate the z-score of a racehorse that runs 1 km in 58.23s.

19 In a major exam, every subject has a mean score of 60 and a standard deviation of 12.5. Clarissa
obtains the following marks on her exams. Express each as a z-score.

a English 54
d Geography 32
b Maths 78
e Art 95
c Biology 61
20 We23 The length of bolts being produced by a machine needs to be measured. To do this, a sample of
20 bolts are taken and measured. The results (in mm) are given below.
20
17
19
17
18
21
21
20
20
17
17
19
19
18
21
22
22
22
21
20
a Calculate the mean and standard deviation of the distribution.

b A bolt produced by the machine is 22.5 mm long. Express this result as a z-score. (Giveyour
answer correct to 2 decimal places.)

21 mC In a normal distribution, the mean is 21.7 and the standard deviation is 1.9. A score of
20.75 corresponds to a z-score of:

a 1
B 0.5
C 0.5
d 1
e 0.75
22 mC In a normal distribution the mean is 58. A score of 70 corresponds to a standardised score of 1.5.
The standard deviation of the distribution is:

a 6
B 8
C 10
38
d 12
e 9
23 We24 Kens English mark was 75 and his maths mark was 72. In English, the mean was 65 with a
standard deviation of 8, while in maths the mean mark was 56 with a standard deviation of 12.
a Convert the mark in each subject to a z-score.
b In which subject did Ken perform better? Explain your answer.
24 In the first maths test of the year, the mean mark was 60 and the standard deviation was 12. In the
second test, the mean was 55 and the standard deviation was 15. Barbara scored 54 in the first test and
50 in the second test. In which test did Barbara do better? Explain your answer.
25 The table below shows the average number of eggs laid per week by a random sample of chickens with
3 different types of living conditions.
Number of eggs per week
Cage chickens
Barn chickens
Free range chickens
5.0
4.8
4.2
4.9
4.6
3.8
5.5
4.3
4.1
5.4
4.7
4.0
5.1
4.2
4.1
5.8
3.9
4.4
5.6
4.9
4.3
5.2
4.1
4.2
4.7
4.0
4.3
4.9
4.4
3.9
5.0
4.5
3.9
5.1
4.6
4.0
5.4
4.1
4.1
5.5
4.2
4.1
a Copy and complete the following table by calculating the mean and standard deviation of barn
chickens and free range chickens correct to 1 decimal place.

Living conditions
Free
Cage Barn range
Mean
5.2
Standard deviation
0.3
b A particular free range chicken lays an
average of 4.3 eggs per week. Calculate the

z-score relative to this sample to 2 decimal
places.
The number of eggs laid by free range
chickens is normally distributed. A free
range chicken has a z-score of 1.
c Approximately what percentage of chickens
lay fewer eggs than this chicken?
d Referring to the table showing the number of
eggs per week, construct boxplots for each
set of data.
i State the median of each set of data.
ii What could be concluded about the
egg-producing capabilities of chickens in
different living conditions?
39
populations and simple random

samples
1J
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
populations
A group of Year 12 students decide to base their statistical investigation for a maths project on what
their contemporaries that is, other Year 12 students spend per year on Christmas and birthday
presents for their family members. One of their early decisions is to decide what the population is
going to be for their investigation. That is, are they looking at Year 12 students in Australia or in
Victoria or in metropolitan Melbourne or in their suburb or just in their school? In practice, it is
difficult to look at a large population unless, of course, you have a lot of resources available to you!
The students decide that their population will be the Year 12 students at their school. This means that
any conclusions they draw as a result of their investigation can be generalised to Year 12 students at
their school but not beyond that.
Samples
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch a
video about simple
random samples.
Given that there are 95 students in Year 12 at the school, it would be too time-consuming to interview
all of them. A smaller group known as a sample is therefore taken from the population. The way in
which this smaller group is chosen is of paramount importance. For the investigation to have credibility,
the sample should be a random selection from the population and every member of that population
should have an equal chance of being chosen in the sample. Also, the selection of one person from the
population should not affect whether or not another person is chosen; that is, the selections should be
independent. A simple random sample provides such a sample.
The students conducting the investigation decide to choose a sample of 12 fellow students. While it
would be simplest to choose 12 of their mates as the sample, this would introduce bias since they would
not be representative of the population as a whole.
The students obtain a list of names of the 95 students in Year 12. They then write next to the
name of each student a number from 1 to 95. Using a calculator, the students generate 12 random
numbers between 1 and 95. Alternatively, the students could have used a table of random numbers.
Any point on the table can be taken as the starting point. The students decide which direction to
move through the table; for example, across the table to the right or to the left or down. Once a
direction is chosen, they must stay with that movement and write down the 2-digit numbers as they
go along.
The numbers chosen by the students are then matched to the numbers on the name list and the
students in their sample can be identified.
These 12 students are then asked what they spent in the last year on family presents.
The students conducting the investigation can then record the data.
Random numbers can also be generated with the aid of a CAS calculator.
Worked example 25
Generate 5 random numbers (integers) between 1 and 50.

Think
40
WriTe
From the calculator menu choose

probability and random integer.
Since the numbers be generated are to be

between 1 and 50 and there are to be 5
numbers enter 1, 50 and 5 in that order.
rand Int (1, 50, 5)
An example of a set of numbers is

displayed.
{48, 46, 8, 26, 21}.
displaying the data

The raw data are given below in dollars.
25 30 35 38 34 22 30 40 35 25 32 40
Since there are not many responses, a stem plot is an appropriate
way of displaying the data.
To summarise and comment further on the sample, it is useful to use some
of the summary statistics covered earlier in this chapter. The most efficient
way to calculate these is to use a CAS calculator. Using the steps outlined in
the previous sections, we obtain a list of summary statistics for these data.
Stem Leaf
2* 2
2* 5 5
3* 0 0 2 4
3* 5 5 8
4* 0 0
Key: 2|2 = 22 dollars
2*|5 = 25 dollars
x = 32.2
s=6
Q1 = 27.5
median = 33
Q3 = 36.5
To measure the centre of the distribution, the median and the mean are used. Since there are no
outliers and the distribution is approximately symmetric, the mean is quite a good measure of the centre
of the distribution. Also, the mean and the median are quite close in value.
To measure the spread of the distribution, the standard deviation and the interquartile range are used.
Since s = 6, and since the distribution is approximately bell-shaped, we would expect that approximately
95% of the data lie between 32.2+12 = 44.2 and 32.212 = 20.2. It is perhaps a little surprising
to think that 95% of students spend between $20.20 and $44.20 on family presents. One might have
expected there to be greater variation on what students spend. The data, in
that sense, are quite bunched.
The interquartile range is equal to 36.5 27.5 = 9. This means
that 50% of those in the sample spent within $9 of each other on
family presents. Again, one might have expected a greater variation
in what students spent. It would be interesting to know whether
students confer about what they spend and therefore whether they
tended to allocate about the same amount of money to spend.
At another school, the same investigation was undertaken and
the results are shown in the following stem plot.
Stem
2*
2*
3*
3*
4*
4*
5*
5*
6*
6*
7*
7*
Leaf
0
5 5
5
5
0
5
0
5
5
0
5
0
Key: 2|2 = 22 dollars

2*|5 = 25 dollars
The summary statistics for these
data are as follows:
x = 47.5, s = 16.3, Q1 = 35,
median = 50, Q3 = 60.
The distribution is approximately symmetric, albeit very spread out. The mean and the median are
therefore reasonably close and give us an indication of the centre of the distribution. The mean value for
this set of data is higher than for the data obtained at the other school. This indicates that students at this
school in this year level, in general, spend more than their counterparts at the other school. Reasons for
41
this might be that this school is in a higher socio-economic area and students receive greater allowances, or
perhaps it is that at this school there is a higher proportion of students from cultures where spending more
money on family presents is usual.
The range of money spent on family presents at this school and at this particular year level is $55.
This is certainly much higher than at the other school. The interquartile range at this school is $25. That
is, the middle 50% of students spend within $25 of each other which is greater than the students at the
other school.
exercise 1J
populations and simple random samples
1 mC Students are selecting a sample of students at their school to complete an investigation. Which of
the following are examples of choosing this sample randomly?

a Choosing students queuing at the tuckshop.
B Assigning numbers to a list of student names and using a random number table to select random
numbers.
C Calling for volunteers.
d Choosing the girls in an all-girls science class.
e Choosing students in a bus on the way home.
2 Conduct an investigation into how much money students in your year level earn per week (this might
be an allowance or a wage). Write a report on your findings, ensuring you include:
a an explanation of the population for your investigation
b the manner in which your sample was selected
c the number in your sample
d your results as raw data
e your results in a stem plot or histogram
f the summary statistics for your data.
Comment on your results based on the summary statistics.
3 Repeat question 2, but this time investigate the following for students in your year level:
a the number of hours spent on homework each week
b the number of hours spent working in part-time jobs.
4 Conduct a similar investigation to that which you completed in questions 2 and 3; however, this time
sample students in another year group. Compare these data with those obtained for your year level.
42
Summary
Types of data
Univariate data are data with one variable. Sets of data that contain two variables are called
bivariate data and those that contain more than two variables are called multivariate data.
Numerical data involve quantities that are measurable or countable.
Categorical data, as the name suggests, are data that are divided into categories or groups.
Discrete data are produced when a variable can take only certain fixed values.
Continuous data are produced when a variable can take any value between two values.
Stem plots
A stem-and-leaf plot (or stem plot) is a useful way of displaying data containing up to about
50observations.
A stem plot is constructed by breaking the numerals of a record into two parts: a stem and
a leaf. The last digit is always the leaf and any preceding digits form the stem.
When asked to represent data using a stem-and-leaf plot, it is always assumed that the stem-andleaf plot willbe ordered.
If data are bunched then it may be useful to break the stems into halves or even fifths.
dot plots,
frequency
histograms and
bar charts
On a frequency histogram, the vertical axis displays the frequency and the horizontal axis displays
the classintervals.
Data given in raw form should be summarised first in a frequency table.
describing the shape

of stem plots and
histograms
When data are displayed in a histogram or a stem plot, we say that the distribution of those data is:
1. symmetric if there is a single peak and the data trail off on either side of this peak in roughly the
samefashion
2. negatively skewed if the data peak to the right and trail off to the left
3. positively skewed if the data peak to the left and trail off to the right.
The median, the

interquartile range,
the range and the
mode
The median is the midpoint of a set of data. Half the data are less than or equal to the median.
When there are n observations in a set of ordered data, the median can be located at the
Boxplots
n + 1
th position.
2
The interquartile range IQR = Q3 Q1.
The interquartile range gives us the range of the middle 50% of values in our set of data.
There are four steps to locating Q1 and Q3.
Step 1: Write down the set of data in ordered form from lowest to highest.
Step 2: Locate the median, that is, locate Q2.
Step 3: Now consider just the lower half of the set of data. Find the middle score. This score is Q1.
Step 4: Now consider just the upper half of the set of data. Find the middle score. This score is Q3.
The range of a set of data is the difference between the highest and lowest values in that set.
The mode is the score that occurs most often. If there is more than one score with the highest
frequency, then all scores with that frequency are the modes.
When data are displayed in a

boxplot we say that the
Minimum
Q2
distribution of the data is:
Q1
value
Median
1. symmetric if the whiskers
Whisker
are about the same length
and the median is about
halfway along the box
2. negatively skewed if the
left-hand whisker is longer
25%
25%
than the right-hand whisker
of data
of data
and the median occurs closer
to the right-hand end of the box
Box
25%
of data
A boxplot
Q3
Maximum
value
Whisker
25%
of data
43
3. positively skewed if the left-hand whisker is shorter than the right-hand whisker and the median
occurs closer to the left-hand end of the box.
4. An outlier is a score, x, which lies outside the interval:
Q1 1.5 IQR x Q3 + 1.5 IQR
The mean
x
The mean is given by x = n where x represents the sum of all the observations in the data set
and n represents the number of observations in the data set.
The mean is calculated by using the values of the observations and because of this it becomes a
less reliable measure of the centre of the distribution when the distribution is skewed or contains an
outlier.
( f m )
where f represents the frequency of the data and
To find the mean for grouped data, x =
f
m represents the midpoint of the class interval of the grouped data.
The more symmetrical the distribution, the closer the value of the mean is to the median.
Standard deviation
The standard deviation is a measure of the spread of data from the mean. The symbol for standard
deviation is s.
where: represents the sum of
( x x ) 2
x represents an observation
s=
n 1
x represents the mean
n represents the number of observations
The larger the standard deviation, the more spread are the data from the mean.
The 689599.7% rule

and z-scores
The 689599.7% rule for a bell-shaped curve states that:

1. approx. 68% of data lie within 1 standard deviation either side of the mean
2. approx. 95% of data lie within 2 standard deviations either side of the mean
3. approx. 99.7% of data lie within 3 standard deviations either side of the mean.
The z-score is used to measure the position of a score in a data set relative to the mean.
xx
, where x is the score, x is the mean and s is
The formula used to calculate the z-score is z =
s
the standard deviation.
Scores can be compared more accurately by their z-scores, which consider the mean and the
standard deviation of the data set in their calculations.
When comparing scores, read the question carefully to see if a higher or lower z-score is a better
outcome.
populations and
simple random
samples
44
A population, in statistics, is a group of people (or objects) to whom you can apply any
conclusions or generalisations that you reach in your investigation.
A sample, in statistics, is a smaller group of people (or objects) who have been chosen from the
population and are involved in the investigation.
A simple random sample is a random selection from the population such that every member of that
population has an equal chance of being chosen in the sample and the choice of one member does
not affect the choice of another member.
Chapter review
1 The best distances that a group of twenty 16-year-old competitors achieved in the long jump event at an
athletics meeting are recorded.

This is an example of:
a discrete, numerical data
B continuous, numerical data
C categorical data
d discrete, categorical data
e continuous, categorical data
2 The observations shown on the stem-and-leaf plot below right are:
a 20 21 26 27 28 29 30 31 35
B 20 20 21 26 27 28 29 30 31 31 35
C 20 21 26 27 28 29 30 31 35
d 20 20 21 26 27 28 29 29 30 31 31 35
e 20 21 26 27 28 29 29 30 31 35
m U lTip l e
C ho iC e
Stem Leaf
2* 0 0 1
2* 6 7 8 9 9
3* 0 1 1
3* 5
Key: 2|1 = 21
Stem Leaf
8 59
a seating capacity of 150, during the Australian Open Tennis Tournament are
9 2349
displayed in the stem plot at right. Which of the following statements is untrue
10 558
about the data?
11 01667
a The smallest number of people attending was 85.
12 47788
B Only during six sessions did attendance fall below 100.
13 5799
C The largest number of people attending was 140.
14 02
d On six occasions the number of people attending was more than 130.
e On one occasion the number of people attending was only eight less than the
Key: 9|2 = 92
seating capacity.
4 Which one of the following frequency tables accurately summarises the scores shown below?
3 The number of people attending 25 of the sessions at an outside court, which has
7
1
3
a
Score Frequency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
2
5
2
4
6
3
2
Score Frequency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
3
8
2
3
3
4
1
3
4
3
4
6
4
1
3
6
7
8
2
6
7
8
5
Score Frequency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4
7
2
3
2
3
1
5
2
3
4
3
9
9
4
2
4
9
C
Score Frequency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3
2
1
3
1
5
3
2
4
Score Frequency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3
4
3
2
2
1
3
2
1
45
5 The distribution of data shown in the stem plot at right could best be
Frequency
described as:
a negatively skewed
B negatively skewed with one outlier
C positively skewed
d positively skewed with one outlier
e symmetric
6 The distribution of the data shown in the histogram below could best be
described as:
a negatively skewed
B negatively skewed with one outlier
C positively skewed
d positively skewed with one outlier
e symmetric
Stem Leaf
2* 3 4
2* 5 6 8
3* 0 1 2 3 4 4
3* 5 5 7 9 9
4* 0 1 3 3
4* 6 8 8
5* 0 1
5* 6
6*
6* 9
Key: 3|1 = 31
7 A set of data contains 7 observations and has a median of 5 and a range of 3. The set of data could be:
a 4 4 5 6 7
d 1 3 5 5 5 6 7
B 1 1 2 3 4 5 6
e 3 5 7
C 4 5 5 5 6 7 7
8 The median of the set of data shown in the stem plot below is:
a 5
Stem Leaf
1 2 3
2 0 4 5 7
3 1 2 5 9
4 1 3 6 7
5 2 9 9
6 3
Key: 2|4 = 24
C 9
B 7
d 9.5
e 37
9 For the distribution shown in this boxplot, it is true to say that:

a
B
C
d
e
the range is 35
the median is 20
the median is equal to the interquartile range
10 15 20 25 30 35
10 A distribution has a range of 80, an interquartile range of 30 and a median of 50. Which one of the
following boxplots could represent this distribution?

C
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 x
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
11 The boxplot at right represents the lengths of barracuda
caught by fishing boats during one day. Which one of

the following statements is not true about these data?
a The data contain an outlier.
B The shortest length is 0.4 m.
C The median is 60 cm.
d The interquartile range is 0.2 m.
e The distribution is positively skewed.
46
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
Length of fish (m)
1.2
12 For the following set of data, 14 18 20 21 23 23 24 25 29 30, the mean is:

a 10
B 22.666666
C 22.7
d 23
e 24.222222
13 The ages of a group of students entering university for the first time is shown on the stem plot below.
What is the mean age?

a 18
B 18.9
C 19
d 20.9
e 21
Frequency
Stem Leaf
1
1* 5 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 9
2 0 0 0 1 1
2* 6 8
3 1
3* 5
Key: 1*|5 = 15 years
14 In which case below would you expect the mean to be greater than the median?
a
B Stem Leaf
1*
1* 5
2* 1 4
2* 5 7 8 8 9
3* 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4
3* 5 5 5 6
4* 3 4
4*
C The data:
d
11 13 16 17 18 18 19 20
Frequency
Key: 2|4 = 24
15 In which case in question 14 is the median not necessarily the better measure of the centre of the data?
16 The Millers obtained a number of quotes on the price of having their home painted. The quotes, to the
nearest hundred dollars, were:
4200
5100
4700
4600
4800
5000
4700
4900
The standard deviation for this set of data, to the nearest whole dollar, is:
B 278
C 324
d 325
a 277
17 The number of Year 12 students who spent their spare periods studying
in the resource centre during each week of terms 3 and 4 is shown on the
stem plot at right.
The standard deviation for this set of data, to the nearest whole number is:
a 10
B 12
C 14
d 17
e 35
e 4750
Stem Leaf
0 8
1
2 5 6 6 7
3 0 2 3 6 9
4 7 9
5 6
6 1
Key: 2|5 = 25 students
18 The lifetime (in hours) of a particular type of battery is known to have a distribution which is bell-
shaped. A large number of batteries of this type are sampled and are found to have a mean lifetime
of 1200 hours and a standard deviation of 10 hours. We would expect that approximately 95% of the
batteries in the sample would have a lifetime (in hours) between:
a 10 and 1200
B 1170 and 1230
C 1200 and 1210
d 1180 and 1220
e 1190 and 1210
47
19 A set of marks from a maths test has a mean of 45 and a standard deviation of 5. The distribution of
the marks is known to be bell-shaped. Which of the following statements is false?

a Approximately 68% of the marks lie between 40 and 50.
B The distribution is approximately symmetric.
C Approximately 95% of the marks lie between 35 and 50.
d A mark in the twenties would be most unusual.
e Approximately 99.7% of the marks lie between 30 and 60.
20 The mean length of a large batch of broom handles is 120 cm. The data have a standard deviation of
3cm. The percentage of broom handles, in this batch, which are shorter than 114 cm is:
a 0.15%
B 2.5%
C 13.5%
d 16%
e 34%
21 The mean birth weight of babies
at a hospital is 2.8 kg with a standard
deviation of 0.4 kg. The standardised score
for a weight of 3.3 kg would be:
a 0.73
B 1.25
C 1.04
d 1.25
e 1.04
Sh orT
anS Wer
1 Write an example of a variable which produces:

a categorical data
b numerical data that are:
i discrete
ii continuous.
2 The money (rounded to the nearest whole dollar) raised by fifteen Year 12 students is shown below.
78
84
61
73
71
83
87
65
60
67
71
82
84
79
78
Construct a stem plot for the amount raised using:

a the stems 6, 7 and 8
b the stems 6, 7 and 8 split into halves
c the stems 6, 7 and 8 split into fifths.
Discuss your results.
3 a The following frequency table shows the speeds of cars recorded by police. The cars were travelling
through a 60 km/h zone. Construct a histogram to display the data.
Class interval
5051.9
5253.9
5455.9
5657.9
5859.9
6061.9
6263.9
6465.9
6667.9
6869.9
7071.9
7273.9
7475.9
b Check your work using a CAS calculator.
c Draw two conclusions about these data.
48
Frequency
3
5
6
7
9
10
9
10
8
5
3
4
2
Stem Leaf
0 8 9
1 2 3 4
2 1 2 2
3 0 1 4
4 3 5 6
5 1 3 5
6 4 6
7 6
Key: 0|8 = $8
5 Find the range, the median, the mode and the interquartile range of this set of data.
4 The money raised (to the nearest whole dollar) by each student
in a Year 3 class on the school walkathon is shown in the stem

plot at right.
a Describe the shape of the distribution of these data.
b Describe how this distribution would need to change for it
to become a symmetric one.
7
3 5 7 9
5 8
7
Stem Leaf
0
2
0* 5 6 6 8 9
1
0 2 2 4 4 4
1* 5 5 7 8 8 9
2
1 3
2* 6
Key: 1|4 = 14
6 a For the set of data below, construct a boxplot to display the distribution.
2
1
5
4
4
6
6
8
3
7
7
5
9
2
8
9
5
5
3
6
b Describe the shape of the distribution.

7 The ages of a group of people attending a classical music recital are shown in the frequency table below.
Age (class interval)

4044
4549
5054
5559
6064
6569
7074
7579
Frequency
4
6
11
16
23
18
10
2
Calculate the mean age of those attending the recital.

8 A chemical component is added to a filtering system on a weekly basis. The amount of chemical
component required each week varies. The amounts required (in mL) over the past 20 weeks are shown
in the stem plot below.
Calculate to 2 decimal places the standard deviation of the amounts used.
Stem
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
Leaf
1
2 2
4 4 4 5
6 6
8 8 9 9
0
2 2
4 5
6
8
Key: 3|8 = 0.38 mL

49
9 The life spans of dogs of a particular breed follow a bell-shaped distribution. A group of this particular
breed at a dog club was found to have a mean life span of 12 years with a standard deviation of
1.2years.
a For this group, write down the expected values between which the life spans of approximately:
i 68% of the dogs would lie
ii 95% of the dogs would lie
iii 99.7% of the dogs would lie.
b What does this information suggest about this breed?
10 Ricardo scored 85 on an entrance test for a job. The test has a mean score of 78 and a standard
deviation of 8. Kory sits a similar test and scores 27. In this test, the mean is 18 and the standard
deviation is 6. Based on this test, who is the better candidate for the job? Explain your answer.
e x Tended
r e S p onS e
1 Mr Fahey gives the same test to the two Year 10 classes that he teaches, 10C and 10E. The test is out of
20. The results in 10C are:

4
13
17
7
14
17
7
14
18
9
15
18
9
15
18
10
15
19
10
16
19
11
17
12
17
8
13
14
9
13
15
10
13
15
11
13
15
11
14
16
12
14
16
12
14
19
12
14
13
14
The results in 10E are:
a For each of these sets of data:

i display the data using a histogram or a stem plot. Give reasons for your choices. Also describe
the shapes of the distribution

calculate the median, the interquartile range, the range and the mode
represent each set of data using a boxplot
calculate the mean and the standard deviation
state whether the mean or the median is a better measure of the centre of each distribution
comment as to whether the 689599.7% rule can be applied to either of the distributions.
b Using the summary statistics you have calculated, comment on and compare the performances of
10C and 10E on the test.
2 A group of office workers and a group of sports instructors were asked to complete 5 minutes of
exercise as part of a study of heart rates. Following the exercise, participants rested for 2minutes before
their pulse rates were measured. The results are set out below in the stem plots.
ii
iii
iv
v
vi
Pulse rates for office

workers (beats/min)
Stem Leaf
7 6
8
9 5
10 6 7
11 0 2
12 0 1 2 4 6 7 9
13 0 0 4
a
b
c
d
e
f
50
Pulse rates for sports

instructors (beats/min)
Stem Leaf
6 2 4 8 8 9
7 2 2 3 5 7 9
8 2 8
9 6
10 8
Key: 12|4 = 124 beats/min
Describe the shape of each distribution.

Calculate the median, the interquartile range, the mode and the range for both.
Represent each set of data using a boxplot.
Calculate the mean and the standard deviation for both sets of data.
Comment as to whether the 689599.7% rule can be applied to either of the distributions.
Use the summary statistics that you have calculated to comment on the pulse rates of each group,
noting any differences between the two.
3 A hatch of Atlantic salmon has been reared in a coastal environment over a period of 12 months. The
lengths (to the nearest cm) of a sample of 20, out of the total number of 10 000 fish, are shown below.
13 16 17 14 16 19 15 17 16 15
16 18 16 13 17 14 18 15 19 16
a Describe the type of data that the variable produces.
b Construct an appropriate stem plot from these data and use it to describe the shape of the distribution.
c Using your stem plot, calculate the five number summary statistics and then draw a boxplot.
d Describe the shape of the distribution from the boxplot.
e Does the stem plot or boxplot give a better indication of the distributions shape?
f For a symmetric distribution the mean is the same as the median. Is that the case here?
g Given that the distribution is symmetric, the whole population of these salmon would form a normal
or bell-shaped distribution. Find the standard deviation (to 2 decimal places) for this sample and use
it, along with the mean, to find the number of fish with lengths greater than 17.75 cm.
The same number of salmon was reared in a river environment over the same period of time. The
lengths of 20fish in a sample are shown below.
18 20 17 19 16 19 19 17 16 18
19 18 12 18 17 14 18 15 19 17
h Use an appropriate method to help you describe the shape of this distribution.
i Determine how many of this population of 10 000 salmon would have a length greater than
19.25 cm (calculate the standard deviation to 2 decimal places).
j Comment on the growth of each hatch of salmon over the 12 months.
4 The birth weights (in kg) of 50 of the 220 babies that were born at a hospital during a one-month period
are listed below.
2.9 2.7 3.1 2.5 2.4 2.6 2.9 2.6 3.2 4.1
2.3 2.8 2.4 3.2 2.7 2.5 2.6 2.9 3.0 2.2
3.4 3.1 3.3 2.9 3.2 2.9 3.4 3.1 2.3 3.5
3.1 3.0 2.9 3.6 3.1 2.7 2.6 1.8 1.9 3.6
2.0 3.4 3.5 2.4 3.5 3.0 2.2 2.8 3.5 3.1
a Construct a frequency histogram for the data using class intervals of 1.51.9, 2.02.4, 2.52.9 and
so on.
b Comment on the shape of the distribution.
c It has been said that the mean birth weight of babies is 3 kg. Using the data given, comment on
this statement.
d Using the mean and standard deviation (to 2 decimal places) for this sample of 50 birth weights,
determine how many of the 220 babies born at the hospital had weights:
i between 2.35 kg and 3.43 kg
ii between 3.43 kg and 3.97 kg
iii greater than 3.97 kg.
diGiTal doC
doc-9408
Test Yourself
Chapter 1
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
DA
Practice
VCE exam
questions
Use StudyON to
access all exam
questions on this
topic since 2002.
51
ICT activities
Chapter opener
diGiTal doC
10 Quick Questions doc-9399: Warm up with a quick quiz on
univariate data. (page 1)
1a
Types of data
diGiTal doC
WorkSHEET 1.1 doc-9400: Apply your knowledge of univariate data
to construct and analyse stem plots. (page 2)
1C
dot plots, frequency histograms and bar charts
diGiTal doCS
Spreadsheet doc-9401: Create a segmented bar chart. (page 9)
SkillSHEET 1.1 doc-9402: Practise converting a fraction into a
percentage. (page 10)
Spreadsheet doc-9403: Conduct a survey and plot your results on a
histogram. (page 10)
1d describing the shape of stem plots and

histograms
diGiTal doC
WorkSHEET 1.2 doc-9404: Apply your knowledge of univariate data
to construct and analyse stem plots and boxplots and to construct
histograms. (page 14)
TUTorial
We7 eles-1254: Learn how to describe the shape of stem plots
and bar charts. (page 12)
inTeraCTiViTY
Measures of centre int-0084: Use the interactivity to calculate the
mean, median and mode of a set of univariate data. (page 15)
1F
Boxplots
diGiTal doC
Spreadsheet doc-9406: Conduct a survey and use a spreadsheet to
study the effect of uniformly spread data. (page 23)
TUTorial
We13 eles-1256: Learn how to construct a boxplot using a CAS
calculator. (page 21)
1G
The mean
TUTorial
We16 eles-1257: Watch a tutorial on calculating the mean using
data in a frequency table. (page 26)
1i
diGiTal doC
SkillSHEET 1.2 doc-9407: Refine your knowledge of percentages.
(page 38)
TUTorial
We20 eles-1258: See how normal distributions can be used to
determine percentages above or below a certain mass. (page 33)
inTeraCTiViTY
The 689599.7% rule and z-scores int-0182: Use the interactivity
to consolidate your understanding of the normal distribution and
confidence intervals. (page 32)
1e The median, the interquartile range, the range

and the mode
Chapter review
diGiTal doC
Spreadsheet doc-9405: Conduct a survey and find the median of a
set of data. (page 18)
diGiTal doC
Test Yourself doc-9408: Take the end-of-chapter test to test your
progress. (page 51)
TUTorial
We9 eles-1255: Discover how to calculate the interquartile range
of a set of univariate data. (page 16)
52
To access eBookPLUS activities, log on to www.jacplus.com.au
Answers CHAPTER 1
exercise 1B
Stem plots
2
5
8 12 13 13 16
17 21 23 24 25 25 26
30 32
11 23 23 30 35 39 41
47 55 62
102 115 118 122 123
136 136 137 141 143
155 155 156 157
51 53 53 54 55 55 56
57 59
4 5 8 10 12 16 19 19
21 25 29
Leaf
5
1 8 9
3 7 9
1 2 5 6 7 9
1 2 3 5
2
Key: |50 = $5
Buskers earnings are inconsistent.
Stem Leaf
3 7 9
4 2 9 9
5 1 1 2 3 7 8 9
6 1 3 3 8
Key: |73 = 37 years
It seems to be an activity for older people.
C
Stem Leaf
1* 9
2
2* 5 8 8 9 9 9
3 0 0 2 2 2 3 3 4
3* 5 5 7 8 9
Key: |52 = 25 years
Ages are spread considerably; not all
parents are young.
Stem Leaf
1* 9
2 1 2 4
2* 5 6 8 9 9
3 1 1 2 3 4
3*
4 0 1
Key: |12 = 21 hit outs
Bulldogs, Melbourne, St Kilda
Stem Leaf
18 5 7 9
19 1 5 6 6 7 9
20 1 3 3 5 9
21 7
22 1
Key: 18
|5 = 1.85 m
1
16
27
b 10
42
c 101
123
144
d 50
56
e 1
21
2 Stem
0
1
2
3
4
5
1 a
4
5
6
3
Stem
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
0 8
3 8
1 a
0 0 0
Key: 51
|5 = $515 000
There are two groups, one with house
prices between $510 000 and $550 000 and
the other with prices between $580 000
and $670 000.
b
9 a Stem
Leaf
4 3 7 7 8 8 9 9 9
5 0 0 0 0 1 2 2 3
Leaf
4 3
4* 7 7 8 8 9 9 9
5 0 0 0 0 1 2 2 3
5*
7
9 9
1 1 1
3
11.9
22.9
33.9
44.9
55.9
66.9
1
2
2
6
5
1
Class interval
Frequency
1014
1519
2024
2529
3034
3539
3
9
10
10
10
1
Key: |34 = 43 cm
Leaf
3
7
8 9 9 9
0 0 0 1
2 3
2 a
Key: |34 = 43 cm
10 a Stem
Leaf
1 5 6 7 7 7 8 9 9 9 9
2 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 3 3 3
Key: |51 = 15 mm
b Stem
7
9
0
3
Frequency
b Stem
7
8
0
2
7
9
0
3
Class
Key: |34 = 43 cm
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
8
0
2
exercise 1C dot plots, frequency

histograms and bar charts
2 3
c Stem
Leaf
Key: |51 = 15 mm
Values are bunched together; they vary
little.
0 0 8
Frequency
Types of data
1 Numerical a, b, c, g, h
Categorical d, e, f, i, j, k, l, m
2 Discrete c, g, m
Continuous a, b, h
3 C
4C
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Score
Frequency
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
01 2 3 4 5 6 7
Score
b
Frequency
exercise 1a
Leaf
5 7
5 6
6
8
8 Stem
10
8
6
4
2
0 10 1520 25 303540
Leaf
1
1* 5 6 7 7 7 8 9 9 9 9
2 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 3 3 3
2*
Key: |51 = 15 mm
Score
Frequency
UniVariaTe daTa
2
1
00.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4
Score
53
Number of students
3 Check your histograms against those

shown in question 2 answers.
4
8
6
4
2
0
3 4 5 6 7
Number of hours
10
2and5) interstate per month. A few stay

away more than this and a very few stay
away a lot more.
7 a Symmetric
b This tells us that there are few lowweight dogs and few heavy dogs but
most dogs have a weight in the range of
10 to 19 kg.
8 a Symmetric
b Most students receive about $8 (give or
take $2).
9 a Positively skewed b i 15
ii 85%
exercise 1e
The median, the

interquartile range, the range and the
mode
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Hours/week
5 a NZ
US
UK
India
China
Thailand
Fiji
Singapore
HK
Malaysia
26.5%
13.5%
12.8%
10.1%
7.5%
6.4%
6.2%
6.0%
5.9%
5.1%
1
a
b
c
d
e
2
UK 12.8%
Thailand 6.4%
HK 5.9%
6 Participation in activities
Range
56
17
18
18
72
Median
6
17
6
10
18.5
4
19
4.5
23
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
NZ 26.5%
US 13.5%
India 10.1%
China 7.5%
Fiji 6.2%
Singapore 6.0%
Malaysia 5.1%
Median
37
5
11
42.5
628
Mode
38, 49
5
8, 11
43
613, 628, 632
Range
7
9
6
13
14
7
17
9
21
4554 years 18.1%

5564 years 14%
65 and over 12.5%
The statement seems untrue as there are

similar participation rates for all ages.
However, the data dont indicate types of
activities.
exercise 1d describing the shape of
stem plots and histograms
1 a Symmetric
b Negatively skewed
c Positively skewed
d Symmetric
e Symmetric
f Positively skewed
2 a Symmetric, no artliers
b Symmetric, no artliers
c Symmetric, no artliers
d Negatively skewed, no artliers
e Negatively skewed, no artliers
f Positively skewed, no artliers
3 E
4 C
5 Negatively skewed
6 Positively skewed. This tells us that most
of the flight attendants in this group spend
a similar number of nights (between
54
21
27.5
3.7
a
b
c
8
18
8
3
45
20
5.9
42
32
21
7
91
30
Median
12
7
350
100
20
6
2
100
30
10
8
5
250
65
25
a
b
c
d
e
b iv
c i
d ii
2 a iii
3 The boxplots should show the following:
Minimum
value
Q1
Median
Q3
3
3
4.3
11
0.4
6
5
4.6
15.5
0.7
8.5
7
5
18
0.9
14
9
5.4
20
1.1
a
b
c
d
e
Maximum
value
18
12
5.6
22
1.3
4 D
5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Number of clients seen in a day
2
4
6
8
Number of rides
10
The data are negatively skewed with an

outlier on the lower end. The reason for
the outlier may be that the person wasnt
at the show for long or possibly didnt like
the rides.
8 a Two similar properties: both sets of
data have the same minimum value and
similar IQR value.
b Boys IQR = 16
Girls IQR = 16.5
c The reason for an outlier in the boys
data may be that the student did not
understand how to do the test, or he
stopped during the test rather than
working continuously.
Mode
15, 23, 32
29
3.7
Interquartile
Median
range
Range Mode
a
b
Interquartile
range
7 a
Interquartile
range
Range
Range
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Temperature (C)
for the two restaurants but there is no

indication of the actual numbers of cars.
4 An example is 2 3 6 8 9. There are many
others.
5 a Yes. The lowest score occurs several
times. An example is 2 2 2 3 5 6.
b Yes. There are several data points that
have the median value. An example is
3 5 5 5 5 5 7.
6 C
Median
Boxplots
3 a 10
b 8
c The IQRs (middle 50%) are similar
1824 years 14.2%
2534 years 21.1%
3544 years 20.3%
exercise 1F
46
34
The data in set a have a greater spread than

in set b, although the medians are similar.
The spread of the middle 50% (IQR) of
data for set a is bigger than for setb but
the difference is not as great as the spread
for all the data (range).
exercise 1G
The mean
b 7.125
c 4.9875
..
.
d 16.7 .
e 0.8818
a 1.0783 No, because of the outlier.
b 17 Yes
c 30.875 Yes
d 15.57 No, because of the outlier.
12
4 D
5 A
a Median
b Mean
c Median
d Median
a 36.09
b 16.63
c 168.25
d 18.55
a x = 24.4
b median = 22
The distribution is positively skewed
confirmed by the table and the boxplot.
1 a 7.2
2
3
6
7
8
i boxplots will show:
Standard deviation
2.36
c 6.01
0.06
0.06 m
1 a 1.21
b
d 2.45
e
2 0.48%
3
4 0.51 seconds
5 15.49
6
exercise 1i
z-scores
1 a Yes
d No
Cage
5.15
Barn
4.35
FR
4.1
ii It could be concluded that the more
space a chicken has, the fewer eggs it
lays because the median is greatest for
cage eggs.
C
The 689599.7% rule and
b Yes
e No
c No
f Yes
2 a 8 and 12
b 6 and 14
c 4 and 16
3 a 3.7 and 6.3
b 2.4 and 7.6
c 1.1 and 8.9
4 a 35 s and 63 s
b 21 s and 77 s
c 7 s and 91 s
5 a 1.3 mm a nd 2.5 mm
b 0.7 mm a nd 3. 1 mm
c 0.1 mm a nd 3. 7 mm
6 a 11.7 N and 12.3 N
b 11.4 N and 12.6 N
c 11.1 N and 12.9 N
7 a 5 and 9
b 3 and 11
c 1 and 13
8E
9C
10 a 84%
b 2.5%
c 84%
d 97.35%
11 a 0.15%
b 2.5%
c 84%
d 83.85%
e 81.5%
12 C
13 a 336
b 10
c 380
14 a i 1360
ii 1950
iii 317
b 100
15 3
16 2
17 0.27
18 1.5
19 a 0.48
b 1.44
c 0.08
d 2.24
e 2.8
20 a x = 19.55, s = 1.76
b 1.68
21 B
22 B
23 a English 1.25, Maths 1.33
b Maths mark is better as it has a higher
exercise 1J populations and simple

random samples
1
2
3
4
mUlTiple ChoiCe
B
A
D
B
D
4.7
3.9
3.8
Q1
4.1
med
5.15
4.35
4.1
Q3
5.5
4.6
4.2
Xmax
5.8
4.9
4.4
4
9
14
19
D
E
A
C
5
10
15
20
C
B
B
B
b Stem
Leaf
6 0 1
6* 5 7
7 1 1 3
7* 8 8 9
8 2 3 4 4
8* 7
Key: 6|0 = $6
compared to 0.5 in the first test.

s = 0.3
FR x = 4.1 s = 0.2
b z = 1.18
c 84%
Xmin
C
E
D
D
6 0 1 5 7
7 1 1 3 8 8 9
8 2 3 4 4 7
Key: 6|0 = $6
25 a Barn x = 4.4
Barn Free range
3
8
13
18
1 Many answers possible.

2 a Stem Leaf
z-score.
Cage
D
C
C
C
ShorT anSWer
24 Second test, Barbaras z-score was 0.33
2
7
12
17
symmetrical. More than half the drivers

exceeded the limit. The fastest drivers
were about 15 km/h over the limit. Many
other conclusions are possible.
4 a Positively skewed
b There would need to be a shift of some
of the amounts in the twenties to the
thirties and forties.
5 Range = 24, median = 14, mode = 14,
interquartile range = 9.5
1 2
ChapTer reVieW
1
6
11
16
21
c The data are approximately
6 a
Answers will vary.

Answers will vary.
Answers will vary.
Stem Leaf
6 0 1
6
6 5
6 7
6
7 1 1
7 3
7
7
7 8 8 9
8
8 2 3
8 4 4
8 7
8
Key: 6|0 = $6
3 a
3 4
6 7
8 9 10
b Approximately symmetric
7 60.4 years
8 0.05 mL
9 a i 10.8 and 13.2 years
ii 9.6 and 14.4 years
iii 8.4 and 15.6 years
b There is a large range of life spans for
these dogs. The oldest dog is almost

twice as old as the youngest.
10 Kory is the better candidate as he has a
greater z-score (1.5 compared with 0.875).
exTended reSponSe
1 a i A stem plot is more appropriate since
there are only 25 observations in each

set.
10C
10E
Stem Leaf
Stem Leaf
0
0
0
0
0 4
0
0 7 7
0
0 9 9
0 8 9
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 1
1 2 3
1 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
1 4 4 5 5 5
1 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5
1 6 7 7 7 7
1 6 6
1 8 8 8 9 9
1 9
Key: 1|3 = 13
The distribution of 10C is negatively skewed
with no outliers.
The distribution of 10E is symmetric with no
outliers.
ii
Class Median
10C
10E
Interquartile
range
Range Mode
15
13
7
2.5
15
11
17
14
iii 10E
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
10C
Stem plot b is probably an appropriate

display. No real need for stems in fifths.
Frequency
exercise 1h
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
10
8
6
4
2
iv
Class
0 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76
Speed (km/h)
10C
10E
Mean
13.64
13.2
Standard
deviation
4.24
2.35
55
indication, whereas for 10E the mean

and the median are close anyway.
vi The 689599.7% rule can be applied
to the distribution of 10Es data since it
is approximately bell-shaped.
b We use the median of the 10C scores
to give us an indication of the centre of
the distribution. The median of the 10C
scores is 15. For 10E, the distribution is
symmetric and hence we use the mean
to give us an indication of the centre
of the distribution. The mean of 10E
scores is 13.2. The range of the 10C
scores is 15 whereas for 10E the range
is 11. Also, the standard deviation for
10C is 4.24 and for 10E it is 2.35. This
means that the scores in 10C are more
spread out than those in 10E, which are
relatively bunched. So, while in 10C
there are more students with higher
marks than in 10E, the range of marks in
10C is greater and this would make it a
more challenging class toteach.
2 a Office workers: negatively skewed with
outlier. Sports instructors: positively
skewed with outlier.
b
Median
IQR
Range
Mode
c
Office workers
Sports
instructors
121.5 beats/min
19.5 beats/min
58 beats/min
130 beats/min
73 beats/min
14 beats/min
46 beats/min
68, 72 beats/min
Office workers
70
80
90 100 110 120 130 140

Beats per minute
Sports instructors
60
70
80 90 100
Beats per minute
Office workers
110
Sports instructors
x = 116.8 beats/min x = 76.9 beats/min

s = 15.3 beats/min s = 12.4 beats/min
56
e Not used since the distributions are not
bell-shaped.
f Office workers: Pulse rates are generally
very high, clustered around 120130
beats/min. Also, there is one person
whose rate was much lower than the
rest. This outlier (76) produces a large
range and makes the mean slightly lower
than the median. As a result the median
is a more appropriate measure of the
centre of the data rather than the mean.
Sports instructors: Pulse rates are
generally low, clustered around
6070beats/min, although there are
a few people with rates much higher,
which makes the mean slightly higher
than the median and also produces quite
a large range. As a result of the skewed
distribution the median is the more
appropriate measure of the centre of the
data rather than the mean, although there
is little difference between these values.
3 a Discrete, numerical data
b Stem Leaf
1
1 3 3
1 4 4 5 5 5
1 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7
1 8 8 9 9
Key: 1|3 = 13 cm
Looks to be slightly negatively skewed.
c Q2 = 16 cm
Q1 = 15 cm
Q3 = 17 cm
Lowest score = 13 cm
Highest score = 19 cm
14 16 18 20
Fish length (cm)
d
e
f
g
h
Symmetric
Given the data itself, the boxplot does.
Mean = 16 cm = median
s = 1.75 cm, 1600
12
14 16 18 20
Fish length (cm)
Negatively skewed with an outlier at the

lower end
i 1600
j The river fish seem to be larger overall.
Only 1600 of the coastal fish lie above

17.75 cm, whereas 1600 of the river fish
lie above 19.25 cm. All the quartiles
for the river fish are higher than those
for the coastal ones. It would seem that
the river fish have grown more than the
coastal fish.
4 a
Class
interval
Tally
1.51.9
1.7
2.02.4
2.2
2.52.9
17
2.7
16
3.2
Frequency Mid-point
3.03.4
3.53.9
3.7
4.04.4
4.2
Frequency
v For 10C the median provides a better
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5
Birth weight (kg)
b Somewhat symmetrical or slightly
positively skewed
c Mean = 2.89 kg, s = 0.54 kg
The mean of the sample is only just less

than the suggested mean, in fact it is
only about 0.2 of 1standard deviation
away from it. So the suggestion is
probably right.
d i 149
ii 29
iii 5
ChapTer 2
Bivariate data
diGiTal doC
doc-9409
10 Quick Questions
ChapTer ConTenTS
2a
2B
2C
2d
2e
2F
2G
Dependent and independent variables

Back-to-back stem plots
Parallel boxplots
Two-way frequency tables and segmented bar charts
Scatterplots
Pearsons productmoment correlation coefficient
Calculating r and the coefficient of determination
dependent and independent

variables
2a
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Dependent variable
In this chapter we will study sets of data that contain two variables. These are known as bivariate data.
We will look at ways of displaying the data and of measuring relationships between the two variables.
The methods we employ to do this depend on the type of variables we are dealing with; that is, they
depend on whether the data are numerical or categorical.
We will discuss the ways of measuring the relationship between the following pairs of variables:
1. a numerical variable and a categorical variable (for example, height and nationality)
2. two categorical variables (for example, gender and religious denomination)
3. two numerical variables (for example, height and weight).
In a relationship involving two variables, if the values of one variable depend on the values of
another variable, then the former variable is referred to as the dependent variable and the latter variable
is referred to as the independent variable.
When a relationship between two sets of variables is being examined, it is important to know which
one of the two variables depends on the other. Most often we can make a judgement about this, although
sometimes it may not be possible.
Consider the case where a study compared the heights of company employees against their annual
salaries. Common sense would suggest that the height of a company employee would not depend on the
persons annual salary nor would the annual salary of a company employee depend on the persons
height. In this case, it is not appropriate to designate one variable as independent and one as dependent.
In the case where the ages of company employees are compared with
their annual salaries, you might reasonably expect that the annual salary of
an employee would depend on the persons age. In this case, the age of the
employee is the independent variable and the salary of the employee is the
dependent variable.
It is useful to identify the independent and dependent variables where
possible, since it is the usual practice when displaying data on a graph to
place the independent variable on the horizontal axis and the dependent
Independent variable
variable on the vertical axis.
ChapTer 2 Bivariate data
57
Worked example 1
For each of the following pairs of variables, identify the independent variable and the dependent
variable. If it is not possible to identify this, then write not appropriate.
a The number of visitors at a local swimming pool and the daily temperature
b The blood group of a person and his or her favourite TV channel
Think
WriTe
a It is reasonable to expect that the number of
visitors at the swimming pool on any day will

depend on the temperature on that day (and not
the other way around).
b Common sense suggests that the blood type
a Daily temperature is the independent variable;
number of visitors at a local swimming pool is

the dependent variable.
b Not appropriate
of a person does not depend on the persons

TVchannelpreferences. Similarly, the choice
of a TVchannel does not depend on a persons
bloodtype.
exercise 2a
dependent and independent variables
1 We1 For each of the following pairs of variables, identify the independent variable and the dependent
variable. If it is not possible to identify this, then write not appropriate.

a The age of an AFL footballer and his annual salary
b The growth of a plant and the amount of fertiliser it receives
c The number of books read in a week and the eye colour of the readers
d The voting intentions of a woman and her weekly consumption of red meat
e The number of members in a household and the size of the house
f The month of the year and the electricity bill for that month
g The mark obtained for a maths test and the number of hours spent preparing for the test
h The mark obtained for a maths test and the mark obtained for an English test
i The cost of grapes (in dollars per kilogram) and the season of the year
2 mC In a scientific experiment, the independent variable was the amount of sleep (in hours) a new
mother got per night during the first month following the birth of her baby. The dependent variable
would most likely have been:
a the number of times (per night) the baby woke up for a feed
B the blood pressure of the baby
C the mothers reaction time (in seconds) to a certain stimulus
d the level of alertness of the baby
e the amount of time (in hours) spent by the mother on reading
3 mC A paediatrician investigated the relationship between the amount of time children aged two to five
spend outdoors and the annual number of visits to his clinic. Which one of the following statements is
not true?
a When graphed, the amount of time spent outdoors should be shown on the horizontal axis.
B The annual number of visits to the paediatric clinic is the dependent variable.
C It is impossible to identify the independent variable in this case.
d The amount of time spent outdoors is the independent variable.
e The annual number of visits to the paediatric clinic should be shown on the vertical axis.
4 mC Alex works as a personal trainer at the local gym. He wishes to analyse the relationship between
the number of weekly training sessions and the weekly weight loss of his clients. Which one of the
following statements is correct?
a When graphed, the number of weekly training sessions should be shown on the vertical axis, as it
is the dependent variable.
B When graphed, the weekly weight loss should be shown on the vertical axis, as it is the
independent variable.
58
C When graphed, the weekly weight loss should be shown on the horizontal axis, as it is the
independent variable.
d When graphed, the number of weekly training sessions should be shown on the horizontal axis, as
it is the independent variable.

e It is impossible to identify the dependent variable in this case.
2B
In chapter 1, we saw how to construct a stem plot for a set of univariate data. We can also extend a
stem plot so that it displays bivariate data. Specifically, we shall create a stem plot that displays the
relationship between a numerical variable and a categorical variable. We shall limit ourselves in this
section to categorical variables with just two categories, for example, gender. The two categories are
used to provide two back-to-back leaves of a stem plot.
A back-to-back stem plot is used to display bivariate data, involving a numerical variable and a
categorical variable with 2 categories.
Worked example 2
The girls and boys in Grade 4 at Kingston Primary School submitted projects
on the Olympic Games. The marks they obtained out of 20 are given below.
Girls marks
16
17
19
15
12
16
17
19
19
16
Boys marks
14
15
16
13
12
13
14
13
15
14
TUTorial
eles-1259
Worked example 2
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Display the data on a back-to-back stem plot.

Think
1
Identify the highest and lowest scores in order

to decide on the stems.
Create an unordered stem plot first. Put the

boys scores on the left, and the girls scores on
the right.
WriTe
Highest score = 19
Lowest score = 12
Use a stem of 1, divided into fifths.
Leaf
Boys
3 2 3 3
4 5 4 54
6
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Stem Leaf
Girls
1
1
2
1
5
1
6 7 6 7 6
1
9 9 9
See more
Watch
a video about
constructing backto-back stem plots.
Key: 1| 2 = 12
3
Now order the stem plot. The scores on the

left should increase in value from right to left,
while the scores on the right should increase in
value from left to right.
Leaf
Boys
3 3 3 2
5 5 4 44
6
Stem Leaf
Girls
1
2
1
5
1
6 6 6 7 7
1
9 9 9
Key: 1| 2 = 12
The back-to-back stem plot allows us to make some visual comparisons of the two distributions.In the
previous example, the centre of the distribution for the girls is higher than the centre of the distribution
for the boys. The spread of each of the distributions seems to be about the same. For the boys, the scores
are grouped around the 1215 mark; for the girls, they are grouped around the 1619 mark. On the
whole, we can conclude that the girls obtained better scores than the boys did.
59
To get a more precise picture of the centre and spread of each of the distributions, we can use the
summary statistics discussed in chapter 1. Specifically, we are interested in:
1. the mean and the median (to measure the centre of the distributions), and
2. the interquartile range and the standard deviation (to measure the spread of the distributions).
We saw in chapter 1 that the calculation of these summary statistics is very straightforward and rapid
using a CAS calculator.
Worked example 3
The number of how to vote cards handed out by various Australian Labor Party and Liberal
Party volunteers during the course of a polling day is shown below.
Labor
Liberal
180
193
204
287
233
202
215
273
246
210
226
266
252
222
253
233
263
257
263
244
270
247
272
250
229
234
285
261
238
226
245
272
226
214
267
280
211
204
275
279
Display the data using a back-to-back stem plot and use this, together with summary statistics,
to compare the distributions of the number of cards handed out by the Labor and Liberal
volunteers.
Think
1
60
Construct the stem plot.
Use a calculator to obtain summary statistics

for each party. Record the mean, median,
IQR and standard deviation in the table.
(IQR = Q3 Q1)
WriTe
Leaf
Labor
0
3
4 2
4 1 0
9 6 6 2
8 4 3
7 6
7 2
3
0
Stem
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Leaf
Liberal
4
5
6
3
4
0
1
2
0
Key: 18|0 = 180

5
3
3 6 7
2 3 5 9
5 7
Labor
Liberal
Mean
227.9
257.5
Median
227.5
264.5
IQR
36
29.5
Standard deviation
23.9
23.4
Comment on the relationship.
exercise 2B
From the stem plot we see that the Labor distribution

is symmetric and therefore the mean and the median
are very close, whereas the Liberal distribution is
negatively skewed.
Since the distribution is skewed, the median is a
better indicator of the centre of the distribution than
the mean.
Comparing the medians therefore, we have the
median number of cards handed out for Labor at
228 and for Liberal at 265, which is a big difference.
The standard deviations were similar, as were the
interquartile ranges. There was not a lot of difference
in the spread of the data.
In essence, the Liberal party volunteers handed
out many more how to vote cards than the Labor
party volunteers did.
1 We2 The marks out of 50 obtained for the end-of-term test by the students in German and French
classes are given below. Display the data on a back-to-back stem plot.
German
20 38 45 21 30 39 41 22 27 33 30 21 25 32 37 42 26 31 25 37
French
23 25 36 46 44 39 38 24 25 42 38 34 28 31 44 30 35 48 43 34
2 The birth masses of 10 boys and 10 girls (in kilograms, to the nearest 100 grams) are recorded in the
table below. Display the data on a back-to-back stem plot.

Boys
Girls
3.4
3.0
5.0
2.7
4.2
3.7
3.7
3.3
4.9
4.0
3.4
3.1
3.8
2.6
4.8
3.2
3.6
3.6
4.3
3.1
3 We3 The number of delivery trucks making deliveries to a supermarket each day over a 2-week period
was recorded for two neighbouring supermarkets supermarket A and supermarket B. The data are
shown below.
A
B
11
10
15
15
20
20
25
25
12
30
16
35
21
16
27
31
16
32
17
21
17
23
22
26
23
28
24
29
a Display the data on a back-to-back stem plot.

b Use the stem plot, together with some summary statistics, to compare the distributions of the
number of trucks delivering to supermarkets A and B.

4 The marks out of 20 obtained by males and females for a science test in a Year 10 class are given below.
Females
Males
12
10
13
12
14
13
14
14
15
14
15
15
16
17
17
19

marks of the males and the females.

5 The end-of-year English marks for 10 students in an English class were compared over 2 years. The
marks for 2011 and for the same students in 2012 are shown below.
2011
2012
30
22
31
26
35
27
37
28
39
30
41
31
41
31
42
33
43
34
46
36

marks obtained by the students in 2011 and 2012.

61
6 The age and gender of a group of people attending a fitness class are recorded below.
Female
Male
23
22
24
25
25
30
26
31
27
36
28
37
30
42
31
46

b Use the stem plot, together with some summary statistics, to compare the distributions of the ages
of the female members to the male members of the fitness class.
7 The scores on a board game for a group of kindergarten children and for a group of children in a
preparatory school are given below.

Kindergarten
Prep. school
3
5
13
12
14
17
25
25
28
27
32
32
36
35
41
44
47
46
50
52

scores of the kindergarten children compared to the preparatory school children.

8 mC The pair of variables that could be displayed on a back-to-back stem plot is:
a
B
C
d
e
the height of a student and the number of people in the students household
the time put into completing an assignment and a pass or fail score on the assignment
the weight of a businessman and his age
the religion of an adult and the persons head circumference
the income of an employee and the time the employee has worked for the company
9 mC A back-to-back stem plot is a useful way of displaying the relationship between:

a
B
C
d
e
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
62
the proximity to markets in kilometres and the cost of fresh foods on average per kilogram
height and head circumference
age and attitude to gambling (for or against)
weight and age
the money spent during a day of shopping and the number of shops visited on that day
2C
parallel boxplots
We saw in the previous section that we could display relationships between a numerical variable and a
categorical variable with just two categories, using a back-to-back stem plot.
When we want to display a relationship between a numerical variable and a categorical variable with
two or more categories, a parallel boxplot can be used.
A parallel boxplot is obtained by constructing individual boxplots for each distribution and
positioning them on a common scale.
Construction of individual boxplots was discussed in detail in chapter 1 on univariate data. In this
section we concentrate on comparing distributions represented by a number of boxplots (that is, on the
interpretation of parallel boxplots).
Worked example 4
The four Year 7 classes at Western Secondary College complete the same end-of-year maths test.
Themarks, expressed as percentages for the four classes, are given below.
7A
7B
7C
7D
40
60
50
40
43
62
51
42
45
63
53
43
47
64
55
45
50
70
57
50
52
73
60
53
53
74
63
55
54
76
65
59
57
77
67
60
60
77
69
61
69
78
70
69
63
82
72
73
63
85
73
74
68
87
74
75
70
89
76
80
75
90
80
81
80
92
82
82
85
95
82
83
89
97
85
84
90
97
89
90
Display the data using a parallel boxplot and use this to describe any similarities or differences in
the distributions of the marks between the four classes.
Think
1
Use your CAS calculator to

determine the five number
summary for each data set.
WriTe/draW
Min
Q1
Median = Q2
Q3
Max
Draw the boxplots, labelling each

class. All four boxplots share a
common scale.
7A
40
51
61.5
7B
60
71.5
77.5
7C
50
58.5
69.5
7D
40
51.5
65
72.5
90
89.5
97
78
89
80.5
90
7D
7C
7B
7A
30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Maths mark (%)
Describe the similarities and

differences between the four
distributions.
Class 7B had the highest median mark and the range of the
distribution was only 37. The lowest mark in 7B was 60.
We notice that the median of 7As marks is 61.5. So, 50% of
students in 7A received less than 61.5. This means that about
half of 7A had scores that were less than the lowest score in 7B.
The range of marks in 7A was the same as that of 7D with
the highest scores in each equal (90), and the lowest scores in
each equal (40). However, the median mark in 7D (65) was
slightly higher than the median mark in 7A (61.5) so, despite a
similar range, more students in 7D received a higher mark than
in 7A.
While 7D had a top score that was higher than that of 7C,
the median score in 7C (69.5) was higher than that of 7D and
almost 25% of scores in 7D were less than the lowest score
in 7C. In summary, 7B did best, followed by 7C, then 7D and
finally 7A.
63
exercise 2C
parallel boxplots
1 We4 The heights (in cm) of students in 9A, 10A and 11A were recorded and are shown in the table below.
9A 120 126 131 138 140 143 146 147 150 156 157 158 158 160 162 164 165 170
10A 140 143 146 147 149 151 153 156 162 164 165 167 168 170 173 175 176 180
11A 151 153 154 158 160 163 164 166 167 169 169 172 175 180 187 189 193 199
diGiTal doC
doc-9410
Spreadsheet
parallel boxplots
a Construct a parallel boxplot to show the data.

b Use the boxplot to compare the distributions of height for the 3classes.
2 The amounts of money contributed annually to superannuation schemes by people in 3 different age
groups are shown below.

2029
3039
4049
2 000 3 100 5 000 5 500 6 200 6 500 6 700 7 000 9 200 10 000
4 000 5 200 6 000 6 300 6 800 7 000 8 000 9 000 10 300 12 000
10 000 11 200 12 000 13 300 13 500 13 700 13 900 14 000 14 300 15 000
a Construct a parallel boxplot to show the data.

b Use the boxplot to comment on the distributions.
3 The numbers of jars of vitamin A, B, C and multi-vitamins sold per week by a local chemist are shown
below.
Vitamin A
Vitamin B
Vitamin C
Multi-vitamins
5
10
8
12
6
10
8
13
7
11
9
13
7
12
9
15
8
14
9
16
8
15
10
16
9
15
11
17
11
15
12
19
13
17
12
19
14
19
13
20
Construct a parallel boxplot to display the data and use it to compare the distributions of sales for the
4 types of vitamin.
4 The daily share price of two companies was recorded over a period of one month. The results are
presented below as parallel boxplots.

Company A
Company B
65
70
75 80 85 90 95 100 105
Price per share (cents)
State whether each of the following statements is true or false.

a The distribution of share prices for company A is symmetrical.
b On 25% of all occasions, share prices for company B equalled or exceeded the highest price
recorded for company A.
c The spread of the share prices was the same for both companies.
d 75% of share prices for company B were at least as high as the median share price for company A.
5 Last year, the spring season of the Australian Opera
included two major productions staged at the

Sydney Opera House: The Pearlfishers and Orlando.
The number of A-reserve tickets sold for each
performance of the two operas is shown below as
parallel boxplots.
The Pearlfishers
Number of A-reserve tickets sold
64
950
850
900
750
800
700
600
650
550
500
450
400
Orlando
a Which of the two productions proved to be more popular with the public, assuming A-reserve
ticket sales reflect total ticket sales? Explain your answer.

b Which opera had a larger variability in the number of patrons purchasing A-reserve tickets?
Support your answer with the necessary calculations.

6 mC The results for a maths test given to classes in two different year levels, one in Year 8 and the
other in Year 10, are given by the parallel boxplots below.

Year 8
Year 10
25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
Results out of 100
a The percentage of Year 10 students who obtained a mark greater than 87 was:
a 2%
d 25%
B 5%
e 75%
C 20%
b From the parallel boxplots, it can be concluded that:

a
B
C
d
e
the Year 8 results were similar to the Year 10 results

the Year 8 results were lower than the Year 10 results and less variable
the Year 8 results were lower than the Year 10 results and more variable
the Year 8 results were higher than the Year 10 results and less variable
the Year 8 results were higher than the Year 10 results and more variable
diGiTal doC
doc-9411
WorkSHEET 2.1
Two-way frequency tables and

segmented bar charts
2d
When we are examining the relationship between two categorical variables, the two-way frequency table
is an excellent tool. Consider the following example.
Worked example 5
At a local shopping centre, 34 females and 23 males were asked which of the two major political
parties they preferred. Eighteen females and 12 males preferred Labor. Display these data in a
two-way frequency table.
Think
1
Draw a table. Record the respondents sex in

the columns and party preference in the rows of
the table.
WriTe
Party preference Female

Labor
Liberal
Total
Male
Total
We know that 34 females and 23 males were

asked. Put this information into the table and
fill in the total.
We also know that 18 females and 12 males
preferred Labor. Put this information in the table
and find the total of people who preferred Labor.

Labor
18
Liberal
Total
34
Male
12
Total
30
23
57
Fill in the remaining cells. For example, to

find the number of females who preferred
the Liberals, subtract the number of females
preferring Labor from the total number of
females asked: 34 18 = 16.

Labor
18
Liberal
16
Total
34
Male
12
11
23
Total
30
27
57
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with segmented
graphs.
65
In Worked example 5, we have a very clear breakdown of data. We know how many females preferred
Labor, how many females preferred the Liberals, how many males preferred Labor and how many males
preferred the Liberals.
If we wish to compare the number of females who prefer Labor with the number of males who prefer
Labor, we must be careful. While 12 males preferred Labor compared to 18 females, there were fewer males
than females being asked. That is, only 23 males were asked for their opinion, compared to 34 females.
To overcome this problem, we can express the figures in the table as percentages.
Worked example 6
Fifty-seven people in a local shopping centre

were asked whether they preferred the Australian
Labor Party or the Liberal Party. The results are
given at right.
Convert the numbers in this table to percentages.
Think

Labor
18
Liberal
16
Total
34
Male
12
11
23
Total
30
27
57
WriTe
Draw the table, omitting the total column.

Fill in the table by expressing the number in each cell
as a percentage of its columns total. For example,
to obtain the percentage of males who prefer Labor,
divide the number of males who prefer Labor by the
total number of males and multiply by 100%.
12
100% = 52.2% (correct to 1 decimal place)
23
Party preference
Labor
Liberal
Total
Female
52.9
47.1
100.0
Male
52.2
47.8
100.0
We could have calculated percentages from the table rows, rather than columns. To do that we would, for
example, have divided the number of females who preferred Labor (18) by the total number of people
who preferred labor (30) and so on. The table below shows this:
Party preference
Labor
Liberal
Female
60.0
59.3
Male
40.0
40.7
Total
100
100
By doing this we have obtained the percentage of people who were female and preferred Labor (60%),
and the percentage of people who were male and preferred Labor (40%), andso on. This highlights facts
different from those shown in the previous table. In other words, different results can be obtained by
calculating percentages from a table in different ways.
As a general rule, when the independent variable (in this case the respondents gender) is placed
in the columns of the table, the percentages should be calculated in columns.
Comparing percentages in each row of a two-way table allows us to establish whether a
relationship exists between the two categorical variables that are being examined. As we can see
from the table in Worked example 6, the percentage of females who preferred Labor is about the
same as that of males. Likewise, the percentage of females and males preferring the Liberal Party
are almost equal. This indicates that for the group of people participating in the survey, party
preference is not related to gender.
When comparing two categorical variables, it can be useful to

represent the results from a two-way table (in percentage form)
graphically. We can do this using segmented bar charts.
A segmented bar chart consists of two or more columns, each
of which matches one column in the two-way table. Each column is
subdivided into segments, corresponding to each cell in that column.
For example, the data from Worked example 6 can be displayed
using the segmented bar chart shown at right.
The segmented bar chart is a powerful visual aid for comparing
and examining the relationship between two categorical variables.
66
Percentage
Party
preference
Liberal
Labor
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
Female Male
Gender
Worked example 7
Sixty-seven primary and 47 secondary school students were asked about their
attitude to the number of school holidays which should be given. They were
TUTorial
eles-1260
asked whether there should be fewer, the same number, or more school
Worked example 7
holidays. Five primary students and 2 secondary students wanted fewer
holidays, 29 primary and 9 secondary students thought they had enough holidays (that is, they
chose the same number) and the rest thought they needed to be given more holidays.
Present these data in percentage form in a two-way frequency table and a segmented bar
chart. Compare the opinions of the primary and the secondary students.
Think
1
Put the data in a table. First, fill in the given

information, then find the missing information
by subtracting the appropriate numbers from
the totals.
Calculate the percentages. Since the

independent variable (the level of the student:
primary or secondary) has been placed in
the columns of the table, we calculate the
percentages in columns. For example, to
obtain the percentage of primary students who
wanted fewer holidays, divide the number of
such students by the total number of primary
students and multiply by 100%.
WriTe/draW
Attitude
Primary
Secondary
Fewer
Same
29
38
More
33
36
69
Total
67
47
114
Attitude
Primary
Total
Secondary
Fewer
7.5
4.3
Same
43.3
19.1
More
49.2
76.6
Total
100.0
100.0
5
That is, 67
100% = 7.5%.
Rule out the set of axes. (The vertical axis

shows percentages from 0 to 100, while the
horizontal axis represents the categories
from the columns of the table.) Draw two
columns to represent each category primary
and secondary. Columns must be the same
width and height (up to 100%). Divide each
column into segments so that the height of
each segment is equal to the percentage in the
corresponding cell of the table. Add a legend to
the graph.
Attitude
More
Same
Fewer
100
90
80
70
Percentage
60
50
40
30
20
10
Primary
Secondary
School level
4
Comment on the results.
Secondary students were much keener on having

more holidays than were primary students.
Two-way frequency tables and

segmented bar charts
exercise 2d
1 We5 In a survey, 139 women and 102 men were asked whether they approved or disapproved of
a proposed freeway. Thirty-seven women and 79 men approved of the freeway. Display these data in
a two-way table (not as percentages).
diGiTal doC
doc-9413
Spreadsheet
Two-way frequency
table
67
2 Students at a secondary school were asked whether the length of lessons should be 45 minutes or
1hour. Ninety-three senior students (Years 1012) were asked and it was found 60 preferred 1-hour
lessons, whereas of the 86 junior students (Years 79), 36 preferred 1-hour lessons. Display these data
in a two-way table (not as percentages).
3 For each of the following two-way frequency tables, complete the missing entries.
a Attitude
b Attitude
Female
Male
Total
Female
Male
For
25
For
47
i
i
ii
21
Against
Against
ii
iii
iv
iii
Total
51
92
Total
30
v
v
c
Party preference
Labor
Liberal
Total
Female
i
Total
21
iv
63
Male
42%
53%
ii
iv
iii
4 We6 Sixty single men and women were asked whether they prefer to rent by themselves, or to share
accommodation with friends. The results are shown below.

diGiTal doC
doc-9412
SkillSHEET 2.1
expressing one number
as a percentage of
another
Preference
Rent by themselves
Share with friends
Total
Men
12
9
21
Women
23
16
39
Total
35
25
60
Convert the numbers in this table to percentages.

The information in the following two-way frequency table relates to questions 5 and 6.
The data show the reactions of administrative staff and technical staff to an upgrade of the
computer systems at a large corporation.
Attitude
Administrative staff
Technical staff
Total
For
53
98
151
Against
37
31
68
Total
90
129
219
5 mC From the previous table, we can conclude that:
a 53% of administrative staff were for the upgrade
B 37% of administrative staff were for the upgrade
C 37% of administrative staff were against the upgrade
d 59% of administrative staff were for the upgrade
e 54% of administrative staff were against the upgrade
6 mC From the previous table, we can conclude that:
a
B
C
d
e
98% of technical staff were for the upgrade

31% of technical staff were against the upgrade
14% of technical staff were against the upgrade
7 We7 Delegates at the respective Liberal Party and Australian Labor Party conferences were surveyed
on whether or not they believed that marijuana should be legalised. Sixty-two Liberal delegates were
surveyed and 40 of them were against legalisation. Seventy-one Labor delegates were surveyed and
43were against legalisation.
Present the data in percentage form in a two-way frequency table and a segmented bar chart.
Comment on any differences between the reactions of the Liberal and Labor delegates.
8 mC The amount of waste recycled by 100 townships across Australia was rated as low, medium or
high and the size of the town as small, mid-sized or large.

The results of the ratings are:
Amount of waste
recycled
Low
Medium
High
68
Small
6
8
5
Type of town
Mid-sized
7
31
16
Large
4
5
18
a The percentage of mid-sized towns rated as having a high level of waste recycling is closest to:
a 41%
B 25%
C 30%
d 17%
e 50%
b The variables, Amount of waste recycled and Type of town, as used in this rating are:
a both categorical variables
C numerical and categorical respectively
e neither categorical nor numerical variables
2e
B both numerical variables

d categorical and numerical respectively
Scatterplots
We often want to know if there is a relationship between two numerical variables. A scatterplot, which
gives a visual display of the relationship between two variables, provides a good starting point.
Consider the data obtained from last years 12B class at Northbank Secondary College. Each
student in this class of 29 students was asked to give an estimate of the average number of hours they
studied per week during Year 12. They were also asked for the ATAR score they obtained.
Average hours
of study
14
17
14
19
20
10
28
25
18
19
ATAR
score
54
72
63
72
58
47
85
75
63
61
The figure at right shows the data plotted on a scatterplot.

It is reasonable to think that the number of hours of study put
in each week by students would affect their ATAR scores and
so the number of hours of study per week is the independent
variable and appears on the horizontal axis. The ATAR score is
the dependent variable and appears on the vertical axis.
There are 29 points on the scatterplot. Each point represents
the number of hours of study and the ATAR score of one
student.
In analysing the scatterplot we look for a pattern in the way
the points lie. Certain patterns tell us that certain relationships
exist between the two variables. This is referred to as
correlation. We look at what type of correlation exists and how
strong it is.
In the figure above right we see some sort of pattern: the
points are spread in a rough corridor from bottom left to top
right. We refer to data following such a direction as having a
positive relationship. This tells us that as the average number of
hours studied per week increases, the ATAR score increases.
The point (26, 35) is an outlier. It stands out because it is well
away from the other points and clearly is not part of the corridor
referred to previously. This outlier may have occurred because
a student exaggerated the number of hours he or she worked in
a week or perhaps there was a recording error. This needs to be
checked.
We could describe the rest of the data as having a linearform as
the straight line in the diagram at right indicates.
Average hours
of study
17
16
14
29
30
30
23
26
22
ATAR
score
59
76
59
89
93
96
82
35
78
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
100
90
ATAR score
ATAR
score
59
67
74
90
62
89
71
60
84
98
80
70
60
50
40
(26, 35)
5 10 15 20 25 30
Average number of hours
of study per week
100
90
ATAR score
Average hours
of study
18
16
22
27
15
28
18
19
22
30
Units: 3 & 4
80
70
60
50
40
0
5 10 15 20 25 30
of study per week
69
When describing the relationship between twovariables displayed on a scatterplot, we need to

commenton:
(a) the direction whether it is positive or negative
(b) the form whether it is linear or non-linear
(c) the strength whether it is strong, moderate or weak
(d) possible outliers.
Below is a gallery of scatterplots showing the various patterns we look for.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Weak, positive
linear relationship
Moderate, positive
linear relationship
Strong, positive
linear relationship
Weak, negative
linear relationship
Moderate, negative
linear relationship
Strong, negative
linear relationship
Perfect, negative
linear relationship
No relationship
Perfect, positive
linear relationship
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
The scatterplot at right shows the number of hours people spend at

work each week and the number of hours people get to spend on
recreational activities during the week.
Decide whether or not a relationship exists between the variables
and, if it does, comment on whether it is positive or negative; weak,
moderate or strong; and whether or not it has a linear form.
Think
70
The points on the scatterplot are spread in a

certain pattern, namely in a rough corridor from
the top left to the bottom right corner. This tells
us that as the work hours increase, the recreation
hours decrease.
The corridor is straight (that is, it would be

reasonable to fit a straight line into it).
WriTe
Hours for recreation
Worked example 8
25
20
15
10
5
10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Hours worked
The points are neither too tight nor too dispersed.
The pattern resembles the central diagram in the

gallery of scatterplots shown previously.
There is a moderate, negative linear relationship

between the two variables.
Worked example 9
Data showing the average weekly number of hours studied by each student in
12B at Northbank Secondary College and the corresponding height of each
student (to the nearest tenth of a metre) are given in the table below.
TUTorial
eles-1261
Worked example 9
Average hours of study

Height (m)
18 16 22 27 15 28 18 20 10 28 25 18 19 17
1.5 1.9 1.7 2.0 1.9 1.8 2.1 1.9 1.9 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.8 2.1
Average hours of study

Height (m)
19
22
30
14
17
14
19
16
14
29
30
30
23
22
2.0 1.9 1.6 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.7 1.6 1.9 1.7 1.8 1.5 1.5 2.1
Construct a scatterplot for the data and use it to comment on the direction, form and strength of
any relationship between the number of hours studied and the height of the students.
Think
A calculator can be used to assist you in

drawing a scatterplot.
studied each week
WriTe
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
0
Comment on the direction of any relationship.
1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2

Height (m)
There is no relationship; the points appear

to be randomly placed.
71
Comment on the form of the relationship.
There is no form, no linear trend, no quadratic

trend, just a random placement of points.
Comment on the strength of any relationship.
Since there is no relationship, strength is not

relevant.
Draw a conclusion.
Clearly, from the graph, the number of hours spent

studying for VCE has no relation to how tall you
might be.
Scatterplots
exercise 2e
1 For each of the following pairs of variables, write down whether or not you would reasonably expect a
c
Fitness level (s)
20 40 60 80
Age
120
100
80
60
0
10
20
Cigarettes smoked
e
25
20
15
10
5
0
5 10 15 20
Hours spent
gardening per week
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
2 4 6 8 1012 1416
100
80
60
40
20
0
4 8 12 16
Weekly hours of study
Time under water (s)
14
12
10
8
0
Hours spent using a

computer per week
Weekly expenditure on
gardening magazines ($)
Haemoglobin
count (g/dl)
Marks at school (%)
relationship to exist between the pair and, if so, comment on whether it would be a positive or negative
association.
a Time spent in a supermarket and money spent
b Income and value of car driven
c Number of children living in a house and time spent cleaning the house
d Age and number of hours of competitive sport played per week
e Amount spent on petrol each week and distance travelled by car each week
f Number of hours spent in front of a computer each week and time spent playing the piano each
week
g Amount spent on weekly groceries and time spent gardening each week
2 We8 For each of the scatterplots below, describe whether or not a relationship exists between the
variables and, if it does, comment on whether it is positive or negative, whether it is weak, moderate
or strong and whether or not it has a linear form.
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
5 10 15 20 25
Age
Hours spent
cooking per week
3 mC From the scatterplot shown at right, it would be reasonable to
observe that:
a as the value of x increases, the value of y increases
B as the value of x increases, the value of y decreases
C as the value of x increases, the value of y remains the same
d as the value of x remains the same, the value of y increases
e there is no relationship between x and y
72
4 We9 The population of a municipality (to the nearest ten thousand) together with the number of
primary schools in that particular municipality is given below for 11municipalities.

Population
( 1000)
Number of
primary schools
110
130
130
140
150
160
170
170
180
180
190
diGiTal doC
doc-9414
Spreadsheet
Scatterplot
Construct a scatterplot for the data and use it to comment on the direction, form and strength of any
relationship between the population and the number of primary schools.
5 The table below contains data for the time taken to do a paving job and the cost of the job.
Construct a scatterplot for the data. Comment on whether a relationship exists between the time
taken and the cost. If there is a relationship, describe it.
Time taken
(hours)
5
7
5
8
10
13
15
20
18
25
33
Cost of job
($)
1000
1000
1500
1200
2000
2500
2800
3200
2800
4000
3000
6 The table below shows the time of booking (how many days in advance) of the tickets for a musical
performance and the corresponding row number in A-reserve seating.

Time of
booking
Row
number
Time of
booking
Row
number
Time of
booking
Row
number
15
14
12
25
15
14
10
28
15
17
11
29
14
20
10
29
14
21
30
11
13
22
31
13
13
24
Construct a scatterplot for the data. Comment on whether a relationship exists between the time
of booking and the number of the row and, if there is a relationship, describe it.
pearsons productmoment
correlation coefficient
2F
In the previous section, we estimated the strength of association by looking at a scatterplot and forming
a judgment about whether the correlation between the variables was positive or negative and whether the
correlation was weak, moderate or strong.
A more precise tool for measuring correlation between two variables is Pearsons
productmoment correlation coefficient. This coefficient is used to measure the strength of linear
relationships between variables.
inTeraCTiViTY
int-0183
pearsons
productmoment
73
The symbol for Pearsons productmoment correlation coefficient is r. The value of r ranges
from 1 to 1; that is, 1 r 1.
Following is a gallery of scatterplots with the corresponding value of r for each.
r=1
r = 1
r = 0.7
r = 0.5
r = 0.9
r = 0.8
r = 0.3
r = 0.2
r=0
Value of r
The two extreme values of r (1 and 1) are shown in the

first two diagrams respectively.
From these diagrams we can see that a value of
r = 1 or 1 means that there is perfect linear association
between the variables.
The value of the Pearsons productmoment
correlation coefficient indicates the strength of the
linear relationship between two variables. The diagram
below gives a rough guide to the strength of the
correlation based on the value of r.
1
0.75
0.5
0.25
0
0.25
0.5
0.75
1
} Strong positive linear association

} Moderate positive linear association
} Weak positive linear association
No linear association
} Weak negative linear association

} Moderate negative linear association
} Strong negative linear association
Worked example 10
For each of the following:

i Estimate the value of Pearsons productmoment correlation coefficient
(r) from the scatterplot.
ii Use this to comment on the strength and direction of the relationship
between the two variables.
a
74
TUTorial
eles-1262
Worked example 10
Think
WriTe
a i Compare these scatterplots with those in the
gallery of scatterplots shown previously and

estimate the value of r.
ii Comment on the strength and direction of the
relationship.
a i r 0.9
ii The relationship can be described as a strong,
positive, linear relationship.

b i r 0.7
ii The relationship can be described as a
b Repeat parts i and ii as in a.
moderate, negative, linear relationship.

c i r 0.1
ii There is almost no linear relationship.
c Repeat parts i and ii as in a.
Note that the symbol means approximately equal to. We use it instead of the = sign to emphasise that
the value (in this case r) is only an estimate.
In completing the worked example above, we notice that estimating the value of r from a scatterplot is
rather like making an informed guess. In the next section of work, we will see how to obtain the actual
value of r.
exercise 2F
1 What type of linear relationship does each of the following values of r suggest?
a 0.21
b 0.65
c 1
d 0.78
e 1
f 0.9
g 0.34
h 0.1
2 We10 For each of the following:
i Estimate the value of Pearsons productmoment correlation coefficient (r), from the scatterplot.
ii Use this to comment on the strength and direction of the relationship between the two variables.
a
75
3 mC A set of data relating the variables x and y is found to have an r value of 0.62. The scatterplot that
could represent the data is:
diGiTal doC
doc-9415
WorkSHEET 2.2
A set of data relating the variables x and y is found to have an r value of 0.45. A true statement
about the relationship between x and y is:
a There is a strong linear relationship between x and y and when the x-values increase, the y-values
tend to increase also.
B There is a moderate linear relationship between x and y and when the x-values increase, the
y-values tend to increase also.
C There is a moderate linear relationship between x and y and when the x-values increase, the
y-values tend to decrease.
d There is a weak linear relationship between x and y and when the x-values increase, the y-values
tend to increase also.
e There is a weak linear relationship between x and y and when the x-values increase, the y-values
tend to decrease.
mC
Calculating r and the coefficient

of determination
2G
Units: 3 & 4
Topic:
pearsons productmoment correlation

coefficient (r )
Concept:
The formula for calculating Pearsons correlation coefficient r is as follows:
AOS: DA
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
with r.
Do more
Interact
r=
1 n xi x yi y
n 1 i = 1 sx s y
where n is the number of pairs of data in the set

sx is the standard deviation of the x-values
sy is the standard deviation of the y-values
x is the mean of the x-values
y is the mean of the y-values.
The calculation of r is often done using a CAS calculator.
There are two important limitations on the use of r. First, since r measures the strength of a linear
relationship, it would be inappropriate to calculate r for data which are not linear for example, data
which a scatterplot shows to be in a quadratic form.
Second, outliers can bias the value of r. Consequently, if a set of linear data contains an outlier, then r
is not a reliable measure of the strength of that linear relationship.
The calculation of r is applicable to sets of bivariate data which are known to be linear in form and
which do not have outliers.
76
With those two provisos, it is good practice to draw a scatterplot for a set of data to check for a linear
form and an absence of outliers before r is calculated. Having a scatterplot in front of you is also useful
because it enables you to estimate what the value of r might be as you did in the previous exercise,
and thus you can check that your workings on the calculator are correct.
Worked example 11
The heights (in centimetres) of 21 football players were recorded against the
number of marks they took in a game of football. The data are shown in the
following table.
TUTorial
eles-1244
Worked example 11
a Construct a scatterplot for the data.

b Comment on the correlation between the heights of players and the number of marks that they
take, and estimate the value of r.
c Calculate r and use it to comment on the relationship between the heights of players and the
number of marks they take in a game.
Height (cm)
184
194
185
175
186
183
174
200
188
184
188
Number of marks taken

6
11
3
2
7
5
4
10
9
7
6
Height (cm)
182
185
183
191
177
184
178
190
193
204
Think
a Height is the independent variable, so plot it on
Number of marks taken

7
5
9
9
3
8
4
10
12
14
WriTe/draW
14
the x-axis; the number of marks is the dependent

variable, so show it on the y-axis.
12
Mark
10
8
6
4
2
0
172 176 180 184 188 192 196 200 204

Height
77
b Comment on the correlation between the
b The data show what appears to be a linear form
variables and estimate the value of r.

c 1 Because there is a linear form and there
of moderate strength.
We might expect r 0.8.
c
are no outliers, the calculation of r is

appropriate.
2
Use a calculator to find the value of r.

Round to 2 decimal places.
r = 0.859 311 . . .
0.86
The value of r = 0.86 indicates a strong

positive linear relationship.
r = 0.86. This indicates there is a strong positive

linear association between the height of a player
and the number of marks he takes in a game.
That is, the taller the player, the more marks we
might expect him to take.
Correlation and causation

Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch
a video about
correlation and
causation.
In Worked example 11 we saw that r = 0.86. While we are entitled to say that there is a strong
association between the height of a footballer and the number of marks he takes, we cannot assert that
the height of a footballer causes him to take a lot of marks. Being tall might assist in taking marks, but
there will be many other factors which come into play; for example, skill level, accuracy of passes from
teammates, abilities of the opposing team, and so on.
So, while establishing a high degree of correlation between two variables may be interesting and can
often flag the need for further, more detailed investigation, it in no way gives us any basis to comment
on whether or not one variable causes particular values in another variable.
The coefficient of determination (r 2)

The coefficient of determination is given by r 2. It is very easy to calculate we merely square
Pearsons productmoment correlation coefficient (r). The value of the coefficient of determination
ranges from 0 to 1; that is, 0 r 2 1.
1. The coefficient of determination is useful when we have two variables which have a linear
relationship. It tells us the proportion of variation in one variable which can be explained by
the variation in the other variable.
2. The coefficient of determination provides a measure of how well the linear rule linking the
two variables (x and y) predicts the value of y when we are given the value of x.
Worked example 12
A set of data giving the number of police traffic patrols on duty and the number
of fatalities for the region was recorded and a correlation coefficient of r = 0.8
was found. Calculate the coefficient of determination and interpret its value.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Think
1
Calculate the coefficient of determination by

squaring the given value of r.
Coefficient of determination = r 2
= (0.8)2
= 0.64
Interpret your result.
We can conclude from this that 64% of the

variation in the number of fatalities can be
explained by the variation in the number of police
traffic patrols on duty. This means that the number
of police traffic patrols on duty is a major factor in
predicting the number of fatalities.
Concept: 10
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
78
WriTe
TUTorial
eles-1263
Worked example 12
Note: In the previous worked example, 64% of the variation in the number of fatalities was due to the
variation in the number of police cars on duty and 36% was due to other factors; for example, days of
the week or hour of the day.
Calculating r and the coef ficient

of determination
exercise 2G
1 We11 The yearly salary ( $1000) and the number of votes polled in the Brownlow medal count are
given below for 10 footballers.

Yearly salary
( $1000)
Number of votes
180
200
160
250
190
210
170
150
140
180
24
15
33
10
16
23
14
21
31
28

b Comment on the correlation of salary and the number of votes and make an estimate of r.
c Calculate r and use it to comment on the relationship between yearly salary and number of
diGiTal doC
doc-9416
Spreadsheet
pearsons
productmoment
correlation
votes.
2 We12 A set of data, obtained from 40 smokers, gives the number of cigarettes smoked per
day and the number of visits per year to the doctor. The Pearsons correlation coefficient for
these data was found to be 0.87. Calculate the coefficient of determination for the data and
interpret its value.
3 Data giving the annual advertising budgets ( $1000) and the yearly profit increases (%) of
8 companies are shown below.

Annual advertising budget
( $1000)
11
Yearly profit increase (%)

a
b
c
d
e
14
2.2
15
2.2
17
3.2
20
4.6
25
5.7
25
6.9
27
7.9
9.3
Construct a scatterplot for these data.

Comment on the correlation of the advertising budget and profit increase and make an estimate of r.
Calculate r.
Calculate the coefficient of determination.
Write the proportion of the variation in the yearly profit increase that can be explained by the
variation in the advertising budget.
4 Data showing the number of tourists visiting a small country in a month and the corresponding average
monthly exchange rate for the countrys currency against the American dollar are given below.
Number of tourists
( 1000)
Exchange rate
1.2
1.1
0.9
0.9
0.8
0.8
0.7
10
0.6

b Comment on the correlation between the number of tourists and the exchange rate and give an
estimate of r.
c Calculate r.
d Calculate the coefficient of determination.
e Write the proportion of the variation in the number of tourists that can be explained by the
exchange rate.
5 Data showing the number of people in 9 households against weekly grocery costs are given below.
Number of people in household

Weekly grocery costs ($)
60
180
210
120
150
160
65
200
90

b Comment on the correlation of the number of people in a household and the weekly grocery costs
and give an estimate of r.

79
c Calculate r.
e Write the proportion of the variation in the weekly grocery costs that can be explained by the
variation in the number of people in a household.

6 Data showing the number of people on 8 fundraising committees and the annual funds raised are given
below.
Number of people
on committee
Annual funds
raised ($)
4500
8500
6100
12 500
7200
10 000
4700
8800
a Construct a scatterplot for these data.

b Comment on the correlation between the number of people on a committee and the funds raised
and make an estimate of r.

c Calculate r.
d Based on the value of r obtained in part c, would it be appropriate to conclude that the increase
in the number of people on the fundraising committee causes the increase in the amount of funds
raised?
e Calculate the coefficient of determination.
f Write the proportion of the variation in the funds raised that can be explained by the variation in
the number of people on a committee.
The following information applies to questions 7 and 8. A set of data was obtained from a large group of
women with children under 5 years of age. They were asked the number of hours they worked per week
and the amount of money they spent on child care. The results were recorded and the value of Pearsons
correlation coefficient was found to be 0.92.
7 mC Which of the following is not true?
a The relationship between the number of
working hours and the amount of money

spent on child care is linear.
There is a positive correlation between the
number of working hours and the amount
of money spent on child care.
The correlation between the number of
working hours and the amount of money
spent on child care can be classified as
strong.
As the number of working hours increases,
the amount spent on child care increases
as well.
The increase in the number of hours
worked causes the increase in the amount
of money spent on child care.
8 mC Which of the following is not true?

a The coefficient of determination is about
0.85.
B The number of working hours is the major
factor in predicting the amount of money

spent on child care.
C About 85% of the variation in the number
of hours worked can be explained by the
variation in the amount of money spent on
child care.
d Apart from number of hours worked, there could be other factors affecting the amount of money
spent on child care.
17
e About
of the variation in the amount of money spent on child care can be explained by the
20
variation in the number of hours worked.
80
9 An investigation is undertaken with people following the Certain Slim diet to explore the link between
weeks of dieting and total weight loss. The data are shown below.
Total weight
loss (kg)
Number of
weeks on the diet
1.5
4.5
3.5
6.5
8.5
10
6.5
10
2.5
a Display the data on a scatterplot.

b Describe the association between the two variables in terms of direction, form and strength.
c Is it appropriate to use Pearsons correlation coefficient to explain the link between the number of
d
e
f
g
h
weeks on the Certain Slim diet and total weight loss?

Estimate the value of Pearsons correlation coefficient from the scatterplot.
Calculate the value of this coefficient.
Is the total weight loss affected by the number of weeks staying on the diet?
Calculate the value of the coefficient of determination.
What does the coefficient of determination say about the relationship between total weight loss
and the number of weeks on the Certain Slim diet?
81
Summary
dependent and
independent variables
Bivariate data are data with two variables.

In a relationship involving two variables, if the values of one variable depend on the values of
another variable, then the former variable is referred to as the dependent variable and the latter
variable is referred to as the independent variable.
When data are displayed on a graph, the independent variable is placed on the horizontal axis and
the dependent variable is placed on the vertical axis.
Back-to-back stem
plots
A back-to-back stem plot displays bivariate data involving a numerical variable and a categorical
variable with two categories.
Together with summary statistics, back-to-back stem plots can be used to compare the
two distributions.
parallel boxplots
To display a relationship between a numerical variable and a categorical variable with two or more
categories, we can use a parallel boxplot.
A parallel boxplot is obtained by constructing individual boxplots for each distribution and
positioning them on a common scale.
Two-way frequency
tables and segmented
bar charts
The two-way frequency table is a tool for examining the relationship between two categorical
variables.
If the total number of scores in each of the two categories is unequal, percentages should be
calculated to analyse the table properly.
When the independent variable is placed in the columns of the table, the numbers in each column
should be expressed as a percentage of that columns total.
The data in a two-way frequency table in percentage form can be represented graphically as a
segmented bar chart.
The columns in a segmented bar chart match the columns in a two-way frequency table. Each
segment corresponds to each cell in the table.
Scatterplots
A scatterplot gives a visual display of the relationship between two numerical variables.
In analysing the scatterplot we look for a pattern in the way the points lie. Certain patterns tell us
that certain relationships exist between the two variables. This is referred to as a correlation. We
look at what type of correlation exists and how strong it is.
When describing the relationship between two variables displayed on a scatterplot, we need to
comment on:
(a) the direction whether it is positive or negative
(b) the form whether it is linear or non-linear
(c) the strength whether it is strong, moderate or weak
(d) possible outliers.
pearsons product
moment correlation
coefficient
Pearsons productmoment correlation coefficient is used to measure the strength of a linear

relationship between two variables.
The symbol for Pearsons productmoment correlation coefficient is r.
The calculation of r is applicable to sets of bivariate data which are known to be linear in form and
which dont have outliers.
82
The value of r can be estimated from the

scatterplot; 1 r 1.
1
0.75
Value of r
0.5
0.25
0
Strong positive linear association

Moderate positive linear association
Weak positive linear association
No linear association
0.25
0.5
0.75
1
Weak negative linear association

Moderate negative linear association
Strong negative linear association
The formula for calculating Pearsons correlation coefficient r is as follows:

r=
1 n xi x yi y
n 1 i = 1 sx s y
where n is the number of pairs of data in the set

sx is the standard deviation of the x-values
sy is the standard deviation of the y-values
x is the mean of the x-values
y is the mean of the y-values.
The calculation of r is often done using a CAS calculator.
Even if we find that two variables have a very high degree of correlation, for example r = 0.95, we
cannot say that the value of one variable is caused by the value of the other variable.
If r = 1 or 1 there is a perfect linear relationship.
Calculating r and
the coefficient of
determination
The coefficient of determination = r 2; 0 r 2 1.

The coefficient of determination is useful when we have two variables which have a linear
relationship. It tells us the proportion of variation in one variable which can be explained by the
variation in the other variable.
To change the value of r 2 to a percentage, multiply it by 100.
83
Chapter review
m U lT ip l e
C h oiCe
1 In a study on the effectiveness of vitamin C, a researcher asked a group of people with cold and flu
symptoms to record the number of days these symptoms persisted and their daily dosage (in mg) of
vitamin C. If the researcher wishes to represent these data graphically, which of the following should
she do?
a Show the number of days the symptoms persisted on the x-axis, as this is the independent variable
and the daily dosage of vitamin C on the y-axis, as this is the dependent variable.
B Show the daily dosage of vitamin C on the x-axis, as this is the dependent variable and the
number of days the symptoms persisted on the y-axis, as this is the independent variable.
C Show the number of days the symptoms persisted on the x-axis, as this is the dependent variable
and the daily dosage of vitamin C on the y-axis, as this is the independent variable.
d Show the daily dosage of vitamin C on the x-axis, as this is the independent variable and the
number of days the symptoms persisted on the y-axis, as this is the dependent variable.
e It is impossible to decide which of the two variables is dependent and which one is independent,
so it does not matter which axes we use.
2 A back-to-back stem plot is a useful way of displaying the relationship between:
a the number of children attending a day care centre and whether or not the centre has federal
B
C
d
e
funding
height and wrist circumference
age and weekly income
weight and the number of takeaway meals eaten each week
the age of a car and amount spent each year on servicing it
The following information relates to questions 3 and 4.

The salaries of people working at five different advertising companies are shown on the following
parallel boxplots.
3 The company with the largest interquartile range is:
a Company A
B Company B
C Company C
d Company D
e Company E
Company A
Company B
Company C
Company D
4 The company with the lowest median is:

a Company A
B Company B
C Company C
d Company D
e Company E
Company E
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110120130140 150
Annual salary ( $1000)
Questions 5 and 6 relate to the following information.

Data showing reactions of junior staff and senior staff to a relocation of offices are given below in a
two-way frequency table.
Attitude
Junior staff
Senior staff
Total
For
23
14
37
Against
31
41
72
Total
54
55
109
5 From this table, we can conclude that:

a 23% of junior staff were for the relocation
B 42.6% of junior staff were for the relocation
C 31% of junior staff were against the relocation
d 62.1% of junior staff were for the relocation
e 28.4% of junior staff were against the relocation
84
6 From this table, we can conclude that:

a 14% of senior staff were for the relocation
B 37.8% of senior staff were for the relocation
C 12.8% of senior staff were for the relocation
d 72% of senior staff were against the relocation
e 74.5% of senior staff were against the relocation
7 The relationship between the variables x and y is
shown on the scatterplot at right.

The correlation between x and y would be best described as:
a a weak positive association
B a weak negative association
C a strong positive association
d a strong negative association
e non-existent
8 A set of data relating the variables x and y is found to have an r value of 0.83.
The scatterplot that would best represent this data set is:
a
x
d
x
e
9 A set of data comparing age with blood pressure is found to have a Pearsons correlation coefficient of
0.86. The coefficient of determination for these data would be closest to:
d 0.43
a 0.86
B 0.74
C 0.43
e 0.74
1 For each of the following, write down which is the dependent and which is the independent variable or
whether it is appropriate to classify the variables as such.

a The number of injuries in a netball season and the age of a netball player
b The suburb and the size of a home mortgage
c IQ and weight
2 The number of hours of counselling received by a group of 9 full-time firefighters and 9 volunteer
firefighters after a serious bushfire is given below.
Full-time
Volunteer
10
11
11
12
13
13
14
15
S ho rT
a n S W er
a Construct a back-to-back stem plot to display the data.

b Comment on the distributions of the number of hours of counselling of the full-time firefighters
and the volunteers.

85
3 The IQ of 8 players in 3 different football teams were recorded and are shown below.
Team A
120
105
140
116
98
105
130
102
Team B
110
104
120
109
106
95
102
100
Team C
121
115
145
130
120
114
116
123
Display the data in parallel boxplots.

4 Delegates at the respective Liberal and Labor Party conferences were surveyed on whether or not they
believed that uranium mining should continue. Forty-five Liberal delegates were surveyed and 15 were
against continuation. Fifty-three Labor delegates were surveyed and 43 were against continuation.
a Present the data as percentages in a two-way frequency table and a segmented bar chart.
b Comment on any difference between the reactions of the Liberal and Labor delegates.
5 a Construct a scatterplot for the data given in the table below.
Age
Pulse rate
15
79
17
74
18
75
16
85
19
82
19
76
17
77
15
72
17
70
b Use the scatterplot to comment on any relationship which exists between the variables.
6 For the variables shown on the scatterplot below, give an estimate of the value of r and use it to
comment on the nature of the relationship between the two variables.

y
x
7 The table at right gives data relating the percentage of lectures attended
by students in a semester and the corresponding mark for each student

in the exam for that subject.
a Construct a scatterplot for these data.
b Comment on the correlation between the lectures attended and the
examination results and make an estimate of r.
c Calculate r.
e Write the proportion of the variation in the examination results
that can be explained by the variation in the number of lectures
attended.
86
Lectures
Exam
attended (%) result (%)
70
80
59
62
85
89
93
98
78
84
85
91
84
83
69
72
70
75
82
85
1 An investigation into the relationship between
Salary bracket
age and salary bracket among some employees of a
( $1000)
Age
large computer company is made and the results are
2039
32 21 43 23 22 27 37
shown at right.
4059
29 31 37 26 33 37
a State which is the independent variable and
which is the dependent variable.
6079
41 29 39 42 47 45 43 38
b State which of the following you could use to
8099
43 48 38 37 49 51 53 59
display the data:
100120
48 37 55 61
i back-to-back stem plot
ii parallel boxplot
iii scatterplot
iv two-way frequency table in percentage form.
c State which of the following you could calculate in order to find out more about the relationship
between age and salary bracket:
i r, the Pearson productmoment correlation coefficient
ii the coefficient of determination.
e x Ten d ed
reS p o n S e
2 For marketing purposes, the administration of the Arts Centre needs to compare the ages of people
attending two different concerts: a symphony orchestra concert and a jazz concert. Twenty people were
randomly selected from each audience and their ages were recorded as shown.
Event
Symphony orchestra
concert
Jazz concert
Ages of people attending the event

20, 23, 30, 35, 39, 42, 45, 45, 47, 48,
48, 49, 49, 50, 53, 54, 56, 58, 58, 60
16, 18, 19, 19, 20, 23, 24, 27, 29, 30,
33, 34, 38, 39, 40, 42, 43, 45, 46, 62

b For each category calculate the following statistics:
ii Xmin
ii Q1
iv Q3
v Xmax
vii interquartile range (IQR)
viii standard deviation.
iii median
vi mean
87
c Use the stem plot together with some summary statistics to compare the distributions of the ages
of patrons attending the two concerts.

One month later, at the beginning of the opera season, twenty people were again selected (this
time from the opera audience) and their ages were recorded as shown.
Event
Opera
Ages of people attending the event

12, 18, 29, 30, 33, 35, 38, 39, 42, 46,
49, 50, 54, 56, 56, 57, 59, 63, 65, 68
The administration of the Arts Centre now wishes to compare all three distributions of the ages.
Explain why it is not possible to use a back-to-back stem plot for this task.
Calculate the eight summary statistics for the ages of the opera-goers (as in part b above).
Display the data for the three events using parallel boxplots.
Use the boxplots and some summary statistics to compare the three distributions.
3 In one study, 380 Year 12 students were asked how often they were engaged in any sporting activity
outside school. Students were also asked to classify their stress level in relation to their VCE studies.
The results at right were obtained.
d
e
f
g
Level of stress
Low
Medium
High
diGiTal doC
doc-9417
Test Yourself
Chapter 2
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
DA
Practice
VCE exam
questions
Use StudyON to
access all exam
questions on this
topic since 2002.
88
Engaged in sporting activity outside school

Regularly
Sometimes
Never
16
32
36
12
40
56
6
52
130
In this study, which would be the independent variable: stress level, or the amount of sporting activity?
How many students in this study reported a high level of stress?
How many students were engaged in sport activity outside of school?
Represent the data in a two-way frequency table in percentage form.
Display the data from part d using a segmented bar chart.
Comment on any relationship between the stress level and the amount of sporting activity for this
group of Year 12 students.
4 The data in the table below show the number of hours spent by students learning to touch-type and their
corresponding speed in words per minute (wpm).
a
b
c
d
e
f
Time (h)
Speed (wpm)
20
34
33
46
22
38
39
53
40
52
37
49
46
60
44
58
24
36
36
42
50
65
48
63
29
40
State which variable is independent and which is dependent.

Represent the data on a scatterplot.
Use the scatterplot to comment on the relationship between the two variables.
Is it appropriate to use these data to calculate the value of Pearsons productmoment correlation
coefficient? Explain.
e Estimate the value of r from the scatterplot.
f Calculate the value of r using a CAS calculator. Does the value of r support the observations you
made in part c?
g Calculate the coefficient of determination and interpret the result.
a
b
c
d
ICT activities
Chapter opener
diGiTal doC
bivariate data. (page 57)
2B
TUTorial
We 2 eles-1259: Watch a tutorial on displaying data on a back-toback stem plot. (page 59)
2C
parallel boxplots
diGiTal doCS
Spreadsheet doc-9410: Compare two sets of data using parallel
boxplots. (page 64)
WorkSHEET 2.1 doc-9411: Identify independent and dependent
variables and construct parallel boxplots and back-to-back stem
plots. (page 65)
2d Two-way frequency tables and segmented

bar charts
diGiTal doCS
Spreadsheet doc-9413: Construct a two-way frequency table. (page 67)
SkillSHEET 2.1 doc-9412: Practise expressing one number as a
percentage of another. (page 68)
TUTorial
We 7 eles-1260: Learn how to present data in a two-way table.
(page 67)
2e
Scatterplots
diGiTal doC
Spreadsheet doc-9414: Investigate the relationship between two
variables by constructing a scatterplot (page 73)
TUTorial
We 9 eles-1261: Watch a worked example on constructing a
scatterplot to determine the relationship between the heights of
students and the number of hours they study. (page 71)
2F pearsons productmoment correlation

coefficient
diGiTal doC
WorkSHEET 2.2 doc-9415: Displaying data using scatterplots and
recognising linear and non-linear relationships. (page 76)
TUTorial
We 10 eles-1262: Watch a worked example on estimating r and
using it to comment on the relationship between two variables.
(page 74)
inTeraCTiViTY
Pearsons productmoment correlation coefficient int-0183: Use the
interactivity to consolidate your knowledge of Pearsons product
moment correlation coefficient and how it relates to bivariate data.
(page 73)
2G Calculating r and the coefficient of

determination
diGiTal doC
Spreadsheet doc-9416: Investigate Pearsons productmoment
correlation coefficient and the coefficient of determination.
(page 79)
TUTorialS
We11 eles-1244: Watch a worked example on how to construct a
scatterplot and use it to estimate the value of r. (page 77)
We12 eles-1263: Watch a worked example on calculating the
coefficient of determination and how it is used to interpret the
relationship between two variables. (page 78)
Chapter review
diGiTal doC
progress. (page 88)
89
Answers CHAPTER 2
BiVariaTe daTa
exercise 2a dependent and
independent variables
1 a Independent age, dependent salary
b Independent amount of fertiliser,
dependent growth
c Not appropriate
d Not appropriate
e Independent number in household,
dependent size of house
f Independent month of the year,
dependent size of electricity bill
g Independent number of hours,
dependent mark on the test
h Not appropriate
i Independent season, dependent
cost
2 C
3 C
4 D
exercise 2B
4 a Key:1 |2 = 12 marks
1 Key: 2|3 = 23
Leaf Stem Leaf

German
French
2 1 1 0 2
3 4
7 6 5 5 2* 5 5 8
3 2 1 0 0 3
0 1 4 4
9 8 7 7 3* 5 6 8 8 9
2 1 4
2 3 4 4
5 4* 6 8
2 Key: 2*|7 = 2.7 (kg)
Leaf Stem Leaf

Boys
Girls
2* 6 7
4 4 3
0 1 1 2 3
8 7 6 3* 6 7
3 2 4
0
9 8 4*
0 5
5 a
3 a Key: 2*|5 = 25 trucks
Leaf Stem Leaf

A
B
2 1 1
0
7 7 6 6 5 1* 5 6
4 3 2 1 0 2
0 1 3
7 5 2* 5 6 8 9
3
0 1 2
3* 5
6 a
b For supermarket A the mean is 19, the
median is 18.5, the standard deviation is

4.9 and the interquartile range is 7. The
distribution is symmetric.
For supermarket B the mean is 24.4,
the median is 25.5, the standard
deviation is 7.2 and the interquartile
range is 10. The distribution is
symmetric.
The centre and spread of the distribution
of supermarket B is higher than that of
supermarket A.
There is greater variation in the number
of trucks arriving at supermarket B.
90
Leaf Stem Leaf

Females
Males
1
0
3 2
1
2 3
5 5 4 4
1
4 4 5
7 6
1
7
1
9
For the marks of the females, the
mean is 14.5, the median is 14.5,
the standard deviation is 1.6 and the
interquartile range is 2. The distribution
is symmetric.
For the marks of the males, the mean
is 14.25, the median is 14, the standard
deviation is 2.8 and the interquartile
range is 3.5. The distribution is
symmetric.
The centre of each distribution is about
the same. The spread of marks for the
boys is greater, however. This means
that there is a wider variation in the
abilities of the boys compared to the
abilities of the girls.
Key: 2*|6 = 26 marks
Leaf Stem Leaf
2007
2008
2
2
2* 6 7 8
1 0 3
0 1 1 3 4
9 7 5 3* 6
3 2 1 1 4
6 4*
The distribution of marks for 2007 and
for 2008 are each symmetric.
For the 2007 marks, the mean is 38.5,
the median is 40, the standard deviation
is 5.2 and the interquartile range is 7.
The distribution is symmetric.
For the 2008 marks, the mean is
29.8, the median is 30.5, the standard
deviation is 4.2 and the inter-quartile
range is 6.
The spread of each of the distributions
is much the same, but the centre of each
distribution is quite different with the
centre of the 2008 distribution lower.
The work may have become a lot
harder!
Key: 3*|6 = 36 years old
Leaf Stem Leaf
Female
Male
4 3 2
2
8 7 6 5 2* 5
1 0 3
0 1
3* 6 7
4
2
4* 6
For the distribution of the females,
the mean is 26.75, the median is 26.5,
interquartile range is 4.5.
For the distribution of the males, the
mean is 33.6, the median is 33.5,

interquartile range is 12.
The centre of the distributions is very
different: it is much higher for the
males. The spread of the ages of the
females who attend the fitness class is
very small but very large for males.
7 a Key: 5|0 = 50 points
Leaf Stem Leaf
Kindergarten
Prep.
3
0
5
4 3
1
2 7
8 5
2
5 7
6 2
3
2 5
7 1
4
4 6
0
5
2
b For the distribution of scores of the
kindergarten children, the mean is 28.9,
the median is 30, the standard deviation
is 15.4 and the interquartile range is 27.
For the distribution of scores for the
prep. children, the mean is 29.5, the
median is 29.5, the standard deviation is
15.3 and the interquartile range is 27.
The distributions are very similar. There
is not a lot of difference between the
way the kindergarten children and the
prep. children scored.
8 B
9 C
exercise 2C
1 a
parallel boxplots
11A
10A
9A
120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200

Height (cm)
b Clearly, the median height increases
2 a
from Year 9 to Year 11. There is greater

variation in 9As distribution than in
10As. There is a wide range of heights
in the lower 25% of the distribution
of 9As distribution. There is a greater
variation in 11As distribution than in
10As, with a wide range of heights in
the top 25% of the 11A distribution.
4049 age
group
3039 age
group
2029 age
group
10
15
5
Annual superannuation contribution ( $1000)
b Clearly, there is a great jump in
contributions to superannuation for

people in their 40s. The spread of
contributions for that age group is
smaller than for people in their 20s or
30s, suggesting that a high proportion
of people in their 40s are conscious
of superannuation. For people in their 20s
and 30s, the range is greater, indicating a
range of interest in contributing to super.
exercise 2e
C
Multi-vitamin
15
10
Number of jars sold
20
Overall, the biggest sales were of multivitamins, followed by vitamin B, then C

and finally vitaminA.
4 a True
b True
c False
d True
5 a The Pearlfishers
b Orlando
6 a D
b C
b
c
d
exercise 2d
Two-way frequency tables

and segmented bar charts
Attitude
Female
Male
Total
37
79
116
Against
102
23
125
Total
139
102
241
For
3 B
4
Lesson length Junior Senior Total

50
33
83
1 hour
36
60
96
Total
86
93
179
i
iv
b i
iv
c i
iii
22
45
12
42
47%
100%
ii 26
v 41
ii 9
v 33
ii 58%
iv 100%
Preference
Men
59%
Share with friends
43%
41%
100%
100%
Attitude
Liberal
Labor
For
35.5
39.4
Against
64.5
60.6
100.0
100.0
Total
Attitude
Against
For
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
2000
Percentage
5 10 15 20 25 30
Hours of paving
Strong positive association of linear

form, no outliers
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
There is not a lot of difference in the

reactions.
8 a C
b A
4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32
Time of booking
(Number of days
before the performance)
1 a No association
b Moderate positive
c Strong negative
d Strong negative
e Strong positive
140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250
Yearly salary ( $1000)
association. r is approximately 0.6.

c r = 0.66. There is a moderate negative
linear association between the yearly
salary and the number of votes. That is,
the larger the yearly salary of the player,
the fewer the number of votes we might
expect to see.
2 Coefficient of determination is 0.7569.
The portion of variation in the number of
visits to the doctor that can be explained
by the variation in the number of cigarettes
smoked is about 76%.
3 a
exercise 2F
Labor
b There is moderate, negative linear
Strong negative association of linear

form, no outliers
Delegates
3000
Liberal
4000
1000
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
100 120 140 160 180 200

Population ('000)
6 C
1 a
Women
57%
Strong positive
Weak negative
No association
i r 0.8
ii Strong, negative, linear association
i r 0.6
ii Moderate, positive, linear association
i r 0.2
ii No linear association
i r 0.2
i r=1
ii Perfect, positive, linear association
i r 0.8
ii Strong, positive, linear association
i r0
i r 0.7
ii Moderate, negative, linear association
exercise 2G Calculating r and the

coefficient of determination
Moderate positive association of linear

form, no outliers
iii 21
Rent by themselves
Total
5D
7
iii 19
Cost ($)
3 a
45 minutes
f
g
h
2 a
3 B
4E
10
Number of
primary schools
e
f
Scatterplots
Yes positive association
Yes negative association
Yes negative association
No no association
Weak, negative association of linear
form
Strong, negative association of linear
form
Moderate, positive association of linear
form
Strong, positive association of linear
form
No association
Non-linear association
Yearly profit increase (%)
1 a
b
c
d
e
f
g
2 a
Number of votes
Row number in A-Reserve
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Annual advertising budget ( $1000)
b There is strong, positive linear
association. r is approximately 0.8.
c r = 0.98
d Coefficient of determination is 0.96.
e The proportion of the variation in
the yearly profit increase that can

be explained by the variation in the
advertising budget is 96%.
91
f The proportion of the variation in the
10
8
7
5
4
3
2
90 100 110 120 130 140 150

IQ
linear form and r is approximately 0.9.

c r = 0.96
e The proportion of the variation in the
number of tourists that can be explained
by the variation in the exchange rate is
92%.
150
association of linear form.
d
f
g
h
50
2 3 4 5 6
Number of people in household
indicates association showing linear

form and there are no outliers.
r 0.9
e r = 0.96
We cannot say whether total weight loss
is affected by the number of weeks people
stayed on the Certain Slim diet. We can
only note the degree of correlation.
r2 = 0.92
The coefficient of determination tells us
that 92% of the variation in total weight
loss can be explained by the variation
in the number of weeks on the Certain
Slim diet.
c r = 0.98
e The proportion of the variation in
ShorT anSWer
the weekly grocery costs that can be

explained by the variation in the number
of people in the household is 96%.
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
b
c
2 a
b There is almost perfect positive
For
66.7
18.9
Against
33.3
81.1
Total
100.0
100.0
3 A
8 D
4 E
9 E
Attitude
Against
For
Labor
b Clearly, the reaction to uranium mining
is affected by political affiliation.

5 a
85
80
75
5 B
70
1 a Number of injuries dependent, age of
0 3 4 5 6 7 8
Number of people on committee
association of a linear form and r is

nearly 1.
c r = 0.99
d No. High degree of correlation does
not mean we can comment on whether
one variable causes particular values in
another.
e Coefficient of determination is 0.98.
2 A
7 D
Labor
Delegates
mUlTiple ChoiCe
1 D
6 E
Liberal
Liberal
ChapTer reVieW
b There is strong, positive association of a
linear form and r is approximately 0.9.
Attitude
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
c It is appropriate since the scatterplot
100
4 a
b The scatterplot shows strong, positive
5 a
200
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Number of weeks on the diet
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2

Exchange rate
b There is strong, negative association of a
Weekly grocery costs ($)
Team A
Percentage
Annual funds raised ( $1000)
Team B
Pulse rate
92
Team C
9 a
Total weight loss (kg)
Number of tourists ( 1000)
6 a
funds raised that can be explained by the

variation in the number of people on the
committee is 98%.
7 E
8 C
player independent
Suburb independent, size of
mortgage dependent
It is not appropriate to designate one or
other as independent or dependent.
Leaf Stem Leaf
Full-time
Volunteer
1
0
2 2
0
4 4 3 3
0
6 5
0
0
8
1
0 1 1
1
2 3 3
1
4 5
1
1
Key: 0|3 = 3 hours
Both distributions are symmetric
with the same spread. The centre
of the volunteers distribution
is much higher than that of the
full-time firefighters distribution.
Clearly, the volunteers needed more
counselling.
15 16 17 18 19
Age
b There appears to be an extremely
weak or no association between the

variables.
6 r is approximately equal to 0.7. There
is a moderate, negative linear association
between the variables x andy.
7 a
100
95
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
Exam result (%)
4 a
60 70 80 90 100
Lectures attended (%)
b There is strong, positive correlation of a
linear form between the variables and r

is approximately equal to 0.8.
c r = 0.96
exTended reSponSe
1 a Age is independent and salary bracket is
the dependent variable.
b Parallel boxplot
c Neither, since we have categorical data
versus numerical data and not numerical

data versus numerical data.
2 a Key: 1|6 = 16 years old
Leaf Stem Leaf
Jazz concert
Symphony concert
9986
1
97430
2
03
98430
3
059
65320
4
25578899
5
034688
2
6
0
b
Symphony Jazz
Summary concert
concert
i
Xmin
20
16
ii
Q1
40.5
21.5
iii
Median
48
31.5
iv
Q3
53.5
41
Xmax
60
62
vi
Mean
45.45
32.35
vii
IQR
13
19.5
viii
Standard
deviation
11.20
12.04
c Overall, it appears that people who
attended the symphony concert were

older than those who attended the jazz
concert. The spread of ages is nearly
Stress level
High
Medium
Low
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
Percentage
exam results that can be explained by

the variation in the number of lectures
attended is 93%.
the same (slightly higher for the jazz

audience).
d Back-to-back stem plots can be used
only for data with two categories. Since
there are three events, parallel boxplots
should be used.
e Xmin = 12, Q1 = 34, median = 47.5,
Q3 = 56.5, Xmax = 68, mean = 44.95,
IQR=22.5, standard deviation = 15.55
Opera
Jazz
Regularly Sometimes Never
Symphony
15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
Age
Amount of exercise
f Overall, it appears that for this group
g Overall, the people who went to the
symphony concert and to the opera

were of similar ages and older than
those who went to the jazz concert. The
ages of people who went to the opera
are the most spread out, while the ages
of people who attended the symphony
concert are the least spread out.
3 a The amount of sporting activity is
independent; the level of stress is
dependent.
b 188
c 158
of students, stress levels are related to

the amount of physical activity they are
engaged in outside of school.
4 a Hours spent touch-typing
independent, speed of touch-typing
dependent.
b
Speed (wpm)
d The coefficient of determination is 0.93.

e The proportion of the variation in the
0 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Time (h)
Engaged in sport activity

outside school
Level of
stress
Regularly Sometimes Never
Low
47.1%
25.8%
16.2%
Medium
35.3%
32.3%
25.2%
High
17.6%
41.9%
58.6%
Total
100%
100%
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
100%
c Strong, positive, linear relationship
between the two variables
d Yes, since the scatterplot shows a linear

e
f
g
relationship with no outliers.

r is about 0.9
r = 0.97; yes
r2 = 0.94. This means that 94% of
variation in the speed of touch-typing
can be explained by variation in the
number of hours spent touch-typing.
93
ChapTer 3
Introduction to regression
diGiTal doC
doc-9418
10 Quick Questions
ChapTer ConTenTS
3a
3B
3C
3d
3e
3F
Fitting a straight line by eye

Fitting a straight line the 3-median method
Fitting a straight line least-squares regression
Interpretation, interpolation and extrapolation
Residual analysis
Transforming to linearity
Fitting straight lines to bivariate data

The process of fitting straight lines to bivariate data enables us to analyse relationships between the
data and possibly make predictions based on the given data set.
We will consider the three most common techniques for fitting a straight line and determining its
equation, namely:
1. Line fit by eye
2. 3-median method
3. Least squares.
The linear relationship expressed as an equation is often referred to as the linear regression equation
or line.
Recall from the previous chapter that when we display bivariate data as a scatterplot, the independent
variable is placed on the horizontal axis and the dependent variable is placed on the vertical axis. When
the relationship between two variables (x and y) is described in equation form, such as y = mx + c, the
subject, y, is the dependent variable and x is the independent variable.
3a
Fitting a straight line by eye
Consider the set of bivariate data points shown at right. In this case the x-values
could be heights of married women, while y-values could be the heights of their
husbands. We wish to determine a linear relationship between these two random
variables.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
x
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with lines of best
fit.
ChapTer 3 Introduction to regression
95
Of course, there is no single straight line which would go through all the points, so we can only
estimate such a line.
Furthermore, the more closely the points appear to be on or near a straight line, the more confident
we are that such a linear relationship may exist and the more accurate our fitted line should be.
Consider the estimate, drawn by eye in the figure below right. It is clear that most of the points
are on or very close to this straight line. This line was easily drawn since the points are
y
very much part of an apparent linear relationship.
However, note that some points are below the line and some are above it.
Furthermore, if x is the height of wives and y is the height of husbands, it seems
that husbands are generally taller than their wives.
Regression analysis is concerned with finding these straight lines using various
methods so that the number of points above and below the lines are balanced.
Method of fit ting lines by eye

There should be an equal number of points above and below the line. For example, if there are 12 points
in the data set, 6 should be above the line and 6 below it. This may appear logical or even obvious, but
fitting by eye involves a considerable margin of error.
Worked exaMple 1
Fit a straight line to the data in the figure at right using

the equal-number-of-points method.
x
Think
draW
Note that the number of points (n) is 8.
Fit a line where 4 points are above the line.

Using a clear plastic ruler, try to fit the best
line.
x
3
The first attempt has only 3 points below

the line where there should be 4. Make
refinements.
x
4
The second attempt is an improvement, but

the line is too close to the points above it.
Improve the position of the line until a better
balance between upper and lower points is
achieved.
exercise 3a
Fit ting a straight line by eye
The questions in this exercise represent data collected by groups of students conducting different
environmental projects. The students have to fit a straight line to their data sets.
Note:For many of these questions your answers may differ somewhat from those at the end of the
chapter. The answers are provided as a guide but there are likely to be individual differences when fitting
straight lines by eye.
96
1 We1
a y
Fit a straight line to the data in the scatterplots using the equal-number-of-points method.
b y
c y
x
d y
e y
h y
g y
2 For the following scatterplots, fit a line of best fit by eye and determine the equation of the line.
b
y
4
Time (seconds)
3
2
1
0
30
20
10
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 x
5
10 15
Age (years)
Fitting a straight line

the 3-median method
3B
Fitting lines by eye is useful but it is not the most accurate of methods. Greater accuracy is achieved
through closer analysis of the data. Upon closer analysis, it is possible to find the equation of a line of
best fit of the form y = mx + c where m is the gradient and c is the y-intercept. Several mathematical
methods provide a line with a more accurate fit.
One of these methods is called the 3-median method. It involves the division of the data set into
3groups and the use of the 3 medians in these groups to determine a line of best fit.
It is used when data show a linear relationship. It can even be used when the data contain outliers.
The 3-median method is best described as a step-by-step method.
Step 1. Plot the points on a scatterplot. This is shown in figure 1.
Step 2. Divide the points into 3 groups using vertical divisions (see
figure 2 on page 98). The number of points in a data set will
not always be exactly divisible by 3. Thus, there will be three
alternatives, as follows.
(a) If the number of points is divisible by 3, divide them into
3 equal groups, for example, 3, 3, 3 or 7, 7, 7.
(b) If there is 1 extra point, put the extra point in the middle
group, for example, 3, 4, 3 or 7, 8, 7.
(c) If there are 2 extra points, put 1 extra point in each of the
outer groups, for example, 4, 3, 4 or 8, 7, 8.
y
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 x
Figure 1
97
Step 3. Find the median point of each of the 3 groups and mark each
median on the scatterplot (see figure 3). Recall that the median
is the middle value. So, the median point of each group has
an x-coordinate which is the median of the x-values in the
group and a y-coordinate which is the median of the y-values
in the group.
(a) The left group is the lower group and its median
is denoted by (xL, yL).
(b) The median of the middle group is denoted
by (xM, yM).
(c) The right group is the upper group and its median
is denoted by (xU, yU).
Note: Although the x-values are already in ascending order on the
scatterplot, the y-values within each group may need re-ordering
before you can find the median.
To complete steps 4 and 5, three different approaches may
be taken from here: graphical, arithmetic or you can use a CAS
calculator.
y
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 x
Figure 2
y
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
(xU, yU)
(xM, yM)
(xL, yL)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 x
Figure 3
Graphical approach
y
The graphical approach is fast and, therefore, usually the preferred
7
method (see figure 4).
6
Step 4. Draw in the line of best fit. Place your ruler so that it passes
5
through the lower and upper medians. Move the ruler a third of
4
the way toward the middle group median while maintaining the
3
slope. Hold the ruler there and draw the line.
2
Step 5. Find the equation of the line (general form y = mx + c).
1
First, use the coordinates of the lower and upper medians to find
yU yL
0
.
the gradient: m =
xU xL
Next, find the y-intercept. If the scale on the axes begins at zero,
you can read off the y-intercept of the line. Otherwise, substitute
the coordinates of any point on the line into equation and solve for c.
(xM, yM)
(xU, yU)
(xL, yL)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 x
Figure 4
arithmetic approach
Using the arithmetic approach, you will proceed as follows.
yU yL
.
Step 4. Calculate the gradient (m) of the line. Use the rule: m =
xU xL
Step 5. Calculate the y-intercept (c) of the line.
Use the rule: c = 13 [(yL + yM + yU) m(xL + xM + xU)]
Thus, the equation of the regression line is y = mx + c.
Using a CaS calculator

Most CAS calculators have an inbuilt function, such as MedianMedian, for fitting a line using the
3-median method. This function can be used in most of the exercise questions.
Worked exaMple 2
Find the equation of the regression line for the data in the table below using the 3-median method.
Give coefficients correct to 2 decimal places.
x
y
98
1
1
2
3
3
2
4
6
5
5
7
6
Think
1
Plot the points on a scatterplot and divide the

data into 3 groups. Note there are 6 points, so
the division will be 2, 2, 2.
WriTe/draW
y
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Find the median point of each group. Since

each group has only 2 points, medians are
found by averaging them.
We now have the option of following either the
graphical approach or the arithmetic approach.
2
Method 1: Using the graphical approach

3 Mark in the medians and place a ruler on the
outer 2 medians. Maintaining the same slope
on the ruler, move it one-third of the way
towards the middle median. Draw the line.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 x
(xL, yL) = (1.5, 2)

(xM, yM) = (3.5, 4)
(xU, yU) = (6, 5.5)
y
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read off the y-intercept from the graph.
y-intercept = 1
Use the coordinates of the lower and upper

medians to calculate the gradient (m). The
points are: (1.5, 2) and (6.5, 5).
Gradient (m) =
Write the equation of the 3-median

regression line.
Method 2: Using the arithmetic approach

3
Find the gradient using the formula, and the

upper and lower medians found previously.
(This is the same as the graphical approach.)
yU yL
xU xL
5.5 2
6 1.5
3.5
=
4.5
7
=
9
0.78
y = mx + c
= 0.78x + 1
yU yL
m= x x
U
L
5.5 2
=
6 1.5
= 3.5
4.5
7
=9
0.78
99
Find the y-intercept by substituting the

coordinates of all 3medians in the formula.
c = 1 [(yL + yM + yU) m(xL + xM + xU)]

3
1
= [(2 + 4 + 5.5) 7 (1.5 + 3.5 + 6)]
3
9
1
7
= [11.5 (11)]
3
9
1
= [11.5 8.555]
3
c 0.98
State the regression equation.
y = 0.78x + 0.98
Note: There are slight variations in the values of the y-intercept of the line between the graphical and
the arithmetic approaches. This is because the arithmetic method gives precise values for the y-intercept,
whereas the graphical method gives approximate values.
Fit ting a straight line

the 3-median method
exercise 3B
diGiTal doCS
doc-9419
SkillSHEET 3.1
Finding the median
doc-9420
SkillSHEET 3.2
Gradient
doc-9398
SkillSHEET 3.3
The equation of
astraight line
Find the regression line for the data in the table below using the 3-median method.
1 We2
2 Copy and complete the following table for the division of data points into three groups in the 3-median
regression line method. The first row of the table has been completed for you.
Total number of
points (n)
Lower group
Middle group
Upper group
10
11
12
13
14
26
43
58
698
3 Using the data in the table below, find the regression line using the 3-median method on your CAS
calculator.
x
10
20
20
30
40
50
55
60
65
75
80
60
50
70
40
55
40
30
10
25
15
Questions 4 and 5 refer to the data in the table below.

Day
Temperature (C)
1
14
2
13
3
15
4
17
5
16
6
18
7
19
8
17
9
22
10
20
11
21
4 MC The gradient of the 3-median regression line for the above data set is:
a 0.56
B 0.75
C 1
d 0.88
e 0.5
5 MC The y-intercept of the 3-median regression line for the data set above is:
a 12.00
100
B 12.15
C 17.83
d 23.52
e 36.44
12
24
6 The sales figures (in thousands) for a company over a 10-month period were recorded as follows.
Month (x)
Sales (y)
10
85
77
81
73
68
72
64
57
53
49
Find the equation of the 3-median regression line.

7 During an experiment, a research worker gathers the following data set:
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
11 16 15 13 19 22 26 24 28 31 30 32 36 29 39 40 44
Reservoir capacity (megalitres)
a Plot the data as a scatterplot.

b Find the equation of the 3-median regression line from the graph.
8 The graph at right shows the daily water level in a reservoir during
a drought. From the graph (you may use the formulas or your
calculator to check your answers):
a find the coordinates of the points used to find the gradient.
Use these to find the gradient.
b find the coordinates of the median of the middle group
c estimate the y-intercept (use the graph and medians)
d state the relationship between water level and day as an equation.
9 Since management instituted new policies, the productivity at DMH
5
4
3
2
1
0
car plant has been improving. The scatterplot below shows the
number of cars produced each week over a 10-week period.
6 8
Day
10
Number of cars produced
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
0
a
b
c
d
e
6 8
Week
10
What are the coordinates of the points used to find the gradient? Use them to find the gradient.
What are the coordinates of the median of the middle group?
Using the graph and medians found, estimate the y-intercept.
State the relationship between cars produced and week as an equation.
Check your answers using a CAS calculator.
10 MC The graph at right represents the height of Louise,
measured each year. Which graph best shows the line of best
fit using the 3-median method?
140
120
Height (cm)
120
Height (cm)
140
100
80
60
100
40
80
20
60
40
20
0
6 8 10 12 14
Age (years)
6 8 10 12 14
Age (years)
101
C
140
140
120
120
100
80
60
80
60
40
20
20
2
6 8 10 12 14
Age (years)
140
6 8 10 12 14
Age (years)
6 8 10 12 14
Age (years)
120
Height (cm)
100
80
60
100
80
60
40
40
20
20
140
120
Height (cm)
100
40
Height (cm)
Height (cm)
6 8 10 12 14
Age (years)
11 MC When using the 3-median method for fitting a straight line, which of the following statements is false?
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with least squares
regression.
a
B
C
d
e
The straight line is not affected by outliers.

The two outside medians are used for the gradient of the line.
For the y-intercept move the line one-third of the way towards the middle median.
The gradient changes when moving the line towards the middle median.
The number of points in each group must be balanced.

least-squares regression
3C
Another method for finding the equation of a straight line which is fitted to data is known as the
method of least-squares regression. It is used when data show a linear relationship and have no
obvious outliers.
To understand the underlying theory behind least-squares, consider the
y
regression line shown below.
We wish to minimise the total of the vertical lines, or errors in some way.
For example, balancing the errors above and below the line. This is reasonable,
but for sophisticated mathematical reasons it is preferable to minimise the sum
of the squares of each of these errors. This is the essential mathematics of leastsquares regression.
The calculation of the equation of a least-squares regression line is simple
using a CAS calculator.
Worked exaMple 3
A study shows the more calls a teenager makes on their mobile phone, the less time they spend
on each call. Find the equation of the linear regression line for the number of calls made plotted
against call time in minutes using the least-squares method on a CAS calculator. Express
coefficients correct to 2decimal places.
Number of minutes (x)
Number of calls ( y)
102
1
11
3
9
4
10
7
6
10
8
12
4
14
3
15
1
Think
WriTe
Enter the data into your calculator and

use it to find the equation of least squares
regression line.
y = 0.634 271x + 11.7327
Write the equation with coefficients

expressed to 2 decimal places.
y = 0.63x + 11.73
Write the equation in terms of the variable

names. Replace x with number of minutes
and y with number of calls.
Number of calls = 0.63 no. of minutes + 11.73
Calculating the least-squares regression

line by hand
The least-squares regression equation minimises the average deviation of the points in the data set from
the line of best fit. This can be shown using the following summary data and formulas to arithmetically
determine the least-squares regression equation.
Summary data needed:

x
y
sx
sy
r
the mean of the independent variable (x-variable)

the mean of the dependent variable (y-variable)
the standard deviation of the independent variable
the standard deviation of the dependent variable
Pearsons productmoment correlation coefficient.
Formula to use:
The general form of the least-squares regression line is
y = mx + c
where:
s
the slope of the regression line is m = r sxy
the y-intercept of the regression line is c = y mx.
s
Alternatively, if the general form is given as y = a + bx, then b = r sxy and a = y bx.
Worked exaMple 4
A study to find a relationship between the height of husbands and the

height of their wives revealed the following details.
TUTorial
eles-1264
Mean height of the husbands: 180 cm
Worked example 4
Mean height of the wives: 169 cm
Standard deviation of the height of the husbands: 5.3 cm
Standard deviation of the height of the wives: 4.8 cm
Correlation coefficient, r = 0.85
The form of the least-squares regression line is to be:
Height of wife = m height of husband + c
a Which variable is the dependent variable?
b Calculate the value of m for the regression line (to 2 decimal places).
c Calculate the value of c for the regression line (to 2 decimal places).
d Use the equation of the regression line to predict the height of a wife whose husband is 195 cm
tall (to the nearest cm).
Think
a Recall that the dependent variable is the subject of
the equation in y = mx + c form; that is, y.
WriTe
a The dependent variable is the height
of the wife.
103
sy
b m = rs
b 1 The value of m is the gradient of the regression
line. Write the formula and state the required

values.
2
= 0.85

evaluate m.
= 0.7698
0.77
4.8
5.3
c c = y mx
c 1 The value of c is the y-intercept of the
y = 169, x = 180 and m = 0.7698 (from part b)
regression line. Write the formula and state the

required values.
2
r = 0.85, sy = 4.8 and sx = 5.3
= 169 0.7698 180

= 30.436
30.44

evaluate c.
d y = 0.77x + 30.44 or
d 1 State the equation of the regression line,

using the values calculated from parts b and
c. In this equation, y represents the height of
height of wife = 0.77 height of husband

+ 30.44
the wife and x represents the height of the

husband.
2
The height of the husband is 195 cm, so

substitute x = 195 into the equation and evaluate.
= 0.77 195 + 30.44

= 180.59
Write a statement, rounding your answer to

the nearest cm.
Using the equation of the regression line

found, the wifes height would be 181 cm.
Fit ting a straight line

exercise 3C
diGiTal doC
doc-9421
Spreadsheet
least-squares
regression
1 We3 Find the equation of the linear regression line for the following data set using the least-squares
method.
x
10
12
15
17
10
13
15
14
18
19
23
2 Find the equation of the linear regression line for the following data set using the least-squares method.
35
28
22
16
19
14
3 Find the equation of the linear regression line for the following data set using the least-squares method.
10
16
12
16
11
21
4 We4 The following summary details were calculated from a study to find a relationship between
mathematics exam marks and English exam marks from the results of 120 Year 12 students.
Mean mathematics exam mark = 64%
Mean English exam mark = 74%
Standard deviation of mathematics exam mark = 14.5%
Standard deviation of English exam mark = 9.8%
Correlation coefficient, r = 0.64
The form of the least-squares regression line is to be:
Mathematics exam mark = m English exam mark + c.
a Which variable is the dependent variable (y-variable)?
b Calculate the value of m for the least-squares regression line (correct to 2 decimal places).
c Calculate the value of c for the least-squares regression line (correct to 2 decimal places).
d Use the regression line to predict the expected mathematics exam mark if a student scores 85% in
an English exam (to the nearest percentage).
104
5 Find the least-squares regression equation, given the following summary data.
a x = 5.6
sx = 1.2
y = 110.4
sy = 5.7
r = 0.7
b x = 110.4
sx = 5.7
y = 5.6
sy = 1.2
r = 0.7
c x = 25
sx = 4.2
y = 10 200
sy = 250
r = 0.88
d x = 10
sx = 1
y = 20
sy = 2
r = 0.5
6 Repeat questions 1, 2 and 3, collecting the values for x, sx, y, sy and r from the calculator. Use these
data to find the least-squares regression equation.

Compare your answers to the ones obtained earlier from questions 1, 2 and 3. What do you notice?
7 A mathematician is interested in the behaviour patterns of her kitten, and collects the following data on
two variables. Help her manipulate the data.
x
y
1
20
2
18
3
16
4
14
5
12
6
10
7
8
8
6
9
4
10
2
a Fit a least-squares regression line.

b Comment on any interesting features of this line.
c Now fit the opposite regression line, namely:
20
18
16
14
12
10
10
d In comparing the regression line from part a with that from part c, what other interesting features
do you find?
8 MC The best estimate of the least-squares regression line for the
scatterplot at right is:
1
2
a y = 2x
1
2
C y= x+2
B y= x
1
2
d y= x2
y
4
3
2
1
1
2
e y= x1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 x
9 MC Given the summary details
x = 5.4
sx = 1.8
y = 12.5
sy = 1.4
r = 0.57
the values of m and c for the equation of the regression line y = mx + c are
d 0.44 and 14.9
a 0.44 and 14.9 B 0.73 and 14.6 C 0.44 and 10.1
e 1.32 and 3.8
10 The life span of adult males in a certain country over the last 220 years has been recorded.
Year
1780 1800 1820 1840 1860 1880 1900 1920 1940 1960 1980 2000
Life span
51.2
(years)
52.4
51.7
53.2
53.1
54.7
59.9
62.7
63.2
66.8
72.7
79.2
a Fit a least-squares regression line to these data.

b Plot the data and the regression line on a scatterplot.
c Do the data really look linear? Discuss.
11 The price of a long distance telephone call changes as the duration of the call increases. The cost of a
sample of calls from Melbourne to Slovenia are summarised in the table below.
Cost of call ($)
1.25
1.85
2.25
2.50
3.25
3.70
4.30
4.90
5.80
Duration of call
(seconds)
30
110
250
260
300
350
420
500
600
Cost of call ($)
7.50
8.00
9.25
10.00
12.00
13.00
14.00
16.00
18.00
Duration of call
(seconds)
840
1000
1140
1200
1500
1860
2400
3600
7200
a What is the independent variable likely to be?

b Fit a least-squares regression line to the data.
c View the data on a scatterplot and comment on the reliability of the regression line in predicting
the cost of telephone calls. (That is, consider whether the regression line you found proves that
costs of calls and duration of calls are related.)
105
12 MC In a study to find a relationship between the height of plants and the hours of daylight they were
exposed to, the following summary details were obtained.

Mean height of plants = 40 cm
Mean hours of daylight = 8 hours
Standard deviation of plant height = 5 cm
Standard deviation of daylight hours = 3 hours
Pearsons correlation coefficient = 0.9
The most appropriate regression equation is:
a height of plant (cm) = 13.6 + 0.54 hours of daylight
B height of plant (cm) = 8.5 + 0.34 hours of daylight
C height of plant (cm) = 2.1 + 0.18 hours of daylight
d height of plant (cm) = 28.0 + 1.50 hours of daylight
e height of plant (cm) = 35.68 + 0.54 hours of daylight
13 You saw with the 3-median method that at least six points were needed to perform meaningful analysis
and generate a linear equation. Is the same true of least-squares linear regression?
Consider the following data set.
diGiTal doC
doc-9422
WorkSHEET 3.1
a
b
c
d
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
12
16
17
21
25
29
Perform a least-squares regression on the first two points only.

Now add the 3rd point and repeat.
Repeat for the 4th, 5th and 6th points.
Comment on your results.
interpretation, interpolation
and extrapolation
3d
interpreting slope and intercept (m and c)

Once you have a linear regression line, the slope and intercept can give important information about the
data set.
The slope (m) indicates the change in dependent variable as independent variable increases by 1unit.
The y-intercept indicates the value of the dependent variable when independent variable = 0.
Worked exaMple 5
In the study of the growth of a species of bacterium, it is

assumed that the growth is linear. However, it is very
expensive to measure the number of bacteria in a sample.
Given the data listed below, find:
a the equation, describing the relationship between the
two variables
b the rate at which bacteria are growing
c the number of bacteria at the start of the experiment.
Day of experiment
Number of bacteria
500
11
1000 1100 2100 2500
Think
a 1 Find the equation of the least-squares
WriTe
regression line using your calculator.

Replace x and y with the variables in
question.
Number of bacteria = 202.5 + 206.25

day of experiment
b The rate at which bacteria are growing is given
b m is 206.25, hence on average, the number of
by the gradient of the least-squares regression.

106
bacteria increases by approximately 206 per day.
c The number of bacteria at the start of the
c The y-intercept is 202.5, hence the initial number
experiment is given by the y-intercept of the

least-squares regression line.
of bacteria present was approximately 203.
interpolation and extrapolation

As we have already observed, any linear regression method produces a linear equation in the form:
y = mx + c,
where m is the gradient and c is the y-intercept.
This equation can be used to predict the y-value for a given value of x. Of course, these are only
approximations, since the regression line itself is only an estimate of the true relationship between the
bivariate data. However, they can still be used, in some cases, to provide additional information about
the data set (that is, make predictions).
There are two types of prediction: interpolation and extrapolation.
interpolation
Interpolation is the use of the regression line to predict values within the range of data in a set, that
is, the values that are in between the values already in the data set. If the data are highly linear (r near
+1 or 1) then we can be confident that our interpolated value is quite accurate. If the data are not highly
linear (r near 0) then our confidence is duly reduced. For example, medical information collected from
a patient every third day would establish data for day 3, 6, 9, . . . and so on. After performing regression
analysis, it is likely that an interpolation for day 4 would be accurate, given a high r value.
extrapolation
Extrapolation is the use of the regression line to predict values outside the range of data in a set, that is,
values that are smaller than the smallest value already in the data set or larger than the largest value.
Two problems may arise in attempting to extrapolate from a data set. Firstly, it may not be reasonable
to extrapolate too far away from the given data values. For example, suppose there is a weather data
set for 5 days. Even if it is highly linear (r near +1 or 1) a regression line used to predict the same data
15 days in the future is highly risky. Weather has a habit of randomly fluctuating and patterns rarely stay
stable for very long.
Secondly, the data may be highly linear in a narrow band of the given data set. For example, there may
be data on stopping distances for a train at speeds of between 30 and 60 km/h. Even if they are highly
linear in this range, it is unlikely that things are similar at very low speeds (015 km/h) or high speeds
(over 100 km/h).
Generally, one should feel more confident about the accuracy of a prediction derived from
interpolation than one derived from extrapolation. Of course, it still depends upon the correlation
coefficient (r). The closer to linearity the data are, the more confident our predictions in all cases.
Worked exaMple 6
Using interpolation and the following data set, predict the height of an 8-year-old girl.
Age (years)
Height (cm)
1
60
3
76
Think
5
115
7
126
9
141
11
148
WriTe
y = 9.23x + 55.63
Find equation of the least-squares regression line

using your calculator. (Age is the independent
variable and height is the dependent one.)
Replace x and y with the variables in question.
Height = 9.23 age + 55.63
Substitute 8 for age into equation and evaluate.
When age = 8,
Height = 9.23 8 + 55.63
= 129.5 (cm)
Write the answer.
At age 8, the predicted height is 129.5 cm.
107
Worked exaMple 7
Use extrapolation and the data from Worked example 6 to predict the height of the girl when she
turns 15. Discuss the reliability of this prediction.
Think
WriTe
Use the regression equation to calculate the

girls height at age 15.
Height = 9.23 age + 55.63

= 9.23 15 + 55.63
= 194.08 cm
Analyse the result.
Since we have extrapolated the result (that is, since

the greatest age in our data set is 11 and we are
predicting outside the data set) we cannot claim that
the prediction is reliable.
interpretation, interpolation
and extrapolation
exercise 3d
diGiTal doC
doc-9423
Spreadsheet
interpolation/
extrapolation
1 We5 A drug company wishes to test the effectiveness of a drug to increase red blood cell counts
in people who have a low count. The following data are collected.
Day of experiment
Red blood cell count
210
240
230
260
260
290
Find:
a the equation, describing the relationship between the variables in the form y = a + bx
b the rate at which the red blood cell count was changing
c the red blood cell count at the beginning of the experiment (that is, on day 0).
2 A wildlife exhibition is held over 6 weekends and features still and live displays. The number of live
animals that are being exhibited varies each weekend. The number of animals participating, together
with the number of visitors to the exhibition each weekend, is shown below.
Number of animals
Number of visitors
311
220
413
280
379
334
Find:
a the rate of increase of visitors as the number of live animals is increased by 1
b the predicted number of visitors if there are no live animals.
3 An electrical goods warehouse produces the following data showing the selling price of electrical goods
to retailers and the volume of those sales.

diGiTal doC
doc-9424
SkillSHEET 3.4
Using the regression
line to make
predictions
Selling price ($)

Sales volume ( 1000)
60
80
100
120
140
160
200
220
240
260
400
300
275
250
210
190
150
100
50
Perform a least-squares regression analysis and discuss the meaning of the gradient and y-intercept.
4 A study of the dining-out habits of various income groups in a particular suburb produces the results
shown in the table below.

Weekly income ($)
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Number of restaurant
visits per year
5.8
2.6
1.4
1.2
4.8
11.6
4.4
12.2
Use the data to predict:

a We6 the number of visits per year by a person on a weekly income of $680
b We7 the number of visits per year by a person on a weekly income of $2000.
5 Fit a least-squares regression line to the following data.
108
10
12
17
21
27
35
Find:
a the regression equation
b y when x = 3
c y when x = 12
d x when y = 7
e x when y = 25.
f Which of b to e above are extrapolations?
6 The following table represents the costs for shipping a consignment of shoes from Melbourne factories.
The cost is given in terms of distance from Melbourne. There are two factories that can be used. The
data are summarised below.
Distance from
Melbourne (km)
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Factory 1 cost ($)
70
70
90
100
110
120
150
180
Factory 2 cost ($)
70
75
80
100
100
115
125
135
a
b
c
d
Find the least-squares regression equation for each factory.

Which factory is likely to have the lowest cost to ship to a shop in Melbourne?
Which factory is likely to have the lowest cost to ship to Mytown, 115 kilometres from Melbourne?
Which factory has the most linear shipping rates?
7 A factory produces calculators. The least-squares regression line for cost of production (C ) as a
function of numbers of calculators (n) produced is given by:
a
b
c
d
e
C = 600 + 7.76n
Furthermore, this function is deemed accurate when producing between 100 and 1000calculators.
Find the cost to produce 200 calculators.
How many calculators can be produced for $2000?
Find the cost to produce 10 000 calculators.
What are the fixed costs for this production?
Which of a to c above is an interpolation?
8 A study of the relationship between IQ and results in a mathematics exam produced the following
results. Unfortunately, some of the data were lost. Copy and complete the table by using the leastsquares equation with the data that were supplied.
Note: Only use (x, y) pairs if both are in the table.
IQ
80
Test result (%)
56
60
92
102
68
65
105
74
107
111
71
73
115
121
92
9 The least-squares regression line for a starting salary (s) as a function of number of years of
schooling(n) is given by the rule: s = 18 500 + 900n.

a Find the salary for a person who completed 10 years of schooling.
b Find the salary for a person who completed 12 years of schooling.
c Find the salary for a person who completed 15 years of schooling.
d Mary earned $30 400. What was her likely schooling experience?
e Discuss the reasonableness of predicting salary on the basis of years of schooling.
3e
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
residual analysis
There are situations where the mere fitting of a regression line to some data is not enough to convince us
that the data set is truly linear. Even if the correlation is close to +1 or 1 it still may not be convincing
enough.
The next stage is to analyse the residuals, or deviations, of each data point from the straight line.
A residual is the vertical difference between each data point and the regression line.
Calculating residuals
A sociologist gathers data on the heights of brothers and sisters in families from different ethnic
backgrounds. He enters his records in the table below.
x
12
10
12
16
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with residual
analysis.
109
He then plots each point, and fits a regression line as shown in figure 1, which follows. He then decides
to calculate the residuals.
The residuals are simply the vertical distances from the line to each point. These lines are shown as
blue and red bars in figure 2.
y
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
10 x
10 x
Figure 2
Figure 1
Finally, he calculates the residuals for each data point. This is done in two steps.
Step 1. He calculates the predicted value of y from the regression equation.
Step 2. He calculates the difference between this predicted value and the original value.
Worked exaMple 8
Consider the data set below. Find the equation of the least-squares regression
line and calculate the residuals.
x
10
15
24
47
77
112
187
309
Think
WriTe
y = 28.7x 78.7
Find the equation of a least-squares

regression line using a calculator.
Use the equation of the least-squares

regression line to calculate the predicted
y-values (these are labelled as ypred)
for every x-value in the table. That is,
substitute each x-value into the equation
and evaluate record results in the table.
x-values
y-values
5.0
6.0
Calculate residuals for each point by

subtracting predicted y-values from
the actual y-value. (That is, residual =
observed y-value predicted y-value).
Record results in the table.
x-values
y-values
Predicted
y-values
Residuals
( y ypred)
Predicted
y-values
Residuals
( y ypred)
8.0
15.0
24.0
50.05
21.38
7.3
35.98
64.66
55.05
27.38
0.7
20.98
40.66
6
47.0
7
77.0
8
112.0
9
187.0
10
309.0
93.34
122.02
150.7
179.38 208.06
46.34
45.02
38.7
7.62 100.94
Notes
1. The residuals may be determined by (y ypred); that is, the actual values minus the predicted values.
2. The sum of all the residuals always adds to 0 (or very close to 0 after rounding), when least-squares
regression is used. This can act as a check for our calculations.
introduction to residual analysis

As we observed in the previous worked example, there is not really a good fit between the data and the
least-squares regression line; however, there seems to be a pattern in the residuals. How can we observe
this pattern in more detail?
110
The answer is to plot the residuals themselves against the original x-values. If there is a pattern, it
should become clearer after they are plotted.
Types of residual plots

There are three basic types of residual plots. Each type indicates whether or not a linear relationship
exists between the two variables under investigation.
Note: The points are joined together to see the patterns more clearly.
Residuals
(+)
Positive
The points of the residuals are randomly scattered

above and below the x-axis. The original data
probably have a linear relationship.
Negative
()
Residuals
(+)
Positive
Negative
()
The points of the residuals show a curved pattern

(), with a series of negative, then positive and
back to negative residuals along the x-axis. The
original data probably have a non-linear relationship.
Transformation of the data may be required.
Residuals
(+)
Positive
Negative
()
The points of the residuals show a curved pattern

(), with a series of positive, then negative and
back to positive residuals along the x-axis. The
original data probably have a non-linear relationship.
Transformation of the data may be required.
The transformation of data suggested in the last two residual plots will be studied in more detail in the
next section.
Worked exaMple 9
Using the same data as in Worked example 8, plot the residuals and discuss the features of the
residual plot.
Think
1
Generate a table of values of residuals

against x.
WriTe/draW
x-values
Residuals
(y ypred)
x-values
Residuals
(y ypred)
55.05
27.38
46.34
45.02
3
0.7
8
20.98
40.66
38.7
7.62
10
100.94
111
Plot the residuals against x. To see the

pattern clearer, join the consecutive
points with straight line segments.
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
20
40
60
Residual
If the relationship was linear the

residuals would be scattered randomly
above and below the line. However, in
this instance there is a pattern which
looks somewhat like a parabola.This
should indicate that the data were not
really linear, but were more likely to be
quadratic. Comment on the residual plot
and its relevance.
10 x
The residual plot indicates a distinct pattern suggesting

that a non-linear model could be more appropriate.
residual analysis
exercise 3e
1 We8 Find the residuals for the following data.
9.7
12.7
13.7
14.4
14.5
2 We9 For the results of question 1, plot the residuals and discuss whether the relationship between
x and y is linear.
3 MC Which of the following scatterplots shows linear relationship between the variables?
iii
i
ii
80
80
80
70
70
70
60
60
60
50
50
50
40
40
40
30
30
30
20
20
20
10
10
10
0
20
40
60
80
20
40
a All of them
B None of them
d ii only
e ii and iii only
60
80
20
40
60
80
C i and iii only
4 Consider the following table from a survey conducted at a new computer manufacturing factory. It shows
the percentage of defective computers produced on 8 different days after the opening of the factory.
Day
Defective rate (%)
10
11
15
10
12
a The results of least-squares regression were: m = 1.19, c = 16.34, r = 0.87. Use the above
b
c
d
e
information to calculate the predicted defective rates (ypred).

Find the residuals (y ypred).
Plot the residuals and comment on the likely linearity of the data.
Estimate the defective rate after the first day of the factorys operation.
Estimate when the defective rate will be at zero. Comment on this result.
5 The following data represent the number of tourists booked into a hotel in central Queensland during
the first week of a drought. (Assume Monday = 1.)

Day
Bookings in hotel
112
Mon.
Tues.
Wed.
Thurs.
Fri.
Sat.
Sun.
158
124
74
56
31
35
22
The results of least-squares regression were:

m = 22.5, c = 161.3, r = 0.94.
a Find the predicted hotel bookings (ypred) for each day of the week.
b Find the residuals (y ypred).
c Plot the residuals and comment on the likely linearity of the data.
d Would this regression line be a typical one for this hotel?
6 MC A least-squares regression is fitted to
the points shown in the scatterplot at right.

Which of the following looks most similar
to the residual plot for the data?
y
40
30
20
10
0
y
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
y
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
x
C
y
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
y
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
y
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
7 From each table of residuals, decide whether or not the relationship between the variables is likely to be
linear.
a
x
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
y
2
4
7
11
21
20
19
15
12
6
Residuals
1.34
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.97
2.3
1.2
0.15
0.9
2.8
x
23
21
19
16
14
11
9
6
4
3
y
56
50
43
41
37
31
28
22
19
17
Residuals
0.12
0.56
1.30
0.20
1.45
2.16
0.22
3.56
2.19
1.05
5
94
7
180
x
1.2
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.6
2.7
2.9
3.0
3.1
y
23
25
24
26
28
29
34
42
56
64
Residuals
0.045
0.003
0.023
0.089
0.15
0.98
0.34
0.01
0.45
1.23
8 Consider the following data set.
x
y
a
b
c
d
e
0
1
1
4
2
15
3
33
4
60
6
134
8
240
9
300
10
390
Plot the data and fit a least-squares regression line.

Find the correlation coefficient and interprete its value.
Calculate the coefficient of determination and explain its meaning.
Find the residuals.
Construct the residual plot and use it to comment on the appropriateness of the assumption that
the relationship between the variables is linear.
diGiTal doC
doc-9425
WorkSHEET 3.2
113
3F
inTeraCTiViTY
int-0184
Transforming to
linearity
eleSSon
eles-0050
Which way to stretch?
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Although linear regression might produce a good fit (high r value) to a set of data, the data set may still
be non-linear. To remove (as much as is possible) such non-linearity, the data can be transformed.
Either the x-values, y-values, or both may be transformed in some way so that the transformed data
are more linear. This enables more accurate predictions (extrapolations and interpolations) from the
regression equation. In Further Mathematics, six transformations are studied:
Logarithmic transformations:
y versus log10 (x)
log10 ( y) versus x
y2 versus x
Quadratic transformations:
y versus x2
1 versus x
Reciprocal transformations:
y versus 1x
y
Choosing the correct transformations

To decide on an appropriate transformation, examine the points on a scatterplot with high values of
x and/or y (that is, away from the origin) and decide for each axis whether it needs to be stretched or
compressed to make the points line up. The best way to see which of the transformations to use is to
look at a number of data patterns.
Quadratic transformations
1. Use y versus x2 transformation.
Stretch
x-values
Do more
Interact
with transforming
data.
Stretch
x-values
3. Use y2 versus x transformation.
Stretch
y-values
Stretch
y-values
logarithmic and reciprocal transformations

1. Use y versus log10 (x) or y versus 1
x
transformation.
Compress
x-values
3. Use log10 (y) versus x or

1 versus x transformation.
y
Compress
y-values
114

x
transformation.
Compress
x-values
4. Use log10 (y) versus x or 1 versus x

y
transformation.
Compress
y-values
Testing transformations
As there are at least two possible transformations for any given non-linear scatterplot, the decision
as to which is the best comes from the coefficient of correlation. The least-squares regression
equation that has a Pearson correlation coefficient closest to 1 or 1 should be considered as the
most appropriate. However, there may be very little difference so common sense needs to be
applied. It is sometimes more useful to use a linear function rather than one of the six non-linear
functions.
Worked exaMple 10
Apply a quadratic transformation to the data from Worked example 8,

reproduced here. The regression line has been determined as
TUTorial
eles-1265
Worked example 10
y = 28.7x 78.7 with r = 0.87.

x
10
15
24
47
77
112
187
309
Think
1
Plot the data and the regression line to

check that a quadratic transformation is
suitable.
One option is to stretch the x-axis. This
requires an x2 transformation.
Square the x-values to give a transformed

data set.
Find the equation of the least-squares

regression line for the transformed
data.
Using a calculator or spreadsheet:
(a) gradient (m) = 2.78
(b) y-intercept (c) = 28.0
(c) correlation (r) = 0.95.
Plot the new transformed data and

regression line.
WriTe/draW
y
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
50
Stretch
x-values
10
x2
16
25
36
49
15
24
47
77 112 187 309
64
81 100
y = 2.78xT 28 where xT = x2; that is,

y = 2.78x2 28
Notes
1. These data are still not truly linear,
but are less parabolic. Perhaps
another transformation would
improve things even further. This
could involve transforming the
y-values, such as log10 (y), and
applying another linear regression.
y
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
50
20 40 60 80 100 x2
2. See Worked examples 11 and 12

for a CAS calculator approach to
transforming data.
115
Worked exaMple 11
Apply a logarithmic transformation to the following data which represent a

patients heart rate as a function of time. The regression line has been
determined as
Heart rate = 93.2 6.97 time, with r = 0.90.
Time after operation (h)
Heart rate (beats/min)
100
80
65
55
50
51
48
46
Think
1
WriTe
Transform the y data by

calculating the log of
y-values or, in this problem,
the log of heart rate.
Time
log
(heart log y
rate)
2 1.903 1.813 1.740 1.694 1.708 1.681 1.663
Use a calculator to find the

equation of least-squares
regression line for x and
log y.
log10( y) = 1.98 0.05x
Rewrite the equation in

terms of the variables in
question.
log10(heart rate) = 1.98 0.05 time (i.e. time = number of hours

after the operation.)
State the value of r and

comment on the result.
r = 0.93
There is a slight improvement of the correlation coefficient that
resulted from applying logarithmic transformation.
Further investigation
Often all appropriate transformations need to be performed to choose the best one. Extend Worked
example 11 by compressing the y data using the reciprocals of the y data or even compress the x data. Go
back to the steps for transforming the data. Did you get a better r value and thus a more reliable line of
best fit? (Hint:The best transformation gives r = 0.98.)
Using the transformed line for predictions

Once the appropriate model has been established and the equation of least-squares regression line has
been found, the equation can be used for predictions.
Worked exaMple 12
a Using a calculator, apply a reciprocal transformation to the
following data.
b Use the transformed regression equation to predict the number of students
wearing a jumper when the temperature is 12 C.
116
Temperature
(C)
10
15
20
25
30
35
Number of students
in a class wearing
jumpers
18
10
Think
WriTe/draW
a 1 Construct the scatterplot.
Students
Temperature is the independent

variable, while the number of
students wearing jumpers is the
dependant one.
Therefore, put temperature
on the horizontal axis and
students on the vertical axis.
y
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
The x-values should be

compressed, so it may be
appropriate to transform the x-data
by calculating the reciprocal of
temperature). Reciprocate each
1
x-value (that is, find ).
x
Use a CAS calculator to find
the equation of least-squares
1
and y.
regression line for
x
Replace x and y with the
variables in question.
b 1 Substitute 12 for x into
10
14 18 22
Temperature
26
30
34
1
Temperature
1
x
1
5
1
10
1 1
15 20
1
1 1
25 30 35
Number of students
wearing jumpers
18
10
y = 94.583xT 0.4354, where xT = 1x

or y = 94.583
x 0.4354
The number of students in class wearing jumpers
= 94.583 0.4354.
Temperature
b Number of students wearing jumpers
94.583
0.4354
Temperature
94.583
=
0.4354
12
= 7.447
equation of regression line

and evaluate.
Write your answer to the

nearest whole number.
7 students are predicted to wear jumpers when the temperature

is 12 C.
Note: If the residual plot exhibits a clear pattern, the relationship between the variables is probably
not linear. To find an appropriate model, a logarithmic, quadratic or receiprocal transformation can be
attempted.
exercise 3F
1 We 10 Apply a quadratic (x2) transformation to the following data set. The regression line has been
determined as y = 27.7x + 186 with r = 0.91.

x
y
2
96
3
95
92
90
14
100
diGiTal doC
doc-9482
Spreadsheet
Transforming data
2 We 11 The average heights of 50 girls of various ages were measured as follows.
Age group (years)

Average height (cm)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
128
144
148
154
158
161
165
164
166
167
The original linear regression yielded:

Height = 3.76 age + 104.7, with r = 0.92.
117
a Plot the original data and regression line.

b Apply log10 (x) transformation.
c Perform regression analysis on the transformed data and comment on your results.
3 a Use the transformed data from question 2 to predict the heights of girls of the following ages:
i 7 years old
ii 10.5 years old
iii 20 years old.
b Which of the predictions in part a were obtained by interpolating?
4 Comment on the suitability of transforming the data of question 2 in order to improve predictions of
heights for girls under 8 years old or over 18.

5a
We12 Apply a reciprocal transformation to the following data obtained by a physics student
studying light intensity.
Distance from light source (metres)

Intensity (candlepower)
10
90
60
28
22
20
12
b Use the transformed regression equation to predict the intensity at a distance of 20metres.
Horsepower
Driver ability
6 For each of the following scatterplots suggest an appropriate transformation(s).

a
b
Engine revs
Survival rate during crash
Blood alcohol level
Number of people on plane
7 Use the equation y = 0.2x2 12.5, found after transformation, to predict values of y for the given
x-value (correct to 2 decimal places):

a x = 2.5
b x = 2.5.
8 Use the equation y = 1.12 log10 (x) 25, found after transformation, to predict values of y for the given
a x = 2.5
b x = 2.5
c x = 0.
9 Use the equation log10 (y) = 0.2x + 0.03, found after transformation, to predict values of y for the given

a x = 2.5
b x = 2.5.
1
10 Use the equation y = 0.2x 12.5, found after transformation, to predict values of y for the given x-value
(correct to 2 decimal places):
a x = 2.5
b x = 2.5.
11 The seeds in the sunflower are arranged in spirals for a compact head. Counting
the number of seeds in the successive circles starting from the centre and moving
outwards, the following number of seeds were counted.
Circle
Number
of seeds
118
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
8th
9th
10th
13
21
34
55
89
144
233
Plot the data and fit in a least-squares regression line.

Find the correlation coefficient and interprete its value.
Using the equation of the regression line, predict the number of seeds in the 11th circle.
Find the residuals.
Construct the residual on plot. Is the relation between the number of the circle and the number of
seeds linear?
f What type of transformation could be applied to:
i the x-values? Explain why.
ii the y-values? Explain why.
12 Apply the log10 (y) transformation to the data used in question 11.
a Fit a least-squares regression line to the transformed data and plot it with the data.
b Find the correlation coefficient. Is there an improvement? Why?
c Find the equation of the least-squares regression line for the transformed data.
d Calculate the coefficient of determination and interprete its value.
e Using the equation of the regression line for the transformed data, predict the number of seeds for
the 11th circle.
f How does this compare with the prediction from question 11?
a
b
c
d
e
119
Summary
by eye
Make sure there are an equal number of points above/below the fitted line.
Fitting a straight
line the 3-median
method
Assuming data points are in order of increasing x-values:

Step 1. Divide data points into 3 groups.
Step 2. Adjust for unequal groups: if there is 1 extra point, put it in the middle; if there are
2 extra points, put them in the end groups.
Step 3. Calculate the medians for the 3 groups (xL, yL), (xM, yM), (xU, yU).
For a graphical approach:
Step 4. Place a ruler through the two outer medians and move the ruler one-third of the way
towards the middle median.
Step 5. Calculate the y-intercept and the gradient and use these to find the equation of the
regression line.
For an arithmetic approach:
yU yL
Step 4. Calculate the gradient using the formula: m = x x .
Step 5. Calculate the y-intercept using the formula:
c = 3 [(yL + yM + yU) m(xL + xM + xU)].

Step 6. Substitute m and c into the equation y = mx + c.
Fitting a straight
line least-squares
regression
Use a calculator to find the equation of the least-squares regression line. The equation can be
obtained in one of these forms:
y = mx + b
or
y = a + bx.
To find the equation of the least-squares regression line by hand:
(a) The summary data needed are:
(i) x and sx the mean and standard deviation of the independent variable
(ii) y and sy the mean and standard deviation of the dependent variable
(iii) r Pearsons productmoment correlation coefficient.
(b) The formulas to use are:
sy
(i) m = r s
(ii) c = y mx
x
where m is the slope of the regression line and c is the y-intercept.
Alternatively, if the general form of the regression line is given as y = a + bx, then
sy
b = r s and a = y bx.
x
interpretation,
interpolation and
extrapolation
The slope (m) of the regression line y = mx + c indicates the change in the dependent variable as
independent variable increases by 1.
The y-intercept, c, indicates the value of the dependent variable when independent variable = 0.
Interpolation is the use of the regression line to predict values between the values already in the
data set (predicting within the range of data set).
Extrapolation is the use of the regression line to predict values smaller than the smallest value
already in the data set or larger than the largest value (predicting outside the data set).
residual analysis
120
Calculate predicted values (ypred) from the regression equation (y = mx + c) for all values of x.
Calculate residuals (y ypred) for all values of x (actual values predicted values).
Construct the residual plot.
If the residual plot shows points randomly scattered around zero (i.e. there is no clear pattern), the
relationship between the variables in question is probably linear.
If the residual plot shows a clear pattern, the relationship between variables is probably not linear.
Transforming to
linearity
Transform non-linear data to linearity by using one or more of the following possible
transformations.
1
Compressing axis: y versus log10 (x)
y versus x
1
log10 (y) versus x
y versus x
2
y2 versus x
Stretching axis:
y versus x
Quadratic transformations
Stretch
x-values
Stretch
x-values
Stretch
y-values
Stretch
y-values
Logarithmic and reciprocal transformations

x
transformation.
Compress
x-values
3. Use log10 (y) versus x or

1 versus x transformation.
y
Compress
y-values

x
transformation.
Compress
x-values
4. Use log10 (y) versus x or 1 versus x

y
transformation.
Compress
y-values
121
Chapter review
M U lT ip l e
C h oiCe
Use the figure at right to answer questions 1 and 2.
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 The most appropriate line of best fit for the figure is:
a
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
e 8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
d 8
C 8
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 The gradient of the 3-median regression line is:

5
2
1
2
1
5
3
5
2
5
3 In using the 3-median method for 34 points, the number of points placed in each group is:
a 10, 14, 10
B 11, 12, 11
C 12, 10, 12
d 10, 12, 14
e dependent on the decision of the person doing the calculations
4 The correlation between two variables x and y is 0.88. Which of the following statements is true?
As y increases it causes x to increase.

As y increases it causes x to decrease.
There is a poor fit between x and y
As x increases, y tends to increase.
As x increases, y tends to decrease.
a
B
C
d
e
5 When calculating a least-squares regression line, a correlation coefficient of 1 indicates that:
the y-axis variable depends linearly on the x-axis variable

the y-axis variable increases as the x-axis variable decreases
the y-axis variable decreases as the x-axis variable decreases
all the data lie on the same straight line
the two variables depend upon each other
a
B
C
d
e
6 For the following data set
x
y
25
78
36
153
45
267
78
456
the coefficient of determination (to 2 decimal places) is closest to:

a 14.14
B 381.97
d 0.95
e 0.94
89
891
99
1020
C 0.91
7 Given the following summary statistics
y = 172.5
sy = 7.4
r = 0.9
x = 154.4 sx = 5.8
the values of m and c, respectively, for the equation of the regression line y = mx + c are:
a 0.71 and 32.72
B 1.15 and 4.79
C 0.44 and 10.1
d 0.04 and 0.16

e 1.32 and 3.8
8 A 3-median regression fit yielded the equation y = 4.3x 2.4. The value of y when x = 4.4 is:
a 21.32
d 1.58
122
B 18.92
e 2.4
C 16.52
110
1410
9 A least-squares regression is fitted to the 7points as shown.

40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
The residual plot would look most similar to:

a
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
10 After a transformation, a relationship was found to be y = 0.4x2+ 12.1. The predicted value for y given
that x = 2.5 is:

a 6.25
d 13.1
B 2.5
e 12.5
C 14.6
1 Find the equation of the line passing through the point (5, 7.5) with a gradient of 3.5.
S ho rT
a n S W er
2 Fit a 3-median line to the following data.

y
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
0
4 6 8 10 12 14 16 x
Express the equation with exact values of m and c.

3 Find the equation of the 3-median regression line for the following data set.
x-values
10
11
15
y-values
23
21
20
14
16
12
4 Use the data from question 2 to fit a least-squares regression line. Express the equation in the form
y = a + bx.
5 Find the least-squares regression line and the correlation coefficient for the data in question 3. Express
your answers to 2 decimal places.

6 Use the following summary statistics to find:
a the slope, m, of the least-squares regression line
b the y-intercept, c, of the least-squares regression line
where y = mx + c is the equation of the regression line.

y = 10
sy = 2.5
r = 0.9
x = 15
sx = 5
123
7 Using the least-squares regression line from question 5, copy and complete the following table of
predicted values.
x
ypred
11
13
15
17
20
8 For the least-squares regression line from question 5, find the residuals.
e x T ended
r e S ponS e
Task 1
1 Consider this data set which measures the sales figures for a new salesperson.
Day
Units sold
1
1
2
2
3
4
4
9
5
20
6
44
7
84
8
124
The least-squares regression yielded the following equation:

Units sold = 16.7 day 39.1
The correlation coefficient was 0.90.
a Use a CAS calculator to construct the scatterplot of the data. What kind of relationship between
the variables does the scatterplot suggest?
b Comment on using the regression line to predict for small values of the independent variable.
c Use the equation of the regression line to predict the sales figures for the 10th day.
2 Transform the data from question 1 using a quadratic (x2) transformation.
3 Perform a least-squares regression on the transformed data from question 2.
4 Use the regression line for the transformed data to predict the sales figures for the 10th day. Is this a
better prediction than the one found in 1c?
Task 2
1 A mining company wishes to predict its gold production output. It collected the following data over a
9-month period.
Month (1 = January) Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept.
Production (tonnes)
3
8 10.8 12 11.6 14 15.5 15 18.1
a Plot the data and fit a line of best fit by eye.
b State the equation of this line.
c Fit a straight line to the original data using the 3-median
method, stating the equation of this line.

diGiTal doC
doc-9426
Test Yourself
Chapter 3
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
DA
Practice
VCE exam
questions
Use StudyON to
access all exam
questions on this
topic since 2002.
124
d Find the equation of the least-squares regression line.

e Using the line from part d, predict the production after
12 months.
f Comment on the accuracy, usefulness and simplicity of the
methods.
2 Using the data from question 1 above, answer the following
questions.
a Looking at the original data set, discuss whether linearity is a reasonable assertion.
b Research into goldmines has indicated that after about 10 months, production tends not to increase
as rapidly as in earlier months. Given this information, a logarithmic transformation is suggested.
Transform the original data using this method.
c Fit a straight line to this transformed data using least-squares regression.
d Discuss whether or not this transformation has removed any non-linearity.
e Predict the level of production of gold after 12 months using the equation obtained in part d.
Compare the prediction from question 1 e above with the one obtained using the logarithmic
transformation.
ICT activities
Chapter opener
diGiTal doC
introduction to regression. (page 95)
3B
Fitting a straight line the 3-median method
diGiTal doCS
SkillSHEET 3.1 doc-9419: Practise finding the median. (page 100)
SkillSHEET 3.2 doc-9420: Practise calculating the gradient (I).
(page 100)
SkillSHEET 3.3 doc-9398: Practise finding the equation of a straight
line. (page 100)
3C Fitting a straight line least-squares

regression
diGiTal doCS
Spreadsheet doc-9421: Investigate least-squares regression.
(page 104)
WorkSHEET 3.1 doc-9422: Fitting a straight line by eye and using the
3-median regression line. (page 106)
TUTorial
We 4 eles-1264: Learn how to find the equation of the leastsquares regression line using r, sx, and sy. (page 103)
3d
interpretation, interpolation and extrapolation
diGiTal doCS
Spreadsheet doc-9423: Investigate interpolation and extrapolation
on a scatterplot. (page 108)
SkillSHEET 3.4 doc-9424: Practise using the regression line to make
predictions. (page 108)
3e
residual analysis
diGiTal doC
WorkSHEET 3.2 doc-9425: Fitting a line by using the equal-number-ofpoints method, the 3-median method, calculate r, calculate residuals
and make predictions using interpolation and extrapolation. (page 113)
3F
diGiTal doC
Spreadsheet doc-9482: Investigate different transformations to
linearity. (page 117)
TUTorialS
We 10 eles-1265: Watch a tutorial on applying a
parabolic transformation to data using a CAS calculator.
(page 115)
inTeraCTiViTY
Transforming to linearity int-0184: Use the interactivity to consolidate
your understanding of applying appropriate transformations to
achieve linearity. (page 114)
eleSSon
Which way to stretch? eles-0050: Discover how to use a scatterplot
displaying a non-linear relationship to determine how to transform
data to achieve linearity. (page 114)
Chapter review
diGiTal doC
progress. (page 124)
125
Answers CHAPTER 3
inTrodUCTion To
reGreSSion
b y = 0.15x + 21.87
c y = 52.38x + 8890.48
d y = x + 30
exercise 3a Fitting a straight line by eye

(Note: Best fit lines are indicated as a guide
only.)
6 The least-squares regression equations are
exercise 3B Fitting a straight line

the 3-median method
1 y = 2x 3.2
x
n
Lower
(total)
group
10
3
11
4
12
4
13
4
14
5
26
9
43
14
58
19
698
233
3 y = 0.95x + 78.8
5 B
b y
c y
7 a
d y
b
8 a
b
c
e y
d
9 a
b
c
d
e
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
Middle Upper
group
group
4
3
3
4
4
4
5
4
4
5
8
9
15
14
20
19
232
233
4 D
6 y = 4x + 90
10 15 20
y = 1.93x + 3.71
(2, 4.2) and (8, 2.4), 0.3
(5, 3.1)
Approximately 4.7 (using calculator
4.733)
Level = 0.3 day + 4.7
(2, 65) and (9, 100), 5
(5.5, 70)
From the graph, approximately 50
Number of cars = 5 week + 50
Cars
x
85
10 A
exercise 3C
126
y = 5x + 50.83
70
0
h y
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Week
11 D

1 y = 1.04x + 4.57
2 y = 3.72x + 35.47
3 y = 1.2x + 9.06
4 a The mathematics exam mark
b 0.95
c 6.07
d 75%
5 a y = 3.33x + 91.78
80
70
60
50
0
1780 1830 1880 1930 19802030
Year
c The data definitely are not linear; there
are big increases from 18801920,

19402000.
11 a Duration of call
b Cost of call ($) = $0.002 57 duration
of call (sec) + $4.27
c
18
12
y = 0.003x + 4.27
6
0
100
g y
b
Age
2 a y = 0.4x + 1.3
b Time = 2 age + 2.5
Cost ($)
1 a y
exactly the same as obtained in questions

1, 2 and 3.
7 a y = 2x + 22
b A perfect fit
c y = 0.5x + 11
d The two lines are inverses of each other.
8 E
9 A
10 a y = 0.119x 164.7
1500 3000 4500 6000 7500

Duration (s)
The line does not fit closely for all data

points. The equation is not reliable due
to outliers. If you eliminate the last two
calls then there is a direct relationship.
12 D
13 a y = 4x + 8, perfect fit, but meaningless
b y = 2.5x + 10, good fit, but almost
meaningless
c y = 2.8x + 9.5, y = 3.1x + 8.9,
y = 3.3x + 8.4, good fit.
d Perhaps converging to the correct line?

exercise 3d interpretation, interpolation
and extrapolation
b 14 cells per day
1 a y = 157.3 + 14x
c 157
2 a 48.5, or 49 people per extra animal
b 31.8, or 32 visitors
3 y = 1.72x + 464, r = 0.98. Gradient
shows a drop of 1720 sales for every $1
increase in the price of the item. Clearly,
the y-intercept is nonsensical in this case
since an item is not going to be sold for
$0! This is a case where extrapolation of
the line makes no sense.
4 a 7
b 18
b 10.4
c 40.9
5 a y = 3.381x + 0.286
d 1.99
e 7.31
f c
6 a Factory1: y = 1.51x + 43.21;
Factory 2: y = 0.96x + 56.61
b Factory 1 is cheaper at $43.21
(compared to Factory 2 at $56.61).
(compared to Factory1 at $216.86).

d Factory 2 is marginally more linear
(Factory 1: r = 0.97; Factory 2: r = 0.99).
7 a $2152
b 180
c $78 200
d $600
e a, b only
8
Test result
IQ
(%)
80
56
87
60
92
68
102
65
105
73
106
74
107
71
111
73
115
80
121
92
9 a $27 500
c $32 000
e Various answers
exercise 3e
x
1
2
9.7
7.46
2.24
3
12.7
9.82
2.88
4
13.7
12.18
1.52
5
14.4
14.54
0.14
2.4
6
14.5
16.9
2 By examining the original scatterplot, and
residual plot, data are clearly not linear.
4
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
138.8
19.2
124
116.3
7.7
74
93.8
19.8
56
71.3
31
48.8
17.8
35
26.3
8.7
3.8
Residuals
58.7
23.8
3
ypred
Residuals
34.0
15
13.96
1.04
37.9
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
10
12
4
9
7
3
4
11.58
10.39
8.01
6.82
5.63
4.44
3.25
1.58
35.8
27.8
5.7
16.4
10
68.5
12
d 15.15%
e 13.7 days. Unlikely that extrapolation
140
120
Average height
(cm)
0.954
128
144
1.041
148
1.079
154
1.114
158
1.146
161
1.176
165
1.204
164
1.230
166
1.255
167
r = 0.95, most non-linearity removed.
3 a i 123.3 cm ii 143.9 cm
iii 176.7 cm
b a ii
4 Normal growth is linear only within given
7
8
range; eventually the girl stops growing.

Thus logarithmic transformation is a big
improvement over the original regression.
a y = 90.867xT + 2.572 where
1
xT = (r = 0.9788)
x
b Intensity is 7.1 candlepower.
a Compresst he y- or x-values using logs
or reciprocals.
b Stretch the y-values using y2 or
compress the x-values using logs or
reciprocals.
c Compress the y- or x-values using logs
or reciprocals.
a 11.25
b 11.25
a 24.55
b Cannot take the log of a negative
number.
c Cannot take the log of zero.
a 3.39
b 0.34
a 0.08
b 0.08
9
10
11 a
240
180
120
y = 59.07 + 21.74x
60
30
0
c y = 117.2xT + 24.26 where xT = log10 (x),
60
30
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Age group (years)
log (age group)
18.2
e
Residuals
15.3
3.1
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
160
M T W T F S S
23.1
No apparent
pattern in the
residuals
likely to be linear
180
Slight pattern in residuals may not

be linear
d Decline in occupancy likely due to
drought an atypical event.
6 C
7 a Non-linear
b Linear
c Non-linear
8 a y = 37.93x 57.73
b r = 0.958. This means that there is a
strong positive relationship between
variables x and y.
c 0.9177, therefore 91.8% of the variation
in y can be explained by the variation in x.
3D
4 a, b
22
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
10
15
20
25
1.61
4.01
2.18
1.37
1.44
0.75
Residuals
158
7
c
ypred
1 2 3 4 5 6
Defective
Day rate (%)
r = 0.97, which shows some improvement.
2 a
Bookings
Day in hotel
1 y = 2.62xT + 128.15 where xT = x2,
5 a, b
b $29 300
d About 13 years
residual analysis
y
ypred
Residuals
1
5.1
4.1
exercise 3F
Seeds
that far from data points is accurate.

Unlikely that there would be 0%
defectives.
Average
height (cm)
c Factory 2 is cheaper at $167.47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 x
There is a clear pattern; the relationship

between the variables is non-linear.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Circle
8 9 10
b r = 0.87, which means it is a strong and
positive relationship.
c 180
127
Circle
Seeds
Residual
MUlTiple ChoiCe
40.33
20.59
1.85
13
14.89
ShorT anSWer
21
28.36
1 y = 3.5x + 25
34
37.37
55
89
25.58
144
7.41
10
233
74.67
1 A
5 D
9 C
2E
6C
10 C
38.12
Residuals
60
30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Circle
30
i Stretch using x2
1
ii Compress either log10 (y) or
12 a
Logseeds
1.8
1.2
0.6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Circle
b r = 0.9999, this is an almost perfect

c
e
f
128
relation.
log10 ( y) = 0.2094x + 0.2746
log10 (number of seeds) = 0.2094
circle number + 0.2746
0.9999, 99.99% (100.0%) of variation
in number of seeds is due to number of
circles. This is a perfect relation, often
found in nature (see the Golden Ratio).
378
This is a much better prediction as it
follows the steep upward trend.
Task 2
4 E
8 C
1 a
2 y=
ypred
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
20.6
18.1
15.6
13.1
10.6
8.1
5.6
3.2
20
0.65
y
23
ypred
23.1
2 4 6 8 10
Something like y = 1.26x + 5.77

y = 1.25x + 5.58
y = 1.55x + 4.27
22.87
Simplicity of eye fitting versus
accuracy in this case is quite good.
Little difference in the sum of squared
errors. Least-squares regression gives
quite a different answer from the other
2 methods, with consequent change
in errors. (The 3-median method is
subject to errors due to outliers, and
computational errors.)
2 a Not very linear, logarithmic
transformation suggested
b
c
d
e
f
2
4
8
9
10
11
15
21
20
14
16
9
12
5
21.85
19.35
14.35
13.1
11.85
10.6
5.6
log10 (month)
0.85
0.65
0.35
2.9
2.85
1.4
0.6
exTended reSponSe
Task 1
1 a Likely to be a y versus x2 relationship
b A poor predictor for most values of x
c 128
20
16
12
8
4
y ypred
0.1
x
1
2.4
3 B
7 B
9
22
x
7
21
3 y = 1.33x + 24.56 4 y = 2.055 + 1.364x
5 y = 1.25x + 24.35, r = 0.96
b 16.75
6 a 0.45
3 y = 1.96xT 13.86, where xT = x2

4 182
ChapTer reVieW
Day
16
25
36
49
Units
sold
20
44
84 124
64
Production
(tonnes)
0.301
0.477
10.8
0.602
12
0.699
11.6
0.778
14
0.845
15.5
0.903
15
0.954
18.1
c y = 14.08xT + 3.30, where xT = log10 (x)

d Square of residual error is reduced,
correlation (0.98) is closer to 1, graph

looks more linear
e Prediction of 18.49 against 22.87 using
untransformed data. Given the nature of
the data, likely to be more accurate.
Chapter 4
Time series
DiGitaL DOC
doc-9427
10 Quick Questions
Chapter COntentS
4a
4B
4C
4D
4e
4F
Time series and trend lines

Fitting trend lines and forecasting
Smoothing time series
Smoothing with an even number of points
Median smoothing
Seasonal adjustment
4a
time series and trend lines
In previous chapters we looked at bivariate, or (x, y), data where both x and y could vary independently.
In this chapter we shall consider cases where the x-variable is time and, generally, where time goes up in
even increments such as hours, days, weeks or years. In these cases we have what is called a time series.
The main purpose of a time series is to see how some quantity varies with time. For example, a company
may wish to record its daily sales figures over a 10-day period.
Time
Sales ($)
Day 1
5200
Day 2
5600
Day 3
6100
Day 4
6200
Day 5
7000
Day 6
7100
Day 7
7500
Day 8
7700
Day 9
7700
Day 10
8000
Sales ($)
We could also make a graph of this time series as shown below.

10 000
9 000
8 000
7 000
6 000
5 000
4 000
0
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 t
Days
As can be seen from this graph, there seems to be a trend upwards clearly, this company is
increasing its revenues!
types of trend
Units: 3 & 4
Although many types of trend exist, in Further Mathematics we shall be looking at trends that are
classified as secular, seasonal, cyclic and random.
Secular trends
If over a reasonably long period of time a trend appears to be either increasing or decreasing steadily, with
no major changes of direction, then it is called a secular trend. It is important to look at the data over a long
period. If the trend in the previous figure continued for, say, 30 days, then we could safely conclude that
the company was indeed becoming more profitable. What appears to be a steady increase over a short term
say, stock market share prices can turn out to be something quite different over the long run.
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Chapter 4 Time series
129
Seasonal trends
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch
a video about
seasonal trends.
Seasons
Months
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch a
video about cyclic
trends.
Seasons
Winter, spring, summer, autumn
Jan., Feb., Mar., . . ., Nov., Dec.
Quarters 1st quarter (Q1),

2nd quarter (Q2),
3rd quarter (Q3),
4th quarter (Q4)
Days
Monday to Friday
Days
Houses sold
AOS: DA
Cycle peaks every 12 months

12
10
8
6
4
2
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4t
2007
2008
2009
Cycle
Four seasons in a year
12 months in a year
Example
Rainfall
Grocery store monthly sales
figures
Four quarters in a year Quarterly expenditure
figures of a company
Five days in a week
Daily sales for a store open

from Monday to Friday only
Number of hamburgers sold
at a takeaway store daily
Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday,

Seven days in a week
Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday
Cyclic trends
Like seasonal trends, cyclic trends show fluctuations
upwards and downwards, but not according to
season. Businesses often have cycles where at times
profits increase, then decline, then increase again.
A good example of this would be the sales of a new
major software product. At first, sales are slow; then
they pick up as the product becomes popular. When
enough people have bought the product, sales may
fall off until a new version of the product comes
on the market, causing sales to increase again. This
cycle can be repeated many times, which is why
there are many versions of some software products.
No regular periods between peaks

Software products sold
Units: 3 & 4
Certain data seem to fluctuate during the year, as

the seasons change. Consequently, this is termed
a seasonal trend. The most obvious example of a
seasonal trend would be total rainfall during summer,
autumn, winter and spring in a year.
The name seasonal is not specific to the seasons
of a year. It could also be related to other constant
periods of highs and lows. For example, sales figures
at a fast-food store could be consistently higher
on Saturdays and Sundays and drop off during the
weekdays. Here the seasons are days of the week and
repeat once every week.
A key feature of seasonal trends is that the seasons
occur at the same time each cycle.
Here are some common seasonal periods.
250
200
150
100
50
0
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4t
2007
2008
2009
Trends may seem to occur at random. This can be caused

by external events such as floods, wars, new technologies or
inventions, or anything else that results from random causes.
There is no obvious way to predict the direction of the trend
or even when it changes direction.
In the figure at right, there are a couple of minor fluctuations
at t = 4 and t = 8, and a major one at t = 12. The major fluctuation
could have been caused by a change in government which
positively affected profits.
130
Profits
random trends
30
26
22
18
14
0
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 t
Years
WOrkeD eXaMpLe 1
Write/DraW
Attempt to t a line using your eye.

By trial and error, a line such as the
one at right could be the trend line.
Temp. (C)
think
Evaluate the trend.
38.4
38.2
38.0
37.8
37.6
37.4
37.2
0
38.4
38.2
38.0
37.8
37.6
37.4
37.2
0
Temp. (C)
State the type of trend and t a straight line to the time

series data at right, which represent the body temperature
of a patient with appendicitis, taken every hour.
Units: 3 & 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 t
Hours
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 t
Hours
The trend is secular and upward.

It is unlikely that the temperature will continue to rise
indenitely, but the line may be signicant over the short term.
plotting time series

To make better judgements about the type of time series, data in tabular form need to be plotted on
a time-series plot. This is similar to a scatterplot with some notable differences.
1. The independent variable is always time. This may be in days, days of the week, time of the day,
weeks, months, quarters, years and so on. Thus, the x-axis variable is time.
2. As the periods are often labels and not numerical, the x-axis may be scaled using these
period labels.
3. The points are connected. As they occur in chronological order, joining the points assists in
identifying the type of trend or time series pattern that may exist.
So that we can enter the data into a CAS calculator, time periods that are labels (and not numerical)
need to be converted to numerals. For this, an association table is needed.
An association table summarises how the time periods are to be converted to numerical values. The first
point is converted to 1, the second to 2 and so on, until the series is fully converted. Here are two examples.
example 1
Week 1
Mon.
1
Week 1
Tues.
2
Week 1
Wed.
3
Week 1
Thurs.
4
Week 1
Fri.
5
Week 1
Sat.
6
Week 1
Sun.
7
Week 2
Mon.
8
Week 2
Tues.
9
example 2
Jan.
2009
1
Feb.
2009
2
Mar.
2009
3
Apr.
2009
4
May
2009
5
June
2009
6
July
2009
7
Aug.
2009
8
WOrkeD eXaMpLe 2
The following table displays the school fees collected over a 10-week period. Plot the data and
decide on the type of time-series pattern. If there is a secular trend, t a straight line.
Week beginning 8 Jan. 15 Jan. 22 Jan. 29 Jan. 5 Feb. 12 Feb. 19 Feb. 26 Feb. 5 Mar. 12 Mar.
$ 1000
1.5
2.5
14.0
4.5
13.0
4.5
8.5
0.5
5.0
1.0
131
Write/DraW
Set up an association table.

One method is to add another
row and enter the numerical
time code for each of the ten
weeks starting at 1, 2, . . . ,
through to 10.
Construct a scatterplot of
the data. Place weeks on the
horizontal axis and school
fees on the vertical axis.
Week
8 15 22 29 5 12 19 26
5
12
beginning Jan. Jan. Jan. Jan. Feb. Feb. Feb. Feb. Mar. Mar.
$ 1000
1.5 2.5 14.0 4.5 13.0 4.5 8.5 0.5
5.0
Time code
School fees
think
1.0
10
y
15
12
9
6
3
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 x
Week
Identify the pattern as either

seasonal, cyclical or random.
If there is a secular trend, is
it upwards or downwards?
The school fees can be classied as cyclical or random with a

secular downward trend. This is evident by the reducing totals
in school fees collected.
Use a calculator to fit a leastsquares regression line.
y = 7.2 0.31x, where y represents school fees in thousands of dollars

and x = 1 corresponds to week beginning on 8th of January.
exercise 4a
For questions 1 to 5, identify whether the trends are likely to be secular, seasonal, cyclic or random for:
1 the amount of rainfall, per month, in Western Victoria
2 the number of soldiers in the United States army, measured annually
3 the number of people living in Australia, measured annually
4 the share price of BHP Billiton, measured monthly
5 the number of seats held by the Liberal Party in Federal Parliament.
6 Fit a trend line by eye to the data in the graph at right.
40
7 We1 A wildlife park ranger is travelling on safari
35
towards the centre of a wildlife park. Each day (t), he
30
records the number of sightings (y) of zebra that he
25
notes. He draws up the table below.
Temperature (C)
DiGitaL DOC
doc-9421
Spreadsheet
trend lines
20
15
10
t
y
1
6
2
9
3
13
4
8
5
9
6
14
7
15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 t
Days
8
17
9
14
Fit a trend line to the data. What type of trend is best reflected by these data?
132
10
11
11
15
12
19
8 We2 The monthly share prices of a recently privatised telephone company were recorded as
follows.
Date
Jan. 09
Feb. 09
Mar. 09
Apr. 09
May 09
June 09
July 09
Aug. 09
2.50
2.70
3.00
3.20
3.60
3.70
3.90
4.20
Price ($)
Graph the data (let 1 = Jan., 2 = Feb. . . . and so on) and fit a trend line to the data.
Comment on the feasibility of predicting share prices for the following year.
9 Plot the following monthly sales data for umbrellas. Fit a trend line. Discuss the type of
trend best reflected by the data and the limitations of your trend line.
Month
Jan.
Feb.
10
Sales
Mar. Apr.
15
May June
40
70
July Aug. Sept. Oct.
95
100
90
60
Nov. Dec.
35
20
10
10 Consider the data in the figure below, which represent the price of oranges over a 19-week period.
Price (cents)
100
80
60
40
20
0
10
15
Weeks
20
25
a Fit a straight trend line to the data.

b From the graph, predict the price in week 25.
11 The following table represents the quarterly sales figures (in thousands) of a popular software product.
Plot the data and fit a trend line using the best fit by eye method. Discuss the type of trend best reflected
by these data.
Quarter Q1-07 Q2-07 Q3-07 Q4-07 Q1-08 Q2-08 Q3-08 Q4-08 Q1-09 Q2-09 Q3-09 Q4-09
Sales
120
135
150
145
140
120
100
110
120
140
190
220
12 The number of employees at the Comnatpac Bank was recorded over a 10-month period. Plot and fit a
trend line to the data. What would you say about the trend?
Month
Mar.
Apr.
May
June
July
Aug.
Sept.
Oct.
Nov.
Dec.
Employees
6100
5700
5400
5200
4800
4400
4200
4000
3700
3300
4B
Using our eyes to fit a straight line to a set of data or to predict values can be an inadequate mathematical
technique (as we saw in chapter 3). In this section we shall look at using either the 3-median or leastsquares regression techniques to calculate the equation of a trend line.
Secular and random trends

It is important to note that the techniques for fitting trend lines are used on the original data where the
trend is clearly linear; that is, random or secular. These techniques cannot be applied effectively to
cyclical or seasonal trends.
Always plot time-series data, so that the type of pattern or trend can be easily seen.
133
association tables and forecasting

An association table is often required to convert period labels to a numerical value, so that a straight-line
equation can be calculated. It is best to set up an extra row if data are in tabular form, or to change the
labels shown on the axis of a time-series plot to numerical values. Here are three examples.
example 1
Year
Time code
2006
1
2007
2
2008
3
2009
4
example 2
example 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
40
CD sales
1st Quarter 2008

2nd Quarter 2008
3rd Quarter 2008
4th Quarter 2008
1st Quarter 2009
2nd Quarter 2009
30
20
10
For forecasting, use the association table to devise

a time code for any period in the future. This
time code will then be used in the straight-line
equation.
From the three examples we can calculate that for:
Example 1: 2013 would have a time code of 8
Example 2: 1st Quarter 2010 would have a time code of 9
Example 3: Monday week 4 would have a time code of 22.
Mon. Tues. Wed. Thurs. Fri.
Sat. Sun. Mon. t
WOrkeD eXaMpLe 3
A new tanning salon has opened in a shopping centre, with customer numbers for its rst days shown
in the following table. Fit a straight line to the data set using the least-squares regression method.
Period
Number of
customers
Mon.
Tues.
Wed.
Week 1
Thurs.
Fri.
Sat.
Sun.
Mon.
11
13
16
18
19
20
Week 2
Tues. Wed.
23
27
Use the equation of the straight line to predict the number of customers for:
a Monday week 4
b Thursday week 2.
think
1
Complete an association
table, where
Monday week 1 is 1,
Tuesday week 1 is 2,
Wednesday week 2
is 10.
Use a calculator to find
the equation of leastsquares regression line.
Write
Period
Number of
customers
Time code
Week 1
Week 2
Mon. Tues. Wed. Thurs. Fri. Sat. Sun. Mon. Tues. Wed.
9
11
13
16
18
19
20
23
27
10
y = 5.67 + 1.97x
Number of customers = 5.67 + 1.97 time code
where time code 1 corresponds to Monday of week 1.
Monday week 4,
a Number of customers = 5.67 + 1.97 time code
the time code is 22.
= 5.67 + 1.97 22
Substitute t = 22 into
= 49.01
the equation and
Number of customers = 49
evaluate. Round to the
nearest integer.
3 a For
134
b Number of customers = 5.67 + 1.97 time code
b For Thursday week 2, the time code is
11. Substitute t = 11 into the equation

and evaluate. Round to the nearest
whole number.
= 5.67 + 1.97 11
= 27.34
Number of customers = 27
Note: Remember that forecasting is an extrapolation and if going too far into the future, the prediction is
not reliable, as the trend may change.
Once an equation has been determined for a time series, it can be used to analyse the situation.
For the period given in the previous worked example, the equation is:
Number of customers = 5.67 + 1.97 time code.
The y-intercept (5.67) has no real meaning, as it represents the time code of zero, which is the day
before the opening of the salon. The gradient or rate of change is of more importance. It indicates that
the number of customers is changing; in this instance, growing by approximately 2 customers per day
(gradient of +1.97).
WOrkeD eXaMpLe 4
The forecast equation for calculating share prices, y, in a sugar company was obtained from data
of the share prices over the past 5 years. The equation is y = 0.42t + 1.56, where t = 1 represents the
year 2001, t = 2 represents the year 2002 and so on.
a Rewrite the equation putting it in the context of the question.
b Interpret the values of the gradient and y-intercept.
c Predict the share price in 2013.
think
Write
a The x-variable represents the time codes and
the y-variable represents the share price in

dollars.
a Share price = $0.42 time code + $1.56
Time code t = 1 is 2001, t = 2 is 2002 and so on.
b The y-intercept of 1.56 represents the
b The y-intercept of $1.56 represents the approximate
c If t = 1 is 2001, then for 2013, the time code
c Share price = $0.42 time code + $1.56
starting value; that is, when t = 0. The

gradient of 0.42 represents the rate of
change in share price with respect to time.
That is, it will grow as it has a positive
gradient.
value of the shares in 2000. The gradient of +$0.42

means that on average the share price will grow by
$0.42 (42 cents) each year.
will be t = 13. Substitute into the equation

given.
exercise 4B
= $0.42 13 + $1.56
= $5.46 + $1.56
= $7.02
1 We3 The following table represents the number of cars remaining to be completed on an assembly
line. Fit a straight line to the following data using the least-squares regression method.
Time (hours)
Cars remaining
1
32
2
26
3
27
4
23
5
16
6
17
7
13
8
10
9
9
a Predict the number of cars remaining to be completed after 11hours.

b At what rate is the numbers of cars on the assembly line being reduced by?
DiGitaL DOC
doc-9430
SkillSHEET 4.1
Gradient-intercept
method for
sketching linear
graphs
2 From the equation of the trend line, it should be possible to predict when there are no cars left on the
assembly line. This is done by finding the value of t which makes y= 0. Using the equation from
question 1, find the time when there will be no cars left on the assembly line.
135
3 When the MicroHard Company first started, it
y
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
Number of staff
DiGitaL DOC
doc-9429
Spreadsheet
3-median
method
employed only one person. Each month the

company has grown, so that after 12 months there
are 14 people working there. The time-series data
are shown by the graph at right.
a Fit a 3-median line to the data.
b Predict the number of employees after a further
12 months.
4 The table below shows the share price of
6
8
Months
MicroHard during a volatile period in the stock

market. Using your CAS calculator:
a fit a least-squares regression line
b fit a 3-median line.
Comment on your result. What type of trend is this?
Day
10
11
12
13
10
14
12
15
16
Price ($) 2.75 3.30 3.15 2.25 2.10 1.80 1.50 2.70 4.10 4.20 3.55 1.65 2.60 2.95 3.25 3.70
5 The following time series shows the number of internet websites on a webring over a 9-month
period. Plot the data and fit a 3-median trend line. Comment on this line as a predictor of further
growth.
Time (months)
Sites (millions)
2.00
2.20
2.50
3.10
3.60
4.70
6.10
7.20
8.50
6 We4 The forecast equation for calculating prices, y, of shares in a steel company was obtained from
data of the share prices of the past 6 years. The equation is.
y = 0.72t + 2.56
where t = 1 represents the year 2010, t = 2 represents the year 2011 and so on.
a Rewrite the equation putting it in the context of the question.
b Interpret the values of the gradient and the y-intercept.
c Predict the share price in 2020.
7 The Teeny-Tiny-Tot Company has started to make prams. Its sales figures for the first 8 months are
given in the table below.

Date
Jan.
Feb.
Mar.
Apr.
May
June
July
Aug.
Sales
65
95
130
115
145
170
190
220
a Using the sequence Jan. = 1, Feb. = 2, . . ., calculate the equation of the trend line using the least-
squares regression method.

b Plot the data points and the trend line on the same set of axes.
c Use the trend line equation to predict the companys sales for December.
d Comment on the suitability of the trend line as a predictor of future trends, supporting your
arguments with mathematical statements.

8 The sales figures of Harold Courtenays latest novel (in thousands of units) are given in the table below.
The book was released a week before the first figures were collected.
Time (weeks)
Sales (1000)
17
21
25
28
27
26
a
b
c
d
136
Calculate the equation of the trend line for these data using the least-squares regression method.
Plot the data points and the trend line on the same set of axes.
Use the trend line equation to predict the sales for weeks 10, 12 and 14.
Comment on the suitability of the trend line as a predictor of future trends, supporting your
9 The average quarterly price of coffee (per 100 kg) has been recorded for 3 years.
Quarter Q1-07 Q2-07 Q3-07 Q4-07 Q1-08 Q2-08 Q3-08 Q4-08 Q1-09 Q2-09 Q3-09 Q4-09
Price ($)
a
b
c
d
358
323
316
336
369
333
328
351
389
387
393
402
Use the trend line equation to predict the price for the next quarter.
Comment on the suitability of the trend line as a predictor of future trends, supporting
your arguments with mathematical statements.
10 A mathematics teacher gives her students a test each month for 10 months, and the
class average is recorded. The tests are carefully designed to be of similar difficulty.
Test
Mark (%)
a
b
c
d
Feb.
Mar.
Apr.
May
June
July
Aug.
Sept.
Oct.
Nov.
57
63
62
67
65
68
70
72
74
77
Use the trend line equation to predict the results for the last exam in December.
Comment on the suitability of the trend line as a predictor of future trends, supporting your
4C
DiGitaL DOC
doc-9428
WorkSHEET 4.1
When the data fluctuates a lot, it is often hard to see the underlying trend. In order to reveal the trend,
we may need to try and remove some of these fluctuations before attempting to fit the trend line. This
process is referred to as smoothing.
There are two basic techniques for smoothing random or cyclical variation: median smoothing and
moving-average smoothing.
Median smoothing is preferred where there are small data sets, as it can be done graphically on a
time-series plot. Also, for data sets with many outliers due to the volatile random or cyclical trend,
median smoothing is preferred. We have seen earlier that the median is not affected by outliers, while the
mean is.
Moving-average smoothing is an option that is preferred for data sets with few random fluctuations.
Moving-average smoothing
This technique relies on the principle that averages of data can be used to
represent the original data. When applied to time series, a number of data points
are averaged, then we move on to another group of data points in a systematic
fashion and average them, and so on. It is generally quite simple. Consider the
following example:
Notice how the third column in the table at right is computed from the first two.
1. Take the first three y-values (i.e. first, second and third) and find their average
12 + 10 + 15 = 12.3
; place the result against t = 2.

3
2. Move down one line and again take three y-values (i.e. second, third and fourth.)
10 + 15 + 13
Find their average
= 12.7 and place the result against t = 3.
3
3. Continue moving down the table until you reach the last three points.
As we use three points to average, moving down the table from top to bottom,
the process is called a 3-point moving-average smoothing.
The number of points averaged at a time may vary: we could have a 4-point
smoothing, a 5-point smoothing or even an 11-point smoothing. Although it is
preferable to choose an odd number, such as 3 or 5, it is possible to choose even
numbers as well, with a slight change in the method. Later in the chapter, we will
discuss how to choose the number of points for smoothing.
Time (t) Data (y)

1
12
2
10
3
15
4
13
5
16
Moving average
12 + 10 + 15
= 12.3
3
10 + 15 + 13
= 12.7
3
15 + 13 + 16
= 14.7
3
13 + 16 + 13
= 14.0
3
13
16 + 13 + 18
= 15.7
3
18
13 + 18 + 21
= 17.3
3
21
18 + 21 + 19
= 19.3
3
19
137
Moving-average smoothing with

odd numbers of points
As seen above, the method for smoothing with an odd number (3, 5, . . .) is quite simple, and can be done
in a vertical tabular form. It is crucial that the time values be equally spaced, but they dont have to be in
the sequence 1, 2, 3.
Note: There are fewer smoothed points than original ones. For a 3-point smooth, 1 point at either end is
lost; while for a 5-point smooth, 2 points at either end are lost.
WOrkeD eXaMpLe 5
The temperature of a sick patient is measured every 2 hours and the results are recorded.
a Use a 3-point moving-average technique to smooth the data.
b Plot both original and smoothed data on the same set of axes.
c Predict the temperature for 18 hours using the last smoothed value.
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
9
3
2
36.5
4
37.2
6
36.9
8
37.1
think
a 1 Put the data in a table.

2
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Calculate a 3-point moving-average

for each data point.
Note: The lost values are at
t = 2 and t = 16. Therefore, the first
point plotted is (4, 36.87).
b 1 Plot the data. The smoothed line is
the thicker, red one.

Note: The smoothed data start at the
2nd time point and finish at the 7th
point.
10
37.3
Time (h) Temp. (C)

2
36.5
Comment on the result.
c Last smoothed data point is 37.50.
14
37.5
16
37.8
Smoothed temp. (C)
37.2
1
(36.5 + 37.2 + 36.9) = 36.87
3
36.9
1
(37.2 + 36.9 + 37.1) = 37.07
3
37.1
1
(36.9 + 37.1 + 37.3) = 37.10
3
10
37.3
1
(37.1 + 37.3 + 37.2) = 37.20
3
12
37.2
1
(37.3 + 37.2 + 37.5) = 37.33
3
14
37.5
1
(37.2 + 37.5 + 37.8) = 37.50
3
16
37.8
38
37.5
37
36.5
36
0
12
37.2
Write/DraW
Temperature (C)
Units: 3 & 4
Time (hours)
Temp. (C)
4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Number of hours
The smoothed line has removed much of the fluctuation

of the original time series and, in fact, clearly exposes the
secular trend (upwards) in temperature.
c The temperature at 18 hours is predicted to be 37.5 C.
prediction using moving averages

Because the moving average does not generate a single linear equation, there are limited possibilities for
using the resultant smoothed data for prediction. However, there are two things that can be done.
1. Predict the next value use the last smoothed value to predict the next time point. In the previous
example, our prediction for t = 18 would be temperature = 37.50. This is not necessarily an accurate
prediction but it is the best we can do without a linear trend equation.
138
2. Fit a single straight line to the smoothed data using either the 3-median or least-squares regression
techniques, one could find a single equation for the smoothed data points. This is often the preferred
technique.
how many points should be in the

moving average?
When smoothing data, it is important to decide on the number of points to be used. Several factors that
should be taken into account are discussed below. Here are some basic hints. (n = the number of points
in the time series and p = the number of points taken at a time to be averaged.)
1. For small data sets, the value of p should be considerably smaller than n. For example, if
n = 7, p should be no more than about 4.
2. The most common practice if there is a cyclic variation that we want to remove, is to let p length
of cycle. If the data shows seasonal variation, p should be proportional to the number of seasons. For
example, if there are quarterly data with seasonal variation, use p = 4.
Other preferred choices for number of points used in the smoothing procedures include:
Monthly sales figures
use 12 point centred
Daily sales for a store open each day of the week
use 7 point
Daily sales for a store open from Monday to Friday only
use 5 point
Quarterly electricity consumption figures
use 4 point centred
3. It is always preferable to use an odd value of p, regardless of whether n is even or odd.
4. The larger the value of p, the smoother the trend line of the resulting data becomes. More of the
fluctuations will be removed. However, you can go too far as the bigger p is, the more data points are
lost: when p = 3, we lose 2 points, if p = 5 4 points, if p = 7 6 points etc. Therefore if the set is
small, we may lose nearly all data by selecting large value of p!
Moving-average smoothing using a spreadsheet

A spreadsheet can be devised
to calculate the average data
values and then the new set
of smoothed points plotted
on a graph. At right is a
section of the spreadsheet for
Worked example 5.
Below right are the
formulas used. Note the
row and column numbers
carefully. There is no need
to calculate the first (C1)
and last (C8) average, as
these are the lost values. It
should be clear how to turn
this into a 5-point, or 7-point
smooth. Why wouldnt we
go any further?
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
time
B
temp.
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
36.5
37.2
36.9
37.1
37.3
37.2
37.5
37.8
C
smooth
=SUM(B1:B3)/3
=SUM(B2:B4)/3
=SUM(B3:B5)/3
=SUM(B4:B6)/3
=SUM(B5:B7)/3
=SUM(B6:B8)/3
139
exercise 4C
1 We5 The following table represents sales of a textbook.

DiGitaL DOC
doc-9431
Spreadsheet
Moving average
Year (t)
Sales (y)
2002
2250
2003
2600
2004
2400
2005
2750
2006
2900
2007
2450
2008
3100
2009
3400
a Use a 3-point moving average technique to smooth the data.

b Plot both the original and smoothed data.
c Predict the sales for 2010 using the last smoothed value.
2 The sales of a certain car seem to have been declining in recent months. The management wishes to
find out if this is the case.

Month
Sales
Jan.
120
Feb.
70
Mar.
100
Apr.
110
May
90
June
80
July
70
Aug.
90
Sept.
80
Oct.
100
Nov.
60
Dec.
60
a Using a 3-point moving average, smooth the data and comment on the result. Use Jan. = 1, Feb. = 2 . . .
b Using the least-squares regression method, find the equation of the trend line for the smoothed data.
c Use the equation to predict the number of sales for March next year. Comment on the predictions.
3 Perform a 5-point moving average smoothing on the data from question 2 and discuss the result.
4 Consider the quarterly rainfall data below. Rainfall has been measured over a 3-year period. Perform a
3-point moving average and comment on whether there is an underlying secular trend.
Time (t)
Rainfall
(mm)
Spring Summer Autumn Winter Spring Summer Autumn Winter Spring Summer Autumn Winter
2006
2006
2007
2007 2007
2007
2008
2008 2008
2008
2009
2009
100
50
65
120
90
50
60
110
85
40
50
100
5 The attendance at Bendigo Football Club games was recorded over 10 years. Management wishes to
see if there is a trend.

Year
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
75
72
69
74
66
72
61
64
69
65
Attendance
( 1000)
a Perform a 3-point moving average smoothing on the data and comment on the result.
b Using the 3-median line of best fit on the smoothed data, find the equation of the trend line.
c Use the equation from b to predict the attendance in 2011. Comment on the prediction.
6 Use a spreadsheet solution to complete a 3-point moving average smoothing on the following data
which represent sales figures for a 21-week period.
140
Week
Sales
Week
Sales
34
12
44
27
13
47
31
14
49
37
15
41
41
16
52
29
17
48
32
18
44
37
19
49
47
20
56
10
38
21
54
11
41
Smoothed data
Smoothed data
7 Coffee price data are shown below. Perform a 3-point moving average to smooth the data. Plot the
smoothed and original data and comment on your result.

Quarter
Price ($)
Q1-07 Q2-07 Q3-07 Q4-07 Q1-08 Q2-08 Q3-08 Q4-08 Q1-09 Q2-09 Q3-09 Q4-09
358
323
316
336
369
333
328
351
389
387
393
402
8 The sales of a new car can vary due to the effect of advertising and promotion. The sales figures for
Nassin Motor Companys new sedan are shown in the table. Use 5-point moving averages to smooth
the data. Plot the data, and use the last smoothed value to predict sales for the next month.
Month
Sales
Feb.
141
Mar.
270
Apr.
234
May
357
June
267
July
387
Aug.
288
Sept.
303
Oct.
367
Nov.
465
Dec.
398
9 A large building site requires varying numbers of workers. The weekly employment figures over the
last 7 weeks have been recorded. By performing a 3-point moving average smoothing, predict the
number of people required for the next week.
Week
Employees
67
78
54
82
69
88
94
Smoothing with an even

number of points
4D
As mentioned in the previous section, it is usually preferable to use an odd number of points. However,
there are situations when an even number of points should be used that is, a 4-point, 6-point or even
12-point moving average. When we used an odd number of points, the result was automatically centred;
that is, the y-data had the same t-values as the original (except at the first and last lost points). This
does not occur with an even-point smoothing, as shown in the following example of a 4-point moving
average.
Time
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
y-value
6
10

14

12

11
15
16
4-point average (smoothed value)

Calculation
Result
(6 + 10 + 14 + 12) 4
10.5
(10 + 14 + 12 + 11) 4
11.75
(14 + 12 + 11 + 15) 4
13
(12 + 11 + 15 + 16) 4
13.5
141
Observe that the first average (10.5) is not aligned with any particular year it is aligned with
2007.5! Also note that there are now three lost values (the seven original records reduced to four). In
other words, the moving average is not centred properly. To align the data correctly, an additional step
needs to be performed; this is called centring.
Use the following procedure to centre the data:
Step 1. Find the average of the first two smoothed points and align it with the 3rd time point.
Step 2. Find the average of the next two smoothed points and align it with the 4th time point.
Step 3. Repeat, leaving two blank entries at both top and bottom of the table.
This is demonstrated in the following table, using the data from the previous table.
4-point average (smoothed value)
Time
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
Calculation
y-value
Result
10
(6 + 10 + 14 + 12) 4
14
(10 + 14 + 12 + 11) 4
12
(14 + 12 + 11 + 15) 4
11
(12 + 11 + 15 + 16) 4
15
16
4-point average after centring

Calculation
Result
(10.5 + 11.75) 2
11.125
(11.75 + 13) 2
12.375
(13 + 13.5) 2
13.25
10.5
11.75
13
13.5
The first average (11.125) is now aligned with 2008, the second (12.375) aligned with 2009 and so
on. This process not only introduces an extra step, but an extra averaging (or smoothing) as well. It is
usually preferable to stick with an odd-point smoothing to reduce these difficulties.
WOrkeD eXaMpLe 6
The quarterly sales figures for a dress shop (in thousands of dollars)
were recorded over a 2-year period. Perform a centred 4-point moving
average smoothing and plot the result. Comment on any trends that has
been revealed.
Time
tUtOriaL
eles-1331
Worked example 6
Summer Autumn Winter Spring Summer Autumn Winter

27
22
19
25
31
25
22
Sales ( $1000)
think
1
Arrange the data in a

table.
Note: Code the time
column.
Calculate a 4-point
moving average in
column 3.
Spring
29
Write/DraW
Time
Sales
27
22
4-point moving average
4-point centred
moving average
(27 + 22 + 19 + 25) 4 = 23.25

Note: Table c ontinues . . .
142
Average the pairs

of averages to find
the 4-point centred
data. This is done in
column 4.
Time Sales
3
4-point centred
moving average
(23.25 + 24.25) 2 = 23.75
19
(22 + 19 + 25 + 31) 4 = 24.25
(24.25 + 25.00) 2 = 24.63
25
(19 + 25 + 31 + 25) 4 = 25.00
(25.00 + 25.75) 2 = 25.38
31
(25 + 31 + 25 + 22) 4 = 25.75
(25.75 + 26.75) 2 = 26.25
25
(31 + 25 + 22 + 29) 4 = 26.75
Plot the data. The

smoothed line is the
red one.
Note: The smoothed
data start at the 3rd
time point and finish
at the 6th point.
22
29
35
Sales ( $1000)
25
15
Interpret the results.
4 5
Time
Observe the steadily increasing trend (even with only four smoothed points)
that was not obvious from the original data.
even point smoothing with spreadsheets

The spreadsheet for the 4-point moving average of Worked example 6 is shown below.
143
The formulas are shown below. Note the cell row and column labels.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
A
time
B
sales
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
27
22
19
25
31
25
22
29
C
fourpoint
D
centred
=SUM(B1:B4)/4
=SUM(B2:B5)/4
=SUM(B3:B6)/4
=SUM(B4:B7)/4
=SUM(B5:B8)/4
=SUM(C2:C3)/2
=SUM(C3:C4)/2
=SUM(C4:C5)/2
=SUM(C5:C6)/2
There is little difference between this and a 3-point moving average spreadsheet, except that the SUMs
are located (columns C and D) to correspond to the appropriate term in the time series (columns A and B).
exercise 4D
of points
Smoothing with an even number
1 We 6 Perform a 4-point centred moving average to smooth the following data and plot the result.
Comment on any trends that you find.

t
y
1
75
2
54
3
62
4
60
5
70
6
45
7
54
8
59
9
62
10
64
2 The price of oranges fluctuates from season to season. Data have been recorded for 3years. Perform a
4-point centred moving average, plot the data and comment on any trends.
t
Autumn Winter Spring Summer Autumn Winter Spring Summer Autumn Winter Spring Summer
2007
2007 2007
2007
2008
2008 2008
2008
2009
2009 2009
2009
Price
45
67
51
44
52
76
63
48
58
80
66
52
3 a Use a spreadsheet to complete the following table. The time series represents the temperature of a
hospital patient over 15 days.

Day
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Temperature
36.6
36.4
36.8
37.2
36.9
36.5
37.2
37.4
37.1
37.4
37.6
36.9
37.2
37.6
36.9
4-point centred moving average
36.75
36.825
36.85
36.95
37
37.05
37.275
37.375
37.25
37.275
37.325
37.15
b Using the smoothed data, find the equation of the least-squares regression line.
c Use the trend line to predict the temperature of the patient on day 16.
144
4 The sales of summer clothing vary according to the season. The following table gives seasonal sales
data (in thousands of dollars) for 3 years at a Darryl Jones department store.
Season Q3-06 Q4-06 Q1-07 Q2-07 Q3-07 Q4-07 Q1-08 Q2-08 Q3-08 Q4-08 Q1-09 Q2-09
Sales
78
92
90
73
62
85
83
70
61
78
74
59
a Calculate a 4-point centred moving average.

b Plot the original and smoothed data on the same set of axes.
c Determine if there is an underlying upwards or downwards trend.
5 Calculate a 6-point centred moving average on the data from question 3.
6 An athlete wishes to measure her performance in running a 1 km race. She records her times over the
last 10 days.
Day
Time (s)
a
b
c
d
10
188
179
183
180
173
171
182
168
171
166
Perform a 4-point centred moving average smoothing.

Plot the original and smoothed data on the same set of axes.
Determine if there is a significant improvement in her times.
Fit a 3-median trend line to the smoothed data and predict her expected running time for day11.
7 The following table shows the share price index of Industrial Companies during an unstable fortnights
trading. By calculating a 4-point centred moving averages, determine if there seems to be an upward or
downward trend.
Day
Index
4e
10
678
762
692
714
689
687
772
685
688
712
Median smoothing
An alternative to moving-average smoothing is to replace the averaging of a group of points with the
median of each group. It is a faster technique requiring no calculations (provided you use odd-point
median smoothing). Often it can be done directly on a graph of a time series.
Median smoothing from a table

By placing the data in a table, median smoothing can be performed simply and quickly. Look at each
group of three points (for smoothing with 3-point medians) and choose the middle value. Progress
through the table one point at a time. As with other methods, points will be lost at the beginning and end
of the table.
145
WOrkeD eXaMpLe 7
Perform a 3-point median smoothing on the data in the table below. The table shows the cost of an
airline ticket between Perth and Melbourne over an 8-month period. Construct a time-series plot
of the original data and smoothed data on the same set of axis.
Time
Cost ($)
340
350
320
340
300
330
350
310
think
The first 3 values are 340, 350 and 320;

when ordered (i.e. 320, 340, 350), the
median value is 340. Place it against
t = 2.
Move 1 column to the right; the next
3values are 350, 320 and 340. The
median value is 340; place it against
t = 3.
Continue moving along the table until all
medians are found.
(Note that we loose values for t = 1 and
t = 8).
Construct a time series plots for both the
original and smoothed data on the same
set of axis.
Time
Cost ($) 340 350 320 340 300 330 350 310
3-point
moving
median
($)
Cost ($)
Write/DraW
340 340 320 330 330 330
y
380
360
340
320
300
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 x
Time
Generally, the effect of median smoothing is to remove some random fluctuations. It performs poorly on
cyclical or seasonal fluctuations unless the size of the range being used (3, 5, 7, . . . points) is chosen
carefully.
Median smoothing from a graph

Provided the graph has clearly marked data points, it is possible to find a median smooth directly
from it.
WOrkeD eXaMpLe 8
Perform a 3-point median smoothing on the graph of a time series below.

y
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
0
146
10 x
think
Write/DraW
Read the data values and compute the

median.
Plot the medians on the graph.
The 1st group of 3 points is: 12, 18, 16 so median = 16.

The 2nd group of 3 points is: 18, 16, 8 so median = 16.
The 3rd group of 3 points is: 16, 8, 12 so median = 12.
The 4th group of 3 points is: 8, 12, 16 so median = 12.
y
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
Note: Median smoothing has indicated a

downward trend that is probably not in
the real time series. This indicates that
moving-average smoothing would be the
preferred option.
exercise 4e
10 x
Median smoothing
1 We7 Perform a 3-point median smoothing on the following data and plot the result. Comment on any
trends that you find. These are the same data as in question 1, Exercise 4D, so compare the graphs of
the median smooth with the moving-average smooth.

t
y
1
75
2
54
3
62
4
60
5
70
6
45
7
54
8
59
9
62
10
64
2 The maximum daily temperatures for a year were recorded as a monthly average. Perform a 3-point
median smoothing on the data. Comment on your result.

Month
Jan.
Feb.
Mar.
Apr.
May
June
July
Temp. (C)
31
29
27
24
21
20
22
3 We8 Perform a 3-point median smoothing on the graphical
time series shown at right. Comment on the effectiveness of

the result.
Aug. Sept.
21
23
shown at right. Comment on the effectiveness of the result.
Nov.
Dec.
25
27
26
y
20
16
12
8
4
0
4 Perform a 3-point median smoothing on the graphical time series
Oct.
10 x
y
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
0
8 10 12 x
5 Perform a 3-point median smoothing on the data in the following table, which represent the share price
of the HAL computer company over the last 15 days.

Day
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Price 1.45 1.67 1.56 1.72 1.58 1.71 1.67 1.82 1.56 1.78 1.88 1.56 1.67 1.71 1.82
147
6 Perform a 5-point median smoothing on the data in the following table, which represent the share price
of the Pear-Shaped Computer Company over an 8-week trading period.

Day
Price
Day
Price
Day
Price
Day
Price
0.87
11
1.04
21
1.01
31
1.89
1.34
12
1.19
22
0.98
32
1.75
1.14
13
1.09
23
1.12
33
1.55
1.08
14
1.10
24
1.07
34
1.35
0.89
15
1.04
25
1.23
35
1.15
0.67
16
1.02
26
1.32
36
1.30
0.98
17
0.94
27
1.45
37
1.20
1.23
18
0.98
28
1.56
38
1.17
1.06
19
0.89
29
1.67
39
1.07
10
1.08
20
1.00
30
1.78
40
0.87
DiGitaL DOC
doc-9432
WorkSHEET 4.2
4F
A seasonal trend is similar to a cyclical trend where there are defined peaks and troughs in the timeseries data, except for one notable difference.
Seasonal trends have a fixed and regular period of time between one peak and the next peak in the
data values. Conversely, there is a fixed and regular period of time between one trough and the
next trough.
Joes Fast Food daily hamburger sales
As we have seen in the sections on
fitting a straight line to a time series,
120
Sat.
it is difficult to find an effective linear
Sat.
100
Sat.
equation for such data. As well, the
80
sections on smoothing indicated that
60
seasonal data may not lend themselves
40
to the techniques of moving-average
20
or median smoothing. We may just
Tues.
Tues.
Tues.
have to accept that the data vary from
0
5
10
15
20
25 t
season to season and treat each record
Day of the week
individually.
For example, the unemployment rate in Australia is often quoted as 6.8% seasonally adjusted.
The Government has accepted that each season has its own time series, more or less independent of
the other seasons. How can we remove the effect of the season on our time series? The technique of
seasonally adjusting, or deseasonalising, will modify the original time series, hopefully removing the
seasonal variation, and exposing any other trends (secular, cyclic, random) which may be hidden by
seasonal variation.
Number of hamburgers sold
interaCtiVitY
int-0185
Seasonal adjustment
Seasonal adjustment
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch a
video about
deseasonalising
data
148
Deseasonalising time series

The process of deseasonalising time series data involves calculating seasonal indices. A seasonal index
compares a particular season to the average season.
That is, the seasonal index measures by what factor a particular season is above or below the
average of all seasons for the cycle. For example:
Seasonal index = 1.3 means that season is 1.3 times the average season (that is, the figures for this
season are 30% above the seasonal average). It is a peak or high season.
Seasonal index = 0.7 means that season is 0.7 times the average season (that is the figures for this
season are 30% below the seasonal average). It is a trough or low season.
Seasonal index = 1.0 means that season is the same as the average season or neither a peak nor a
trough.
To deseasonalise the data, we divide each value by the corresponding seasonal index. That is,
Deseasonalised figure or value =
actual original figure or value .

seasonal index
The method of deseasonalising time series is best demonstrated with an example. Observe carefully the
various steps, which must be performed in the order shown.
WOrkeD eXaMpLe 9
Unemployment figures have been collected over a 5-year period and

presented in this table. It is difficult to see any trends, other than
seasonal ones.
a Calculate the seasonal indices.
b Deseasonalise the data using the seasonal
Season
2005 2006
indices.
Summer
6.2
6.5
c Plot the original and deseasonalised data.
Autumn
8.1
7.9
d Comment on your results, supporting your
statements with mathematical evidence.
Winter
8.0
8.2
Spring
think
a 1 Find the yearly averages over the
four seasons for each year and put

them in a table.
Divide each term in the original

time series by its yearly average.
That is, divide each value for
2005 by the yearly average for
2005 (i.e. by 7.3750); next divide
each value for 2006 by the yearly
average for 2006 (i.e. by 7.5750)
etc.
Determine the seasonal averages

from this second table. That is,
find the average of all five values
for summer; next find the average
of all values for autumn and so
on. These are called seasonal
indices.
7.7
2007
2008
2009
6.4
6.7
6.9
8.3
8.5
8.1
7.9
8.2
8.3
7.5
7.7
7.6
Write/DraW
a 2005: (6.2 + 8.1 + 8.0 + 7.2) 4 = 7.3750
2006: (6.5 + 7.9 + 8.2 + 7.7) 4 = 7.5750

2007: (6.4 + 8.3 + 7.9 + 7.5) 4 = 7.5250
2008: (6.7 + 8.5 + 8.2 + 7.7) 4 = 7.7750
2009: (6.9 + 8.1 + 8.3 + 7.6) 4 = 7.7250
Year
Average
7.2
tUtOriaL
eles-1266
Worked example 9
2005
7.3750
2006
7.5750
2007
7.5250
2008
7.7750
2009
7.7250
Summer 2005: 6.2 7.3750 = 0.8407

Autumn 2005: 8.1 7.3750 = 1.0983
Winter 2005: 8.0 7.3750 = 1.0847
Spring 2005: 7.2 7.3750 = 0.9763
Summer 2006: 6.5 7.5750 = 0.8581
..
.
Spring 2009: 7.6 7.7250 = 0.9838
Season
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
Summer
0.8407
0.8581
0.8505
0.8617
0.8932
Autumn
1.0983
1.0429
1.1030
1.0932
1.0485
Winter
1.0847
1.0825
1.0498
1.0547
1.0744
Spring
0.9763
1.0165
0.9967
0.9904
0.9838
Summer:
(0.8407 + 0.8581 + 0.8505 + 0.8617 + 0.8932) 5 = 0.8608
Autumn:
(1.0983 + 1.0429 + 1.1030 + 1.0932 + 1.0485) 5 = 1.0772
Winter:
(1.0847 + 1.0825 + 1.0498 + 1.0547 + 1.0744) 5 = 1.0692
Spring:
(0.9763 + 1.0165 + 0.9967 + 0.9904 + 0.9838) 5 = 0.9927
Season
Summer Autumn
Seasonal index 0.8608 1.0772
Winter
1.0692
Spring
0.9927
149
seasonal index. That is, divide all summer

figures by summer seasonal index (0.8608), all
autumn figures by the autumn seasonal index
(1.0772) and so on. This gives the seasonally
adjusted or deseasonalised time series.
Note: Your answers may vary a little,
depending upon how and when you rounded
your calculations.
b Summer 05: 6.2 0.8608 = 7.2023
Autumn 05: 8.1 1.0772 = 7.5195

..
.
Spring 09: 7.6 0.9927 = 7.6557
Summer
Autumn
Winter
Spring
c Graph the original and the seasonally adjusted c
(deseasonalised) time series.
d Note that most, but not all, of the seasonal
Unemployment figures
b Divide each term in the original series by its
2005
7.202
7.520
7.482
7.253
2006
7.551
7.334
7.669
7.756
2007
7.435
7.705
7.388
7.555
2008
7.783
7.891
7.669
7.756
2009
8.015
7.520
7.763
7.656
8.5
8.0
7.5
7.0
6.5
6.0
0
8
12 16
Time period
20
d There appears to be a slight upward trend in
variation has been removed. However, by using

least-squares, we could more confidently fit a
straight line to the deseasonalised data.
unemployment figures.
Spreadsheet solution
Although a CAS calculator can be used to solve some parts of Worked example 9, a spreadsheet can be
used to solve the entire problem. Such a spreadsheet has been constructed on the following page.
Note: The input data are in the table below. They should also appear at the top of your spreadsheet.
Step 1. Yearly averages are calculated just below the data table.
Step 2. Each term is divided by the appropriate yearly average.
Step 3. Seasonal indices are calculated (to the right of step 2).
Step 4. Deseasonalised data are calculated (below step 2).
Season
Summer
Autumn
Winter
Spring
Step 1
Yearly ave.
2005
6.2
8.1
8
7.2
7.375
2006
6.5
7.9
8.2
7.7
7.575
2007
6.4
8.3
7.9
7.5
7.525
2008
6.7
8.5
8.2
7.7
7.775
2009
6.9
8.1
8.3
7.6
7.725
Step 3
150
Step 2
Season
Summer
Autumn
Winter
Spring
2005
0.840 678
1.098 305
1.084 746
0.976 271
2006
0.858 086
1.042 904
1.082 508
1.016 502
2007
0.850 498
1.102 99
1.049 834
0.996 678
2008
0.861 736
1.093 248
1.054 662
0.990 354
Step 4
Season
Summer
Autumn
Winter
Spring
2005
7.202 264
7.519 508
7.481 972
7.252 767
2006
7.550 76
7.333 841
7.669 022
7.756 431
2007
7.434 595
7.705 175
7.388 448
7.554 965
2008
7.783 091
7.890 842
7.669 022
7.756 431
2009
Seasonal indices
0.893 204 0.860 84
1.048 544 1.077 198
1.074 434 1.069 237
0.983 819 0.992 725
4.000 000
2009
8.015 422
7.519 508
7.762 546
7.655 698
The formulas corresponding to the spreadsheet follow. Note carefully the row and column addresses.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
3
4
Season
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
5
Summer
6.2
6.5
6.4
6.7
6.9
6
Autumn
8.1
7.9
8.3
8.5
8.1
7
Winter
8
8.2
7.9
8.2
8.3
8
Spring
7.2
7.7
7.5
7.7
7.6
9
10 Step 1 Yearly
=SUM
=SUM
=SUM
=SUM
=SUM
ave.
(D5:D8)/4 (E5:E8)/4 (F5:F8)/4 (G5:G8)/4 (H5:H8)/4
11
Step 3
12 Step 2 Season
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
Seasonal indices
13
Summer =D5/D$10 =E5/E$10 =F5/F$10 =G5/G$10 =H5/H$10 =SUM(D13:H13)/5
14
Autumn =D6/D$10 =E6/E$10 =F6/F$10 =G6/G$10 =H6/H$10 =SUM(D14:H14)/5
15
Winter =D7/D$10 =E7/E$10 =F7/F$10 =G7/G$10 =H7/H$10 =SUM(D15:H15)/5
16
Spring =D8/D$10 =E8/E$10 =F8/F$10 =G8/G$10 =H8/H$10 =SUM(D16:H16)/5
17
=SUM(I13:I16)
18 Step 4
19
20
21
22
Season
Summer
Autumn
Winter
Spring
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
=D5/$I$13
=D6/$I$14
=D7/$I$15
=D8/$I$16
=E5/$I$13
=E6/$I$14
=E7/$I$15
=E8/$I$16
=F5/$I$13
=F6/$I$14
=F7/$I$15
=F8/$I$16
=G5/$I$13
=G6/$I$14
=G7/$I$15
=G8/$I$16
=H5/$I$13
=H6/$I$14
=H7/$I$15
=H8/$I$16
Notes
1. By adding/deleting columns between columns D and H, you could increase/decrease the number of
years. Remember to change the denominator in the seasonal indices (I13 . . . I16)
2. By adding/deleting more rows between Rows 5 and 8, you could increase/decrease the number of
seasons (see Exercise 4F, question 5). Do not forget to change the denominator in row 10.
Forecasting with seasonal time series

In the previous section we smoothed out the seasonal variation and are now able to see any secular
trend more clearly. If there is an upward or downward secular trend, then a straight line equation can be
calculated and used for making predictions into the future. Using either the 3-median or least-squares
regression methods of the deseasonalised data is always preferred.
Once the equation of the regression line for deseasonalised data has been obtained, it can be used for
forecasting.
However, the prediction obtained using such equation will also be deseasonalised or smoothed out to
the average season. But as we have the relevant seasonal indices, we should be able to use it to remove
the smoothing; that is, to re-seasonalise the predicted value.
The formula for re-seasonalising is:
Units: 3 & 4
AOS: DA
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Seasonalised figure or value = deseasonalised figure or value seasonal index.

WOrkeD eXaMpLe 10
Use the deseasonalised data from Worked example 9 to find the equation of the straight line for
the deseasonalised data using the least-squares regression method. Predict the unemployment
figure for summer in 2010. The deseasonalised data are reproduced below. (The seasonal index for
summer is 0.8608.)
Summer
Autumn
Winter
Spring
2005
7.202
7.520
7.482
7.253
2006
7.551
7.334
7.669
7.756
2007
7.435
7.705
7.388
7.555
2008
7.783
7.891
7.669
7.756
2009
8.015
7.520
7.763
7.656
151
Write
think
1
Use a calculator to find the equation of

the least-squares regression line for the
deseasonalised data.
Deseasonalised unemployment (%)

= 0.0227 time code + 7.357,
where time code 1 represents summer 2005.
Using the association table, the summer of

2010 will be represented by t = 21. Substitute
into the equation.
Summer of 2010:
Deseasonalised unemployment (%)
= 0.0227 21 + 7.357
= 7.834%
The predicted value is very high for summer.

Re-seasonalise by using the seasonal
index for summer, which was 0.8608.
That is, this was a season or period of low
unemployment.
Seasonalised value
= deseasonalised value seasonal index
= 7.834 0.8608
= 6.74%
WOrkeD eXaMpLe 11
Quarterly sales figures for a pool chemical supplier between 2007 and 2012
were used to determine the following seasonal indices.
Season
Seasonal index
1st quarter
1.8
2nd quarter
1.2
3rd quarter
0.2
4th quarter
0.8
tUtOriaL
eles-1267
Worked example 11
Using the seasonal indices provided in the table, calculate the following.
a Find the deseasonalised figure if the actual sales figure for the second quarter in 2011 was
$4680.
b Find the deseasonalised figure if the actual sales figure for the third quarter in 2011 was $800.
c Find the predicted value if the deseasonalised predicted value for the first quarter in 2013 is
expected to be $4000.
think
Write
Use the formula for deseasonalising.

a Use the 2nd quarter seasonal index.
b Use the 3rd quarter seasonal index to obtain
deseasonalised figure.
c Use the seasonalising formula and select the
1st quarter seasonal index.
actual figure
seasonal index
4680
=
1.2
= $3900
actual figure
b Deseasonalised figure =
seasonal index
800
=
0.2
= $4000
a Deseasonalised figure =
c Seasonalised figure
= deseasonalised figure seasonal index

= 4000 1.8
= $7200
The forecast sales figure for the first quarter in
2013 is $7200.
Seasonal indices
Finally, it should be noted that the sum of all the seasonal indices gives a specific result, which can be
used to answer certain types of queries.
The sum of the seasonal indices is equal to the number of seasons.
152
This can be summarised as follows.

Number of
seasons
12
4
26
5
7
Type of data
Monthly figures
Quarterly figures
Fortnightly figures
Daily figures for data from Monday to Friday only
Daily figures for data from Monday to Sunday
Cycle
A year
A year
A year
A week
A week
Sum of all the

seasonal indices
12
4
26
5
7
WOrkeD eXaMpLe 12
A fast food store that is open seven days a week has the following seasonal indices.
Season
Index
Monday
0.5
Tuesday
0.2
Wednesday
0.5
Thursday
0.6
Friday
Saturday
2.2
Sunday
1.1
The index for Friday has not been recorded. Calculate the missing index.
think
Write
The sum of the seasonal indices is equal to

the number of seasons.
There are 7 seasons (Monday to Sunday),

therefore the sum of indices is 7.
The missing index is the sum of all the other

seasons subtracted from the total.
Friday index
= 7 (sum of all the other indices)
= 7 (0.5 + 0.2 + 0.5 + 0.6 + 2.2 + 1.1)
= 7 5.1
= 1.9
exercise 4F
Seasonal adjustment
Note: Your answers may vary slightly, depending upon rounding. Try to round to 4 decimal places
for all intermediate calculations.
1 We 9 The price of sugar ($/kg) has been recorded over
Season
2007
2008
2009
3 years on a seasonal basis.
Summer
1.03
0.98
0.95
a Compute the seasonal indices.
Autumn
1.26
1.25
1.21
b Deseasonalise the data using the seasonal indices.
Winter
1.36
1.34
1.29
c Plot the original and deseasonalised data.
d Comment on your results, supporting your statements
Spring
1.14
1.07
1.04
with mathematical evidence.
DiGitaL DOC
doc-9433
Spreadsheet
Seasonal adjustment
2 Data on the total seasonal rainfall (in mm) have been accumulated over a 6-year period.
Season
Summer
Autumn
Winter
Spring
a
b
c
d
2004
103
93
143
123
2005
97
84
124
109
2006
95
82
121
107
2007
117
100
156
125
2008
118
99
155
122
2009
120
98
151
124
Compute the seasonal indices.

Deseasonalise the original time series.
Plot the original and deseasonalised time series.
Comment on your result, supporting your statements
with mathematical evidence.
153
3 It is known that young people (1825) have problems in finding work; these problems are different
from those facing older people. The youth unemployment statistics are recorded separately from the
overall data. Using the youth unemployment figures for five years shown below:
Season
Summer
Autumn
Winter
Spring
a
b
c
d
2005
7.6
10.9
11.7
9.9
2006
7.7
11.3
12.4
10.5
2007
7.8
11.9
12.8
10.8
2008
7.7
12.6
13.5
11.4
2009
7.9
13.1
13.9
11.9

Deseasonalise the time series.
Comment on your result, supporting your statements with mathematical evidence.
4 The unemployment rate in a successful European economy is given in the table below as a percentage.
Quarter
2007
2008
2009
a
b
c
d
e
1
5.8
6.1
5.7
2
4.9
5.1
4.5
3
3.5
3.2
4.1
4
6.7
6.5
7.1

Deseasonalise the time series.
Find the equation of the line-of-best-fit for the deseasonalised data using the least-squares method.
Use the equation of the line from part d to predict the unemployment rate for:
i quarter 1 in 2010
ii quarter 3 in 2014.
Comment on each of the predictions.
5 It is possible to seasonally
adjust time series for other than

the usual 4 seasons. Consider an
expensive restaurant that wishes
to study its customer patterns on
a daily basis. In this case a
season is a single day and there
are 7 seasons in a weekly cycle.
Data are total revenue each day
shown in the table which
follows. Modify the spreadsheet
solution to allow for these
7 seasons and deseasonalise the
following data over a 5-week
period. Comment on your result,
supporting your statements with
mathematical evidence.
154
Season
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
Week 4
Week 5
Monday
1036
1089
1064
1134
1042
Tuesday
1103
1046
1085
1207
1156
Wednesday
1450
1324
1487
1378
1408
Thursday
1645
1734
1790
1804
1789
Friday
2078
2204
2215
2184
2167
Saturday
2467
2478
2504
2526
2589
Sunday
1895
1786
1824
1784
1755
A line-of-best-fit for deseasonalised data was given as:

Deseasonalised monthly sales = 1500 time code + 10 000
where June 2012 represents t = 1.
The predicted actual expected sales figure for June 2013, if the June seasonal index is 0.8, would be:
a $23 600
B $29 500
C $19 500
D $36 875
e $35 000
7 The following table gives the deseasonalised figures and corresponding seasonal indices for umbrella
sales.
6 We10
MC
Season
Jan. Feb. Mar. Apr. May June July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.
Number of umbrellas
24
24
25
26
25
27
27
28
30
31
33
34
(deseasonalised)
Index
1.15 0.90 0.20 0.20 0.35 0.45 3.0 2.10 2.15 0.95 0.40 0.15
a Find the equation of the straight line for the deseasonalised data using the least-squares regression
method.
b Predict the umbrella sales for January the following year.
8 We11 Quarterly sales figures for an ice-cream parlour between
2010 and 2012 were used to determine the following seasonal

indices.
Season
1st quarter 2nd quarter 3rd quarter 4th quarter
Seasonal
1.50
1.00
0.25
1.25
index
Using the seasonal indices provided in the table, calculate the
following.
a Find the deseasonalised figure, if the actual sales figure for
the second quarter in 2011 was $3000.
b Find the deseasonalised figure, if the actual sales figure for
the third quarter in 2011 was $800.
c Find the predicted value, if the deseasonalised predicted
value for the first quarter in 2013 is expected to be $3200.
9 We12 A newsagency store that is open seven days a week has the following seasonal indices.
Season
Index
Mon.
0.5
Tues.
0.2
Wed.
Thurs.
0.6
Fri.
1.5
Sat.
2.2
Sun.
1.1
Find the value of the missing index.

10 Complete the following table of seasonal indices.
Season
Index
Summer
1.23
Autumn
0.89
Winter
Spring
1.45
Questions 11 and 12 relate to the following table, which contains the seasonal indices for the
monthly sales of spring water in a particular supermarket.
Season
Index
Jan.
1.05
Feb.
Mar.
1.0
Apr.
1.0
May
0.95
June
0.85
July
0.8
Aug.
0.9
Sept.
0.95
Oct.
1.05
Nov.
1.10
Dec.
1.15
11 MC The seasonal index missing from the table is:

a 1.0
D 1.15
B 1.05
e 1.20
C 1.10
12 MC If the actual sales figure for June 2012 was $102 000, then the deseasonalised figure would be:
a $96 900
D $120 000
B $86 700
e $102 000
C $107 368.42
155
Summary
time series
A time series is a set of measurements taken over (usually) equally spaced time intervals, such as
hourly, daily, weekly, monthly or annually.
trend lines
There are 4 basic types of trend.

1. Secular: increasing or decreasing steadily
2. Seasonal: varying from season to season
3. Cyclic: similar to seasonal but not tied to a calendar cycle
4. Random: variations caused by external triggers happening at random
Fitting trend lines
The trend line is a straight line that can be used to represent the entire time series. Trend lines can
be used for predicting the future values of the time series. The line can be found in several ways.
1. No smoothing:
for time series that are clearly linear; that is, slightly random or have secular trends
fit the line of best fit by eye, or using the 3-median or least-squares regression method to
raw data.
2. With smoothing:
for time series that are random, secular or have cyclical trends
fit the line of best fit using either the 3-median or least-squares regression method to smoothed
data.
3. With deseasonalising:
for time series that have seasonal trends only
fit the line of best fit using either the 3-median or least-squares regression method to
deseasonalised data.

(primarily for random
and secular trends)
Smoothing involves replacing the original time series with another one from which most of
the variation has been removed, in order to see if there is a secular trend. There are three basic
smoothing techniques. In all cases, points are lost at the start and end of the time series. Refer to
the text for detailed descriptions of the techniques involved.
Moving-average
smoothing with an
odd number of points
Moving-average smoothing works best with an odd number of points. For a 3-point moving
average, two points are lost; one point at each end of the time series.
Moving-average
smoothing with an
even number of points
Moving-average smoothing with an even number of points is a 2-step process. For example, with
4 points first perform a 4-point moving average smoothing, then centre by averaging pairs of the
4-point averages. For a 4-point centred smoothing, four points are lost; two points at each end of
the time series.
Median smoothing
Median smoothing is usually done with an odd number of points. The number of points lost is the
same as for moving-average smoothing.
Deseasonalisation
(only for seasonal
trends)
Deseasonalising a time series involves replacing the original time series with another one where most
or all of the seasonal variation is removed. To deseasonalise the data:
1. Calculate seasonal indices.
Average over all seasons for each year these are the yearly averages.
Divide each point in the original time series by its corresponding yearly average.
Using this new series, average over all years for each season these are the seasonal indices.
2. Deseasonalise the data by dividing each point in the original time series by its corresponding
seasonal index.
actual original figure or value
Deseasonalised figure or value =
seasonal index
To seasonalise (predicted) figures:
Seasonalised figure or value = deseasonalised figure or value seasonal index.
The sum of the seasonal indices is equal to the number of seasons.
156
Chapter review
Price of oranges ($)
1 The price of oranges over a 16-month period is recorded in the figure.
M U Ltip L e
C hO iC e
50
40
30
20
10
0
8 10 12 14 16 t
Months
The trend can be described as:

a Cyclic
B Seasonal
C Random
D Secular
e There is no trend.
2 A 3-median trend line was fitted to the data from question 1 using the values below. The gradient of
this line is:
t
$
1
20
2
28
3
10
a 4.93
4
14
5
18
B 0.18
6
24
7
16
8
26
9
16
10
18
11
22
12
20
D 3.30
C 0.313
13
17
14
25
15
20
16
5
e 17.8
3 From another 16-month time series for the price of apples, it was found that
the least-squares trend line was: price = 0.415 month + 8.45. A prediction
for the price of apples in month 18 is:
a 8.45
B 0.42
C 6.64
e unable to be determined with the above information
D 15.92
4 A least-squares trend line has been fitted to the time series in the figure below.
y
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
Its equation is most likely to be:

a y = 10t
B y = 8t + 10
10 t
C y = 8t
D y = 8t 10
e y = 8t + 10
5 The following data represent the number of employees in a car manufacturing plant. The data are
smoothed using a 3-point moving average.

Year
Number
2002
350
2003
320
2004
300
2005
310
2006
270
2007
240
The first two points in the smoothed trend line are:

a 320 and 300
B 320 and 310
C 323 and 310
D 335 and 310
6 How many points will the smoothed trend in question 5 contain?
a 8
B 7
C 6
D 5
7 Consider the following data.
Time
y-value
2003
12
2004
13
2005
16
2006
16
2007
17
2008
19
2008
200
2009
160
e 323 and 273

e 4
2009
22
The value, after a 4-point moving average smoothing after centring, plotted against the year 2006 is:
a 16.25
B 14.25
C 15.5
D 17
e 14.875
157
8 A 3-point median smoothing is performed on the data in the figure below. The last smoothed value is:
y
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
a 25
B 21.7
C 20
10 t
D 15
e 9
9 Seasonal indices and adjustment can be used when:

a
B
C
D
e
there are random variations in the data

there are seasonal variations along with a secular trend
there are seasonal variations only
there are seasonal or cyclic variations
there are at least 4 seasons worth of data
10 The seasonal indices below were obtained from a time series.
Season
Index
Spring
1.12
Summer
0.78
Autumn
0.92
Winter
The value of the winters seasonal index is:

B 0.94
C 1.08
e unable to be determined from the given information
a 1.18
D 1.06
11 Using the data from question 10, a seasonally adjusted value for the summer of 2010, when the original
value was 520, is closest to:

a 406
B 667
C 464
e cannot be determined without additional information
D 614
The following information relates to questions 1213.

The time series plot below shows the revenue from sales (in dollars) each month made by a
Queensland souvenir shop over a 3-year period.
20 000
Revenue ($)
15 000
10 000
5 000
12
18
24
30
36
Month
12 This time series plot indicates that, over the 3-year period, revenue from sales each month showed:
a no overall trend
B no correlation
e an increasing trend with seasonal variation
C positive skew
D an increasing trend only
13 A 3-median trend line is fitted to these data. Its slope (in dollars per month) is closest to:
a 125
158
B 146
C 167
D 188
e 255
1 The number of uniforms sold in a school uniform shop is reported in the table.
Month
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
S hO rt
a n S W er
Number of uniforms sold

118
92
53
20
47
102
90
42
35
26
12
58
Fit a trend line to these data. What type of trend is best reflected by these data? Can you explain
these trends?
2 Fit a least-squares trend line for the following data, which represent the sales at a snack bar during the
recent Melbourne show. State the gradient and y-intercept.

Day
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Sales ($)
2300
2200
2600
3100
2900
3200
3300
3500
3 Fit a 3-median trend line to the data below.

y
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 t
a State the gradient and y-intercept as exact values.

b Use your line to predict a value when t = 35.
4 A hotel records the number of rooms booked over an 11-day period. Fit a trend line using the least-
squares method.
Day
Rooms
1
12
2
18
3
15
4
20
5
22
6
20
7
25
8
24
9
26
10
28
11
30
a State the gradient and y-intercept, rounded to 2 decimal places.

b Predict the number of rooms booked for days 12 and 13.
159
5 Perform a 3-point moving average smoothing on the following rainfall data. Plot the original and
smoothed data on the same set of axes. Give all answers rounded to 1 decimal place.
Day
Rain (mm)
1
2
2
5
3
4
4
6
5
3
6
7
7
6
8
9
6 Apply a 5-point moving average smoothing to the following seasonal data of coat sales.
Season
Sales ($)
Winter 2008
690
Spring 2008
500
Summer 2008
400
Autumn 2008
720
Winter 2009
780
Spring 2009
660
Summer 2009
550
Autumn 2009
440
7 Apply a 4-point centred moving average smoothing to the data from question 6. Compare your results.
What do you notice about the number of smoothed data points in each case?
8 Perform a 3-point median smoothing on the data shown below. Plot the smoothed points and join them
with straight line segments.

y
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
10 t
9 The seasonal indices for the price of shares in CSP fruit canneries are:
Season
Winter
Spring
Summer
Autumn
Index
1.7
0.6
0.5
1.2
Use seasonal indices shown in the table above to deseasonalise the following data:
Share price
Season (2009)
Spring
Summer
Autumn
Winter
160
Seasonalised
150
100
300
400
Deseasonalised
task 1
1 Jazzas CD store has been opened for the past three weeks. The sales figures for the store were recorded
e X ten D eD
reS p O n S e
and tabulated as follows.

Jazzas CD store daily sales figures number of CDs sold
Average daily
Mon. Tues. Wed. Thurs. Fri. Sat. sales for the week
Week 1
10
12
15
24
45
Week 2
12
14
18
26
53
Week 3
15
10
16
21
33
58
a Plot the above data as a time series plot and comment on the type of
b
c
d
e
trend that exists. Justify your choice.

How many seasons are there?
How many cycles are there?
Calculate the average daily sales for each of the weeks.
Complete the table of seasonal indices for each day.
Jazzas CD Store daily sales figures number of CDs sold
Mon.
Tues.
Week 1
10
= 0.5263
19
0.4211
Week 2
12
0.4091
Week 3
= 0.5455
0.5882
Wed.
Thurs.
Fri.
12
=
19
0.7895
1.2632
14
0.8182
= 0.6364
Sat.
2.4091
0.3922
1.2941
2.2745
f Complete the following table of seasonal indices.
Seasonal
indices
Mon.
Tues.
Wed.
0.5533
1.2224
= 0.4075
3
0.6318
Thurs.
2.4312
Fri.
= 0.8104
Sat.
1.2464
g Interpret what an index of 2.3507 means.

2 Use the results from question 1 to answer question 2.
a Complete the table of deseasonalised CD sales figures.
Jazzas CD store daily sales figures number of CDs sold

Mon.
Tues.
Wed.
Thurs.
Week 1
Week 2
18.07
21.69
Week 3
27.11
19.63
9
=
0.4075
10
=
0.4075
Fri.
Sat.
19.14
18.99
22.16
18.51
22.21
19.26
20.86
25.32
25.91
26.48
b Find the equation of the trend line using the least-squares method and interpret the values of the
gradient and the y-intercept.

c Using the trend line, predict the deseasonalised sales figures for:
i Monday week 4
ii Saturday week 4
iii Saturday week 6.
d Using the deseasonalised values from part c, calculate the actual expected future sales for each.
Comment on the reliability of the predictions.

161
task 2
The next 8 questions relate to the following data, which represent seasonal rainfall (mm) in an Australian city.
Season
Rainfall (mm)
1
43
2
75
3
41
4
13
5
47
6
78
7
50
8
19
9
51
10
83
11
55
12
25
1 Plot the data points and try to fit a trend line by eye. Comment on the ease of fitting the line to this plot.
2 Now, try to fit a trend line using the 3-median method. Compare the result with that of question 1.
3 Finally, fit a trend line using the least-squares technique. Again, compare your result with the previous
ones.
4 To smooth out the seasonal variation, 3-point and 5-point moving average smoothings are tried. Compare
the results of these two methods with the results from questions 1 to 3 by plotting the smoothed data.
5 Upon observing the results with the 5-point smoothing, a trend appears. Take the data from the 5-point
moving average smoothing and fit a straight line using the least-squares method. Put the first smoothed
point at t = 3 and then centre the time data. State the y-intercept and gradient. Compare this trend line with
that from question 3.
6 Given the seasonal nature of the data, a 4-point moving average smoothing is tried. After calculating
the 4-point moving average, fit a least-squares regression line, following the method of question 5.
Compare the results obtained with those from question 5.
DiGitaL DOC
doc-9434
Test Yourself
Chapter 4
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
DA
Practice
VCE exam
questions
Use StudyON to
access all exam
questions on this
topic since 2002.
162
7 Finally, try seasonal adjustment. Take t = 1 to be summer and find the seasonal indices. Then,
seasonally adjust the data.

8 Take the seasonally adjusted data from question 7 and fit a trend line using least-squares method.
Comment on this result.
ICT activities
Chapter opener
DiGitaL DOC
10 Quick Questions doc-9427: Warm up with a quick quiz on time
series. (page 129)
4a
DiGitaL DOC
Spreadsheet doc-9421: Investigate the least-squares trend line.
(page 132)
4B
DiGitaL DOCS
SkillSHEET 4.1 doc-9430: Gradient-intercept method for sketching
linear graphs (page 135)
Spreadsheet doc-9429: Investigate the 3-median method. (page 136)
WorkSHEET 4.1 doc-9428: Plotting time series data and fitting trend
lines using various techniques (page 137)
4C
DiGitaL DOC
Spreadsheet doc-9431: Investigate the moving average. (page 140)
4D
Smoothing with an even number of points
tUtOriaL
We 6 eles-1331: Watch a tutorial on performing a centred 4-point
moving average on time series data and plotting the result. (page 142)
4e
Median smoothing
DiGitaL DOC
WorkSHEET 4.2 doc-9432: Recognise trends, 3-point moving
average, 4-point centred moving average, 6-point centred moving
average and 5-point median smoothing. (page 148)
4F
Seasonal adjustment
DiGitaL DOC
Spreadsheet doc-9433: Make comparisons between seasonalised
and original data. (page 153)
tUtOriaLS
We 9 eles-1266: Watch a tutorial on computing seasonal indices
and then using them to deseasonalise data. (page 149)
We 11 eles-1267: Watch a tutorial on calculating deseasonalised
values, given actual values using seasonal indices.(page 152)
interaCtiVitY
Seasonal adjustment int-0185: Use the interactivity to consolidate
your understanding of seasonal adjustment. (page 148)
Chapter review
DiGitaL DOC
163
Answers CHAPTER 4
7 Although there are some random
variations, the trend could also be secular.

y
20
10
0
2 4
6 8 10 12 t
year is an extrapolated value (outside the

plotted values) and can only be treated as
an approximate value at best.
2 4 6 8 10 12
Date
Price (cents)
100
80
60
40
20
5
10 15 20 25 t
Weeks
b Prediction for t = 25 is about 92 cents.

11 Difficult to fit an accurate trend line, due
2007
2008
Quarter
2009
12 At current rate (about 300/month), bank
will have no employees in another year!

Although not likely, there is a clear
downward trend.
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
80
70
60
50
Price ($)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 t
Months
d Given fairly even increase in averages,
trend line is an excellent predictor.
exercise 4C

Smoothed data:
1 a
2416.7
2583.3
y
3400
3000
2600
2200
4 6 8
Months
10
2683.3
2700.0
2816.7
2983.3
c Use 2983.3 to predict sales for 2010.

2 a Smoothed data: possible downward
trend, but still fluctuations.
96.7 93.3 100.0 93.3
80
80
80
90
80
73.3
130
110
90
70
50
0
4 6 8 10 12 t
Month
b Price = 2.39t + 102.17

c 66.32, the data are cyclical and the
prediction is based on smoothed data

that have removed this trend.
4 6 8 10 12 t
Months
c y(Dec.) = 293.96 (294)

d Excellent predictor
8 a y = 3.77t 1.83
b
Sales ( 1000)
Sales ( 1000)
to likely cyclical nature of software sales

business.
164
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
last year secular, so overall trend line

would be a poor predictor.
10 a y = 1.93t + 56.9
b
c 78%
2002 2004 2006 2008 2010
Time code t = 1 represents 2010, t = 2

represents 2011 and so on.
b The y-intercept of $2.56 represents
the approximate value of the shares in
2009. The gradient of +$0.72 means that
the share value will grow by $0.72 (72
cents) each year.
c $10.48
7 a y = 20.36t + 49.64
b
240
220
200
180
160
140
120
100
0
10
6 a Share price = $0.72 time code + $2.56
nature of the data.
6 8
Months
10
8
6
4
2
0
Sales
Price ($)
6
5
4
3
2
1
9 Impossible to fit a trend line, given cyclical

10 a
exercise 4B Fitting trend lines and

forecasting
1 y = 2.9t + 33.72
a 2
b 2.9 per hour
2 11.63 hours
3 a n = 1.125t + 3.1875
b y(24) = 30.1875 or 31 employees
4 a Least-squares: y = 0.044t + 2.48
b 3-median: y = 0.018t + 2.79
Neither very effective as predictor,
note small gradients (0.018 and 0.044).
Probably a random (or cyclical) trend.
5
1
5 y = t + ; given the exponential nature of
6
6
data, it is a very poor predictor.
8 Predicting a share price in the following
c $398
d The first 2 years seemed seasonal, the
Mark %
Sites (millions)
Temp. (C)
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 t
Days
420
380
340
300
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 t
Quarters
Sales

Note: Your answers may vary slightly due to
using eye method.
1 Seasonal
2 Random
3 Secular, upwards
4 Random or cyclical
5 Cyclical
6 Definite secular trend downward
c y(10) = 35.87, y(12) = 43.37,
y(14) = 50.95
d A poor predictor, given nature of data

9 a y = 6.35t + 315.8
90
90
88
82
84
80
78
130
110
90
70
50
0
4 6 8 10 12 t
Month
Smoothed data: definite downward trend

is now apparent.
4
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 t
Weeks
98
Sales
exercise 4a
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
71.7 78.3 91.7 86.7 66.7 73.3 85.0 78.3 58.3 63.3
Rainfall (mm)
Number of employees
tiMe SerieS
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
4 6 8 10 12 t
Quarters
72
5 a
71.7 69.7 70.7 66.3 65.7 64.7 66.0
Smoothed data: shows a clear downward

trend.
b Attendance = 1.2t + 75.23
c 60.83 (60 830), this is a reasonable
prediction as long as the trend continues
to decline as given by the negative
gradient.
Week
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Sales
34
27
31
37
41
29
32
37
47
38
41
44
47
49
41
52
48
44
49
56
54
Smoothed data
30.67
31.67
36.33
35.67
34.00
32.67
38.67
40.67
42.00
41.00
44.00
46.67
45.67
47.33
47.00
48.00
47.00
49.67
53.00
Smoothed data; prediction for week 7 is 87.

exercise 4D
Smoothing with an even

number of points
1
Q3-06
Q4-06
58.25
57.125
56
57.375
Q1-07
81.25
Q2-07
78.475
Q3-07
76.625
Q4-07
75.375
Q1-08
74.88
Q2-08
73.875
Q3-08
71.875
Q4-08
69.375
8 10 t
Smoothed data indicated a general

downward trend, possibly with a cyclic
trend in original data.
2
t
Price ($)
Autumn 07
Winter 07
Spring 07
52.625
Summer 07
54.63
Autumn 08
57.25
Winter 08
59.25
Spring 08
60.50
Summer 08
61.75
Autumn 09
62.63
Winter 09
63.50
Spring 09
Summer 09
Q1-09
Q2-09
b
Day Smoothed
2 4 6 8 10 12 t
Seasons
420
400
380
360
340
320
300
0
4 6 8 10 12 t
Quarters
Smoothed data: Some but not all seasonal

fluctuation removed.
Sales
8 253.8
303
306.6 320.4 322.4
362
364.2
500
400
300
200
100
0
2 4 6 8 10 12 t
Months
Smoothed data: most random variation

smoothed, slight upward trend possible.
Prediction for 12th month is 419.
3 a
Day
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Temperature
36.6
36.4
36.8
37.2
36.9
36.5
37.2
37.4
37.1
37.4
37.6
36.9
37.2
37.6
36.9
4-point
moving
average
36.75
36.825
36.85
36.95
37
37.05
37.275
37.375
37.25
37.275
37.325
37.15
4-point
centred
moving
average
6 a
Day Smoothed
180.625
36.78
177.75
36.92
176.625
37.03
175.00
37.07
173.25
172.375
37.14
37.24
9
10
10
37.27
11
37.29
12
37.29
13
36.7875
36.8375
36.9
36.975
37.025
37.1625
37.325
37.3125
37.2625
37.3
37.2375
14
15
b
190
Time (s)
Price ($)
332.3 325.0 340.3 346.0 343.3 337.3 356.0 375.7 389.7 394.0
2 4 6 8 10 12 t
Seasons
downward trend.
5
Smoothed data indicate a strong upward

trend of almost 12 cents over 3 years.
100
90
80
70
60
50
0
c Smoothed data indicate a clear
80
70
60
50
40
0
Smoothed
62.125 60.375
Season
4 a
y
80
70
60
50
40
Price ($)
b Temperature = 0.056d + 36.654

c 37.6
66.33 71.33 68.33 79.67 83.67
Sales ( $1000)
Smoothed data did not remove seasonal

trend; from the figure, there may be a
slight trend downward.
180
170
160
0
6 8
Day
10
c Yes, there is a significant improvement
in times.
d 167
165
1
2
3
712.75
704.75
711.75
708.25
711.25
1.2274, 1.0288
b
Season
10
Index
800
775
750
725
700
675
650
2
6 8
Day
10
Smoothing indicates a very flat trend.

exercise 4e
Median smoothing
9 10
Day
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
62 60 62 60 54 54 59 62
y
80
70
60
50
40
0
8 10 t
Not nearly as effective as moving average

smooth in demonstrating trend.
2
Temp (C)
Temp.
(C)
Month
Jan.
Feb.
29
Mar.
27
Apr.
24
May
21
Jun.
21
Jul.
21
Aug.
22
Sep.
23
Oct.
25
Nov.
26
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
0
6 8 10 12
Months
Smoothing had virtually

no effect on data
only minor variations
smoothed.
16
12
8
4
6
8 10 t
Effective at smoothing out small random

variations.
166
Smoothed
1.00
1.01
1.07
1.12
1.23
1.32
1.45
1.56
1.67
1.75
1.75
1.75
1.55
1.35
1.30
1.20
1.17
1.17
2007
1.211
1.178
1.186
1.221
2008
1.152
1.169
1.169
1.146
1.4
1.3
1.2
1.1
1
0.9
0
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
Autumn 115.614 104.426 101.939 124.316 123.023 121.830

Winter
116.506 101.027
Spring
119.557 105.949 104.005 121.501 118.585 120.529
160
140
120
100
80
0
2009
1.117
1.132
1.125
1.114
98.582 127.098 126.283 123.024
4 8 12 16 20 24
Seasons
d Probable drought in 200506

3 a Seasonal indices: 0.7141, 1.100, 1.1832,
1.0027
b
Season
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
Summer 10.6431 10.7832 10.9232 10.7832 11.0633

Autumn
9.9090 10.2726 10.8181 11.4544 11.9090
Winter
9.8884 10.4800 10.8181 11.4097 11.7478
Spring
9.8732 10.4716 10.7708 11.3692 11.8678
14
12
10
8
0
8 12 16 20 t
d Youth unemployment increases in all
seasons except in summer
4 a Seasonal indices: 1.1143, 0.9183,
0.6829, 1.2845
Quarter
2007
5.205
5.336
5.125
5.216
2008
5.474
5.554
4.686
5.060
2009
5.115
4.900
6.004
5.528
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Seasonal adjustment
Season
Summer
Autumn
Winter
Spring
1.56
1.67
1.58
1.71
1.67
1.71
1.67
1.78
1.78
1.78
1.67
1.67
1.71
1.1467, 0.9336
3 20y
Smoothed
1 a Seasonal indices: 0.8504, 1.0692,
Dec.
8 10 12
Smoothed Day
21
22
1.08
23
1.08
24
0.98
25
0.98
26
0.98
27
1.06
28
1.06
29
1.08
30
1.08
31
1.09
32
1.09
33
1.09
34
1.04
35
1.02
36
0.98
37
0.98
38
0.98
39
0.98
40
exercise 4F
Price ($)
Day
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
2004
Summer 109.643 103.257 101.128 124.548 125.612 127.741
Smoothed out much of the variation,

indicates a slight upward trend.
705.50
d Slight trend downwards

2 a Seasonal indices 0.9394, 0.8044,
y
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
0
Rainfall (mm)
Index
Youth unemployment
Day
Unemployment
4 6 8 10 12 t
Time period
d Deseasonalised unemployment rate
= 0.0188 t + 5.1448
e i 6.0
ii 3.9
5 Seasonal indices: 0.6341, 0.6613, 0.8329,
1.0354, 1.2822, 1.4850, 1.0692. Restaurant

should probably close Mon.Tues., steady
sales over 5-week period see table below.
Season
Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5
Monday
1633.86 1717.45 1678.02 1788.42 1643.33
Tuesday
1667.88 1581.69 1640.66 1825.14 1748.02
Wednesday 1740.94 1589.66 1785.36 1654.49 1690.51
2 4 6 8 10 12
Seasons
Thursday
1588.81 1674.77 1728.86 1742.38 1727.89
Friday
1620.72 1718.99 1727.57 1703.39 1690.13
Saturday
1661.32 1668.72 1686.23 1701.05 1743.47
Sunday
1772.29 1670.35 1705.89 1668.48 1641.36
7 Same number of smoothed data points. (In
Revenue
2800
fact a 4-point centred is a special case of a

5-point smoothing.)
2200
1600
1000
0
Season
14 21 28 35 t
Time period
Winter 08
Spring 08
Summer 08
Autumn 08
Winter 09
Spring 09
Summer 09
Autumn 09
6A
7 a Deseasonalised umbrella sales = 0.9161
t + 21.8788
b 39
8 a $3000
b $3200
9 0.9
10 0.43
11 E
c $4800
12 D
Chapter reVieW
MULtipLe ChOiCe
1C
6C
11 B
2B
7A
12 E
3 D
8 D
13 C
4 E
9 B
5 C
10 A
y
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
110
9 250, 200, 250, 235
50
30
10
0
2 4
6 8 10 12
Month
Day
Ave.
2
3.7
3
5.0
4
4.3
5
5.3
6
5.3
1 e
10
8
6
4
2
Winter 08
Spring 08
Summer 08
Autumn 08
Winter 09
Spring 09
Summer 09
Autumn 09
Week 1
10
19
Week 2
12
22
Seasonal
indices
Sales ($)
2 a
618
612
622
630
have about 2.35 times the sales compared

to the average daily sales.
2 a See table bottom of page
b Deseasonalised CD sales = 0.4993t +
17.43
y-intercept of 17.4342 (17.43) means
that these sales were expected the day
before the data were calculated.
The gradient of 0.4993 (0.5) means
that as each day goes by Jazza can
expect an increase in sales by half a
CD each day (or more logically by 1
CD every two days).
c i Monday week 4, t = 19
Deseasonalised CD sales = 26.91
ii Saturday week 4, t = 24
iii Saturday week 6, t = 36
d i Monday week 4: 15 CDs
approximately
ii Saturday week 4: 69 CDs
approximately
iii Saturday week 6: 83 CDs
approximately
The first two predictions are reliable as
they are only one week into the future.
The Saturday week 6 prediction of 83
CDs is not so reliable as it is far into
the future and the trend may change in
the meantime, such as during holidays
and so on.
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 t
Week 1
Week 2 Week 3
Cycle
= 0.5263 0.4211
12
19
= 0.5455 0.4091
14
22
Week 3 0.5882
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Day
Season
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
7
7.3
10
Task 1
1 a The time series is seasonal. There are
peaks and troughs occurring on the
same days of the week. There is also an
upward secular trend. This can also
be seen from the table as each day, week
after week more CDs are sold.
b 6
c 3: there are 3 weeks of figures given
Rainfall (mm)
eXtenDeD reSpOnSe
3 a Gradient , y-intercept 3
6
b 30.83
4 a Gradient 1.58, y-intercept 12.33
b y(12) = 32, y(13) = 33
70
Its very difficult to fit a trend line as data

is seasonal. Summer uniform is mostly
bought at the end of the year and then the
beginning of the year. Winter uniform
is mostly bought near winter these are
peacks. The sales decrease throughout the
other parts of the year.
2 Gradient 184.52, y-intercept 2057.14
588.75
620
658.75
642.5
90
Number of CDs sold
Number of uniforms sold
ShOrt anSWer
Sales ($)
d Week 1: 19, week 2: 22, week 3: 25.5

e, f See tables bottom of page
g An index of 2.3507 means that Saturdays
0.3922
Mon.
Tues.
0.5533
1.2224
3
= 0.6316
= 0.6364
16
25.5
= 0.6349
Wed.
= 0.4075 0.6318
0.7895
1.2632
0.8182
26
22
21
22
2.4312
3
= 2.3684
= 1.1812 2.4091
= 0.8235 1.2941
Thurs.
45
19
Fri.
= 0.8104 1.2462
2.2745
Sat.
7.052
3
= 2.3507
Jazzas CD store daily sales figures Number of CDs sold

Mon. Tues.
Wed.
Thurs.
Fri.
Sat.
Week 1 18.07 19.63
18.99
18.51
19.26
19.14
Week 2 21.69
9
0.4075
= 22.09 22.16
22.21
20.86
53
2.3507
= 22.55
Week 3 27.11
10
0.4075
= 24.54 25.32
25.91
26.48
58
2.3507
= 24.67
167
3-point smooth:
Rainfall (mm)
Rainfall (mm)
Task 2
1 Very difficult to fit an accurate trend line.
However, there seems to be an upward
trend.
100
80
60
40
20
2
Rainfall (mm)
Rainfall (mm)
The positive gradient suggests an upward

trend 1.4 mm, i.e. increase of rainfall by
each season.
6 8 10 12
Season
100
80
60
40
20
Rainfall (mm)
Rainfall (mm)
No improvement using this method.
6 8 10 12
Season
Season
3
10
11 12
Rainfall 43 75 41
13
47
78 50 19
51
83
55 25
53 43 33.7 46 58.3 49 40
51
63 54.3
3-pt ave.
5-pt ave.
168
6 8 10 12
Season
6 8 10 12
Season
4
1
100
80
60
40
20
0
10 11 12
Rainfall 43 75 41
13
47
78
50
19
51
83 55 25
4-pt ave.
43.8 50.8 45.8 41.4 49 56.2 51.6 46.6
Season
Summer
Autumn
Winter
Spring
Seasonal index
0.9741
1.6346
1.0042
0.3871
Seasonally adjusted data:
6 8 10 12
Season
The 3-point average has only slightly

reduced the variation, while the 5-point
smooth seems more effective.
5 y = 0.74t + 43.32
A positive trend. However, it is fairly weak
(m = 0.74).
3 y = 0.02t + 48.47
100
80
60
40
20
0
100
80
60
40
20
0
5-point smooth:
6 8 10 12
Season
2 y = 1.375t + 38.9
Season
100
80
60
40
20
0
43.5 44.4 45.8 47.8 49.0 50.1 51.4 52.8
Least-squares: y = 1.36t + 39.27.

A stronger increasing trend shown.
Season
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Rainfall
43
75
41
13
47
78
50
19
51
83
55
25
8 y = 1.66t + 37.70
Seas. adj.
44.1
45.9
40.8
33.6
48.2
47.7
49.8
49.1
52.4
50.8
54.8
64.6
Strongest trend yet (m = 1.66). Also, all

12 points used rather than 8 or 10 as in
moving average smoothing.
Exam practice 1 CHAPTERS 14

Core Data analysis
M U Ltip L e
C hO iC e

The frequency table below shows the number of bedrooms in homes (units and houses) on a street.
x
1
2
3
4
5
f
6
9
7
4
2
20 minutes
each question is worth

one mark.
1 The mode of the data is:

a 1
B 2
C 3
D 9
e 28
C 2.54
D 5.55
e 61.36
2 The mean of the data is closest to:

a 2
B 2.50

The parallel boxplots below represent the scores of two indoor soccer teams over a season containing
12 matches.
Team A
Team B
1
6 7 8
Scores
9 10 11 12 13
3 The boxplot for Team B is best described as:

a symmetric
D negatively skewed with outliers
B negatively skewed
e positively skewed with outliers
C positively skewed
4 From the data, it can be concluded that for the season shown:
a
B
C
D
e
Team B won more games than Team A

Team A won more games than Team B
Team A scored the lowest score out of the two teams
Team A scored the highest score out of the two teams
Team Bs scores were more variable than Team As scores
5 A population has a mean of 82.1 and a standard deviation of 2.3. Approximately 95% of the population
will lie in the range:

a (5.0, 95.0)
B (75.2, 89.0)
C (79.8, 84.4)
D (77.5, 86.7)
e (78.0, 86.2)
6 The height of a student is 182 cm and was taken from a sample with a mean of 175 cm and a standard
deviation of 4 cm. The z-score for the students height is:
a 1.75
B 1.02
C 0.75
D 1.02
e 1.75
7 A set of bivariate data has the following statistics:
r = 0.6754, x = 8.93, sx = 2.38, y = 18.87, sy=5.09
The equation of the least-squares regression line y= a + bx is closest to:
a y = 5.97 + 1.44x
B y = 1.44 + 5.97x
C y = 5.97 1.44x
D y = 16.1 0.32x
e y = 16.1 + 0.32x
8 A student constructs a scatterplot from the set of data given.
x
y
1
12
2
16
3
24
4
25
5
32
6
38
7
56
8
80
9
95
To linearise the scatterplot, he applies an x2 transformation. The equation of the least-squares

regression line is closest to:
a y = 8.08 + 10.02x
B y = 9.63 + 1.02x2
C y = 9.63 + 1.02x
2
D y = 8.08 + 10.02x
e y = 8.44 + 0.95x2
The following table shows the seasonal indices for the quarterly attendances at a swimming pool.
Quarter
Seasonal index
1
1.12
2
0.95
4
1.09
Exam practice 1
169
9 The value of the missing seasonal index for quarter 3 is:

a 0.84
B 0.91
C 0.95
D 1.00
e 1.05
10 The actual number of pool visits in the first quarter of a particular year is 146 089. The deseasonalised
number is closest to:

a 130 437
B 138 785
C 146 000
D 153 778
y
11 A 3-median trend line is fitted to the following time series data.
x
y
1
12
2
16
3
15
4
18
5
26
6
22
7
27
8
26
9
29
35
10
34
30
25
Its slope is closest to:
20
13
1
C
7
2
25
7
D
e
12
13
12 For the time series data below, the value of the 3-point moving
median centred at t = 5 is:
a 2
t
C
1
12
a 5
e X t enDeD
r e S pOnS e
10 minutes
2
16
3
13
B 17
4
17
5
19
C 18
6
18
D 19
e 163 620
15
10
5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 x
7
20
e 20
total marks
= 12
A Melbourne-based telephone support service relies on the work of 65 volunteers. A sample of 15

volunteers is selected to look at job satisfaction among volunteers. The 15 volunteers are asked to rate
their satisfaction with the volunteer work on a scale of 0 to 10, where 0 is not at all satisfied and 10 is very
satisfied, along with the number of hours they work on average. The results are shown below.
Average hours
Satisfaction
2
6
2
5
2.5
3
3
6
3
5
4
7
5
9
5
10
7
8
8
9
10
9
12
8
13
10
15
9
20
10
a Assuming a linear relationship, use the data above to determine the least-squares regression
equation that could be used to determine the level of job satisfaction from the number of hours
[1 mark]
worked. Write your answer in terms of the variables given.
b A residual plot is constructed to test the assumption of linearity for the relationship.
Residual
3
2
1
0
1
10 12 14 16 18 20
Average hours
3
i Explain the features of this residual plot that suggest the relationship is not linear.
A log10 (x) transformation is applied in the attempt to linearise the data. The table below shows the
transformed values.
ii Find the missing value correct to 2 decimal places.
DiGitaL DOC
doc-10284
Solutions
exam practice 1
170
Average hours 2
2 2.5 3
3
Log (hours)
0.30 0.30 0.40 0.48 0.48
Satisfaction
6
5
3
6
5
4
7
5
5
7
8
10 12 13 13 20
0.70 0.70 0.85 0.90 1 1.08 1.11 1.18 1.30
9
10
8
9
9
8
10
9
10
iii Find the equation of the least-squares regression line for the transformed
data, in terms of job satisfaction and hours.
[1
+ 1 + 1 = 3 marks]
total marks = 4
ChapTer 5
Arithmetic and geometric

sequences
diGiTal doC
10 Quick Questions
doc-9435
ChapTer ConTenTS
5a
5B
5C
5d
5e
5F
5G
5h
5i
Recognition of arithmetic sequences

Finding the terms of an arithmetic sequence
The sum of a given number of terms of an arithmetic sequence
Recognition of geometric sequences
Finding the terms of a geometric sequence
The sum of a given number of terms of a geometric sequence
Applications of geometric sequences
Finding the sum of an infinite geometric sequence
Contrasting arithmetic and geometric sequences through graphs
introduction
Patterns occur naturally in many real-life situations; for example the addition of interest to bank
accounts, plant spacing in a winery and the stacking of logs in a pile. Two of the most common patterns
are termed arithmetic and geometric sequences. Recognition of these two patterns is important in
analysing situations that occur normally in the real world. Look at the sequence in the shaded column on
this bank statement.
5a
Date
Description
1.1.2006
1.1.2007
1.1.2008
1.1.2009
Deposit
Interest
Interest
Interest
Debit
Credit
Balance
1000.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
1000.00
1100.00
1200.00
1300.00
recognition of arithmetic sequences
A sequence in mathematics is an ordered set of numbers.

An arithmetic sequence is one in which:
1. the difference between any two successive terms is the same, or
2. the next term in the sequence is found by adding the same number.
Consider the arithmetic sequence:
4, 7, 10, 13, 16, 19, 22.
The difference between each successive term is +3, or similarly, the next term is found by adding 3 to the
previous term. We can see that a positive common difference gives a sequence that is increasing. We say
that the common difference is +3, stated as d = +3.
+3
+3
+3
10
+3
13
+3
16
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch a
video about
arithmetic
sequences.
+3
19
22
The first term of the sequence is 4. We refer to the first term of a sequence as a. So in this
example, a = 4.
ChapTer 5 Arithmetic and geometric sequences
171
In this arithmetic sequence, the first term is 4, the second term is 7, the third term is 10 and so on.
Another way of writing this is:
t1 = 4, t2 = 7 and t3 = 10.
There are 7 terms in this sequence. Because there is a countable number of terms in the sequence, it is
referred to as a finite sequence.
The arithmetic sequence below
7
37,
30,
23,
16,
9 ...
is an infinite sequence since it continues endlessly as indicated by the ellipsis (. . .) after the final term
shown. The first term, a, is 37 and the common difference, d, is 7. We can see that a negative common
difference gives a sequence that is decreasing.
1. An arithmetic sequence is a sequence of numbers for which the difference between successive
terms is the same.
2. The first term of an arithmetic sequence is referred to as a.
3. The common difference between successive terms is referred to as d.
4. tn is the term number; for example, t6 refers to the 6th term in the sequence.
Worked example 1
Which of the following are arithmetic sequences?

a 7, 13, 19, 25, 31, . . .
b 81, 94, 106, 120, 133, . . .
1
1
1
c 1.3, 2.5, 3.7, 4.9, 6.3, . . .
d 1 , 1, , 0, , . . .
2
Think
a 1 Write the sequence.
WriTe
a 7, 13, 19, 25, 31,
Calculate the difference between the first

term, t1, and the second term, t2.
t2 t1 = 13 7
=6
Calculate the difference between the second

term, t2, and the third term, t3.
t3 t2 = 19 13
=6
Calculate the difference between the third

term, t3, and the fourth term, t4.
t4 t3 = 25 19
=6
Calculate the difference between t5 and t4.
t5 t4 = 31 25
=6
Check that the differences are the same and

write your answer.
There is a common difference of 6, therefore

d = 6.
This is an arithmetic sequence.
b 1 Write the sequence.
b 81, 94, 106, 120, 133, . . .
Calculate the difference between the first

term, t1, and the second term, t2.
t2 t1 = 94 (81)
= 13
Calculate the difference between the second

term, t2, and the third term, t3.
t3 t2 = 106 (94)
= 12
There is no need to do any further checks as

the two differences are not the same.
There is no common difference.

This is not an arithmetic sequence.
c 1 Write the sequence.
172
c 1.3, 2.5, 3.7, 4.9, 6.3, . . .
2.5 1.3 = 1.2
3.7 2.5 = 1.2
4.9 3.7 = 1.2
6.3 4.9 = 1.4
Check that the differences are the same.
There is no common difference.

This is not an arithmetic sequence.
d 1 Write the sequence.
1
2
d 1 , 1,
1
1
2
, 0, 1,
2
11 = 1
1
2
Check that the differences are the same.
1
2
1 = 12
1
2
=1
2
0=1
2
There is a common difference of 1.

2
This is an arithmetic sequence.
Worked example 2
Write the value of a and d for each of the following arithmetic sequences.
2 2 3
3
3
a 1.2, 3.6, 6, 8.4, 10.8, . . .
b 1 , , , 1 , 2 , . . .
5 5 5
5
5
Think
WriTe
a 1.2, 3.6, 6, 8.4, 10.8,
What is the first term?
a = 1.2
What is the difference between t2 and t1?

You need check only once as the question
states that this is an arithmetic sequence.
t2 t1 = 3.6 1.2
= +2.4
d = +2.4
Write your answer.
The arithmetic sequence has a first term, a,

of 1.2 and a common difference, d, of +2.4.
2 2 3
, ,
5 5 5
b 1 ,
13, 23, . . .
5
What is the first term?
a = 125
What is the difference between t2 and t1?
t 2 t1 =
Write your answer.
The arithmetic sequence has a first term, a,

of 125 and a common difference, d, of +1.
exercise 5a
2
5
= +1
d = +1
125
recognition of arithmetic sequences
State which of the following are arithmetic sequences.

a 2, 7, 12, 17, 22, . . .
b 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, . . .
d 3, 7, 11, 15, 20, . . .
e 4, 8, 11, 15, 19, . . .
g 1, 1, 2, 4, 8, . . .
h 2, 2, 4, 4, 8, . . .
1 We1a
2 We2
c 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, . . .
f 3, 30, 300, 3000, 30 000, . . .
i 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, . . .
For those arithmetic sequences found in question 1, write the values of a and d.
173
3 We1b State which of the following are arithmetic sequences.

a 123, 23, 77, 177, 277, . . .
c 7, 1, 5, 11, 17, . . .
e 5, 2, 9, 16, 23, . . .
g 1, 0, 1, 3, 5, . . .
b 1, 3, 1, 5, 3, . . .
d 67, 27, 13, 53, 93, . . .
f 7, 18, 29, 30, 39, . . .
h 0, 10, 21, 32, 43, . . .
4 For those arithmetic sequences found in question 3, write the values of a and d.
5 We1c State which of the following are arithmetic sequences.
a 0.7, 1, 1.3, 1.6, 1.9, . . .
c 3.5, 2, 0.5, 1, 2.5, . . .
e 2, 0.1, 2.1, 3.3, 4.5, . . .
b 2.3, 3.2, 5.2, 6.2, 7.2, . . .

d 2.7, 2.5, 1.7, 1.5, 0.7, . . .
f 5.2, 6, 6.8, 7.6, 8.4, . . .
7 We1d State which of the following are arithmetic sequences.
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
a , 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , ...
1 3
2
4
5 5
5
5
1 1 1
, , 1, 1 ,
3 3
3
c , , 1, 1 , 1 , . . .
e
2, . . .
1 3
4 4
3
1
4
3
4
1
4
b , , 1 , 1 , 2 , ...
d
f
, 0, 3, 11, 21, . . .
4
4
2
4
1 1 1 1 1
, , , , , ...
2 4 6 8 10
9
Show which of the following situations are

arithmetic sequences.
a A teacher hands out 2 lollies to the first
student, 4 lollies to the second student,
6 lollies to the third student and 8 lollies
to the fourth student.
b The sequence of numbers after rolling a
die 8 times.
c The number of layers of paper after each
folding in half of a large sheet of paper.
d The house numbers on the same side of a street on a newspaper delivery route.
e The cumulative total of the number of seats in the first ten rows in a regular cinema (for example,
with 8 seats in each row, so there are 8 seats after the first row, 16 seats after the first 2 rows, and
so on).
10 For those arithmetic sequences found in question 9, where appropriate information is given, write the
value of a and d.
11 For the following arithmetic sequences:
a 4, 13, 22, 31, . . . which term, tn, will be equal to 58?
b 9, 4.5, 0, . . . which term, tn, will be equal to 18?
c 60, 49, 38, . . . which term, tn, will be the first to be greater than 10?
d 100, 87, 74, . . . which term, tn, will be the first to be less than 58?
12 Jenny receives 5 dollars for completing the first kilometre of a walkathon and 7 dollars more for
completing each subsequent kilometre. Write the arithmetic sequence that represents the amount
received by Jenny for each kilometre walked from 1 to 10 kilometres.
13 Each week, Johnny buys a pack of 9 basketball cards. In the first week Johnny has 212 cards in his
collection. Give the total number of cards Johnny has for each of the first five weeks.
14 mC Which of the following could be the first five terms of an arithmetic sequence?
a 1, 3, 9, 12, 15, . . .
C 3, 3, 6, 6, 9, . . .
e 3, 1, 0, 1, 3, . . .
B 266, 176, 86, 4, 94, . . .

d 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, . . .
15 mC 3, 10, 17, 24, 31, 38
For the arithmetic sequence above, it is true to say that it is:

a an infinite sequence with a = 3 and d = 7
B an infinite sequence with a = 7 and d = 3
C an infinite sequence with t2 = 10 and d = 7
d a finite sequence with a = 3 and d = 7
e a finite sequence with a = 7 and d = 3
174
Finding the terms of an

arithmetic sequence
5B
inTeraCTiViTY
int-0007
number patterns
Consider the arithmetic sequence for which a = 8 and d = 10.

+10
+10
Now, t1 = 8
t2 = 8 + 10
t3 = 8 + 10 + 10
t4 = 8 + 10 + 10 + 10
t5 = 8 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 10
18
+10
28
+10
38
t1 = a
t2 = a + d
t3 = a + d + d
t4 = a + d + d + d
t5 = a + d + d + d + d
48
t2 = a + 1d
t3 = a + 2d
t4 = a + 3d
t5 = a + 4d
We notice a pattern emerging. That pattern can be described by the equation:

tn = 8 + (n 1) 10
where n represents the number of the term.
For example, if n = 4, then the fourth term is:
t4 = 8 + (4 1) 10
= 8 + 3 10
= 38.
Therefore, the 4th term is 38.
We can generalise this rule for all arithmetic sequences.
where tn is the nth term
a is the first term
d is the common difference.
tn = a + (n 1) d
This rule enables us to find any term of an arithmetic sequence provided we know the value of a and d.
Worked example 3
Find the 20th term of the following arithmetic sequence.

5, 40, 75, 110, 145, . . .
Think
WriTe
Find the value of a.
a=5
Find the value of d. You need to calculate only

one difference as the question states that it is an
arithmetic sequence.
d = t2 t1
= 40 5
= 35
Use the rule tn = a + (n 1) d where n is 20 for

the 20th term.
Write the answer.
t20 = 5 + (20 1) 35
= 5 + 19 35
= 670
The 20th term is 670.
If we are given only two terms of an arithmetic sequence, we are able to use the rule tn=a + (n 1) d to
set up two simultaneous equations to find the value of a and d and hence write the rule for the arithmetic
sequence.
Worked example 4
The third term of an arithmetic sequence is 1 and the fifth term is 11.
a Write the rule for the arithmetic sequence.
b Find the 50th term of the sequence.
Think
a 1 We know that t3 = 1 and that
tn = a + (n 1) d, where n = 3.
WriTe
a t3 = a + 2d = 1
175
We know that t5 = 11 and that

tn = a + (n 1) d, where n = 5.
t5 = a + 4d = 11
Solve the 2 equations simultaneously

using the elimination technique.
Eliminate a, by subtracting
equation [1] from equation [2].
a + 2d = 1
a + 4d = 11
2d = 12
d=6
Evaluate a by substituting d = 6 into either

of the two equations.
Substituting d = 6 into [1]:

a + 12 = 1
a = 13
To find the rule, substitute values for

a and d into tn = a + (n 1) d.
tn = 13 + (n 1) 6
= 13 + 6n 6
= 19 + 6n
b 1 To find the 50th term or t50, substitute
n = 50 into the rule found.
Write your answer.
[1]
[2]
[2] [1]
b tn = 19 + 6n
t50 = 19 + 6 50
= 19 + 300
= 281
Worked example 5
If the first three terms of an arithmetic sequence are 5.2, 7.4 and 9.6, which
term is equal to 53.6?
Think
WriTe
Find the rule for the arithmetic sequence.

Identify the value of a (it is the 1st term).
Calculate the value of d.
Substitute the values of a and d into
tn = a + (n 1) d.
a = 5.2
d = t2 t1
= 7.4 5.2
= 2.2
tn = 5.2 + (n 1) 2.2
= 5.2 + 2.2n 2.2
= 3 + 2.2n
Which term is equal to 53.6?

Substitute 53.6 for tn and solve for n.
53.6 = 3 + 2.2n
50.6
n=
2.2
= 23
Write your answer.
The term 53.6 is the 23rd term.
TUTorial
eles-1268
Worked example 5
Worked example 6
An ant colony is studied and found to have a population of 10 000 in the first week of the study.
The population increases by 500 each week after that.
a Write a rule for the number of ants in the colony in week n of the study.
b When will the ant population double in size?
176
Think
a 1 We know that a = 10 000 and
d = 500 and that tn = a + (n 1) d.
a tn = 10 000 + (n 1) 500
= 10 000 + 500n 500
tn = 9500 + 500n
Substitute and simplify.
b 1 Using the rule found, we need to find
which term is equal to 10 000 doubled or

tn = 20 000.
WriTe
Write your answer.
tn = 9500 + 500n
20 000 = 9500 + 500n
10 500 = 500n
10 500
n=
500
= 21
The ant population will double to 20 000
in the 21stweek.
Finding the terms of an

arithmetic sequence
exercise 5B
1 We3 For each of the arithmetic sequences given, find:

a the 25th term of the sequence 2, 7, 12, 17, 22, . . .
b the 19th term of the sequence 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, . . .
c the 30th term of the sequence 0, 100, 200, 300, 400, . . .
d the 27th term of the sequence 7, 1, 5, 11, 17, . . .
e the 33rd term of the sequence 5, 2, 9, 16, 23, . . .
f the 39th term of the sequence 14.1, 28.2, 42.3, 56.4, 70.5, . . .
2 We4 Evaluate the following.
a The 2nd term of an arithmetic sequence is 13 and the 5th term is 31. What is the 17th term of
this sequence?
b The 2nd term of an arithmetic sequence is 23 and the 5th term is 277. What is the 20th term of
this sequence?
c The 2nd term of an arithmetic sequence is 0 and the 6th term is 8. What is the 32nd term of this
sequence?
d The 3rd term of an arithmetic sequence is 5 and the 7th term is 19. What is the 40th term of this
sequence?
3 We5 Evaluate the following.
a The first 3 terms of an arithmetic sequence are 3, 9 and 15. Which term is equal to 141?
b The first 3 terms of an arithmetic sequence are 9, 6 and 3. Which term is equal to 72?
c The first 3 terms of an arithmetic sequence are 1.7, 2.5 and 3.3. Which term is equal to 28.1?
d The first 3 terms of an arithmetic sequence are 1.5, 2 and 2.5. Which term is equal to 140.5?
4 We6 A batsman made 23 runs in
his first innings, 33 in his second

and 43 in his third. If he continued
to add 10 runs each innings, write
a rule for the number of runs he
would have made in his nth innings.
5 In a vineyard, rows of wire
fences are built to support the vines.

The length of the fence in row 1 is
40 m, the length of the fence in row
2is 43 m, and the length of the
fence in row 3 is 46 m. If the lengths
of the fences continue in this
pattern, write down a rule for the
length of a fence in row number n.
177
6 A marker is placed 15 m from a white line by a P.E. teacher. The next marker is placed 25 m from the
white line and the next 35 m from the white line. The teacher continues placing markers in this pattern.
a Write a rule for the distance of marker n from the white line.
b How many markers will need to be placed before the last marker is at least 100 metres from
the line?
7 mC The 41st term of the arithmetic sequence 4.3, 2.1, 0.1, 2.3, 4.5, . . . is:
a 83.7
B 85.9
C 92.3
d 172.4
e 178.5
8 mC The 2nd term of an arithmetic sequence is 2 and the 5th term is 2.5. The 27th term of this
sequence is:
a 32.5
B 35.5
C 42.5
d 89.5
e 96
9 mC The numbers 8, 1 and 6 form the first three terms of an arithmetic sequence. In this arithmetic
sequence the term which is equal to 258 is the:
a 30th
B 32nd
C 37th
d 39th
e 42nd
10 Find the 28th term of the arithmetic sequence 5.2, 6, 6.8, 7.6, 8.4, . . .
1 3
11 Find the 31st term of the arithmetic sequence 5 , 5 , 1, 1 5 , 15 , . . .

12 The 3rd term of an arithmetic sequence is 16 and the 5th term is 4.2. What is the 19th term of this
sequence?
1
13 The 4th term of an arithmetic sequence is 3 2 and the 7th term is 6 2 . What is the 25th term of this
sequence?
14 The 3rd term of an arithmetic sequence is 15 and the 8th term is 45. Which term of the sequence is
equal to 183?
15 The 2nd term of an arithmetic sequence is 1 and the 6th term is 15. Which term of the sequence is
equal to 167?
16 mC The 3rd term of a sequence is 1 and the fifth is 14. The term which is equal to 141.5 is the:
a 9th
B 11th
C 18th
d 20th
e 22nd
17 Peter plants his first tomato seedling 0.5 m from the fence, the next 1.3 m from the fence and the next 2.1 m
from the fence. If he continues to plant in this pattern, how far will the 14thseedling be from the fence?
18 Olivia began her china collection in 1951.
She was given 3 pieces of china that

year and added 2 pieces each year after
that. How many pieces did Olivia have
in her collection in the year 2000?
19 The membership of a local
photography club was 7 in its first year.

If the club added 4 members to its
membership each year, write a rule for
the number of members in the club in
year n.
20 The first fence post in a fence is 12 m from the road, the next is 15.5 m from the road and the next is
19 m from the road. The remainder of the fence posts are spaced in this pattern.
a Write a rule for the distance of fence post n from the road.
b If 100 posts are to be erected, how far will the last post be from the road?
The sum of a given number of terms

of an arithmetic sequence
5C
When the terms of an arithmetic sequence are added together, an arithmetic series is formed. So, 5, 9,
13, 17, 21, . . . is an arithmetic sequence whereas 5 + 9 + 13 + 17 + 21 + . . . is an arithmetic series.
The sum of n terms of an arithmetic sequence is given by Sn.
Consider the finite arithmetic sequence below.
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
178
The sum of this arithmetic sequence is given by S10 since there are 10 terms in the sequence.
So,
S10 = 1 + 2 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 6 + 7 + 8 + 9 + 10
= 55
Note that the sum of the first and last terms is 11. Also, the sum of the second and second last
terms is 11. Similarly, the sum of the third and third last term is 11. This pattern continues with
the fourth and fourth last terms as well as with the fifth and fifth last terms. There are in fact five
lots of 11.
We can formalise this pattern to obtain a rule which applies to all arithmetic sequences.
Let Sn = a + (a + d ) + (a + 2d ) + . . . + (l 2d ) + (l d ) + l
where l is the last term of the sequence.
By reversing the order of the series above, we obtain
Sn = l + (l d ) + (l 2d ) + . . . + (a + 2d ) + (a + d ) + a
By adding these two equations, we obtain
2Sn = (a + l) + (a + d + l d ) + (a + 2d + l 2d ) + . . . (l d) + (a + d) + (a + l)
2Sn = (a + l) + (a + l) + (a + l) + . . . (a + l) + (a + l)
2Sn = n(a + l) where n represents the number of terms in the sequence.
Sn = 1n(a + l)
So,
The sum of n terms of an arithmetic sequence with a as its first term and l as its last term is
given by:
n
Sn = (a + l).
2
Recall that the nth term of an arithmetic sequence is given by:
tn = a + (n 1)d.
So, for the sum of n terms, l is the last term; that is, tn = l.
So, the last term is:
l = a + (n 1)d.
n
Substituting this into
Sn = (a + l )
2
n
we obtain
Sn = {a + [a + (n 1)d]}
2
n
= [2a + (n 1)d]
2
An alternative formula for the sum of n terms of an arithmetic sequence when the value of a and
d are known, is given by:
n
Sn = [2a + (n 1)d ].
2
Worked example 7
Find the sum of the first ten given terms of the arithmetic sequence:
4, 10, 16, 22, 28, 34, 40, 46, 52, 58.
Think
WriTe
Method 1:
1
We know the values of the first and last term

and that there are ten terms in the series.
a=4
l = 58
n = 10
n
Use the series formula Sn = (a + l).
2
n
Sn = (a + l)
2
10
S10 = (4 + 58)
2
= 5 62
= 310
179
Method 2:
1 We know the value of a and d and n.
a=4
d = 10 4 = 6
n = 10
n
Use the formula Sn = [2a + (n 1)d].
2
n
Sn = [2a + (n 1)d]
2
10
Sn = [2 4 + (10 1)6]
2
S10 = 5[8 + 9 6]
= 5[8 + 54]
= 5 62
= 310
Write the answer.
The sum of the first 10 terms is 310.
Worked example 8
The first term of an arithmetic sequence is 5 and the seventh term is 29.
What is the sum of the first 10 terms of this sequence?
Think
1
Find the value of a and d.

The value of a is given.
To find the common difference, d, use the
formula tn = a + (n 1)d, as we know the value
of the 7th term is 29.
n
Use the formula Sn = [2a + (n 1)d].
2
Write your answer.
WriTe
a=5
tn = a + (n 1)d
t7 = 5 + 6 d
= 29
5 + 6d = 29
6d = 24
d=4
TUTorial
eles-1269
Worked example 8
10
[2 5 + (10 1)4]
2
= 5[10 + 9 4]
= 230
S10 =
If a = 5 and d = 4, the sum of the first ten terms

is 230.
Worked example 9
The 3rd term of an arithmetic sequence is 4 and the 8th is 11. What is the sum of the first
30 terms of the sequence?
Think
1
180
Find out the value of a and d by setting up

two simultaneous equations using
tn = a + (n 1)d.
Eliminate a by subtracting equation 1 from
equation 2.
WriTe
t3 = a + 2d
=4
t8 = a + 7d
= 11
a + 2d = 4
a + 7d = 11
5d = 15
d = 3
Substitute d = 3 into equation [1].
a + 2d = 4
a + 2 3 = 4
a6=4
a = 10
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[2] [1]
n
Use the formula Sn = [2a + (n 1)d ].
2
To find the sum of the first 30 terms.
Write your answer.
30
[2 10 + (30 1)(3)]
2
= 15[20 + 29 3]
= 1005
S30 =
If a = 10 and d = 3, the sum of the first 30 terms

is 1005.
Worked example 10
The first term of a sequence is 7 and the sum of the first 25 terms is 1625. Find:
a the 25th term
b the first five terms of the sequence.
Think
a 1 We know a = 7 and S25 = 1625 and the
WriTe
25th term is the last term, l.

n
Use the formula Sn = (a + l ).
2
n
use Sn = [2a + (n 1)d ] or tn = a + (n 1)d
2
having found that the 25th term is 137.
We know that a = 7 and d = +6, so generate

the first five terms of the sequence.
= 1625
12.5(7 + l ) = 1625
7
+ l = 1625
+ l = 130
l = 137
12.5
l = t25
= 137
Write your answer.
b 1 To find the common difference, d, we can
S25 = 25 (7 + l )
S25 = 25
[14 + (25 1)d ]
2
= 1625
12.5 [14 + 24d ] = 1625
14 + 24d = 130
24d = 144
d = +6
or tn = a + (n 1)d
t25 = 137
137 = 7 + (25 1)d
144 = 24d
d = +6
The sequence is 7, 1, 5, 11, 17, . . .

of an arithmetic sequence
exercise 5C
1 We 7 For each of the given series, find:

a the sum of the first 20 terms of the sequence 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, . . .
b the sum of the first 34 terms of the sequence 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, . . .
c the sum of the first 23 terms of the sequence 4, 1, 2, 5, 8, . . .
d the sum of the first 29 terms of the sequence 10, 7, 4, 1, 2, . . .
The first term of an arithmetic sequence is 5 and the second is 9. Find the sum of the first
40 terms of the sequence.
2 We8
3 The first term of an arithmetic sequence is 0.7 and the second is 1. Find the sum of the first 25 terms of
the sequence.
181
4 We9 For each of the following, evaluate the sum of a series, Sn.
a The 3rd term of an arithmetic sequence is 19 and the 4th is 25. Find the sum of the first 15 terms
of the sequence.
b The 2nd term of an arithmetic sequence is 3.6 and the 5th is 10.8. Find the sum of the first
23terms of the sequence.
c The 3rd term of an arithmetic sequence is 0.5 and the 6th is 4. Find the sum of the first 26 terms
of the sequence.
d The 2nd term of an arithmetic sequence is 0.75 and the 5th is 2.25. Find the sum of the first
27terms of the sequence.

5 We 10 The first term of an arithmetic sequence is 2 and the sum of the first 19 terms of the sequence
is 551. Find:
a the 19th term
b the first 3 terms of the sequence.
6 The first term of an arithmetic sequence is 4 and the sum of the first 30 terms of the sequence is 2490.
Find:
a the 30th term
1
1
7 mC The sum of the first 21 terms of the sequence, 0, 3 , 7, 10 , 14, . . . is:
2
2
d 36.75
e 735
a 1470
B 735
C 700
8 mC The first term of an arithmetic sequence is 5.2 and the second is 6. The sum of the first 22 terms
of the sequence is:

a 598.4
B 299.2
C 242
d 70.4
9 What is the sum of the first 19 terms of the sequence 180, 80, 20, 120, 220, . . . ?
10 What is the sum of the first 28 terms of the sequence
1 1
, ,
2 2
e 70.4
112, 212, . . . ?
11 The 2nd term of an arithmetic sequence is 28.2 and the 6th is 84.6. Find the sum of the first 40 terms of
the sequence.
12 The 1st term of an arithmetic sequence is 5.5 and the sum of the first 18 terms of this sequence is 328.5.
Find:
a the 18th term
13 The 1st term of an arithmetic sequence is 11 and the sum of the first 20 terms of this sequence is 350.
Find:
a t20
14 Sam makes $100 profit in his first week of business. If his profit increases by $75 each week, what
would his total profit be by the end of week 15?
15 Georges salary is to start at $36 000 a year and increase by $1200 each year after that. How much will
George have earned in total after 10 years?

16 A staircase is designed so that the height of each step increases by 0.8cm for each step. If the height of
the first step is 15cm, what is the total height of the first 17 steps?
17 Paula collects stamps. She bought 250 in the first
month to start her collection and added

15 stamps to the collection each month
thereafter. How many stamps will she have
collected after 5 years?
18 Proceeds from the church fete were $3000 in
diGiTal doC
doc-9436
WorkSHEET 5.1
1981. In 1982 the proceeds were $3400 and in

1983 they were $3800. If they continued in this
pattern:
a what would be the proceeds from the year
2000 fete?
b how much in total would the proceeds from
church fetes from 1981 to 2000 have amounted to?
19 Fees for groups meeting at the community centre rise by $5 each year. If the fees started at $60 a year
in the first year:

a how much will the fees be in the 20th year?
b how much would a group which had met at the centre for all of those 20 years have paid in total?
182
5d
recognition of geometric sequences
A sequence in mathematics is an ordered set of numbers. A geometric sequence is one in which the
first term is multiplied by a number, known as the common ratio, to create the second term which
is multiplied by the common ratio to create the third term, and so on. The first term in a geometric
sequence is referred to as a and the common ratio is referred to as r.
Consider the geometric sequence where a = 1 and r = 3. The terms in the sequence are:
3
1
3
3
3
9
3
27
81...
To discover the common ratio, r, of a geometric sequence you need to calculate the ratio of any
t
t
t
two successive terms, for example, 2 . You could alternatively calculate 3 or 4 and so on.
t1
t2 t3
A geometric sequence is a sequence of numbers for which the ratio of successive terms is the same.
t2 t3 t4
= = = . . . = common ratio
t1 t2 t3
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with geometric
sequences.
The first term of a geometric sequence is referred to as a.

The common ratio between a term and its preceding term is referred to as r.
Worked example 11
Which of the following are geometric sequences? For those that are geometric, state the values
of a and r.
a 2, 10, 50, 250, 1250, . . .
b 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, . . .
3 3 3
c 2, 6, 18, 54, 162, . . .
d 6, 3, , , , . . .
2 4 8
Think
WriTe
a 2, 10, 50, 250, 1250, . . .
t
Calculate the ratio of 2 .
t1
t2 10
=
t1 2
=5
t
t2
t3 50
=
t2 10
=5
t
t3
t4 250
=
t3 50
=5
t
t4
t5 1250
=
t4 250
=5
Check that all ratios are the same.
There is a common ratio of 5.

This is a geometric sequence
where a = 2 and r = 5.
b 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, . . .
t
t1
t2 8
=
t1 4
= 2
t
t2
t3 16
=
t2 8
= 2
183
t
t3
t4 32
=
t3 16
= 2
t
t4
t5 64
=
t4 32
= 2

This is a geometric sequence where a = 4
and r = 2.
c 1 Write the sequence.
c 2, 6, 18, 54, 162, . . .
t
t1
t2 6
=
t1 2
= +3
t
t2
t3 18
=
t2 6
= 3
There is no need to do any further check as

the two ratios are not the same.
There is no common ratio.

This is not a geometric sequence.
d 1 Write the sequence.

2
t
Calculate 2 .
t1
t
Calculate 3 .
t2
t
Calculate 4 .
t3
t
Calculate 5 .
t3
3 3 3
2 4 8
d 6, 3, , , , . . .
t2 3
=
t1 6
1
=
2
t3 3
= 3
t2 6
3 1
=
2 3
1
=
2
t4 3 3
=
t3 4 2
3 2
=
4 3
2
=
4
1
=
2
t5 3 3
=
t4 8 4
3 4
=
8 3
1
=
2
2
This is a geometric sequence where a = 6

and r = 12.
184
recognition of geometric sequences
exercise 5d
1 We 11 State which of the following are geometric sequences.

a 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, . . .
b 2, 6, 18, 54, 162, . . .
c 1, 4, 16, 64, 256, . . .
d 2, 6, 12, 24, 48, . . .
e 1, 5, 25, 100, 125, . . .
f 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, . . .
g 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, . . .
h 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, . . .
2 Look again at the geometric sequences found in question 1. Write the values of a and r.
3 State which of the following sequences are geometric sequences.
a 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, . . .
b 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, . . .
c 0, 3, 9, 27, 81, . . .
d 2, 6, 18, 54, 162, . . .
e 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, . . .

f 9, 3, 1, 3, 9, . . .
g 1, 5, 25, 125, 625, . . .

h 5, 20, 80, 320, 1280, . . .
4 For those geometric sequences found in question 3, write the value of a and r.
a 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, . . .
b 1, 3, 9, 27, 81, . . .
c 4, 12, 36, 108, 324, . . .

d 7, 7, 7, 7, 7, . . .
e 3, 6, 18, 54, 112, . . .
f 2, 8, 12, 24, 48, . . .
a 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, . . .
b 1, 5, 10, 20, 40, . . .
c 3, 15, 75, 375, 1875, . . .

d 10, 1, 0, 1, 10, . . .
e 0, 4, 16, 64, 256, . . .

f 6, 60, 600, 6000, 60 000, . . .
a 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, . . .
b 2.3, 6.9, 13.8, 27.6, 55.2, . . .
c 2.25, 4.5, 9, 18, 36, . . .
d 7, 3.5, 1.75, 0.875, 0.4375, . . .
e 10, 12, 14.4, 17.28, 20.736, . . .
f 1.2, 3.6, 10.8, 21.6, 43.2, . . .
a
1 1 1 1 1
, , , , ,
2 4 8 16 32
1 2
, ,
3 3
...
113, 223, 513, . . .
1 1 1 1 1
, , , , ,
2 6 12 18 24
1 1 1 1 1
, , , , ,
5 10 15 20 25
...
...
c
f
1 1
, , 1, 1, 1 ,
4 20 100 500 2500
1 1
1
1, 3 , 9 , 121, 81 , . . .
...
13 mC Which of the following is a geometric sequence?
a 1, 3, 6, 9, 12, . . .
C 9, 9, 3, 3, 1, . . .
e
1 1 1 1 1 1
, , , , , ,
8 7 6 6 5 4
B 0.002, 0.02, 0.2, 20, 200, . . .

d 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, . . .
...
14 mC There is a geometric sequence for which a is positive and r = 2. It is true to say that:
a
B
C
d
e
only one term of the sequence is a positive number

the third term will be a negative number
the third term will be less than the second term
the 5th term would be greater than the 6th term
the 4th term would be greater than the third term
15 mC There is a geometric sequence for which every term is negative. It could be said with certainty that:
a a and r are both positive
C a is positive and r is negative
e a is greater than r
B a and r are both negative

d a is negative and r is positive
16 mC There is a geometric sequence for which every odd-numbered term is positive and every
even-numbered term is negative. It could be said with certainty that:

a a and r are both positive
B a and r are both negative
C a is positive and r is negative
d a is negative and r is positive
e a is greater than r
185
17 A savings account balance at the end of each of the past four years is given as follows: $100.00,
$110.00, $121.00, $133.10.

a Prove this is a geometric sequence.
b State the value of a and r.
18 On the first day Jenny hears a rumour. On the second day, she tells two friends. On the third day, each
of these two friends tell two of their own friends, and so on.
a Write the geometric sequence for the first five days of this real-life situation.
b Find the value of r.
c How many people are told of the rumour on the 12th day?
19 Decay of radioactive material is modelled as a geometric
sequence where r = 1. If there are 20 million radioactive atoms,

2
write the first 7 terms of the sequence.
20 Copy and complete the following.
a In a sequence that grows and where each term is
positive, the r value is
than 1.
b In a sequence that decays and where each term is
positive, the r value is between
and
.
c In a sequence like 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, . . . , the r value is
1.
d In a sequence like 2, 6, 18, 54, . . ., the r value is less
than
.
e In a sequence like 54, 18, 6, 2, 1, . . ., the r value is
between
and
.
Finding the terms of a

geometric sequence
5e
Consider the finite geometric sequence of seven terms for which a = 3 and r = 4.
4
3
Now, t1 = 3
t2 = 3 4
t3 = 3 4 4
t4 = 3 4 4 4
t5 = 3 4 4 4 4
186
4
12
4
48
t1 = a
t2 = a r
t3 = a r r
t4 = a r r r
t5 = a r r r r
4
192
384
t2 = a r1
t3 = a r 2
t4 = a r 3
t5 = a r 4
and os on. . .
We notice a pattern emerging. That pattern can be described by the equation:

tn = 3 4n 1.
For example, if n = 5,
t5 = 3 44.
We can generalise this rule for all geometric sequences.
where
tn is the nth term

a is the first term
r is the common ratio.
tn = ar n 1
This rule enables us to find any term of a geometric sequence provided we know the value of a and r.
Worked example 12
Find the 12th term of the geometric sequence:

2, 10, 50, 250, 1250, . . .
Think
WriTe
State the value of a.
a=2
It has been stated that it is a geometric

sequence, so find the value of r.
r = 10
Use the rule tn = a r n 1 to find the 12th term.
t12 = 2 512 1
= 97 656 250
Write the answer.
The value of the 12th term is 97 656 250.
=5
Worked example 13
The 2nd term of a geometric sequence is 8 and the 5th is 512. Find the 10th term of this sequence.
Think
WriTe
We know that t2 = 8 and that tn = a r n 1.
t2 = a r1
=8
We know that t5 = 512 and that tn = a r n 1.
t5 = a r4
= 512
Solve the 2 equations simultaneously by

eliminating a, to find r.
Divide equation 2 by equation 1.
a r1 = 8
a r4 = 512
a r4 512
=
ar
8
3
r = 64
r=4
To find a, substitute the value of r.
Substitute r = 4 into equation [1].

a4=8
a=2
Write the rule.
To find the 10th term, let n = 10.
Write your answer.
[1]
[2]
[2] [1]
tn = 2 4n 1
t10 = 2 49
= 524 288
The 10th term in the sequence is 524 288.
187
Worked example 14
The first three terms of a geometric sequence are 2, 6 and 18.

Which numbered term would be the first to exceed 1 000 000 in this sequence?
Think
1
WriTe
TUTorial
eles-1270
Worked example 14
a=2
t
r= 2
t1
= 62
To find the rule for the sequence, find a and

r and substitute them into tn = a r n 1.
=3
tn = 2 3n 1
2 3n 1 = 1 000 000
3n 1 = 500 000
Set up the equation to be solved.
Take logarithms to the base 10 of both sides

and solve for n.
log10 (3n 1) = log10 (500 000)

(n 1) log10 (3) = log10 (500 000)
log10(500 000)
(n 1) =
log10(3)
n 1 = 11.9445
n = 12.9445
The next whole number term is the 13th.
The 13th term would be the first to exceed

1 000 000.
Worked example 15
A real estate agent records the number of blocks

of land to be sold on a new estate each week.
If the number of blocks of land sold continue to
follow a geometric sequence:
a prove it is a geometric sequence and thus write
the value of the common ratio, r
b write a rule for the number of blocks of land,
tn, sold in week number n
c calculate the number of blocks of land sold in
week number 8.
Week number
Number of blocks of land sold
128
64
32
Think
a The first term, a, is 128. To find r, evaluate the
ratios.
188
WriTe
t2 64
t3 32
=
=
t1 128
t2 64
1
1
=
=
2
2
The ratios are the same, so the terms follow a
geometric sequence. The ratio, r = 12 .
n 1
b Use tn = ar n 1 to write the rule.
b tn = 128 1
c 1 Use the formula in part b to find the numbers
c t8 = 128 1 = 1
of blocks of land sold in week 8 (i.e. n = 8).
Write your answer.
2
7
The number of blocks of land sold in the

8th week will be 1.

geometric sequence
exercise 5e
1 We 12 Find the value of the term specified for the given geometric sequences.
a Find the 10th term of the geometric sequence 2, 12, 72, 432, 2592, . . .
b Find the 11th term of the geometric sequence 5, 35, 245, 1715, 12 005, . . .
c Find the 18th term of the geometric sequence 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, . . .
d Find the 8th term of the geometric sequence 11, 22, 44, 88, 176, . . .
e Find the 11th term of the geometric sequence 5, 15, 45, 135, 405, . . .
f Find the 15th term of the geometric sequence 2, 8, 32, 128, 512, . . .
2 Find the value of the term specified for the given geometric sequences in decimal form.
a Find the 20th term of the geometric sequence 1.1, 2.2, 4.4, 8.8, 17.6, . . .
b Find the 10th term of the geometric sequence 2.3, 2.76, 3.312, 3.9744, . . .
c Find the 8th term of the geometric sequence 3.1, 8.06, 20.956, 54.4856, 141.662 56, . . .
3 Find the value of the term specified for the given geometric sequences in negative form.
a Find the 9th term of the geometric sequence 2, 8, 32, 128, 512, . . .
b Find the 12th term of the geometric sequence 6, 18, 54, 162, 486, . . .
4 We 13 Find the value of the term specified for the specified geometric sequences.
a The 2nd term of a geometric sequence is 6 and the 5th term is 162. Find the 10th term.
b The 2nd term of a geometric sequence is 6 and the 5th term is 48. Find the 12th term.
c The 4th term of a geometric sequence is 32 and the 7th term is 256. Find the 14th term.
5 We 14 Evaluate the following.
a The first three terms of a geometric sequence are 5, 12.5 and 31.25. Which term would be the first
to exceed 50 000?
diGiTal doC
doc-9437
SkillSHEET 5.3
Solving non-linear
simultaneous
equations
b The first three terms of a geometric sequence are 3.2, 9.6 and 28.8. Which term would be the first
to exceed 1 000 000?

c The first three terms of a geometric sequence are 5.1, 20.4 and 81.6. Which term would be the
first to exceed 100 000?

6 We 15 The number of cells of a micro-organism, after each process of cell division, can be
summarised as follows.
1, 2, 4, 8, 16
If the number of cells after each division continue to follow a geometric sequence, find:
a a rule for the number of cells after n divisions
b the number of cells after 12 divisions.
diGiTal doC
doc-9438
SkillSHEET 5.4
Solving indicial
equations
189
7 A small town is renowned for spreading rumours. All of its citizens are aware in a short time of any
new rumours. The spread of the rumour can be summarised in the table below.
If the number of citizens who have been told the rumour each day continues to follow a geometric
sequence, find:
Day number
Number of citizens in the know
36
a a rule for the number of citizens on day n

b the number of citizens told of the rumour by day 5
c on which day all 4230 citizens will know of the rumour.
8 Find the 9th term of the geometric sequence 6, 9, 13.5, 20.25, 30.375, . . .
9 Find the 8th term of the geometric sequence 6.2, 9.3, 13.95, 20.925, 31.3875, . . .
1
4
1
,
3
1 1 1 1
, , , ...
8 16 32 64
2 1 2 1
, 1 , 2 , 5 , ...
3 3 3 3
10 Find the 10th term of the geometric sequence , ,

11 Find the 11th term of the geometric sequence
12 The 4th term of a geometric sequence is 81 and the 7th term is 2187. Find the 12th term.
13 The 4th term of a geometric sequence is 0.875 and the 7th term is 0.109 375. Find the
10th term.
14 The 3rd term of a geometric sequence is 1 and the 6th term is
8
.
27
Find the 9th term.
15 The takings at a new cinema each month are recorded. If the takings each month continue to follow a
geometric sequence, find:

a a rule for the takings in month n
b the takings in month 9.
Month number
Takings
$10 000
$ 8 500
$ 7 225
16 A tomato grower has recorded the average height of his tomato
bushes. If the height of the tomato bushes each year continues to

follow a geometric sequence, find:
a a rule for the height of the bushes in year n
b the height of the tomato bushes in year 5 (correct to
2 decimal places)
c the year in which the height of the tomato bushes will
exceed 2m.
Year
Height (m)
1.2
1.26
1.323
17 mC The 12th term of the geometric sequence 21, 63, 189, 567, . . . is:
a 6804
d 3 720 087
B 413 343
e 5 931 980 229
C 1 240 029
18 mC The 10th term of the geometric sequence 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, . . . is:
a 2560
d 5120
190
B 1280
e 3 906 250
C 1280
19 MC The 3rd term of a geometric sequence is 75 and the 6th term is 9375. The 9th term is:
A 5859375
D 32805
b 1171875
E 234375
C 32805
20 MC The first three terms of a geometric sequence are 5.5, 7.7 and 10.78. The first term to exceed 100
would be the:
A 8th
D 11th
b 9th
E 12th
C 10th

of a geometric sequence
5F
When the terms of a geometric sequence are added, a geometric series is formed. So 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, ...
is a geometric sequence, whereas 3 + 6 + 12 + 24 + 48 + ... is a geometric series.
The sum of n terms of a geometric sequence is given by Sn.
Consider the general geometric sequence a, ar, ar2, ar3, ... arn 1.
Now, Sn = a + ar + ar2 + ar3 + ... + arn 1
Also, multiplying each term by r, rSn = ar + ar2 + ar3 + ar4 + ... + arn
So, rSn Sn = a + arn since all the other terms cancel out.
So, Sn (r 1) = a(rn 1)
a(rn 1)

Sn =
r1
This formula is useful if r < 1 or r > 1, for example, if r is 2, 10, 3.3, 4, 1.2.
By calculating Sn rSn instead of rSn Sn, as we did earlier, we obtain an alternative form of the
formula. That is,
Sn rSn = a arn
Sn(1 r) = a(1 rn)
Sn =
a(1 rn)
1r
This formula is useful if r is in between 1 and 1 (shown as 1 < r < 1).

The sum of n terms, Sn, of a geometric sequence may be calculated using
Sn =
or
Sn =
a(rn 1)
if r < 1 or r > 1
r1
a(1 rn)
if 1 < r < 1.
1r
Worked Example 16
Find the sum of the first 9 terms of the sequence 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, ...
Think
1
Find the value of a.
Find the value of r by testing ratios of the

given terms.
Write
a = 0.25

t2 0.5
=

t1 0.25
t3 1
=
t2 0.5
= 2
=2
t4 2
=
t3 1
= 2
r=2
t5 4
=
t4 2
=2
Chapter 5 Arithmetic and geometric sequences 191
Since r > 1, use Sn =
a(r n 1)
.
r1
S9 =
0.25(29 1)
1
= 127.75
4
Write the answer.
The sum of the first 9 terms is 127.75.
Worked example 17
The 3rd term of a geometric sequence is 11.25 and the 6th term is 303.75.
Find the sum of the first 10 terms of the sequence correct to 1 decimal place.
Think
WriTe
TUTorial
eles-1271
Worked example 17
We need to find a and r. We know that

t3 = 11.25 and that tn = ar n 1.
t3 = ar 2
ar2 = 11.25
We know that t6 = 303.75 and that tn = ar n 1.
t6 = ar 5
ar5 = 303.75
Solve these equations simultaneously by

eliminating a to find r.
Equation [2] divided by equation [1]:

ar5 303.75
=
ar2 11.25
r3 = 27
r=3
Substitute r value into one of the equations

to find a, the first term.
Substituting r = 3 into equation [1]:

ar2 = 11.25
a 32 = 11.25
11.25
a=
9
= 1.25
Since r > 1, use Sn =
Write your answer.
1
2
a(r n 1)
.
r1
[1]
[2]
1.25(310 1)
2
= 36 905
S10 =
The sum of the first ten terms of the geometric

series is 36 905.
Worked example 18
How many terms of the geometric sequence 100, 95, 90.25, 85.7375, . . . are required for the sum
to be greater than 1000?
Think
192
WriTe
a = 100
Find a.
Find r.
Use Sn =
Investigate how many terms are required to

sum to 1000 or Sn = 1000.
r=
a(1 r n)
since r < 1.
1r
Sn =
95
= 0.95
100
100(1 0.95n)
0.05
100(1 0.95n)
0.05
= 2000(1 0.95n)
0.5 = 1 0.95n
0.95n = 0.5
100 =
Express 0.95 and 0.5 in terms of logarithms

with a base of 10. Of course, other bases
could be used. 131 terms are required to
2
sum to 1000, so we require 14 to exceed 1000,
as the number of terms is discrete.
log10 (0.95n) = log10 (0.5)

n log10 (0.95) = log10 (0.5)
n=
log10(0.5)
log10(0.95)
= 13.513
So, we require that n = 14.
The sum of a given number of terms of

a geometric sequence
exercise 5F
1 a We 16 Find the sum of the first 12 terms of the geometric sequence 2, 6, 18, 54, 162, . . .
b Find the sum of the first 7 terms of the geometric sequence 5, 35, 245, 1715, 12 005, . . .
c Find the sum of the first 11 terms of the geometric sequence 3.1, 9.3, 27.9, 83.7, 251.1, . . .
d Find the sum of the first 12 terms of the geometric sequence 0.1, 0.4, 1.6, 6.4, 25.6, . . .
We 17 The 2nd term of a geometric sequence is 10 and the 5th is 80. Find the sum of the first
b The 2nd term of a geometric sequence is 15 and the 5th is 405. Find the sum of the first 11 terms
of the sequence.
c The 2nd term of a geometric sequence is 12 and the 5th is 768. Find the sum of the first 9 terms
of the sequence.
d The 3rd term of a geometric sequence is 500 and the 6th is 500 000. Find the sum of the first
2 a
We 18 How many terms of the geometric sequence 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, . . . are required for the sum to
be greater than 3000?
b How many terms of the geometric sequence 5, 20, 80, 320, 1280, . . . are required for the sum to
be greater than 100 000?
c How many terms of the geometric sequence 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, . . . are required for the sum to
be greater than 10 000?
d How many terms of the geometric sequence 120, 96, 76.8, 61.44, 49.152, . . . are required for the
sum to be greater than 540?
3 a
4 mC The sum of the first 10 terms of the geometric sequence 2.25, 4.5, 9, 18, 36, . . . is closest to:
a 1149.75
C 5318.81
e 8342.65
B 2301.75
d 6648.51
5 mC The 2nd term of a geometric sequence is 20 and the 5th is 1280. The sum of the first 12 terms
of the sequence is:

a 27 962 025
C 15 360
e 16 777 215
B 1 062 880
d 1 062 880
6 Find the sum of the first 13 terms of the geometric sequence 80, 72, 64.8, 58.32, 52.488, . . .
7 Find the sum of the first 8 terms of the geometric sequence 250, 150, 90, 54, 32.4,. . .
8 Find, correct to 1 decimal place, the sum of the first 12 terms of the geometric sequence
192,
48, 12, 3, 0.75,. . .
9 The 3rd term of a geometric sequence is 2 and the 6th is 0.016. Find, correct to 1 decimal place, the
sum of the first 13 terms of the sequence.

10 The 3rd term of a geometric sequence is 90 and the 6th is 0.09. Find, correct to 1 decimal place, the
sum of the first 14 terms of the sequence.
diGiTal doC
doc-9439
WorkSHEET 5.2
11 How many terms of the geometric sequence 600, 180, 54, 16.2, 4.86, . . . are required for the sum to be
greater than 855?
193
5G
applications of geometric sequences
Growth and decay of discrete variables is constantly found in real-life situations. Some examples are
increasing or decreasing populations and increase or decrease in financial investments. Some of these
geometric models are presented here.
Worked example 19
A city produced 100 tonnes of rubbish in the year 2004. Forecasts suggest
that this may increase by 2% each year. If these forecasts are true:
TUTorial
a what will be the citys rubbish output in 2008?
eles-1332
Worked example 19
b in which year will the amount of rubbish reach 120 tonnes?
c what was the total amount of rubbish produced by the city in the years 2004, 2005 and 2006?
This is an example of a geometric sequence where a = 100 and r = 1.02. Note that r 0.02. If
this was the case, then multiplying 100 by 0.02 would result in a lesser amount of rubbish in
the second year and so on. We are told that the amount of rubbish increases by 2%. That is the
original amount plus an extra 2%, or:
original amount + 2% of original amount
= original amount (1 + 2%)
= original amount (1 + 0.02)
= 1.02 original amount.
Think
WriTe
a 1 Find the first term, a.
a a = 100
Determine the common ratio, r by expressing

the new percentage as a decimal.
Increase by 2%: 100% + 2%

= 102%
r = 1.02
Determine which term is represented by the

amount of rubbish for the year 2008.
Year 2004 is the first term, so n = 1.

Year 2005 is the second term, so n = 2.
Year 2008 is the fifth term, so n = 5.
Use tn = ar n 1 to find the amount of rubbish

collected in the fifth year.
t5 = 100 1.025 1
= 100 1.0824
= 108.24
Write your response.
The amount of rubbish produced in the

fifth year, or 2008, will be 108.24 tonnes.
b 1 Use tn = ar n 1 and tn = 120.

2
Express 1.02 and 1.2 in terms of logarithms

with base 10.
100(1.02)n 1 = 120
(1.02)n 1 = 1.2
log10 (1.02)n 1 = log10 (1.2)
(n 1) log10 (1.02) = log10 (1.2)
n1=
log10(1.2)
log10(1.02)
n 1 = 9.207
n = 10.207
3
Write your answer.
c 1 We need to find the sum of the first 3 terms.
Use Sn =
2
194
a(r n 1)
where n = 3.
r1
Write your answer.
During the 11th year (that is, during 2014) the

amount of rubbish produced will have exceeded
120 tonnes.
100(1.023 1)
1.02 1
= 306.04
c S3 =
The total output of rubbish for the years 2004,

2005 and 2006 was 306.04 tonnes.
Worked example 20
A computer decreases in value each year by 15% of the previous years value. Find an
expression for the value of the computer, Vn, after n years. Its initial purchase price is given
as V1 = $12 000.
Think
WriTe
This is a geometric sequence since there is a

15% decrease on the previous years value.
Find a and r.
a = 12 000
Decrease by 15%: 100% 15%
= 85%
r = 0.85
We want an expression for the value after n

years. Use tn = ar n 1 which gives the value
of the nth term. (Replace tn with
Vn as required).
Vn = 12 000 (0.85)n 1
Write your answer.
The value of the computer is given by the

expression, Vn = 12 000(0.85)n 1.
Compound interest
Consider the case where a bank pays compound interest of 5% per annum on an amount of $20 000. The
amount is invested for 4 years and interest is calculated yearly.
Compound interest is named so because the interest which is earned is paid back into the account so
that the next time interest is calculated, it is calculated on an increased (i.e. compounded) amount. There
is a compounding effect on the money in the account.
If we calculated the amount in the account each year, we would have the following amounts.
Start
After 1 year
After 2 years
After 3 years
After 4 years
$20 000
$20 000 1.05 = $21 000
$20 000 1.05 1.05 = $22 050
$20 000 1.05 1.05 1.05 = $23 152.50
$20 000 1.05 1.05 1.05 1.05 = $24 310.13
The amounts 20 000, 21 000, 22 050, 23 152.50, 24 310.13, . . . form a geometric sequence where
a = 20 000 and r = 1.05.
We need to be a little careful, however, in using the formula tn = ar n 1 in calculating compound
interest. This is because the original amount in the account, that is, $20 000, in terms of the geometric
sequence would be referred to as t1 or a. In banking terms, t1 would represent the amount in the account
after the first lot of interest has been calculated and added in.
To be clear and to avoid errors, it is best to use the following formula for compound interest.
A = PR n
where
r
100
A = amount in the account, $
P = principal, $
r = interest rate per compounding period (e.g. per year, per quarter), %
n = the number of compounding periods during the investment.
R=1+
Note: Students who are studying Module 4: Business related mathematics will use this formula for
compound interest.
Worked example 21
Helen inherits $60 000 and invests it for 3 years in an account which pays compound interest of
8% per annum compounding each 6 months.
a What will be the amount in Helens account at the end of 3 years?
b How much will Helen receive in interest over the 3-year period?
195
Think
a 1 This is an example of compound interest.
r
.
100
Interest is calculated each 6 months, so over
3 years, there are 6 compounding periods:
n = 6.
Interest is 8% per year or 4% per 6 months.
So, r = 4%.
a P = 60 000
Use A = PRn, where R = 1 +
n = 6 half-years
r = 4% per half-year
4
So,
R=1+
100
= 1.04
A = PRn
= 60 000(1.04)6
= 75 919.14
Write your answer.
At the end of 3 years, Helen will have a

total amount of $75 919.14.
b 1 Interest equals the amount in the account at
the end of 3 years, less the amount in the

account at the start of the investment.
2
WriTe
Write your answer.
b Interest = Total amount Principal
= $75 919.14 $60 000

= $15 919.14
Amount of interest earned over 3 years is

$15 919.14.
Worked example 22
Jim invests $16 000 in a bank account which earns compound interest at the rate of 12% per
annum compounding every quarter.
At the end of the investment, there is $25 616.52 in the account.
For how many years did Jim have his money invested?
Think
WriTe
We know the value of A, P, r and R.

We need to find n using the compound interest
formula.
Note: There are 4 quarters per annum.
A = 25 616.52
P = 16 000
r = 12
4
= 3% per quarter
3
and so R = 1 + 100
= 1.03
Now substitute into A = PRn.
A = PRn
25 616.52 = 16 000(1.03)n
1.601 = 1.03n
Take logarithms with base 10 of both sides of

the equation and solve for n.
log10 (1.601) = log10 (1.03n)

So, log10 (1.601) = n log10 (1.03)
n=
=
196
Round up the number of periods to 16 to

ensure the amount is reached.
Write your answer.
log10(1.601)
log10(1.03)
0.2044
0.0128
n = 15.92
16
It will take 16 compounding periods where a
period is 3 months. So, it will take 48 months
or 4 years.
exercise 5G
1 We 19 A farmer harvests 4 tonnes of lucerne in his first year of production. In his business plan, he has
estimated an annual increase of 6% on his lucerne harvest.

a According to this plan, how many tonnes of lucerne should he harvest in his 7th year of
production?
b In which year will his harvest reach 10 tonnes?
c How much will he expect to harvest in the first three years?
d How much in total will he harvest from the 7th year to the 10th year?
A taxi driver estimates that the cost of keeping her taxi on the
road increases by 4.5% each year. If the cost of keeping her taxi
on the road in her first year of owning a taxi was $1800:
a what was the cost in the 5th year?
b during which year did costs exceed $2500?
c what were the total costs of keeping her taxi on the road in
the first 3 years?
We20 The population of a town is decreasing by 10% each
year. Find an expression for the population of the town, which
will be referred to as Pn. The population in the first year, P1, was
10 000.
We21 $13 000 is invested in an account which earns compound
interest at 8% p.a. compounded quarterly (i.e. calculated four
times each year).
a After 5 years, how much is in the account?
b How much interest was earned in that period?
The population of the newly established town of Alansford in its first year was 6000. It is predicted that the
towns population will increase by 10% each year. If this were to be the case, find:
a the population of the town in its 10th year
b in which year the population of Alansford would reach 25 000.
The promoters of Fleago flea powder assert that continued application of the powder will reduce the
number of fleas on a dog by 15% each week. At the end of week 1, Fido the dog has 200 fleas left on
him and his owner continues to apply the powder.
a How many fleas would Fido be expected to have on him at the end of the 4th week?
b How many weeks would Fido have to wait before the number of fleas on him had dropped to less
than 50?
Young saplings should increase in height by 9% each year
under optimum conditions. If a batch of saplings which have
been planted out measure 2.2 metres in their first year:
a how high should they be in their 4th year?
b in which year should they exceed 5 metres in height?
mC A colony of ants is studied and the population of the
colony in week 1 of the study is 800. If the population of the
colony is expected to increase at the rate of 2% each week,
then the week in which the number of ants would exceed
1000 would be closest to:
a 6
B 10
C 13
d 26
e 32
A company exported $300 000 worth of manufactured goods
in its first year of production. According to the business
plan of the company, this amount should increase each year
by 7.5%.
a How much would the company be expected to export in its
5th year?
b In which year would exports exceed $500 000?
c What is the total amount exported by the company in its first
7 years of operation?
diGiTal doCS
doc-9440
SkillSHEET 5.5
relating the common
ratio of a geometric
sequence to percentage
increase or decrease
doc-9441
Spreadsheet
Sequences and series
197
10 $10 000 is invested in an account which earns compound interest at 10% per annum. Find the amount
in the account after 5 years if the interest is compounded:

a yearly
b every 6 months
c quarterly
d monthly.
11 $20 000 is invested in an account earning compound interest of 10% per annum compounding quarterly.
What is the amount in the account after:

a 1 year?
b 3 years?
c 5 years?
d 10 years?
12 We22 In an account earning compound interest of 8% per annum compounding quarterly, an amount
of $6000 is invested. When the account is closed, there is $7609.45 in the account. For how many years
was the account open?
13 Sue earns 12% interest per annum compounding quarterly on her investment of $40 000. For how many
years would this investment need to operate for the amount to rise to $50 670.80?
14 An amount of $14 500 is invested in an account attracting compound interest of 6% per annum
compounding quarterly. After a certain time the interest earned in the account is $1834.14. Find out for
how long the amount had been invested.
Finding the sum of an infinite

geometric sequence
5h
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
If you are 2 metres away from a wall and you move 1 metre (or halfway) towards the wall and then
move 1 metre (or halfway again) towards the wall and continue to do this, will you reach the wall? When
2
will you reach the wall?
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
1
2
1m
2m
1
4
1
8
1m
Consider the following geometric sequence:

1 1 1 1
, , , , . . . This is an infinite geometric sequence since it continues on with an infinite number of terms.
2 4 8 16
1,
Each term in the sequence is half the size of the previous term, that is, r=0.5.
If we were to add n terms of this sequence together, we would have:
1 (1 0.5 n)
1 0.5
1 0.5 n
=
0.5
1 0.5 n
=
0.5 0.5
= 2 0.5n 1
Sn =
Consider 0.5n 1 in the equation above. As n becomes very large, the term 0.5n 1 becomes very small.
Try this with your calculator.
Let n = 5, 0.5n 1 = 0.54 = 0.0625; therefore, S5 = 2 0.0625 = 1.9375
Let n = 10, 0.5n 1 = 0.59 = 0.001 95; therefore, S10 = 2 0.001 95 = 1.998 05
Let n = 20, 0.5n 1 = 0.519 = 0.000 001 9; therefore, S20 = 2 0.000 001 9 = 1.999 998 1
We can see that as n becomes larger, 0.5n 1 becomes smaller. If n were to approach infinity (note that
you can never reach infinity, you can only approach it), then the value of 0.5n 1 would approach zero.
So, Sn = 2 0.5n 1 would become S = 2.
It is possible to generalise this in order to find the sum of an infinite geometric sequence. We use the
symbol S which is referred to as the sum to infinity of a geometric sequence.
The sum to infinity of a geometric sequence for which 1 < r < 1 is given by:
a
S =
.
1r
198
Worked example 23
Find the sum to infinity of the geometric sequence 2, 0.4, 0.08, 0.016, 0.0032, . . .
Think
WriTe
a=2
t
r= 2
t1
0.4
=
2
= 0.2
Find a and r.
As r = 0.2 satisfies the condition a

1 < r < 1, use the formula S =
.
1r
a
1r
2
=
1 0.2
2
=
S =
0.8
= 2.5
3
Write your answer.
The sum to infinity of the given sequence is 2.5.
Worked example 24
The sum to infinity of a geometric sequence is 15 and the value of a is 10. Write the first 4 terms
of the sequence.
Think
1
WriTe
a
to find the value
1r
of r. Transpose the equation to make r the
Use the formula S =

subject.
a
1r
10
15 =
1r
S =
1 r = 10
15
r = 1 23
r = 13
2
a = 10 and r = 13. Use these to generate the

terms in the sequence.
The first 4 terms of the sequence are

, 10, 10 or 10, 313, 119, 10
.
10, 10
3 9 27
27
Worked example 25
The sum to infinity of the geometric sequence is 6.25 and the value of r is 0.2. Write the first
Think
WriTe
a
to find the value of a.
1r
Use the formula S =
a = 5 and r = 0.2. Use these to generate the terms.
a
1r
a
625 =
1 0.2
6.25 0.8 = a
a=5
S =
The first 4 terms of the sequence are 5, 1, 0.2, 0.04.
199
Converting recurring decimals to fractions

We can use the sum to infinity formula to convert recurring decimals to fractions.
Worked example 26
Express 1. 2 as a fraction.
Think
WriTe
We need to express 1.2 as the sum of a

geometric sequence.
1.2 = 1.222 222 222 222 2 . . .

= 1 + 0.2 + 0.02 + 0.002 + 0.0002 + . . .
= 1 + (0.2 + 0.02 + 0.002 + 0.0002 + . . .)
The terms in the bracket form an infinite

geometric sequence where a = 0.2 and r = 0.1.
Use the formula.
a
.
S =
1r
Multiply both the numerator and the

0.2
denominator of
by 10 to eliminate the
0.9
decimal.
a = 0.2
0.02
r=
0.2
= 0.1
a
S =
1r
.
0.2
0.2 =
1 0.1
0.2
=
0.9
2
=
9
State the final answer.
So, 1.2 = 1 + 29
= 12
9
Worked example 27
Express 0.645 . . . as a fraction.

Think
1
We need to express 0.645 as the sum of a

geometric sequence.
The terms in the bracket form an infinite

geometric sequence where a = 0.045 and
r = 0.01.
a
to express 0.045
Use the formula S =
1r
as a fraction first.
Multiply both the numerator and the

0.045
denominator of
by 1000 to eliminate
0.99
the decimal and simplify.
200
WriTe
0.645 = 0.645 454 5 . . .

= 0.6 + 0.045 + 0.000 45 + 0.000 004 5 + . . .
= 0.6 + (0.045 + 0.000 45 + 0.000 004 5 + . . .)
a = 0.045
0.000 45
r=
0.045
= 0.01
a
1r
0.045
0.045 =
1 0.01
0.045
=
0.99
S =
=
=
45
990
1
22
0.645 = 0.6 + 0.045.

Write both components as fractions and
simplify.
0.645 = 0.6 + 0.045

6
1
= +
=
10
66
110
22
5
110
71
So, 0.645 = 110
Write your answer.
Worked example 28
An injured rabbit attempts to crawl back to its burrow. It moves 30 metres in the first hour,
21 metres in the second hour and 14.7 metres in the third hour and so on. If the burrow is
200 metres away, will the rabbit make it back?
Think
1
WriTe
t1 = 30, t2 = 21 and t3 = 14.7

Now 21 = 0.7
Determine what sort of

sequence we have.
30
and 14.7 = 0.7

21
So, we have a geometric
sequence where a = 30, r = 0.7.
2
Find the value of S =
Write your answer.
30
1 0.7
= 100
a
.
1r
S =
The rabbit will cover a total of

100 metres. Since the rabbit hole
is 200 metres away, the rabbit
wont make it.
Finding the sum of an infinite

geometric sequence
exercise 5h
1 We23 Find the sum to infinity of the following geometric sequences.

a 50, 25, 12.5, 6.25, 3.125, . . .
b 20, 16, 12.8, 10.24, 9.192, . . .
1 1 1 1
, , ...
3 9 27 81
0.6, 0.12, 0.024,
c 1, , ,
e 3,
1 1
, 1 , 1 , ...
5 25 125 625
50, 5, 0.5, 0.5, 0.05,
d 1, ,
0.0048, . . .
...
2 We24 Write the first 3 terms of the geometric sequence for which:
a r = 0.6 and S = 25
c r = 0.9 and S = 120
b r = 0.25 and S = 8
e r = 0.8 and S = 5
d r = 0.2 and S = 3
1
3
r = 0.2 and S = 7.5.
3 We25 Write the first 3 terms of the geometric sequence for which:
a a = 12.5 and S = 25
b a = 12.5 and S = 50
c a = 48 and S = 120
d a = 2 and S = 3 .
4
9
2
3
4 We26, 27 Express each of the following recurring decimals as fractions.

a 0.5
e 8.666 666 666 . . .
.
..
b 0.4
c 1.3
d 3.7
g 0.529
h 1.321.
0.14
5 We28 A defiant child walks 10 metres towards his mother in the first minute, 4 metres in the second
minute and 1.6 metres in the third minute. If the child continues to approach in this same pattern, and
if his mother is standing stationary, 20 metres from the childs initial position, will the child ever reach
the mother?
201
6 A failing machine produces 35 metres of spouting in the first hour, 21 metres in the second hour and
12.6 in the third hour. If this pattern continues and 280 metres of spouting is required, how far short of
the quota will the machine fall?
7 A nail penetrates 20 mm with the
first hit of a hammer, 12 mm with the
2nd hit and 7.2mm with the 3rd. If
this pattern continues, will the 50 mm
long nail ever be completely
hammeredin?
8 A woman establishes a committee to raise money for a hospital. It raises $40 000 in the first year,
$36 800 in the 2nd year and $33 856 in the third year. If the fundraising continues in this pattern, how
far short will they fall in raising $1 000 000?
9 A will of a recently deceased woman specifies how her money is to be donated to a charity. Her total
wealth of $12.5 million is to be donated for eternity with the first donation of $1 million in the first year.
a What fraction of this first donation should be donated for the second year and subsequent years?
b Write the value of the donations for each of the first 5 years.
c How much will be donated after 10 years?
Contrasting arithmetic and geometric

sequences through graphs
5i
inTeraCTiViTY
int-0186
Contrasting arithmetic
and geometric
sequences
When discrete variables are presented graphically some distinct features may be evident. This is
especially so for discrete variables that have an arithmetic or geometric pattern.
arithmetic patterns
Value of term tn
Value of term tn
Arithmetic patterns are distinguished by a straight line or a constant increase or decrease.
3 4
Term n
2 3 4
Term n
d is negative
d is positive
An increasing pattern or a positive common
difference gives an upward straight line.
A decreasing pattern or a negative common

difference gives a downward straight line.
Geometric patterns
Value of term tn
Value of term tn
Geometric patterns are distinguished by a curved line or a saw form.
2 3 4
Term n
An increasing pattern or a positive common ratio

greater than 1 (r > 1) gives an upward curved line.
202
2 3 4
Term n
A decreasing pattern or a positive fractional common

ratio (0 < r < 1) gives a downward curved line.
Value of term tn
Value of term tn
Term n
An increasing saw pattern occurs when the

common ratio is a negative value less than
1 (r < 1).
Term n
A decreasing saw pattern occurs when the

common ratio is a negative proper fraction
(1 < r < 0).
On the graph at right, the first 5 terms of a sequence

are plotted. State whether the sequence could be arithmetic
or geometric and give the value of a and the value of either
d or r.
Value of term
Worked example 29
50
40
30
20
10
0
Think
2 3 4
Term number
WriTe
Examine the difference between the

value of each of the terms. In each
case, they are the same, that is, 10.
There is a constant difference between each

successive term so the straight line graph shows
an arithmetic sequence.
Find a.
t1 = 40, so a = 40.
Find d.
t2 = 30 and t1 = 40.
d = t2 t1 = 10.
Worked example 30
Calculate the total amount in an account if $10 000 is invested for 5 years and earns:
a simple interest of 10% per annum
b compound interest of 10% per annum compounding yearly.
c For each of the above cases, graph, on the same set of axes, the amount in the account over the
five years. Use your graph or calculations to calculate the difference between the accounts after
4 years.
Think
a Calculate how much is in the account earning
simple interest at the end of each of the five years.
WriTe
a After 1 year, amount in account
= 10 000 + 10% of 10 000

= 10 000 + 1000
= $11 000
After 2 years, amount in account
= 10 000 + 2 10% of 10 000
= $12 000
After 3 years = $13 000
203
b Calculate the amount in the account earning
b After 1 year, amount in account
= 10 000 1.11
= $11 000
After 2 years, amount in account
= 10 000 1.12
= $12 100
compound interest at the end of each of the

r
5 years using A = PRn where R = 1 +
100
10
(that is, 1 +
= 1.1).
100
c 1 Draw the graphs of the amount in the
Amount in account ($)
account earning simple interest (straight

line) and the amount in the account earning
compound interest (curved line) on the same
set of axes.
17 000
16 000
15 000
14 000
13 000
12 000
11 000
10 000
Compound interest
Simple interest
1 2 3 4 5
Number of years invested (n)
Use the values calculated for the end of the

fourth year.
Difference in amounts = 14 641 14 000

= $641
Write your answer.
After 4 years, the compound interest account

earns an extra $641 in interest.
Contrasting arithmetic and geometric

exercise 5i
1 We29 On the graph below, the first five terms of a sequence are plotted.
Value of term
5
4
3
2
1
0
2 3 4
Term number
State whether the sequence could be arithmetic or geometric and give the value of a and the value of
either d or r.
Value of term
2 On the graph below, the first five terms of a sequence are plotted.
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
2 3 4
Term number
either d or r.
204
Value of term
3 On the graph below, the first five terms of a sequence are plotted.
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
2 3 4
Term number
either d or r.
State whether the sequence could be arithmetic or geometric
and give the value of a and the value of either d or r.
Value of term
4 On the graph at right, the first five terms of a sequence are plotted.
20
15
10
5
0
5 Draw a graph showing the first 8 terms of each of the following
sequences:
2 3 4
Term number
a arithmetic, a = 7, d = 2
b geometric, a = 5, r =
c arithmetic, a = 14, d = 3.5
d arithmetic, a = 32, d = 5
e geometric, a = 12, r =
10
.
3
6 mC On the graph at right, the first five terms of a sequence

Value of term
are plotted.
The sequence could be described by which one of the
following?
a Arithmetic sequence with a = 10 and d = 10
B Arithmetic sequence with a = 10 and d = 0.5
C Geometric sequence with a = 10 and r = 0.5
d Geometric sequence with a = 10 and r = 2
e Geometric sequence with a = 10 and r = 1.5
Value of term
sequence are plotted.

The sequence could be described by which one of
the following?
B Arithmetic sequence with a = 10 and d = 20
C Geometric sequence with a = 10 and r = 10
e Geometric sequence with a = 10 and r = 1
10
5
0
5
10
1
2
180
150
120
90
60
30
0
7 mC On the graph at right, the first five terms of a
2 3 4
Term number
5 Term number
8 We30 An amount of $5000 is invested for 3 years and earns:

On the same set of axes, plot points showing the amount in each account at the end of each of the 3years.
9 An amount of $100 000 is invested for 3 years and earns:
On the same set of axes, plot points showing the amount in each account at the end of each of the 3 years.
10 On the same set of axes, sketch the graphs of the sequences with the rule un = 10n and
vn = 10 1.5n 1. Use your graph to decide for how many of the first five terms un is greater than vn.
11 On the same set of axes, sketch the graphs of the sequences with the rule un = 120 20n and
vn = 100 0.8n 1. Use your graph to decide for how many of the first five terms un is greater than vn.
205
Summary
Recognition of
arithmetic sequences
An arithmetic sequence is a sequence of numbers for which the difference between successive terms is
the same.
Given an arithmetic sequence, identify:
the first term, a
and the common difference, d = t2 t1.
Given an unspecified sequence, establish whether it is arithmetic by testing all terms for a common
difference: d = t2 t1 = t3 t2 = t4 t3 = ...
Finding the terms

of an arithmetic
sequence
tn = a + (n 1) d where tn is the nth term.

a is the first term

d is the common difference.
The sum of a given

number of terms of an
arithmetic sequence
A series is the sum of terms in a sequence.

Sn is the sum of the first n terms in series, for example, S25 represents the sum of the first 25 terms.
Given a number of terms in a series, n, first term, a and the last term, l, use:
n
Sn = (a + l).
2
Given a number of terms in a series, n, first term, a and the common difference, d, use:
n
Sn = [2a + (n 1)d].
2
Recognition of
geometric sequences
A geometric sequence is a sequence of numbers for which the ratio of successive terms is the same.
Given a geometric sequence, identify:
the first term, a
t
and the common ratio, r = 2 .
t1
Given an unspecified sequence, establish whether it is geometric by testing all terms for a common
t t t
ratio, r = 2 = 3 = 4 = ...
t1 t2 t3

geometric sequence
tn = arn 1
where tn is the nth term

a is the first term

r is the common ratio.
The sum of a given

number of terms of a
geometric sequence
2, 4, 8, 6, 32, 64 is a finite geometric sequence.

2 + 4 + 8 + 16 + 32 + 64 is a finite geometric series.
The sum of n terms, Sn, of a geometric sequence may be calculated using:
a(rn 1)
3
Sn =
if r > 1 or r < 1 (for example, r = 2 or 2 or +2 or +4.5).
r1
or
a(1 rn)
if 1 < r < 1 (for example, r = 0.2 or 1 or 0.25).
Sn =
8
1r
Geometric growth
Growth or increase is expressed as a percentage increase.

% increase
Common ratio, r = 1 +
.
100
r values are greater than 1, for example, an 8% increase gives r = 1.08.
Geometric decay
Decay or decrease is expressed as a percentage decrease.

% decrease
Common ratio, r = 1
.
100
r values are less than 1, for example, an 8% decrease gives r = 0.92.
206 Maths Quest 12 Further Mathematics
Compound interest
r
100
A = amount in the account, $
P = principal, $
r = interest rate per compounding period (e.g. per year, per quarter), %
n = the number of compounding periods during the investment.
A = PRn where R = 1 +
and
For decreasing or decaying geometric series, the sum of an infinite number of terms approaches a
finite sum.
The sum to infinity of a geometric sequence for which 1 < r < 1 is given by:
a
S =
.
1r
Contrasting arithmetic
and geometric
sequences through
graphs
Arithmetic patterns are distinguished by a straight line.

Value of term tn
Value of term tn
Finding the sum of

an infinite geometric
sequence
2 3 4
Term n
d is positive
2 3 4
Term n
d is negative

A decreasing pattern or a negative common

difference gives a downward straight line.
Value of term tn
Value of term tn
Geometric patterns are distinguished by a curved line or a saw form.
2 3 4 5
Term n
An increasing pattern or a positive
common ratio greater than 1 (r > 1) gives
an upward curved line.
Term n
An increasing saw pattern occurs when

the common ratio is a negative value
less than 1 (r < 1).
Value of term tn
Value of term tn
A decreasing pattern or a positive fractional

common ratio (0 < r < 1) gives a downward
curved line.
2 3 4
Term n
Term n
A decreasing saw pattern occurs when the

common ratio is a negative proper fraction
(1 < r < 0).
207
Chapter review
mUlT ip l e
Ch oiCe
1 Which of the following could be the first 5 terms of an arithmetic sequence?

a 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, . . .
d 5, 5, 10, 15, 20, . . .
B 3, 3, 6, 6, 9, . . .
e 1, 4, 9, 16, 25, . . .
C 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, . . .
2 For the sequence 3.6, 2.1, 0.6, 0.9, 2.4, . . ., it is true to say it is:
a
B
C
d
e
an infinite sequence with a = 3.6 and d = 0.15

a finite sequence with a = 0.15 and d = 3.6
a finite sequence with a = 3.6 and d = 0.15.
3 For the arithmetic sequence, 1, 1, 3, 5, 7, . . . the value of a, the value of d and the rule for the sequence
are given respectively by:
a a = 1, d = 2, tn = 3 + 2n
d a = 2, d = 1, tn = 3 n
B a = 1, d = 2, tn = 3 n
e a = 2, d = 1, tn = 3 n
C a = 1, d = 1, tn = 2 n
4 The 43rd term of the arithmetic sequence 7, 2, 11, 20, 29, . . . is:
a 327
B 243
C 371
5 The 3rd term of an arithmetic sequence is 3.1 and the 7th term is
a 153.7
B 27.7
C 28.9
d 380
1.3.
e 387
The value of the 31st term is:

e 157.9
d 38.3
6 The sum of the first 24 terms of the sequence 16, 12, 8, 4, 0, . . . is:
a 720
B 912
C 1344
d 1440
e 1488
7 The first term of an arithmetic sequence is 14 and the 3rd is 8. The sum of the first 30 terms of the
sequence is:
d 1725
e 2190
a 1770
B 1095
C 885
8 There is a geometric sequence for which a = 3 and r is a negative number. We can be certain that:
a r is a fraction less than 1
B the 3rd term will be a positive number
C the 3rd term will be greater than the 1st term
d only one number in the sequence is positive
e the 4th term will be greater than the 3rd term
9 Which of the following is a geometric sequence?
a 2, 2, 2, 2, 2, . . .
d 4,
4,
2,
2,
1 1 1 1
, , ,
3 9 27 81
B 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, . . .
1, . . .
C 1, ,
e 100, 10, 0.1, 0.01, 0.001, . . .
...
10 The 19th term of the geometric sequence 3.25, 6.5, 13, 26, 52, . . . is:
a 425 984
B 851 968
C 1 703 936
d 41 978 243
e 3 272 883 098
11 The 3rd term of a geometric sequence is 19.35 and the 6th is 522.45. The 12th term of the sequence is:
a 16 539.15
B 417 629.75
C 126 955.35
d 380 866.05
e 1 142 598.15
12 The first 3 terms of a geometric sequence are 2.25, 4.5, 9. The first term to exceed 1000 is:
a t9
B t10
C t11
d t12
13 The sum of the first 10 terms of the geometric sequence 8, 4, 2, 1,

a 15
B 16
C 17
1
,
2
e t13
. . . is closest to:
d 18
e 20
14 The 3rd term of a geometric sequence is 0.9 and the 6th is 7.2. The sum of the first 12 terms of the
sequence is closest to:

B 122
C 921
d 4122
e 8190
a 2
15 A tree increases in height each year by 5%. If it was 1.2 m high in its first year, in its 6th year its height
would be closest to:
a 1.53 m
B 1.61 m
C 5.5 m
d 9.11 m
e 3750 m
16 Profits in a company are projected to increase by 8% each year. If the profit in the first year was
$60 000, in which year could a profit in excess of $100 000 be expected?
a year 6
B year 7
C year 8
d year 9
e year 10
64 256
17 The sum to infinity of the geometric sequence 1, 45 , 16
,
.
.
.
is:
,
,
25 125 625
1
5
4
a
B
C 1
d 4
e 5
5
4
5
1
3
18 The first term of the geometric sequence for which r = 0.5 and S = 5 is:
a 1
208
1
B 2
3
C 2
2
3
d 8
e 10
2
3
19 The first five terms of a sequence are plotted on the

Value of term
graph at right.
The sequence could be described by which of
the following?
C Geometric sequence with a = 50 and r = 0.5
d Geometric sequence with a = 50 and r = 1.5
e Geometric sequence with a = 50 and r = 2
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
20 The first five terms of a sequence are plotted on the

Value of term
graph at right.
The sequence could be described by which of the
following?
C Geometric sequence with a = 10 and r = 5
e Geometric sequence with a = 10 and r = 0.5
15
10
5
0
5
10
15
2 3 4 5
Term number
5 Term number
1 For the sequences below, state whether or not they are an arithmetic sequence. If they are, give the
value of a and d.
a
123, 23,
77, 177, 277, . . .
5 1 , 2 1 , 3 ,
4
4 4
S ho rT
a n S W er
334, 634, . . .
2 If the second term of an arithmetic sequence is 5 and the fifth term is 16, which term in the sequence is
equal to 226?
3 Blood donations at a suburban location increase by 40 each year. If there are 520 donations in the first year:
a how many donations are made in the 15th year?
b what is the total number of donations made over those 15 years?
4 For each of the sequences below, state whether or not they are a geometric sequence. If they are, state
the value of a and r.

5 5 5 5
, ...
2 4 8 16
700, 70, 7, 7,
a 5, , , ,
70, . . .
5 The amount of garbage (in tonnes) collected in a particular area by the local council each year is
recorded over 3 successive years.
b
Year number Amount of garbage (tonnes)

1
7.2
8.28
9.522
If the amount collected each year were to continue to follow a geometric sequence:
a write a rule for the amount of garbage, tn, which would be collected in the area in year n
b how much garbage would be collected in the 8th year? (Answer correct to 2 decimal places.)
c in which year would the amount of garbage collected exceed 30 tonnes?
6 How many terms of the geometric sequence 164, 131.2, 104.96, 83.968, 67.1744, . . . are required for
the sum to exceed 800?
209
7 Andrew invests $25 000 in an account earning compound interest of 10% per annum compounding
quarterly.
a Find the amount in the account after 3 years.
b Find how long it would take to have $40 965.41 in his account.
8 Express 3.7 as a fraction.
9 The batteries in a toy soldier are running down. The toy soldier marches 50 cm in the first minute,
30 cm in the second minute, 18 cm in the next and so on. By how much does the toy soldier fall short of
marching 1.5 m?
10 On the same set of axes, sketch the graph of the sequence with the rule:
b vn = 10 2n 1.
a un = 10n
e x Tended
r e S p onS e
Task 1
1 Consider the geometric sequence 1, 3, 9, . . . , whose common ratio is 3.
a Subtract successive terms to form the sequence 2, 6, . . . Is this a geometric sequence as well and,
if so, what is its common ratio?
b Add successive terms to form the sequence 4, 12, . . . Is this a geometric sequence as well and, if
so, what is its common ratio?

c Repeat parts a and b for multiplication and division.
d Prove your result of part a for any geometric sequence.
2 In this problem we are comparing simple and compound interest.
Consider a bank, which offers a simple interest rate of 5% per annum on an investment of $100.
a What is the value of the investment for each of the first 5 years?
b Consider another bank, which offers compound interest at the same rate of 5%. What is the value
of the investment for each of the first 5 years?
c When will the value of the investment in part b be twice as much as the investment in part a?
Task 2
1 A newly established quarry produces
crushed rock for the building of roads

and freeways. The amount of crushed
rock (in tonnes) it produces increases
1
by 3 2 tonnes each month and its
production for the first 3months of
operation is shown below.
Month
Crushed rock
produced (tonnes)
11.5
15
a Write the amount of crushed rock
produced in the 4th month.

b Write a rule for tn, the amount of crushed rock produced in month n, expressed in terms of n, the
nth month.
c Write the amount of crushed rock produced in the 60th month.

d During which month will the amount of crushed rock coming from the quarry exceed
100tonnes?
e The local council has ordered that after a total of 3050 tonnes of crushed rock has been extracted
from the quarry, an environmental impact survey must be completed. After how many months will
that happen?
210
2 The amount of crushed rock produced each month at a second quarry is shown below.
Month
1
2
3
Crushed rock produced (tonnes)

10
11
12.1
Given that production at this quarry increases geometrically, find:

a the common ratio, r
b a rule for the amount of crushed rock produced, tn, in tonnes, expressed in terms of the number of
months, n
c the amount of crushed rock produced in the 5th month
d in which month the amount of crushed rock produced exceeds 30 tonnes
e the total amount of crushed rock produced by the quarry in its first year of operation.
3 During its first month of production, the second quarry produces more crushed rock than the first
quarry. In the months after that, however, the first quarry produced more crushed rock than the second
quarry.
After how many months does the second quarry produce more than the first quarry again?
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Practice
VCE exam
questions
Use StudyON to
access all exam
questions on this
topic since 2002.
diGiTal doC
doc-9442
Test Yourself
Chapter 5
211
ICT activities
Chapter opener
diGiTal doC
arithmetic and geometric sequences. (page 171)
5B
Finding the terms of an arithmetic sequence
TUTorial
We 5 eles-1268: Watch a worked example on finding the value of
a term in an arithmetic sequence given its value and the beginning
of an arithmetic sequence. (page 176)
inTeraCTiViTY
Number patterns int-0007: Recognise the relationship between two
variables by observing patterns. (page 175)
5C The sum of a given number of terms of an

arithmetic sequence
diGiTal doC
WorkSHEET 5.1 doc-9436: Recognise arithmetic sequences and
series. (page 182)
TUTorial
We 8 eles-1269: Watch a tutorial on finding the sum of an
arithmetic sequence using the formula. (page 180)
5e
Finding the terms of a geometric sequence
diGiTal doCS
SkillSHEET 5.3 doc-9437: Practise solving non-linear simultaneous
equations (page 189)
SkillSHEET 5.4 doc-9438: Practise solving indicial equations
(page 189)
TUTorial
We 14 eles-1270: Learn how to find the value of a term in
a geometric sequence using a CAS calculator and by using a
spreadsheet. (page 188)
212
5F The sum of a given number of terms of a

geometric sequence
diGiTal doC
WorkSHEET 5.2 doc-9439: Recognise geometric sequences and
series. (page 193)
TUTorial
We 17 eles-1271: Watch a tutorial on finding the value of the
sum of a geometric sequence given two non-consecutive terms.
(page 192)
5G
diGiTal doCS
SkillSHEET 5.5 doc-9440: Practise relating the common ratio of a
geometric sequence to percentage increase or decrease. (page 197)
Spreadsheet doc-9441: Investigate graphs of arithmetic sequences
and series. (page 197)
TUTorial
We 19 eles-1332: Watch a worked example on applying the
concepts involved in geometric sequences to real life. (page 194)
5i Contrasting arithmetic and geometric

inTeraCTiViTY
Contrasting arithmetic and geometric sequences int-0186:
Consolidate your understanding of arithmetic and geometric
sequences. (page 202)
Chapter review
diGiTal doC
Answers CHAPTER 5
ariThmeTiC and GeomeTriC
SeQUenCeS
exercise 5a
recognition of arithmetic
sequences
1 a, c, i
2 a a = 2, d = 5
c a = 2, d = 2
i a = 10, d = 10
3 a, c, d, e
4 a a = 123, d = 100
c a = 7, d = 6
d a = 67, d = 40
e a = 5, d = 7
5 a, c, f
6 a a = 0.7, d = 0.3
c a = 3.5, d = 1.5
f a = 5.2, d = 0.8
7 a, b, c, d
1
8 a a= ,d=1
2
1
5
c a= ,d=
2
5
b a= ,d=2
4
d a=
3
4
,d=4
9 a, d, e
10 a a = 2, d = 2
d a = not specified, d = 2
e a = 8, d = 8
11 a 7th
b 7th
c 8th
d 5th
12 5, 12, 19, 26, 33, 40, 47, 54, 61, 68
13 212, 221, 230, 239, 248
14 B
15 D
exercise 5B Finding the terms of an
arithmetic sequence
b 38
c 2900
1 a 122
d 149
f 549.9
e 219
b 1777
2 a 103
c 60
d 217
b 28th
c 34th
d 279th
3 a 24th
4 tn = 13 + 10n
5 tn = 37 + 3n
b 10
6 a tn = 5 + 10n
7A
8B
9 D
10 26.8
13 24
1
2
11
1
12 5
14 31st
12 78.4
15 44th
16 E
17 10.9 metres 18 101
19 tn = 3 + 4n
20 a tn = 8.5 + 3.5n
b 358.5 metres
exercise 5C
The sum of a given number

of terms of an arithmetic sequence
b 5950
1 a 820
c 667
d 928
2 3320
3 107.5
b 634.8
4 a 735
c 396.5
d 182.25
b 2, 5, 8
5 a 56
6 a 170
b 4, 2, 8
7B
8B
9 13 680
10 364
11 11 562
b 5.5, 7, 8.5
12 a 31
b 11, 8, 5
13 a 46
14
15
16
17
18
19
16 a tn = 1.2 1.05n 1
b 1.46 m
c 12
17 D
18 A
19 B
$9375
$414 000
363.8 cm
1135
a $10 600
a $155
b $136 000
b $2150
exercise 5d recognition of geometric

sequences
1 a, b, c, f, g
2 a a = 1, r = 2
b a = 2, r = 3
c a = 1, r = 4
f a = 3, r = 2
g a = 5, r = 2
3 a, d, e, h
4 a a = 1, r = 2
d a = 2, r = 3
e a = 4, r = 2
h a = 5, r = 4
5 a, c, d
6 a a = 1, r = 2
c a = 4, r = 3
d a = 7, r = 1
7 a, c, f
8 a a = 2, r = 2
c a = 3, r = 5
f a = 6, r = 10
9 a, c, d, e
10 a a = 1.2, r = 2
c a = 2.25, r = 2
1
d a = 7, r =
e a = 10, r = 1.2
2
11 a, c, d, f
1
2
1
2
c a= ,r=
d a= ,r=2
f a = 1, r =
D
D
14 D
16 C
b a = $100, r = 1.1
b 2
12 a a = , r =
1
3
13
15
17
18
a Various answers
a 1, 2, 4, 8, 16
c 2048
1
4
1
5
1
3
19 20 million, 10 million, 5 million,

1
2 2 million, 1 4 million, 625 000, 312 500

20 a Greater than
b 0 and 1
c Equal to
d 1
e 1 and 0
exercise 5e Finding the terms of a
geometric sequence
1 a 20 155 392
b 1 412 376 245
c 1 048 576
d 1408
e 295 245
f 536 870 912
2 a 576 716.8
b 11.867 494 81
c 2489.861 155
3 a 131 072
b 1 062 882
4 a 39 366
b 6144
c 32 768
5 a 12th
b 13th
c 9th
6 a tn = 2n 1
b 2048
7 a tn = 6n 1
b 1296
c 6
8 153.773 437 5
9 105.932 812 5
1
The sum of a given number

of terms of a geometric sequence
1 a 531 440
b 686 285
c 274 576.3
d 559 240.5
2 a 20 475
b 442 865
c 262 143
d 4 545 454 546
3 a 10
b 8
c 14
d 11
4 B
5 A
6 596.65
7 153.6256
8 153.6
9 62.5
10 10 000.0
11 5
exercise 5G applications
sequences
1 a 5.67
b
c 12.7 tonnes
d
2 a $2146.53
b
c $5646.65
3 Pn = 10 000 0.9n 1
4 a $19 317.32
b
5 a 14 147
b
6 a 123
b
7 a 2.85 m
b
8 C
9 a $400 640.74
b
c $2 636 196.56
10 a $16 105.10
b
c $16 386.16
d
11 a $22 076.26
b
c $32 772.33
d
12 3 years
13 2 years
14 2 years
of geometric
17th year
24.82
Year 9
$6317.32
16th year
10 weeks
Year 11
Year 9
$16 288.95
$16 453.09
$26 897.78
$53 701.28
exercise 5h Finding the sum of an

infinite geometric sequence
3
1 a 100
b 100
c
2
5
4
5
f 45
e 2.5
11
10, 6, 3.6
b 6, 1.5, 0.375
12, 10.8, 9.72
d 4, 0.8, 0.16
9, 7.2, 5.76
f 6, 1.2, 0.24
12.5, 6.25, 3.125
12.5, 9.375, 7.031 25
48, 28.8, 17.28
4 22 22
d 2 , ,
9 27 81
2 a
c
e
3 a
b
c
4 a
5
9
b
7
d 39
g
262
495
4
9
c 1
e 8
2
3
h 1
321
999
1
3
14
99
1
3
5 No falls short by 3 metres
10 2048
1
6 192.5 m
8 $500 000
11 341 3
12 531 441
9 a
13 0.013 671 875

14
20 C
exercise 5F
23
25
b $1 000 000, $920 000, $846 400, $778 688,
64
729
15 a tn = 10 000 0.85n 1
7 Yes
b $2724.91
$716 392.96
c $7 070 144.32
213
5 a
8 10
4 104
2 104
tn
30
15
Amount ($)
10
5
0
8 n
b tn
7
9
80
70
6000
Legend
Simple interest
Compound interest
5500
5000
1
2
Year
60
50
40
30
Amount ($)
8 n
tn
15
0
5
130 000
0
2
10
2
Year
10 3 terms
11 0 terms
ChapTer reVieW
15
tn
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
5
Legend
Simple interest
Compound interest
120 000
110 000
mUlTiple ChoiCe
1
6
11
16
C
A
D
C
2
7
12
17
B
C
B
E
3
8
13
18
A
B
B
D
ShorT anSWer
1 a Yes, a = 123, d = 100

1
Un = 10n
1
4
2
3
Term number (n)
exTended reSponSe
140 000
Vn = 10 2n 1
10
150 000
10
Legend
20
160 000
b 5 years
9 25 cm
214
b 19.2 tonnes
10
5 a tn = 7.2 1.15n 1
c Year 12
6 17
7 a $33 622.22
6500
6
5
b 12 000
b No
8 3
8 n
6 D
7 E
8
20
3 a 1080
1
4 a Yes, a = 5, r =
6 104
25
tn
Amount ($)
exercise 5i Contrasting arithmetic and

geometric sequences through graphs
1 Arithmetic sequence with a = 0 and d = 1
2 Arithmetic sequence with a = 10 and d = 2
3 Geometric sequence with a = 10 and r = 1.5
4 Geometric sequence with a = 20 and r = 0.5
1
4
b Yes, a = 5 , d = 3
2 Term number 35
4
9
14
19
C
A
C
D
5
10
15
20
B
B
A
A
Task 1
1 a Common ratio is 3.
b Common ratio is 3.
c Multiplication: common ratio is 9 (32);
division: common ratio is 1 (30).
d The ratio of the second term to the first
term, after the subtraction, is
ar 2 ar ar (r 1)
=
= r.
ar a
a(r 1)
2 a $105, $110, $115, $120, $125
b $105, $110.25, $115.76, $121.55,
$127.63
c 35 years
Task 2
1
1 a 18 tonnes
b tn = 4.5 + 3.5n
2
c 214.5 tonnes
d 28th month
e 40 months
2 a 1.1
b tn = 10 1.1n 1
c 14.641 tonnes
d 13th month
e 213.84 tonnes
3 24th month
ChapTer 6
Difference equations
ChapTer ConTenTS
6a
6b
6C
6d
6e
6F
6G
Generating the terms of a sequence defined by a first order difference equation

The relationship between arithmetic sequences and first order difference equations
The relationship between geometric sequences and first order difference equations
Setting up first order difference equations to represent practical situations
Graphical representation of a sequence defined by a first order difference equation
Interpretation of the graph of first order difference equations
Fibonacci sequences as second order difference equations
diGiTal doC
doc-9443
10 Quick Questions
introduction
In the previous chapter we examined arithmetic and geometric patterns, examining such patterns with
explicit functions like tn = a + (n 1) d. Another approach is to look at how two consecutive terms in a
sequence are related. This approach is more useful in practical applications in which the information is
provided as follows:
The population is increasing by 10% each year, less 200 deaths, with a current population of 9500.
In the above statement we are told about the relationship or change in population from one year to the
next and are given a starting term.
Generating the terms of a sequence

defined by a first order difference
equation
6a
Consider the arithmetic sequence:

1, 5, 9, 13, 17, . . .
The common difference for this sequence is 4.
If tn represents the nth term of the sequence, then tn + 1 represents the next term; that is, the (n+ 1)th term.
We can define the arithmetic sequence 1, 5, 9, 13, 17, . . . with the following equation:
tn + 1 = tn +
t1 = 1.
The expression is read as the next term is the previous term plus 4, starting at 1.
Or, transposing the above equation, we get:
tn + 1 tn = 4
t1 = 1.
This is read as the difference between two consecutive terms is4, starting at 1.
This equation is called a first order difference equation. It has two main parts:
tn + 1 = tn + 4 describes the pattern in the sequence
t1 = 1 is the first or starting term in the sequence.
A first order difference equation defines a relationship between two successive terms of
a sequence, for example, between:
tn, the previous term
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with first order
difference
equations.
tn + 1, the next term.

ChapTer 6 Difference equations
215
Another notation that can be used is:

tn 1, the previous term
tn, the next term.
The first term can be represented by either t0 or t1.

Throughout this chapter we will use either notation format as short hand for next term, previous term
and first term.
Worked exaMple 1
The following equations each define a sequence. Which of them are first order difference equations
(defining a relationship between two consecutive terms)?
a tn = tn 1 + 2
t1 = 3
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
b tn = 4 + 2n
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
c fn + 1 = 3fn
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
Think
WriTe
a The equation contains the consecutive
a This is a first order difference equation. It has the pattern
tn = tn 1 + 2
and a starting or first term of t1 = 3.
terms tn and tn 1 to describe a pattern

with a known term.
b The equation contains only the tn term.
b This is not a first order difference equation because
c The equation contains the consecutive
c This is an incomplete first order difference equation.
There is no tn + 1 or tn 1 term.
it does not describe the relationship between two

consecutive terms.
terms fn and fn + 1 to describe a pattern

but has no known first or starting term.
It has no first or starting term, so a sequence cannot be

commenced.
Given a fully defined first order difference equation (pattern and a known term) we can generate the
other terms of the sequence.
Starting term
Earlier, it was stated that a starting term was required to fully define a sequence. As can be seen below,
the same pattern with a different starting point gives a different set of numbers.
tn + 1 = tn + 2
tn + 1 = tn + 2
t1 = 3
t1 = 2
gives 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, . . .
gives 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, . . .
Worked exaMple 2
Write the first five terms of the sequence defined by the first order difference equation:
tn = 3tn 1 + 5
t0 = 2.
Think
216
WriTe
Since we know the t0 or starting term, we can

generate the next term, t1, using the pattern:
The next term is 3 the previous term + 5.
tn = 3tn 1 + 5
t1 = 3t0 + 5
=32+5
= 11
Now we can continue generating the next

term, t2, and so on.
t2 = 3t1 + 5
= 3 11 + 5
= 38
t3 = 3t2 + 5
= 3 38 + 5
= 119
t4 = 3t3 + 5
= 3 119 + 5
= 362
Write your answer.
The sequence is 2, 11, 38, 119, 362.
t0 = 2
Worked exaMple 3
A sequence is defined by the first order difference equation:

tn + 1 = 2tn 3
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
If the fourth term of the sequence is 29, that is, t4 = 29, then what is the second term?
Think
WriTe
Transpose the equation to make the previous

term, tn, the subject.
tn =
Use t4 to find t3 by substituting into the

transposed equation.
t3 =
Use t3 to find t2.
Write your answer.
tn + 1 + 3
2
t4 + 3
2
29 + 3
=
2
= 13
t3 + 3
2
13 + 3
=
2
= 5
t2 =
The second term, t2, is 5.
Generating the terms of a sequence

defined by a first order difference equation
exercise 6a
1 We1
Which of the following equations are complete first order difference equations?
a tn = 2 + n
b tn = tn 1 1
t0 = 2
c tn = 1 3tn 1
t0 = 2
d tn 4tn 1 = 5
e tn = tn 1
f tn = n + 1
t1 = 2
g tn = 1 tn 1
t0 = 21
h tn = an 1
t2 = 2
i fn + 1 = 3fn 1
j pn = pn 1 + 7
t0 = 7
2 We2
a Write the first five terms of each of the following sequences.
i tn = tn 1 + 2
iii tn = 1 + tn 1
t0 = 6
t0 = 23
ii tn = tn 1 3
iv tn + 1 = tn 10
t0 = 5
t1 = 7
b From your knowledge of chapter 5, write whether the sequences you have found in partsiiv are
arithmetic or geometric sequences.

3
a Write the first five terms of each of the following sequences.
t0 = 1
ii tn = 5tn 1
t0 = 2
t0 = 1
iv tn + 1 = 2tn
t1 = 1
b From your knowledge of chapter 5, write whether the sequences you have found in parts iiv are
arithmetic or geometric sequences.
i tn = 3tn 1
iii tn = 4tn 1
4 Write the first five terms of each of the following sequences.

a tn = 2tn 1 + 1
t0 = 1
b tn = 3tn 1 2
t1 = 5
c tn = tn 1 + 1
t0 = 6
d tn + 1 = 5tn 1
t1 = 1
5 MC Which of the sequences below is generated by the following first order difference equation?
tn = 3tn 1 +
a 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, . . .
C 2, 10, 34, 106, 322, . . .
e 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, . . .
t0 = 2
b 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, . . .
d 2, 11, 47, 191, 767, . . .
217
6 MC Which of the sequences below is generated by the following first order difference equation?
a
b
C
d
e
3,
5, 9, 17, 33, . . .
3, 5, 9, 17, 33, . . .
3, 5, 3, 5, 3, . . .
3, 8, 14, 26, 54, . . .
3, 7, 15, 31, 63, . . .
tn + 1 = 2tn 1
t1 = 3
7 We3 A sequence is defined by the first order difference equation:
tn + 1 = 3tn + 1
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
If the fourth term is 67 (that is, t4 = 67) what is the second term?
8 A sequence is defined by the first order difference equation:
tn + 1 = 4tn 5
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
If the third term is 41 (that is, t3 = 41) what is the first term?
9 MC A sequence is defined by the first order difference equation:
tn + 1 = 5tn 10
If the third term is
a
14
6
d 2
10,
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
the first term is:

5
C 0
b 6
e 4
10 Write the first order difference equations for the following descriptions of a sequence and generate the
first five terms of the sequence.

1
a The next term is 3 times the previous term, starting at .
4
b Next years attendance at a motor show is 2000 more than the previous years attendance, with a
first year attendance of 200 000.
c The next term is the previous term less 7, starting at 100.
d The next days total sum is double the previous days sum less 50, with a first day sum
of $200.
The relationship between arithmetic

sequences and first order difference
equations
6b
In the next few exercises, a link will be made between first order difference equations and arithmetic and
geometric sequences studied in chapter 5.
Note the variation in the pronumerals used. This is best summarised in a table.
sequence convention
First order difference

equation convention
a or t1
t0 or t1
Common difference
Common ratio
Term
First term
This is an inconvenient interchange of pronumerals, but it is most important to appreciate the

translation from one convention to the other.
We know that a sequence may be defined by a difference equation. We can sometimes tell what type of
sequence we have by observing the first order difference equation.
Consider the arithmetic sequence 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, . . .
From chapter 5:
d = t2 t1 = t3 t2 = t4 t3 = . . .
d = 7 3 = 11 7 = 15 11 = +4
218
The common difference is +4.

This sequence may be defined by the first order difference equation:
tn + 1 tn = 4
t1 = 3.
tn + 1 = tn + 4
t1 = 3.
Rewriting this, we obtain:

An arithmetic sequence with a common difference of d may be defined by a first order
difference equation of the form:
tn + 1 = tn + b
where
(or tn + 1 tn = b)
b is the common difference and for

b > 0 it is an increasing sequence
b < 0 it is a decreasing sequence.
Worked exaMple 4
Which of the following first order difference equations defines an arithmetic sequence?
a tn + 1 = tn + 2 t1 = 3
b tn + 1 = 2tn t1 = 5
c tn + 1 = tn 6 t0 = 11
Think
a Check whether the difference equation is of the
form tn + 1 = tn + b.
b Check whether the difference equation is of the
c Check whether the difference equation is of the
WriTe
a The first order difference equation defines an
arithmetic sequence with a common difference

of +2, an increasing sequence.
b The first order difference equation does not define
an arithmetic sequence because the tn term has a

coefficient of 2.
c The first order difference equation defines an
arithmetic sequence with a common difference

of 6, a decreasing sequence.
Worked exaMple 5
Express each of the following arithmetic sequences as first order difference equations.
a 7, 12, 17, 22, 27, . . .
b 9, 3, 3, 9, 15, . . .
Think
WriTe
a 7, 12, 17, 22, 27, . . .
Check for a common difference.
b = t4 t3
= 22 17
=5
There is a common difference of 5 and the

first term is 7.
The first order difference equation is given by:

tn + 1 = tn + b
tn + 1 = tn + 5
t1 = 7
b = t3 t2
= 17 12
=5
b = t2 t1
= 12 7
=5
b 9, 3, 3, 9, 15, . . .
Check for a common difference.
b = t4 t3
= 9 3
= 6
b = t3 t2
= 3 3
= 6
b = t2 t1
=39
= 6

first term is 9.

tn + 1 = tn 6
t1 = 9
219
Worked exaMple 6
Express the arithmetic sequence defined below as a first order difference equation.
tn = 3n 2
n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, . . .
Think
WriTe
tn = 3n 2
t1 = 3 1 2
= 3 2
= 5
n=2
t2 = 3 2 2
= 6 2
= 8
n=3
t3 = 3 3 2
= 9 2
= 11
n=4
t4 = 3 4 2
= 12 2
= 14
The sequence is 5, 8, 11, 14, . . .
Generate the sequence using the given rule.
n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, . . .
n=1

first term is 5.
Write the first order difference equation.
The first order difference equation is:

tn + 1 = tn 3
t1 = 5
The relationship between arithmetic

sequences and first order dif ference equations
exercise 6b
1 We4 State which of the following first order difference equations define an arithmetic sequence.
a tn + 1 = 3tn
t1 = 6
b tn + 1 = tn + 3
t1 = 2
c tn + 1 = 3tn + 3
t1 = 3
d tn + 1 = tn 2
t0 = 5
e tn + 1 = 4tn
t0 = 10
f tn + 1 = 3tn
t1 = 3
g tn + 1 = tn 1
t1 = 0
h tn + 1 = tn
t0 = 1
i tn + 1 = 2tn 3
t1 = 2
j tn + 1 = tn + 100
t1 = 20
2 We5 Express each of the following arithmetic sequences as first order difference equations.
a 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, . . .
b 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, . . .
c 3, 10, 17, 24, 31, . . .
d 2, 2, 6, 10, 14, . . .
e 12, 5, 2, 9, 16, . . .
f 6, 1, 4, 9, 14, . . .
h 4, 10.5, 17, 23.5, 30, . . .
g 1, 0.5, 0, 0.5, 1, . . .
3 MC The arithmetic sequence 6, 3, 0, 3, 6, . . . can be defined by the first order difference equation:
a tn + 1 = tn 3
C tn + 1 = 3tn
e tn + 1 = 3tn
t0 = 6
t1 = 3
t1 = 3
b tn + 1 = tn + 3
d tn + 1 = 3tn 1
t1 = 6
t0 = 3
4 We6 Express each of the arithmetic sequences defined below as first order difference equations.
a tn = n + 3
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
b tn = n 2
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
c tn = n 10
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
d tn = n + 1
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
e tn = n 3
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
f tn = 2n + 1
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
g tn = 3n 4
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
h tn = 2n + 6
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
5 MC The sequence defined by tn = 2n + 3, n = 1, 2, 3, . . ., can be defined by the first order difference
equation:
a tn + 1 = tn 2
d tn + 1 = tn + 3
220
t1 = 1
t1 = 1
b tn + 1 = 2tn
e tn + 1 = 2tn + 3
t1 = 3
t1 = 1
C tn + 1 = 2tn
tn = 1
The relationship between geometric

sequences and first order difference
equations
6C
Consider the geometric sequence 1, 3, 9, 27, 81, . . . From chapter 5, the common ratio is given by:
t
t
t
r = a = 2 = 3 = 4 = ...
t1 t2 t3
For this sequence
3 9 27
= =
= ...
1 3 9
= +3
a=
The common ratio is +3.

This sequence may be defined by the first order difference equation:
tn + 1 = 3tn
t1 = 1
A geometric sequence with a common ratio of a may be defined by a first order difference
equation of the form:
tn + 1 = atn
where a is the common ratio
a > 1 is an increasing sequence
0 < a < 1 is a decreasing sequence
a < 0 is a sequence alternating between positive and negative values.
Worked exaMple 7
Which of the following first order difference equations defines a

geometric sequence?
a tn + 1 = 2tn
t1 = 3
b tn + 1 = tn + 2
t1 = 4
c tn + 1 = 3tn 1
t1 = 2
d tn + 1 = 5tn
t1 = 8
Think
a Check whether the difference
equation is of the form tn + 1 = atn.
b Check whether the difference
c Check whether the difference
d Check whether the difference
TUTorial
eles-1273
Worked example 7
WriTe
a The first order difference equation defines a geometric
sequence with a common ratio of 2, an increasing sequence.

b The first order difference equation does not define
a geometric sequence because there is a common

difference of 2.
c The first order difference equation does not define a
geometric sequence because of the subtraction of 1.

d The first order difference equation defines a geometric
sequence with a common ratio of 5. This sequence is

alternating between positive and negative terms.
Worked exaMple 8
Express each of the following geometric sequences as first order difference equations.
a 1, 5, 25, 125,
25, . .6
b 3, 6, 12, 24, 48 . . .
Think
a 1 There is a common ratio of 5 and the first term
WriTe
a a=
25
5
= 5
1
+5
125
25
=. . .
is 1.
=
t1 = 1

tn + 1 = 5tn
t1 = 1
221
b 1 There is a common ratio of 2 and the first
term is 3.
b a=
6
3
2
12
6
24
12
=. . .
=
t1 = 3

tn + 1 = 2tn
t1 = 3
Worked exaMple 9
Express each of the geometric sequences defined below as first order difference equations.
a tn = 2(7)n 1
n = 1, 2, 3, 4, . . .
b tn = 3(2)n 1
n = 1, 2, 3, 4, . . .
Think
WriTe
a 1 We know from our work with geometric
sequences that their general form is

tn = a(r)n 1, where a represents the first term
of the sequence; that is, a = t1, and r is the
common ratio.
a tn = a(r)n 1
tn = 2(7)n 1,
So, in this case t1 = 2 and r = 7, where the

common ratio, r, translates to a = 7.
tn + 1 = atn
a = 7, t1 = 2
tn + 1 = 7tn
b In this case t1 = 3 and r = 2.
n = 1, 2, 3, 4, . . .
t1 = 2
b The first order difference equation is:
tn + 1 = 2tn
t1 = 3
The relationship between geometric

sequences and first order difference equations
exercise 6C
1 We 7 State which of the following first order difference equations define a geometric sequence.
a tn + 1 = 3tn
t1 = 6
b tn + 1 = tn + 3
t1 = 2
c tn + 1 = 3tn + 3
t1 = 3
d tn + 1 = tn 2
t1 = 5
e tn + 1 = 4tn
t1 = 10
f tn + 1 = 3tn
t1 = 3
g tn + 1 = tn 1
t1 = 0
h tn + 1 = tn
t1 = 1
i tn + 1 = 2tn 3
t1 = 2
j tn + 1 = tn + 100
t1 = 20
2 We8 Express each of the following geometric sequences as first order difference equations.
a 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, . . .
b 2, 6, 18, 54, 162, . . .
c 1, 6, 36, 216, 1296, . . .
d 5, 5, 5, 5, 5, . . .
e 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, . . .
f 2, 8, 32, 128, 512, . . .
g 3, 12, 48, 192, 768, . . .

h 5, 15, 45, 135, 405, . . .
3 MC The geometric sequence 2, 6, 18, 54, 162, . . . can be defined by the first order difference
equation:
a tn + 1 = 2tn
t1 = 2
b tn + 1 = 2tn
t1 = 3
C tn + 1 = 3tn
t1 = 3
d tn + 1 = 3tn
t1 = 2
e tn + 1 = 3tn
t1 = 2
4 We9 Express each of the geometric sequences defined below as first order difference equations.
a tn = 2(3)n 1
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
b tn = 3(5)n 1
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
1
c tn = 3(4)
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
d tn = 5(2)n 1
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
e tn = 0.5(1)n 1
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
f tn = 0.1(3)n 1
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
5 MC The sequence tn = 4(1)n 1 n = 1, 2, 3, . . . can be defined by the first order difference equation:
diGiTal doC
doc-9444
WorkSHEET 6.1
222
a tn + 1 = tn
C tn + 1 = 4tn
e tn + 1 = 4tn
t1 = 4
t1 = 1
t1 = 1
b tn + 1 = tn 1
d tn + 1 = 4tn + 3
t1 = 4
t1 = 4
Setting up first order difference

equations to represent practical
situations
6d
inTeraCTiViTY
int-0187
Setting up first order
difference equations
In practical applications we will be presented with a description of the situation including the pattern and
a starting term. We need to translate that description to recognise:
1. the first term (t0 or t1)
2. the current or previous term (tn or tn 1)
3. how the next term (tn or tn + 1) is generated.
The choice of notation for the first term is defined by the type of situation.
Use t0 for sequences that are dependent on time, such as population growth and investment amounts.
For example, a population starts at 1500 (start = t0). After the first year (1st year = t1) it has grown to
1700, and after the second year (2nd year = t2) it has grown to 1900.
Use t1 for most other situations, such as prizes: first prize t1 = $1000, second prize t2=$500, third
prize t3 = $250.
As an example, let us look at a very simple situation.
Initial description:
The school population is increasing each year by 50 students and the initial population was 200.
Below is the description in terms of the population for two consecutive years:
Next years population
is
current/previous years population
plus 50,
starting with 200 students
Pn + 1
Pn
+ 50,
P0 = 200
The first order difference equation is:

Pn + 1 = Pn + 50
P0 = 200.
The above approach refers to the two terms as the relationship between the next (tn + 1) and previous
(tn) terms.
Note: A more appropriate pronumeral than t is usually chosen to represent the terms in a sequence, for
example, P for population.
The first order difference equation can be stated as:
Next term is the previous term plus some defined change, given the first term.
Three types of difference equations will be closely investigated: those describing an arithmetic sequence,
a geometric sequence and a combination of both.
Type 1 arithmetic sequence

The next term is the previous term plus a fixed amount or a fixed percentage of an initial value.
tn + 1 = tn + b
where b = the common difference = fixed amount or percentage of the first term, t0 or t1.
223
Worked exaMple 10
John is advised that the runs he scored in his first ten innings in cricket is a pattern. The first
innings score was 25, and each innings score increased by 7 runs after that.
Write a first order difference equation to describe this situation.
Think
WriTe
Define the terms to be used, for instance, R

for runs scored.
Let Rn = the runs scored in an innings by John,

where n is the innings number.
The first innings score of 25 is R1. (The

second innings is R2, the third innings is R3,
and so on.)
R1 = 25
Establish the relationship between the next

and previous terms.
Next innings score is the previous innings score

plus 7 runs.
This is an arithmetic sequence because the

runs scored in each innings increase by the
same amount or a common difference of
7 runs.
Rn + 1 = Rn + 7

Remember there are two parts: the rule and
the first or starting term.
Rn + 1 = Rn + 7
R1 = 25
Worked exaMple 11
Erin earns 4% simple interest per annum on $15 000 that she has invested.
Recall that simple interest is always calculated on the original amount.
a Write a first order difference equation to describe this situation.
b Calculate the total value after the third year.
Think
a 1 Define the terms to be used.
TUTorial
eles-1333
Worked example 11
WriTe
a Let An equal the amount Erins investment
would be worth after the nth year.
The initial investment was $15 000 at the start

of the first month, that is, A0.
A0 = $15 000
Establish the relationship between the next and

previous terms.
The next term is the previous term plus 4% of

the initial amount.
This is an arithmetic sequence because each

year the investment increases by the same
amount or a common difference.
An + 1 = An + 4% of $15 000
An + 1 = An + 600

Remember there are two parts: the rule and the
first or starting term.
An + 1 = An + 600
b 1 Use the first order difference equation to
generate each of the three terms, A1, A2 and A3.
224
Write your answer.
b An + 1 = An + 600
A1 = A0 + 600
= 15 000 + 600
= 15 600
A3 = A2 + 600
= 16 200 + 600
= 16 800
A0 = 15 000
A2 = A1 + 600
= 15 600 + 600
= 16 200
After 3 years the total value is $16 800.
Type 2 Geometric sequence

The next term is the previous term plus a percentage of the previous terms value.
tn + 1 = tn + % of tn
or
tn + 1 = a tn
where a is the common ratio.
Worked exaMple 12
A bird population increases by 5% each year.

If the initial population was 1200:
a write a first order difference equation to
describe this situation
b calculate the population (to the nearest
whole number) after 5 years.
Think
a 1 Define the terms to be used, for instance, P for
population.
TUTorial
eles-1334
Worked example 12
WriTe
a Let Pn = the population after the nth year.
The initial population was 1200, that is, P0.
P0 = 1200
Establish the relationship between the next and

the previous terms.
Next years population is previous years

population plus 5% of previous years
population:
Pn + 1 = Pn + 5% of Pn
This is a geometric sequence because each

year the value increases by 5%; that is,
a = 1.05.
Pn + 1 = Pn + 0.05Pn
= Pn(1 + 0.05)
= 1.05Pn

Remember there are two parts: the rule and the
first or starting term.
Pn + 1 = 1.05Pn
b 1 Use the first order difference equation to
generate each of the six terms, P0 to P5.
Continue this process until P5 is calculated.
Write your answer, rounding to give a realistic

response; for example, a whole number of
birds.
b Pn + 1 = 1.05Pn
P1 = 1.05P0
= 1.05 1200
= 1260
P0 = 1200
P0 = 1200
P2 = 1.05P1
= 1.05 1260
= 1323
P4 = 1.05P3
P3 = 1.05P2
= 1.05 1323
= 1.05 1389.15
= 1389.15
= 1458.6075
P5 = 1.05P4
= 1.05 1458.6075
= 1531.537 875
After 5 years, the bird population is 1532,
correct to the nearest whole number.
225
Type 3 Combination of arithmetic and

geometric sequences
This is a new sequence being investigated in this module, where the rule giving the next term is a
combination of arithmetic and geometric sequences.
The next term is the previous term plus a percentage of the previous terms value plus a fixed amount
or a fixed percentage of an initial value.
tn + 1 = tn + % tn + b
that is
tn + 1 = a tn + b
where a = the common ratio and b = the common difference.
Worked exaMple 13
James is saving for a car. He saves $200 from his pay and deposits it at the start of each month into
an account earning 6% interest per annum, compounding monthly and calculated at the end of
the month. He opened the account on 1 May with a gift from his parents of $100.
a Write a first order difference equation to describe this situation.
b How much would James have on 1 August?
Think
a 1 Define the terms to be used.
WriTe
a Let An = the amount James investment would be
worth after the nth month.
The initial investment was $100 at the

start of the first month, that is, A0.
A0 = $100
The next term is a month by month

increase so convert 6% per annum to
an increase per month.
6% per annum =
Establish the relationship between the

next and previous terms.
Next month = previous month + 0.5% of the previous

month + $200.
Use the first order difference equation

notation and simplify.
An + 1 = An + 0.5% of An + $200
= An(1 + 0.005) + 200
= 1.005An + 200
Write the first order difference

equation. Remember there are
two parts; the rule and the first term.
An + 1 = 1.005An + 200
b 1 Use the difference equation to generate
the first four terms, A0 to A3, for the

months of May, June, July and August.
226
Write your answer to an appropriate

level of accuracy. In this situation, give
the answer to the nearest cent.
6%
per month
12
= 0.5% per month
A0 = 100
b An + 1 = 1.005An + 200
A0 = 100
A0 = 100
A1 = 1.005A0 + 200
A2 = 1.005A1 + 200
= 1.005 100 + 200
= 1.005 300.50 + 200
= 100.50 + 200
= 302.0025 + 200
= 300.50
= 502.0025
A3 = 1.005A2 + 200
= 1.005 502.0025 + 200
= 504.512 512 5 + 200
= 704.512 512 5
The total sum James would have on 1 August would
be $704.51, correct to the nearest cent.
Set ting up first order difference equations

to represent practical situations
exercise 6d
1 We10, 11
For each of the situations below, write a first order difference equation to describe it.
a The first bar on a metal barricade is 50 centimetres long. Each successive bar is 2centimetres
longer than the previous bar.

b A machine is programmed to cut lengths of rope so that each successive piece is 10centimetres
longer, starting with a length of 8 centimetres.

c Paula places $10 from each pay into her top drawer. She had $50 from Christmas in the drawer
to start with.
d Water leaks from a tank at the rate of 2 litres per day. The tank initially held 5000 litres of water.
For each of the situations below, write a first order difference equation to describe it and find
the unknown term.
a A towns population increases by 3% each year. The towns original population was 2600. Find
the population after 3 years.
b Gary receives a yearly pay increment of 1.2%. His starting salary is $45 000. What is Garys
expected salary after 5 years?
c Topsoil at a coastal hillside park is estimated to be eroded at the rate of 4% per annum. If the
estimated amount of topsoil at the park is initially 70 000 cubic metres, how much topsoil will be
remaining after 2 years?
d A new hospital increases the number of patients it treats by 12% each year. It treated 3500 in its
first year. How many patients will be treated in the fourth year?
2 We12
diGiTal doC
doc-9445
SkillSHEET 6.1
Changing a
percentage to a
decimal
3 We13 For each of the situations below, write a first order difference equation to describe it and find
the unknown term.

a Ants in an ant colony increased in number by 7% per week. At the end of each week 1000 ants
are added to the colony which initially had 15 000 ants. How many ants will there be in the colony
after 4 weeks?
b A grove of trees loses 1% of trees through environmental damage each year. Two hundred new
trees are planted each year to cover the losses. The grove began with 3000trees. How many trees
will there be after 3 years?
c Sophie opens an account and on the 15th day of each month deposits $150 into the account which
earns compound interest of 12% per annum, compounding monthly and calculated at the end of
the month. How much will there be in the account at the end of the third month?
4 MC Helen increases the size of her herb garden by
5% each year. Itinitially covered 4square metres.

The first order difference equation that would describe this is:
a An = 0.95An 1
A0 = 4
b An = 1.04An 1
A0 = 4
C An = 1.05An 1
A0 = 4
d An = 1.05An 1 + 4
A0 = 0
e An = 1.05An 1 + 4
A0 = 4
5 MC Gary runs a fruit-growing business. He aims to earn $40
per week more than in the previous week. In his first week, he
earns $160.
The first order difference equation that would describe this is:
a An = An 1 + 40
A0 = 160
b An = 160An 1
A0 = 40
C An = 1.04An 1
A0 = 160
d An = An 1 + 160
A0 = 40
e An = An 1 + 160 40
A0 = 0
6 MC The number of people attending a weight-loss club increases by 3% each year. Forty members
leave the club each year. The clubs initial membership was 1100 statewide.
The first order difference equation that reflects this is:
a Pn = 0.97Pn 1 40
P0 = 1100
b Pn = 0.97Pn 1 + 40
C Pn = 1.03Pn 1 40
P0 = 1100
d Pn = 1.03Pn 1 + 40
e Pn = 1.40Pn 1 1100
P0 = 40
P0 = 1100
P0 = 1100
227
7 MC The number of people in a country town is decreasing by 5% each year as the young adults move
to the city. A further 20 people die each year. The towns initial population was 2500.
The first order difference equation that reflects this is:
a Pn = 0.95Pn 1 20
P0 = 2500
b Pn = 0.95Pn 1 + 20
P0 = 2500
C Pn = 1.05Pn 1 20
P0 = 2500
d Pn = 1.05Pn 1 + 20
P0 = 2500
e Pn = 1.20Pn 1 2500
P0 = 20
8 MC The whale population in the
Southern Pacific Ocean is decreasing
by 150 per year. The current population
is 1500.
The first order difference equation
that describes the above is:
a Pn = 0.9Pn 1
P0 = 1500
b Pn = 1.1Pn 1 150
P0 = 1500
C Pn + 1 = Pn + 150
P0 = 1500
d Pn = Pn 1 1500
P0 = 150
e Pn = Pn 1 150
P0 = 1500
9 The number of paid-up members of a football club is increasing by 4% per week, but the club loses
10 members each week. The club began with 10 000 members.
a Give the first order difference equation for the above situation.
b Calculate the size of the membership for each of the first 8 weeks.
c In which week will the membership first exceed 11 000?
10 At the local brickworks there are piles of house bricks. The first pile has 4000 house bricks. Each pile
after the first has 20 fewer house bricks than the previous pile.
a State whether this is an arithmetic or geometric sequence.
b Give the first order difference equation for the above situation.
c Calculate the number of bricks for each of the first 7 piles.
In another yard, there are piles of paving bricks. The first pile has 4000 paving bricks; however,
the bricks reduce by a rate of 1% for each subsequent pile.
d State whether this is an arithmetic or geometric sequence.
e Give the first order difference equation for the above situation.
f Calculate the number of bricks in the seventh pile of paving bricks.
Graphical representation of a
sequence defined by a first order
difference equation
6e
Certain quantities in nature and business may

change in a uniform way (forming a pattern).
This change may be an increase, as in the
case of:
tn + 1 = tn + 2
t1 = 3,
or it may be a decrease, as in the case of:

tn + 1 = tn 2
t1 = 3.
These patterns can be modelled by graphs that,

in turn, can be used to recognise patterns in the
real world.
A graph of the equation could be drawn to
represent a situation, and by using the graph the
situation can be analysed to find, for example,
the next term in the pattern.
228
First order dif ference equations: tn + 1 = tn + b

(arithmeticpat terns)
tn
5
4
3
2
1
0
Value of term
Value of term
The sequences of a first order difference equation tn + 1 = tn + b are distinguished by a straight line or a
constant increase or decrease.
1 2 3 4 5
Term number

tn
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
A decreasing pattern or a negative common difference

gives a downward straight line.
Worked exaMple 14
On a graph, show the first five terms of the sequence described by the first
order difference equation:
tn + 1 = tn 3
t1 = 5.
Think
TUTorial
eles-1274
Worked example 14
WriTe/draW
Generate the values of each of the five terms

of the sequence.
tn + 1 = tn 3
t2 = t1 3
= 5 3
= 8
t4 = t3 3
= 11 3
= 14
Graph these first five terms. The value of the

term is plotted on the y-axis, and the term
number is plotted on the x-axis.
tn
Value of term
0
4
t1 = 5
t 3 = t2 3
= 8 3
= 11
t 5 = t4 3
= 14 3
= 17
1 2 3 4 5
Term number
8
12
16
20
First order dif ference equations: tn + 1 = atn

tn
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 n
Term number
An increasing pattern or a positive common ratio
greater than 1 (a > 1) gives an upward curved line.
0
Value of term
Value of term
The sequences of a first order difference equation tn + 1 = atn are distinguished by a curved line or a saw form.
tn
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 n
Term number
A decreasing pattern or a positive fractional common
ratio (0 < a < 1) gives a downward curved line.
0
229
tn
6
4
2
0
2
4
6
8
10
6
4
2
0
2
4
6
8
10
Value of term
Value of term
tn
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Term number
An increasing saw pattern occurs when the common

ratio is a negative value less than 1 (a < 1).
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Term number
A decreasing saw pattern occurs when

the common ratio is a negative fraction
(1 < a < 0).
Worked exaMple 15
On a graph, show the first six terms of the sequence described by the first order difference
equation:
tn + 1 = 4tn
t1 = 0.5.
Generate the six terms of the sequence.
Graph these terms.

Note: The sixth term is not included in
this graph to more clearly illustrate the
relationship between the terms.
WriTe/draW
tn + 1 = 4tn
t2 = 4t1
= 4 0.5
=2
t3 = 4t2
=42
=8
t4 = 4t3
=48
= 32
t5 = 4t4
= 4 32
= 128
t6 = 4t5
= 4 128
= 512
t1 = 0.5
tn
160
Value of term
Think
120
80
40
0
1 2 3 4 5
Term number
Graphical representation of first order difference

equations of the form tn + 1 = atn + b
As the pattern of first order difference equations of the form tn + 1 = atn + b is a combination of both
arithmetic and geometric rules, they are primarily distinguished by a curved line but are more complex
in nature than those given by geometric sequences.
230
Worked exaMple 16
On a graph, show the first five terms of the sequence described by the first order difference
equation:
tn + 1 = 3tn 1
t1 = 2.
Think
WriTe/draW
Generate the five terms of the sequence.
Graph these first five terms.
tn + 1 = 3tn 1
t2 = 3t1 1
=321
=5
t4 = 3t3 1
= 3 14 1
= 41
Value of term
t1 = 2
t3 = 3t2 1
=351
= 14
t5 = 3t4 1
= 3 41 1
= 122
tn
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
Graphical representation of a sequence

defined by a first order dif ference equation
exercise 6e
1 We14 For each of the following, plot the first five terms of the sequence defined by the first order
difference equation.
tn + 1 = tn + 3
tn + 1 = tn + 7
tn + 1 = tn 3
tn + 1 = tn + 5
tn + 1 = tn + 17
tn + 1 = tn 16
a
b
c
d
e
f
t1 = 1
t1 = 5
t1 = 17
t1 = 9
t1 = 11
t1 = 90
2 We15 For each of the following, plot the first five terms of the sequence defined by the first order
a tn + 1 = 3tn
b tn + 1 = 2tn
c tn + 1 = 4tn
d tn + 1 = 2tn
e tn = 0.5tn 1
f tn + 1 = 2.5tn
t1 = 1
t1 = 1
t1 = 0.25
t1 = 0.5
t1 = 16
t1 = 2
3 We16 For each of the following, plot the first four terms of the sequence defined by the first order
a tn + 1 = 3tn 1
c tn + 1 = 2tn + 1
e tn + 1 = 1 + 3tn
t1 = 1
t1 = 5
1
t1 = 3
b tn + 1 = 3tn 4
d tn = 2tn 1 + 0.5
f
tn = 2 + 5tn 1
t1 = 3
t1 = 2
t1 = 0.2
4 For each of the following, plot the first four terms of the sequence defined by the first order difference
equation.
a tn + 1 = 100 3tn
c tn + 1 = tn 50
e tn = 0.1tn 1
t1 = 20
t1 = 100
t1 = 10
b tn + 1 = tn + 50
d tn + 1 = 10tn
f tn = 0.5tn 1 5
t1 = 100
t1 = 0.1
t1 = 30
diGiTal doC
doc-9446
WorkSHEET 6.2
231
interpretation of the graph of first

order difference equations
6F
From the previous exercise, you would have noticed that particular families of graphs were generated.
Straight or linear
A straight line or linear pattern is given by first order difference equations of the form tn + 1 = tn + b, and
(from the previous chapter) if each pair of terms has a common difference, it is an arithmetic sequence.
Value of term
60
30
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 x
Term number
non-linear (exponential)
A non-linear pattern is generated by first order difference equations of the form tn + 1 = atn, and (from the
previous chapter) if each pair of terms has a common ratio, it is a geometric sequence.
Value of term
120
60
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 x
Term number
One other non-linear pattern is produced by first order difference equations of the form tn + 1 = atn + b:
a combination of a geometric and an arithmetic sequence.
y
Value of term
240
180
120
60
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 x
Term number
Starting term
Earlier, the need for a starting term to be given to fully define a sequence was stated. As can be seen
below, the same pattern but a different starting point gives a different set of numbers.
tn + 1 = tn + 2
tn + 1 = tn + 2
232
t1 = 3
t1 = 2
gives 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, . . .
gives 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, . . .
Worked exaMple 17
The first five terms of a sequence are plotted on

the graph at right. Write the first order difference
equation that defines this sequence.
tn
20
18
Value of term
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
Think
WriTe
Read from the graph the first five terms of

the sequence.
The sequence from the graph is:

18, 15, 12, 9, 6, . . .
Notice that the graph is linear and there is a

common difference of 3 between each term.
tn + 1 = tn + b
Common difference, b = 3
tn + 1 = tn 3
(or tn + 1 tn = 3)
Write your answer including the value of one

of the terms (usually the first), as well as
the rule defining the first order difference
equation.
tn + 1 = tn 3
t1 = 18
Worked exaMple 18
tn
20
Value of term
The first four terms of a sequence are plotted on

the graph at right. Write the first order
difference equation that defines this sequence.
16
12
8
4
0
Think
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
WriTe
Read the terms of the sequence from the

graph.
The sequence is 2, 4, 8, 16, . . .
The graph is non-linear and there is a

common ratio of 2, that is, for the next term,
multiply the previous term by 2.
tn + 1 = a tn
Common ratio, a = 2
tn + 1 = 2tn
Define the first term.
t0 = 2
Write your answer.
tn + 1 = 2tn
t0 = 2
233
Worked exaMple 19
Value of term
MC The first five terms of a sequence are plotted on the graph below.
Which of the following first order difference equations could describe
tn
the sequence?
10
a tn + 1 = tn + 1
with t1 = 1
b tn + 1 = tn + 2
with t1 = 1
8
C tn + 1 = 2tn
with t1 = 1
6
d tn + 1 = tn + 1
with t1 = 2
4
e tn + 1 = tn + 2
with t1 = 2
TUTorial
eles-1275
Worked example 19
0
Think
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
WriTe
Eliminate the options systematically.

Examine the first term given by the graph to
decide if it is t1 = 1 or t1 = 2.
The coordinates of the first point on the graph are

(1, 1).
The first term is t1 = 1.
Eliminate options d and e.
Observe any pattern between each successive

point on the graph.
There is a constant difference of +2 or tn + 1 = tn + 2.
Option b gives both the correct pattern and

first term.
The answer is b.
interpretation of the graph of first order

dif ference equations
exercise 6F
1 We17 For each of the following graphs, write a first order difference equation that defines the
sequence plotted on the graph.

tn
20
16
12
8
4
0
Value of term
234
Value of term
tn
20
16
12
8
4
0
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
tn
6
4
2
0
2
4
6
8
tn
20
16
12
8
4
tn
100
80
60
40
20
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
0
f
0 1 2 3 4 5
Term number
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
Value of term
Value of term
Value of term
Value of term
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
tn
8
4
0
4
8
0 1 2 3 4 5
Term number
2 We 18 For each of the following graphs, write a first order difference equation that defines the
sequence plotted on the graph.

tn
20
16
12
8
4
b
Value of term
Value of term
tn
50
40
30
20
10
0 1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
tn
8
Value of term
Value of term
4
0
4
8
tn
100
80
60
40
20
0
1 2 3 4 5
Term number
tn
8
4
0
4
8
0 1 2 3 4 5
Term number
Value of term
Value of term
0 1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
0 1 2 3 4 5
Term number
tn
8
4
0
4
8
0 1 2 3 4 5
Term number
MC The first five terms of a sequence are plotted on the

graph at right.
Which of the following first order difference equations could
describe the sequence?
a tn + 1 = tn + 1
t1 = 1
b tn + 1 = 2tn
t1 = 1
C tn + 1 = tn + 1
t1 = 2
d tn + 1 = 2tn 1
t1 = 2
e tn + 1 = 2tn + 1
t1 = 2
Value of term
3 We 19
12
8
4
Value of term
Value of term
2 3 4 5 n
Term number
2 3 4 5 n
Term number
2 3 4 5 n
Term number
tn
50
40
30
20
10
0
5 MC The first five terms of a sequence are plotted on the graph
at right.
a tn + 1 = 0.5tn
t1 = 0.5
b tn + 1 = 0.5tn
t1 = 0.5
C tn + 1 = tn 25
t1 = 50
d tn + 1 = 0.5tn
t1 = 50
e tn + 1 = 0.5tn
t1 = 50
16
at right.
a tn + 1 = tn 8
t1 = 8
b tn + 1 = tn + 8
t1 = 8
C tn + 1 = tn 8
t1 = 45
d tn + 1 = tn + 8
t1 = 45
e tn + 1 = 8tn
t1 = 45
tn
20
tn
50
40
30
20
10
0
235
tn
at right.
a tn = 0.5tn 1
t1 = 0.5
b tn = tn 1 12
t1 = 8
C tn = 8tn 1
t1 = 0.5
d tn = 0.5tn 1
t1 = 8
e tn = 0.5tn 1
t1 = 8
Value of term
n
0
2 3 4 5
Term number
tn
5
Value of term
at right.
a tn + 1 = 5tn
t1 = 1
b tn + 1 = tn + 5
t1 = 1
C tn + 1 = 5
t1 = 5
d tn + 1 = 3tn 10
t1 = 5
e tn + 1 = 5tn + 5
t1 = 5
8
6
4
2
0
2
4
6
4
3
2
1
0
2 3 4 5
Term number
8 Graphs of the first five terms of first order difference equations are shown below together with the
first order difference equations. Match the graph with the first order difference equation by writing the
letter corresponding to the graph together with the number corresponding to the first order difference
equation.
Value of term
0 1 2 3 4 5
Term number
d
1 2 3 4 5
Term number
i tn + 1 = tn +
ii
iii
iv
v
vi
236
1
2
tn + 1 = tn 2
tn + 1 = 2tn
tn + 1 = 2tn 3
tn + 1 = 2tn 1
tn + 1 = 2tn 5
t1 = 8
t1 = 1
t1 = 1
t1 = 4
t1 = 1
t1 = 6
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
tn
20
16
12
8
4
0
1 2 3 4 5
Term number
tn
5
4
3
2
1
0
tn
25
20
15
10
5
0
Value of term
tn
18
16
12
8
4
0
Value of term
Value of term
tn
2
0
2
4
6
8
Value of term
Value of term
1 2 3 4 5
Term number
1 2 3 4 5
Term number
tn
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
Fibonacci sequences as second order

6G
Fibonacci numbers
Most of us have never taken the time to observe very carefully the number or arrangements of petals and
seeds in flowers. If we were to do so, some very interesting conclusions could be made. For each of the
following images, count the number of petals or spirals.
Euphorbia has 2 petals.
Trillium has 3 petals.
Lilies have 5 petals.
A cauliflower has 8 spirals.
Do you see a pattern in the numbers

so far? If you study the spirals in the photos
of the cauliflower and the pine cone, you will
see that the spiral pattern exists in the
opposite direction also. What do you notice
about the number of spirals in the opposite
direction in both of these photos?
The numbers form part of a sequence of
numbers known as the Fibonacci numbers.
The sequence of Fibonacci numbers is 1, 1,
2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55, 89, . . . Each new
term in this sequence is formed by adding
the two previous terms; the starting numbers
are 1 and 1. Any sequence in which each new
term is the result of adding the previous two
terms is known as a Fibonacci sequence.
For example, 5, 7, 12, 19, 31, 50, . . . is a
Fibonacci sequence as each new
term is the sum of the previous two terms.
Pine cones have 13 spirals.

237
diGiTal doC
doc-9447
Investigation
Fibonacci patterns
Leonardo di Pisano, also known as Fibonacci (which translates as son of Bonacci), first noticed the
sequence of Fibonacci numbers in 1202, when he was asked by his king to investigate a problem about
how fast rabbits can breed.
The sequence of Fibonacci numbers can be defined as a second order difference equation as follows:
Fn + 2 = Fn + Fn + 1
F1 = 1 and F2 = 1.
As with first order difference equations, this equation consists of two parts:
Fn + 2 = Fn + Fn + 1 describes the pattern in the sequence
(each new term is formed by adding the two previous terms)
F1 = 1 and F2 = 1 are the first two terms of the sequence.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch
a video about
Fibonacci
sequences.
lucas numbers
Another useful Fibonacci sequence is one called the Lucas numbers, named after nineteenth-century
mathematician Edouard Lucas. The sequence of Lucas numbers starts with the numbers 2 and 1. The
first 10 numbers of this sequence are 2, 1, 3, 4, 7, 11, 18, 29, 47 and 76.
Ln + 1
Continue this sequence and investigate the ratio of the terms
. Compare this with the ratio of the
Ln
Fn + 1
terms
from the sequence of Fibonacci numbers. What do you notice?
Fn
The sequence of Lucas numbers can be also defined as a second order difference equation.
Ln + 2 = Ln + Ln + 1
L1 = 2 and L2 = 1
As stated earlier, any sequence in which each new term is the result of adding the previous two terms,
given any two starting values, is known as a Fibonacci sequence.
The second order difference equation for a Fibonacci sequence is set out in the same way as defined
earlier for the sequence of Fibonacci numbers and Lucas numbers. The notation can be either of the
following:
fn + 2 = fn + fn + 1 given f1 and f2
or
tn + 2 = tn + tn + 1 given t1 and t2.
Worked exaMple 20
For the Fibonacci sequence given by the second order difference equation:
fn + 2 = fn + fn + 1
f1 = 2 and f2 = 5,
state the first six terms of the sequence.

Think
WriTe
The first two terms are already defined.
f1 = 2 and f2 = 5
Use the second order difference equation to

generate the remaining required terms.
fn + 2 = fn + fn + 1
f3 = f1 + f2
=2+5
=7
f5 = f3 + f4
= 7 + 12
= 19
State the six terms.
The first six terms of the sequence are 2, 5, 7, 12, 19

and 31.
f4 = f2 + f3
=5+7
= 12
f6 = f4 + f5
= 12 + 19
= 31
As was the case with first order difference equations, we can use the second order difference equation
for a Fibonacci sequence to find the value of previous terms in a sequence, given that we have later
numbers of the sequence.
238
Worked exaMple 21
MC For part of a Fibonacci sequence given as . . ., 9, 14, 23, 37, 60, 97, the first two terms could be
given as:
a t1 = 4, t2 = 1
b t1 = 1, t2 = 4
C t1 = 1, t2 = 3
d t1 = 1, t2 = 1
e t1 = 2, t2 = 1
Think
WriTe
Write the difference equation for the Fibonacci

sequence.
tn + 2 = tn + tn + 1
As we know the later terms and wish to find

the preceding terms, rearrange the difference
equation.
tn = tn + 2 tn + 1
Substitute the known values into the equation.

This will produce the number that precedes 9.
tn = 14 9
=5
Substitute 9 and 5 into the equation to find the

number that precedes 5. Continue with this
process until the first two numbers match the
two terms given in the question.
tn = 9 5
=4
tn = 5 4
=1
The last two numbers calculated appear as

options; that is, t1 = 1 and t2 = 4.
The first two terms could be t1 = 1 and t2 = 4.

Therefore, the answer is b.
An alternative method to solving the question in Worked example 21 could be a trial-and-error approach.
Simply produce a sequence given the starting points for each option and then see which one results in
the given sequence.
Worked exaMple 22
Given t1 = 3, t4 = 11 and t5 = 18 as three terms of a particular Fibonacci

sequence, find the value of t2.
Think
WriTe
Given the value of t4 and t5, work backwards by

rearranging the difference equation to find t3.
t5 = t3 + t4
t3 = t5 t4
= 18 11
=7
Use the values of t4 and t3 to find t2.
t2 = t4 t3
= 11 7
=4
State the answer.
The value of t2 is 4.
TUTorial
eles-1276
Worked example 22
Fibonacci sequences as second order

exercise 6G
1 We20 For Fibonacci sequences given by the second order difference equation fn+2=fn + fn+1, give
the first 10 terms when the first two terms are defined as follows:
a f1 = 0 and f2 = 1
b f1 = 2 and f2 = 1
c f1 = 5 and f2 = 3
d f1 = 34 and f2 = 21.
diGiTal doC
doc-9448
Fibonacci sequences
2 State which of the above sequences contain the Fibonacci numbers.

239
3 For Fibonacci sequences given by the second order difference equation fn+2=fn + fn+1, list the first
10 terms when the first two terms are defined as follows:
a f1 = 1 and f2 = 4
c f1 = 2 and f2 = 1
b f1 = 2 and f2 = 0
d f1 = 4 and f2 = 5.
4 For the following Fibonacci sequences, use a CAS calculator to:

i graphically display the first 6 terms
ii find the 21st term of the sequence; that is, f21.
a fn + 2 = fn + fn + 1
f1 = 2, f2 = 4
b fn + 2 = fn + fn + 1
f1 = 1, f2 = 3
c fn = fn 2 + fn 1
f1 = 3, f2 = 1
5 Use an appropriate method to graph the first eight terms of the Fibonacci sequences with the following
starting terms:
a f1 = 6 and f2 = 1
c f1 = 1 and f2 = 2
Comment on the shape of the graphs produced.
b f1 = 12 and f2 = 8
d f1 = 3 and f2 = 2.
6 Write the first seven terms of the Fibonacci sequence in which:

a the first two terms are 2 and 6
b the first two terms are 6 and 2.
Explain why the sequences are different even though the same two values are used at the start.
7 MC For the difference equation tn = tn 2 + tn 1, where t1 = 4 and t2 = 3, the first five terms of the
sequence are:
a 3, 4, 7, 11, 18
C 4, 3, 7, 10, 17
e 1, 7, 8, 15, 23
b 4, 3, 4, 3, 4
d 4, 3, 12, 36, 432
8 MC For the Fibonacci sequence with a difference equation fn = fn 2 + fn 1, where f1 = 1 and f2 = 7, the
value of f7 is:
a 61
C 38
e 113
b 51
d 43
9 MC For the sequences shown below, which one is a Fibonacci sequence?

a 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, . . .
C 1, 3, 4, 7, 9, 11, . . .
e 1, 2, 2, 5, 9, 18, . . .
b 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, . . .
d 3, 3, 6, 9, 15, 24, . . .
For part of a Fibonacci sequence given as . . ., 9, 14, 23, 37, 60, 97, the first
two terms could be given as:
a t1 = 1, t2 = 4
b t1 = 3, t2 = 1
C t1 = 1, t2 = 3
d t1 = 1, t2 = 1
e t1 = 2, t2 = 1
10 We21
MC
11 MC For the sequence of Fibonacci numbers shown in the graph, the second order difference
equation is:
a tn = tn 2 + tn 1, where t1 = 3 and t2 = 1
b tn + 2 = tn + tn + 1, where t1 = 1 and t2 = 3
C tn + 2 = tn + tn + 1, where t1 = 3 and t2 = 1
d tn 2 = tn + tn + 1, where t1 = 1 and t2 = 3
e tn = tn 1 2, where t1 = 1 and t2 = 3
tn
0
2
Value of term
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
240
Term number
2 4 6
n
12 Using a microscope to study the spread of a certain bacteria in an agar dish, a medical scientist
observes the following number of colonies at the end of each minute.

After
1 minute
6
After
2 minutes
9
After
3 minutes
15
After
4 minutes
24
After
5 minutes
39
Assuming the number counted continues to follow this Fibonacci sequence, state the number of
bacteria (to the nearest million) expected after 30 minutes.
13 For each of the following Fibonacci sequences, determine the two starting terms, given that they both
must be the smallest possible non-negative numbers.
a . . ., 13, 22, 35, 57, 92
b . . ., 14, 23, 37, 60, 97
c . . ., 8, 15, 23, 38, 61
d . . ., 16, 25, 41, 66, 107
14 We22 Given the following values as three terms of a particular Fibonacci sequence, find the value of
the required term.
a t1 = 4, t4 = 16 and t5 = 26; t2 = ?
b t2 = 1, t4 = 9 and t5 = 17; t1 = ?
c t2 = 3, t5 = 7 and t6 = 12; t1 = ?
d t4 = 22, t6 = 57 and t7 = 92; t2 = ?
15 Generate a sequence of eight numbers using the following second order difference equations:
a tn + 2 = tn + tn + 1
t1 = 3, t2 = 4
b tn + 2 = 2tn + tn + 1
t1 = 1, t2 = 1
c tn + 2 = 2tn + 2tn + 1 t1 = 1, t2 = 2
d tn = 3tn 2 + tn 1
t1 = 2, t2 = 2.
241
Summary
Generating the terms
of a sequence defined
by a first order
difference equation
A first order difference equation defines a relationship between two successive terms of a sequence,
for example, between:
tn, the previous term, and tn + 1, the next term,
or
tn 1, the previous term, and tn, the next term.
A first order difference equation has two main parts:
tn + 1 = tn + b (where b is a constant) describes the pattern in the sequence
t1 = 1 is the first or a starting term in the sequence.
First order difference equations can be expressed as follows:
tn + 1 = 2tn + 3
t0 = 1.
It is read as the next term is twice the previous term plus 3, starting at 1 or
tn + 1 tn = 4
t1 = 1
It is read as the difference between two consecutive terms is 4, starting at 1.
Starting term
A starting term is needed to fully define a sequence. The same pattern but different starting points
gives different sets of numbers.
gives 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, . . .
tn + 1 = tn + 2, t1 = 3
tn + 1 = tn + 2, t1 = 2
gives 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, . . .
t0 is used as the first term for situations that are dependent on time.
t1 is used as the first term for situations that are ordinal, such as placings (first place, t1, second
place, t2, third place, t3, . . .) or prizes (first prize, second prize, . . .).
The relationship
between arithmetic
sequences and first
order difference
equations
Pronumeral conventions
Term
First term
Common difference
Common ratio

sequence convention
a or t1
d
r
First order difference

equation convention
t0 or t1
b
a
The common difference, b = t2 t1 = t3 t2 = t4 t3 = . . .

An arithmetic sequence with a common difference of b may be defined by a first order difference
equation of the form:
t n + 1 = tn + b
(or tn + 1 tn = b)
where b is the common difference and for
b > 0 it is an increasing sequence
b < 0 it is a decreasing sequence.
The relationship
between geometric
sequences and first
order difference
equations
The geometric common ratio, r, is the pronumeral a in first order difference equations.
t
t
t
The common ratio, r = a = 2 = 3 = 4 = . . .
t1 t2 t3
A geometric sequence with a common ratio of a may be defined by a first order difference equation
of the form:
tn + 1 = atn
where a is the common ratio
a > 1 is an increasing sequence
0 < a < 1 is a decreasing sequence
a < 0 is a sequence alternating between positive and negative values.

difference equations:
Type 1 arithmetic
sequence
The next term is the previous term plus a fixed amount or a fixed percentage of an initial value.
242
tn + 1 = tn + b
where b = the common difference = fixed amount or % of the first term, t0 or t1.

Type 3 Combination
of arithmetic and
geometric sequence
interpretation of the
graph of first order
The next term is the previous term plus a percentage of the previous terms value.
tn + 1 = tn + % of tn
tn + 1 = a tn
where a is the common ratio.
The next term is the previous term plus a percentage of the previous terms value plus a fixed
amount or a fixed percentage of an initial value.
tn + 1 = tn + % tn + b
tn + 1 = a tn + b
where a = the common ratio and b = the common difference.
A straight line or linear pattern is an arithmetic sequence given
by first order difference equations of the form tn + 1 = tn + b.
Value of term

Type 2 Geometric
sequence
60
30
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 x
Term number
A non-linear (exponential) pattern is generated by either

of the following:
(a) a first order difference equation of the form:
tn + 1 = a tn
(a geometric progression)
Value of term
120
60
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 x
Term number
y
(a combination of a geometric and

an arithmetic sequence).
240
Value of term
or
(b) tn + 1 = a tn + b
180
120
60
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 x
Term number
Fibonacci sequences
as second order
The Fibonacci numbers are a unique sequence of numbers (1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55, 89, . . .).
Each new term is formed by adding the two previous terms.
Any sequence in which each new term is the result of adding the previous two terms, given any
two starting values, is known as a Fibonacci sequence.
The Lucas numbers are a special group of numbers that follow a Fibonacci sequence and have
starting values of 2 and 1.
The second order difference equation for a Fibonacci sequence is set out using the following
notation:
fn + 2 = fn + fn + 1 given f1 and f2
or
tn + 2 = tn + tn + 1 given t1 and t2.
243
Chapter review
M U lT ip l e
C h oiCe
1 Which one of the following equations is not a first order difference equation?
a tn = 1tn 1
d tn + 1 = 1 n
b fn + 1 = fn 2
e fn = 10fn 1
C pn = pn 1
2 Which of the sequences below is generated by the first order difference equation tn + 1 = tn 4, t1 = 6?
a 4, 10, 16, 22, 28, . . .
d 6, 2, 2, 6, 10, . . .
b 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 28, . . .

e 6, 2, 10, 4, 14, . . .
C 6, 2, 6, 2, 6, . . .
3 A sequence is defined by the first order difference equation:
tn + 1 = 3tn 2
The third term, (that is, t3) of the sequence is
The first term of the sequence is:
a 161
1
b 8 3
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
7.
C 5
d 1
e 5
The first order difference equation that defines an arithmetic sequence is:
t1 = 1
b tn + 1 = 2tn
t1 = 1
C tn + 1 = tn 2
t1 = 1
e tn + 1 = tn + 3
t1 = 1
a tn + 1 = 2tn
d tn + 1 = 2tn + 2
t1 = 1
5 The sequence 4, 2, 0, 2, 4, . . . can be defined by the first order difference equation:

a tn + 1 = 2tn
d tn + 1 = 2tn + 2
t1 = 4
t1 = 4
b tn + 1 = 2tn
e tn + 1 = 4tn + 2
t1 = 4
t1 = 4
6 The first order difference equation that defines a geometric sequence is:
a tn + 1 = tn + 2
d tn + 1 = tn + 2
t1 = 1
t1 = 1
b tn + 1 = tn 2
e tn + 1 = 2tn 2
t1 = 1
t1 = 1
C tn + 1 = tn 2
t1 = 4
C tn + 1 = 2tn
t1 = 1
7 The sequence 3, 12, 48, 192, 768, . . . can be defined by the first order difference equation:
a tn + 1 = 4tn
d tn + 1 = 3tn
t1 = 3
b tn + 1 = 4tn
t1 = 3
C tn + 1 = 3tn
t1 = 4
t1 = 4
e tn + 1 = 4tn
t1 = 3
8 A library adds 300 new books to its collection each year. The collection began with 4000 books and it
is claimed that no book has ever been removed.
A first order difference equation that reflects this situation is:
a Bn = Bn + 1 + 300
B0 = 300
b Bn = Bn + 1 + 300
B0 = 4000
C Bn = 1.03Bn + 1 + 100
B0 = 300
d Bn = 1.03Bn + 1 + 4120
B0 = 4000
e Bn = 1.04Bn + 1 + 300
B0 = 300
9 George deposits $80 during the second week of each month into an account that earns compound
The first order difference equation that could describe the

sequence is:
a tn + 1 = tn 40
t1 = 7
b tn + 1 = tn + 40
t1 = 7
C tn + 1 = tn 40
t1 = 40
d tn + 1 = tn 7
t1 = 40
e tn + 1 = tn + 7
t1 = 40
11 The first five terms of a sequence are plotted on the graph at right.
The first order difference equation that could describe the

sequence is:
a tn + 1 = tn + 4
t1 = 3
b tn + 1 = 2tn + 1
t1 = 3
C tn + 1 = tn 3
t1 = 4
d tn + 1 = tn + 3
t1 = 4
e tn + 1 = 3tn
t1 = 4
244
tn
80
60
40
20
0 1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
Value of term
10 The first five terms of a sequence are plotted on the graph at right.
Value of term
interest of 6% per annum compounding monthly and calculated at the end of the month.
The first order difference equation that would describe this situation is:
a An = 1.005An 1 + 80.4
A0 = 0
b An = 1.005An 1 + 80.4
A1 = 0
C An = 1.06An 1 + 84.8
A0 = 0
d An = 1.06An 1 + 84.8
A1 = 0
e An = 1.08An 1 + 64.8
A0 = 0
tn
40
30
20
10
0
1 2 3 4 5
Term number
12 For the Fibonacci sequence with a second order difference equation given as fn + 2 = fn + fn + 1, where
f1 = 3 and f2 = 6, the value of f8 is:
a 165
d 21
b 102
e 13
C 63
13 For the sequences shown below, which one is a Fibonacci sequence?

a 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, . . .
d 1, 3, 7, 15, 31, 63, . . .
b 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, . . .
e 1, 1, 2, 4, 7, 13, . . .
C 1, 3, 4, 7, 11, 18, 29, . . .
14 For part of a Fibonacci sequence given as . . ., 14, 23, 37, 60, 97, the first two terms could be given as:
a t1 = 2, t2 = 6
d t1 = 1, t2 = 4
b t1 = 1, t2 = 7
e t1 = 0, t2 = 4
C t1 = 2, t2 = 3
Write the first five terms of each of the sequences defined below.
t1 = 1
t1 = 0
S ho rT
a n S W er
a tn = 4tn 1 3
b tn + 1 = 3 + 5tn
Express the sequence defined by tn = 2 n, n = 1, 2, 3, . . . as a difference equation.
3 Express the sequence defined by tn = 8 1.5n 1, n = 1, 2, 3, . . . as a difference equation.

4 Show there is a common ratio for the difference equation tn + 1 = 3tn, where t1 = 5.
5 A club loses 4% of its membership each year but adds 20 new members each year. The initial
membership of the club was 300. Write a difference equation to describe this situation, stating clearly
the terms you use.
6
On a graph, plot the first five terms of the sequence described by the difference equation:
tn + 1 = 2tn 1
t1 = 2
7 The cost in dollars, Cn, to complete a house-painting job on the nth day is given by the difference
equation Cn + 1 = 0.5Cn + 100 where C2 = 300.

a How much will it cost on day 4?
b Show that it is neither an arithmetic nor geometric sequence.
c How much will it cost on day 1?
Write the difference equation that defines this sequence.
9 Write the first five terms for each of the sequences defined below:
a tn + 2 = tn + tn + 1
t1 = 2, t2 = 3
b fn + 2 = fn + fn + 1
f1 = 0, f2 = 4
c fn = fn 2 + fn 1
f1 = 2, f2 = 6
Value of term
8 The first four terms of a sequence are plotted on the graph at right.
tn
40
30
20
10
0 1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
ex Ten d ed
r eS p o n S e
Task 1
1 A band has been advised that, to tour successfully, the number of gigs played in the nth month for the
first five months would need to fit the difference equation tn = 2n + 8, n = 1, 2, 3 . . .

a Express this as a difference equation.
b Plot the 5 terms of the sequence.
2 The occurrence of cymbal crashes in the bands most popular rock ballad follows the geometric
sequence tn + 1 = 2tn, t1 = 3, where tn is the bar number of the nth crash.

The occurrence of timpani rolls in the same song follows another sequence, tn + 1 = tn + 10, t1 = 4.
At what bar number does a timpani roll and cymbal crash coincide for the first time?
3 As a future side-project, the lead guitarist of the band wants to open her own record store. To fund the
project, she sets up a savings account that earns 9% interest p.a., compounded monthly and calculated
at the end of the month. She opens the account with $500 and deposits $100 at the start of each month.
Represent this information with a difference equation.
245
4 The band uses an exotic flower as the cover art for their new record. The flower has a multi-tiered bud,
where the number of seeds per tier is given by the Fibonacci numbers 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8 . . .
a Represent this information as a difference equation.
b Find the number of seeds in the 10th tier.
c Which tier has 987 seeds?
5 The bands manager notices that the sales of their new record follow a Fibonacci sequence expressed by
the difference equation fn = fn 1 + fn 2, where f1 = 2 and f2 = 4. Each term of the sequence is measured
in thousands of units shifted per month.
a List the first 8 terms of the sequence.
b Determine the value of f 10.
Task 2
1 Two brothers set up a small workshop to produce surfboards.
The number of surfboards they produce each month follows

an arithmetic sequence and is given below.
Month number
Number of surfboards
produced
11
14
17
a Write the common difference of the arithmetic sequence.

b Write a difference equation that defines this sequence,
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Practice
VCE exam
questions
Use StudyON to
access all exam
questions on this
topic since 2002.
diGiTal doC
doc-9449
Test Yourself
Chapter 6
246
where Bn represents the number of surfboards produced in

the nth month.
2 The brothers had been advised that to be successful, the
number of surfboards produced in the nth month would need
to be reflected by Bn = 4n 1.
a Express this as a difference equation.
b Plot the first five terms of the sequence.
c In which month would the number of surfboards produced
in a month according to this advice first exceed the
number produced in a month as described in question 1?
3 In order to expand the business later, the brothers set up a savings account that earns 6% interest per
annum compounded monthly and calculated at the end of the month. The brothers open the account
with $1000 and deposit $500 during each month.
a Write a difference equation to represent this information, where An is the amount in the account at
the end of the nth month.
b Find the amount in the account after 5 years.
Task 3
Pythagorean triads are three integers that satisfy Pythagoras theorem. These triads, such as 3, 4 and 5 or
5, 12 and 13, can be formed from a Fibonacci sequence as shown below.
Take any four consecutive terms of a Fibonacci sequence. To obtain the first number of the
Pythagorean triad, multiply the two middle terms and double this answer. To obtain the second number
of the triad, multiply the two outer terms (from the four consecutive terms). To obtain the third number
of the triad, sum the squares of the two middle terms (from the four consecutive terms).
1 Consider the small Fibonacci sequence 1, 2, 3 and 5. State the values of t1 and t2 and represent the
sequence as a second order difference equation.
2 Calculate the Pythagorean triad formed by the sequence 1, 2, 3 and 5.
3 The terms t4 = 7 and t5 = 11 form part of a Fibonacci sequence. Find the value of t1, t2 and t3.
4 Use t1, t2, t3 and t4 from question 3 to find the Pythagorean triad formed by the sequence of these four terms.
5 Calculate the Pythagorean triad formed by the sequence 2, 1, 3 and 4.
6 What makes the sequence from question 6 a Fibonacci sequence?
ICT activities
Chapter opener
diGiTal doC
difference equations. (page 215)
6C The relationship between geometric sequences

and first order difference equations
diGiTal doC
WorkSHEET 6.1 doc-9444: Write arithmetic and geometric sequences
in the form of difference equations. (page 222)
TUTorial
We7 eles-1273: Watch a tutorial on recognising the difference
between geometric and arithmetic sequences given a difference
equation. (page 221)
6d Setting up first order difference equations to

represent practical situations
diGiTal doC
SkillSHEET 6.1 doc-9445: Changing a percentage to a decimal
(page 227)
TUTorialS
We11 eles-1333: Learn how to use a difference equation to
model a simple interest application. (page 224)
We12 eles-1334: Learn how to use a difference equation to
model a bird population each year. (page 225)
TUTorial
We14 eles-1274: Watch a tutorial on using a CAS calculator to
represent a sequence graphically. (page 229)
6F interpretation of the graph of first order

TUTorial
We19 eles-1275: Watch a tutorial on finding a first order
difference equation using a graph. (page 234)
6G Fibonacci sequences as second order

diGiTal doCS
Investigation doc-9447: Fibonacci patterns (page 238)
doc-9448: Investigate terms in a Fibonacci sequence. (page239)
TUTorial
We22 eles-1276: Watch a tutorial on finding the value of a specific
term given the difference equation. (page 239)
Chapter review
diGiTal doC
inTeraCTiViTY
Setting up first order difference equations int-0187: Consolidate your
understanding of difference equations. (page 223)
6e Graphical representation of a sequence

defined by a first order difference equation
diGiTal doC
WorkSHEET 6.2 doc-9446: Recognise graphical representation
of sequences, solve worded problems and find terms given a
difference equation. (page 231)
247
The relationship between

geometric sequences and first order
1 a, e, f, h
2 a tn + 1 = 2tn
t1 = 5
b tn + 1 = 3tn
t1 = 2
c tn + 1 = 6tn
t1 = 1
d tn + 1 = tn
t1 = 5
e tn + 1 = tn
t1 = 3
f tn + 1 = 4tn
t1 = 2
g tn + 1 = 4tn
t1 = 3
h tn + 1 = 3tn
t1 = 5
3 D
248
Value of term
Value of term
tn
80
60
40
20
Value of term
2 a
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
tn
100
80
60
40
20
tn
100
80
60
40
20
Value of term
tn
40
30
20
10
1 2 3 4 5
Term number
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
tn
40
30
20
10
0
1 2 3 4 5
Term number
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
tn
80
60
40
20
0
1 2 3 4 5
Term number
tn
10
5
0
5
10
n
0 1 2 3 4 5
Term number
tn
20
15
10
5
0
tn
20
15
10
5
0
Value of term
1 a
tn
18
16
12
8
4
tn
20
15
10
5
exercise 6e
Graphical representation
of a sequence defined by a first order
difference equation
exercise 6C
Value of term
The relationship between

arithmetic sequences and first order
1 b, d, g, j
t1 = 1
2 a tn + 1 = tn + 2
b tn + 1 = tn + 4
t1 = 2
c tn + 1 = tn + 7
t1 = 3
d tn + 1 = tn + 4
t1 = 2
e tn + 1 = tn 7
t1 = 12
f tn + 1 = tn 5
t1 = 6
g tn + 1 = tn 0.5
t1 = 1
h tn + 1 = tn + 6.5
t1 = 4
3 B
4 a tn + 1 = tn + 1
t1 = 4
b tn + 1 = tn + 1
t1 = 1
c tn + 1 = tn + 1
t1 = 9
d tn + 1 = tn 1
t1 = 0
e tn + 1 = tn 1
t1 = 4
f tn + 1 = tn + 2
t1 = 3
g tn + 1 = tn + 3
t1 = 1
h tn + 1 = tn 2
t1 = 4
5 A
Value of term
exercise 6b
Value of term
200 000, 202 000, 204 000, 206 000,

208 000
c tn + 1 = tn 7, t0 = 100; 100, 93, 86,
79, 72
d tn + 1 = 2tn 50, t0 = $200; $200, $350,
$650, $1250, $2450

difference equations to represent
practical situations
1 a Ln = Ln 1 + 2,
L1 = 50
b Ln = Ln 1 + 10,
L1 = 8
c An = An 1 + 10,
A0 = 50
d Vn = Vn 1 2,
V0 = 5000
2 a Pn = 1.03Pn 1, P0 = 2600, P3 = 2841
b An = 1.012An 1, A0 = 45 000,
A5 = $4 7 766
c An = 0.96An 1, A0 = 70 000, A2 = 64 512
d Pn = 1.12Pn 1, P1 = 3500, P4 = 4917
3 a Pn + 1 = 1.07Pn + 1000, P0 = 15 000,
P4 = 24 102
b Pn + 1 = 0.99Pn + 200, P0 = 3000,
P3 = 3505
c An + 1 = 1.01An + 150, A0 = 0,
A3 = $454.52
4 C
5 A
6 C
7 A
8 E
9 a Pn + 1 = 1.04Pn 10, P0 = 10 000
b 10 390, 10 796, 11 217, 11 656, 12 112,
12 587, 13 080, 13 594
c The third week
10 a Arithmetic
b An + 1 = An 20, A1 = 4000
c 4000, 3980, 3960, 3940, 3920,
3900, 3880
d Geometric
e An + 1 = 0.99An, A1 = 4000
f 3766
Value of term
b tn + 1 = tn + 2000, t0 = 200 000;
exercise 6d
Value of term
exercise 6a Generating the terms of

a sequence defined by a first order
difference equation
1 b, c, g, j
2 a i 6, 8, 10, 12, 14
ii 5, 2, 1, 4, 7
iii 23, 24, 25, 26, 27
iv 7, 3, 13, 23, 33
b Arithmetic sequences
3 a i 1, 3, 9, 27, 81
ii 2, 10, 50, 250, 1250
iii 1, 4, 16, 64, 256
iv 1, 2, 4, 8, 16
b Geometric sequences
4 a 1, 3, 7, 15, 31
b 5, 13, 37, 109, 325
c 6, 5, 6, 5, 6
d 1, 4, 19, 94, 469
5 C
6E
7 7
8 1
9 D
1
1
3
1
1 3
10 a tn + 1 = 3tn, t0 = ;
, , 2 4 , 6 4 , 20 4
4
4 4
t1 = 2
t1 = 3
t1 = 3
t1 = 5
t1 = 0.5
t1 = 0.1
Value of term
4 a tn + 1 = 3tn
b tn + 1 = 5tn
c tn + 1 = 4tn
d tn + 1 = 2tn
e tn + 1 = tn
f tn + 1 = 3tn
5 A
diFFerenCe eQUaTionS
Value of term
Answers CHAPTER 6
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
tn
100
80
60
40
20
0
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
Value of term
Value of term
Value of term
Value of term
4 a
tn
50
40
30
20
10
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
tn
500
400
300
200
100
0
tn
160
120
100
80
40
0
40
tn
250
200
150
100
50
1 2 3 4 5n
Term number
tn + 1 = 100 3tn
2 3 4 5
Term number
Value of term
100
tn + 1 = tn + 50
10
0
Value of term
10
0
5 a
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
10
exercise 6F interpretation of the graph

of first order difference equations
1 a tn + 1 = tn + 4
t1 = 3
b tn + 1 = tn + 3
t1 = 2
c tn + 1 = tn 2
t1 = 14
d tn + 1 = tn 20
t1 = 90
e tn + 1 = tn + 2
t1 = 6
f tn + 1 = tn 4
t1 = 8
2 a tn + 1 = 2tn
t1 = 1
b tn + 1 = 2tn
t1 = 5
c tn + 1 = 2tn
t1 = 1
d tn + 1 = tn
t1 = 6
e tn + 1 = 0.5tn
t1 = 100
f tn + 1 = 0.5tn
t1 = 8
3 D
4 C
5 E
6 E
7 D
8 a ii
d iv
b v
e vi
12
3 4
Term
12
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 n
Term number
tn
10
8
6
4
2
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 n
tn
3
0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
36
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
n
Term number
tn + 1 = 10 tn
1 2 3 4 5
Term number
After alternating from negative to

positive, then reaching zero, the value of
the terms increase as the term number
increases.
c
3 4
Term
Term number
18
As the term number increases, the value

of the terms increases.
exercise 6G Fibonacci sequences as

second order difference equations
1 a 0, 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34
b 2, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8
c 5, 3, 2, 1, 1, 0, 1, 1, 2, 3
d 34, 21, 13, 8, 5, 3, 2, 1, 1, 0
2 All of them
3 a 1, 4, 5, 9, 14, 23, 37, 60, 97, 157
b 2, 0, 2, 2, 4, 6, 10, 16, 26, 42
c 2, 1, 3, 4, 7, 11, 18, 29, 47, 76
d 4, 5, 9, 14, 23, 37, 60, 97, 157, 254
4 a i 2, 4, 6, 10, 16, 26
ii f 21 = 35 422
24
tn
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
c iii
f i
18
tn
100
50
b i 1, 3, 4, 7, 11, 18
ii f 21 = 24 476
Term number
20
tn = 0.5 tn 1 5
tn + 1 = tn 50
12
tn
30
1 2 3 4 5
Term number
1 2 3 4 5
30
50
0
Term value
1 2 3 4 5
Term number
tn
50
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
tn
80
60
40
20
1 2 3 4 5
Term number
15
Value of term
Term number
tn
100
80
60
40
20
Value of term
tn 0 1 2 3 4 5
0
n
100
200
300
400
500
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
tn = 0.1 tn 1
1
0
Term value
Value of term
Value of term
Value of term
ii f21 = 19 308
c i 3, 1, 4, 5, 9, 14
tn
10
Value of term
Value of term
Value of term
tn
50
40
30
20
10
Term value
Value of term
3 a
3 4
Term
As the term number increases, the value

of the terms increases in magnitude but
remains negative.
249
7 A
10 D
13 C
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
2 24th bar
3 An + 1 = 1.0075An + 100.75, A1 = 500,
9 A
12 B
n = 1, 2, 3, . . .
fn = fn 1 + fn 2 where f1 = 1, f2 = 1
55 seeds
c 16th tier
2, 4, 6, 10, 16, 26, 42, 68
178
Task 2
1 a d=3
b Bn + 1 = Bn + 3
B1 = 5
2 a Bn + 1 = Bn + 4
B1 = 3
4 a
b
5 a
b
1 a 1, 7, 31, 127, 511

b 0, 3, 18, 93, 468
2 tn + 1 = tn 1
t1 = 1
3 tn + 1 = 1.5tn
t1 = 8
Term number
After alternating from positive to

negative, then reaching zero, the value
of the terms decreases as the term
number increases.
a 2, 6, 8, 14, 22, 36, 58
b 6, 2, 8, 10, 18, 28, 46
The third term in these sequences
will be the same, but the fourth and
following terms are different because
the second terms are different.
C
A
D
B
B
7 000 000
a t1 = 5 and t2 = 4
b t1 = 3 and t2 = 1
c t1 = 6 and t2 = 1
d t1 = 5 and t2 = 2
a t2 = 6
b t1 = 7
c t1 = 1
d t2 = 9
a 3, 4, 7, 11, 18, 29, 47, 76
b 1, 1, 3, 5, 11, 21, 43, 85
c 1, 2, 6, 16, 44, 120, 328, 896
d 2, 2, 8, 14, 38, 80, 194, 434
8 B
11 B
14 D
ShorT anSWer
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 n
15
5
45
= 3 and 15
=3
5 Pn = 0.96Pn 1 + 20
Value of term
Value of term
3
2
1
0
1
2
3
P0 = 300
tn
20
15
10
5
0
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
t
t
b 4 3 and t4 t3 t3 t2
exTended reSponSe
Task 1
1 a tn + 1 = tn + 2, t1 = 10
250
3 D
6 C
tn
20
10
A0 = 1000
Task 3
1 tn + 2 = tn + tn + 1 t1 = 1, t2 = 2
2 5, 12 and 13
3 t1 = 1, t2 = 3 and t3 = 4
4 7, 24 and 25
5 6, 8 and 10
6 Given two starting terms, the third and
fourth terms are the sum of their previous
two terms.
MUlTiple ChoiCe
2B
5C
1 2 3 4 5 n
Term number
c The 4th month

3 a An + 1 = 1.005An + 500
b $36 233.87
t3 t 2
c $400
8 tn + 1 = tn + 10
t1 = 5
9 a 2, 3, 5, 8, 13
b 0, 4, 4, 8, 12
c 2, 6, 8, 14, 22
ChapTer reVieW
1 D
4 C
18
15
12
9
6
3
0
7 a $225
tn
Value of term
tn
Exam practice 2 CHAPTERS 16

Core and Module 1 number patterns
M U lTip l e
C ho iC e
15 minutes
1 The revenue from sales each quarter for the first year in a 5-year period is shown below.
Quarter
Revenue ($)
1
12 500
2
34 600
3
24 200

one mark.
4
15 500
Using these values to determine the seasonal index for each month, the seasonal index for quarter 4
will be closest to:
a 0.18
b 0.64
C 0.71
d 0.78
e 1.40
The sixth term in the arithmetic sequence 19, 23, 27, . . . is:
a 27
b 35
C 36
d 39
e 40
The first term of an arithmetic sequence is 3 and the sum of the first 12 terms is 294. The sum of the
first 5 terms is:
a 124
b 84
C 35
d 12.5
e 106
The difference equation tn + 1 = 5tn + b where t1 = 2 generates the sequence 2, 7, 32, 157, . . .
The value of b is:
C 2
a 3
b 2
d 3
e 5
The number of people enrolling in a language school has increased every term by 3% since the
beginning of 2009. There were 26 people enrolled in term 1 of 2009. Pn is the number of people
enrolled at the start of the nth term. Let P1 = 26.
The rule for the difference equation that could be used to model this is:
a Pn + 1 = 3Pn
b Pn + 1 = 1.03Pn
C Pn + 1 = 0.97Pn
d Pn + 1 = Pn + 26
e Pn + 1 = 1.03Pn + 26
6 Ellie has a habit of consuming 30 lollies a day. She decides to eliminate this habit by reducing the
number of lollies she eats each day by two, until she gets to zero. On the first day of this plan, she
consumes 30 lollies. The number of lollies she will consume while on this plan is:
a 30
b 120
C 240
d 300
e 450
7 The 3rd term of a geometric sequence is 36 and the 7th term is 182.25. The sum of the first 10terms
is closest to:
a 1813.28
b 922.64
C 615.09
d 604.43
e 218.25
8 Three consecutive terms in a geometric sequence are . . ., 16, m, 25, . . .
If the terms in the sequence can be described by the rule tn = ar n 1 then a possible value for r is:
a 1.25
b 1.56
C 16
d 20
e 20.5
9 For an infinite geometric series, t2 = 4.8 and t7 = 0.049 152. The sum of the series is:
a 5
b 12
C 20
Total marks = 9
d 26
e 30
1 The values listed below show the percentage scores for an assignment attained by 20 students in a
Maths class.
52, 67, 48, 99, 32, 50, 88, 76, 84, 49, 60, 72, 65, 59, 84, 77, 95, 67, 74, 91
a Calculate the mean and standard deviation of the scores, correct to 1 decimal place.
b Amelia scored 76% for the assignment. Calculate her standardised score (z-score), correct
to 1 decimal place.
ex Ten d ed
r eS p o n S e
35 minutes
[2 marks]
[1 mark]
c The results for students in other classes for the same assignment were collected and were
found to be normally distributed. If a student gets a standardised score of 1, approximately

what percentage of students scored lower than she did?
[1 mark]
Exam practice 2
251
2 The population of deer in a small Victorian state park is increasing each year. The table below shows
the number of deer in the park at the beginning of each year.

Beginning of year
Number of deer
2006
100
2007
110
2008
121
a Show that the common ratio, r, for this sequence is 1.1.

b If the pattern continues, determine the expected number of deer present at the beginning
of 2010.
[1 mark]
[1 mark]
c Write an expression that gives the number of deer, Dn, present in the park at the beginning
of the nth year.
[1 mark]
d By how much will the deer population increase during 2011?

e At this rate of increase, during what year will the deer population first exceed 200 deer?
[1 mark]
[1 mark]
3 Wildlife authorities decide that, to preserve the native wildlife, it is necessary to undertake a relocation
diGiTal doC
doc-10192
Solutions
exam practice 2
of the deer. At the beginning of 2008 they decide they will relocate 20 deer at the end of each year.
The number of deer present in the park from 2008 onward can be found using the difference
equation:
Dn + 1 = rDn + d where D1 = 121 deer.
a Find r and d.
[2 marks]
b How many deer will there be in the park at the beginning of 2010?
[1 mark]
c In what year will the deer population first drop below 90?
[1 mark]
4 Wildlife officers are also concerned about the populations of some native animals within the park.
They have carefully monitored the populations of koalas and wombats over the last 3 years and have
found the koala population is decreasing by 2% each year while the wombat population is increasing
by 30 wombats per year. At the beginning of 2008, the koala and wombat populations were 820 and
580 respectively.
a An expression for the number of koalas, Kn, present in the park at the beginning of year
n is Kn = 820 r n 1. Determine the value of r.
[1 mark]
b Write a simplified expression for the number of wombats, Wn, present in the park at the
beginning of year n.
[1 mark]
c During which year will the wombat population first be greater than the koala population? [2 marks]
5 The park officers are concerned about the persistent presence of a local pest in the state park. They
have recorded the number of these pests over the last 4 years and have determined their growth
can be described as a Fibonacci sequence. In the first 2 years of monitoring the pests, the numbers
recorded were 50 and 62.
a How many pests were recorded in the 4th year?
[1 mark]
b What were the pest numbers likely to be in the year before they were first recorded?
[1 mark]
6 The park is becoming increasingly popular with hikers so the rangers decide, to make the park safer,
they will mark out some of the more popular walking tracks. In the first week they mark out 2 km of
tracks. In each week after that they mark 150 m less track than they had marked the previous week.
a What length of track do they mark out during the 4th week?
[1 mark]
b At the end of the 5th week they realise that they will need to order more track-marking materials
for the next 5 weeks, including signs and bright arrows. What is the total length of track they will
be marking out over the next 5 weeks?
[2 marks]
Total marks = 22
252
ChapTer 7
Geometry: similarity
and mensuration
diGiTal doC
10 Quick Questions
doc-9450
ChapTer ConTenTS
7a
7b
7C
7d
7e
7F
7G
Properties of angles, triangles and polygons

Area and perimeter
Total surface area
Similar figures
Similar triangles
Area and volume scale factors
Geometry
Geometry is an important area of study. Many professions and
tasks require and use geometrical concepts and techniques.
Besides architects, surveyors and navigators, all of us use it in
our daily lives for example, to describe shapes of objects,
directions on a car trip and space or position of a house. Much
of this area of study is assumed knowledge gained from previous
years of study.
UPPER
LEVEL
Bed 1
Bed 2
Bed 4
Bed 3
Stairways
properties of angles,
triangles and polygons
7a
In this module, we will often encounter problems in which some of

the information we need is not clearly given. To solve the problems,
some missing information will need to be deduced using the many
common rules, definitions and laws of geometry. Some of the more
important rules are presented in this chapter.
inTeraCTiViTY
int-0259
The sum of external
angles of a polygon
interior angles of polygons

For a regular polygon (all sides and angles are equal) of n sides,
360
. For example, for a
the interior angle is given by 180
n
square the interior angle is:
180
Exterior angle
360
= 180 90
4
= 90.
The exterior angle is given by
360
.
n
Interior angle
ChapTer 7 Geometry: similarity and mensuration
253
Worked example 1
Calculate the interior and exterior angle of the regular polygon shown.
Think
WriTe
360
5
= 180 72
= 108
This shape is a regular pentagon, a 5-sided

figure.
Substitute n = 5 into the interior angle formula.
Interior angle = 180
Substitute n = 5 into the exterior angle formula.
Exterior angle =
Write your answer.
A regular pentagon has an interior angle of 108

and an exterior angle of 72.
360
5
= 72
Geometry rules, definitions and notation rules

Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
The following geometry rules and notation will be most valuable in establishing unknown values in the
topics covered and revised in this module.
definitions of common terms

A
Between 90
and 180
ABC
Less than 90
B
Acute angle C
90
180
Right angle
Obtuse angle
Straight angle
Between 180
and 360
A
A
Line
AB
AB
A
B
AB
Line segment
Ray
Reflex angle
Parallel lines
Perpendicular lines
Some common notations and rules

a + b + c = 180
No equal sides
b
a
254
c
Scalene triangle
All equal
60 sides and
angles
Two equal
sides and
angles
60
Isosceles triangle
60
Equilateral triangle
45
45
Right-angled
isosceles triangle
C
a + b = 90
a=b
a + b = 180
Complementary angles
Vertically opposite
angles
Supplementary angles
a=b
c=d
a=b
c=d
a c
d b
b
d
Corresponding angles
Alternate angles
Co-interior angles
B a+b=d
b
d
Right angle at the

circumference in
a semicircle
c d
A
C D
BCD is an exterior angle.
a + b + c + d = 360
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
b
a
D
CD is a perpendicular
bisector of AB
a + d = 180
b + c = 180
a c
d b
Do more
Interact
with parallel lines.
Worked example 2
Calculate the values of the pronumerals in the polygon shown.

b
c
a
cm
6 cm
Think
WriTe
360
6
= 60
This shape is a regular hexagon. The angles at the

centre are all equal.
a=
The other two angles in the triangle are equal.
a + b + c = 180
b=c
So:
60 + 2b = 180
b = 60
c = 60
60
The 6 triangles are equilateral triangles; therefore,

all sides are equal.
d cm = 6 cm
255
Worked example 3
Calculate the missing pronumerals in the diagram of railings for a set of stairs shown below.
c
a b
35
Think
1
WriTe/draW
Recognise that the top and bottom of the stair rails

are parallel lines.
c
a b
35
35
To find the unknown angle a, use the alternate

angle law and the given angle.
Using the corresponding angle law and the given

right angle, recognise that the unknown angle c is
a right angle.
Given angle 35.

a = 35
c
c = 90
4
Use the straight angle rule to find the unknown

angle b.
a + b + c = 180
35 + b + 90 = 180
b = 180 125
= 55
properties of angles, triangles

and polygons
exercise 7a
1 We 1 Calculate the interior and exterior angles for each of the following regular polygons.
a
c
e
f
g
256
Equilateral triangle
Hexagon
Heptagon
Nonagon
b Regular quadrilateral
d
Calculate the value of the pronumerals in the following figures.
2 We2
a
b
27
130
y
x
52
63
a
e
c a
15 b
b
c
8 cm
32
50
Calculate the value of the pronumerals in the following figures.
3 We3
a
b
x
35
30
0
62
70
t
e
27
b c
81
n
140
a
4 Name the regular polygon that has the given angle(s).
a Interior angle of 108, exterior angle of 72
b Interior angle of 150, exterior angle of 30
c Interior angle of 135, exterior angle of 45
d Interior angle of 120
e Exterior angle of 120
Calculate the unknown pronumerals.
5
a
110
y z
35
3.6 cm
4.2 cm
c
d
a
86
40
a
6 mC In the figure at right, the value of a is closest to:

a 30
d 120
b 75
e 150
C 90
150
7 mC An isosceles triangle has a known angle of 50.
The largest possible angle for this triangle is:

a 80
b 130
C 90
d 65
e 50
257
7b
Much of our world is described by area (the amount of space enclosed by a closed figure) and perimeter
(the distance around a closed figure).
Topic:
17
Concept:
Lot 603
Corner block with expansive

23.55 m frontage
645 m2
37.92
36.56
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Corner block
with wide
17 m frontage
4.0
5
14.07
$251 000
13.05
Lot 658
761m2
5
32.7
AOS:
32.18
Units: 3 & 4
area and perimeter
$147 000
5.8
23.55
Some examples are the area of a house block, the fencing of a block of land, the size of a bedroom
and the amount of paint required to cover an object. In this section we will review the more common
shapes.
perimeter
Perimeter is the distance around a closed figure.
Some common rules are:
2. For rectangles, the
1. For squares, the perimeter = 4l
perimeter = 2(l + w)
l
3. Circumference (C ) is the
perimeter of a circle.
C = 2 radius = 2 r
Square
Rectangle
l
w
Circumfere
l
w
nc
f a circl
e
e o
Worked example 4
Think
WriTe
1
The shape is composed of a semicircle and

three sides of a rectangle.
Perimeter = 300 + 2 600 + 2 circumference where
Add together the three components of the

perimeter.
Perimeter = 300 + 2 600 + 471.24

= 1971.24
Write your answer.
The perimeter of the closed figure is 1971 mm,

correct to the nearest millimetre.
258
600 mm
300 mm
Calculate the perimeter of the closed figure given at right

(to the nearest mm).
1
2
of circumference = 2 2 r
= 150
= 471.24
area of common shapes

The areas of shapes commonly encountered are:
1. Area of a square:
A = length2 = l2
Square
l
l
2. Area of a rectangle:
A = length width = l w
Rectangle
w
3. Area of a parallelogram:
A = base height = b h
Parallelogram
h
b
4. Area of a trapezium:
A = 2 (a + b) h
Trapezium
a
h
b
5. Area of a circle:
A=
radius2
r2
Circle
r
6. Area of a triangle:
A=2bh
(see the next chapter)
Triangle
h
Area is measured in mm2, cm2, m2, km2 and hectares.

1 hectare = 100 m 100 m = 10 000 m2
Worked example 5
Calculate the area of the garden bed given in the diagram (to the nearest square metre).
2.4 m
5.7 m
7.5 m
Think
1
The shape of the garden is a trapezium.

Use the formula for area of a trapezium. Remember that
the lengths of the two parallel sides are a and b, and h is
the perpendicular distance between the two parallel sides.
Substitute and evaluate.
WriTe
1
Area of a trapezium = 2 (a + b) h
a = 7.5
b = 5.7
h = 2.4
A = 2 (7.5 + 5.7) 2.4

1
= 2 13.2 2.4
= 15.84 m2
3
Write your answer.
The area of the garden bed is

approximately 16square metres.
259
Composite areas
Often a closed figure can be identified as comprising two or more different common figures. Such
figures are called composite figures. The area of a composite figure is the sum of the areas of the
individual common figures.
Area of a composite figure = sum of the areas of the individual common figures
Acomposite = A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + . . .
Worked example 6
Calculate the area of the hotel foyer from the plans given at right
(to the nearest square metre).
25 m
20 m
8m
The shape is composite and needs to be

separated into two or more common shapes:
in this case, a rectangle, a triangle and half
of a circle.
25 m
A1
A2
8m
WriTe/draW
16 m
16 m
Think
A3
20 m
Area of foyer = A1 + A2 + A3
2
Find the area of each shape. (The width of

the rectangle and the base of the triangle is
twice the radius of the circle, that is,
16 metres.)
A1 = area of triangle
1
=2bh
1
= 2 16 20
= 160 m2
A2 = Area of rectangle
=lw
= 25 16
= 400 m2
A3 = Area of half of a circle
1
= 2 r2
1
= 2 82
= 100.53 m2
3
Add together all three areas for the

composite shape.
Area of foyer = A1 + A2 + A3
= 160 + 400 + 100.53
= 660.53 m2
Write your answer.
The area of the hotel foyer is approximately

661 m2.
Conversion of units of area

Often the units of area need to be converted, for example, from cm2 to m2 and vice versa.
1. To convert to smaller units, for example, m2 to cm2, multiply ().
2. To convert to larger units, for example, mm2 to cm2, divide ().
Some examples are:
102
1002 10002
(a) 1 cm2 = 10 mm 10 mm = 1 00 mm2
mm2
cm2
m2
km2
(b) 1 m2 = 100 cm 100 cm = 1 0 000 cm2
2
2
(c) 1 km = 1000 m 1000 m = 1 000 000 m
102
1002 10002
(d) 1 hectare = 10 000 m2
260
Worked example 7
Convert 1.12 m2 to square centimetres (cm2).

Think
1
2
WriTe
To convert from m2 to cm2, multiply by 1002 or 10 000. 1.12 m2 = 1.12 10 000 cm2 = 11 200 cm2
Write your answer.
1.12 m2 is equal to 11 200 square
centimetres (cm2).
Worked example 8
Convert 156 000 metres2 to:
a kilometres2
b hectares.
Think
WriTe
a 1 To convert from metres2 to kilometres2 divide by
10002 or 1
= 0.156 km2
000 000.
156 000 m2 = 0.156 square kilometres (km2)
Write the answer in correct units.
b 156 000 m2 =
b 1 10 000 m2 equals 1 hectare. To convert from m2
to hectares, divide by 10 000.
156 000 m2 = 15.6 hectares
Write the answer.
exercise 7b
area and perimeter
Calculate the perimeters of the following figures (to the nearest whole units).
b
5m
7m
23.7 cm
cm
12 m
.9
1 We4
a
hectares = 15.6 hectares
4m
15
156000
10 000
15.4 cm
a 156 000 m 2 = 156 000 1 000 000 km2
27.5 cm
e
diGiTal doC
doc-9451
SkillSHEET 7.1
Substitution into a
formula
70 m
83
210 m
120 m
13.5 mm
.2
2 We5 Calculate the areas of the closed figures in question 1.
25 m
2m
20 m
24 mm
125 mm
90 mm
16 cm
9
.2
11
cm
cm
10 cm
45.2 mm
12 m
8 cm
17 m
3.5 m
3 We6 Calculate the areas of the following figures (to 1 decimal place).
a
10 m
b
13 m
12 m
21 cm
261
4 Calculate the perimeters of the closed figures in question 3.
Convert the following areas to the units given in brackets.

b 320 000 cm2 (m2)
c 0.035 m2 (cm2)
2
2
e 2 500 000 m (km )
f 357 000 m2 (hectares)
2
2
h 0.000 06 km (m )
6 Find the area of the regular hexagon as shown in the diagram at right
0m
1.2
(to 2 decimal places, in m2).
5 We 7, 8
diGiTal doC
doc-9452
SkillSHEET 7.2
Conversion of units of
length and area
a 20 000 mm2 (cm2)

d 0.035 m2 (mm2)
g 2 750 000 000 mm2 (m2)
2.08 m
7 A cutting blade for a craft knife has the dimensions shown in the diagram.
8 mC The perimeter of the figure shown, in centimetres, is:

a
b
C
d
e
34
24 + 5
24 + 2.5
29 + 5
29 + 5
30 mm
20 mm
What is the area of steel in the blade (to the nearest mm2)?
5 mm
40 mm
7 cm
2 cm
3 cm
12 cm
9 mC The perimeter of the enclosed figure shown is 156.6 metres.
The unknown length, x, is closest to:

20.5 m
35.2 m
40.2 m
80.4 m
90.6 m
20.5 m
35.2 m
a
b
C
d
e
10 A 3-ring dartboard has dimensions as shown below left. (Give all answers
to 1 decimal place.)
40 cm
20 cm
6 cm
diGiTal doC
doc-9453
SkillSHEET 7.3
expressing one
number as a
percentage of another
1
2
3
2
1
What is the total area of the dartboard?

What is the area of the bullseye (inner circle)?
What is the area of the 2-point middle ring?
Express each area of the three rings as a percentage of the total area
(to 2 decimal places).
11 On the set of a western movie, a horse is tied to a railing outside a saloon bar. The railing is 2metres
long; the reins are also 2 metres long once tied at one of the ends of the railing.
a Draw a diagram of this situation.
b To how much area does the horse now have access (to 1 decimal place)?
The reins are now tied to the centre of the railing.
c Draw a diagram of this situation.
d To how much area does the horse have access (to 1 decimal place)?
a
b
c
d
262
Total surface area
7C
The total surface area (TSA) of a solid object is the sum of the areas of the surfaces.
In some cases we can use established formulas of very common everyday objects. In other situations
we will need to derive a formula by using the net of an object.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Total surface area formulas of common objects
Topic:
Concept:
Cube
Cuboid
Cylinder
r
l
h
l
w
Cubes:
TSA = 6l2
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
h
Cuboids:
TSA = 2(lw + lh + wh)
See more
Watch a
video about surface
area and volume.
Cylinders:
TSA = 2r (r + h)
Sphere
Cone
Slant
s height
Cones:
TSA = r (r + s), where
s is the slant height
Spheres:
TSA = 4r2
WORKED EXAMPLE 9
Calculate the total surface area of a poster

tube with a length of 1.13 metres and a
radius of 5 cm. Give your answer to the
nearest 100 cm2.
TUTORIAL
eles-1277
Worked example 9
3m
5 cm
1.1
THINK
WRITE
A poster tube is a cylinder.

Express all dimensions in centimetres.
Remember 1 metre equals 100 centimetres.
TSA of a cylinder = 2r(r + h)

Radius, r = 5 cm
Height, h = 1.13 m
= 113 cm

Remember BODMAS.
TSA = 2 5(5 + 113)

= 2 5 118
= 3707.08
Write your answer.
The total surface area of a poster tube is

approximately 3700 cm2.
CHAPTER 7 Geometry: similarity and mensuration
5_61_17866_MQ12_FM_4E_07.indd 263
263
8/05/13 1:35 PM
Worked example 10
Calculate the total surface area of a size 7 basketball with a diameter

of 25 cm. Give your answer to the nearest 10 cm2.
Think
WriTe
25 cm
Use the formula for the total surface area

of a sphere. Use the diameter to find the
radius of the basketball and substitute
into the formula.
TSA of sphere = 4r2

Diameter = 25 cm
Radius = 12.5 cm
TSA = 4 12.52
= 1963.495
Write your answer.
Total surface area of the ball is approximately 1960 cm2.
Worked example 11
A die used in a board game has a total surface area of 1350 mm2. Calculate the linear dimensions
of the die (to the nearest millimetre).
Think
WriTe
A die is a cube. We can substitute

into the total surface area of a cube to
determine the dimension of the cube.
Divide both sides by6.
TSA = 6 l2
= 1350 mm2
1350 = 6 l2
1350
l2 = 6 = 225
Take the square root of both sides to

find l.
Write your answer.
l = 225
= 15 mm
The dimensions of the die are 15 mm 15 mm 15 mm.
Total surface area using a net

If the object is not a common object or a variation of one, such as an open cylinder, then it is easier to
generate the formula from first principles by constructing a net of the object.
A net of an object is a plane figure that represents the surface of a 3-dimensional object.
Square pyramid
Slant
height
Net
Trapezoidal prism
Net
Cylinder
Net
264
Worked example 12
Calculate the total surface area of the triangular prism shown in the diagram.
10 cm
8 cm
10
10 cm
8 cm
A1
10 cm
Identify the different-sized common figures

and set up a sum of the surface areas. The two
triangles are the same.
cm
A4 6 cm
A2
6 cm
A3
20 cm
Form a net of the triangular prism, transferring

all the dimensions to each of the sides of the
surfaces.
20 cm
WriTe/draW
20 cm
Think
20 cm
20
cm
6 cm
TUTorial
eles-1278
Worked example 12
8 cm 6 cm
10 A4 6 cm
cm
TSA = A1 + A2 + A3 + 2 A4
A1 = l1 w1
= 20 10
= 200 cm2
A2 = l2 w2
= 20 8
= 160 cm2
A3 = l3 w3
= 20 6
= 120 cm2
1
A4 = 2 b h
1
=286
= 24 cm2
3
Sum the areas.
TSA = A1 + A2 + A3 + 2 A4
= 200 + 160 + 120 + 2 24
= 528 cm2
Write your answer.
The total surface area of the triangular prism is

528 cm2.
Worked example 13
12 cm
Calculate the surface area of an open cylindrical can that is 12 cm high and 8 cm in diameter
(to 1 decimal place).
8 cm
265
WriTe/draW
2 r, r = 4 cm
Form a net of the open cylinder, transferring

all the dimensions to each of the surfaces.
12 cm
Think
A1
A2
4 cm
2
Identify the different-sized common figures

and set up a sum of the surface areas. The
length of the rectangle is the circumference
of the circle.
Sum the areas.
Write your answer.
exercise 7C
TSA = A1 + A2
A1 = 2r h
= 2 4 12
= 301.59 cm2
A2 = r2
= 42
= 50.27 cm2
TSA = A1 + A2
= 301.59 + 50.27
= 351.86 cm2
The total surface area of the open cylindrical can is
351.9 cm2, correct to 1 decimal place.
Total surface area
1 We9 Calculate the total surface area for each of the solids a to f from the following information. Give
answers to 1 decimal place.

a A cube with side lengths of 110 cm
b A cuboid with dimensions of 12 m 5 m 8 m (l w h)
c A sphere with a radius of 0.8 metres
d A closed cylinder with a radius of 1.2 cm and a height of 6 cm
e A closed cone with a radius of 7 cm and a slant height of 11 cm
f An opened cylinder with a diameter of 100 mm and height of 30 mm
2 We 10 Calculate the total surface area of the objects given in the diagrams. Give answers correct
to1decimal place.
b
Length = 1.5 m
14 cm
410 mm
7 cm
4 cm
Diameter = 43 cm
3 We 11 Calculate the unknown dimensions, given the total surface area of the objects. Give answers
correct to 1decimal place.

a Length of a cube with a total surface area of 24 m2
b The radius of a sphere with a total surface area of 633.5 cm2
c Length of a cuboid with width of 12 mm, height of 6 cm and a total surface area of 468 cm2
d Diameter of a playing ball with a total surface area of 157 630 cm2
266
4 We 12 Calculate the total surface areas for the objects given in the diagrams. Give answers correct
to 1decimal place.
b
6.06 cm
5c
4 cm
15 c
10 cm
30
cm
7 cm
Area = 22
15
12 mm
8 cm
cm2
13 cm
m
m
25 m
9 mm
5 We 13 Calculate the total surface area of each of the objects in the diagrams below. Give answers
correct to 1 decimal place.

13.5 cm
12
10.5 cm
.3
3 cm
c
10
2 cm
Rubbish bin
250 mm
cm
7 cm
4.5 cm
20 cm
250 mm
6 A concrete swimming pool is a cuboid with the following dimensions:
2.5
1.0 m
length of 6 metres, width of 4metres and depth of 1.3 metres.

What surface area of tiles is needed to line the inside of the pool?
(Give your answer in m2 and cm2 correct to 1decimal place.)
1.5 m
7 What is the total area of canvas needed for the tent (including the
base) shown in the diagram at right? Give the answer correct

to 2 decimal places.
4.5 m
6.5 m
8 mC The total surface area of a 48 mm diameter ball used in
a game of pool is closest to:

a 1810 mm2
b 2300 mm2
C 7240 mm2
d 28 950 mm2
e 115 800 mm2
9 mC The total surface of a golf ball of radius 21 mm is closest to:
a 550 mm2
d 0.055 m2
b 55 cm2
e 5.5 cm2
C 55 000 mm2
10 mC The formula for the total surface area for the object shown is:
a
d
1
abh
2
1
bh +
2
1
2
b 2 bh + ab + 2 ah
3ab
1
2
C 3( bh + ab)
e bh + 3ab
b
11 mC The total surface area of a poster tube that is 115 cm long and 8 cm in diameter is closestto:
a 3000 cm2
b 2900 cm2
C 1500 mm2
d 6200 m2
e 23 000 cm2
12 A baker is investigating the best shape for a loaf of bread. The shape with the smallest surface area
stays freshest. The baker has come up with two shapes: a rectangular prism with a 12 cm square base
and a cylinder with a round end that has a 14 cm diameter.
a Which shape stays fresher if they have the same overall length of 32 cm?
b What is the difference between the total surface areas of the two loaves of bread?
diGiTal doC
doc-9454
WorkSHEET 7.1
267
Volume of prisms, pyramids

and spheres
7d
The most common volumes considered in the real world are the volumes of prisms, pyramids, spheres
and objects that are a combination of these. For example, people who rely on tank water need to know
the capacity (volume) of water that the tank is holding.
Volume is the amount of space occupied by a 3-dimensional object.
The units of volume are mm3 (cubic millimetres), cm3 (cubic centimetres or cc) and m3 (cubic metres).
1000 mm3 = 1 cm3
1 000 000 cm3 = 1 m3
Another measure of volume is the litre, which is used primarily for quantities of liquids but also for
capacity, such as the capacity of a refrigerator or the size of motor car engines.
1 litre = 1000 cm3
1000 litres = 1 m3
103
Conversion of units of volume
cm3
mm3
Often the units of volume need to be converted, for example, from cm3
to m3 and vice versa.
1003
103
m3
1003
Worked example 14
Convert 1.12 cm3 to mm3.

Think
WriTe
To convert from cm3 to mm3 multiply by 103 or

1000. (That is, 1 cm3 equals 1000 mm3.)
1.12 cm3 = 1.12 1000 mm3

= 1120 mm3
Write the answer in the correct units.
1.12 cm3 is equal to 1120 mm3.
Worked example 15
Convert 156 000 cm3 to:
a m3
b litres.
Think
WriTe
a 1 To convert from cm3 to m3 divide by 1003 or
1 000 000. (That is, 1 000 000 cm3 equals 1 m3.)
b 1 1000 cm3 is equivalent to 1 litre; therefore, to
convert from
2
= 0.156 m3
156 000 cm3 = 0.156 cubic metres (m3)

cm3
a 156 000 cm3 = 156 000 1 000 000 m3
to litres, divide by 1000.
b 156 000 cm3 =
156000
1000
litres = 156 litres
156 000 cm3 = 156 litres
Write the answer.
Uniform
cross-section
Volume of prisms
A prism is a polyhedron with a uniform cross-section.
Height
It is named in accordance with its uniform cross-sectional area.
Rectangular
prism
Triangular prism
268
Trapezoidal prism
Hexagonal prism
To find the volume of a prism we need to determine the area of the uniform cross-section (or base)
and multiply by the height. This is the same for all prisms.
Volume of a prism, Vprism, can be generalised by the formula:
Vprism = area of uniform cross-section height
V = A H.
For example:
Vrect. prism = Arect. H
Vtriangular prism = Atriangle H
Note: Although cylinders are not prisms, they have a uniform cross-section (which is
a circle) therefore, the same formula can be applied to find volume of a cylinder.
Cylinder
That is, Vcylinder = Acircle H.

In fact, the formula V = A H can be applied to any solid with a uniform cross-section of area A.
Calculate the volume of the object shown. Give your answer correct to
the nearest cm3.
15 cm
Think
20 cm
Worked example 16
WriTe
The object has a circle as a uniform

cross-section. It is a cylinder. The area
of the base is: area of a circle = r2.
Volume is cross-sectional area times
height.
Vcylinder = A H, where Acircle = r2

= r2 H
= 152 20
= 4500
= 14 137.1669 cm3
Write your answer.
The volume of the cylinder is approximately 14 137 cm3.
Worked example 17
Calculate (to the nearest mm3) the volume of the slice of bread with a uniform cross-sectional
area of 250 mm2 and a thickness of 17 mm.
Area = 250 mm2
17 mm
Think
WriTe
The slice of bread has a uniform crosssection. The cross-section is not a

common figure but its area has been
given.
V=AH
where A = 250 mm2
V = 250 mm2 17 mm
= 4250 mm3
Write your answer.
The volume of the slice of bread is 4250 mm3.
269
Given the volume of an object, we can use the volume formula to find an unknown dimension of the
object by transposing the formula.
Worked example 18
Calculate the height of the triangle (to 1 decimal

place) from the information provided in the
diagram at right.
Volume of prism = 6.6 m3

TUTorial
eles-1279
Worked example 18
2m
Think
1
1.1
WriTe
The volume of the object is given, along with

the width of the triangular cross-section and
the height of the prism.
V = 6.6 m3, H = 1.1 m, b = 2 m

V = A H,
where A = 12 b h
V = 12 b h H

solve for h.
6.6 =
Write your answer.
2 h 1.1
= 1.1 h
h=
1
2
6.6
1.1
=6
The height of the triangle in the given prism is

6.0 metres.
Volume of pyramids
A pyramid is a polyhedron, where the base is any polygon and all other faces are triangles meeting at the
vertex.
The name of the pyramid is related to the shape of the polygon at the base.
Vertex
Triangular pyramid
Square-based pyramid
Hexagonal pyramid
The shape of the cross-section of the pyramid remains unchanged, but its size reduces as it approaches
the vertex.
Similarly, for cones, the shape of the cross-section is always the same (a circle), but its size reduces as
we move from base towards the vertex.
Vertex
Cone
270
The volume of a pyramid is always one-third of the volume of a prism with the same base and same
height,H. This holds for all pyramids.
Volume of a pyramid, Vpyramid, can be found by using the formula:
1
Vpyramid = 3 area of the base height

V = 1 A H.
The height of a pyramid, H, is sometimes called the altitude.

Worked example 19
Calculate the volume of the pyramid below (to the nearest m3).
Height of pyramid = 40 m
30 m
Think
1
30 m
WriTe
The pyramid has a square base. The area of

the base is: Area of a square = l2.
Vpyramid = 3 A H, where Asquare = l2

= 13 l2 H
= 13 302 40
= 12 000 m3
2
The volume of the pyramid is 12 000 m3.
Write your answer.
Volume of spheres and composite objects

Volume of a sphere
Spheres are unique (but common) objects that deserve special attention.
The formula for the volume of a sphere is:
Vsphere = 43 r 3
where r is the radius of the sphere.
Volume of composite objects

Often the object can be identified as comprising two or more different common prisms, pyramids or
spheres. Such figures are called composite objects. The volume of a composite object is found by adding
the volumes of the individual common figures or deducting volumes. For example, each of the structures
below can be roughly modelled as the sum of a cylinder and a cone.
Volume of a composite object= the sum of the volumes of the individual (on the difference) components.
Vcomposite = V1 + V2 + V3 + . . . (or Vcomposite = V1 V2)
271
Worked example 20
Calculate the capacity of the container shown at right.

(Give your answer correct to the nearest litre.)
12 cm
25 cm
20 cm
TUTorial
eles-1280
Worked example 20
18 cm
The object consists of a cylinder and a

square-based prism.
18
cm
18 cm
The volume of the composite object is

the sum of volumes of the cylinder and
the prism.
Vcomposite = volume of cylinder + volume of

square-based prism
= Acircle Hcylinder + Asquare Hprism
= (r2 Hc) + (l2 Hp)
= ( 62 20) + (182 25)
= 2261.946 711 + 8100
= 10 361.946 711 cm3
Convert to litres using the conversion of

1000 cm3 equals 1 litre.
10 362 cm3 = 10.362 litres
Write your answer.
The capacity of the container is 10 litres,

calculated to the nearest litre.
exercise 7d
Convert the volumes to the units specified.
0.35 cm3
a
to mm3
d 15 litres to cm3
g 0.000 57 m3 to cm3
b 4800 cm3 to m3
e 1.6 m3 to litres
h 140 000 mm3 to litres
c 56 000 cm3 to litres

f 0.0023 cm3 to mm3
i 250 000 mm3 to cm3
2 We 16 Calculate the volume of the following solids to the nearest whole unit.
b
a
c
mm
75
7 cm
104.8 cm
4000 mm
4 cm
23
c
1 We 14, 15
51.2 cm
diGiTal doC
doc-9455
SkillSHEET 7.4
Conversion of
units of volume
and capacity
r = 6 cm
25 cm
WriTe/draW
H = 20 cm
Think
15 cm
e
6.4 m
20 mm
4.8
34 mm
272
14 mm
2.1 m
0
m3m
22 mm
57 m
3 We 17 Calculate the volume of the following objects (to 2 decimal places).

Area = 4.2 m2
Area = 120 mm2

14.5 mm
2.9 m
Area = 15 cm2
Area = 32 cm2
8.5
cm
4 We 18 Calculate the measurement of the unknown dimension (to 1 decimal place).

b Volume of triangular prism = 1316.1 cm3
a Volume of cube = 1.728 m3
15
.0
cm
x
x
4 cm
21.
Volume of cylinder = 150 796.4 mm3

x
Volume of prism = 10 18 litres
120 mm
3x
x
5 We 19 Calculate the volume of these objects (to the nearest whole unit).
a
c VO = 17 m V
b
35 cm
V
VO = 10 cm
11 cm
8m
12 m
O
d
11 cm
e
12 mm
VO = 15 cm
Altitude of square-based
pyramid = 18 mm
O
Base of
pyramid
6 cm
6 cm
12 cm
10 cm
273
10 cm
5m
6 We 20 Calculate the volume of these objects (to the nearest whole unit).
b
c
a
4 cm
3m
m
7
cm
c
8
8 cm
r=
42 m
10 cm
19 m
1m
2.1 m
15 cm
4m
20 cm
6m
2.5 m
10 cm
60 m
42 m
Calculate the volume of a cube with sides 4.5 cm long.

Calculate the volume of a room, 3.5 m by 3 m by 2.1 m high.
Calculate the radius of a baseball that has a volume of 125 cm3.
Calculate the height of a cylinder that is 20 cm in diameter with a volume of 2.5 litres
(to the nearest unit).
e Calculate the height of a triangular prism with a base area of 128 mm2 and volume
of 1024 mm3.
f Calculate the depth of water in a swimming pool that has a capacity of 56 000 litres. The pool
has rectangular dimensions of 8 metres by 5.25 metres.
7a
b
c
d
8 The medicine cup below has the shape of a cone with a diameter of 4 cm and a height of 5 cm
(not including the cups base). Calculate the volume of the cone to the nearest millilitre, where
1 cm3 = 1 mL.
5 cm
4 cm
9 Tennis balls have a diameter of 6.5 cm and are packaged in a cylinder that can
hold four tennis balls. Assuming the balls just fit inside a cylinder, calculate:
a the height of the cylindrical can
b the volume of the can (to 1 decimal place)
c the volume of the four tennis balls (to 1 decimal place)
d the volume of the can occupied by air
e the fraction of the cans volume occupied by the balls.
10 mC The volume 200 000 mm3 is equivalent to:
a 2 litres
d 200 cm3
b 2 cm3
e 2000 cm3
C 20 cm3
11 mC The ratio of the volume of a sphere to that of a cylinder of
similar dimensions, as shown in the diagram, is best expressed as:

a
C
e
274
4
3
4
r
3
h
3
2
2
3
3
4
12 mC If the volume of the square-based pyramid shown is 6000 m3, then the perimeter of the base is
closest to:
a 900 m
b 20 m
C 30 m
d 80 m
e 120 m
V
VO = 20 m
13 mC A tin of fruit is 13 cm high and 10 cm in diameter. Its volume, to 1 decimal place, is:
a 1021.0 cm3
7e
b 510.5 cm3
C 1021.4 cm3
d 1020.1 cm3
e 4084.1 cm3
Similar figures
Objects that have the same shape but different size are said to be similar.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch
a video about
similarity.
For two figures to be similar, they must have

the following properties:
1. The ratios of the corresponding sides must
be equal.
A B BC C D A D
= common ratio
=
=
=
AB
BC
CD
AD
B 1
4
A'
C'
B'
6
2
2
A 1
D'
C'
B'
60
125
2. The corresponding angles must be equal.

A = A B = B C = C D = D
A'
Scale factor, k
3
D
C
B
125 60
85
A 85
D'
A measure of the relative size of the two similar figures is the scale factor. The scale factor is the
common ratio of the corresponding sides and quantifies the amount of enlargement or reduction one
figure undergoes to transform into the other figure. The starting shape is commonly referred to as the
original and the transformed shape as the image.
B'
1. Scale factor, k, is the amount of enlargement or reduction and is
expressed as integers, fraction or scale ratios.
1
For example, k = 2, k = 12 or 1 : 10 000.
length of image
A B BC C A
=
=
2. Scale factor, k = length of original =
AB
BC
CA
where for enlargements k is greater than 1 and for reductions k
is between 0 and 1.
3. For k = 1, the figures are exactly the same shape and size and
are referred to as congruent.
B
3
A1 C
A' 3 C'
275
Enlargements and reductions are important in many aspects of photography, map making and
modelling. Often, photographs are increased in size (enlarged) to examine fine detail without distortion,
while house plans are an example of a reduction to a scale; for example, 1 : 25.
Worked example 21
20
Think
a 1 As it is a reduction, the larger shape is the
Original
cm
45 cm
For the similar shapes shown at right:

a find the scale factor for the reduction of the shape
b find the unknown length in the smaller shape.
Image
cm
10
WriTe
original and the smaller shape is the image.

2
The two shapes have been stated as being

similar, so set up the scale
factor, k.
Scale factor, k =
=
length of image
length of original
A B
AB
10 cm
=
20 cm
= 12
b 1 Use the scale factor to determine the unknown
length as all corresponding lengths are in the

same ratio.
b Scale factor, k =
1
2
length of image
k = length of original
1
2
x
45 cm
1
x = 2 45 cm
= 22.5 cm
2
276
Write your answers.
The scale factor of reduction is 2 and the

unknown length on the smaller shape is
22.5cm.
Worked example 22
The figures given at right are similar.

Find the lengths of the two unknown sides s and t.
40
s
100 m
20
t 30
70
50 m
20
30
40
30
Think
First, redraw the figures so that they are

oriented the same way. (This will help to
identify corresponding sides and angles.)
Label the vertices of the 1st figure A, B, C
and D and corresponding vertices of the 2nd
figure A, B, C and D respectively.
B
40
s
100 m
D
A 30 t
70
20
Image
2
Since it is known that the figures are similar,

that ratios of the corresponding side lengths
must be equal. Both length, BC and BC are
known. These can be used to find the value
of s, as the ratio of BA to BA must be the
same.
Now find the value of t. (The ratio of DC to

DC must be the same as the ratio of BC to
BC.)
40
50 m
30
30
WriTe
20 C
Original
BA
BC
=
B C BA
100 s
=
50 30
100 30
s=
50
s = 60 m
DC
BC
=
B C DC
100 70
=
50
t
50 70
t=
100
t = 35 m
Similar figures
exercise 7e
1 We21 For each of these pairs of similar shapes, calculate:

i the scale factor
ii the value of x and y.
8c
m
8 cm
y cm
x cm
x cm
4 cm
1m
4m
20 cm
y cm
70 cm
25 m
x cm
50 cm
y cm
200 cm
2c
50 cm
277
2 We22 For each of the following pairs of similar figures, calculate the value of a.
a
mm
40 mm
17
mm
62 mm
17
1 m
82
Photo
Height of person = 186 cm
3 A photo has the dimensions 10 cm by 12 cm. The photo is enlarged by a factor of 2.5. Calculate the new
dimensions of the photo.
10 cm
12 cm
4 A set of model cars is made using the scale ratio 1 : 12. Calculate:
a the length of a real car if the model is 20 cm long (in metres to 1 decimal place)
b the height of a real car if the model is 3 cm high (to the nearest centimetre)
c the length of a model if the real car is 3 metres long.
5 The dimensions of a students room are 4300 mm by 3560 mm. A scale diagram of the room is to be
drawn on an A4 sheet, using the scale ratio 1 : 20. Calculate the dimensions of the scale drawing of the
room and state whether the drawing should be landscape or portrait on the A4 sheet.
6 mC The scale used to draw the diagram at right is 1: 25. The perimeter of the
real object is:

a 464 cm
C 357 cm
e 150 cm
4 cm
b 514 cm
d 14.28 cm
2 cm
7 mC A 1 : 27 scale model of a truck is made from clay. What is the length of the tray on the original
truck, if length of the tray on the model is 27 cm?

b 100 cm
e 729 cm
a 1 cm
d 540 cm
278
C 270 cm
8 mC A scale factor of 0.2 is:
a a reduction with a scale of 1 cm = 2 cm

C an enlargement with a scale of 1 cm = 5 cm
e a reduction with a scale of 1 cm = 20 cm
7F
b an enlargement with a scale of 1 cm = 0.2 cm

d a reduction with a scale of 1 cm = 5 cm
Similar triangles
Similar triangles can be used in a variety of situations. For example, with the aid of similar triangles,
we could find the heights of trees and buildings or the width of rivers and mountains. Two triangles
are similar if one of the following is true:
1. All three corresponding angles are
equal (AAA).
2. All three corresponding pairs

of sides are in the same ratio
(linear scale factor) (SSS).
3. Two corresponding pairs of

sides are in the same ratio and
the included angles are equal
(SAS).
Scale factor = 2 = 4 = 6 = 0.5 = k
inTeraCTiViTY
int-0188
Scale factors
Scale factor = 63 = 42 = 2 = k
3
4
As in the previous section, we use the known values of a pair of corresponding sides to determine the
scale factor (sf ) for the similar triangles.
Scale factor, k =
lengthof side of image

O A
=
lengthof corresponding side of original
OA
Worked example 23
For the triangles shown at right:

a State the rule that proves that the triangles are
similar and determine the scale factor.
b Find the value of the pronumeral, x.
A
Think
a 1 Two corresponding angles are
equal. The third angle is not given

but can be easily found using the
rule that all angles in a triangle add
to 180. State the rule that proves
similarity.
2
Always select the triangle with

the unknown length, x, as the
image. Evaluate the scale factor by
selecting a pair of corresponding
sides with both lengths known.
B'
B
4 100
30
6
100
6
C A'
30
C'
WriTe/draW
a A = A = 30
B = B = 100
C = C = 180 (30 + 100)
= 50
ABC is similar to ABC because all three
corresponding angles are equal (AAA).
B'
B
A
4 100 Original
30
50
C
6
6
A'
30
100
x
Image
50
C'
length of side of image

Scale factor, k = length of corresponding side of original
A B
=
AB
=
6
4
= 1.5
279
b Scale factor, k = 1.5
b 1 Use the scale factor to find the
unknown length, x.
A C
AC
x
1.5 =
6
x = 1.5 6
=9
1.5 =
Write the answer.
The value of the pronumeral, x, is 9.
Worked example 24
For the given triangles, find the value of the pronumeral, x.

TUTorial
eles-1281
Worked example 24
3.5
B
4.0
A
Think
1
For clear analysis, separate the

two triangles. Note: The lengths
of the sides AE and AD are the
sum of the given values.
Establish that the two triangles
are similar using an appropriate
rule.
7
All measurements in metres
WriTe/draW
B
0
4.
7.
7m
AD = 4.0 + 3.5
= 7.5 m
AE = (7 + x) m
E
(7 + x) m
A = A (common)
B = D (corresponding angles are equal)
C = E (corresponding angles are equal)
ABC is similar to ADE (AAA).
AD
AB
AC
7 + x 7.5
=
7
4
AE
Since the triangles are similar,

the ratios of the corresponding
sides are equal.
Cross-multiply and solve for x.
4(7 + x) = 7 7.5
28 + 4x = 52.5
4x = 24.5
x = 6.125
Write the answer including units.
The value of x is 6.125 metres.
There are many practical applications of similar triangles in the real world. It is particularly useful for
determining the lengths of inaccessible features, such as the height of tall trees or the width of rivers.
This problem is overcome by setting up a triangle similar to the feature to be examined, as shown in the
next example.
280
Worked example 25
Find the height of the tree shown in the diagram at right.

Give the answer correct to 1 decimal place.
ay
r
ns
Su
Shadow
(140 cm)
Girl
(168 cm)
14 metres
Think
1
WriTe/draW
For clear analysis, separate the two triangles.

Establish that the two triangles are similar.
(Assuming both the tree and the girl are
perpendicular to the ground, they form
parallel lines.)
168 cm
A
140 cm
C
xm
14 m
A = A (common angles)
B = B (corresponding)
C = C (corresponding)
ABC is similar to ABC (AAA).
14
x
=
1.4 1.68
Since the triangles are similar, their

corresponding sides must be in the same
ratio.
Note: Convert all measurements to metres, as it
is the most appropriate unit for the height of a
tree. So 140 cm = 1.4 m and 168 cm = 1.68 m.
Solve for x.
10 =
Write the answer including units.
The height of the tree is 16.8 metres.
exercise 7F
x
1.68
x = 10 1.68
= 16.8 m
Similar triangles
1 We23a State the rule (SSS or AAA or SAS) that proves that the triangles in each pair are similar and
determine the scale factor (expressed as an enlargement k > 1).

b
25
5.6
4.6
320 mm
4.4
0
64
5
4.5
8.8
240 mm
25
m
m
0
8
4
9.2
10
.2
11
281
f
10.5
0.5
10.5
1
7.0
14
3.5
4
2 We23b For the given pairs of similar triangles, find the value of the pronumeral a.
45 cm
am
m
am
m
20
m
71
16
a
14
67
14.4 m
cm
56
56
12 m
38
3.2
59 cm
75
38
cm
15
15 mm
62 62
12
25
22.5 mm
62
62
6
13
12
9.6
7.8
3 We24 For the given pairs of triangles, find the value of the pronumeral a.
b
7.5
a
2
a
10
3
12
8
e
15.
17 m
80
142 mm
43
8m
10
68 m
m
4m
17.2
32
am
a
80
18
4.5
.5
12
4 We25 Find the height (to the nearest centimetre) of the flagpole shown in the diagram below.
Guy wire
0.9 m
1m
282
9m
5 Find the length (to 1 decimal place) of the bridge, AB, needed to span the river, using similar triangles
as shown.
B
(Not to scale)
2.5 m
A 12.5 m
4.3 m
6 The shadow of a tree is 4 metres and at the same time the shadow of a 1-metre stick is 25cm. Assuming
both the tree and stick are perpendicular to the horizontal ground, what is the height of the tree?
7 Find the width of the lake (to the nearest metre) using the surveyors notes below.
Lake
A
25 m
2m
1.2 m
b 22
e 9.6
C 16
16
a 24
d 15
12
8 mC In the given diagram, the length of side b is closest to:
Not to scale
0.9 m
5m
1.1 m
20
Questions 9 and 10 refer to the following information.

A young tennis players serve is shown in the diagram below.
10 m
Assume the ball travels in a straight line.

9 mC The height of the ball x, just as it is hit, is closest to:
a 3.6 m
d 1.8 m
b 2.7 m
e 1.6 m
C 2.5 m
10 mC The height of the player, y, as shown is closest to:

a 190 cm
d 160 cm
7G
b 180 cm
e 150 cm
C 170 cm
diGiTal doC
doc-9456
WorkSHEET 7.2
area and volume scale factors
An unknown area or volume of a figure can be found without the need to use known formulas such as
in exercises 7B and 7D. We have seen that two figures that are similar have all corresponding lengths in
the same ratio or (linear) scale factor, k. The same can be shown for the area and volume of two similar
figures.
area of similar figures

If the lengths of similar figures are in the ratio a : b or k, then the areas of the similar shapes are in the
ratio a2 : b2 or k2. Following are investigations to support this relationship.
283
different length ratios (or scale factors) of a square

Length of blue square 2 cm
=2=k
=
Length of red square 1 cm
Area = 1 cm2
1 cm
1 cm
Area of blue square 4 cm2

= 4 = 22 = k2
=
Area of red square
1 cm2
2 cm Area = 4 cm2
Length of green square 3 cm

= 1 cm = 3 = k
Length of red square
2 cm
Area of green square 9 cm2

= 1 cm2 = 9 = 32 = k2
Area of red square
3 cm
Area = 9 cm2
3 cm
different length ratios (or scale factors) of a circle

Radius length of blue circle 2 cm
=2=k
=
Radius length of red circle 1 cm
1 cm
Area = r2 = 1 cm2
Area of blue circle 4 cm2

= 4 = 22 = k2
=
Area of red circle
1 cm2
2 cm
Area = r2 = 4 cm2
Radius length of green circle 3 cm

= 1 cm = 3 = k
Radius length of red circle
3 cm
Area = r2 = 9 cm2
Area of green circle 9 cm2

= 9 = 32 = k2
=
Area of red circle
1 cm2
From the above, as long as two figures are similar, then the area ratio or scale factor is the square
of the linear scale factor, k. The same applies for the total surface area.
area of image
Area scale ratio or factor (asf ) =
area of original
= square of linear scale factor (lsf )
= (lsf )2
= k2
The steps required to solve for length, area or volume (investigated later) using similarity are:
1. Clearly identify the known corresponding measurements (length, area or volume) of the similar
shape.
2. Establish a scale factor (linear, area or volume) using known measurements.
3. Convert to an appropriate scale factor to determine the unknown measurement.
4. Use the scale factor and ratio to evaluate the unknown.
284
Worked example 26
For the two similar triangles shown, find the

area, x cm2, of the small triangle.
Area = 100 cm2
Area = x
4.8 cm
2.4 cm
Think
1
Determine a scale factor, in this

instance the linear scale factor,
from the two corresponding lengths
given. It is preferred that the
unknown triangle is the image.
Determine the area scale factor.
WriTe
length of small triangle (image)

Linear scale factor = length of large triangle (original)
k=
=
2.4 cm
4.8 cm
1
2
Area scale factor = k2
= 1 = 14
2
Use the area scale factor to find the

unknown area.
area of small triangle (image)

Area scale factor = area of large triangle (original)
1
4
Transpose the equation to get the

unknown by itself.
Write your answer.
x cm 2
100 cm 2
1
x = 4 100 = 25
The area of the small triangle is 25 cm2.
Worked example 27
For the two similar shapes shown,

find the unknown length, x cm.
x
2 cm
A = 250 cm2
A = 10 cm2
Think
1
Determine a scale factor, in this instance

the area scale factor, as both areas are
known. It is preferred that the triangle
with the unknown dimention is stated as
the image.
Determine the linear scale factor.
WriTe
area of image (large trapezium)

Area scale factor = area of original (small trapezium)
k2 =
250 cm 2
= 25
10 cm 2
Linear scale factor = k 2

k = 25 = 5
Use the linear scale factor to find the

unknown length.
length of image (large trapezium)

Linear scale factor = length of original (small trapezium)
5=

unknown by itself.
Write your answer.
x cm
2 cm
x=52
= 10
The length, x, is 10 cm.
285
Volume of similar figures

If the lengths of similar figures are in the ratio a : b or k, then the volume of the similar shapes are in the
ratio a3 : b3 or k3. The following is an investigation of two different objects, cubes and rectangular prisms.
a cube
Volume = 1 1 1
= 1 cm 3
Length of large (blue) cube 2 cm

=
=2=k
Length of small (red) cube 1 cm
1 cm
1 cm
1 cm
Volume of large cube 8 cm2

= 8 = 23 = k3
=
Volume of small cube 1 cm2
Volume
=222
= 8 cm3
2 cm
2 cm
2 cm
a rectangular prism
Volume
=1 1 3
= 3 cm3
ength of small prism 3 cm 1

engt
Length
=
= =k
Length
ngth of large prism 6 cm 2
ngt
1 cm
Volume of small prism

3 cm 3
1 1 2
=
=
= = k3
Volume of large prism 24 cm 3 8 2
3 cm
1 cm
From above, as long as two figures are similar, then the

volume ratio or scale factor is the cube of the linear scale
factor, k.
volume of image
Volume scale factor (vsf ) =
volume of original
= cube of linear scale factor (lsf )
= (ls f )3 = k3
Volume
=226
= 24 cm3
2 cm
6 cm
2 cm
Worked example 28
For the two similar figures shown, find the

volume of the smaller cone.
Think
1
Volume of
large cone
= 540 cm3
6 cm 9 cm
TUTorial
eles-1282
Worked example 28
WriTe/draW
Volume
= 540 cm3
Draw the two figures separately.

6 cm
9 cm
Volume
= x cm3
2
286

the linear scale factor, from the two
corresponding lengths given. It is preferred
that the triangle with the unknown volume
is the image.
Linear scale factor =

k=
length of small triangle (image)

length of large triangle (original)
6 cm
9 cm
= 23
Determine the volume scale factor.
Volume scale factor = k3

= 2
3
8
= 27
4
Use the volume scale factor to find the

unknown length.

unknown by itself.
volume of small cone (image)

volume of large cone (original)
x cm 3
8
=
27 540 cm 3
Volume scale factor =
x = 27 540
= 160
The volume of the smaller cone is 160 cm3.
Write your answer.
We can use the relationship between linear, area and volume scale factors to find any unknown in any
pair of similar figures as long as a scale factor can be established.
Given
Linear scale factor (lsf )
Example (k = 2)
=k
=2
Area scale factor (asf )

Example
= k2 Linear scale factor

=4
= k2
Volume scale factor (vsf ) = k3 Linear scale factor

Example
=8
3
= k3
= 38
=2
Area scale factor
Then
Volume scale factor
=k
= 22
=4
2
= k3
= 23
=8
Volume scale factor
= k3
= 23
=8
Area scale factor
= k2
= 22
=4
= 4
=2
Worked example 29
For two similar triangular prisms with volumes of 64 m3 and 8 m3, find the total surface area of the
larger triangular prism, if the smaller prism has a total surface area of 2.5 m2.
Think
WriTe
volume of larger prism (image)

volume of smaller prism (original)

the volume scale factor, from the two
known volumes. It is preferred that
the larger unknown triangular prism is
stated as the image.
Volume scale factor =
Determine the area scale factor. For

easeof calculation, change volume
scalefactor to linear scale factor first
and then to area scale factor.
3 3
Linear scale factor = k = k
k= 38 =2
Area scale factor = k2
= 22
=4
Use the area scale factor to find the

totalsurface area.
Area scale factor =

unknown by itself.
Write your answer.
64 m 3
8 m3
=8
k3 =
area of larger prism (image)

area of smaller prism (original)
x m2
4=
2.5 m 2
x = 4 2.5
= 10
The total surface area of the larger triangular prism is 10 m2.
287
exercise 7G
1 Complete the following table of values.
Linear scale factors

k
Area scale factors

k2
Volume scale factors

k3
8
16
3
125
100
64
0.027
36
0.1
100
0.16
400
2 We26 Find the unknown area for each of the following pairs of similar figures.
a
b
c
12 cm2
8c
540 mm2
48
22.5 mm
15 mm
3a
We27
21 mm
cm
x mm2
x cm2
Surface area
= x mm2
Surface area
= 100 mm2
Find the unknown length for each of the following pairs of similar figures.
ii
xm
14 mm
Area =
6.25 m2
1.7 m Area =2
25 cm
Area =
750 cm2
1.0 m
Area = 3000 cm2
x
b Two similar trapezium-shaped strips of land have an area of 0.5 hectares and 2hectares. The
larger block has a distance of 50 metres between the parallel sides. Find the same length in the
smaller block.
c Two photographs have areas of 48 cm2 and 80 cm2. The smaller photo has a width of 6 cm. Find
the width of the larger photo.
4 We28 Find the unknown volume in the following pairs of similar objects.
a
b
x
cm3
Volume of small pyramid

= 40 cm3
7 cm
2400 cm3
14 cm
288
12 cm
2 cm
45 cm
Volume
= 1200 cm3
30 cm
Volume of large sphere

= 8 litres
For the two similar triangular pyramids with volumes of 27 m3 and 3 m3, calculate the total
surface area of the larger triangular prism if the smaller prism has a total surface area of 1.5 m2.
b For a baseball with diameter of 10 cm and a basketball with a diameter of 25cm, calculate the
total surface area of the baseball if the basketball has a total surface area of 1963.5 cm2.
c For a 14-inch car tyre and 20-inch truck tyre that are similar, calculate the volume (to the nearest
litre) of the truck tyre if the car tyre has a volume of 70 litres.
d For two similar kitchen mixing bowls with total surface areas of 1500 cm2 and 3375 cm2, calculate
the capacity of the larger bowl if the smaller bowl has a capacity of 1.25litres (to the nearest
quarter of a litre).
5a
We29
6 a Calculate the volume of the small cone.

Area = 45 cm2
Area
= 5 cm2
Volume of
large cone
= 270 cm3
b Calculate the volume of the larger
triangular pyramid.
TSA of small pyramid

= 200 cm2
Volume of small pyramid
= 1000 cm3
TSA of large pyramid
= 288 cm2
c Calculate the total surface area of the small prism. d Calculate the diameter of the small cylinder.
Area = 12 cm2
12 cm
TSA
= 78 cm2
Area
= 6 cm2
TSA
= x cm2
x cm
Volume
= 1280 cm3
Volume
= 20 cm3
7 What is the area ratio of:

a two similar squares with side lengths of 3 cm and 12 cm?
b two similar circles with diameters of 9 m and 12 m?
c two similar regular pentagons with sides of 16 cm and 20 cm?
d two similar right-angled triangles with bases of 7.2 mm and 4.8 mm?
8 Calculate the volume ratios from the similar shapes given in question 7.
9 A 1 : 12 scale model of a car is created from plaster and painted.
a If the actual car has a volume of 3.5 m3, calculate the amount of plaster needed for the model to
the nearest litre.

b The model needed 25 millilitres of paint. How much paint would be needed for the actual car
(in litres to 1 decimal place)?

289
10 Find the ratios of the volume of 2 cubes whose sides are in the ratio of 3 : 4.
11 An island in the Pacific Ocean has an area of 500 km2. What is the area of its representation on a map
drawn to scale of 1 cm 5 km?
0 km
50
ea =
Ar
12 Two statues of a famous person used 500 cm3 and 1.5 litres of clay. The smaller statue stood 15 cm tall.
13
14
15
3h
16
What is the height of the other statue (to the nearest centimetre)?
The ratio of the volume of two cubes is 27 : 8. What is the ratio of:
a the lengths of their edges?
b the total surface area?
A cone is filled to half its height with ice-cream. What is the ratio of ice-cream to empty space?
mC A 1 : 27 scale model of a truck is made from clay. The ratio of volume of the model to the volume
of the real truck is:
a 1:3
b 3:1
C 1:9
d 1 : 729
e 1 : 19 683
mC The ratio of the volume of the blue portion to the volume of the
red portion is:
a 1:3
b 1:8
C 1:9
d 1 : 26
e 1 : 27
17 mC A 1 : 100 scale model of a building is a cube with sides of 100 cm. The volume of the building is:
a 10 000 000 m3
d 10 000 m3
290
b 1 000 000 m3
e 1000 m3
C 100 000 m3
Summary
properties of angles,
When solving geometry problems:

draw diagrams carefully
carefully interpret geometric notation; for example, the triangle
at right has two sides equal in length.
carefully consider geometric rules; for example, isosceles triangles
have two equal sides and angles.
area and perimeter
Perimeter is the distance around a closed figure.

Circumference is the perimeter of a circle.
C = 2 radius
= 2r
Area is measured in mm2, cm2, m2, km2 and hectares.
1 cm2 = 10 mm 10 mm = 100 mm2
1 m2 = 100 cm 100 cm = 10 000 cm2
1 km2 = 1000 m 1000 m = 1 000 000 m2
1 hectare = 10 000 m2
Area of shapes commonly encountered are:
1. Area of a square: A = l2
2. Area of a rectangle: A = l w
3. Area of a parallelogram: A = b h
4. Area of a trapezium: A = 12 (a + b) h
5. Area of a circle: A = r2
6. Area of a triangle: A = 1 b h
2
Area of composite figure = sum of the areas of the individual common figures
Acomposite = A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + . . .
Total surface area

(TSa)
Total surface area (TSA) is measured in mm2, cm2, m2 and km2.

The TSAs of some common objects are as follows:
1. Cubes: TSA = 6l2
2. Cuboids: TSA = 2(lw + lh + wh)
3. Cylinders: TSA = 2r(r + h)
4. Cones: TSA = r(r + s), where s is the slant height
5. Spheres: TSA = 4r 2
For all other objects, form their nets and establish the total surface area formulas.
Volume of prisms,
pyramids and spheres
Volume is the amount of space occupied by a 3-dimensional object.

The units of volume are mm3, cm3 (or cc) and m3.
1. 1000 mm3 = 1 cm3
2. 1 000 000 cm3 = 1 m3
3. 1 litre = 1000 cm3
4. 1000 litres = 1 m3
Volume of a prism, Vprism = area of uniform cross-section height
V=AH
1
Volume of a pyramid, Vpyramid = 3 area of cross-section at the base height
Equal sides
V=3AH
The height of a pyramid, H, is sometimes called the altitude.
4
Volume of a sphere is Vsphere = 3 r3.
Volume of a composite object = sum of the volumes of the individual common prisms, pyramids or
spheres.
Vcomposite = V1 + V2 + V3 + . . .
or
Vcomposite = V1 V2 . . .
291
Similar figures
Two objects that have the same shape but different size are
said to be similar.
For two figures to be similar, the following must hold:
(a) The ratios of the corresponding sides must be equal.
A B B C C D A D
=
=
=
= common ratio
CD
AD
BC
AB
(b) All corresponding angles must be equal.
A = A
B'
A'
A 1
D'
C'
B'
60
125
B = B C = C D = D
length of image
= A B = B C = CA
length of original
CA
AB
BC
where for enlargements, k is greater than 1 and for reductions,
k is between 0 and 1.
For k = 1, the figures are exactly the same shape and size and are
referred to as congruent.
6
2
B 1
A'
Scale factor, k
C'
C
125 60
A 85
85
D'
B'
Scale factor, k =
3 3
A 1 C A' 3 C'
Similar triangles
Two triangles are similar if one of the following conditions is identified:

1. All 3 corresponding angles are equal (AAA).
2. All 3 corresponding pairs of sides are in the same ratio (linear scale factor) (SSS).
3. Two corresponding pairs of sides are in the same ratio and the included angles are equal (SAS).
area and volume

scale factors
The steps required to solve for length, area or volume using similarity are:
1. Clearly identify the known corresponding measurements (length, area or volume) of the similar
shapes.
2. Establish a scale factor (linear, area or volume) using known pairs of measurements.
3. Convert to an appropriate scale factor to determine the unknown measurement.
4. Use the scale factor and ratio to evaluate the unknown.
area of image
Area scale ratio or factor (asf ) =
area of original
= square of linear scale factor (lsf )
= k2
volume of image
Volume scale ratio or factor (vsf ) =
volume of original
= cube of linear scale factor (lsf )
= k3
292
Chapter review
1 For the triangle shown in a semicircle, x is:
a
b
C
d
e
m U lTip l e
C ho iC e
32
58
68
90
none of the above
32
2 A triangle ABC has the following values: AB= 10 cm, AC = 12 cm where AB and AC are
perpendicular. The area of the triangle is:

a 120 cm2
b 30 cm2
d 121 cm2
e 60 cm2
3 The area of the kitchen bench shown in the plan
is closest to:
a 1250 + 19 600 cm2
b 1250 + 37 600 cm2
C 1250 + 29 600 cm2
d 2500 + 29 600 cm2
e 30 100 cm2
C 240 cm2
220
80
200
All
measurements
in cm
50
4 The total surface area of a closed cylinder with a radius of 40 cm and a height of 20 cm is given by:
a 2 20 (40)
C 2 40 (100)
e 2 20 (60)
b 2 40 (40)
d 2 40 (60)
5 The net of an object is shown in the diagram. Anappropriate
name for the object is:

a rectangular prism
b rectangular pyramid
C triangular prism
d triangular pyramid
e trapezoidal prism
6 The volume of a sphere with a diameter of 15 cm is closest to:
a 560 cm3
d 4500 cm3
b 900 cm3
e 36 000 cm3
7 The volume of the composite object, given that VO = 10 cm,
is closest to:
a 1000 cm3
b 1300 cm3
C 1500 cm3
d 2000 cm3
e 10 000 cm3
8 In the triangle shown, the value of c is:
3
a 3
b 6
2.6
c
C 9
d 12
e 4
7.8
9 The circumference of the larger cone is closest to:
a 113 mm
b 151 mm
C 226 mm
d 302 mm
e 459 mm
C 3600 cm3
24 mm
189 mm
63 mm
293
10 The diagonal distance on the plasma screen is used to specify the different sizes available. If the
h cm
height on a 51 cm plasma is 45 cm, then a similar 34 cm television has a height, h, which is

closest to:
a 67 cm
34 cm
b 45 cm
C 34 cm
d 30 cm
e 26 cm
45 cm
51 cm
11 The diagram at right shows the path of a pool ball into
6x
the middle pocket of a 12 by 6 rectangular billiard table.

To achieve this, the expression for the value of x is:
4 6 x
6 6 x
a
b
=
=
6
x
4
x
12 6 x
6 x6
d
C
=
=
6
x
4
x
6 2+ x
=
e
4
x
x
4
12
12 Jennifer is standing 2 metres directly in front of her bedroom window,
which is 1 metre wide. The width (w) of her view of a mountain range
1 kilometre from her window is (to the nearest metre):
a 1002 metres
b 1000 metres
C 499 metres
d 501 metres
e 500 metres
2m
1m
13 The large cone is filled to one-third of its height with water as shown.
The ratio of the volume of water to air is:

a 1 : 27
b 1 : 26
C 27 : 1
d 1:9
e 1:3
S h orT
a n S Wer
1 For each of the figures, calculate the values of the pronumerals.

a
b
a
b
40
294
1000 m
2 Calculate the outer perimeter (shown in red) and shaded area of the flower.
r = 11 mm
r = 22 mm
3 For the triangular prism:

a Sketch an appropriate net for the given solid prism.
b Transfer the units appropriately to the net from part a.
c Calculate the total surface area of the object.
4m
3m
5m
6m
4 a What is the volume contained by the solid and framed sections (to 1 decimal place)?
b What is the volume of the solid part only?
c What is the total surface area of the solid part only (to 1 decimal place)?
6m
10 m
5 The dimensions of a rectangular prism tub are 30 cm by 20 cm by 15 cm. The tub is filled completely
with water and then transferred into a cylinder tank that is 10 cm in radius and 40cm tall. How high is
the water level in the cylinder?
6 Two ladders are placed against the wall at the same angle. The ladders are 2 metres and 3metres long. If the
taller ladder reaches 2.1 metres up the wall, how far up will the second ladder reach (to 1 decimal place)?
7 A yacht is an unknown distance from the shore. A family on the beach make the measurements as
shown in the diagram below. How far is it to the yacht (to the nearest metre)?
10 m
1m
6m
8 A plan is drawn to scale of 1 : 50 000. Find:

a the length in centimetres on the plan that represents 1 km
b the area in hectares of a region represented by 4 cm2 on the plan
c the area on the plan of a region of 25 hectares.
295
e x Tended
r e S ponS e
diGiTal doC
doc-9457
Test Yourself
Chapter 7
Task 1
A rectangular block of modelling clay has dimensions of 30 cm by 20 cm by 10 cm.
1 a What is the volume of the block of clay?
b Express, in litres, your answer from question 1 a.
c What is the total surface area of the clay?
2 The entire block of clay is remoulded to the shape of a cylinder with a height of 30 cm.
a Find the diameter of the cylindrical block of clay (to 2 decimal places).
b Find the new total surface area of the clay when moulded as a cylinder (to the nearest cm2).
c What fraction of the volume needs to be removed to turn the cylindrical block into a cone with the
same diameter and height?
3 Clay is moulded to the shape at right to represent a 1 : 100 scale model of a grain silo.
a Find the volume of clay needed to make a scale model grain silo
6.6 cm
b Find the actual volume of the grain silo. Express your answer to the
nearest cubic metre.
6 cm
c What is the ratio of the volume of the model to the volume of the actual
grain silo?
d If the scale model has a total surface area of 143.14 cm2, find the total
surface area of the actual silo.
6 cm
5 cm
4 Another silo, half the size of the silo in question 3, is to be built. What fraction will this smaller silo be
in volume compared to the larger silo?

Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Practice
VCE exam
questions
Use StudyON to
access all exam
questions on this
topic since 2002.
296
Task 2
The rectangular rear window of a car has an area of 1.28 m2.
a Find the height of the rear window if its length is 160 centimetres (to the nearest centimetre).
b A wiper blade is 50 centimetres long and just reaches the top of the window as it makes a semicircular
sweep. The base of the wiper is situated at the bottom centre of the rear window.
i Draw a diagram of the situation.
ii Find the area of the window swept by the wiper (to the nearest cm2).
iii Find the percentage of the windows area not swept by the wiper.
c The manufacturer decides to increase the wiper length by 10 centimetres
i Find the new area of the window that is swept by the wiper (to the nearest cm2).
ii Find the percentage of the windows area that is not swept by the wiper.
ICT activities
Chapter opener
diGiTal doC
similarity and mensuration. (page 253)
7a
properties of angles, triangles and polygons
inTeraCTiViTY
The sum of external angles of a polygon int-0259: Use the
interactivity to investigate external angles of polygons. (page 253)
7b
area and perimeter
diGiTal doCS
SkillSHEET 7.1 doc-9451: Practise substitution into a formula.
(page 261)
SkillSHEET 7.2 doc-9452: Practise conversion of units of length.
(page 262)
SkillSHEET 7.3 doc-9453: Practise expressing one number as a
percentage of another. (page 262)
7C
Total surface area
diGiTal doC
WorkSHEET 7.1 doc-9454: Convert units, calculate perimeter, area,
total surface area and volume (page 267)
TUTorialS
We9 eles-1277: Watch a tutorial on how to calculate the total
surface area of a poster tube. (page 263)
We 12 eles-1278: Watch a tutorial on how to calculate the total
surface area of a triangular prism. (page 265)
7d
TUTorialS
We 18 eles-1279: Watch a worked example on how to calculate
the volume of a prism. (page 270)
We20 eles-1280: Watch a worked example on how to calculate
the volume of a composite 3-dimensional object. (page 272)
7F
Similar triangles
diGiTal doC
WorkSHEET 7.2 doc-9456: Interior and exterior angles, perimeter,
area, total surface area and volume, convert units and calculate
unknown quantities in similar triangles (page 283)
TUTorial
We24 eles-1281: Watch a worked example on how to use similar
figures to calculate unknown dimensions. (page 280)
inTeraCTiViTY
Scale factors int-0188: Use the interactivity to consolidate your
understanding of 1-, 2- and 3-dimensional scale factors. (page 279)
7G
TUTorial
We28 eles-1282: Watch a worked example on how to use scale
factors to calculate volume. (page 286)
Chapter review
diGiTal doC
diGiTal doC
SkillSHEET 7.4 doc-9455: Practise conversion to units of volume and
capacity. (page 272)
297
Answers CHAPTER 7
GeomeTrY: SimilariTY and
menSUraTion
exercise 7a properties of angles,
1 a 60, 120
b 90, 90
c 120, 60
d 135, 45
3
4
f 140, 40
e 128 7 , 51 7
g 144, 36
2 a 79
b x = 130, y = 50
c 27
d a = 15, b = 165, c = 165
e b = 8 cm, c = 50
f 148
3 a x = 35, y = 145
b 30
c 28
d a = 70, b = 110, c = 70, d = 110
e m = 117, n = 63
f 59
4 a Pentagon (5-sided)
b Dodecagon (12-sided)
c Octagon
d Hexagon
e Equilateral triangle
5 a r = 2.1 cm, h = 7.2 cm
b x = 35, y = 35, z = 110
c a = 86, b = 94, c = d = 43
d a = 40, b = 50
6 D
7A
exercise 7b
1 a
c
e
2 a
c
e
3 a
c
e
4 a
c
e
5 a
c
e
g
area and perimeter

28 m
b 34 m
82.5 cm
d 42.4 mm
496.4 m
49 m2
b 48 m2
2
394 cm
d 143 mm2
11 550 m2
680 m2
b 8.6 m2
204 m2
d 7635.9 mm2
2
313 cm
106 m
b 12.1 m
71.7 m
d 331.5 mm
76.2 cm
200 cm2
b 32 m2
350 cm2
d 35 000 mm2
2
2.5 km
f 35.7 hectares
2750 m2
h 60 m2
6 3.74 m2
7 661 mm2
8 E
9C
10 a 1256.6 cm2
b 28.3 cm2
c 285.9 cm2
d 75.0%, 22.75%, 2.25%
exercise 7C
exercise 7d
Volume of prisms, pyramids

and spheres
1 a 350 mm3
b 0.0048 m3
c 56 litres
d 15 000 cm3
e 1600 litres
f 2.3 mm3
g 570 cm3
h 0.14 litres
i 250 cm3
2 a 70 685 835 mm3 or 71 litres
b 562 332 cm3 or 562 litres
c 1012 cm3
d 32 m3
3
e 10 200 mm
f 17 556 mm3 or 17.6 cm3
3 a 12.18 m3
b 1740 mm3
c 399.5 cm3
4 a 1.2 m
b 8.2 cm
c 40 mm
d 15 cm
5 a 440 cm3
b 4435 cm3
c 272 m3
d 864 mm3
3
e 240 cm
6 a 2145 cm3
b 2960 cm3
3
c 179 m
d 2089 cm3
e 39 m3
f 88 828 m3
3
7 a 91.125 cm
b 22.05 m3
c 3.1 cm
d 8 cm
e 8 mm
8 21 mL
9 a 26 cm
c 575.2 cm3
e
10
11
12
13
b 12.6 m2
11 a
m
r=1m
d 9.4 m2
r=2m
r=1m
298
2
3
1
3
f 1 m
b 862.8 cm3
d 287.6 cm3
D
B
E
A
exercise 7e
1 a i k=4
b i k=
Railing
2m
Total surface area
1 a 72 600 cm2
b 392 m2
c 8.0 m2
d 54.3 cm2
e 395.8 cm2
f 17 278.8 mm2
2 a 4.9 m2
b 364 cm2
c 5808.8 mm2 or 58.0 cm2
3 a 2m
b 7.1 cm
c 31.5 cm
d 224.0 cm
4 a 530 cm2
b 672.4 cm2
c 564 cm2
d 1008 mm2
5 a 245 436.9 mm2
b 914.8 cm2
c 123 cm2
6 50 m2, 50 0 000 cm2
7 99.25 m2
8 C
9 B
10 E
11 A
12 a Cylinder loaf
b 108.7 cm2
1
20
exercise 7F
b SSS, k = 2
c AAA or SAS, k = 2
d AAA, k = 1.5
e SSS, k = 3.5
f AAA, k = 3
2 a 30
c 15
e 7.2
3 a 8
b 4
d 38
e 72
4 810 cm
6 16 m
8 D
9 B
exercise 7G
factors
1
c i k = 0.8
ii x = 3.2 cm, y = 6.4 cm
2 a Corresponding angle law, 25.5 mm
b Photographic image, 1.2 m
3 25 cm by 30 cm
4 a 2.4 m
b 36 cm
c 25 cm
5 215 mm by 178 mm, landscape
6 C
7 E
8 D
b 18
d 42
f 10
c 10.8
f 426
5 21.5 metres
7 15 m
10 D
area and volume scale
Linear
scale
factors
k
Area scale
factors
k2
Volume
scale
factors
k3
16
64
27
25
125
10
100
1000
64
512
0.3
0.09
0.027
36
216
0.1
0.01
0.001
100
10 000
1 000 000
0.4
0.16
0.064
20
400
2
8000
2
240 mm
225 mm2
i 4.25 m
25 m
300 cm3
1 litre
6.5 m2
204 litres
10 cm3
39 cm2
16
b 432 cm
ii
c
b
d
b
d
b
d
b
12.5 cm
7.75 cm
8640 cm3
4050 cm3
314.2 cm2
4.25 litres
1728 cm3
3 cm
25
16
4
9
8 a 64
64
27
125
64
8
27
2 a
c
3 a
b
4 a
c
5 a
c
6 a
c
7 a
Similar figures
ii x = 280, y = 200
ii x = 125, y = 5
Similar triangles
.
4
or 1.3
3
1 a SAS, k =
9 a 2 litres
10
27
64
12
13
14
16
22 cm
a 3:2
1:7
D
16
9
b 3.6 litres
11 20 cm2
b 9:4
15 E
17 B
ChapTer reVieW
mUlTiple ChoiCe
1
4
7
10
13
B
D
B
D
B
E
E
B
A
2
5
8
11
3
6
9
12
C
A
C
E
ShorT anSWer
1 a a = 40, b = 50, c = 40
b a = 45, b = 45, c = 135
2 Area = 4942 mm2, perimeter = 311 mm
3 a, b
c 84 m2
5
4
6
6
4
b 339.3 m3
8 a 2 cm
c 1 cm2
b 100 hectares
33
6 1.4 m
b i
cm
80 cm
160 cm
b 6 litres
b 1904 cm2
ii 8639 cm2
iii 32.5%
c i 9425 cm2
ii 26.4%
2
3
3 a 121.9 cm3
c 1:1 000 000
4
Task 2
a 80 cm
50
exTended reSponSe
Task 1
1 a 6000 cm3
c 2200 cm2
2 a 15.96 cm
33
4 a 367.6 m3
c 273.3 m2
5 28.6 cm
7 60 m
b 122 m3
d 143.14 m2
1
8
299
Chapter 8
Trigonometry
DIGItaL DOC
10 Quick Questions
doc-9458
Chapter CONteNtS
8a
8B
8C
8D
8e
8F
8G
8h
8I
Pythagoras theorem
Pythagorean triads
Three-dimensional Pythagoras theorem
Trigonometric ratios
The sine rule
Ambiguous case of the sine rule
The cosine rule
Special triangles
Area of triangles
trigonometry
Trigonometry is a branch of mathematics that is used to solve
problems involving the relationships between the angles and
sides of triangles.
Often the problem is a descriptive one and, to solve it
confidently, you need to visualise the situation and draw an
appropriate diagram or sketch.
Labelling conventions
When we use trigonometry to solve problems involving
triangles, there are several labelling conventions that help
us remain clear about the relationships between the vertices,
angles and lines being used. These will be explained as they
arise; however, the basic convention used in this book is
shown in the figure below right. Note the use of italics.
The angle A is at vertex A, which is opposite line a.
B
The angle B is at vertex B, which is opposite line b.
B
a
The angle C is at vertex C, which is opposite line c.
c
To avoid cluttered diagrams, only the vertices
C
C
(A, B, C) are usually shown; the associated angles
A
b
A
(A, B, C ) are assumed.
Note: Naturally, we do not need such labels in all diagrams, and sometimes we wish to label vertices,
angles and lines in other ways, but these will always be clear from the diagram and its context.
8a
pythagoras theorem
Before investigating the relationships between the angles and sides of a triangle, we should consider a
problem-solving technique that involves only the sides of triangles: Pythagoras theorem.
Pythagoras theorem is attributed to the Greek mathematician and philosopher, Pythagoras, around
500 BC. (However, the principle was known much earlier, and it seems that even the pyramid builders of
ancient Egypt used the theorem in constructing the pyramids.)
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Chapter 8 Trigonometry
301
The theorem describes the relationship between the lengths of the sides of all right-angled triangles.
Pythagoras theorem states that the square of the hypotenuse
is equal to the sum of the squares of the other two sides, or
c (hypotenuse)
c2 = a2 + b2
and, therefore, to find c,

c=
a 2 + b2
where c is the longest side or hypotenuse and a and b are the two shorter sides.
Note: Because the equation c2 = a2 + b2 has become a standard way of expressing Pythagoras theorem, we
often adjust the labelling convention to use c for the hypotenuse no matter how the opposite (right) angle
and vertex is labelled. However, this will always be clear from the diagram.
The longest side is always opposite the largest angle (90 for right-angled triangles) and similarly, the
shortest side is opposite the smallest angle.
To find one of the shorter sides (for example, side a), the formula transposes to:
a2 = c2 b2
and so
a = c2 b2 .
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 1
Find the length of the unknown side (to 1 decimal place) in the
right-angled triangle shown.
thINK
1
2
3
Note that the triangle is right-angled and we

need to find the unknown length, given the
other two lengths.
Label the sides of the triangle, using the
convention that c is the hypotenuse.
Substitute the values into the appropriate
formula.
4 cm
WrIte/DraW
7 cm
c=x
a=4
b=7
c2 = a2 + b2
x2
42
Alternatively,
2
2
c = a +b
72
2
2
x = 4 +7
= 16 + 49
= 16 + 49
Write the answer using the correct units and to

the appropriate degree of accuracy.
= 65
x = 65
= 65
= 8.0622
The unknown sides length is 8.1 cm, correct to
1 decimal place.
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 2
Find the maximum horizontal distance (to the nearest metre) a ship could drift from its original
anchored point, if the anchor line is 250 metres long and it is 24 metres to the bottom of the sea
from the end of the anchor line on top of the ships deck.
thINK
302
Sketch a suitable diagram of the problem

given. Note that the triangle is right-angled and
we need to find the unknown length, given the
other two lengths.
Simplify the triangle, adding known lengths,

and label the sides using the convention that
c is the hypotenuse.
WrIte/DraW
es
0 metr
c = 25
a=?
b = 24 metres
c2 = a2 + b2
Substitute the values into the appropriate

formula.
Alternatively,
2
2
a = c b
2502 = a2 + 242
2
2
= 250 24
62 500 = a2 + 576
= 62 500 576
a2 = 62 500 576
= 61 924
a=
61 924
61 924
= 248.845
4
Write the answer using the correct units and to

the required accuracy.
The ship can drift 249 metres, correct to the

nearest metre.
pythagoras theorem
exercise 8a
1 We1 Find the length of the unknown side (to 1 decimal place) in each of the following right-angled
triangles.
a
b
x
8
x
DIGItaL DOC
doc-9459
Spreadsheet
pythagoras theorem
12
2.4
9
5
0.7
d
11.6
1 2
x
17.5
2 An aircraft is flying at an altitude of 5000 metres. If its horizontal distance from the airport is
3kilometres, what is the distance (to the nearest metre) from the airport directly to the aircraft?
3 What is the length (to the nearest millimetre) of a diagonal brace on a rectangular gate that is 2600 mm
wide and 1800 mm high?

4 We2 Find the length of the unknown side (to 1 decimal place) in each of the following right-angled
triangles.
a
8
17
20
10
15
x
9
d
7
25
x
7.4
10.6
15
x
x
303
5 Calculate the lengths of the sloping sides in the following. (Remember to construct a suitable
right-angled triangle.)
a
15
8 mm
10 mm
10.8
30 mm
10
4.6
12
6.2
f
6m
x
305 cm
14 m
3m
8m
12 m
460 cm
6 Calculate the value of the pronumerals.

a
b
6.2
215 cm
17
3.1
10.6
10
15
d
2.3
6.3 mm
4.
4.6
1.7
d
5.3 mm
7 One of the smaller sides of a right-angled triangle is 16 metres long. The hypotenuse is 8metres longer
than the other unknown side.

a Draw a suitable triangle to represent this situation.
b Write an expression to show the relationship between the three sides.
c State the lengths of all three sides.
8 MC The length of side AF in the diagram below is:
a
C 2
F
E
A
1m
B
9 MC To the nearest metre, the length of cable that would connect the roofs of two buildings that are
40 metres and 80 metres high respectively and are 30 metres apart (as shown below) is:
a 40 metres
B 45 metres
C 50 metres
D 55 metres
e none of these
304
8B
pythagorean triads
A Pythagorean triad is a set of 3 numbers which satisfies Pythagoras theorem. An example is the set of
numbers 3, 4, 5 where c2 = a2 + b2
So,
52 = 32 + 42
25 = 9 + 16
The diagram below illustrates this relationship.
35
Another Pythagorean triad is the multiple (scale factor of 2) of the above

set: 6, 8, 10.
Others are 5, 12, 13 and 0.5, 1.2, 1.3.
Prove these for yourself.
10
6
3
5
4
8
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 3
Is the set of numbers 4, 6, 7 a Pythagorean triad?

thINK
WrIte
42 + 62 = 16 + 36
= 52
Find the sum of the squares of the two smaller

numbers.
Find the square of the largest number.
72 = 49
Compare the two results. The numbers form a

Pythagorean triad if the results are the same.
72 42 + 62
Write your answer.
The set of numbers 4, 6, 7 is not a Pythagorean

triad.
Another way to generate Pythagorean triads is by using the following rule:

Step 1. Square an odd number (52 = 25).
Step 2. Find the two consecutive numbers that add up to the squared value (12 + 13 = 25).
Step 3. The triad is the odd number you started with together with the two consecutive numbers (5, 12, 13).
Try to find a triad for the odd number 9.
A triangle whose sides form a Pythagorean triad
contains a right angle, which is opposite the longest
side. This result can be illustrated approximately
with a rope of any length, by tying 11 equally
spaced knots and forming a triangle with sides equal
to 3, 4 and 5 spaces, as shown below. In doing this,
a right angle is formed opposite the 5-space side.
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 4
A triangle has sides of length 8 cm, 15 cm and 17 cm. Is the triangle right-angled?
If so, where is the right angle?
thINK
1
The triangle is right-angled if its side lengths

form a Pythagorean triad. Find the sum of the
squares of the two smaller sides.
WrIte
82 + 152 = 64 + 225
= 289
305
Find the square of the longest side and compare

to the first result.
172 = 289
172 = 82 + 152
The triangle is right-angled.
The right angle is opposite the longest side.
The right angle is opposite the 17 cm side.
pythagorean triads
exercise 8B
DIGItaL DOC
doc-9460
Spreadsheet
pythagorean triads
1 We3
Are the following sets of numbers Pythagorean triads?
a 9, 12, 15
b 4, 5, 6
d 3, 6, 9
e 0.6, 0.8, 1.0
g 6, 13, 14
h 14, 20, 30
j 10, 24, 26
k 12, 16, 20
c
f
i
l
30, 40, 50
7, 24, 25
11, 60, 61
2, 3, 4
2 Complete the following Pythagorean triads. Each set is written from smallest to largest.
a 9, __, 15
b __, 24, 25
c 1.5, 2.0, __
d 3, __, 5
e 11, 60, __
f 10, __, 26
g __, 40, 41
h 0.7, 2.4, __
3 For each of the sets which were Pythagorean triads in question 1, state which side the right angle is
opposite.
4 We4 A triangle has sides of length 16 cm, 30 cm and 34 cm. Is the triangle right-angled? If so, where
is the right angle?

5 A triangle has sides of length 12 cm, 13 cm and 18 cm. Is the triangle right-angled? If so, where is the
right angle?
6 Find the unknown length in each case below.
b Radius = 3.5 cm
a
20
13
12
30
24 cm
c
c
9
41
1.1
6.1
e
1.3
0.4
26 km
0.3
E
10 km
7 An athlete runs 700 m north and then 2.4 km west. How far away is the athlete from the starting point?
MATHS
QUEST
m
0c
20
180 cm
300 cm
8 Find the perimeter of the flag as shown below.
9 MC Which of the following is a Pythagorean triad?

a 7, 14, 21
D 12, 13, 25
B 1.2, 1.5, 3.6

e 15, 20, 25
10 MC Which of the following is not a Pythagorean triad?

a 5, 4, 3
D 0.9, 4.0, 4.1
306
B 6, 9, 11
e 5, 12, 13
C 3, 6, 9
C 13, 84, 85
three-dimensional pythagoras
theorem
8C
Many practical situations involve three-dimensional objects with perpendicular planes and therefore the
application of Pythagoras theorem. To solve three-dimensional problems, a carefully drawn and labelled
diagram will help. It is also of benefit to identify right angles to see where Pythagoras theorem can be
applied. This enables you to progress from the known information to the unknown value(s).
INteraCtIVItY
int-0189
three-dimensional
pythagoras theorem
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 5
To the nearest centimetre, what is the longest possible thin rod that could fit
in the boot of a car? The boot can be modelled as a simple rectangular prism
with the dimensions of 1.5 metres wide, 1 metre deep and 0.5 metres high.
Draw a diagram of the rectangular prism.
Identify the orientation of the longest

object from one corner to the furthest
diagonally opposite corner. In this case, it
is AG.
Calculate the length of diagonal AC.
Calculate the length of diagonal AG,

using the calculated length for AC.
Note: To avoid rounding error, use the most
accurate form, which is the surd 3.25 .
Write the answer using the correct units

and level of accuracy.
E
0.5 m
A
Identify the two right-angled triangles

necessary to solve for the two unknown
lengths.
Draw the triangles separately, identifying
the lengths appropriately.
1.0 m
1.5 m
C
y
1.5 m
G
x
0.5 m
WrIte/DraW
1.0 m
thINK
tUtOrIaL
eles-1283
Worked example 5
c2 = a2 + b2
y2 = 1.52 + 1.02
= 2.25 + 1
= 3.25
y = 3.25
= 1.803 (to 3 decimal places)
The length of AC is 1.8 metres (to 1 decimal place).
2
2
c = a + b (alternative form)
2
x = 0.5 + ( 3.25)
= 0.25 + 3.25
= 3.5
= 1.8708 (m)
The longest rod that could fit in the car boot is
187 centimetres, calculated to the nearest centimetre.
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 6
To find the height of a 100-metre square-based pyramid, with

a slant height of 200 metres as shown, calculate the:
a length of AC (in surd form)
b length of AO (in surd form)
c height of the pyramid VO (to the nearest metre).
V
200 m
D
A
O
B
C
100 m
307
thINK
WrIte
a Calculate the length of diagonal AC in the
right-angled triangle, ABC. Write surds in their

simplest form.
2
2
c = a + b (alternative form)
2
2
AC = 100 + 100
= 20 000
= 10 000 2
= 100 2
= 100 2
100 m
100 m
The length of AC is 100 2 metres.

b AO is half the length of AC.
b Length of AO is
c 1 Calculate the height of the pyramid, VO, in
the right-angled triangle, VOA.
100 2
or 50 2 metres.
2
2
2
a = c b (alternative form)
200 2 (50 2)
VO =
200 m
= 40 000 5000
= 35000
= 187.0829
2
Write the answer using the correct units

and level of accuracy.
50 2 m
The height of the pyramid, VO, is 187 metres,

calculated to the nearest metre.
three-dimensional pythagoras theorem
exercise 8C
1 We5 To the nearest centimetre, what is the longest thin rod that could fit inside a cube with side
length 2 m?
2 To the nearest centimetre, what is the longest drumstick that could fit in a rectangular toy box whose
dimensions are 80 cm long by 80 cm wide by 60 cm high?
3 For each of the prisms shown, calculate:
i the length of AC
a
G
H
ii the length of AG.

b
E
E
120 cm
C
D
40 cm
B
25 cm
G
I
C
F
5m
40 m
D 6m
14 m
E
400 mm
308
A
D
300 mm
H
1200 mm
4 We6 For each of the pyramids shown, calculate:

i the length of AC
ii the perpendicular height.
a
G
G
600 m
40 m
D
A
C
20 m
B
15 m
D
A
km
C
km
5 A 3.5-metre long ramp rises to a height of 1.2 metres. How long (correct to 1 decimal place) is the base
of the ramp?
6 MC Two guide wires are used to support a flagpole as shown.
The height of the flagpole would be closest to:

a 3m
B 8m
C 12 m
D 21 m
e 62 m
Wire
Wire
8.5 m
2m
4m
7 Find the values of the pronumerals (to 1 decimal place) in the
pyramid at right.
c
6.1
a
3.0
4.9
8 Find the lengths of AB and DH (to 2 decimal places),
where AC = 7.00 m and CH = 15.00 m.
C
E
9 A man moves through a two-level maze by following the solid
black line, as shown in the diagram. What is the direct distance

from his starting point, A, to his end point, F (to the nearest
metre)?
40 m
C
30 m
B
F
D
30 m
A 10 m
H
Not to
scale
10 In each of the following typical building structures find the length of the unknown cross-brace
shown in red.
a
b
3m
5m
2.6 m
b
11 m
3m
11 For the coffee table design at right, find the length of the legs (to the nearest millimetre) if the coffee
table is to be:
a 500 mm off the ground
b 700 mm off the ground
and the legs are offset from the vertical by a distance of:
i 100 mm
ii 150 mm.
Offset distance
Table
height
309
12 Find the length of the brace, BG (to the nearest centimetre), that is needed to reinforce the wedge-
shaped structure shown.
E
G
D
F
1.0 m
C
4.0 m
DIGItaL DOC
doc-9461
WorkSHEET 8.1
A 2.0 m B
8D
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
trigonometric ratios
Trigonometric ratios include the sine ratio, the cosine ratio and the tangent ratio; three ratios of the
lengths of sides of a right-angled triangle dependent on a given acute angle.
Labelling convention
For the trigonometric ratios the following labelling convention should be applied:
1. The hypotenuse is opposite the right angle (90).
2. The opposite side is directly opposite the given angle, .
3. The adjacent side is next to the given angle, .
Consider the three triangles drawn below. We know from the previous chapter on similarity that
ABC, ADE and AFG are similar because the corresponding angles are the same. Therefore, the
corresponding sides are in the same ratio (scale factor).
B
30
30
30
ratio of lengths of sides

Copy and complete the table below by identifying and measuring the lengths of the three sides for each
of the three triangles above. Evaluate the ratios of the sides.
Length of side
Triangle
Opposite
ABC
ADE
AFG
310
Adjacent
Hypotenuse
Ratio of lengths of sides

Opposite
Hypotenuse
Adjacent
Hypotenuse
Opposite
Adjacent
opposite
, the value is the same for all three triangles.
hypotenuse
This is the same for all right-angled triangles with the same acute angle.
Notice that for each of the ratios, for example
Trigonometric ratios are used in right-angled triangles:

1. to find an unknown length, given an angle and a side
2. to find an unknown angle, given two lengths.
Sine ratio
The sine ratio is defined as follows:
length of opposite side
lengt
.
The sine of an angle =
length
ength of hypotenuse side
engt
In short,
sin ( ) =
opposite
hypotenuse
sin ( ) =
O
H
Hypotenuse
Opposite
[SOH]
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 7
Find the length (to 1 decimal place) of the line joining the vertices A and B in the triangle
below.
A
15 cm
50
thINK
1
Identify the shape as a right-angled triangle

with a given length and angle. Label the sides
as per the convention for trigonometric ratios.
B
WrIte/DraW
A
15 cm
Hypotenuse
C
Identify the appropriate trigonometric

ratio, namely the sine ratio, from the given
information.
= 50
x cm
Opposite
B
Angle = 50
Opposite side = x cm
Hypotenuse = 15 cm
[SOH]
Substitute into the formula.
Isolate x and evaluate.
15 sin (50) =
Write the answer using the correct units and

level of accuracy.
The length of the line joining vertices A and B is

11.5 centimetres, correct to 1 decimal place.

length of hypotenuse side
O
sin ( ) =
H
x
sin (50) =
15
sin ( ) =
x
15
15
x = 15 sin (50)
= 15 0.766
= 11.491
311
Cosine ratio
The cosine ratio is defined as follows:
The cosine of an angle =
In short,
length of adjacent side

lengt
.
lengt of hypotenuse side
length
cos () =
Hypotenuse
adjacent
hypotenuse
A
cos () =
H
Adjacent
[CAH]
In Worked example 7 the sine ratio was used to find the unknown length. The cosine ratio can be used
in the same way, if it is required.
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 8
Find the length of the guy wire (to the nearest centimetre) supporting a flagpole, if
the angle of the guy wire to the ground is 70 and it is anchored 2 metres from the base
of the flagpole.
thINK
1
WrIte/DraW
Draw a diagram to represent the situation and

identify an appropriate triangle.
Guy
wire
70
2m
Label the diagram with the given angle and the

given side to find an unknown side in a rightangled triangle.
xm
Hypotenuse
70
2m
Adjacent
Choose the appropriate trigonometric ratio,

namely the cosine ratio.
Angle = 70
Adjacent side = 2 m
Hypotenuse = x m
A
H
2
cos (70 ) =
x
x
1
=
cos (70) 2
[CAH]
cos () =
x=
2
cos (70)
= 5.8476
6
312
Write the answer using the correct units and level

of accuracy.
The length of the guy wire is 5.85 metres

or 585 centimetres, correct to the nearest
centimetre.
tangent ratio
The tangent ratio is defined as follows:
In short,

.
opposite
adjacent
tan ( ) =
tan ( ) =
Opposite
The tangent of an angle =
O
A
Adjacent
[TOA]
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 9
Find the length of the shadow (to 1 decimal place) cast by a 3-metre tall pole when the angle of
the sun to the horizontal is 70.
thINK
1
WrIte/DraW
Draw a diagram to represent the situation and

identify an appropriate triangle.
3m
70
Label the diagram with the given angle and the

given side in order to find an unknown side in a
right-angled triangle.
Opposite
3m
70
xm
Adjacent
3
Identify the appropriate trigonometric ratio,

namely the tangent ratio.
Angle = 70
Opposite side = 3 m
Adjacent side = x m
[TOA]
O
A
3
tan (70) =
x
x
1
=
tan(70) 3
tan () =
3
tan(70)
= 1.0919
x=

level of accuracy.
The length of the shadow is approximately

1.1 metres, correct to 1 decimal place.
313
Finding an unknown angle

If the lengths of the sides of a triangle are known, unknown angles within the triangle can be found.
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 10
Find the smallest angle (to the nearest degree) in a 3, 4, 5 Pythagorean triangle.
thINK
1
WrIte/DraW
The smallest angle is opposite the smallest

side. Label the sides as given by convention for
trigonometric ratios.
5 Hypotenuse
Opposite 3
x
4
2
All side lengths are known, therefore, any one

of the 3 ratios can be used. Choose one ratio,
for example, sine ratio.
Convert the ratio to a decimal.
Evaluate x.

level of accuracy.
[SOH]
O
H
3
sin( x) =
5
= 0.6
sin () =
x = sin 1 (0.6).
= 36.87
exercise 8D
DIGItaL DOCS
doc-9462
SkillSHEET 8.1
Identifying sides of a
right-angled triangle
with respect to the
given angle
doc-9463
SkillSHEET 8.2
Finding trigonometric
values
and angles
Angle = x
Opposite side = 3
Hypotenuse = 5
The smallest angle is 37, correct to the nearest

degree.
1 We 7 Find the length of the unknown side (to 1 decimal place) in each of the following triangles.
a
b
12 km
20
430 mm
2.5 m
50
43
d
61
52
2000 mm
15 cm
y
92 mm
49
2 We8 A boat is moored in calm waters with its depth sounder registering 14.5 m. If the anchor line
makes an angle of 72 with the vertical, what is the length of line (to the nearest metre) that is out
of the boat?
3 We9 A person is hoping to swim directly across a straight river from point A to point B, a distance of
215 m. The river carries the swimmer downstream so that she actually reaches the other side at pointC.
If the line of her swim, AC, makes an angle of 67 with the river bank, find how far (to the nearest
metre) downstream from point B she finished.
314
4 Find the value of the missing side (to 1 decimal place) of the following triangles.
c
a
b
x
45
2m
12
20
65
x
67.4
x
5 Find the value of the unknown sides (to 1 decimal place) of the following shapes.
a
b
c
6.5 cm
15 cm
110
27 m
20 cm
x
35
65
x
6 We10 Find the size of the unknown angle (to the nearest degree) in each of the following triangles.
a
b
10
2m
6
c
2m
d
500 mm
400 mm
7 Find the values of the unknown angle, a (to the nearest degree).
b
a
a
2m
11 m
10 m
a
1.2 m
4m
a
1m
8 Find the sizes of the two acute angles in a 6, 8, 10 Pythagorean triangle.

9 MC If b m is the height reached by the ladder in the diagram at right,
then b is equal to:

a 5.49
D 0.94
2m
B 1.37
C 0.68
e 1.88
70
10 MC The correct expression for the angle of elevation, , of the ramp is:
4
a sin 1
5
B cos 1 4

D tan 1 4
3
e cos 1 3
5
C tan 1 4
5
3
4
315
11 MC The correct expression for the value of c in the figure at right is:
tan (37)
4
4
D
tan (37)
a
cos (37)
4
4
e
sin (37)
B
5
tan (37)
5m
37
c
3m
12 MC A flagpole 2 metres tall casts a 0.6-metre long shadow. The angle of the sun to the ground is:
a 17
D 72
B 70
e 73
C 71
13 In the diagram at right find (to the nearest degree), x metres and y metres
(both to 1 decimal place).

14 A 1.9 m javelin is thrown so that 15 cm of its pointy end sticks into
the ground. The sun is directly overhead, casting a shadow of 90 cm

in length. Determine the angle (to the nearest degree) that the javelin
makes with the ground.
4m
20
60
15 A hot air balloon is hovering in
strong winds, 10 m vertically

above the ground. It is being held
in place by a taut 12 m length of
rope from the balloon to the
ground. Find the angle (to the
nearest degree) that the rope makes
with the ground.
16 A ramp joins two points, A and B.
The horizontal distance between

A and B is 1.2 m, and A is 25 cm
vertically above the level of B.
a Find the length of the ramp
(in metres to 2 decimal places).
b Find the angle that the ramp
makes with the horizontal.
17 A cable car follows a direct line
from a mountain peak (altitude

1250 m) to a ridge (altitude 840 m).
If the horizontal distance between
the peak and the ridge is 430 m, find
the angle of descent (to the nearest
degree) from one to the other.
Introduction sine and cosine rules

Often the triangle that is apparent or identified in a given problem is non-right-angled. Thus, Pythagoras
theorem or the trigonometric ratios are not as easily applied. The two rules that can be used to solve such
problems are:
1. the sine rule
2. the cosine rule.
For the sine and cosine rules the following labelling convention
should be used.
Angle A is opposite side a (at vertex A)
Angle B is opposite side b (at vertex B)
Angle C is opposite side c (at vertex C)
B
B
c
A
C
b
Note: To avoid cluttered diagrams, only the vertices (A, B and C) are usually shown and are used to
represent the angles A, B and C.
316
8e
the sine rule
All triangles can be divided into two right-angled triangles.

Units: 3 & 4
C
b
A
a
B
Earlier, we saw that the new side, h, can be evaluated in two ways.
b
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
AOS:
h
h
sin (B) =
a
b
h = b sin (A)
h = a sin (B)
If we equate the two expressions for h:
b sin (A) = a sin (B).
and rearranging the equation, we obtain:
a
b
=
.
sin ( A) sin ( B)
Using a similar approach it can be shown that:
b
a
c
1.
=
=
sin ( A) sin ( B) sin ( C )
2. Similarly, if the triangle is labelled using other letters, for example STU, then:
s
u
t
=
=
sin ( S ) sin (T ) sin (U )
This can be generalised as follows: in any triangle, the ratio of side length to the sine of the opposite
angle is constant.
The sine rule is used if you are given:
1. two angles and one opposite side
or
2. an angle and its opposite side length (a complete ratio) and one
C
other side. For example, in triangle ABC at right, a= 7 cm, A = 50
a = 7 cm
and c = 9 cm. Angle C could then be found using the sine rule.
50
A
sin (A) =
Do more
Interact
with the sine rule.
c = 9 cm
B
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 11
Find the unknown length, x cm, in the triangle at

right (to 1 decimal place).
130
30
thINK
1
Label the triangle appropriately for the sine

rule.
We have the angle opposite to the unknown

side
side and a known
ratio, therefore, the
angle
sine rule can be used.
tUtOrIaL
eles-1284
Worked example 11
WrIte/DraW
B
130
C
7 cm
30
c = 7 cm
A
b=x
b
c
=
sin ( B) sin (C )
b=x
c = 7 cm
B = 130
C = 30
317
Substitute known values into the two ratios.
Write the answer.
x
7
=
sin (130) sin (30)
7 sin (130)
sin (30)
= 10.7246
= 10.7
x=
The unknown length is 10.7 cm, correct

to 1 decimal place.
Sometimes it is necessary to find the third angle in a triangle in order to apply the sine rule.
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 12
Find the unknown length, x cm (to 2 decimal places).

x
100
65
7 cm
thINK
1
WrIte/DraW

rule.
c=x
A
Calculate the third angle because it is opposite

the unknown side.
Write the sine rule and identify the values of

the pronumerals.
Substitute the known values into the rule.
B
100
65
b=7
C = 180 (65 + 100)

= 15
b
c
=
sin ( B) sin (C )
c=x
C = 15
b=7
B = 100
x
7
=
sin (15) sin (100)
x=
7 sin (15)
sin (100)
= 1.8397
6
Write the answer.
The unknown length is 1.84 cm, correct

WOrKeD eXaMpLe 13
For a triangle PQR, find the unknown angle (to the nearest degree), P,
given p = 5 cm, r = 7 cm and R = 48.
thINK
1
Draw the triangle and assume it is

non-right-angled.
Q
7 cm
P
318
tUtOrIaL
eles-1285
Worked example 13
WrIte/DraW
5 cm
48

rule (it is just as easy to use the given labels).
Q
r=7
p=5
48
P
3
Confirm that it is the sine rule that can be used

as you have the angle opposite to the unknown
side
ratio.
angle and a known
angle
Substitute known values into the two ratios.
Isolate sin (P).
Evaluate the angle (inverse sine) and include

units with the answer.
p
r
=
sin( P) sin( R)
p=5 P=?
r = 7 R = 48
5
7
=
sin ( P) sin (48)
sin ( P) sin (48)
=
5
7
5 sin (48)
sin ( P) =
7
5 sin (48)
P = sin 1
= 32.06
= 32
The unknown angle is 32, correct to
the nearest degree.
Sometimes the angle required for the sine rule is not given. In such cases simply subtract the two known
angles from 180, as was done in step 3 of Worked example 12.
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 14
A pair of compasses (often called a compass) used for drawing circles has two equal legs
joined at the top. The legs are 8 centimetres long. If it is opened to an included angle
of 36degrees between the two legs, find the radius of the circle that would be drawn
thINK
1
WrIte/DraW
Draw the situation and identify that the triangle

is non-right-angled.
36
Draw the triangle separately from the situation

and label it appropriately.
The sine rule cannot be used straight away as
we do not have both a known angle and known
length opposite to the known angle. Therefore,
we need to find either A or C first.
This is an isosceles triangle since a = c;
therefore A = C. Using the fact that the
angle sum of a triangle is 180, find A and
C.
8 cm
B
c = 8 cm
A
36
a = 8 cm
C
180 = A + B + C
= x + 36 + x
2x = 180 36
= 144
x = 72 and, therefore,
A = C = 72
319
b
c
=
sin( B) sin(C )
Write the formula for the sine rule and identify

the values of the pronumerals.
b = y B = 36
c = 8 C = 72
y
8
=
sin(36) sin (72)
Substitute the known values into the formula.
Transpose the equation to get the unknown by

itself.
y=
Evaluate y to 1 decimal place and include units.
y 4.9
The radius of the circle is 4.9 cm, correct
to 1 decimal place.
exercise 8e
8 sin (36)
sin (72)
the sine rule
1 We11 Find the unknown length, x, in each of the following.

a
b
9 cm
110
x
15 m
40
x
18
142
55 cm
250 km
town are shown at the vertices of the triangle at right.

Find the straight-line distance between the school and the post
office (to 1 decimal place).
7 mm
Church
3 km
32
Post Office
each case below.

b
School
86
3 We12 Find the unknown length, x (to 1 decimal place) in
14
15 m
85 7 mm
74
58
c
85
x
105
25
2 The relative positions of the school, church and post office in a small
x
14
74
58
d
x
x
18
142
55 cm
d
18 cm
119
22
x
4 A sailing expedition followed a triangular course as shown at right. Find the total
distance covered in the round trip.

5 We13 For the following questions give answers to the nearest degree.
a In ABC, find the unknown angle, B, given b = 6, c = 6 and C = 52.
b In LMN, find the unknown angle,M, given m = 14.1, n = 27.2 and N = 128.
c In STU, find the unknown angle, S, given s = 12.7, t = 16.3 and T = 45.
d In PQR, find the unknown angle, P, given p = 2, r = 3.5 and R = 128.
e In ABC, find the unknown angle, A, given b = 10, c = 8 and B = 80.
f In PQR, find the unknown angle, R, given p = 48, q = 21 and P = 110.
320
10.5 km
30
78
6 Construct a suitable triangle from the following instructions and find all unknown sides and angles.
One of the sides is 23 cm; the smallest side is 15 cm. The smallest angle is 28.
7 We14 Steel trusses are used to support the roof of a commercial building. The struts in the truss
shown are each made from 0.8 m steel lengths and are welded at the contact points with the upper and
lower sections of the truss.
0.8 m
130
130
130
a On the lower section of the truss, what is the distance (to the nearest centimetre) between each
pair of consecutive welds?

b What is the height (to the nearest centimetre) of the truss?
8 MC The length of side m is nearest to:
a 3.2
D 5.8
B 3.1
e 3.0
C 3.6
70
m
35
C
5.2
9 MC The correct expression for the value of t in the given triangle is:
a
7 sin(100)
sin(30)
5.5 sin (100)
D
sin (50)
5.5 sin (100)
sin (30)
5.5 sin (30)
sin (100)
10 MC The value of x (to 1 decimal place) in the given figure is:

B 4.6
D 3.3
e 3.6
C 5.4
5.5 m
50
30
7 sin (50)
e
sin (100)
a 4.3
100
7m
t
x
60
4
70
3
11 MC In the triangle given, the largest angle (to the nearest degree) is:
a 80
B 82
D 67
e 60
C 84
7 cm
8 cm
60
6 cm
12 MC A yacht sails the three-leg course shown. The largest angle
between any two legs within the course, to the nearest degree, is:
a 34
B 55
D 78
e 90
15 km
C 45
45
18 km
13 km
13 MC The correct expression for angle S in the given triangle is:

a sin 1
40 sin(41)
30

B cos 1

C sin 1
30 sin (41)
40

D sin 1
40 cos(41)
30
41
40
S
30
41 sin (41)
30

e sin 1
30
40
si
n
(
41
321
14 Find the perimeter of the beehive cell shown.

10 mm
15 A logo is in the shape of an isosceles triangle with the equal sides
being 6.5 cm long and the equal angles 68. Use the sine rule to
find the length (to 1 decimal place) of the unknown side.
16 A rope is pegged at one end into the ground, pulled tightly up over
a branch and pegged into the ground at the other end. It is known
that one peg-to-branch length of rope is 8 m and it makes an angle
of 39 with the ground. The other end of the rope makes an angle
of 48 with the ground. Find (correct to 1decimal place):
a the length of the rope
b the distance between the two pegs.
17 A playground swing, which is 2.3 m long, makes an angle of 74, at its swing point, in one complete
swing. Determine the horizontal distance (in metres to 1 decimal place) between the extreme positions
of the swing seat.
18 A scenic flight leaves Geelong and flies west of north for the 80 km direct journey to Ballarat. At
Ballarat the plane turns 92 to the right to fly east of north to Kyneton. From here the plane again turns
to the right and flies the 103 km straight back to Geelong.
a Determine the angle (in degrees to 1 decimal place) through which the plane turned at Kyneton.
b Find the distance (to the nearest km) of the direct flight from Ballarat to Kyneton.
8F
eLeSSON
eles-0051
ambiguous case of
the sine rule
ambiguous case of the sine rule
On your calculator, investigate the values for each of these pairs of sine ratios:
sin (30) and sin (150)
sin (110) and sin (70).
You should obtain the same number for each value in a pair.
Obtuse
Acute
Similarly, sin (60) and sin (120) give an identical value of 0.8660.
Now try to find the inverse sine of these values; for example,
sin 1(0.8660) is 60. The obtuse (greater than 90) angle is not given by
the calculator. When using the inverse sine function on your calculator, the
A rope attached to a
calculator will give only the acute angle.
pole can be anchored
The situation is illustrated practically in the diagram at right where the
in two possible positions.
sine of the acute angle equals the sine of the obtuse angle.
Therefore always check your diagram to see if the unknown angle is the acute or obtuse angle or perhaps
either. This situation is illustrated in the two diagrams below. The triangles have two corresponding sides
equal, a and b, as well as angle B. The sine of 110 also equals the sine of 70; however, the side c is quite
different. It is worth noting that this ambiguity occurs when the smaller known side is opposite the known
acute angle. That is, an ambiguous case occurs if B < 90 and asinB b < a:
a
110
c
b
70
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 15
To the nearest degree, find the angle, U, in a triangle, given t = 7, u = 12

and angle T is 25.
thINK
1
322
Draw a suitable sketch of the triangle given. As

the length of s is not given, side t can be drawn
two different ways. Therefore angle U could be
either an acute or an obtuse angle. Label the
triangles appropriately for the sine rule. (It is
just as easy to use the given labels.)
tUtOrIaL
eles-1286
Worked example 15
WrIte/DraW
S
u = 12
T
25
s
t=7
u = 12
t=7
T
25
Identify that it is the sine rule that can be used

as you have the side opposite to the unknown
side
angle and a known
ratio.
angle
Substitute the known values into the two ratios.

itself.
Evaluate the angle (inverse sine). Note that the

value is an acute angle but it may also be an
obtuse angle.
Calculate the obtuse angle.
Write the answer, giving both the acute and

obtuse angles, as not enough information was
given (the information was ambiguous) to
precisely position side t.
t
u
=
sin (T ) sin (U )
t=7
T = 25
u = 12 U = ?
7
12
=
sin (25) sin (U )
sin (U ) sin (25)
=
12
7
12 sin (25)
sin (U ) =
7
sin (U ) = 0.724 488
U = 46.43
U = 180 46.43
= 133.57
The angle U is either 46 or 134, correct
to the nearest degree.
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 16
In the obtuse-angled triangle PQR at right, find the unknown angle

(to the nearest degree), P.
thINK
1
WrIte/DraW

rule. (It is just as easy to use the given labels.)
40
R
Identify that the sine rule is used as you have

the side opposite to the unknown angle and a
side
known
ratio.
angle
30 cm
Q
p = 30
40
20 cm
P
r = 20
P
p
r
=
sin ( P) sin ( R)
p = 30
r = 20
P=?
R = 40
30
20
=
sin ( P) sin (40)
Substitute the known values into the two ratios.

itself.
Evaluate the angle (inverse sine). Note that the

value is an acute angle while in the diagram
given it is an obtuse angle.
sin (P) = 0.964 18

P = 74.62
Calculate the obtuse angle.
P = 180 74.62
= 105.38
The angle P is 105, correct to the nearest degree.
sin ( P) sin (40)

=
30
20
30 sin (40)
sin (P) =
20
323
exercise 8F
1 We15 Find both the acute and obtuse angles in each case below. Express all answers in degrees to
1decimal place.
In ABC, find the unknown angle, B, given b = 10.8, c = 6 and C = 26.
In STU, find the unknown angle, S, given t = 12.7, s = 16.3 and T = 45.
In PQR, find the unknown angle, P, given p = 3.5, r = 2 and R = 12.
In LMN, find the unknown angle, M, given n = 0.22 km, m=0.5 km a nd N=18.
a
b
c
d
2 We16 Find the unknown angle (to the nearest degree) in each of the following obtuse-angled triangles.
a
b
c
d
3m
60 km
B
110 km
4m
30.5
5.8 m
7m
7 4 m
25
30
20
11 m
3 MC In the triangle given, angle C is (to the nearest degree):

a
B
C
D
e
38
39
78
141
142
C
4.15 cm
19
A
8 cm
4 Find the two unknown angles shown in the diagram below (correct to 1 decimal place).
10 cm
27 x
9 cm
9 cm
y
5 Look at the swinging pendulum shown at right.

a Draw the two possible positions of the bob at the level
of the horizontal line.

b Find the value of the angle, W, at these two extreme
positions.
c Find the smallest and largest distances between
vertex V and the bob.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with the cosine
rule.
324
8G
8 cm
5 cm
15
V
the cosine rule
The cosine rule is derived from a nonright-angled triangle divided

into two right-angled triangles in a similar way to the derivation of the sine
rule. The difference is that, in this case, Pythagoras theorem and the cosine
ratio are used to develop it.
The triangle ABC in the figure at right has been divided into two rightangled triangles with base sides equal to x and (c x).
=
In ACD,
and in BCD,
h2 = a2 (c x)2 (Pythagoras theorem)
Equating expressions for h2,
b2 x2 = a2 (c x)2
a2 = b2 x2 + (c x)2
= b2 x2 + c2 2cx + x2
2 = b2 + c2 2cx
[1]
a
x
Now, from ACD, cos (A) =
b
x = b cos (A)
h2
b2
x2
C
b
h
x
a
cx
B
Substitute this value of x into [1] above.

a2 = b2 + c2 2c[b cos (A)]
So, the cosine rule can be written as:
a2 = b2 + c2 2bc cos (A).
A
b
c
C
a
B
In a similar way to that above, it can be shown that:

b2 = a2 + c2 2ac cos (B)
c2 = a2 + b2 2ab cos (C ).
Also, if the triangle is labelled using other letters, for example STU, then:
s2 = t2 + u2 2tu cos (S ).
The cosine rule is used to find:
1. an unknown length when you have the lengths of two sides and the angle in between
2. an unknown angle when you have the lengths of all three sides.
The formula may be transposed in order to find an unknown angle.
cos (A) =
or alternatively, cos (B) =
b2 + c2 a2
2bc
a2 + c2 b2
a2 + b2 c2
and cos (C ) =
.
2ac
2ab
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 17
Find the unknown length (to 2 decimal places), x, in the

triangle at right.
7 cm
80
6 cm
thINK
1
Identify the triangle as non-right-angled.

rule or cosine rule.
tUtOrIaL
eles-1287
Worked example 17
WrIte/DraW
B
a=x
c=7
A
80
b=6
Identify that it is the cosine rule that is required

as you have the two sides and the angle in
between.
b=6
c=7
A = 80
a=x
Substitute the known values into the cosine rule

formula and evaluate the right-hand side.
a2 = b2 + c2 2bc cos (A)

x2 = 62 + 72 2 6 7 cos (80)
= 36 + 49 84 cos (80)
= 70.4136
Remember to get the square root value, x.
Write the answer, rounding off to the required

number of decimal places and include units.
x = 70.4136
= 8.391
x = 8.39
The unknown length is 8.39 cm, correct to
2 decimal places.
325
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 18
Find the size of angle x in the triangle below, to the nearest degree.
6
x
4
thINK
WrIte/DraW
Identify the triangle as non-right-angled.

rule or cosine rule.
A
c=6
b=6
x
a=4
a2 + c2 b2
2ac
a = 4, b = 6, c = 6, B = x
As all three sides are given, the cosine rule

should be used. Write the rule and identify the
values of the pronumerals.
cos (B) =
Substitute the known values into the formula

and simplify.
cos (x) =
4 2 + 62 62
246
16
48
cos (x) = 0.3333
cos (x) =
Evaluate x [x = cos 1 (0.3333)].
x = 70.53
x 71
Round to the nearest degree and state your

answer.
The angle x is 71, correct to the nearest degree.
the cosine rule
exercise 8G
1 We 17 Find the unknown length in each of the following (to 2 decimal places).
a
b
x
10 m
2.3 km
12
23
120
f
x
x
100
100 km
326
55
1.5 km
60
5m
d
z
5 3
30
200 km
33
4000 mm
47
2000 mm
2 During a sailing race, the boats
followed a triangular course as

shown below. Find the length, x,
of its third leg (correct to
1 decimal place).
10 km
7 km
107
x
3 Two circles, with radii 5 cm and 8 cm, overlap as shown at right. If the
angle between the two radii that meet at the point of intersection of the
circumferences is 105, find the distance between the centres of the circles
5 cm
8 cm
105
4 We18 Find the size of the unknown angle in each of the following (to the nearest degree).
a
b
5m
8m
x
6m
12 mm y
20 mm
c
13 mm
d
20.5 cm
19.1 cm
x
28.6 cm
85 km
p
101 km
68 km
5 Consider the sailing expedition course in question 2. Find the two unknown angles (to the nearest
6
7
8
9
10
11
degree) in the triangular course.

Consider the overlapping circles in question 3. Find the two angles formed between the line joining the
centres of the circles and each of the radii drawn (to the nearest degree).
For the triangle shown at right, find all three unknown angles (to the nearest degree).
9
11
For the following questions, find answers to 1 decimal place.
a For ABC, find the unknown side, b, given a = 10 km, c = 8 km
and B = 30.
13
b For ABC, find the unknown angle, B, given a = b = 10 and c = 6.
c For ABC, find the unknown side, c, given a = 7 m, b = 3 m and C = 80.
d For STU, find the unknown angle, S, given t = 12.7, s = 16.3 and u = 24.5.
e For PQR, find the unknown angle, P, given p = 2, q = 3.5 and r = 2.5.
f For ABC, find the unknown side, a, given b = 260, c = 120 and A = 115.
Construct a suitable triangle from the following instructions and find all unknown sides and angles.
Two sides are 23 cm and 15 cm and the angle in between is 28.
MC The value of x (to 1 decimal place) in the diagram at right is:
a 43.5
30 mm 60
50 mm
B 43.6
C 82.4
D 82.5
x
e none of the above
MC The length of side m at right is nearest to:
m
20
a 20
B 26.4
60
C 26.5
30
D 43.6
e 50
327
12 MC In the triangle given, the largest angle is:

a
B
C
D
e
39
45
56
85
141
24 cm
15 cm
(Not to
scale)
20 cm
13 MC The correct expression for angle s is:

2
2
2
6 + 4 5
a cos 1
2
2
2
4 +5 6
cos 1
245
2
2
2
4 6 +5
C cos 1
2
2
2
4 +6 5
cos 1
245
264
246
5 cm
4 cm
6 cm
2
2
2
5 + 6 4
e cos 1
256
14 MC The correct expression for the value of t is:

a
180 + 144 cos(120)
180 120
180 144 0.5
180 72
180 + 72
120
12
15 MC The 4 surface angles at the vertex of a regular square-based
pyramid are all the same. The magnitude of these angles for the
pyramid shown at right (to the nearest degree) is:
a 1
B 34
C 38
D 39
e 71
Regular
square-based
pyramid
15 cm
10 m
16 Find the unknown values.

a
4 cm
4m
100
12 cm
3m
6 cm
DIGItaL DOC
doc-9464
WorkSHEET 8.2
2m
8 cm
8h
Special triangles
Often, the triangles encountered in problem solving are either equilateral or right-angled isosceles
triangles. They exhibit some unique features that, when recognised, can be very useful in solving
problems.
Equilateral triangles have three equal sides and three equal angles. Therefore, when given the length
of one side, all sides are known. The three angles are always equal to 60.
B
B
60
3
A
C
a=b=c=3
A = B = C = 60
328
B
60
45
60
a = b = c = 45
C = 60
14
b = a = c = 14
B = A = C = 60
Right-angled isosceles triangles have one right angle (90) opposite the longest side (hypotenuse) and
two equal sides and angles. The two other angles are always 45.
A
13
B
10
a = c = 13
b = 13 2
A = C = 45
B = 90
A
10 2
45
a = c = 10
b = 10 2
A = C = 45
B = 90
5 2
a=c=5
b=5 2
A = C = 45
B = 90
Also, the hypotenuse is always 2 times the length of the smaller sides.
Check for yourself using Pythagoras theorem.
A
20
45
b = 20
a = c = 20
2
A = C = 45
B = 90
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 19
Find the values of r and angle in the hexagon at right.

thINK
1
Triangles in a regular hexagon are all identical.

The six angles at the centre are equal. The
magnitude of each is one revolution divided
by 6.
WrIte/DraW
6 cm
Regular hexagon
6 cm
r cm
60
= 360 6
= 60
2
Furthermore, the two sides that form the

triangle are equal. Thus the two equal angles
on the shapes perimeter are also 60. All three
angles are the same; therefore, all three sides
are equal. Therefore, the triangles in a regular
hexagon are all equilateral triangles.
r = 6 cm
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 20
Find the value of the pronumeral (correct to 1 decimal place) in the figure.
45
thINK
1
WrIte/DraW
The triangle is a right-angled isosceles triangle.

Two angles are 45 and the third angle is 90.
45
12 cm
12 cm
x
45
12 cm
329
Two sides are equal and the longer side

opposite the right angle is 2 times longer than
these equal sides.
c=a 2
x = 12 2
= 16.970 56
Write your answer using the required accuracy

and include units.
The value of x is 17.0 cm, correct

to 1decimal place.
Special triangles
exercise 8h
1 We19 Find the unknown(s) in each of the following.

a
b
100 cm
60
45
a
c
a
60
60
15.2 cm
2 We20 Find the unknowns in each of the following.

a
b
45
158 cm
7.2 m
10 mm
3 Answer the following.
a In ABC, find the unknown angle, B, given b = 10, c = 10 2 and C = 90.
b In STU, find the unknown side, s, given t = 12.7, S = 45 and T = 45.
c In PQR, find the unknown angle, P, given p = 3.5, r = 3.5 and R = 60.
d In LMN, find the unknown side, m, given n = 0.22, L = 60 and N = 60.
4 A pair of compasses used for drawing circles has legs that are 6 cm long. If it is opened as shown in the
diagram, what is the radius of the circle that could be drawn?
60
5 What is the height of a tree if its shadow, on horizontal ground, is 12 metres long when the suns rays
striking the tree are at 45 to the ground?

6 MC In the triangle given, the length of side AB (in metres) is:
A
10 2 m
C
a 20 2
B 10
C 20
B
D
20
40
7 A 40 cm square serviette is prepared for presentation by completing three folds firstly, by taking a
corner and placing it on top of the opposite corner; secondly, by taking one of the two corners on the
crease that has been made and placing it on the other one; and finally, by placing the two corners at the
ends of the longest side on top of each other.
a Find the length of the crease made after the i first fold ii second fold iii third fold.
b With the final serviette lying flat, what angles are produced at the corners?
330
area of triangles
8I
Three possible methods can be used to find the area of a triangle:

Method 1. When the two known lengths are perpendicular to each other we would use:
Area triangle = 12 Base Height
Units: 3 & 4
A = 12bh
3 cm
Height
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Height
4 cm
Base
AOS:
Base
Method 2. When we are given two lengths and the angle in between we would use:
Area triangle = 12 a b sin (C )
A = 12 ab sin (C )
A
A
b
b = 10 m
C
32
a = 15 m
Height = b sin (C )
a = Base
Area = 12 Base Height
=
1
2
a b sin (C )
Method 3. When all three sides are known we would use:

Area triangle =
s(s a) (s b) (s c) where the semi-perimeter, s =
( a + b + c)
.
2
This formula is known as Herons formula. It was developed by Heron (or Hero) of Alexandria, a
Greek mathematician and engineer who lived around ad 62.
Let us find the area of the triangle at right to demonstrate that all three formulas provide the same
result.
For the 3, 4, 5 triangle, the most appropriate method is method 1 because
it is a right-angled triangle.
5
A = 12 3 4
=6
The other two methods may also be used.
Area triangle = 12 a b sin (C )
A = 12 3 4 sin (90)
=61
=6
Area triangle = s(s a) (s b) (s c)
A = 6(66 3)(6 4)(66 5)
( a + b + c)
2
(3 + 4 + 5)
=
2
s=
= 6 3 2 1
= 12
= 36
=6
=6
331
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 21
Find the area of the triangle at right.

8 mm
thINK
WrIte
The two given lengths are perpendicular. Write

the most appropriate formula for finding the area.
Substitute the known values into the formula.
12 mm

2
= 1 12 8
2
= 48
3
Write the answer using correct units.
The area of the triangle is 48 mm2.
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 22
Find the area of the triangle below (correct to 2 decimal places).

tUtOrIaL
eles-1288
Worked example 22
9m
37 6 m
thINK
1
Identify the shape as a triangle with two known

sides and the angle in between.
WrIte/DraW
A
b=9
B
37 a = 6
C
Identify and write down the values of the

two sides, a and b, and the angle in between
them,C.
a=6
b=9
C = 37
Identify the appropriate formula and substitute

the known values into it.
Area triangle = 1 ab sin (C )
Write the answer using correct units.
The area of the triangle is 16.25 m2, correct

to 2decimal places.
= 12 6 9 sin (37)
= 16.249
WOrKeD eXaMpLe 23
Find the area of a triangle PQR (to 1 decimal place), given p = 6, q = 9 and r = 4, with
measurements in centimetres.
thINK
1
WrIte/DraW
All three sides of the triangle have been given;

therefore, Herons formula can be used to find
the area.
Q
p=6
R
332
r=4
q=9
Write the values of the three sides, a, b and c,

and calculate the semi-perimeter value, s.
a = p = 6, b = q = 9, c = r = 4
( a + b + c)
s=
2
(6 + 9 + 4)
=
2
= 9.5
Substitute the known values into Herons

formula and evaluate.
Area triangle = s(s a) (s b) (s c)

= 9.5(9.5 6) (9.5 9) (9.5 4)
= 9.5 3.5 0.5 5.5
= 91.4375
Area = 9.5623
The area of triangle PQR is 9.6 cm2, correct

to 1decimal place.
Write the answer, using the correct units.
area of triangles
exercise 8I
1 We21 Find the areas of the following triangles (correct to 1 decimal place).
b
a
4.5 mm
7 cm
12 cm
7.0 mm
d
3.2 mm
3m
10.5 mm
5m
4m
2 We22 Find the areas of the following triangles (correct to 1 decimal place).
a
30
7 cm
3m
80
7 cm
4m
d
100 m
10.2 m
120
105
7.5 m
80 m
3 We23 Find the areas of the following triangles (to 1 decimal place).
a
20 mm
3 km
8m
6 km
8m
6m
d
5.2 cm
6.7 cm
4 km
3.1 cm
333
4 Find the areas of the following triangles (to 1 decimal place).

a
4.6 m
4.4 m
40
112 cm
42
70
c
2.5 km
60
50 m
11.2 km
70
30
86.6 m
10 km
5 Find the area of each of the following triangles. (Give all answers to 1 decimal place.)
a For ABC, given a = 10 km, c = 8 km and B = 30
b For ABC, given a = b = 10 cm and c = 6 cm
c For ABC, given a = 7 m, b = 3 m, c = 8.42 m and C = 108
d For STU, given t = 12.7 m, s = 16.3 m and u = 24.5 m
e For PQR, given p = 2 units, q = 3.5 units and r = 2.5 units
f For ABC, given b = 260 cm, c = 120 cm and A = 90
6 Find the area of an equilateral triangle with side lengths of 10 cm.
7 A triangular arch has supporting legs of equal length of 12 metres as shown in the diagram below. What
is its area?
12
12
45
45
m
8 From the diagram given below,

a find the area of:
i one of the triangles
ii all of the triangles.
b Use another technique to verify your answer in a i.
10 mm
10 mm
9 Find the area of the state forest as defined by the three fire-spotting towers on the corners of its
boundary.
11 km
5.2 km
10.4 km
10 MC If the perimeter of an equilateral triangle is 210 metres, its area is closest to:
a 2100 m2
D 5500 m2
334
B 2450 m2
e 1700 m2
C 4800 m2
11 MC The correct expression for the area of the shape at right is:
a
B
C
D
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
6.13 4 sin (80)
4m
6.13 m
6.13 4 cos (100)
50
30
6.13 4 sin (100)

6.13 4
e none of the above
12 MC The correct expression for the area of the octagon shown is:
195 sin (45)

169 sin (45)
195 sin (60)
338 sin (60)
5 6.5 sin (67.5)
13 Find the area of the following triangles.
a
B
C
D
e
5
6.5
30
45
7 km
5 mm
DIGItaL DOC
doc-9465
Investigation
problem solving to find
an area
335
Summary
right-angled triangles
pythagoras theorem
For hypotenuse:
c2 = a2 + b2 or c = a 2 + b 2
For shorter sides:
a=
c2 b2
pythagorean triads
A Pythagorean triad is a set of three numbers which satisfies Pythagoras theorem. Some common
triads are: (a) 3, 4, 5 (b) 6, 8, 10 (c) 5, 12, 13 and (d) 7, 24, 25.
three-dimensional
pythagoras theorem
To solve problems involving 3-dimensional Pythagoras theorem:

(a) Draw and label an appropriate diagram.
(b) Identify the right angles.
(c) Identify right-angled triangles that enable the information given to be used to find the unknown
value(s).
Hypotenuse
Opposite
sin () =
O
H
cos () =
A
H
Adjacent
tan () =
O
or
A
SOH CAH TOA

helps you remember
the combination of
sides in each ratio
Non-right-angled triangles
the sine rule
a
b
c
=
=
sin ( A) sin ( B) sin (C )
c
B
B
a
C
The sine rule is used when:

1. two angles and one side are given
2. two sides and a non-included angle are given.
If two angles are given, simply calculate the third angle, if needed, using:
C = 180 (A + B).
ambiguous case of
the sine rule
336
The sine rule is ambiguous when finding an angle when the smaller known side is opposite the
known acute angle.
a2 = b2 + c2 2bc cos (A)
the cosine rule
or
cos A)
( =
b2 + c2 a2
2bc
To calculate:
(a) sides, use the cosine rule when two sides and the included angle are given
(b) angles, use the cosine rule when all three sides are given.
Special triangles
45
60
60
60
Equilateral triangles
area of triangles
c= 2a
45
Right-angled isosceles triangles
To find the area of a triangle:

(a) given perpendicular dimensions, use Area triangle = 1 Base Height
2
(b) given two sides and the included angle, use Area triangle = 12ab sin (C )
(c) given all three sides only, use Area triangle =
s(s a) (s b) (s c) where s =
a+b+c
.
2
337
Chapter review
M U Lt Ip L e
C h OICe
1 For the triangle shown, the value of x is:

a 4
D 6.7
3x
B 10
e 30
C 20
80
5x
2 Which one of the following is not a Pythagorean triad?

a 9, 39, 40
D 6, 8, 10
B 3, 4, 5
e 7, 24, 25
C 0.3, 0.4, 0.5
3 A 15 cm long straw is the longest that can fit into a cylindrical can with a radius of 6 cm. The height of
the can, in centimetres, is closest to:

a 8
B 9
D 16
e 17
C 15
4 A rectangular box has a rod positioned as shown in the diagram. The
expression that would enable the angle the rod makes with the base of
the box to be found, is:
a tan ( ) =
D tan ( ) =
5
12
4
13
4
13
5
= 12
B sin ( ) =
e cos ( )
C tan ( ) =
4
12
12
4
5
5 A stepladder is erected as shown. How far apart (to 2 decimal places) at
the base are the two legs?

a 1.15 m
D 2.00 m
B 1.41 m
e 6.97 m
C 1.50 m
3
4
6 Given ST = 12 cm, TU = 16 cm and sin (U) = , then
sin (S) equals:

a
C
12
16
16
9
e 1
B
D
16
12
4
3
?m
12 cm
S
16 cm
7 Find the value of the pronumeral, to the nearest metre.

a 35
D 62
B 43
e 68
50 m
C 50
30
8 In a triangle ABC where b = 10, c = 20 and B = 26, C (to the nearest degree)
could be:
a 61
B 62
C 63
D 63 or 117
e 61 or 119
9 To find the distance across a large excavation, measurements were foundas
shown in the diagram. The distance, AB, across the excavation is closest to:
a 75 metres
B 74 metres
C 100 metres
D 120 metres
e none of these
110 m
10 A regular hexagon is inscribed in a circle of radius 2 cm. The perimeter of the
hexagon, in centimetres, is:

a 4
B 12
C 16
D 17
e 18
11 A right-angled isosceles triangle has a longest side of 141 metres. The other
two equal sides have a value closest to:
a 200 m
B 100 m
C 50 m
D 120 m
e none of these
12 The area of triangle XYZ (to the nearest m2) is:
a 55
B 170
C 45
D 85
e 71
45
35
338
2m
32
130 m
r = 2 cm
r
40
17 m
Y
10.9 m
13 The area of the triangle at right is closest to:

B 97 cm2
D 99 cm2
a 96 cm2
C 98 cm2
e 100 cm2
50
40
20 cm
1 A 2.5 m long ladder is placed up against a wall and reaches to a height of 2.4 m. Find the distance that
the legs of the ladder are from the base of the wall.
2 A 190 mm square ceramic floor tile is to be cut diagonally. What is the exact length of the cut to be
made?
S hO rt
a N S W er
3 A boat sails directly northwards for
11 km before turning towards the east

and sailing 60 km. At this point the
boat is 61 km from the starting point.
On the second leg of the trip, did the
boat sail directly eastwards?
4 A cube with 8 cm sides is internally
braced. What is the length of the
longest brace that could be placed
inside the cube? Express your answer
in surd form.
5 A staircase is to rise by 2250 mm
from the ground floor to the first
level of a house. The maximum angle
of elevation allowed for the stairs is 50.
a What is the length of the base of the staircase (to the nearest mm)?
b What is the length of the staircase (to the nearest mm)?
6 Copy and complete the following table using the two triangles given below. Give each answer as both a
fraction and a decimal.
60
45
30
3
45
2
1
Angle
1
30
45
60
sin
cos
3
= 0.8660
2
tan
7 A car badge to be fitted on a bonnet is of anisosceles triangle design.
a If the height of the badge is not to be more than 30 mm, what is the maximum length of the base
of the badge (to the nearest mm), if the equal angles are 25?
b If the longest side is to be set at 100 mm, what is the length of the other two equal sides, if the
two equal angles are still 25?

8 A hot-air balloon is anchored to the ground at points A and D as shown in
the following diagram. A 25-metre length of excess rope is dropped to the
ground from the balloon. It is then tied to the ground, at a point B, as a
further safety measure.
a What are the smallest and largest angles that can be made at point C
by the two lengths of rope, AC and BC (to the nearest degree)?
b Using these values, determine the furthest and closest positions
(to 1 decimal place) possible for point B from point A.
C
40 m
A
35
25 m
B
D
339
9 The hour hand of a clock is 20 mm long and the minute hand is 25 mm. The clock face below shows the
time at 4oclock. What is the distance between the tips of both hands (to the nearest mm)?
25 mm
120
20 mm
10 An undercover patio is covered with a sail as shown in the diagram.

a What are the angles made by the sail at each of the support poles
5m
(to the nearest degree)?

b At which support pole is the smallest angle?
11 The infamous Bermuda Triangle is represented below.
B
6.3 m
8.1 m
USA
110 km
40
90 km
a What is the distance between the western and northern corners of the triangle (to the nearest
kilometre)?
b What is the largest angle within the triangle (to the nearest degree)?
12 A DVD storage unit is 1.5 metres tall and has a base area as shown.
a Find the front width of the storage unit (to the nearest cm).
b Find the volume of the storage unit (in cm3).
12 cm
12 cm
13 What is the area of a Give Way traffic sign that is in the shape of an equilateral
triangle with side lengths 45 cm (to the nearest cm2)?

14 What is the area of the badge described in question7 b (to the nearest mm)?
e X teNDeD
r e S p ONS e
1 A sandwich bar uses bread that is roughly 10 cm square. The bread slices are cut into four equal
triangles and packaged in a cardboard box with the triangles arranged as shown.
10 cm
10 cm
8 cm
i What is the total length of the two cuts required to make four
triangular pieces?
ii What is the area of the triangular face of the packaged sandwich
(to 1 decimal place)?

The completed sandwiches are placed on shelves as shown.
iii What is the smallest possible gap required between shelves for the
sandwiches to fit?
To maintain sandwich freshness, the owner is advised to prepare sandwiches so that the surface area
is minimised.
340
i Show that the surface area of packaged, triangular sandwiches is close to 243 cm2.
ii Would cutting the sandwiches into four small equal square pieces reduce the surface area? If
so, by how much (to the nearest cm2)? Draw a suitable diagram(s).
iii Find the volume of the sandwich package.
c An alternative is to use bread which has a rectangular shape as shown,
9 cm
and to prepare it as triangular pieces.
i What is one disadvantage of using rectangular slices of bread for making
four triangular sandwich pieces?
12 cm
ii The four angles at the centre of the bread just after making the two cuts
are no longer right angles. Find the value of the largest angle.
iii If the four triangular pieces are also to be packaged, what is the smallest
possible area of the triangular face of the cardboard box?
2 Two thin rods are hinged together and the end of one rod is hinged to the
B
ground, while the end of the other rod is free, as shown in the diagram at right.
1m
1.5 m
Lucie conducts an investigation of the triangle formed. She starts by
C
investigating the formation of a right-angled triangle.
A
C
a i At what distance from A (to 2 decimal places) must Lucie place
endC so that a right-angled triangle is formed at C? Remember that
the two rods can move, although they are fixed at A.
ii What is the angle made by the 1.5 m rod with the ground (to the nearest degree)?
iii Using your answer from part ii, what is the value of the other acute angle?
b Lucie now brings end C to a position 1 m from end A.
i State the type of triangle formed.
ii What is the size of the largest angle formed in this triangle (to the nearest degree)?
iii If the largest angle is now to be 110, what is the new distance from A to C
(to 3 decimal places)?
c An alternative is to move end C away from A, as shown at right. How far is
end C from A, if ABC is to be 110 (in metres to 1 decimal place)?
B
d Lucie now investigates the area of the triangle made in each situation.
1.5 m
i What is the area of the triangle in part a i (in m2 to 2 decimal
1m
places)?
A
C
ii What is the area of the triangle in part b iii (in m2 to 2 decimal
places)?
iii What is the area of the triangle in part c (in m2 to 2 decimal places)?
e A third rod, 3 metres long, is connected at point B to the right-angled triangle formed in part a. Its
free end rests on the ground. What is the horizontal distance between B and the end of this third
rod (to the nearest cm)?
3 The diagram below represents a plan view (looking down onto) of an open-cut mine, which is roughly
in the shape of a parallelogram.
D
Mine pit
341
DIGItaL DOC
doc-9466
Investigation
paper planes
A mine surveyor has been asked to determine the dimensions of this pit.
a From A, she measures the distances, AB and AC, to either side of the pit and also the angle in
between. She finds that: AB = 86 m, AC = 97 m and BAC = 46o. Find the pits width, BC (to the
nearest metre).
b From D, she completes a similar exercise tofind the length of the pit, EF. This time shefinds:
DE = 102 m, DF = 111 m and EDF = 53.
The following diagram is a cross-sectional view of the pit along its length.
E
F
49
DIGItaL DOC
doc-9467
Test Yourself
Chapter 8
75
d
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic: 1 & 2
Practice
VCE exam
questions
Use StudyON to
access all exam
questions on this
topic since 2002.
342
The surveyor needs to find the depth, d. To do this she has located a large boulder, R, at the bottom
of the pit and found that the angle between the horizontal, EF, and ER is 49, and the angle between
FE and FR is 75. Find (to the nearest metre):
c the distance ER
d the depth, d.
e The surveyors last task is to find the area of the opening of the pit. For this calculation she simply
measures the sides of the pit opening. She finds that:
EB = CF = 71 m and BF = EC = 45 m.
Find the area, to the nearest square metre.
Note that in a parallelogram the diagonals bisect each other.
ICT activities
Chapter opener
DIGItaL DOC
trigonometry. (page 301)
8a
pythaogoras theorem
DIGItaL DOC
Spreadsheet doc-9459: Investigate the effect on the hypotenuse of a
right-angled triangle as each perpendicular side length varies.
(page 303)
8B
pythagorean triads
DIGItaL DOC
Spreadsheet doc-9460: Investigate Pythagorean triads. (page 306)
8C
three-dimensional pythagoras theorem
DIGItaL DOC
WorkSHEET 8.1 doc-9461: Use Pythagoras theorem in three
dimensions and trigonometric ratios to calculate unknown lengths.
(page 310)
tUtOrIaL
We5 eles-1283: Watch a tutorial on how to apply Pythagoras
theorem to solve a real-life problem. (page 307)
INteraCtIVItY
Three-dimensional Pythagoras theorem int-0189: Use the
interactivity to identify right-angled triangles in three dimensions in
order to calculate side lengths. (page 307)
8D
DIGItaL DOCS
SkillSHEET 8.1 doc-9462: Practise identifying sides of a right-angled
triangle with respect to the given angle. (page 314)
SkillSHEET 8.2 doc-9463: Practise finding trigonometric values and
angles. (page 314)
8e
the sine rule
tUtOrIaLS
We11 eles-1284: Watch a tutorial on how to use the sine rule to
calculate an unknown length in a non-right-angled triangle.
(page 317)
We 13 eles-1285: Learn how to use the sine rule to calculate an

unknown angle in a non-right-angled triangle. (page 318)
8F
tUtOrIaL
We 15 eles-1286: Watch a tutorial on when the ambiguous case
of the sine rule is applied. (page 322)
eLeSSON
Ambiguous case of the sine rule eles-0051: Discover how one fixed
angle and two defined side lengths can give two different triangles
an acute angle and an obtuse angle. (page 322)
8G
the cosine rule
DIGItaL DOC
WorkSHEET 8.2 doc-9464: Calculate the unknown sides and angles in
right-angled and non-right-angled triangles. (page 328)
tUtOrIaL
We 17 eles-1287: Watch a tutorial on how to use the cosine rule
to calculate an unknown side length of a non-right-angled triangle.
(page 325)
8I
area of triangles
DIGItaL DOC
Investigation doc-9465: Investigate the general rule for area.
(page 335)
tUtOrIaL
We22 eles-1288: Watch a worked example on how to use sine to
calculate the area of a non-right-angled triangle. (page 332)
Chapter review
DIGItaL DOCS
Investigation doc-9466: Investigate the area of a planes wings.
(page 342)
343
Answers CHAPTER 8
trIGONOMetrY
exercise 8a
pythagoras theorem
b 12.0
c 2.5
e 1.7
f 3.6
1 a 13.0
d 21.0
2 5831 m
3 3162 mm
4 a 15.0
d 24.0
5 a 13
d 5m
6 a 20.3
c 3.4 mm
7 a
b
e
b
e
(x + 8) m
17.3
7.6
24.17 mm
15.23 m
c
f
c
f
12.0
10.6
8.77
246.98 cm
b 12.7
d 5.8
x
16 m
b
c
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
pythagorean triads
a Yes
b No
c Yes
d No
e Yes
f Yes
g No
h No
i Yes
j Yes
k Yes
l No
a 9, 12, 15
b 7, 24, 25
c 1.5, 2.0, 2.5
d 3, 4, 5
e 11, 60, 61
f 10, 24, 26
g 9, 40, 41
h 0.7, 2.4, 2.5
a 15
c 50
e 1.0
f 25
i 61
j 26
k 20
Yes, opposite the 34-cm side
No
a 21
b 25 cm
c 50
d 6.0
e 1.2
f 24 km
2.5 km
480 cm
E
B
exercise 8C
three-dimensional
pythagoras theorem
1 346 cm
2 128 cm
3 a i 2225 cm or 47.2 cm
ii 16625 cm or 128 .9 cm
b i 500 mm
ii
c i 44.72 m
ii
4 a i 25 m
ii
b i 1.00 km
ii
5 3.3 m
6
7 a = 3.9, b = 4.7, c = 5.6
8 AB = 4.95 m, DH = 14.16 m
9 58 m
10 a 6.8 m
b
11 a i 510 mm
ii
b i 707 mm
ii
12 415 cm
exercise 8D
1 a 8.2 km
c 1.9 m
e 19.2 cm
344
47 m
91 m
a 5.0
b 2m
c 9.3
a 24.3 cm
b 74.2 m
c 4.6 cm
a 53
b 45
c 53
d 53
a 53
b 42
c 76
37, 53
E
B
D
E
= 30, x = 8 m, y = 6.5 m
59
56
a 1.23 m
b 11.8
44
exercise 8e
9 C
exercise 8B
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
(x + 8)2 = x2 + 162
12 m, 16 m, 20 m
8 D
1
2
3
4
5
6
the sine rule

13.2 m
109.4 km
1 a 13.2 cm
b
d 27.6 cm
e
2 1.6 km
3 a 11.6 m
c 30.6 cm
4 26.1 km
5 a 52
b
d 27
e
6 46, 106, 30.7
7 a 145 cm
8 A
9 B
10 C
11 B
12 D
13 A
14 34.6 mm
15 4.9 cm
16 a 14.8 m
17 2.8 m
18 a 129.1
exercise 8F
b 28.6 mm
d 30.2 cm
24
48
cm
b 34 cm
b 147.1 mm
d 1509.4 mm
f 44.6 mm
4772.67 mm
106
82
72.5
37.2
329.2
5.7 m
Special triangles
1 a 60, 60
b 100 2 cm or 141.4 cm
c 15.2 cm
2 a 10 2 mm or 14.1 mm
b 111.7 cm
c 10.2 m, 45
3 a 45
b 12.7
c 60
d 0.22
4 6 cm
5 12 m
6 C
i 40 2 cm or 56.6 cm
ii 20 2 cm or 28.3 cm
iii 20 cm
b 45
45
exercise 8I
b 10.8 m
b 68 km
1 a 52.1 or 127.9
b 65.2 or 114.8
c 21.3 or 158.7
d 44.6 or 135.4
2 a 141
b 105
c 127
d 130
3 D
4 y = 30.3 and x = 149.7
W
5 a
8 cm
5 cm
15
V
b 9.5 or 140.5
c 3.2 cm or 12.3 cm
exercise 8G
exercise 8h
7 a
5 cm
3.0 m
522 mm
716 mm
c 33
f 46
ambiguous case of the sine
rule
1300 mm
45.83 m
38 m
332 m
B
c 28.8 mm
e 155.85 km
f
2 13.8 km
3 10.5 cm
4 a 39
b
c 46
d
5 44, 29
6 47, 28
7 43, 80, 57
8 a 5.0 km
b
c 7.1 m
d
e 34.0
f
9 12.03 cm, 116.2 , 35.8
10 B
11 C
12 D
13 A
14 E
15 D
16 a 51.3
b
the cosine rule

1 a 8.66 m
b 1.09 km
c 9.99 units
d 8.72
90
area of triangles
b 42.0 cm2
d 6.0 m2
b 5.9 m2
d 36.9 m2
b 5.3 km2
d 7.8 cm2
b 4031.6 cm2
d 2165 m2
b 28.6 cm2
d 94.0 m2
f 15 600 cm2
1 a 15.8 mm2
c 16.8 mm2
2 a 12.3 cm2
c 3464.1 m2
3 a 22.2 m2
c 173.2 mm2
4 a 10.0 m2
c 11.5 km2
5 a 20.0 km2
c 10.0 m2
e 2.4 units2
6 43.3 cm2
7 72 m2
8 a i 12.5 mm2
ii 50 mm2
9 26.8 km2
10 A
11 C
12 B
13 a 24.5 km2
b 7.22 mm2
Chapter reVIeW
MULtIpLe ChOICe
1 C
6 E
11 B
2 A
7 E
12 E
3 B
8 E
13 C
4 D
9 A
5 A
10 B
ShOrt aNSWer
1 0.7 m
2 190 2 mm
3 Yes, because 11, 60, 61 is a Pythagorean
triad, so the triangle is right-angled.
4 192 cm
5 a 1888 mm
6
Angle
30
sin
1
= 0.5
2
b 2937 mm
45
60
3
1
= 0.7071
= 0.8660
2
2
cos
3
1
= 0.7071
= 0.8660
2
2
1
= 0.5
2
tan
1
= 0.5774
3
3 = 1.732
7
8
9
10
11
12
a 129 mm
a 32, 78
39 mm
a 38, 51, 91
a 71 km
a 17 cm
b 10 800 cm3
13 877 cm2
14 1162 mm2
b 55 mm
b 42.6 m, 23.1 m
b C
b 85
eXteNDeD reSpONSe
1 a
i
ii
iii
b i
ii
iii
c i
ii
28.3 cm
25.0 cm2
5 cm
25 + 25 + 80 + 40 2 + 40 2 243 cm2
Yes: 210 cm2 or a reduction of 33 cm2
200 cm2
Two differently shaped triangles
106.26
iii 36 cm2
i 1.12 m
ii 42
iii 48
b i Obtuse isosceles triangle
ii 97
iii 0.827 m
c 2.1 m
d i 0.56 m2
ii 0.39 m2
iii 0.70 m2
e 283 cm
3 a BC = 72 m
b EF = 95 m
c ER = 111 m
d d = 84 m
e 3042 m2
2 a
345
Chapter 9
Applications of geometry
and trigonometry
DiGital DoC
doc-9468
10 Quick Questions
Chapter ContentS
9a
9B
9C
9D
9e
9F
9G
Angles
Angles of elevation and depression
Bearings
Navigation and specification of locations
Triangulation cosine and sine rules
Triangulation similarity
Contour maps
introduction
In the previous two chapters, the skills and techniques used in basic geometry and trigonometry
were presented. In this chapter we shall examine some of the more complex applications of
geometry and trigonometry in the real world, in particular, the application of geometry and
trigonometry in navigation (for example, orienteering, sailing and so on) and surveying (location,
area, contour maps and so on).
9a
angles
Angles are measured in degrees (). In navigation, accuracy can be critical, so fractions of a degree are
also used. For example, a cruise ship travelling 1000 kilometres on a course that is out by half a degree
would miss its destination by almost 9 kilometres.
1
The common unit for a fraction of a degree is the minute (), where 1 minute or 1 = 60
of a degree and
3524 is read as 35 degrees 24 minutes.
60 minutes = 1 degree
30 minutes = 12 or 0.5 degree
15 minutes = 14 or 0.25 degree
1
6 minutes = 10
or 0.1 degree
3524' or 35.4
Note: Minutes can be converted to smaller units, called seconds.

1 minute = 60 seconds.
Converting angles
Converting angles from decimal form to degreeminutesecond (DMS) form and vice versa can be
done using in-built functions in calculators or manual techniques. Note that calculators give angles
in degrees, minutes and seconds. For this course, however, we shall use only degrees and minutes to
measure angles.
Chapter 9 Applications of geometry and trigonometry
347
WorkeD exaMple 1
Convert 56.75 to degrees and minutes.

think
Write
Separate the whole and decimal portions.
56 and 0.75
Multiply by 60 to convert the decimal portion

to minutes.
0.75 = 0.75 60 minutes

= 45 minutes
Combine the two portions.
56.75 = 56 + 45
= 5645
WorkeD exaMple 2
Convert 12536 to its decimal form.

think
Write
Separate the degrees and minutes portions.
125 and 36
Divide by 60 to convert the minutes portion to

degrees as a decimal.
36 = 60
125 + 0.6 = 125.6
36
= 0.6
adding and subtracting angles

Angles can be added and subtracted using basic arithmetic. Like most other units of measurements, these
operations can only be performed if the angles are measured in the same unit. To solve these problems
without a calculator, separate the angles into degrees and minutes portions, perform each operation
separately, and then combine the portions at the end. This method is shown in the following worked
example.
WorkeD exaMple 3
a Add 4637 and 6549.

b Subtract 1655 from 4020.
think
a 1 Add the degrees and minutes portions
Write
separately.
46
+ 65
111
As the minutes portion is greater than

60 minutes, convert to degrees.
86 = 60 + 26
= 1 + 26
111 + 1 + 26 = 11226
b 1 We cannot subtract 55 from 20 so change
b 4020 = 39 + 60 + 20
= 3980
1 to 60 in the angle 4020.
348
Subtract the degrees and minutes portions

separately.
37
+ 49
86
39
16
23
80
55
25
4020 1655 = 2325
Some geometry (angle) laws

The following angle laws will be valuable when finding unknown values in the applications to be
examined in this chapter. These laws were dealt with at the start of chapter 7, but we will review them
here. Often we will need the laws to convert given directional bearings into an angle in a triangle.
Two or more angles are complementary if they add up to 90.
30
a = 90 30 = 60
Two or more angles are supplementary if they add up to 180. An angle of 180 is also called a
straight angle.
20
170
b = 180 (20 + 45)

= 115
a = 180 170
= 10
45
For alternate angles to exist we need a minimum of one pair of parallel lines and one transverse line.
Alternate angles are equal.
b
b
a
a
a=b
a=b
Other types of angles to be considered are corresponding angles, co-interior angles, triangles in a
semicircle and vertically opposite angles.
c
a
d
b
Corresponding angles are equal:
a=b
c=d
A triangle in a
semicircle
always gives a
right-angled
triangle.
Co-interior angles are

supplementary:
a + b = 180
c
a
Vertically opposite
angles are equal:
a=b
c=d
349
WorkeD exaMple 4
Find the value of the pronumeral, f, the angle a beach umbrella makes with
the ground.
think
1
Write/DraW
Recognise that the horizontal line is a

straight angle, or 180.
To find the unknown angle, use the

supplementary or straight angle law.
47
Level ground
f
47
180 = 47 + f
f = 180 47
= 133
WorkeD exaMple 5
North
Find the value of the pronumerals A and C in the directions

shown below right.
North
57
think
1
Write/DraW
Recognise that the two vertical lines

are parallel lines.
57
To find the unknown angle A, use the

alternate angle law.
To find the unknown angle C, use the

straight angle law. Alternatively, the
co-interior angle law could be used
with the same solution.
exercise 9a
DiGital DoC
doc-9469
SkillSHEET 9.1
Dealing with
angles in either
degrees or
degrees and
minutes
tUtorial
eles-1289
Worked example 5
A = 57
180 = 57 + C
C = 180 57
= 123
angles
1 We 1 Convert the following angles to degrees and minutes.

a 43.5
b 12.75
c 28.3
d 106.27
1
e 273.872
f 56
3
2 We2 Convert the following angles to their decimal form (to 2 decimal places).
a 4015
c 826
e 24730
b 12220
d 1649
f 7650
3 Use your calculator to find the values of the following trigonometric ratios to 3 decimal places.
a sin (4015)
b cos (12220)
c tan (826)
d cos (1649)
e sin (14730)
f tan (2728)
350
4 We3 Add and then subtract the pairs of angles.

a 4015, 285
c 826, 10055
e 34637, 17652
b 12220, 7935
d 24730, 14032
f 21233, 633
Find the values of the pronumerals.
5 We4,5
a
a
32
15820'
North
North
b
4021'
f
b
3219'
4930'
37
Find the values of the pronumerals.
6
a
1730'
1051'
4319'
2129'
North
58
5023'
2240'
10
East
7 MC A barn door is shown at right.

a The value of angle A is:
4025
49.417
4935
50
90
b The value of angle B is:
a 4025
B 4935
C 49.538
D 50
e 13935
a
B
C
D
e
6212'
4025'
351
9B
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
angles of elevation and depression
One method for locating an object in the real world is by its position
above or below a horizontal plane or reference line.
The angle of elevation is the angle above the horizon or horizontal
line.
Looking up at the top of the flagpole from position O, the angle of
elevation, AOB, is the angle between the horizontal line OB and the
line of sight OA.
Line of sight
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Angle of
elevation
O
The angle of depression is the angle below the horizon or

horizontal line.
Looking down at the boat from position O, the angle of
depression, AOB, is the angle between the horizontal line, OB,
and the line of sight, OA.
Horizontal line
O Horizon or horizontal line
B
B
Angle of depression
Line of sight
Angles of elevation and depression are in a vertical plane.

We can see from the diagram at right that the angle of depression
given from one location can give us the angle of elevation from the
other position using the alternate angle law.
Angle of depression
Angle of elevation
WorkeD exaMple 6
Find the angle of elevation (in degrees and minutes) of the tower measured
from the road as given in the diagram.
20 m
150 m
think
1
Write/DraW
The angle of elevation is AOB. Use AOB

and trigonometry to solve the problem.
A
20 m
(Opposite)
O
352
The problem requires the tangent ratio.

Substitute the values and simplify.
x
150 m
(Adjacent)

opposite
=
adjacent
20
tan (x) = 150
= 0.133 33
tan () =
Evaluate x and convert to degrees and

minutes.
x = tan1 (0.133 33)

= 7.5946 = 736
From the road the angle of elevation to the tower is
736, correct to the nearest minute.
WorkeD exaMple 7
Find the altitude of a plane (to the nearest metre) if the plane is
sighted 4.5 km directly away from an observer who measures its
angle of elevation as 26.38.
4.5 km
h
26.38
Observer
think
1
Write/DraW
Draw a suitable diagram. Change distance

to metres.
O
)A
use
en
pot
Hy
m(
0
450 26.38
sin () =
Use the sine ratio and simplify.
=
sin (26.38) =
h (Opposite)
B

opposite
hypotenuse
h
4500
h = 4500 sin (26.38)

3
Evaluate.
= 1999.45
The plane is flying at an altitude of 2000 m, correct to
the nearest metre.
WorkeD exaMple 8
The angle of depression from the top of a 35-metre cliff to a house at the
bottom is 23. How far from the base of the cliff is the house (to the nearest
metre)?
think
1
Write/DraW
Draw a suitable diagram.
tUtorial
eles-1290
Worked example 8
23
35 m
Angle of depression is AOB. Use the

alternate angle law to give the angle of
elevation CBO.
23
35 m
(Opposite)
C
23
xm
(Adjacent)
353
Use the tangent ratio. Substitute into the


opposite
=
adjacent
35
tan (23 ) =
x
1
x
=
tan (23) 35
35
x=
tan (23)
tan () =
= 82.4548 . . .
4
exercise 9B
The distance from the house to the base of the cliff

is 82metres, correct to the nearest metre.
1 We6 Find the angle of elevation (in degrees and minutes) in the following situations.
a
DiGital DoC
doc-9470
SkillSHEET 9.2
Using trigonometric
ratios
121 m
5m
3m
3500 m
c
d
12 000 m
26.5 m
30 km
20.2 m
e
f
32 m
64 m
2m
2m
2 A kite is flying 17 metres above the ground on a taut line that is 38 metres
long. Find the angle of elevation of the kite from the ground.
38 m
3 We7 Find the values of the pronumerals (to the nearest metre).
b
a
hm
am
59.03
6m
40.28
100 m
354
17 m
am
Building height
= 20.7 metres
21 m
3123'
792'
d metres
4 A taut rope is used to tether a hot-air balloon. If the angle of
elevation of the rope is 67.7, and the rope is 20 metres long,

how far off the ground is the balloon? (Give your answer
correct to 1decimal place.)
20 m
67.7
5 The angle of elevation of the sun at a particular time of the day
was 49. What was the length of a shadow cast by a 30-metre tall
tower at that time?
6 We8 Find the values of these pronumerals (in degrees and minutes or nearest metre).
a
4148'
55 metres
4627'
16 metres
a
b
3316'
3451'
900 metres
b
a
85 metres
7 Find the angle of elevation or depression from observer positioned at point A to the object at point B in
each situation shown below, to the nearest degrees and minutes. State clearly whether it is an angle of
depression or elevation.
a
30 metres
A
2000 m
1000 m
180 metres
23.5 m
A
A
B
10 m
tower
20 m
15 m
tower
1.5 m
22 m
355
8 A hole has a diameter of 4 metres and is 3.5 metres deep. What is the angle of depression from the top
of the hole to the bottom opposite side of the hole?

9 MC The angle of elevation of the top of a tree from a point 15.2 m from the base of the tree is 52.2.
The height of the tree is closest to:

a 12 m
D 20 m
B 15 m
e 25 m
C 19 m
10 MC A supporting wire for a 16 m high radio tower is 23.3 m long and is attached at ground level and
to the top of the tower. The angle of depression of the wire from the top of the toweris:
a 3429
D 5529
B 4322
e 5822
C 4638
11 The angle of depression to a buoy from the top of a 15-metre cliff is 12.5. A boat is observed to be
directly behind but with an angle of depression of 8.8.

8.8
15 metres
12.5
Find (to the nearest metre):

a the distance to the buoy from the base of the cliff
b the distance between the boat and the buoy.
12 Two buildings are 50 metres apart. Building A is 110 metres high. Building B is 40 metres high.
a Find the angle of elevation from the bottom of building A to the top of building B.
b Find the angle of depression from the top of building A to the bottom of building B.
c Find the angle of depression from the top of building B to the bottom of building A.
13 Watchers in two 10-metre observation towers each spot an
aircraft at an altitude of 400 metres. The angles of elevation

from the two towers are shown in the diagram. (Assume all
three objects are in a directline.)
410'
10 m
10 m
a What is the horizontal distance between the nearest tower
and the aircraft (to the nearest 10 metres)?
b How far apart are the two towers from each other (to the nearest 100 metres)?
400 m
515'
14 A boy standing 1.5 metres tall measures the angle of elevation

15
to the top of the goalpost using an inclinometer.
1.5m
a If the angle was 15 when measured 50 metres from the
base of the goalpost, how tall is the goalpost?
50 m
b If the angle of elevation to the top of the goalpost is now 5530,
how far is the boy from the base of the goalpost?
c The angle of elevation is measured at ground level and is found to be 45. Find the distance from
the base of the goalpost to where the measurement was made.
d The result in part c is the same as the height of the goalpost. Explain why.
15 A plane goes from an altitude of 30 000 metres to 10 000 metres over a horizontal distance of
200kilometres. What was the angle of depression of its descent?
9C
Bearings
Bearings are used to locate the position of objects or the direction of a journey on a two-dimensional
horizontal plane. Bearings or directions are straight lines from one point to another. To find bearings, a
compass rose (a diagram, as shown on the opposite page, showing N, S, E andW) should be drawn
centred on the point from where the bearing measurement is taken.
There are three main ways of specifying bearings or direction:
1. standard compass bearings (for example, N, SW, NE)
2. other compass bearings (for example, N10W, S30E, N4537E)
3. true bearings (for example, 100T, 297T, 045T, 056T)
356
Standard compass bearings

There are 16 main standard bearings as shown in the diagrams below. The N, S, E and W standard
bearings are called cardinal points.
N
NW
(315)
W
(270)
E (90)
SE (135)
SW
(225)
S
N
NNW
(337 1)
22 12
WNW
(292 1)
Units: 3 & 4
N (0 or 360)
45 NE (45)
NNE (22 12 )
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
S (180)
67 12
AOS:
Do more
Interact
with bearings.
ENE (67 12)

E
ESE (112 12)
WSW
(247 12)
22 12
SSW
(202 12)
SSE (157 12)
It is important to consider the angles between any two bearings. For example, the angles from north (N)
to all 16 bearings are shown in brackets in the diagrams above.
It can be seen that the angle between two adjacent bearings is 22 12 . Some other angles that will need
to be considered are shown below.
N
NE
112 12
WNW
W
22 12
67 12
ESE
45
SE
SSW
N
N40E
other compass bearings
40
Often the direction required is not one of the 16 standard bearings. To specify
other bearings the following approach is taken.
1. Start from north (N) or south (S).
2. Turn through the angle specified towards east (E) or west (W).
E
S
N
Sometimes the direction may be specified unconventionally, for example,

starting from east or west as given by the example W32S. This bearing is
equivalent to S58W.
32
W32S
(S58W)
58
S
357
true bearings
True bearings is another method for specifying directions and is commonly used in navigation.
0T
N
330T
30
270T W
249T
020T
20
150
330
E 090T
60
249
150T
S
180T
To specify true bearings, first consider the following:

1. the angle is measured from north
2. the angle is measured in a clockwise direction to the bearing line
3. the angle of rotation may take any value from 0 to 360
4. the symbol T is used to indicate it is a true bearing, for example, 125T, 270T
5. for bearings less than 100T, use three digits with the first digit being a zero to indicate it is a bearing,
for example, 045T, 078T.
WorkeD exaMple 9
Specify the direction in the figure at right as:

a a standard compass bearing
b a compass bearing
c a true bearing.
think
A
67 12
Write
a 1 Find the angle between the bearing line and
north, that is, AON.
1
2
a AON = 22
O
S
2212,
The standard bearing is NNW.
b The bearing lies between the north and the west. The
b The compass bearing is N22 W.
c Find the angle from north to the bearing line in a
c Angle required = 270 + 671 = 3371
Since the angle is

the bearing is a
standard bearing. Refer to the standard
bearing diagram.
angle between north and the bearing line is 22 12.
clockwise direction. The bearing of west is 270T.
1
2
The true bearing is 33712T.
WorkeD exaMple 10
Draw a suitable diagram to represent the following directions.

a S17E
b 252T
think
a Draw the 4 main standard bearings. A compass
bearing of S17E means start from south; turn

17 towards east. Draw a bearing line at 17.
Mark in an angle of 17.
Write/DraW
17
S
358
b A true bearing of 252T is more than 180 and
less than 270, so the direction lies between

south and west. Find the difference between the
bearing and west (or south). Draw the 4 main
standard bearings and add the bearing line. Add
the angle from west (or south).
b Difference from west = 270 252
= 18
N
W
18
S
WorkeD exaMple 11
Convert:
a the true bearing, 137T, to a compass bearing
b the compass bearing, N25W, to a true bearing.
think
Write
a 1 The true bearing 137T means the direction
a Angle required = 180 137
= 43
is between south and east. Find the angle

from south to the bearing line.
2
Write the compass bearing.
Compass bearing is S43E.
b 1 State the angle between the bearing line
and north.
b Angle from north = 25
Find the angle from north to the bearing line

in a clockwise direction.
Angle required = 360 25

= 335
Write the true bearing.
True bearing is 335T.
WorkeD exaMple 12
Use your protractor to find the bearing of points A and B from

location P. State the directions as true bearings and as
compass bearings.
think
1
tUtorial
eles-1291
Worked example 12
Write
Find NPA and write as

a true bearing and as a
compass bearing.
NPA = 30
Repeat for location B,

this time with reference
to south.
SPB = 50
True bearing of B from P is
180 + 50 = 230T.
Compass bearing is S50W.
N
A
True bearing of A from P is 030T.

Compass bearing is N30E.
359
exercise 9C
1 We9a
a
Bearings
Specify the following directions as standard compass bearings.

b
N
135
W 1
22 2
45
S
d
S
e
S
f
67 2
112 2
SW 1
22 2
2 We9b,c
a
Specify the following directions as compass bearings and true bearings.

b
N
25
N
W
E
W
S
e
310
10
S
f
12
12
W
S
12
3 We10 Draw suitable diagrams to represent the following directions.

a N45E
d 106T
g 080T
4 We11a
b S20W
e 270T
h N70W
c 028T
f S60E
Convert the following true bearings to compass bearings.

1
2
a 040T
b 022 T
c 180T
d 350T
g 120T
e 147T
h 135T
6730T
5 We11b
Convert the following compass bearings to true bearings.
1
c S
a N45W
b S40 W
d S35E
g NNW
360
e N47E
h S5E
S6730W
6 We12 Use your protractor to find the bearing of each of the points from location P. State the
directions as true bearings and compass bearings.

A
N
F
B
7 Now find the bearing of each of the points in the diagram from question 6
from location B (ascompass bearings). Also include the bearing from B to P

and compare it to the direction from P to B.
8 MC The direction shown in the diagram at right is:
a
B
C
D
e
N125W
S35W
WSW
235T
125T
125
W
9 MC An unknown direction given that a second direction, 335T, makes a straight angle with
it is:
a S15E
D 235T
B SSE
e 135T
C S25E
10 MC The direction of a boat trip from Sydney directly to Auckland was S20E. The direction of the
return trip would be:

a S20W
D 235T
B NNW
e 340T
C N20E
11 MC The direction of the first leg of a hiking trip was S40W. For the second leg, the hikers turn
40right. The new direction for the second leg of the hike is:
a W
B S
D N40E
e N80W
C S80W
navigation and specification

of locations
9D
In most cases when you are asked to solve problems, a carefully drawn sketch of the situation will be
given. When a problem is described in words only, very careful sketches of the situation are required.
Furthermore, these sketches of the situation need to be converted to triangles
N
with angles and lengths of sides included. This is so that Pythagoras theorem,
trigonometric ratios, areas of triangles, similarity and sine or cosine rules
may be used.
Point where
Hints
compass bearing
1. Carefully follow given instructions.
is taken
2. Always draw the compass rose at the starting point of the direction requested.
interaCtiVitY
int-0190
navigation and
specification of
locations
361
3. Key words are from and to. For example:

The bearing from A to B (see diagram below left) is very different from the bearing from B to A (see
diagram below right).
N
4. When you are asked to determine the direction to return directly back to an initial starting point, it
is a 180 rotation or difference. For example, to return directly back after heading north, we need to
change the direction to head south.
Other examples are:
Returning directly back after heading 135T
New bearing = 135 + 180 = 315T
N
315T
135
N
180
Returning directly back after heading 290T

New bearing = 290 180 = 110T
N
N
N
20
290
20
180
110T
Returning directly back after heading N35E

New bearing = N35E + 180 = S35W
N
N35E
35
N35E
35
E
W
35
Returning directly back after heading S70W

New bearing = N70E
N
W
N
70
E
W
S70W 70
S
N70E
E
70
S
or simply use the opposite compass direction. North becomes south and east becomes west and vice versa.
362
WorkeD exaMple 13
A ship leaves port, heading N30E for 6 kilometres as shown.

a How far north or south is the ship from its starting point (to 1 decimal place)?
b How far east or west is the ship from its starting point (to 1 decimal place)?
N30E
30
W
N30E
or superimpose a suitable triangle.
6k
m
a 1 Draw a diagram of the journey and indicate
Write/DraW
30
Mooring
W
Mooring
Northward
think
6 km
E
Eastward
Identify the side of the triangle to be

found. Redraw a simple triangle with most
important information provided. Use the
bearing given to establish the angle in the
triangle, that is, use the complementary angle
law.
6 km
N
x
30
60
90 30 = 60
ten
use
As the triangle is right-angled, the sine ratio

can be used to find the distance north.
po
6k
(hy
x (opposite)
60
(adjacent)
State the answer to the required number of

decimal places.
b 1 Use the same approach as in part a. This time
the trigonometric ratio is cosine to find the

distance east, using the same angle.
Answer in correct units and to the required

level of accuracy.

opposite
=
hypotenuse
y
sin (60) =
6
x = 6 sin (60)
= 6 0.8660
= 5.196
sin () =
The ship is 5.2 km north of its starting point,

b

adjacent
=
hypotenuse
y
cos (60) =
6
y = 6 cos (60)
= 6 0.5
= 3.0
cos () =
The ship is 3.0 km east of its starting point,

363
WorkeD exaMple 14
A triangular paddock has two

complete fences. From location D,
one fence line is on a bearing of
N23W for 400 metres. The other
fence line is S55W for 700 metres.
Find the length of fencing (to
the nearest metre) required to
complete the enclosure of the
triangular paddock.
N23W
N
400 m
D
700 m
S55W
think
1
Write/DraW
Redraw a simple triangle with the most

important information provided. Identify
the side of the triangle to be found.
Use the bearings given to establish the

angle in the triangle; that is, use the
supplementary angle law.
400 m
23
102 D
55
700 m
S
In the triangle,
D = 180 23 55 = 102
3
The cosine rule can be used, as two sides

and the included angle are given.
State the values of the pronumerals and
write the formula for finding the unknown
side length using cosine rule.
B
400 m
x
102 C
700 m
A
a = 400 m b = 700 m C = 102 c = x m

4
Substitute the values of the pronumerals

into the formula and evaluate.
c2 = a2 + b2 2ab cos (C )
x2 = 4002 + 7002 2 400 700 cos (102)
= 650 000 560 000 0.207 91
= 766 430.55
x = 766 430.55
= 875.46
Answer in correct units and to the required

level of accuracy.
The new fence section is to be 875 metres long,

correct to the nearest metre.
WorkeD exaMple 15
Soldiers on a reconnaissance set off on a return journey from their base camp.
The journey consists of three legs. The first leg is on a bearing of 150T for
3 km; the second is on a bearing of 220T for 5 km.
Find the direction (to the nearest degree) and distance (correct to 2 decimal
places) of the third leg by which the group returns to its base camp.
364
tUtorial
eles-1292
Worked example 15
think
1
Draw a diagram of the journey and indicate or

superimpose a suitable triangle.
Write/DraW
N
Base
camp
150
3 km
N
220T
5 km
Identify the side of the triangle to be found.

Redraw a simple triangle with the most
important information provided.
(BCA = 180 30 40.
BCA = 110)
150
30
30
B
3 km
110
220
40
30
5 km
110
40
A
3
The cosine rule can be used to find the length

of the side AB, as we are given two sides and
the angle in between.
a = 3 km b = 5 km C = 110 c = x km
Substitute the known values into the cosine rule

and evaluate.
c2 = a2 + b2 2ab cos (C )
x2 = 32 + 52 2 3 5 cos (110)
= 44.260 604
x = 44.260 604
= 6.65
For direction, we need to find the angle

between the direction of the second and third
legs first, that is, BAC. Once the size of
BAC (or simply, A) is established, it can be
subtracted from 40 to find angle . This will
give the bearing for the third leg of the journey.
Since all 3 side length in the ABC are now
known, use cosine rule to find A.
B
3
6.65
N
40
5
40
A
40
a=3
b=5
c = 6.65 or 44.260 604
365
Substitute the known values into the rearranged

cosine rule.
Note: Use the most accurate form of the length
of side c.
cos (A) =
=
b2 + c2 a2
2bc
52 + 44.260 604 32
2 5 44.260 604
= 0.9058
A = 25.07
= 25 (to the nearest degree)
7
Calculate the angle of the turn from the north

bearing.
= 40 25
= 15
Bearing is N15E.
Write the answer in correct units and to the

required level of accuracy.
The distance covered in the final leg is

6.65 km, correct to 2 decimal places,
on a bearing of N15E, correct to the
nearest degree.
navigation and specification of locations
exercise 9D
1 We13 For the following, find how far north or south and east or west the end point is from the starting
point (to 1 decimal place).

a
N45E
Start
250T
Start
080T
Start
100 km
500 metres
10 km
Start
1200 metres
S10E
2 We14 Find the length of the unknown side for each of the triangles below (to the nearest unit).
b
a N10W
N
N35E
400 m
N
100 km
200 m
120 km
200T
c
N50E
140T
N
N
1.5 km
30 m
10 m
S50E
3.7 km
192T
366
047T
3 We15 In each of the following diagrams, the first two legs of a journey are shown. Find the direction
and distance of the third leg of the journey which returns to the start.
a
10 km
N
1.4 km
10 km
2 km
SW
Start
c
Start
d
Start
400 m
310T
N75E
300 m
Start
3 km
S50E
2 km
190T
4 Draw a diagram to represent each of the directions specified below and give the direction required to
return to the starting point:

a from A to B on a bearing of N40W
c to F from G on a bearing of S35W
b from C to E on a bearing of 157T

d from B to A on a bearing of 237T.
5 MC A boat sails from port A for 15 km on a bearing of N15E before turning and sailing for 21 km in
a direction of S75E to port B.

a The distance between ports A and B is closest to:
a 15 km
D 26 km
B 18 km
e 36 km
C 21 km
b The bearing of port B from port A is closest to:

a N69.5E
D S20.5 E
B N54.5 E
e 54.5 T
C N20.5 E
6 MC In a pigeon race, the birds start from the same place. In one race, pigeon A flew 35km on a
bearing of N65W to get home, while pigeon B flew 26km on a bearing of 174T.
a The distance between the two pigeons homes is closest to:
a 13 km
B 18 km
C 44 km
D 50 km
e 53 km
b The bearing of pigeon As home from pigeon Bs home is closest to:
a N28 W
B N34 W
C N40 W
D 208 T
e 220 T
7 For each of the following, find how far north/south and east/west position A is from position O.
a
N45E
A
50 m
N75E
A
N50E
100 m
N
N
100 m
200 m
O
O
c
N
O
10 km
240T
15 km
160T
A
1500 m
N10W
300 m
S60E
367
8 For the hiking trip shown in the diagram, find (to the nearest metre):
a how far south the hiker is from the starting point
b how far west the hiker is from the starting point
c the distance from the starting point
d the direction of the final leg to return to the starting point.
9 Captain Cook sailed from Cook Island on a bearing of N10E
Starting
point
N50E
0.5 km
3 km
N40W
for 100 km. He then changed direction and sailed for a further
50 km on a bearing of SE to reach a deserted island.
1.5 km
a How far from Cook Island is Captain Cooks ship (to the
S15W
nearest kilometre)?
b Which direction would have been the most direct route from Cook Island to the deserted island
(in degrees and minutes)?
c How much shorter would the trip have been using the direct route?
10 A journey by a hot-air balloon is shown. The balloonist did not
initially record the first leg of the journey. Find the direction
and distance for the first leg of the balloonists journey.
Start
N
21.2 km
15 km
SW
11 A golfer is teeing off on the 1st hole. The distance and
DiGital DoC
doc-9471
WorkSHEET 9.1
direction to the green is 450 metres on a bearing of 190T.

If the tee shot of the player was 210 metres on a bearing of
220T, how far away from the green is the ball and in what
direction should she aim to land the ball on the green with her
second shot? (Give the distance to the nearest metre and the
direction to the nearest degree.)
9e
triangulation cosine and sine rules
In many situations, certain geographical or topographical features are not accessible to a survey. To
find important locations or features, triangulation is used. This technique requires the coordination of
bearings from two known locations, for example, fire spotting towers, to a third inaccessible location, the
fire (see Worked example 16).
1. Triangulation should be used when:
C
(a) the distance between two locations is given and
(b) the direction from each of these two locations to the third
River
inaccessible location is known.
A
Known distance B
2. For triangulation:
(a) the sine rule is used to find distances from the known
locations to the inaccessible one
(b) the cosine rule may be used occasionally for locating a
fourth inaccessible location.
Pylons
?
Lake
368
WorkeD exaMple 16
How far (to 1 decimal place) is the fire from Tower A?

Fire
82
37
10 km
think
1
Write/DraW
Draw a triangle and identify it as a non-rightangled triangle with a given length and two
known angles. Determine the value of the third
angle and label appropriately for the sine rule.
C
x km
61
82
37
10 km
a
b
c
=
=
sin (A) sin (B) sin (C )
where
c = 10 km C = 180 (37 + 82) = 61
b=x
B = 82
2
Substitute into the formula and evaluate.
x
10
=
sin (82) sin (61)
10 sin
sin (82
((82)
82))
x=
sin (61)
= 11.322
Write the answer using correct units and to the

required level of accuracy.
The fire is 11.3 km from Tower A, correct

to 1 decimal place.
WorkeD exaMple 17
Two fire-spotting towers are 7 kilometres apart on an eastwest line. From Tower A a fire is seen
on a bearing of 310T. From Tower B the same fire is spotted on a bearing of N20E. Which
tower is closest to the fire and how far is that tower from the fire (to 1 decimal place)?
369
think
1
Write/DraW
Draw a suitable sketch of the situation

described. It is necessary to determine whether
Tower A is east or west of Tower B.
N20E
310T
N
N
20
W
Identify the known values of the triangle and

label appropriately for the sine rule.
The shortest side of a triangle is opposite the
smallest angle. Therefore, Tower B is closest to
the fire. Use the sine rule to find the distance of
Tower B from the fire.
7 km
310
E
A
C
70
x
70
B
40
7 km
a
c
=
sin (A) sin (C )
where
a=x
A = 40
c = 7 km C = 180 (70 + 40) = 70
3

Note: ABC is an isosceles triangle, so
TowerA is 7 km from the fire.
x
7
=
sin (40) sin (70)
7 sin
sin (40)
(40)
x=
sin (70)
= 4.788 282 km
Tower B is closest to the fire at a distance of
4.8 km, correct to 1 decimal place.
WorkeD exaMple 18
From the diagram at right find:

a the length of CD (to 1 decimal place)
b the bearing from C to D (to 1 decimal place).
110
80
A
40
think
a 1 To evaluate the length of CD, we
need to first determine the lengths

of AC and AD. (Alternatively,
we can find the lengths of BC
and BD.)
Write/DraW
D
N
110
80
A
40
370
40
30
40
30
Label ABC for the sine rule and

evaluate the length of AC.
(C = 180 30 80 = 70)
C
70
80
40
30
B
b
c
=
sin ( B) sin (C )
b = AC
c = 40
B = 30
C = 70
40
AC
=
sin (30) sin (70)
40 sin
sin (30
((30)
30))
AC =
sin (70)
= 21.283 555
3
Label ABD for the sine rule and

evaluate the length of AD.
(D = 180 40 110 = 30)
D
30
40
110
40
b
d
=
sin ( B) sin ( D)
b = AD
d = 40
B = 110
D = 30
40
AD
=
sin (110) sin (30)
40 sin (110)
AD =
sin (30)
= 75.175 41
Draw ACD, which is needed

tofind the length of CD. Use the
two given angles to find CAD.
Now label it appropriately for the
cosine rule.
C
d = 21.283 555
c = 75.175 41
40
A
C
80
40
D
CAD
= 80 40
= 40
a = CD
d = 21.283 55
A = 40
c = 75.175 41
Substitute into the formula and

evaluate.
a2 = c2 + d2 2cd cos (A)

CD2 = 75.175 412 + 21.283 5552 2
75.175 41 21.283 555 cos (40)
CD = 3652.9898
= 60.439 969
The length of CD is 60.4 units, correct to 1 decimal place.
371
b 1 Redraw ACD and label it with
60.439 969
the known information.
C
21.283 555
75.175 41
A
2
Bearing required is taken from C,

so find ACD by using the cosine
rule first.
a = 60.439 969
d = 21.283 555
Substitute into the rearranged

cosine rule and evaluate C.
cos (C ) =
Redraw the initial diagram (from

the question) with known angles at
point C in order to find the actual
bearing angle.
c = 75.175 41
a2 + d 2 c2
2ad
(60.439969))2 + (21.283
((21.283555)
21.283 555)
21.283555
555)2 ((75.17541)2
=
2 60.439969
60.439 969 21.283555
= 0.6007
C = 126.9
N
D
126.9
10
S
80
A
Determine the angle from south to

the line CD.
SCD = 126.9 10
= 116.9
Determine the bearing angle.
NCD = 180 116.9

= 63.1
Write the bearing of D from C.
The bearing of D from C is N63.1 E, correct to

1 decimal place.
exercise 9e
triangulation cosine and sine rules
1 We16 Find the distance from A to C in each case below (to 1 decimal place).
a
A
c
120
20
4000 m B
113
A
1300 km
53
43
15
15
15 km
1000 m
A
70
C
C
2 a We17 Two fire-spotting towers are 17 kilometres apart on an eastwest line. From TowerA, a fire
is seen on a bearing of 130T. From Tower B, the same fire is spotted on abearing of S20W. Which
tower is closest to the fire and how far is that tower from thefire?
372
b Two fire-spotting towers are 25kilometres apart on a northsouth line. From Tower A, a fire is
reported on a bearing of 082T. Spotters in Tower B see the same fire on a bearing of 165T.
Which tower is closest to the fire and how far is that tower from the fire?
3 Two lighthouses are 20 km apart on a northsouth line. The northern lighthouse spots a ship on a
bearing of S80E. The southern lighthouse spots the same ship on a bearing of 040T.
a Find the distance from the northern lighthouse to the ship.
b Find the distance from the southern lighthouse to the ship.
4 Two air traffic control towers detect a glider that has strayed into a major air corridor. Tower A has
the glider on a bearing of 315T. Tower B has the glider on a bearing of north. The two towers are
200kilometres apart on a NE line as shown. To which tower is the glider closer? What is the distance?
N
A
200 km
N
B
5 We18a Find the value of line segment NO in each case below (to 1 decimal place).
a
c
b
N
O
28 km
Q
P
40 50
N
80
80
A
85
35
30
300 m
N
B
115
A
O
110
30
B
40
120
AB = 15.5 km
O
6 We18b Find the distance (to 1 decimal place) and bearing from C to D (correct to 1 decimal place).
a
b
N
N
W
W
20
30
10
20
North
50
W A
E
70
126 km
40
N
20
16.4 km
East
C
373
7 A student surveys her school grounds and makes the necessary measurements to 3 key locations as
shown in the diagram.
Toilet
Kiosk
100
110
60 30
A
B
50 m
50
50
a Find the distance to the kiosk from:

i location A
ii location B.
b Find the distance to the toilets from:
i location A
ii location B.
c Find the distance from the toilet to the kiosk.
d Find the distance from the office to location A.
Office
8 From the diagram below, find the distance between the two ships and the bearing from ship A
to ship B.
A
B
17
37
5.1 km
9 An astronomer uses direction measurements to a distant star taken 6months apart, as seen in the
diagram at right (which is not drawn to scale). The known diameter of the Earths orbit around the
Sun is 300 million kilometres. Find the closest distance from Earth to the star (to the nearest
million kilometres).
88.5
Earths
position 1
374
Sun
89.5
Earths
position 2
10 MC In the triangle below, the length of side b can be found by using:

a
B
C
D
e
a
75
=
sin (115) sin (60)
b
75
=
sin (55) sin (65)
b
75
=
sin (65) sin (60)
b
75
=
sin (115) sin (55)
b
7
=
sin (130) sin (30)
75
55
B
115
11 MC Two girls walk 100 metres from a landmark. One girl heads off on a bearing of S44E, while
the other is on a bearing of N32E. After their walk, the distance between the two girls, to the nearest
metre, is closest to:
a 123 m
B 158 m
C 126 m
D 185 m
e 200 m
12 MC Two ships leave the same port and sail the same distance, one ship on a bearing of NW and
the other on a bearing of SSE. If they are 200 kilometres apart, what was the distance sailed by
each ship?
a 100 km
B 101 km
C 102 km
D 202 km
e 204 km
13 In the swimming component of a triathlon, competitors have to swim
around the buoys A, B and C, as marked in the figure at right,

to end at point A.
a What is the shortest leg of the swimming component?
b What is the angle at buoy B?
c What is the total distance travelled?
B
C
140 m
115 m
46
A
9F
triangulation similarity
Another method of solving triangulation problems is by using similar triangles. There are situations
where a triangle can be constructed in an area that is accessible so as to determine the dimensions of a
similar triangle in an inaccessible region.
1. We need two corresponding lengths to establish the scale factor between the two similar
triangles. A second accessible side will be used to scale up or down to the corresponding
inaccessible side.
2. For similar triangles use the following rules as proof:
(a) AAA all corresponding angles are the same
(b) SSS all corresponding sides are in the same ratio
(c) SAS two corresponding sides are in the same ratio with the same included angle.
WorkeD exaMple 19
Find the unknown length, x, from the pylon to the edge of the lake.
Lake
Pylon
3m
A
tUtorial
eles-1293
Worked example 19
x
Inaccessible
triangle
36 m
Accessible
triangle
B
AB = 20 m
375
think
Write/DraW
Identify that the two triangles are similar

(proof: AAA rule).
Draw the triangles separately, highlighting the

corresponding sides.
3
20
36
x
3 20
=
36 x
In similar triangles, all corresponding sides are

in the same ratio.

itself and evaluate.
x=
Write the length and include units with the

answer.
The distance from the edge of the lake to the

pylon is 240 metres.
20 36
3
= 240 metres
exercise 9F
1 In figure 1 below, find the length of the proposed bridge, AB.

2 We19 In figure 2 below, find the length of the base of a hillside from C to D.
B
C
x
A
River
64 m
4m
48 m
40 m
E
3m
Figure 1
D
Figure 2
5m
A
6m
4m B
3 In figure 3 below, find the perpendicular gap between the two city buildings.
4 In figure 4 below, find the distance between the two lighthouses.
Top of a city building
x
890 cm 125 cm
85 cm
x
125 m
Figure 4
Top of a city
building
376
2m
Figure 3
3.2 m
5 In figure 5 below, find the distance across the lake.

6 In figure 6 below, find the height of the cyprus tree.
N
W
S
N
W
x
1-metre ruler
S
1.5 m
16 m
0.3 m
2.4 m
4.6 m
Figure 6
Figure 5
7 Find the width (to the nearest centimetre) of the shadow under the round table which has a diameter of
115 centimetres.
200 cm
40 cm
Shadow
8 MC The distance across a river is to be determined using the measurements outlined below.
P
Q
55 m
2m
3m
The width from P to Q is closest to:

a 37 m
B 60 m
C 83 m
D 113 m
e 330 m
9 MC The shadow formed on the ground by a person who is 2 m in height was 5 m. At the same time a
nearby tower formed a shadow 44 m long. The height of the tower, to the nearest metre,is:
a 18 m
B 20 m
C 51 m
D 110 m
e 123 m
10 In figure 7 below, find the height (to the nearest centimetre) of the person being photographed.
11 In figure 8 below, find the minimum distance from the tree to the camera, x metres, so that the tree is
completely in the photo.

35 mm
1300 mm
Figure 7
40 metres
Figure 8
35 mm
30 mm
xm
70 mm
377
12 A girl is looking through her window.

a She is standing 2 metres from the window which is 2.4 metres wide. What is the width
DiGital DoC
doc-9472
WorkSHEET 9.2
of her view:
i 300 metres from the window (to the nearest metre)?
ii 1.5 kilometres from the window (to the nearest 100 metres)?
iii 6 kilometres from the window (to the nearest kilometre)?
b She is now standing 1 metre from the window. What is the width of her view:
i 300 metres from the window (to the nearest metre)?
ii 1.5 kilometres from the window (to the nearest 100 metres)?
iii 6 kilometres from the window (to the nearest kilometre)?
9G
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Contour maps
Contour maps are used to represent the shape of the undulation or terrain of a region. That is,
they indicate whether the land surface goes up or down between two points and how steeply the
land slopes.
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch
a video about
contours.
Such maps are used:

1. by cross-country hikers in the sport of orienteering
2. by civil engineers planning new developments such as road constructions
3. as tourist information guides for local walks.
These contour or topographic maps are a two-dimensional overhead view of a region. Contour lines,
along with a map scale, provide information about the region in a concise manner.
Contour lines and intervals

A contour line is defined as a line that joins places that are at the same height above sea level or a
reference point.
378
Contour lines
A
A
B
C
D
B
C D
Contour map of the region

3-dimensional representation
of a region
In the above figures, points A, B and C lie on the same contour line and hence are at the same height
above sea level.
The distance between contour lines indicates the steepness of the slope.
The closer the lines are,

the steeper the slope.
The further apart the contour lines are,

the flatter the slope.
Look at the 3-dimensional representation at the top of the page.

Compare the slope in the lower section of the shape (where the
contour lines are close together) with the slope in the upper section
(where the contour lines are further apart).
Intervals are indicated on the line to show the relative difference
in height or altitude.
Intervals change in regular multiples of 10s or 100s of metres.
70
60
50
500
400
300
200
Map scales
Map scales can be given as a ratio, for example 1 : 25 000, or 1 cm 100 m, or as a linear scale (below).
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
Units: 3 & 4
Metres
average slope
The average slope of land between two points A
and B is given by:
Average slope = gradient
rise
=
run
= tan ( )
Altitude
intervals
Rise
Run
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
379
From the average slope we can determine the angle of elevation, , of B from A, which is equal to the
angle of depression of A from B.
A contour map can be used to draw a profile of the terrain. A profile is a side view of the land surface
between two points, as shown above.
WorkeD exaMple 20
For the contour map, give an appropriate profile along the cross-sectional
line AB.
A
60
Scale 1:10 000

think
Draw a horizontal line of the same length

as from A to B. Use the scale provided to
add units to this line.
Find the maximum and minimum heights

from the contour lines that line AB crosses
and draw a vertical axis from A. This axis
should be to scale.
40
20
A
60
Locate the points intersected by the line

AB on the cross-sectional grid at their
appropriate height.
Join the points together. The exact profile
in between the intervals can only be
guessed.
Height (m)
80
DraW
80
60
40
20
A
100
200
From the given profile, construct an appropriate contour map.
Height (m)
160
120
80
40
A
100
200
300
400
Distance (m)
500
B
600
80
40
20
300
400
Distance (m)
WorkeD exaMple 21
380
tUtorial
eles-1294
Worked example 20
500
B
600
think
Draw a horizontal line to represent the

cross-section from A to B. It should be the
same length as AB.
Transfer points of equal height onto the
line AB. These points are on the same
contour line so draw a contour line to
connect them and indicate its height.
Remember: There is no information on
the width and shape of the hill beyond the
cross-sectional line, AB, so the contour
that is drawn will be only one possibility.
160
Height (m)
DraW
Repeat this process for the next height.

Continue until all heights are done.
Remember: The shape and exact height
of the peak of the hill is unknown. The
height is somewhere between the highest
altitude given and the next interval.
120
80
40
B
40
160
120
80
40
0
Scale 1:10 000
Add in the horizontal scale.
WorkeD exaMple 22
For the contour map given, calculate:

a the direct, straight-line distance between locations A and B (to the nearest metre)
b the average slope of the land and the angle of elevation (to 1 decimal place) from the lower point
to the upper one.
Scale 1 cm 100 m
B
A
80
60
40
20
think
a 1 Identify the difference in height between points
A and B from the contour intervals given.

2
Use the scale given to measure and calculate

the horizontal distance between the two
locations. (That is, use the ruler to measure
the distance between points A and B on the
contour map; then use given scale to convert
to the actual distance.)
Draw a simple triangle to represent the

profile from A to B.
Write/DraW
a Height difference = 80 20
= 60 metres
Horizontal distance = 5 cm which represents

500 metres.
B
60 m
A
500 m
381
Calculate the direct distance from A to B

using Pythagoras theorem.
Write your answer.
c2 = a2 + b2
= 602 + 5002
= 253 600
c = 253 600
= 503.587 132 5
The direct distance between A and B is
504 metres, correct to the nearest metre.
rise
b Average slope =
run
b 1 Calculate the average slope.
60
= 500
= 0.12
Calculate the angle of elevation using the

tangent ratio.
Write your answer.
exercise 9G
tan ( ) = 0.12
= 6.8428
= 6.8 (to 1 decimal place)
The average slope between A and B is 0.12
while the angle of elevation of B from A is 6.8.
Contour maps
1 We20 For each of the contour maps, give an appropriate profile along thecross-sectional line, AB.
a
b
A
60
40
20
100
50
Scale 1:10 000
50
Scale 1:10 000

c
A
50
80
60
100
0
150
100
20
25
40
e
Scal
Scale 1:20 000
00
1:50
40
20
A
0
B
100 200 300 400 500
Distance (m)
120
80
40
B
A
50
100 150 200

Distance (m)
250
Height (m)
d
Height (m)
382
Height (m)
Height (m)
2 We21 For each of the given profiles, construct an appropriate contour map.
a
b
60
200
150
100
50
B
A
100 200 300 400 500

Distance (m)
200 400 600 800 1000

Distance (m)
400
300
200
100
3 We22 For contour maps I and II, calculate:
B
A
800
80
600
Scale 1 cm 200 m
MAP I
C 60
40
20
0
MAP II
0
500
1000
1500
2000 m
a the direct, straight-line distance (to the nearest metre) between locations:
i A and B
ii A and C
iii B and C.
b the average slope of the land and the angle of elevation (to 1 decimal place) from:
i A to B
ii A to C.
4 For each of the given profiles, calculate:
PROFILE II
200
PROFILE I
80
180
Height (m)
Height (m)
60
B
40
20
0
100
200
300
Distance (m)
400
160
140
120
500
1000
1200
1400 1600 1800

Distance (m)
2000
a the direct, straight-line distance (to the nearest metre) between locations:
i A and B
ii A and C
iii B and C.
b the average slope of the land and the angle of elevation (in degrees and minutes) from:
i A to B
ii A to C.
5 Match up the contour maps below with an appropriate profile.
a
383
ii
iii
iv
6 MC Examine the contour map.
100 80
60
40
B
D
A
Scale 1:10 000
a The direct, straight-line distance from A to B above is closest to:

a 108 m
D 209 m
B 201 m
e 215 m
C 204 m
b The angle of depression of C from D is closest to:

a 17
D 45
B 22
e 59
C 31
7 The slope from two nearby locations on the side of a mountain is 0.12. Given that one location is at
80 metres above sea level and the other is at 470 metres above sea level, find the length of the shortest
route between these locations, to the nearest metre.
384
Summary
angles
Angles and bearings are measured in degrees and minutes.

60 minutes = 1 degree
angle laws
Complementary angles add up to 90.
30
Supplementary angles add up to 180.
170
a = 90 30 = 60
a = 180 170
= 10
Alternate angles are equal.
b
b
a
a
a=b
angles of elevation
and depression
a=b
O Horizon or horizontal line
Angle of depression
Line of sight
Line of sight
Angle of
elevation
O
Bearings
Horizontal line
A
B
Standard compass bearings:

NNW
(337 12)
Common angles between directions are 22.5,
45, 67.5, 90, 135, 180, 225, 270, 315.
Other compass bearings:
WNW
Start at north or south, then turn through
(292 12)
an angle towards east or west, for example
N20W, S80E.
W
True bearings:
Start at north and then turn through an angle
WSW
in a clockwise direction, for example 157T, (247 1)
2
22 12
030T, 287T.
SSW
(202 1)
22 2
NNE (22 2)
1
672
ENE (67 2)
E
1
ESE (112 2)
SSE (157 2)
385
navigation and
specification of
locations
Bearings are directions in the horizontal plane, not just angles.

When solving navigation problems, in most cases the angle laws will need to be used.
When determining a bearing, be clear on where the direction is taken from and to the starting and
finishing points.
There is a 180 difference between the bearing of A from B compared to the bearing of the return,
that is, of B from A.
triangulation
Triangulation involves finding dimensions in inaccessible regions.

C
River
A
Known distance B
Sine and cosine rules may be used if:

(a) the distance between two locations is known and
(b) the direction from the two locations to a third is known.
a
b
c
=
=
Sine rule:
.
sin ( A) sin ( B) sin (C )
Cosine rule: c2 = a2 + b2 2ab cos (C ).
Alternatively, we may use similarity when two similar triangles are given.
C
b
A
Contour maps
386
a
c
A contour map represents the shape of the terrain.

Contour lines join locations that are at the same height (or altitude) above sea level or a reference
point.
Contour lines that are close together indicate steep terrain.
Contour lines that are far apart indicate gentle slopes.
The vertical distance between two locations can be found from the difference in the values of the
two contour lines.
Average slope = gradient
rise
=
run
= tan ( ), where = angle of elevation from lower point to upper point.
Chapter review
1
The value of a below is:

B 1854
a 1754
C 19
D 2150
e 2820
D 120
e 13032
M U ltip l e
C ho iC e
5016'
a
2150'
2
The value of p below is:

B 49
a 4032
C 4928
N
4928'
N
p
3 A fly is hovering above a frog sitting on the ground, at an angle of elevation of 4220 and 12 cm
directly above the ground. The minimum length (to 1 decimal place) that the frogs tongue needs to be
to touch the fly is:
a 8.1 cm
B 12.0 cm
C 13.2 cm
D 16.2 cm
e 17.8 cm
4 A helicopter has its 8-metre rescue ladder hanging vertically from the doorway of the craft. The
ladders free end is just touching the surface of the floodwater below. From the top of the ladder the
angle of depression of a stranded person in the water, clinging to a pole, is 54. The distance that the
helicopter must fly horizontally toward the person to rescue him is:
a 4.7 m
B 5.8 m
C 16.5 m
D 9.9 m
e 11.0 m
5 Using a protractor, the bearing of the church from the boatshed in the diagram below is:
C SW
a S35W
B N35E
D 055T
e S55W
N
Boatshed
Church
6 There is a fork in a road. The road heading eastwards is on a bearing of S27E. If the angle between the
two roads is 135, the most likely direction of the other, westward-bound road is:
a S27E
B S72W
C N72W
D SE
e SW
387
7 The bearing required to return to the starting line in the situation below is:
a N27S
B N27E
C S27W
D N27W
e S27E
N27E
START
8 For the final leg of the journey shown, the bearing to return to the start is:
a 070T
D 110T
B 130T
e 230T
C 250T
100T
30
040T
Start
9 The horizontal distance (to the nearest metre) that the artillery gunner shown below needs to fire to
reach the target is closest to:

a 198 m
D 250 m
B 210 m
e 266 m
C 235 m
Target
62
Artillery
gunner
250 m
48
Spotter
10 Two boats, P and Q, are to rendezvous at port R. At the moment, boat P is 15 km due west of Q. For
boat P, port R has a bearing of N49E and for boat Q, the bearing of the port is 334T. The distance
(to the nearest kilometre) that Q has to travel is:
a 10 km
B 12 km
C 13 km
D 15 km
e 18 km
11 To find the distance across a large excavation, the measurements as shown in the diagram were found.
The distance, AB, across the excavation in metres is:
a
D
40
4
4
40
40
4
40
5
3
Excavation pit
40 m
5m
3m
388
4m
40
3
12 Jennifer is standing 2 metres directly in front of her bedroom window, which is 1.5 metres wide. The
width (to the nearest metre) of her view of a mountain 3 kilometres from her window is:
a 4003 metres
B 4000 metres
C 3000 metres
D 2250 metres
e 2252 metres
13 For the contour map given, the average slope from A to B can be stated as:
a tan ( ) =
D tan ( ) =
500
300
200
300
300
3
200
= 300
B sin ( ) =
e cos ( )
200
300
400
500
C tan ( ) =
300
200
A
0
200
400
600 metres
14 The gradient from the hut to peak A is:

a 0.10
B 0.05
D tan (20)
e 20
20
300
B
40
A
Hut
40
20
0
200
400
600 metres
1 A steel truss, which is to be used to reinforce the roof in a building, is designed as shown in the diagram
below. Find the values of p and q.
S ho rt
a n S W er
p 5120'
q
2 Three guy wires are used to support a 20-metre tall pole, as shown. Find:
a the length of a guy wire (to 1 decimal place)
b the angle of elevation of the guy wires.
20 m
4m
389
3 a Use your protractor to find the compass bearing of:

i B from A
ii A from B.
b What is the actual distance between A and B?
c Redraw the diagram and add a point C so that it lies
at 050T from B and 345T from A.

4 A country valley is bounded by three major roads as shown.
N
Turtleford
70 km
Wilama
50 km
63
4 km
Wright
110 km
a What is the direction from Turtleford to Wright if Turtleford to Wilama is S63W?

b What is the bearing of Wilama from Wright?
5 Three communication towers are located as shown.
Mt Buffalo
45 km
Falls Creek
N
Scale 1 cm 10 km
Mt Hotham
a Find the distance from the tower at Mt Hotham to:

i Falls Creek
ii Mt Buffalo.
b Find the direction from Mt Hotham to Falls Creek, given the direction from Mt Hotham to
Mt Buffalo is N30W and the distance from Falls Creek to Mt Buffalo is 45 km.
6 A communications station has received a distress signal from a yacht on a bearing of 206T at a
distance of 38 km. A rescue ship is 21 km from the station in a direction of S17E.
a Find the distance in kilometres (to 1 decimal place) that the ship must travel to reach the stricken
yacht.
b On what bearing must the ship sail to reach the yacht?
7 A bushwalker has taken some measurements and drawn the diagram below. Find the distance from
peak A to peak B.
Peak B
Hut
75 m
390
10 m
Peak A
120 m
8 a Draw an appropriate contour map of an Egyptian pyramid.

1
b If the slope of the pyramid is , find the angle of elevation (in degrees and minutes) of the top
2
10
11
12
from the base edge.

A ski run rises 120 metres
from the baseline and the
run is 1500 metres long.
a What is the angle of
elevation of the slope
(to 1 decimal place)?
b What is the gradient of
the slope (expressed as a
scale ratio, for example
1: 20)?
A bushwalker travels from
home on a bearing of 020T
for 8 km, then on a bearing
of 130T for 11 km. Find
the distance the bushwalker
is from home.
From the result of question 10, determine the bearing required for the bushwalker to return home.
Find the distance from A to C below.
A
10.1 m
B
98
9.4 m
C
13 Two firespotting towers are on an eastwest line 15 km apart. Tower A spots a fire on a bearing
of 053T, while tower B spots it on a bearing of 008T. Determine the distance of each tower
from the fire.
14 A surveyor wishes to find the distance across a lake (A to B). She knows that the distance from B to a
boatshed, C, is 650 m. She constructs a similar triangle, as shown below, to help her in the task.
A
Lake
B
650 m
C
E
Find the distance from A to B, given that CE = 56 m and DE = 42 m.

15 Construct an appropriate profile for the line AB in the contour map below.
A
150
100
100
50
0
500
1000
391
16 Find the average slope from point Y to point X in the contour map below.
Y
X
40
20
e x t enDeD
r e SponS e
100 m
1 The laws of geometry are evident in the life of bees.
In a cross-sectional view of a beehive with its regular

hexagonal cells:
a i find the height of AOB (to 3 decimal places)
O
ii find the length of line AO
iii find the area of AOB and thus the area
A
B
(to 1 decimal place) of one hexagonal cell.
10 mm
In a beehive slab there are 500 cells.
Each cell is 12 mm deep.
b i Find the volume of honey (to 1 decimal place) that
would be stored in a single cell.
ii Find the volume of honey collected from one slab
of beehive. Express your answer to the nearest cubic
centimetre.
The beekeeper decides to trial a synthetic beehive where the linear dimensions of the hexagonal cell
are doubled.
c
i What is the scale factor for the new artificial hive compartment compared to the original?
ii What is the area (to 1 decimal place) of the new artificial hexagon?
iii What is the volume of honey that would be stored in a single artificial hexagonal cell?
(Answer in cubic centimetres to 1 decimal place.)
The beekeeper wishes the bees to collect the nectar from two prime locations a field of lavender
and a group of wattle trees. A map of their respective locations is shown.
N
N 100 m
Wattle trees
10
35
300 m
Beehive box
Lavender field
d
i Find the distance (to the nearest metre) the bees have to travel to the lavender field from the
hive box.
ii If the direction from the hive to the wattle trees is 035 T, what is the direction (to the nearest
degree) of the lavender field from the hive box?

iii How far north (to the nearest metre) must the beekeeper move the hive box so that it is
directly west from the wattle trees?

392
2 Every car should carry a jack. One type of jack used to raise a car is a scissor-jack. A simple diagram of
a scissor-jack is given below.

C
B
D
120 mm
A
AB = BC = CD = AD = 200 mm
The threaded rod is rotated to increase or decrease the length of the line segment BD.
a i In the triangle BCD, M is the midpoint of BD. What is the length of CM, given that
AC = 120 mm?
ii If BCD = 160, what is the length of BD (to the nearest millimetre)?
iii What is the size of MBC, given that BCD = 160?
The jack is raised by reducing the length of the line segment BD.
b i If the height of the jack, AC, is raised to 250 mm, what is the length of BD (to the nearest
millimetre)?
ii If MBC is 70, what is the length of BD and what is the height of the jack?
3 a The scenic route, taken on a car trip through the hills, is shown
on the contour map at right.

State the difference between sections A and B of the trip.
Explain how this is indicated on the contour map.
b The average slope along section C of the route is 0.005.
i What is the horizontal distance covered by the car along
this section of road?
ii What is the direct distance between the start and finish
of this section of the road?
iii Find the map scale (in its simplest form) for the contour
cm
metres.
map:
C
B
40
20
80
60
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Practice
VCE exam
questions
Use StudyON to
access all exam
questions on this
topic since 2002.
DiGital DoC
doc-9473
Test Yourself
Chapter 9
393
ICT activities
Chapter opener
DiGital DoC
applications of geometry and trigonometry. (page 347)
9a
angles
DiGital DoC
SkillSHEET 9.1 doc-9469: Dealing with angles in either degrees or
degrees and minutes (page 350)
tUtorial
We5 eles-1289: Watch a worked example on using alternate and
supplementary angles to determine unknown angles. (page 350)
9B
DiGital DoC
SkillSHEET 9.2 doc-9470: Practise using trigonometric ratios. (page 354)
tUtorial
We8 eles-1290: Watch a tutorial on calculating an angle of
depression. (page 353)
9C
Bearings
tUtorial
We12 eles-1291: Watch a tutorial on writing direction as a
compass bearing and as a true bearing. (page 359)
9D
navigation and specification of locations
DiGital DoC
WorkSHEET 9.1 doc-9471: Applications of geometry and
trigonometry including compass bearings and true bearings using
right-angled triangles (page 368)
394
tUtorial
We15 eles-1292: Watch a tutorial on applying trigonometry
to a real life situation to calculate direction and distance.
(page 364)
interaCtiVitY
Navigation and specification of locations int-0190: Use the
interactivity to enhance your understanding of bearings.
(page 361)
9F
DiGital DoC
WorkSHEET 9.2 doc-9472: Applications of geometry and
trigonometry including compass bearings and true bearings
using non-right-angled triangles and triangulation
(page 378)
tUtorial
We19 eles-1293: Watch a worked example on using triangulation
and similarity. (page 375)
9G
Contour maps
tUtorial
We20 eles-1294: Watch a worked example on making a profile
given a contour map. (page 380)
Chapter review
DiGital DoC
Answers CHAPTER 9
appliCationS oF GeoMetrY
anD triGonoMetrY
exercise 9a
1 a
c
e
2 a
c
e
3 a
c
e
4 a
c
e
5 a
c
e
6 a
b
c
d
e
f
7 a
b
exercise 9C
1 a
c
e
2 a
c
e
N45E
7
W
E
20
S20W
8
9
10
11
028T
28
W
exercise 9D navigation and

specification of locations
1 a 7.1 km north, 7.1 km east
b 171.0 m south, 469.8 m west
c 98.5 km south, 17.4 km east
d 208.4 m north, 1181.8 m east
2 a 295 m
b 111 km
c 30 m
d 5 km
3 a 14.1 km SW or 225T
b 1.4 km SE or 135T
c 2.65 km N 5054E or N50.9E
d 622.6 m N 8145W or N81.75W
N
106
W
16
106T
S
270T
W
4 a B N40W
270
E
60
N
W
80 080T
E
b
d
f
b
d
f
WSW
WNW
WSW
S10W or 190T
S78W or 258T
S78E or 102T
S40E S
S60E
40
c 180T
f 24730T
B S30E or 150T
C N30E or 030T
D S50W or 230T
E N42W or 318T
F S or 180T
A N10E
C N13W
D N67W
E N34W
F N50W
From B to P: N30W; From P to B: S30E
D
C
E
C
157
S
S
h
N70W
337T
70
E
157T
E
G
Bearings
SE
SE
SSW
N25E or 025T
N50W or 310T
N78E or 078T
b 220.5T
e 047T
h 175T
6 A NE or 045T
angles of elevation and
depression
1 a 159
b 3652
c 4020
d 2148
e 2634
f 45
2 2634
3 a 10 m
b 85 m
c 40 m
d 4m
4 18.5 metres
5 26 metres
6 a a = 4148 d = 62 m
b a = 4627 b = 15 m
c b = 3316 a = 1372 m
d 59
7 a Elevation 300
b Depression 8032
c Elevation 45
d Depression 142
8 4111
9 D
10 B
11 a 68 m
b 29 m
12 a 3840
b 6533
c 3840
13 a 4240 metres
b 1100 metres
14 a 14.9 metres
b 9.2 metres
c 14.9 metres
d A right-angled isosceles triangle
15 543
5 a 315T
d 145T
g 337 1 T
N
45
angles
4330
b 1245
2818
d 10616
27352
f 5620
40.25
b 122.33
82.10
d 16.82
247.5
f 76.83
0.646
b 0.535
7.207
d 0.957
0.537
f 0.520
6820, 1210
b 20155, 4245
1831, 1849
d 3882, 10658
52329, 16945
f 2196, 2060
2140
b 32
a = b = 4021
d 4030
143
f 5741
16230
5740
a = c = 4319, b = 13641
6720
32
a = 3937, b = 1748
C
A
exercise 9B
3 a
4 a
c
e
g
N40E
S
S33E
S60E
b
d
f
h
N22.5E
N10W
N6730E
SE
35
S
F
S35W N35E
395
S
057T
200
150
100
50
Contour maps
50
80
triangulation cosine and
sine rules
1 a 5389.2 m
b 4.9 km
c 891.5 km
d 316.0 m
2 a Tower B, 11.6 km
b Tower A, 6.5 km
3 a 14.8 km
b 22.7 km
4 Tower A ( 200 km)
5 a 253.6 m
b 42.6 km
c 38.0 km
6 a 12.0 km S 43.5E
b 801.8 km 222.6 T
7 a i 33 m
ii 64 m
b i 271 m
ii 249 m
c 247 m
d 39 m
8 8.1 km S 3129E
9 8593 m illion km
10 C
11 B
12 C
13 a BC
b 54
c 357.26 m
exercise 9F triangulation similarity
1 48 m
2 32 m
3 13.09 m
4 200 m
5 25.6 m
6 15.33 m
7 138 cm
8 C
396
Scale: 1 cm 100 m
1 a
60
40
120
80
20
B
A
100
200
300
Distance (m)
400
40
500
b
Scale: 1 cm 50 m
100
d
50
A
B
A
100
200
300
Distance (m)
400
500
100
Height (m)
exercise 9e
exercise 9G
Height (m)
5 a D
b A
6 a E
b C
7 a 271 m north, 71 m east
b 77.2 m north, 124.9 m east
c 19.1 km south, 3.5 km west
d 454.6 m south, 1246.9 m east
8 a 1427 m
b 1358 m
c 1970 m
d N4334E
9 a 82 km
b N3952E
c 68 km
10 15 km S E
11 288 m 169T
Height (m)
237T
57
A
152 cm
80.07 m
a i 362 m
ii 1800 m
iii 7 km
b i 722 m
ii 3600 m
iii 14 km
400
300
200
100
Scale: 1 cm 200 m
3 Map I:
80
b
60
40
Map II:
B
A
200
400
Distance (m)
600
4 Profile I: a
250
Height (m)
9
10
11
12
200
150
Profile II: a
100
50
A
B
100
200
Distance (m)
300
400
5 a iii
b iv
6 a C
7 3273 m
2 a
i
ii
iii
i
ii
i
ii
iii
i
ii
i
ii
iii
i
ii
i
ii
iii
i
ii
1000 m
1200 m
200 m
0.2, 11.3
0.167, 9.5
1500 m
500 m
1150 m
0.04, 2.3
0.12, 6.8
300 m
200 m
100 m
0.067, 349
0.2, 1119
400 m
400 m
800 m
0.05, 252
0.15, 832
c i
d ii
b C
Chapter reVieW
A
B
60
40
20
Scale: 1:10 000
MUltiple ChoiCe
1
4
7
10
13
A
B
C
A
D
2
5
8
11
14
E
A
C
A
B
3
6
9
12
E
C
A
E
4 a S6911E
b S8241W
5 a i 20 km
ii 45 km
b N4710E
6 a 26.8 km
b S5815W or 23815T
7 900 m
8 a
Short anSWer
1 p = 7720, q = 5120
2 a 20.1 m
b 8325
3 a i NW ii SE
b 4.5 km
c
C
B
14 737.04 m
15
200
150
100
50
0
500
1000
16 38
extenDeD reSponSe
1 a
b
c
4 km
b 2634
9 a 4.6
b 2 : 25
10 11.2 km
11 26750
12 14.72 m
13 Tower A = 21.01 km
Tower B = 12.77 km
d
2 a
b
3 a
b
8.660 mm
43.3 mm2, 259.8 mm2
3117.7 mm3
173.2 mm2
24.9 cm3
240 m
82 m
60 mm
10
312 mm
137 mm, 376 mm
A: flat
B: steep
i 4000 m
iii 1 cm 2000 m
i
iii
i
i
iii
i
iii
i
iii
i
ii
ii 10 mm
ii 1559 cm3
ii 1039.2 mm2
ii 153T
ii 394 mm
ii 4000 m
397
Exam practice 3 CHAPTERS 1 4, 7 9

Core and Module 2 geometry and trigonometry
15 minutes
1 A set of data has a lower quartile of 22 and an upper quartile of 27. Which of the following values
could be an outlier?
a 15
B 22
D 29
e 35
a
D
24
26
10
24
B
e
26
10
24
10
10 m
24 m
B
42
45
69
70
138
42
14.5 cm
A
4 A square has a diagonal of length 23 cm. The area of the square is closest to:
a 32.5 cm2
26 m
10
26
3 In the triangle shown at right, the size of BAC is closest to:

a
B
C
D
e

one mark.
C 24.5
2 In the triangle shown at right, the value of sin ( ) is:
M U ltip l e
C ho iC e
B 264.5 cm2
C 380.3 cm2
D 529 cm2
13.8 cm
e 1058 cm2
5 A can has a radius of 3.2 cm and a height of 8.5 cm. The length of the longest straw that can fit inside
the can is closest to:

a 7.9 cm
B 9.1 cm
C 10.6 cm
D 11.7 cm
e 14.9 cm
6 A triangular area of land is bound by three fences. Two fences are each 1.2 km long with an angle of
67 between them. The area of the land is closest to:
1.2 km
a 0.66 km2
B 0.72 km2
C 1.10 km2
D 1.33 km2
67
e 1.44 km2
7 In the diagram below, the volume of the small cone is 2 cm3. The volume of the shaded section is closest to:
a 6 cm3
C 45 cm3
e 54 cm3
B 18 cm3
D 52 cm3
1 cm
3 cm
8 A decorative glass vase is in the shape of a cube with a square-based
pyramid cut out of it, as shown at right. The side length of the cube
is 13 cm and the height of the pyramid is half the height of the cube.
The total surface area of the vase in square centimetres is closest to:
a 1014
B 1084
C 1183
D 1831
e 2197
9 For the contour map shown below the scale is 1 : 10 000.
A
50
100
150
Contour intervals are marked at 50 m. The average slope between A and B is closest to:
a 0.05
B 0.2
C 0.5
D 2
e 5
Exam practice 3
399
10 A hiker sets off on a bearing of 330 from her starting point for 2 km. She then heads due east for 5 km.
Her bearing from her starting point is closest to:

a 23
B 30
D 247
e 293
e x t enDeD
r e S ponS e
35 minutes
C 240
total marks = 10
1 The numbers of hikers in a national park each quarter are used to determine the seasonal indices shown
below.
Quarter
Seasonal index
1
1.21
2
0.94
3
a
4
0.79
a Determine the seasonal index, a, for quarter 3.

b During which quarter does the park usually have the most hikers visit?
c Find the deseasonalised figure if the number of hikers in quarter 2 was actually 1325.
Write your answer correct to the nearest whole number.

2 Ella and Ari are about to embark on a hike with their
daughter, Thea. They have purchased two new tents.
The larger one has the floor plan shown.
[1 mark]
[1 mark]
[1 mark]
1.1 m
1.9 m
a What area of ground, correct to 2 decimal places, will this tent cover?
b The shape of the tent is a semi-cylinder with two half-cones at either end as shown below.
i What is the greatest height of the tent?
ii What is the volume of the tent in m3,
correct to 2decimal places?
[2 marks]
[1 + 2 = 3 marks]
c The familys second tent is smaller but similar in shape to the larger tent.
i If the length of the second tent is 1.33 m, show that the length scale factor is 0.7.
ii Find the smaller tents volume in m3, correct to 2decimal places.
3 Ella, Ari and Thea spend one night camping next to their car before
[1 + 1 = 2 marks]
embarking on the hike. The campground is in the shape of a

triangle (ABC) with the dimensions shown.
22 m
Y
a Determine the size of YXC.
[1 mark]
105
b Determine the length of BC, correct to 1 decimal place.
[1 mark]
A
c Determine the size of ABC, correct to the nearest
X
degree.
[1 mark]
55 m
d Find the area of the camping ground, ABC correct to
1 decimal place.
[1 mark]
e Length YC is half length BC. The smaller area, YXC, cannot be
camped on as it is very muddy due to heavy rains. What area remains
for the family to camp on?
[1 mark]
4 Ella, Ari and Thea embark on their hike the next morning. They set out on a bearing of 027T for 2.5 km.
a How far north, in kilometres of their starting point are they at this stage? Write your answer

DiGital DoC
doc-10193
Solutions
exam practice 3
[1 mark]
b They then head on a bearing of 108 for another 1.8 km before pitching their tent.
i What is their distance, in kilometres from their starting point?
ii What is their bearing from their starting point, correct to the nearest
whole degree?
[1 + 1 = 2 marks]
total marks = 18
400
Chapter 10
Construction and
interpretation of graphs
diGital doC
doc-9474
10 Quick Questions
Chapter ContentS
10a
10B
10C
10d
10e
Constructing and interpreting straight-line graphs

Line segments and step functions
Simultaneous equations and break-even point
Interpreting non-linear graphs
Constructing non-linear relations and graphs
Constructing and interpreting

straight-line graphs
10a
Equations and graphs are used to study the relationship between two variables such as distance and
speed, tax payable and income, or radioactivity and time.
If a relationship exists between the variables, one can be said to be a function of the other. A function
can be described by a table, a rule or a graph. A function whose graph is a straight line is called a linear
function.
The general equation of a straight line is y = mx + c, where m is the gradient and c is the y-intercept.
y
(x2, y2)
y2
(x1, y1)
y1
rise
run
c
x1
x2
rise
run
or
m=
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
The y-intercept is the value of y where the graph cuts the y-axis.
The gradient (or slope) of a straight line is denoted by m where
m=
interaCtiVitY
int-0082
developing linear
graphs
Do more
Interact
with straight-line
graphs.
y2 y1
.
x 2 x1
y
Positive
gradient
x
Negative
gradient
A graph that rises as x increases
will have a positive gradient.
A graph that falls as x increases

will have a negative gradient.
Chapter 10 Construction and interpretation of graphs
401
Worked example 1
Consider the equation y = 3x + 4.

a What is the value of y when x = 2?
b What is the value of x when y = 13?
c Does the point (2, 4) lie on the graph of y = 3x + 4?
d Does the point (5, 19) lie on the graph of y = 3x + 4?
e State the value of the gradient and the y-intercept.
think
Write
a Substitute x = 2 into the equation.
a When x = 2,
b Substitute y = 13 into the equation and
b When y = 13,
y=32+4
= 10
13 = 3x + 4
3x = 9
x=3
solve for x.
c Substitute 2 for x and 4 for y. If this makes
the equation true then the point lies on the

line; otherwise it does not lie on the line.
d Substitute 5 for x and 19 for y. If this makes
the equation true then the point lies on the

line; otherwise it does not lie on the line.
e Compare the given equation with that of
c Does 4 = 3 2 + 4?
4 does not equal 10.

The equation is not true, therefore the point
(2, 4) does not lie on the line.
d Does 19 = 3 5 + 4?
The equation is true, therefore the point (5, 19)

does lie on the line.
e The gradient is 3 and the y-intercept is 4.
the general equation of a straight line,

y = mx + c. The gradient is the coefficient
of the x-term, m, and the y-intercept is the
constant term, c.
Worked example 2
Two points A (1, 7) and B (3, 13) lie on the same line. Use the points A and B to calculate the
gradient of the line.
think
1
Write the gradient formula and match points

A and B with (x1, y1) and (x2, y2).

evaluate.
Write
m=
y2 y1
x 2 x1
where (x1, y1) = (1, 7)

and (x2, y2) = (3, 13)
13 7
31
6
2
=3
The gradient is 3.
Sketching straight-line graphs

In previous years of study you have learned that only one straight line can be drawn through two distinct
points. Therefore, the graph of a straight line can be obtained by plotting and joining together any
two points on the line. Thus, to sketch a straight-line graph by hand, we first need to find the coordinates
of any two points on the line. This can be done in a number of different ways. The three most common
methods are outlined on the opposite page.
402
Gradient-intercept method
y
This method is used if the equation is in y = mx + c form.

1. The first point plotted is the y-intercept, given by the value
of c. Plot it on a set of axes.
rise
2. The gradient is given by m =
. Write the gradient as a
run
fraction and identify the values of the rise and the run.
3. To obtain the second point, start from the y-intercept and
move up (or down) and across, as suggested by the gradient.
4. Join the two points together with a straight line and label the
graph.
run
Point 2
rise
c
Point 1
x
x- and y-intercept method

y
This method is used if the equation is in ax + by = c form, or

if you are required to show both the x- and y-intercepts.
1. If a point is on the y-axis, its x-coordinate is 0. To find
the y-intercept, substitute 0 for x and solve the resultant
equation.
2. If a point is on the x-axis, its y-coordinate is 0. To find
the x-intercept, substitute 0 for y and solve the resultant
equation.
3. Plot the x-intercept and the y-intercept on a set of axes.
4. Join the two points together with a straight line and label
the graph.
y-intercept
x-intercept
x
Sketching a line over a required interval

If a graph needs to be sketched between two given x-values, its
end points must be shown. Since only two points are to sketch a
line, we can obtain the coordinates of the end points and join them
together. To construct a graph of a straight line between a and b,
follow these steps:
1. Rearrange the equation to make y the subject.
a
2. Substitute each of the two given x-values (that is, a and b) into
the equation and find corresponding values of y.
3. Plot the end points on a set of axes.
4. Join the two points together with a straight line and label the graph.
The following worked example illustrates the use of these three methods.
Worked example 3
Sketch the graph of each of the following equations.

a y = 3x + 4
b y=
2
3
tUtorial
eles-1295
Worked example 3
c 2x + 3y = 6
d x y = 3 between x = 2 and x = 6.
think
a 1 The equation is in y = mx + c form, so use the
gradient-intercept method. State the value of

the y-intercept.
2
Write the gradient as a fraction and identify

the values of the rise and the run.
Write/draW
a y = 3x + 4
c = 4, so the y-intercept is (0, 4)

rise
m = run
=
3
1
403
Draw a set of axes and plot the y-intercept.

To obtain the second point, start from the
y-intercept and move up and across as
suggested by the positive gradient; that is,
3units up and 1 unit right. The second point
is (1, 7).
y
8 run = 1
7
(1, 7)
rise = 3 6
y = 3x + 4
5
4
Join the two points with a straight line and

label the graph.
(0, 4)
3
2
1
0
b 1 The equation is in y = mx + c form, so use the
by=
gradient-intercept method. State the value of

the y-intercept. Since the value of c is 0, the
line passes through the origin.
c = 0, so the y-intercept is (0, 0)
Write the gradient as a fraction and identify

the values of the rise and the run. Note that the
negative sign always belongs to the rise.
m=
Draw a set of axes and plot the y-intercept.

To obtain the second point, start from
the origin and move down and across as
suggested by the negative gradient; that is,
2 units down and 3units right. The second
point is (3, 2).
Join the two points with a straight line and
label the graph.
c 1 The equation is in ax + by = c form, so find the
rise
run
2
3
y
3
2
1
3 2 1 0
1
rise = 2
2
3
4
(0, 0)
1 2 3 4 5 x
(3, 2)
run = 3
y = 2 x
3
c 2x + 3y = 6
x- and y-intercepts.
2
Find the y-intercept by substituting x = 0 into

the equation and solving.
2(0) + 3y = 6
3y = 6
y=2
State the coordinates of the y-intercept.
The coordinates of the y-intercept are (0, 2).
Find the x-intercept by substituting y = 0 into

the equation and solving.
2x + 3y = 6
2x + 3(0) = 6
2x = 6
x=3
State the coordinates of the x-intercept.
The coordinates of the x-intercept are (3, 0).
Plot the intercepts on a set of axes and join

them together with a straight line. Label the
graph.
y
5
4
3
(0, 2) 2
1
3 2 1 0
404
2x + 3y = 6
(3, 0)
1 2 3 4 x
d 1 The graph needs to be sketched between two
x-values. Rearrange the equation to make y the

subject.
Substitute each of the two given x-values
(that is, 2 and 6) into the equation and find
corresponding values of y.
State the coordinates of the end points.
Plot the end points on a set of axes and join

them with a straight line. Label the graph.
dxy=3
y
= x + 3
y=x3
When x = 2:
y=x3
= 2 3
= 5
When x = 6:
y=x3
=63
=3
The end points are (2, 5) and (6, 3).

y
4
3
2
1
Note: Do not extend the line beyond the end

points.
0
321
1
2
3
4
5
(2, 5) 6
(6, 3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
xy=3
applications of straight-line graphs

Many real-life situations involve variables whose relationship is linear and hence can be described by
a linear rule and represented graphically by a straight line.
When modelling a linear relationship, remember that the y-intercept represents the value of the
function when x = 0. In most situations, it represents the initial (or original) value of something, a fixed
cost or flag fall.
The gradient represents the rate of change of the y-value with respect to x. It shows the change
(increase or decrease) in y, as x increases by 1 unit. For example, let the equation V=1000 200t
describe the volume (in litres) of water in a tub t minutes after a plug is removed. The y-intercept shows
that the initial amount of water in the tub is 1000 litres. The gradient means that the volume of water
decreases (since the gradient is negative) at a rate of 200 litres every minute.
Worked example 4
Mikaela works as a car salesperson. She is paid a retainer of $150 a week and receives 2%
commission on her sales.
a How much does Mikaela earn in a week in which she sold cars worth $40 000 in total?
b Construct a table to describe the relationship between earnings and sales using sales of $0,
$10 000, $ 20 000 and $80 000.
c Write an equation that relates earnings (E) to sales (S).
d State the value of the gradient and the y-intercept and interpret their meaning.
e Draw a graph of the relationship between earnings and sales. That is, draw a graph of E versus S.
think
a Calculate earnings by finding the sum of the
retainer and the commission.

2
2% = 100 = 0.02
b For each of the four values of sales, repeat the

working of a above.
Write/draW
a Earnings = retainer + commission
= retainer + 2% of sales
= 150 + 2% 40 000
= 150 + 0.02 40 000
= 150 + 800 = 950
Mikaela earns $950.
Sales
0
10 000
20 000
80 000
Earnings
150
350
550
1750
405
c Earnings = retainer + 2% of sales
c Use the pattern seen in a and b to relate E and S.
E = 150 + 0.02 S
or E = 0.02S + 150
d The gradient is 0.02 and the y-intercept is
150.
Writing the relationship in words may assist in

finding the equation.
1
Compare the equation relating earnings to sales

with that of the general equation of a straight
line, y = mx + c. The gradient is the coefficient of
the x-term, m, and the y-intercept is the constant
term, c.
Interpret the meaning of the gradient and the
y-intercept.
The gradient represents the commission

rate. It shows that for every $100 worth of
sales, Mikaela earns $2 in commission. The
y-interceptrepresents the value of the retainer;
that is, the amount Mikaela is paid if no sales
are made.
e Earnings depends on sales. Thus sales is the
independent variable and goes on the horizontal axis.

Do not crowd the axes by writing values in thousands
use a legend and write only the number of multiples
of ten thousand.
E
2000
Earnings ($)
1600
1200
800
400
0
2 4 6 8 S
Sales ( $10 000)
extrapolation and interpolation

Two terms used widely in interpreting data are extrapolation and interpolation. Extrapolation means to
examine the relationship between the variables by extending it beyond the data. Interpolation means to infer
the relationship between distinct data points. The following example should make these meanings clear.
Worked example 5
The tension (measured in newtons) in a spring is linearly related to the extension of the spring
(measured in centimetres). Some values relating tension (T ) and extension (x) are given:
x
T
Units: 3 & 4
3
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
5
125
7
175
a Plot these data.

b By extrapolating from the data, predict the tension when the extension is 10 cm.
c By interpolating, predict the tension when the extension is 4 cm.
think
a Plot the data on a set of axes that shows x-values up
to 10. Draw a line through these points, extending it

beyond the given values.
Write/draW
a
Tension (newtons)
AOS:
2
50
T
250
200
150
100
50
0
406
2 4 6 8 10
Extension (cm)
b When x = 10, T = 250
b Extrapolation involves inference beyond the data range.
Use the graph to find T when x is 10.

c Interpolation involves inference between the data points.
Use the graph to find T when x is 4.
When the spring is stretched 10 cm, the

tension is 250 newtons.
c When x = 4, T = 100
When the spring is stretched 4 cm, the
tension is 100 newtons.
Constructing and interpreting

exercise 10a
1 We 1 Consider the equation of the line y = 2x + 5.

c Does the point (3, 12) lie on the line?
d State the value of the gradient and the y-intercept.
diGital doC
doc-9475
Substitution
into a formula
2 Consider the equation of the line y = 2x + 4.

3 Consider the equation of the line 2y + 3x = 12.
4 We2 Two points P (2, 5) and Q (4, 13) lie on the same line.
Calculate the gradient of the line.
diGital doC
doc-9476
SkillSHEET 10.1
Gradient
5 Consider the equation of the line 2y + x = 8.

d Using the two points whose coordinates were found in a and b, calculate the gradient.
6 Calculate the gradient of the line shown in each of the following.
b
a
c
y
y
y
(4, 5)
(0, 3)
(2, 8)
(5, 5)
(2, 3)
(3, 1)
x
(3, 2)
diGital doC
doc-9477
SkillSHEET 10.2
Sketching straight-line
graphs using the
gradient-intercept
method
7 We 3 Sketch the graphs of the following functions.

a 3x + y = 12
b y = 3x 4
c y = 2x + 8
d y 3x = 12
3
4
e y = 2x
f y= x
g y = 2x + 1 between x = 2 and x = 2
h 4x 3y = 12 between x = 2 and x = 4
8 mC The graphs of the following lines are shown at right.

i y+x=4
iii y + x + 4 = 0
ii y = x + 4
iv y = x 4
The best match between graphs P to S and equations i to iv is:

a P iv
Q i
R iii
S ii
B P i
Q iii
R ii
S iv
C P iv
Q i
R ii
S iii
d P iv
Q iii
R i
S ii
e P ii
Q iv
R i
S iii
P
Q
x
R
S
407
9 We 4 Greta sells boats and she is paid $275 per week plus 3% of her weekly sales.
a How much does Greta receive if the value of her weekly sales is $12 000?
b Construct a table to show Gretas weekly pay for the following values of weekly sales: $5000,
$10 000, $15 000 a nd $20 000.

c Write an equation that relates her weekly pay ( P) and the value of her weekly sales (S ).
d Draw a graph of the relationship between weekly pay and weekly sales. That is, draw a graph of P
versus S. Place S on the horizontal axis.

e State the value of the gradient and the y-intercept, and interpret their meaning.
10 An object that falls freely due to gravity increases its speed (S) by 9.8 m/s each second. Assume that at
the start the speed of the object was 0.

a How fast is the object travelling after 3 seconds?
b How long has the object been falling when its speed is 78.4 metres per second?
c If t stands for the number of seconds the object has been falling, write a formula that relates S to t.
d Draw a graph of S versus t.
11 Visa car rentals charge $75 per day plus $15 per hundred kilometres.
a How much would it cost to rent a car for one day if the car travelled 345 km?
b The bill for one days rental came to $142.50. How many kilometres did the car travel?
c Sketch a graph of the cost of renting the car for one day (C ) versus the number of kilometres
travelled (d ).
12 We 5 For a farm water tank, the volume of water in the tank (V ) is related linearly to the depth of
water in the tank (D) for values of D greater than 450 mm.
diGital doC
doc-9478
making predictions
Depth (mm)
Volume (L)
500
2500
700
4500
1000
7500
a Plot these data using suitable axes.

b By extrapolating from the data, predict the depth needed to give a volume of 13 000 litres.
c By interpolating from the data, predict the volume when the depth of the water is 600mm.
13 mC A psychology experiment is testing the relationship between the number of errors (n) made by
a child on a task and the time taken to complete the task in seconds (t). The results of five trials of the
experiment are given in the table below.
If the number of errors made is linearly related to the time taken, which experiment does not fit the
pattern?
Experiment
Time taken (seconds)
Number of errors
a
30
10
B
45
6
C
36
9
d
48
7
e
42
8
14 Janine sells cosmetics at a department store. She knows she is paid a retainer plus commission on sales
but she is not sure of the exact rates. For three weeks she records her wages and the value of product
she sold during that week:
Week
1
2
3
Sales
$1200
$750
$880
Wages
$494
$440
$455.60
a In week 4 her sales totalled $1000. Predict her wage for that week.
b Write a formula to calculate Janines weekly wage in terms of her weekly sales.
15 In a one-day international cricket match, each team bats for 50 overs. After 20 overs Australias score
had reached 108 runs. If the target for Australia is 250 runs at the end of 50 overs:
a how many runs per over does the team need to score for the remaining 30 overs?
b write an equation to relate the score (S) to the number of overs completed (n).
c The graph of S versus n could be a straight line. What would be the gradient of that straight line?
408
16 Taxi hire charges are shown below.
$2.80 flag fall

$2.50 per kilometre
a
b
c
d
e
Calculate the cost of travelling 15 km in a taxi.

If the taxi fare was $20.80, how far did the taxi travel?
Write an equation relating the fare (F ) to the distance (d ).
Draw a graph relating F to d.
What is the slope of this graph?
10B
line segments and step functions
In this section we consider graphs which are not straight lines but are made from straight lines. We also
consider graphs which are not straight lines but discrete sets of points.
Worked example 6
When a real estate agent sells a property, he earns commission at the following rate:
1.5% on the first $20 000
0.9% on the remainder.
a Calculate the commission earned on sales of:
i $10 000
ii $20 000
iii $30 000
iv $40 000.
b Draw a line segment graph of commission (C) versus the value of the sales (S) up to a sales value
of $40 000.
c Give a reason for the difference of the slopes of the two segments.
think
i For any amount up to and including $20 000,
the commission is 1.5% of the amount.
ii The commission is 1.5% of the amount.
iii $30 000 is more than $20 000, so calculate
1.5% on $20 000 plus 0.9% on the remainder

over $20 000; that is, $10 000.
iv $40 000 is more than $20 000, so calculate
1.5% on $20 000 plus 0.9% on the remainder

over $20 000; that is, $20 000.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch a
video about
segment graphs.
Write/draW
i Commission on $10 000
= 1.5% of 10 000
= 0.015 10 000
= $150
ii Commission on $20 000
= 1.5% of 20 000
= 0.015 20 000
= $300
iii Commission on $30 000
= 1.5% of $20 000 + 0.9% of $10 000
= 0.015 20 000 + 0.009 10 000
= 300 + 90
= $390
iv Commission on $40 000
= 1.5% of 20 000 + 0.9% of 20 000
= 0.015 20 000 + 0.009 20 000
= 300 + 180
= $480
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
409
b 1 Since the commission rate changes when sales
c The slope of the line is determined by its gradient.
Commission ($)
exceed $20 000, the graph will consist of two

segments. One segment for all sales up to and
including $20 000 and the other for sales of more
than $20 000 and up to and including $40 000.
The starting point of the first segment is (0, 0)
(since there is no commission when there are
no sales). The end point of this segment is
(20 000, 300) (as was found in part a (ii)). Plot
these points and join them with a straight line.
The second segment starts where the first
segment ends. The end point of the second
segment is (40 000, 480) (as was found in
part a (iv)). Plot this end point and join it to the
first segment.
500
480
400
300
200
100
0
10 20 30 40
Sales ( $1000)
c The gradient of each line segment represents
In this case, the gradient is the rate of commission.

When the sales exceed $20 000, the commission rate
decreases this results in a line segment that is less
steep.
the commission rates. Since the rates on

values lower than $20 000 differ from the
rates on values greater than $20 000, the
gradients also differ.
Worked example 7
An electrician charges the rates shown.

a Calculate the charges for service calls of
the following durations:
10 minutes, 25 minutes,
40 minutes, 55 minutes,
70 minutes and 85 minutes.
b Draw a step graph of charges (C ) versus
the time of the service call in minutes (t)
for calls of up to 120 minutes.
$35 call-out fee plus $30

per half hour or part thereof.
think
a Part thereof means that whether the repairs take
Write/draW
Time
10 min
25 min
40 min
55 min
70 min
85 min
3minutes, 10 minutes or 30 minutes, you are charged

for 30 minutes. For a service call up to 30 minutes, the
electrician charges $35 call-out fee plus $30. For a service
call over 30 minutes long and up to 60 minutes, the charge
is $35 call-out fee plus 2 lots of $30. Finally, for a service
call over 60 minutes and up to 90 minutes, the charge is $3
call-out fee plus 3 lots of $30.
is the independent variable. The graph consists of four
horizontal sections (steps). This reflects the fact that
the fixed fee is charged for any amount of time up to
and including 30 minutes; then a different fixed fee for
any amount of time above 30 minutes and up to and
including 60 minutes, and so on. Note that where the end
point of the step is included in the step, it is shown as a
full circle (closed circle), whereas if the end point is not
included, it is shown as an empty circle (open circle).
410
Charge
35 + 30 = $65
35 + 30 = $65
35 + 2 30 = $95
35 + 2 30 = $95
35 + 3 30 = $125
35 + 3 30 = $125
155
Charge ($)
b Draw the graph. Place t along the horizontal axis as it
tUtorial
eles-1296
Worked example 7
125
95
65
30 60 90 120
t (minutes)
In the previous example, the independent variable, time (t), was a continuous variable; that is,
t can take any values 2, 15.5, 87 and so on. In the next example we consider a situation where
the independent variable can take whole number values only. A variable that is not continuous is called
discrete. If the data are discrete, the points on the graph are not joined together.
Worked example 8
A bakery sells bread rolls for 50 cents each or $2.50 for 6.

a Calculate the cost of 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, 12, 13, 17, 18 and 19 bread rolls.
b Sketch this information on a graph for up to 24 rolls.
think
Write/draW
a Calculate the cost for each number of bread
Number
of rolls
4
rolls. If the number of rolls is above 5, it can

be formed by combining pack(s) of 6 rolls and
single rolls. For example, 7 rolls can be bought
as a pack of 6 plus 1 single roll; 17 rolls as
2packs of 6 plus 5 single rolls etc.
bread rolls as the independent variable.

Note that the points on the graph are not
joined together as the data are discrete.
4 50c = $2.00
5 50c = $2.50
$2.50
6
7
$2.50 + 1 50c = $3.00
11
$2.50 + 5 50c = $5.00
12
2 $2.50 = $5.00
13
2 $2.50 + 1 50c = $5.50
17
2 $2.50 + 5 50c = $7.50
18
3 $2.50 = $7.50
19
3 $2.50 + 1 50c = $8.00
10
Cost ($)
b Sketch the information using the number of
Cost
8
6
4
2
0
exercise 10B
8 12 16 20 24
Number of rolls
1 We 6 Suppose a real estate agent is paid commission at the following rates: 1.5% on the first $40 000
and 1% on the remainder.

a Calculate the commission due on sales of $20 000, $30 000, $40 000, $50 000 and $60 000.
b Draw a graph of commission (C ) versus sales (S ).
c Give a reason for the difference of the slopes of the two segments.
2 The amount of electricity used around the home is measured in kilowatt hours (kWh). A light bulb left
on for 10 hours will consume about 1 kWh of power. The local power supplier charges at the following
rates.
Power
First 400 kWh
Cost per kWh ($)

0.20
Next 1000 kWh
0.15
Remaining kWh
0.10
411
a Copy and complete the following table by calculating the cost due for each of the consumptions.
Consumption (kWh)
200
400
600
1000
1500
Power bill ($)
b Using the data in the table, draw a graph of power bill versus consumption.
3 We 7 An electrician charges at the following rates:
$45 call out fee plus

$35 per half hour or part thereof.
a Calculate the charges for the following service calls: 20 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 60 minutes,
80 minutes and 90 minutes.
b Draw a graph of charges (C ) versus time of the service call in minutes (t) for calls of up to 90 minutes.
4 A mobile phone company charges users a rate of 15 cents for each completed 20 seconds of the call.
This means a call of less than 20 seconds is free.

a Draw a table with the following headings and complete it for calls of 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80,
and 90 seconds.
Length of call (seconds)
Cost (cents)
b Draw the graph of cost versus length of call for calls of up to 90 seconds.
5 We 8 The Explorindo Travel Company specialises in surfing tours of remote islands in Indonesia. They
will take individuals but prefer to deal with groups of people. They have the following charges for a
holiday package:
1 person
$900
2 people
$1650
Each extra person
$600
a Draw a table with the following headings and complete it for costs for 1, 2, 3, 6, 8 and 10people.
Number of people
Total cost ($)
b Draw the graph of total cost versus number of people. (Include only the number of people
discussed in part a.)
6 mC Which of the following is clearly a discrete variable?
a the time taken for a phone call
C the commission earned on sales
e a persons weight
B the number of CDs in a collection

d the power consumed by a hot-water jug
7 mC On a particular visit, a tradesperson charges the householder $100. It was noted he arrived
at11.30am. Which of the following departure times could be correct?

a 11.38 am
B 11.48 am
C 12.05 pm
d 12.20 pm
$50 call-out fee
$25 per 15 minutes or part thereof
412
e 12.35 pm
8 This is the 200304 tax table.
Taxable income
Tax on this income
$1$6000
Nil
$6001$21 600
17 cents for each $1 over $6000
$21 601$52 000
$2652 + 30 cents for each $1 over $21 600
$52 001$62 500
$11 772 + 42 cents for each $1 over $52 000
$62 501 and over
Use this tax table to calculate the amount of tax paid in 2004 by people with taxable incomes of:
a $4000
e $40 000
b $7000
f $60 000
c $18 000
g $100 000
d $35 000
h $200 000.
9 a Using values calculated in question 8 and any other values, draw the graph of income tax versus
taxable income.
b Use the graph to find the income tax payable on a taxable income of:
i $24 000
ii $95 000.
10 This is the 200809 tax table.
Taxable income
Tax on this income
$0$6000
Nil
$6001$34 000
15 cents for each $1 over $6000
$34 001$80 000
$4200 + 30 cents for each $1 over $34 000
$80 001$180 000
Over $180 000
Use this tax table to calculate the amount of tax paid in 2009 by people with taxable incomes of:
a $4000
e $40 000
b $7000
f $60 000
c $18 000
g $100 000
d $35 000
h $200 000.
11 a Use the values calculated in question 10 to draw a graph of income tax versus taxable income.
b Use the graph to find the income tax payable on a taxable income of:
i $24 000
ii $95 000.
c Compare your answers to questions 9b and 11b.
12 What situation could be described by the following graphs? In your response, clearly identify the
variables used on both axes and explain how the graph represents that situation. For example, the first
graph could measure the profit versus the number of units of production.
a
13 Fix-it-fast is a photocopier repair service for schools in
125
Call-out fees ($)
North-central Victoria. The call-out charge depends on the

distance the repair person has to travel. The call-out fees
for distances up to 85 km are shown on the following
graph.
a i What is the call-out fee for a distance of 40 km?
ii What is the maximum distance travelled for a
call-out fee of $50?
A call-out fee of $125 is charged for schools at a
distance of more than 85 km but less than 120 km.
b Copy the previous graph and add this information to it.
100
75
50
25
0
20
40 60 80 100 120 x
Distance (km)
diGital doC
doc-9479
WorkSHEET 10.1
413
Simultaneous equations and

break-even point
10C
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
In this chapter, we have seen that when an equation such as y = 3x 4 is

graphed it forms a straight line. Each point on the line will have an x- and a
y-coordinate and these values of x and y satisfy the equation. The reverse is
also true. Each pair, x and y, which satisfy the equation will be the coordinates of
a point on the line.
y
(3, 5)
x
y = 3x 4
Solving linear simultaneous equations
y y = 3x 4
16 (6, 14) y = x + 8
12
8
4
If we draw the graph of y = 3x 4 and y = x + 8 on the same set of axes

the result is shown at right.
The point where the lines intersect (6, 14) is called the simultaneous
solution because x=6 and y = 14 satisfies both equations.
In this example we found the simultaneous solution graphically; that is,
from the graph. It is also possible to find the simultaneous solution
algebraically, either by the substitution method or the elimination method.
2 4 6 8 x
Worked example 9
Find the simultaneous solutions to these equations using algebraic methods.

a y = 3x 4 and y = x + 8
b 2x + 3y = 13 and x 4y = 1
think
a 1 Since both equations start with y =, solve using
Write
the substitution method. Use equation[1] to

substitute for y in equation [2].
[1]
[2]
[3]
3x x = 8 + 4
2x = 12
x=6
Solve equation [3].
Find y by substituting x = 6 into one of the

original equations.
Substitute x = 6 into [2]:
State the solution.
The solution is (6, 14).
y = mx + c format, the substitution method

could be used. However, it will be more
efficient to use the elimination method in
this case.
414
y = 3x 4
y=x+8
Substitute [1] into [2]
3x 4 = x + 8
b 1 If one of the equations was rearranged to a
tUtorial
eles-1297
Worked example 9
y=6+8
= 14
2x + 3y = 13
x 4y = 1
[1]
[2]
Multiply equation [2] by 2 so that the

x-coefficients of both equations are the same.
[2] 2:
Eliminate x by subtracting [3] from [1].
[1] [3]:
Solve to find y.
Find x by substituting y = 1 into one of the

equations (into equation [2] is easiest).
Sub. y = 1 into [2]: x 4 1 = 1

x4=1
x=5
State the solution.
The solution is (5, 1).
2x 8y = 2
11y = 11
y=1
[3]
Worked example 10
Find the simultaneous solution of y = 3x 4 and y = x + 2 using a graphical method.

think
Write/draW
Draw both graphs on the one set of axes.
y
y = 3x 4
8
7
y=x+2
6
5
(3, 5)
4
3
2
1
x
0
321
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2
3
4
The simultaneous solution is the point where

the graphs intersect.
The point of intersection is (3, 5) so the

simultaneous solution is (3, 5) or x = 3, y = 5.
Break-even analysis
The aim of most businesses is to make a profit. The profit depends on the costs associated with
the business (labour, raw materials and plant) and its revenue (the money it earns through sales). It
represents the difference between the revenue and the costs.
Units: 3 & 4
Profit = revenue costs
The diagram at right shows the graph of a cost function and a

revenue function, drawn on the same set of axes. The point of
intersection of the two lines represents the point at which costs
and revenue are equal; that is, the break-even point. To the left of
the break-even point, the cost line is above the revenue line. This
means that the costs are higher than the revenue and will result in a
loss. To the right of the break-even point, the cost line is below the
revenue line. This means that costs are lower than the revenue and
will result in a profit.
Costs and revenue ($)
It is evident that a profit will occur if the revenue exceeds the costs. However, if the costs exceed the
revenue, a loss will result. Finally, if the costs equal the revenue, there will be neither a profit nor a loss.
This is referred to as a break-even point.
Revenue > costs

(profit) Revenue
Costs >
revenue
(loss)
Costs
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Break-even point
Worked example 11
The cost associated with publishing a particular maths book (C ) is given by

C = 12n + 24 000
where n represents the number of books. The revenue (R) made from
selling n books is given by R = 28n. Both C and R are in dollars.
a Copy and complete the following table.
Number of books (n)
500
1000
1500
2000
Costs ($)
tUtorial
eles-1298
Worked example 11
Revenue ($)
b Sketch the graph of the costs (C ) versus number (n), and the graph of revenue (R) versus
number (n) on the same set of axes.
c How many books need to be published and sold so that the revenue equals the costs?
d State the coordinates of the break-even point and interpret its meaning.
415
Write/draW
think
a 1 Write the equations for the costs (C ) and the
revenue (R).
Calculate the value of C and R for each value

of n given in the table.
Use the results from the calculations in step 2

to complete the table.
b The number of books (n) is the independent
variable, so place it on the horizontal axis. The

graphs of the cost and revenue functions are
straight lines, so they can be constructed by plotting
any two points from the table then joining them
with a straight line.
R = 28n
When n = 500,
C = 12 500 + 24 000
= $30 000
R = 28 500
= $14 000
When n = 1000,
C = 12 1000 + 24 000
= $36 000
R = 28 1000
= $28 000
When n = 1500,
C = 12 1500 + 24 000
= $42 000
R = 28 1500
= $42 000
When n = 2000,
C = 12 2000 + 24 000
= $48 000
R = 28 2000
= $56 000
Number of
books (n)
Costs ($)
Revenue ($)
500
30 000
14 000
1000
36 000
28 000
1500
42 000
42 000
2000
48 000
56 000
b
Costs and revenue ( $1000)
a C = 12n + 24 000,
$
60
50
R = 28n
C = 12n + 24 000
40
30
20
10
0
500 1000 1500 2000

Number of books
c From the table (or the graph), we can see that when c 1500 books need to be published and sold so
n = 1500, the costs and the revenue are both the

same.
d The break-even point is the point where the costs
equal the revenue. On the graph, it is the point of

intersection of the two lines.
that the revenue equals the costs.

d The coordinates of the break-even point
are (1500, 42 000). The cost associated

with publishing and the revenue made from
selling1500 books is $42 000. If less than
1500 books are sold, the costs are higher than
the revenue (loss). If more than 1500 books
are sold, the revenue is higher than the costs
(profit).
Note that the break-even point in the previous worked example could have been found using a
CAScalculator or algebraically.
416
Simultaneous equations and

break-even point
exercise 10C
1 We9
Find the simultaneous solution, algebraically, to:
a y = 4x 4
b y = 3x 4
y = 2x
c 2y + x = 5
y = 2x 2
3y 2x = 4
2 We 10 Find the simultaneous solution of each pair of linear equations in question 1 using a graphical
diGital doC
doc-9480
Spreadsheet
Simultaneous
equations algebraic
method
method.
3 Consider the phone connection plans shown.
Plan A: $15 monthly fee plus 60 cents a minute for calls.

Plan B: $25 monthly fee plus 30 cents a minute for calls.
Call time (minutes)

10
20
30
40
Cost ($) Plan A
Cost ($) Plan B
b Sketch the graph of cost versus time for each of the two plans on the same set of axes.
c How many minutes of calls would you need to make for both plans to cost the same?
4 We 11 The cost of manufacturing toys (C ) is related to the number of toys produced (n), by the
formula C = 600 + 3n. The revenue (R) made from selling n toys is R = 7n. Both C and R are in dollars.
Number of toys
50
100
150
200
Cost ($)
Revenue ($)
b Sketch the graph of cost (C ) versus number (n) and the graph of revenue (R) versus number (n)
on the same set of axes.

c How many toys need to be produced before revenue equals cost?
d State the coordinates of the break-even point and interpret its meaning.
5 The cost of manufacturing electronic components (C ) is related to the number of components produced (n),
by the formula C = 6000 + 2.5n. The revenue (R) made from selling ncomponents is R = 4.5n 8000. Both
C and R are in dollars.
Number of components
5 000
10 000
15 000
20 000
Cost ($)
Revenue ($)
417
b Sketch the graph of cost (C ) versus number (n) and the graph of revenue (R) versus number (n) on
the same set of axes.

c How many components need to be produced before revenue equals cost?
6 A new employee, whose job it is to sell a software package, is offered two different salary plans by
Minitech:
Plan A: $400 per week plus $25 for each package sold
Plan B: $150 per week plus $45 for each package sold.
Number of packages sold
5
10
15
20
Salary ($) Plan A
Salary ($) Plan B
b Sketch the graph of salary versus number of packages sold for both Plan A and Plan B on the
same set of axes.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with non-linear
graphs.
7 mC The statement that best matches the graph is:

a
B
C
d
e
revenue exceeds costs when more than 50 units are sold

revenue exceeds costs when less than 50 units are sold
revenue exceeds costs when more than 1500 units are sold
revenue exceeds costs when less than 1500 units aresold
revenue exceeds costs when exactly 50 units are sold.
8 A factory producing mattresses finds that the equation linking
Revenue ($) or Cost ($)
diGital doC
doc-9481
WorkSHEET 10.2
c How many packages need to be sold before Plan B is the better choice?
1800
1500
1200
900
600
300
Cost
Revenue
cost in dollars (C) and the number of mattresses produced (m) is

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
C = 800m.
Number of units
a What is the cost of producing 10 mattresses?
b How many mattresses could be produced for $124 000?
If all mattresses are sold, the revenue in dollars (R) from the sale of m mattresses is R = 1800m.
c Draw graphs of C and R on the same set of axes for 0 m 200.
d Determine the number of mattresses which would need to be sold for the factory to break even.
e From the two equations given, write a profit equation (P).
f Calculate the profit if 175 mattresses were produced and sold.
10d
interpreting non-linear graphs
Why are graphs used so widely in papers, magazines, journals, in education, in government, and in
sales and marketing? Graphs are used because they have the capacity to convey a significant amount of
information effectively.
To get the most from a graph, a user needs to learn to read and interpret information presented graphically.
In this section, we will look at non-linear graphs. A non-linear graph is a graph which is not a straight line.
Worked example 12
Distance (km)
The graph shown below right shows the distance a cyclist is from her home
over a period of 120 minutes.
a How far from her home was the cyclist
at the start of the time period?
12
b At what speed did the cyclist travel
10
for the first 30 minutes?
8
c Describe the motion of the cyclist
6
after 45 minutes.
4
d What was the cyclists furthest distance
2
from home?
e When did the cyclist turn for home?
0
15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120
f How long did the cyclist take to get
Time (min)
home on the way back?
418
tUtorial
eles-1299
Worked example 12
think
a The start of the time period means t = 0 min.
The graph shows a distance of 6 km when t= 0.

distance
.
time
The cyclist travels from 6 km to 12 km in 30 minutes
or 0.5 hour.
Write
a The cyclist was 6 km from home at the start
of the time period.

distance
time
6 km
=
0.5 h
= 12 km/h
b Use the relationship: speed =
b Speed =
c Between t = 30 min and t = 75 min the distance from
c At 45 minutes into the time period, the
home remains at 12 km.

d Observe the furthest distance from home from
cyclist is not moving.

d The furthest distance from home is 12 km.
the graph.
e From the graph it can be seen that the distance the
e The cyclist turns for home after 75 min.
f The cyclist began travelling home when t = 75 min.
f Time taken to travel home = (120 75) min
cyclist is from home decreases when t = 75 min.

The cyclist reached home when t = 120 min.
= 45 min
The value of a car originally worth $30 000 decreases over time.
The graph drawn at right describes the value of the car as a
percentage of its starting price.
a What is the value of the car, in percentage terms, after
5years?
b The half-life is the time taken for the value to decrease
by half. How long does it take for the car to lose half its
original value?
c How long does it take for the car to fall in value from
50% of its original value to 25% of its original value?
d Estimate, in dollar terms, the value of the car after 30 years.
think
a Read directly from the graph.
Percentage of
original value
Worked example 13
100
80
60
40
20
0
5 10 15 20 25 30 35
Time (years)
Write
a The value of the car after 5 years is
approximately 70% of its original value.

b Half means 50%. Reading from the graph, it takes
10 years for the value of the car to fall to 50%.

c From the graph, the car is worth 50% of the original
price at t = 10 and it is worth 25% at t = 20. Note

that the half-life is also the time taken to fall from
50% to 25%.
d As the half-life is 10 years, use this to calculate the
value after 30 years. That is, after 3 half-lives.

Calculate 12.5% of $30 000 to obtain the value of
the car in dollar terms.
b The time taken to fall in value by 50%
(half-life) is 10 years.
c Time taken to fall from 50% to 25% of
original value
= 20 10 years
= 10 years.
d Half-life = 10 years
Therefore, the value after:

10 years is 50%
20 years is 25%
30 years is 12.5%.
The value after 30 years
= 12.5% of $30 000
= 0.125 $30 000
= $3750
419
exercise 10d
from her home over a period of 120 minutes.

a How far from her home was the cyclist at the start of
the time period?
b At what speed did the cyclist travel for the first
30minutes?
c Describe the motion of the cyclist after 7 minutes.
d What was the cyclists furthest distance from home?
e When did the cyclist begin to travel home?
f How long did the cyclist take to get home?
g What was the average speed of the cyclist on the journey
home?
Distance (km)
1 We 12 The graph at right gives the distance of a cyclist
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
The height of the ball above ground level, as it bounces, is

given in the graph at right.
a How long did it take the ball to reach the ground for the
first time?
b How long was the ball in the air between the second
and third bounce?
c What total distance is travelled by the ball in 7 seconds?
d Calculate the average speed of the ball for the first
2seconds.
Height (m)
2 In an experiment, a ball is dropped from a height of 20 m.
15 30 45 60 75 90 105120
Time (min)
20
15
10
5
0
over time. The graph at right describes the value of the car as a
percentage of its original price.
a What is the value of the car, as a percentage of its original
price, after 6 years?
b The half-life is the time taken for the value to decrease by
half. How long does it take for the car to lose half its original
value?
c How long does it take the car to fall in value from 50% of
its original value to 25% of its original value?
d Estimate, in dollars, the value of the car after 27 years.
Percentage of
original value
3 We 13 The value of a car, originally worth $32 000, decreases
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Time (s)
100
75
50
25
0
6 12 18 24
Time (years)
4 The depth of water across a sand bar varies according to the

Depth (m)
tide. This is shown at right.

4
a Approximately how long after high tide is the next low
3
tide?
2
b How deep is the water at the first low tide?
c What is the lowest value in the depth of the water across the
1
bar?
0
d What is the difference in the heights of the first and
5 10 15 20 25
Time (hrs)
second high tide?
e If the first high tide is at 9.40 am Tuesday, at what time
approximately will the first high tide occur on Wednesday?
f The water must be at least 1.5 m deep for Judys boat to travel across the bar. Between what times,
after the first high tide, can the boat not travel across the bar?
5 mC The graph at right describes the distance from home of
420
P
Distance
an object as it travels.
The point at which the object is moving with the greatest speed is:
a P
B Q
C R
d S
e T
S
R
Time
6 mC Water is poured into a container at a constant rate. The depth of water

Depth
in the vessel is described in the graph at right. From the options following,
the vessel that best matches the rate at which the vessel fills with water is:
B
Time
C
7 Carbon-14 is a radioactive element which breaks down over time. It has a half-life of about 6000 years;
that is, every 6000 years, half of the material present breaks down.
a Copy and complete the table for the amount of Carbon-14 (C-14) present.
Time (number of years)
Amount of Carbon-14
0
800 units
6000
12 000
18 000
b Plot the graph using these data.

c Use this graph to estimate the time taken for the amount of C-14 to fall to 600 units.
d Use the graph to estimate the amount of C-14 present after 10 000 years.
8 Yasmin borrows $70 000. She can pay a
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
9 The graph below shows the volume of air in
a persons lungs during a cycle of breathing.

a What is the maximum volume of the lungs?
b When relaxed, how much air is contained in the lungs?
c How much air is exhaled during the breathing cycle?
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
Years
Normal monthly repayments

Fortnightly repayments
6000
Volume (mL)
Loan balance ( $1000)
certain amount each month or half that

value each fortnight. The graph at right
shows the progress of the loan under both
systems of payment.
a How much time does it take to pay off
the loan using monthly repayments?
b How long does it take to pay off the
loan using fortnightly repayments?
c Using monthly repayments, after how
many years has the balance fallen to 50%
of its original value?
5000
Relaxed
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
Time
421
Profit ( $10 000)
10 The graph below shows the profits made by a manufacturing firm versus the number of units produced.
3
2
1
0
1
1 2 3 4 5 6
n ( 100)
a
b
c
d
What profit is made when 400 units are produced?

What is the result if 0 units are produced?
How many units need to be produced to break even?
Can you suggest an explanation for the dip in profits in the region n = 500?
Constructing non-linear relations

and graphs
10e
interaCtiVitY
int-0191
Constructing
non-linear relations
and graphs
Linear relationships between two variables are the simplest. However, there are many important
non-linear relationships where the graphs are not a straight line. Some examples follow.
A rivet is accidentally dropped from a tall pylon under construction. The relationship between the
distance the rivet has fallen(d ), and the time taken (t) is d = 5t2.
d
d = 5t2
The gas in a piston is compressed. The relationship between the pressure ( p) and the volume (v), is
p = 20v1 or p = 20
v.
p
p = 20
v
v
The mass of a cubic block of ice (m) is related to the length of the side of the block (s) by the formula
m = 1000s3.
m
m = 1000s3
s
422
Graphical representation of relations

of the form y = kx n
Given a non-linear equation of the form y = kxn, the easiest way to graph it is to use a CAScalculator.
Alternatively, from the equation a table of values can be produced and this can be used to sketch a
graph of the relationship. The general shape of the graphs of y = kxn for n = 2, 1, 1, 2, 3 are given
below.
y = kx (n = 1)
y = k2 (n = 2)
y = kx (n = 1)
x
y
y = kx2 (n = 2)
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Units: 3 & 4
y = kx3 (n = 3)
Worked example 14
A research scientist has discovered that her data are related according to the equation y = 5x2.
Construct a table of values to draw the graph of the equation y = 5x2 for x between 0 and 10.
think
1
Substitute values of x into y = 5x2

to obtain corresponding y-values. For
example, if x = 4 then
y = 5 42
= 5 16 = 80.
Plot the points and draw a smooth curve
through these points.
Write/draW
x
y
0
0
2
20
4
80
6
180
8
320
10
500
y
500
400
300
200
100
0
2 4 6 8 10 12 x
423
Finding a non-linear relationship using

linear graphs
If you know the equation, it is reasonably straightforward to produce a table of values. Thereverse process
(that is, discovering a formula for a non-linear relationship from a table of values) is more difficult.
If the relationship between x and y is of the form y = kx n, then plotting y against x n will produce a straight
line from the origin. The gradient of this line will equal the value of k. The following algorithm can be used
for finding the rule of the relationship, if the value of n is known.
1. Plot y against x n. The result must be a straight line, coming from the origin.
2. Select any two points on the line to calculate the value of the gradient.
3. Since the gradient represents the value of k, substitute it into y = kx n to give the rule for the relationship.
Note that if the value of n is not known, plot y against x first. The shape of the graph will indicate the
possible value(s) of n. Test this value by plotting y against x n. If a straight line is produced, proceed as
above; otherwise try a different value of n.
Worked example 15
By graphing y against x2 find the equation for the relationship between x and y
if the equation is of the form y = kx2.
x
y
0
0
2
12
4
48
6
108
think
8
192
tUtorial
eles-1300
Worked example 15
10
300
Write/draW
Since it is known that the relationship is of

the form y = kx2, draw up a table of values for
x2and y.
x2
y
Plot the values of x2 on the horizontal axis and y

on the vertical axis and join with a smooth line.
(A straight line from the origin confirms that the
relationship is of the form y = kx2.)
0
0
4
12
16
48
36
108
64
192
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
20 40 60 80 100 x
300 0
100 0
300
=
100
=3
Choose two points on the line, say (0, 0) and

(100, 300), and calculate the gradient.
Gradient =
The gradient represents the value of k in y = kx2.

Replace k with 3 to state the equation for the
relationship.
y = kx2
k=3
Therefore, y = 3x2.
Constructing non-linear relations

and graphs
exercise 10e
1 We 14 Construct a table of values to draw the graphs of the following equations. (Use values
of x from 5 to 5.)
a y = x2
e y = 2x3
b y = 2x2
f
y=
0.5x3
0.5
1
j y= 2
x
x
Use your CAS calculator to check your answers.
i
424
y=
c y = 0.5x2
1
g y=
x
2
k y= 2
x
d y = x3
h y= x
l
y=
0.5
x2
100
300
2 Write the letters a to d in your book. Against each letter that identifies a
graph, write the equation which best matches that graph.

y = x2
y = 2x2
y = x3
y= 3
x
x
3 We 15 By graphing y against
is of the form y = kx2.

x
y
x2,
find the equation of the relationship between x and y, if the equation
0
0
2
10
4
40
6
90
8
160
4 The Safety Council conducted research on the braking distance of vehicles and its relationship to the
diGital doC
doc-9482
Spreadsheet
transforming data
speed of the vehicle. The following data were obtained.

Speed (s) (km/h)
Braking distance (d) (metres)
30
7.5
45
16.9
60
30
80
53.3
100
83.3
a Plot d versus s2.

b What is the equation relating d and s?
5
x
y
0.1
200
0.4
50
1
20
2
10
5
4
a Plot these values on a set of axes.
b Plot y versus 1 and draw a straight line through the points.
c What is the slope of the line?

d Deduce the relationship between y and x.
6 In a physics experiment a student measured the current (I ) flowing through a resistor for different
values of the resistance (R) and obtained the following data.

Resistance (R) (ohms)
Current (I ) (milliamps)
a Plot values of I versus
100
300
1
.
R
200
150
1000
30
1500
20
b Deduce a relationship between I and R.
7 Examine the following table of values.
x
y
a
b
c
d
0
0
2
1
4
8
6
27
8
64
Plot these values on a set of axes.

Plot y versus x3 and draw a straight line through the points.
What is the slope of the line?
Deduce the relationship between y and x.
425
8 It is suspected that for male adults, mass (m) is related to height (h) by a formula like m = kh3. Use the
data in the table below to find a relationship between m and h.

Mass (kg)
Height (cm)
45
150
55
160
71
175
84
185
9 The intensity of light drops off as you move away from the source. The relationship is of the
k
. If the intensity (I ) is 50 when r = 20, find:
r2
a the value of k
b the distance at which the intensity of light falls below 35.
form I =
10 mC Which of the following equations describes the relationship shown on the graph below?
a
B
C
d
e
V = 10t2
V = 10t
V = 5t2
V = 5t
V 2 = 5t
(4, 20)
11 mC Which of the graphs below shows the relationship m =

a
1
p2
(3, 13 )
(9, 3)
426
p2
m
m
(3, 9)
1
p2
(3, 9)
(3, 9)
1
p2
t2
3
?
p2
1
p2
Summary
Constructing and
interpreting straightline graphs
The equation of a straight line with gradient m and y-intercept c is

y = mx + c.
rise y y
The gradient m = run or x 2 x1
2
y
(x2, y2)
y2
(x1, y1)
rise
If a point (x, y) lies on the line, the values of x and y satisfy the equation.
y1
run
If x and y satisfy the equation then the point (x, y) lies on the line.
c
The graph of a straight line can be obtained by plotting and joining
x2 x
x1
together any two points on the line.
When applied to real-life situations, the y-intercept often represents the
initial (or original) value of something, while the gradient represents the
change (increase or decrease) in y, as xincreases by 1 unit.
Extrapolation means to examine the relationship between the variables by extending it beyond the data.
Interpolation means to infer the relationship between distinct data points.
line segments and
step functions
A variable that can take all values such as time t = 5.8 s and t = 6.32 s is called continuous. A
variable that cannot take all values like the number of spectators n = 54 or shoe size s = 8 12 is
called discrete.
Real-life situations involving continuous data can often be modelled by line segment graphs or
step graphs.
If the data are discrete, the graph consists of points that are not joined together.
Simultaneous
equations and
break-even point
Two straight lines, if they are not parallel, will have one point in common. The coordinates of this
common point give the simultaneous solution of the two equations of the straight lines.
An application of simultaneous solution is to find the break-even point for a business where costs
equal the revenue. On a graph, the point of intersection of the costs line and the revenue line is the
break-even point.
interpreting
non-linear graphs
Graphs of non-linear equations are widely encountered in many areas. To read these graphs
effectively we need to recall:
1. the y-intercept is the value when x is 0. This is often the initial or original value.
2. the slope of the curve gives the rate of change of y compared to x.
Constructing
non-linear relations
and graphs
The sketch graphs of y = kxn for n = 2, 1, 1, 2, 3 are given below.

y = kx (n = 1)
k
k
y = 2 (n = 2)
y = (n = 1)
x
x
y
y = kx2 (n = 2)
y = kx3 (n = 3)
If the graph of y versus x n produces a straight line from the origin, then the relationship is y = kx n,
where k is the gradient of the straight line produced.
To find the equation of the relationship:
1. plot y against x n. This will result in a straight line.
2. calculate the gradient of the line, which represents the value of k, and substitute it into y = kx n.
427
Chapter review
Questions 1 to 3 relate to the following information.
Karla and Lisa are travelling with a group of friends
along the footpath and roadside at a constant speed.
Lisa starts with Karla but, riding a bike at a constant
speed, she moves faster than Karla. After 4 seconds,
Lisa has moved 30 metres more than Karla.
1 The line that represents Karla is:
a Line A
B Line B
C Line C
d Line D
e Line E
2 The line that represents the fastest person is:
a Line A
B Line B
C Line C
d Line D
e Line E
3 The speed represented by line C is:
a 60 m/s
B 12 m/s
C 5 m/s
4 Match each of the following equations to the graph that fits best.
a y = 2x
y
b y = 2x + 2
A B C
c 2y = x
D
d 2y = x + 4
d (m)
m U lt ip l e
C h oiCe
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
10 12
t (s)
d 1 m/s
e 0.2 m/s
5 A plumber charges a call-out fee plus an amount for each 10minutes or part thereof needed to
Cost ($)
complete a job. The graph at right shows the cost charged for jobs up to 60minutes in length.
a The cost charged by the plumber for a job taking 20 minutes is:
a $60
B $70
C $80
120
d $90
e $100
100
b The cost charged by the plumber for a job taking 35 minutes is:
80
a $80
B $85
C $90
60
d $95
e $100
40
c The call-out fee is:
20
a $40
B $50
C $60
d $70
e $80
0
6 The solution to the simultaneous equations y = 5x 3 and y = 2x + 6 is:
a (1, 2)
d (3, 12)
B (2, 10)
e (3, 4)
10 20 30 40 50 60
Time (mins)
C (2, 7)
7 The graph below shows the relationships for revenue and cost against the number of hamburgers sold at
a school fete. The number of hamburgers that need to be sold to break even is:
a 0
B 20
C 30
d 40
($)
100
80
Cost
60
40
Revenue
20
0
10 20 30 40 50
Number of hamburgers
428
e 50
8 Water is poured into a container at a constant rate. The graph at right shows
Depth
the depth of water in the container versus time.

The container below that best matches this graphis:
C
Time
e
Questions 9 to 11 relate to the graph at right, that shows the following

(in random order): y = x2, y = 2x2, y = x2 + 2, y = x2 1 and y = x + 1.
A
B
C
9 Which graph best matches the equation y= x2?
10 Which graph best matches the equation y= x2 + 2?

11 Which graph best matches the equation y = 2x2?

A publisher produces a restaurant guide each year. To produce x copies, the cost is C dollars, where
C = 15 000 + 15x. If all of the x copies produced are sold, then the revenue gained is R dollars, where R=25x.
12 Which of the following statements is not true?
a
B
C
d
e
The cost and revenue equations are linear.

The selling price for each copy of the guide is$25.
It will cost $30 000 to produce 1000 copies of the guide.
The revenue from selling 1000 copies is $15 000.
The revenue is more than the cost if 1600copies of the guide are sold.
1 Bruno is an insurance salesman. He is paid $150 per week plus $120 for each insurance policy he sells.
a How much does Bruno receive if he sells 3 policies in a week?
b One week Bruno is paid $630. How many policies did he sell in that week?
c Write a rule that relates Brunos weekly pay(P) and the number of policies he sells (n).
d Draw a graph of P versus n.
S ho rt
a n S W er
2 For the equation of the line y = 3x 3:

a what is the value of y when x = 4?
b what is the value of x when y = 18?
c does the point (0, 3) lie on the line?
d Using the two points whose coordinates were found in a and b, calculate the gradient.
3 Sketch the graphs of the following functions between x = 5 and x = 5.
a y = 4x 3
b y + 2x = 6
c y = 2x + 2
d 2y x = 12
4 A car salesperson is paid commission at the rate of 1.75% on the first $40 000 worth of cars that he or
she sells in a month, and 1.2% on the remainder.

a Copy and complete the following table by calculating the commission due each month.
Sales
$20 000
$30 000
$40 000
$50 000
$60 000
Commission
b Using the data in the table, draw a graph of commission versus sales.
429
For each of the following pairs of simultaneous equations, find the solution using algebraic methods.
b 2y + x = 4
a y = 4x 2
3y 2x = 4
y = 3x
6 The cost of manufacturing surfboards depends on labour, plant and raw materials. The monthly cost(C )
is related to the number produced (n) by the equation:
C = 4000 + 280n.
The revenue (R) made from selling n surfboards is:
R = 450n
Both C and R are in dollars.
5
Number of surfboards made

10
20
30
40
Cost ($)
Revenue ($)
b Sketch the graph of cost (C ) versus number (n) and the graph of revenue (R) versus number (n) on

c How many surfboards need to be produced before the break-even point is reached?
7 A pendulum swings back and forth as shown on the following page. The distance the bob of the
pendulum is from its rest position is given as a function of time in the graph below the diagram.
a How long does it take the
d (cm)
pendulum to return to its
20
starting position?
10
b Give the position of the
0
pendulum after 1.5seconds.
1
2
3
10
c Predict the position of the
pendulum after 22.5seconds.
20
4
t (s)
20 cm
8 It is known that y is related to x by the equation y = kx2.
12
48
75
a Graph y versus x2.

b Deduce the exact relationship of y versus x.
e x t ended
r e SponS e
1 One day, Rachel and Nathan decided to travel to Mt Buffalo. For the first three hours they were driving
at an average speed of 50 km/h, while for the last two hours they managed to increase their average
speed to 60 km/h.
a Copy and complete the table below to show Rachel
and Nathans distance from home at various times of
their journey.
Number of hours
travelled (t)
1
2
3
4
5
Distance (km) from

home (D)
b Use the data from the table to represent the trip
graphically.
430
c Name the type of graph formed in part b.

d Find the gradient and the y-intercept of the first section of the graph and hence, state the equation
that relates time and distance travelled over the first 3 hours of the trip.
e Interpret the value of the gradient and the y-intercept in part d.
f Explain why the second section of the graph is steeper than the first.
g State the distance of Mt Buffalo from Rachel and Nathans home.
2 Alex owns a small cake shop. To attract more customers, he decides to start making and selling coffee
in addition to his cakes. The total cost of an espresso machine, cups and spoons adds up to $7500. In
addition to this, Alex estimates that it will cost him an average of 20 cents to make each cup of coffee.
He intends to sell the coffee at $2.70 per cup.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Find a function that gives the total cost C (in $) of making n cups of coffee.
Find a function that gives the revenue R (in $) from selling n cups of coffee.
Draw the graphs of the cost and the revenue functions on the same set of axes.
Find the coordinates of the point of intersection of the two graphs using algebraic methods.
Interpret the meaning of the point of intersection.
What is the smallest number of cups of coffee that Alex needs to make and sell to start making a profit?
Write the function for the profit P (in $) in terms of n.
How many cups of coffee does Alex have to make and sell in order to make a profit of $2000?
3 In business, the rule of 72 is used to predict the growth of an investment. The rule states that if the
growth rate of an investment is r% p.a., then the time taken for the investment to double is 72 r years.
It is estimated that a share portfolio, initially worth $75 000, will grow at an annual rate of 9%.
a Use the rule of 72 to predict the value of the investment for the following years.
Time (years)
Value
0
$75 000
16
b Plot the data and draw a smooth curve through the points.
c Use this graph to estimate the value of the investment after 10 years.
d What do you predict the value of the investment to be in 40 years time?
4
x
y
0
0
2
12
4
96
Deduce the relationship between y and x.

(Hint: It is of the form y = kxn.)
6
324
8
768
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Practice
VCE exam
questions
Use StudyON to
access all exam
questions on this
topic since 2002.
diGital doC
doc-9483
Test Yourself
Chapter 10
431
ICT activities
Chapter opener
diGital doC
applications of construction and interpretation of graphs. (page 401)
10a Constructing and interpreting

diGital doCS
doc-9475: Substitution into a formula (page 407)
SkillSHEET 10.1 doc-9476: Practise calculating the gradient (II).
(page 407)
SkillSHEET 10.2 doc-9477: Practise sketching straight-line graphs
using the gradient-intercept method. (page 407)
doc-9478: Making linear predictions (page 408)
tUtorialS
We 9 eles-1297: Learn how to solve simultaneous equations using
algebraic methods. (page 414)
We 11 eles-1298: Watch a tutorial on break-even analysis using a
graphical method. (page 415)
10d
tUtorial
We 12 eles-1299: Watch a tutorial on interpreting non-linear
graphs. (page 418)
10e
Constructing non-linear relations and graphs
diGital doC
Spreadsheet doc-9482: Transforming data (page 425)
tUtorial
We 3 eles-1295: Watch a worked example on sketching the graph
of linear equations. (page 403)
tUtorial
We 15 eles-1300: Watch a tutorial on how to find a non-linear
equation given a set of bivariate data. (page 424)
interaCtiVitY
Developing linear graphs int-0082: Use the interactivity to
consolidate your understanding of linear graphs. (page401)
interaCtiVitY
Constructing non-linear relations and graphs int-0191: Use the
interactivity to consolidate your understanding of non-linear graphs.
(page 422)
10B
diGital doC
WorkSHEET 10.1 doc-9479: Construct linear graphs, calculate the
gradient, substitute into a linear equation, make predictions using
interpolation and extrapolation. (page413)
tUtorial
We 7 eles-1296: Watch a tutorial on using step graphs to
determine the cost of labour. (page 410)
10C Simultaneous equations and

break-even point
diGital doCS
WorkSHEET 10.2 doc-9481: Construction and interpretation of graphs
(page418)
Spreadsheet doc-9480: Investigate simultaneous equations
algebraic method. (page 417)
432
Chapter review
diGital doC
Answers CHAPTER 10
ConStrUCtion and
interpretation oF GraphS
12
10
8
6
3x + y = 12
4
2
x
0 1234
b y
y = 3x 4
0
2
4
3
0
5 10 15 20
S ( $10 000)
y
5
4
3
2
(0, 0)1
0
2 1
1
2
3
c S = 9.8 t
b 450 km
1 2 3 4
y
5
4
3
2
1
0
2 1 1
2
(2, 3)3
P ($)
60
3 a
200 400
d (km)
200
$40
400
$80
14 a $470
y = 2x + 1
1
15 a
b
c
16 a
c
4.73
S = 108 + (n 20) 4.73
4.73
$40.30
b 7.2 km
F = 2.8 + 2.5d
$110
$170
1500
$240
0 200 400 600 800 1000120014001600

Consumption (kWh)
Time of service
(minutes)
Cost
20
$80
30
$80
45
$115
60
$115
80
$150
90
$150
5 10 15
Depth ( 100 mm)
b W = 350 +
600
1000
240
200
160
120
80
40
13 B
(2, 5)
800
Power bill
b 1550 mm
c 3500 L
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
700
60 000
90
12 a
(4, 3)
50 000
Consumption
(kWh)
30
y = 34 x
600
12 34 567
Sales ( $10 000)
1 2 3 4 5 t
450
40 000
different gradients.
2 a
120
3
2
1 (0, 0)
0
x
1 1
1
2
(1, 2)
2
3
y = 2x
30 000
c Different commission rates mean
150
300
200
11 a $126.75
c
Commission ($)
20 000
400
S
50
40
30
20
10
0
Sales ($)
800
Power bill ($)
y
12
10
y 3x = 12 8
6
4
2
4 2 0
line segments and step
b C ($)
retainer amount
10 a 29.4 m/s
b 8s
C ($)
Weekly pay
$425
$575
$725
$875
e m = 0.03; rate of commission c = 275;
d (km)
600
8
6
y = 2x + 8
4
2
x
0 1234
1 a
1000
800
600
400
200
5 10 15 20 25
exercise 10B
c P = 275 + 0.03S
d
5 000
10 000
15 000
20 000
e 2.5
F
$100
$80
$60
$40
$20
0
functions
8 E
9 a $635
b Weekly sales
Volume ( 1000 L)
7 a
(4, 13 )
0
x
32 1
1 1 2 3 4 5
2
3 4x 3y = 12
4
5
6
2
(2, 6 ) 7
exercise 10a
Constructing and
interpreting straight-line graphs
1 a 13
b 6
c No
d m = 2, c = 5
2 a 0
b 4
c Yes
d m = 2, c = 4
3 a 3
b 0
3
c No
d m = 2, c = 6
44
5 a 3
b 6
c No
d 0.5
6 a 0.5
b2
c 1.5
d 2
y
2
1
3S
25
b C ($)
200
150
100
50
0
30 60 90
t (min)
433
Cost (cents)
10
20
15
30
15
40
30
50
30
60
45
70
45
80
60
90
60
b
d
f
h
3 a
$150
$4500
$12 000
$67 000
64
$21
$28
56
48
40
$900
$1650
$2250
$4050
$5250
10
$6450
6 B
8 a $0
c $2040
e $8172
g $33 807
B
$170
$6672
$15 132
$80 807
9 a Note: Income tax for $200 000 has not
been plotted.
7
b
d
f
h
$37
Plan A
Plan B
10 20 30 40 50
Time (min)
4 a
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Cost ($)
Revenue
($)
50
750
350
12 Answers will vary.
100
900
700
13 a i $75
b
150
1050
1050
200
1200
1400
ii 20 km
125
b
100
75
2 a
b i $3372
Note: These answers were obtained

algebraically.
ii $31 457
Reading from the graph could be
slightly different.
R
C
50 100 150 200

Number of toys (n)
c 150
d (150, 1050). If 150 toys are produced,
20
40
60
80 100
Distance travelled (km)
120
the cost and revenue is equal to $1050.

No profit nor loss is made.
5 a
Number of
components
Cost
($)
Revenue
($)
y
4 y = 2x (2, 4)
3
2
y = 4x 4
1
x
0
1
1 2 3
2
3
4
5 000
18 500
14 500
10 000
31 000
37 000
15 000
43 500
59 500
20 000
56 000
82 000
80
60
40
20
y = 3x 4
4
3
2
1
(2, 2)
y = 2x 2
1 0 1 2 3 x
2
3
4
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100
Taxable income ( $1000)
($)
2000
1500
1000
500
50
exercise 10C Simultaneous equations

and break-even point
1 a (2, 4)
b (2, 2)
c (1, 2)
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
0
$39
c Approx. 33
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Number of people
40
Number
of toys
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
$31
$34
16
( $1000)
Total cost
$27
$33
24
b i $2700
ii $24 000
c Answer wording will vary.
20 40 60 80 100
20
30
50
40
30
20
10
32
Call-out fee ($)
Cost (cents)
10
72
25
Total cost ($)
Cost
Plan B
Taxable income ( $1000)
Number of
people
Income tax ( $1000)
Cost
Plan A
been plotted.
Length of call (seconds)
5 a
Call time
(minutes)
11 a Note: Income tax for $200 000 has not
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
434
$0
$1800
$6000
$26 000
10 a
c
e
g
Cost ($)
Length of call
(seconds)
Income tax ( $1000)
4 a
y
4
3
2
1
3y 2x = 4
(1, 2)
2y + x = 5
x
0
21 1 2 3 4 5
5000 10000 15000 20000
Number of
components (n)
c 7000
6 a
Number of
packages
sold
Salary
Plan A
Salary
Plan B
$525
$375
10
$650
$600
15
$775
$825
20
$900
$1050
c 13
($)
1200
1000
800
600
400
200
9 a
c
10 a
b
c
d
Plan B
Plan A
5 10 15 20
Number of
packages sold (n)
7A
8 a $108 000
$
c
5750 mL
b 3100 mL
4250 mL
$20 000
Loss of $10 000
150
May need to employ extra staff or install
new plant.
exercise 10e Constructing non-linear

relations and graphs
1 a
b 30
250 000
25
54321
100 000
1 2 3 4 5
y
50
20
50
100
150
200
d 100
e P = 1000m 100 000
f $75 000
exercise 10d
800
6000
400
12 000
200
18 000
100
1 2 3 4 5
y = 0.5x2
54321
1 2 3 4 5
54321
25
54321
1 2 3 4 5
54321
125
y
250
150
1 2 3 4 5
y
60
5 a
y = 0.5x3
40
1 2 3 4 5
5 4 3 2 1
20
40
60
80
b y = x3
d y = x2
2
2000 4000 6000 8000 10000 s
y
200
20
c 2500 years
d 250 units
8 a 25 years
b 14.5 years
c Approximately 21 years
b d = 0.0083s2
80
6000 12000 18000

Time (years)
0.5
y =
x2
80
60
40
20
150
3 y = 2.5x 2
4 a
d
50
250
1 2 3 4 5
c y = 2x2
100
200
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
3
x
2 a y=
y = 2x3
200
75
100
1 2 3 4 5
2
y=
x2
5
4
3
2
1
50
54321
50
100
75
25
1
y=
x2
5
4
3
2
1
y = x3
50
1 2 3 4 5
54321
y
125
5
4
3
2
1
100
Time (number of
Amount of
years)
Carbon-14 (units)
Amount of carbon-14 (units)
7 a
y
12
10
8
6
4
2
interpreting non-linear
graphs
1 a 2 km
b 0 km/h
c Stationary (not moving)
d 8 km
e t = 90 min
f 30 min
g 16 km/h
2 a 2s
b 2s
c 50 m
d 10 m/s
3 a About 62% of the original value
b 9 years
c 9 years
d $4000
4 a About 6 hours
b 1.5 m
c 0.5 m
d 1m
e 10.40 am
f Between about 15 hours and 21 hours
after the first high tide.
5B
6 C
54321
0.5
y =
x
54321
2
3
4
5
10
1 2 3 4 5
30
5
4
3
2
1
y = 2x2
40
y = 2x
54321
2
3
4
5
1 2 3 4 5x
y = x2
10
5
4
3
2
1
15
C = 800m + 100 000
y = 1x
5 4 3 2 1
2
3
4
5
y
20
R = 1800m
5
4
3
2
1
150
0
1 2 3 4 5
100
50
0
1 2 3 4 5
435
4 a B
c D
5 a B
c B
6 D
8 A
10 A
12 D
200
150
100
50
0
1
2 4 6 8 10 x
200
10
6 800
4 500
20
9 600
9 000
30
12 400
13 000
40
15 200
18 000
100
200
1000
1500
1
R
0.01
0.005
0.001
0.000 67
300
150
30
20
2 a 9
c Yes
3 a
b 7
d 3
y
y = 4x 3
4
2
2 12
4
50
40
10
4
50
1 2 3 4 5
30
20
54321
10
100 200 300 400 500 x
x3
64
216
512
27
64
c 0.125
d y = 0.125x3
h3
75000
9 a k = 20 000
10 C
b 23.9
11 E
Chapter reVieW
mUltiple ChoiCe
2A
8 a
60
40
1 2 3 4 5
20
0
54321
y
80
y = 2x + 2
2y x = 12
10
8
6
4
2
4a
10 20 30 40
(That is, when 23 boards are produced,

small loss occurs when 24 boards
we produced; and sold, small profit
occurs.)
7 a 1 second
b 20 cm to the left
c 20 cm to the right
y
5
4
3
2
1
40
y + 2x = 6
54321
60
y
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
20
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
c About 23
30
8
6
1 2 3 4 5
12
7
Revenue
($)
200
100
4
7
b x= ,y=
Cost ($)
400
10 20 30 40 50 60
Sales ( $1000)
Number of
surfboards
made
300
60
436
6 a
500
30 000
b I=
R
1 D
3 C
400
5 a x = 2, y = 6
600
8 m=
600
700
1
0.006
0.01 R
0.004 0.008
800
b 4
c P = 150 + 120n
P
d
0 0.002
7 C
9 B
11 C
1 a $510
I
300
250
200
150
100
50
7 a
1000
( $1000)
6 a
Short anSWer
20
d y=
x
c 20
b A
d C
b C
Commission ($)
5 10 15 20 25 x
b y=
3x2
extended reSponSe
0
1 a 50 km, 100 km, 150 km, 210 km,
x
1 2 3 4 5
270 km
Sales
Commission
$20 000
$350
$30 000
$525
$40 000
$700
$50 000
$820
$60 000
$940
b
Distance from home (km)
300
270
250
200
150
100
50
0
1
2
3
4
5
Number of hours travelled
g
2 a
b
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
e The point of intersection is the break-
R = 2.70n
even point. It shows that by making and

selling 3000 cups of coffee, neither a
profit nor a loss will be made.
f 3001
g P = 2.5n 7500
h 3800
3 a
C = 0.20n + 7500
Time
(years)
Value
1
2
3
4
5
6
Cups of coffee ( 1000)
d (3000, 8100)
16
$75 000 $150 000 $300 000

c $170 000
d $2.4 million
b
Value ( $1000)
speed (50 km/h) during the first section

of the trip. The y-intercept represents the
initial distance from home; since it is 0,
this means that they have started their
trip from home.
The steepness is determined by the
gradient; in this case the gradient
represents the average speed. The
second section is steeper because the
average speed increased from 50 km/h
to 60 km/h.
270 km
C = 0.2n + 7500
R = 2.7n
Cost and revenue ( $1000)
c Line segment graph

d m = 50; y-intercept = 0; D = 50t
e The gradient represents the average
300
250
200
150
100
50
0
8
16
Time (years)
4 y = 1.5x3
437
ChapTer 11
Linear inequations and

linear programming
diGiTal doC
doc-9484
10 Quick Questions
ChapTer ConTenTS
11a
11B
11C
11d
Linear inequations
Simultaneous linear inequations
Linear programming
Applications
11a
linear inequations
To begin our work in linear programming, we first have to develop some skills with linear inequations.
Recall that linear equations come in two forms:
and
y = mx + b
ax + by = c.
inTeraCTiViTY
int-0083
Sketching inequations
For example, y = 3x 4 is a linear equation, as is 3x + 4y = 9.

Linear inequations also have two forms:
and
y < mx + b
ax + by < c.
For example, y<3x 4 is a linear inequation, as is 3x + 4y 9. It is the second form of

equation that we will be chiefly working with in this chapter. The only difference between equations
and inequations is that the equals sign (=) is replaced with an inequality sign. The possible
inequality signs are:
greater than or equal to
> greater than
< less than
less than or equal to.
Graphing a linear inequation
Units: 3 & 4
The steps for graphing a linear inequation are the same as those for linear equations, with one extra
step. The graph of an inequation is a region or half-plane while the graph of a linear equation is a
straight line.
Step 1. Temporarily treat the inequation as an equation to find the boundary of the region.
Step 2. Find two points using the equation to assist in graphing the boundary. Pick any value of x and
find the corresponding value of y. Pick another value of x and find the corresponding value of y.
This value of x should be reasonably far away from the first one chosen.
Step 3. Plot the points from step 2 and join them with a straight line. Extend the straight line to the
extent of your graph paper. A dashed line should be used for a < or > inequation and a solid line
for a or inequation.
Step 4. Shade in a region, either above the graph or below the graph, depending upon the inequality
sign in the given inequation. The convention is to shade the region not required. Any point
inside the shaded region is not a solution to the inequation. Thus, the unshaded (or clear) area is
called the solution region or the feasible region. Note: Some CAS calculators shade the solution
region.
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with inequations.
ChapTer 11 Linear inequations and linear programming
439
Worked example 1
Graph the linear inequation 3x + 4y 9.

Think
1
Find the boundary of the region.

(a) Write the inequation as an equation.
(b) Pick any value for x and find the
corresponding y-value.
(c) Substitutethe x-value into the equation and
solve for y.
(d) Pick another value for x and find the
corresponding y-value.
(e) Substitutethe x-value into the equation and
solve for y.
(f ) Plot the two points on a graph and join
them with a straight line. A solid line is
used since the inequation contains a sign.
Observe how the line is extended the full
extent of the graph paper. This line divides
the coordinate plane into two half-planes.
WriTe/draW
The boundary is 3x + 4y = 9.
Let x = 0
3(0) + 4y = 9
4y = 9
9
y = 4 = 2.25. First point is (0, 2.25)
Let x = 9
3(9) + 4y = 9
27 + 4y = 9
4y = 36
y = 9. Second point is (9, 9)
y
5
10
10
5
10
Find the required region.

(a) Select a test point above the line to
work out the region or half-plane
required.
(b) Substitutethe x- and y-values into the
inequation. If the inequation is satisfied
(or true) then the half-plane containing
the test point is required. If not, the other
half-plane is required.
Shade in the region not required (that is, the

half-plane below the line) and add the legend.
Test point: (5, 0)

3x + 4y 9
3(5) + 4(0) 9?
15 9 is true, so the region required is above
the line.
y
5
10
10
5
10
Region required
Note that in the worked example above, because the inequation was greater than or equal to, the
solution region also included the straight line itself (shown with a solid line).
If the inequation had been just greater than then the region would not have included the straight line
points (a dashed line would have been used).
However, most problems in this chapter will be of the . . . equal to type.
A faster alternative to steps 1(b) to 1(e) in Worked example 1 is to find the x- and y-intercepts to the
boundary line. First substitute x = 0 and find the corresponding value of y and then substitute y = 0 and
find the corresponding value of x. Plot these two points to get the straight line. This is called the x- and
y-intercept method.
440
Worked example 2
Graph the inequation 3x 4y < 12 using the x- and y-intercept method and
show that (5, 2) is a solution.
Think
1
WriTe/draW
Find the boundary.

(a) Write the equation of the boundary.
(b) Findthe y-intercept by substituting
x = 0 into the equation and finding the
corresponding value of y.
(c) Findthe x-intercept by substituting
y = 0 into the equation and finding the
corresponding value of x.
TUTorial
eles-1250
Worked example 2
The boundary of the region is 3x 4y = 12.

When x = 0,
3(0) 4y = 12
4y = 12
y = 3
Point is (0, 3)
When y = 0,
3x 4(0) = 12
3x = 12
x=4
Point is (4, 0)
(d) Plot the two points on a graph and join

them with a straight, dashed line.
Find the required region.

(a) Select a test point, say (0, 0), towork out
the half-plane required.
(b) Substitutethe x- and y-values into the
inequation. If the inequation is satisfied
(or true) then the half-plane containing
the test point is required. If not, the other
half-plane is required.
Shade in the region not required, that is, the
half-plane below the line.
Test point: (0, 0)

3x 4y < 12
3(0) + 4(0) < 12?
0 < 12 is true, so the region required is above
the line.
y
2
45
3
Region required
Plot the given point (5, 2) to see whether it is

within the required region.
Alternatively: Substitute the co-ordinates of
the given point (5, 2) into inequation to see if it
will make a true statement.
exercise 11a
The point (5, 2) lies inside the unshaded region.

Therefore, it is a solution to the inequation.
Test point (5, 2):
3(5) 4(2) < 12?
15 8 < 12?
7 < 12 is true, therefore (5, 2) is a solution to
the ineqaution.
linear inequations
1 We 1 Graph the solution to the linear inequation 4x 5y 10.

2 Graph the solutions to the following linear inequations.
a 6x + 2y > 12
b 4x + y 5
c 3x + 2y 0
3 We2 Graph the inequation 4x + 5y 20 and show that (1, 1) is a solution.
4 Graph the inequation 6x 4y + 20 > 0 and show that (10, 5) is a solution.
5 Graph the inequation 2x + 3y 6 and show that (7, 0) is a solution.
6 Graph the inequation 1.5x 3.5y < 2.7.
d x y > 20
diGiTal doCS
doc-9485
SkillSHEET 11.1
inequations
with one variable
doc-9486
SkillSHEET 11.2
inequations
with two variables
doc-9487
linear inequations
441
7 mC Which one or more of the points below is/are solutions to the inequation in question 6?
a (5, 5)
B (5, 5)
d (1, 2)
C (10, 2)
e (10, 6)
8 Graph the inequation 20x + 30y 300.

9 mC The point which is not a solution to the inequation in question 8 is:
a (10, 5)
11B
B (5, 8)
C (5, 5)
d (1, 10)
e (2, 10)
As with linear equations, it is possible to solve groups of linear inequations simultaneously; that is, to
find the solution that satisfies more than one inequation at the same time. You may recall that there are
several methods for solving simultaneous linear equations; some of these techniques will be useful for
inequations. Note that simultaneous linear inequations are also called systems of linear inequations.
Graphical solution of simultaneous

linear inequations
To solve for two linear inequations, follow these steps.
Step 1. Graph the solution for the first linear inequation.
Step 2. Graph the solution for the second linear inequation.
Step 3. The solution to both inequations is the intersection of the solution regions from Steps 1 and 2.
Worked example 3
Find the solution to the simultaneous linear inequations:

x + 2y 10 [1]
2x + y 10 [2]
Think
WriTe/draW
Write the boundary equation for region [1].
The boundary for region [1] is x + 2y = 10.
Find the x- and y-intercepts of the boundary

line.
When x = 0,
0 + 2y = 10
y=5
When y = 0,
x + 2(0) = 10
x = 10
Plot the straight line and determine the region

of the solution by using a test point.
(0, 5)
(10, 0)
Test point: (0, 0)

x + 2y 10
0 + 2(0) 10, is true,
so (0, 0) is inside the
solution region.
y
10
5
5
5
5 10
Region required
442
Repeat steps 13 for region [2].
The boundary for region [2] is 2x + y = 10.

When x = 0,
2(0) + y = 10
y = 10
(0, 10)
When y = 0,
2x + 0 = 10
y
2x = 10
10
x=5
(5, 0)
5
Test point: (0, 0)
2x + y 10
5 10
5
5
2(0) + 0 10, is true, so
Region required
(0, 0) is inside the region.
y
10
5
Determine the overlapping areas of the two

regions. This can be done graphically, by
showing the two regions on the one set of axes.
The clear area is the overlap of the two solution
regions and represents the solution to the
simultaneous linear inequations.
5
5
5 10
Region required
Note that in the previous worked example, there were three non-solution regions:
1. the region above and to the left of the first line,
2. the region above and to the right of the second line, and
3. the region where the two exclusion zones overlap.
Notes
1. The convention of shading the region that is not required makes it easier to identify overlapping
exclusion zones; however, some CAS calculators shade the required region. Use test points to confirm
which style is being used.
2. In this chapter, where more exclusion zones overlap, the regions will be shown in increasingly darker
shades of brown.
3. In subsequent sections, we examine systems of three or more linear inequations, but the methods are
identical.
4. Examination questions usually ask for the required region to be shaded. Always read the question
carefully and include a legend with your graphical solutions.
Worked example 4
Find the solution to the system of linear

inequation at right.
Think
x + 2y 5
4x + 3y 12
x0
y0
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
TUTorial
eles-1301
Worked example 4
WriTe/draW
Write the boundary equations for each region

and find the intercepts or relevant information
to sketch each line.
The boundary for region [1] is x + 2y = 5.

When x = 0, y = 2.5
(0, 2.5)
When y = 0, x = 5
(5, 0)
The boundary for region [2] is 4x + 3y = 12.
When x = 0, y = 4
(0, 4)
When y = 0, x = 3
(3, 0)
The boundary for region [3] is x = 0.
This is a vertical line through x = 0.
The boundary for region [4] is y = 0.
This is a horizontal line through y = 0.
Use test points to identify the required region

for each inequation. Note that (0, 0) cannot be
used for inequations [3] and [4] as this point
lies on the boundary for each.
For x + 2y 5: Test point (0, 0)

(0) + 2(0) 5 is true, so (0, 0) is inside the region.
For 4x + 3y 12: Test point (0, 0)
4(0) + 3(0) 12 is true, so (0, 0) is inside the region.
For x 0: Test point (1, 0)
1 0, so (1, 0) is inside the region.
For y 0: Test point (0, 2)
2 0, so (0, 2) is inside the region.
Show each region on the one set of axes.

Remember to shade the region not required
in each case. The clear area is the solution for
this system of inequations.
y
4
Region required
212
2
0 1
443
Observe that the solution region is a polygon (in this case a quadrilateral). This is a feature of all of
the subsequent problems we will study. Generally speaking, if there are n linear inequations, we can get
a polygon of up to n sides. The solution region is also called the feasible region.
Sometimes the overlap between solution regions is not so obvious.
Worked example 5
Find the solution to the system of linear inequations below.

8x + 5y 40 [1]
3x + 4y 12 [2]
2x + y 6
[3]
x0
[4]
y0
[5]
Think
WriTe/draW
Find the intercepts of the boundary lines and

use a test point to determine which side of
the boundary to shade. Note that inequations
[4] and [5] indicate that we are interested only
in positive values of x and y, as well as when
x or y equal zero; that is, non-negative values
of x and y.
Graph the solution to each of the inequations

on the same set of axes. Remember to shade
the regions not required. The clear area is the
solution region for this system of inequations.
Note: When we are interested in only positive
values of x and y, it is usual not to extend lines
beyond the axes, or to shade in the negative
quadrants.
Region [1]: 8x + 5y = 40 has intercepts of (0, 8)

and (5, 0) with a test point of (0, 0) inside the
feasible region.
Region [2]: 3x + 4y = 12 has intercepts (0, 3)
and(4, 0) with a test point of (0, 0) inside the
feasible region.
Region [3]: 2x + y = 6 has intercepts (0, 6) and
(3, 0) with a test point of (0, 0) inside the feasible
region.
y
8
6
Region required
3
0
3 4 5 x
What this example indicates is that not all the inequations are part of the solution region. In the above
example, inequation [1] has no role to play. However, this is usually not obvious until all the inequations
have been graphed.
Note: In the exercises that follow, you will notice that majority of the systems contain inequations
x 0 and y 0. These two inequations describe the first quadrant of the Cartesian plane, including the
origin and the positive sections of the x- and y-axis.
exercise 11B
For questions 110, graph the solution to the given system of linear inequations.
1 We3 5x + 3y 15
2 5x + 3y 15
3 2x + 3y 6
4 6x + 8y 0
5 We4 8x + 3y 24
6 8x + 2y 16
7 2x + 5y 10
8 We5 2x + y 2
3x + 5y 15
5x + 7y 35
x0
y0
9 3x + 2y 6
x+y6
2x + 6y 6
x0
y0
444
+y2
4x + 5y 20
x0
y0
10 10x + 3y 30
7x + 5y 35
3x + 7y 21
x0
y0
2x 5y 10
7x + 3y 21
x0
y0
3x + 4y 12
x + 3y 3
3x + 2y 6
x0
y0
11 Modify the first and third inequations of question 10 so that less than or equal to becomes greater
than or equal to and re-solve.

12 mC 3x + y
3
5x + 4y 20
14x + 4y 28
x 0
y0
The point that is part of the solution to the system of linear inequations above is:
a (1, 5)
B (2, 1)
C (3, 0)
d (1, 3)
e (0, 6)
13 A rectangular swimming pool is constructed with the following restrictions in mind:
i The perimeter is to be at least 20 metres.
ii The difference between the length (y metres) and the width (x metres) must be
diGiTal doC
doc-9488
WorkSHEET 11.1
5 metres or more.
iii Neither length nor width can exceed 15 metres.
a Write the restrictions in terms of algebraic inequations.

b Graph the solution to the system of linear inequations.
c Show that a pool of length of 10 m and a width of 10 m is not possible.
11C
linear programming
Now that you have the skills necessary for graphing inequations, you are in a position to tackle
the main purpose of this chapter: solving linear programming problems.
What is a linear programming problem? It consists of 3 vital components:
1. a set of variables (in this chapter we shall always have exactly two) called decision variables
2. a set of restrictions or constraints on the values of these variables
3. a function (called the objective function) of these two variables that we wish to make either as
large as possible (maximise) or as small as possible (minimise).
Generally, by convention, x and y are used to represent the two variables.
The decision variables

In the general linear programming problem there are many variables. In the Further Mathematics
course we are restricted to only two, so that Cartesian graphical methods can be employed. In real-life
engineering situations (linear programming is part of a study known as industrial engineering), linear
programming problems with up to 100 variables have been solved. In some cases the variables must be
integers (whole numbers), while in other problems they can take on any real value; sometimes it may not
be obvious which case applies.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch a
video about linear
programming.
The constraints
The constraints are expressed as a set of inequations, similar to those we encountered in the previous
section. Let us consider a scenario which we will be working on in the next few examples. In this case
there will be three constraints; but the procedures outlined in Worked examples 6, 7 and 8 would be
exactly the same as for only two constraints.
445
Worked example 6
A company produces clothes washers and dryers.

Each product requires assembly in three different factories before it can be sold.
Each factory requires different amounts of time to work on each washer or dryer, according to
the following table.
Use of time
Time spent on washer
Time spent on dryer
Maximum time the factory is
available each day
Factory A
2 hours
1 hour
Factory B
4 hours
2 hours
Factory C
2 hours
2 hours
24 hours
16 hours
12 hours
From this table we conclude that it takes 2 + 4 + 2 = 8 hours to produce a single washer and
1 + 2 + 2 = 5 hours to produce a single dryer. Convert these times into a series of constraints.
The aim is to investigate the number of washers and dryers produced each day.
Think
1
Identify the decision variables.

(a) What is the number of washers produced
each day?
(b) What is the number of dryers produced
each day? (You could just as easily choose
x for dryers and yfor washers.)
WriTe
Let x = number of washers made daily

Let y = number of dryers made daily
Consider the daily capacity of factory A.
For factory A:
Time spent on x washers = 2x hours
Time spent on y dryers = 1y hours
Maximum time spent on items = 24 hours
Turn this into an inequation. (Because

24 hours is a maximum, we could use less
time, therefore the less than or equal sign
is used.)
2x + 1y 24
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for factory B.
For factory B:
4x + 2y 16
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for factory C.
For factory C:
2x + 2y 12
Consider other (physical) constraints.

Obviously, both x and y cannot be negative,
since they represent a number
of washers and dryers.
x0
y0
List all the constraints together.
2x + y 24
4x + 2y 16
2x + 2y 12
x0
y0
It may or may not be reasonable to insist that x and y be integers. Is it possible to make 2.4washers in
a day? The answer to this is not necessarily obvious from the question, so for now, assume that x and y
can take any positive value.
446
Graphing the constraints

The next stage in the process is to graph the constraints as we did in the previous section on
simultaneous linear inequations, and determine the overlapping solution region.
Worked example 7
Graph the constraints from Worked example 6.

Think
WriTe/draW
List the constraints.
2x + y 24
4x + 2y 16
2x + 2y 12
x0
y0
(a) Since x 0 and y 0, we only need graph

in the first quadrant.
(b) Find intersection points with axes.
(c) Demonstrate that (0, 0) is in the solution
region of all three inequations.
2x + y = 24 has intercepts (0, 24) and (12, 0).

Since 2(0) + 0 24, then (0, 0) is inside the
solution region.
4x + 2y = 16 has intercepts (0, 8) and (4, 0).
Since 4(0) + 2(0) 16, then (0, 0) is inside the
solution region.
2x + 2y = 12 has intercepts (0, 6) and (6, 0).
Since 2(0) + 2(0) 12, then (0, 0) is inside the
solution region.
Graph each equation and shade the

non-solution region for each inequation.
(It is the 2nd and 3rd inequations that
ultimately determine the overlapped solution
region, shown as a clear area.)
y
24
8
6
0
46
12
Region required
Note the characteristic polygonal shape of the solution region. This will play a crucial role in the next stage.
The objective function

As mentioned at the start of this section, the third component of a linear programming problem is the
objective function. This is a function of the two decision variables usually relating to a cost, distance
or some other relationship between them. The object in linear programming is to maximise (or in some
cases minimise) the value of this function within the solution region. In theory, we would have to check
every point in our solution region to see which one gave us the maximum (or minimum) value required.
Even if we restricted ourselves to integers only, this could take a long time. Fortunately there is a
theorem (which will not be proved) that states:
The maximum (or minimum) of the objective function occurs at one of the vertices (corner points)
of the solution region polygon.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Worked example 8
When selling its clothes washers and dryers, the company can make a profit of $150 on each
washer and $100 on each dryer.
How many of each should be made to maximise the companys daily profit?
Think
1
List the decision variables.
WriTe/draW
Let x be the number of washers, and

y the number of dryers.
447
Identify the objective function.

$150 is made on each washer, $100 on
each dryer.
Label the vertices (corner points) of the

solution region polygon.
Profit = 150 number of washers

+ 100 number of dryers
= 150x + 100y
y
8
6
B
A
0
C
D
4
Region required
Find the coordinates of the vertices.

(a) The coordinates of the Points A, B and D
can be read directly from the graph.
(b) Point C is the point of intersection of the
two lines, whose equations are 4x + 2y = 16
and 2x + 2y = 12.
Therefore, to find the coordinates of point C,
solve these equations simultaneously.
(c) Eliminate one of the variables (y) by
subtraction and solve for the other
variable (x).
(d) Substitute back into one of the original
equations [1] or [2], to find the other
variable (y).
Point A: (0, 0)
Point B: (0, 6)
Point D: (4, 0)
Equation 1: 4x + 2y = 16
Equation 2: 2x + 2y = 12
2x = 4
x=2
Substitute into [1]:
[1]
[2]
[1] [2]
4(2) + 2y = 16
8 + 2y = 16
2y = 8
y=4
Point C: (2, 4)
5
Since the maximum profit will occur at one of

the vertices, evaluate the objective function for
each vertex in the solution region.
Profit = 150x + 100y

Point A (0, 0): Profit = 150(0) + 100(0) = 0
Point B (0, 6): Profit = 150(0) + 100(6) = 600
Point C (2, 4): Profit = 150(2) + 100(4) = 700
Point D (4, 0): Profit = 150(4) + 100(0) = 600
Find the maximum profit.
Maximum profit ($700) occurs when x = 2, y = 4.

Thus, the company should make 2 washers and
4 dryers per day.
Let us now combine all the stages into a single example.

Worked example 9
A company is deciding how much to invest in two new calculator models, graphics (x) and
CAS ( y). They will base their decision on the capacity of their workforce to design, assemble and
ship the devices. They wish to ship as many calculators as possible. The workforce restrictions
are outlined in the following table. (All restrictions are per thousand calculators.)
Design phase
Assembly phase
Shipping
1 worker
3 workers
2 workers
CAS
11 workers
4 workers
1 worker
Total capacity
99 workers
65 workers
40 workers
Graphics
Use linear programming methods to determine the number of calculators (in thousands) that
should be built.
448
Think
WriTe/draW
Let x = number of graphics calculators

(in thousands)
Let y = number of CAS calculators
(in thousands)
State the constraints. Clearly both x and y must

not be negative.
Design:
Assembly:
Shipping:
Non-negative values:
Identify the objective function.

The question stated that the company wishes to
make as many calculators as possible.
Objective function:
Number = x + y
Graph the constraint inequations and identify

the feasible region. Because of non-negative
restriction on x and y, draw the graph in the
1st quadrant only.
The second graph shows an enlarged version of

the feasible region.
y
40
(g) Similarly, solve simultaneously

3x + 4y = 65 and 2x + y = 40 to find
coordinates of point D.
(h) Multiply [7] by 4 to have the same
y-coefficient as [6].
(i) Subtract the two equations.
(j) Solve for x.
(k) Substitute the value of x into equation [6].
(l) Solve for y.
20 21.7
99
y
Region required
16.25
Find the coordinates of the vertices of the feasible

region. (Coordinates of points A, B and E can be
read directly from the graph.)
(a) Solves imultaneously x + 11y = 99 and
3x + 4y = 65 to find the coordinates of
point C.
(b) Multiply [4] by 3 to have the same
x-coefficient as [5].
(c) Subtract the 2 equations.
(d) Solve for y.
(e) Substitute the value of y into equation [4].
(f) Solve for x.
[1]
[2]
[3]
Region required
16.25
9
0
1x + 11y 99
3x + 4y 65
2x + 1y 40
x0
y0
D
E
x
20 21.7
Point A: (0, 0) Point B: (0, 9) Point E: (20, 0)

Point C: Intersection of x + 11y = 99
[4]
and 3x + 4y = 65
[5]
3 [4]:
3x + 33y = 297
3 [4] [5]:
29y
y
x + 11(8)
x + 88
x
= 232
=8
= 99
= 99
= 11
Point C: (11, 8)
Point D: Intersection of 3x + 4y = 65
and 2x + y = 40
4 [7]:
[6]
[7]
8x + 4y = 160
4 [7] [6]:
5x
x
3(19) + 4y
57 + 4y
4y
y
= 95
= 19
= 65
= 65
=8
=2
Point D: (19, 2)
449
Substitute coordinates of each corner point

into the objective function and choose the
maximum. (Remember that x and y are in
thousands.)
Objective function:
Number = x + y
Point A: (0, 0), number = 0 + 0 = 0
Point B: (0, 9), number = 0 + 9 = 9
Point C: (11, 8), number = 11 + 8 = 19
Point D: (19, 2), number = 19 + 2 = 21*
*Maximum
Point E: (20, 0), number = 20 + 0 = 20
So, the company should make 19 000graphics and
2000 CAS calculators.
Sometimes the constraints are related to each other, rather than a constant as in the previous examples.
Worked example 10
Jenny spends some of her spare time outside school hours playing netball
and working a part-time job. Each week she has a maximum of 20 hours
TUTorial
eles-1302
available for the two activities.
Worked example 10
The number of hours that she spends playing sport is less than or equal to
four times the hours she spends working.
The hours spent at sport are greater than or equal to twice the hours spent at work.
Find the time spent on each activity during a week in order to maximise Jennys
earnings if she earns $2.50 per hour playing netball and $6 per hour working. Also find her
maximum earnings.
Think
1
x = number of hours spent at sport

y = number of hours spent at work
State the constraints. Maximum of

20 hours available. (Clearly both x and y are
non-negative.)
x + y 20
x 4y
x 2y
x0
y0
Identify the objective function. (The objective

is to maximise earning.)
Objective function:
Earnings = 2.5x + 6y
Graph the constraints.
x + y = 20 has intercepts (0, 20) and (20, 0),

since 0 + 0 20 is true, (0, 0) is inside the
solution region.
x = 4y has an intercept of (0, 0)
When x = 20, y = 5
(20, 5)
The boundary lines for constraints [2] and [3]

pass through the origin. Therefore, a second
point is required to sketch each line. Also a
test point other than (0, 0) must be selected for
these constraints.
450
WriTe/draW
[1]
[2]
[3]
Consider (20, 0) as a test point.

Since 20 4(0) is untrue, then (20, 0) is outside
the solution region.
x = 2y has an intercept of (0, 0)
When x = 20, y = 10
(20, 10)
Consider (20, 0) as a test point.
Since 20 2(0), is true, then (20, 0) is inside the
solution region.
Identify the feasible region overall.

We are dealing with the 1st quadrant only.
y
20
Region required
(20, 10)
(1313 , 6 23) B
(20, 5)
A
C (16, 4)
x
0
20
5
Identify the coordinates of the vertices of the

feasible region.
(a) To find coordinates of point B, solve
x + y = 20 and x = 2y simultaneously.
Point A: (0, 0)
Point B: Intersection of x + y = 20
and
x = 2y
[5] becomes
x 2y = 0
[4] [6]:
3y = 20
y = 62
[4]
[5]
[6]
x = 2 62
3
x=
Point B: (131, 62)
3
131
3
(b) To find coordinates of point C, solve

x + y = 20 and x = 4y simultaneously.
Point C: Intersection of x + y = 20
and
x = 4y
[8] becomes:
x 4y = 0
[7] [9]:
5y = 20
y=4
x = 4(4)
x = 16
Point C: (16, 4)
Substitute coordinates of each point into

the objective function to find the maximum
earnings.
Objective function:
Earnings = 2.5x + 6y
Point A: (0, 0) earnings = 2.5(0) + 6(0) = 0
Point B: (13 13, 6 23)
Earnings = 2.5(13 13) + 6(6 23) = 73.33
Point C: (16, 4) earnings = 2.5(16) + 6(4) = 64
So, Jenny should play netball for 1313 hours and
work for 6 23 hours for maximum earnings of $73.33.
exercise 11C
[7]
[8]
[9]
linear programming
1 A factory produces two different models of transistor radio. Each model requires two workers to
assemble it. The time taken by each worker varies according to the following table.
Worker 1
Worker 2
Model A
5 minutes
5 minutes
Model B
18 minutes
4 minutes
360 minutes
150 minutes
Maximum time available for each worker
The company makes $2.50 on each of Model A sold and $4.00 on each of Model B sold.
a Define the decision variables.
b We6 Write the constraints as linear inequations.
c We 7 Graph the constraints and indicate the solution region.
d State the objective function.
e We8 Use linear programming methods to find how many of each radio should be made to
maximise takings.
diGiTal doCS
doc-9489
SkillSHEET 11.3
Solving simultaneous
equations using the
elimination method
doc-9490
SkillSHEET 11.4
Using the corner point
method
for maximising or
minimising
the objective function
doc-9491
linear programming
451
2 At a car spray-painting workshop, each car receives three coats of paint, all of which have to be
completed within one day. There are two types of car: sedan and utility. The times taken for each are
listed in the following table.
Stage of painting
1st stage
2nd stage
3rd stage
Sedan
5 minutes
9 minutes
6 minutes
Utility
7 minutes
8 minutes
5 minutes
140 minutes
183 minutes
120 minutes
Total time available for each stage

a
b
c
d
e
Define the decision variables.

Write the constraints as linear inequations.
Graph the constraints and indicate the feasible region.
State the objective function.
Use linear programming methods to work out how many of each vehicle type should be sprayed
to maximise the total number of vehicles sprayed.
3 A large electronics firm must decide on the number of different models of computer monitor and
models of hard disk drive that it will manufacture. For each model of each type there are the following
budgetary constraints for different departments. (All budgetary numbers are in thousands of dollars.)
Department
Marketing
Development
Design
Production
Computer monitor
11
22
11
Disk drive
12
320
319
594
264
Total budget available

a
b
c
d

Write the constraints as linear inequations.
Graph the constraints and indicate the solution region.
Use linear programming methods to find how many models of monitor and disk drive should be
made to maximise profit, given that each monitor model provides a profit of $150 000 and each
disk drive model provides a profit of $120 000.
4 Consider the washer and dryer problem in Worked examples 68. How would the solution change if the
profit per washer was modified to $120 and the profit per dryer was modified to $130?
5 We9 The Swiss Army Diet requires that a person eat only two foods: apples and cheese. A dieter is
told that they may eat as much food as they wish, subject to the dietary constraints listed in the table.
Amount of vitamin X
An apple
Amount of vitaminY
3 units
3 units
A piece of cheese
10 units
4 units
Number of units
Maximum of 98
Minimum of 50
Each apple also supplies 100 calories, while each piece of cheese also supplies 85calories. Use
linear programming techniques to determine the number of apples and pieces of cheese needed for
the minimum calorie intake.
6 A paint shop mixes two kinds of paint indoor paint and outdoor paint subject to the following
constraints:
1. At least 30 litres of paint in total must be mixed.
2. Indoor paint requires 3 units of dye, while outdoor paint requires 8 units of dye and there is a
maximum of 100 units of dye available.
Indoor paint yields a profit of $2.50 per litre, while outdoor paint yields $3.25 per litre. Use
linear programming techniques to determine the volume of indoor and outdoor paint to be mixed to
maximise the shops profit.
452
7 We 10 A flower grower sells roses and tulips. She has enough land to grow no more than 3000 of
these plants altogether, subject to the following constraints:

1. The number of roses that she grows is less than or equal to 3 times the number of tulips grown.
2. The number of roses is greater than or equal to twice the number of tulips grown.
If she sells roses for $15 each and tulips for $6 each, find the number of each that would maximise
her income from the sale of these plants.
8 An investment fund manager is given a maximum of $100 000 to invest. She invests in shares and gold
according to the following constraints:

1. The value of the shares must be less than or equal to 2 times the value of gold.
2. The value of the shares must be greater than or equal to
1
2
the value of gold.
Historically, shares have returned 10% (they increase in value by 10%) per year, while gold has
returned 16% per year. Use linear programming techniques to determine the managers investment
strategy to maximise profit (or return).
9 mC The required region shown in the following graph is best described by which set of
inequations?
a 2x + 4y 8
2y 3x 0
x0
y0
d 4x + 2y 0
3y 2x 0
x0
y0
B 4x + 2y 0
3y 2x 0
x0
y0
e 2x + 4y < 8
2y 3x < 0
x>0
y>0
C 2x + 4y 8
2y 3x 0
x0
y0
y
5
4
3
2
1
0
(1, 1.5)
1 2 3 4 5
Region required
10 A small used car yard stocks sedans and wagons. Due to limited space
in the yard, they cannot have more than 50 cars at any one time. Since
50 F
they know that sedans are more popular than wagons, they decide never
40
C
30 E
to have more wagons than sedans in stock. On average, they can purchase
20
a wagon for $12 000 and a sedan for $12 500. To minimise insurance
D
10
B
A
costs, they cannot have more than $490 000 worth of stock at any given
O 10 20 30 40 50 x
time. Let x = the number of wagons and y = the number of sedans in
Region required
the car yard.
Use a linear programming method to answer the following.
a Write down the 5 constraints involved.
b The constraints are sketched on the graph as shown. Identify the inequations with the boundary
lines OC, BFand AE.
c Write down the coordinates of each of the points C and D.
d If sedans make an average profit of $3500 and wagons make an average profit of $4000, optimise
the number of each to stock to maximise profit.
diGiTal doC
doc-9492
WorkSHEET 11.2
453
11d
inTeraCTiViTY
int-0192
applications of linear
programming
applications
The applications in this section are particularly suited for the case where there are only two decision
variables (x and y). In practice, when more decision variables are allowed, these problems can be much
more sophisticated, but this is beyond the scope of Further Mathematics.
Blending problems
Blending consists of combining raw material from several different sources into a single composite. The
raw materials contain one or more chemicals (or other components) in varying amounts, which are then
restricted in some way in the blended composite.
Worked example 11
A miller can buy wheat from three suppliers:

Airy Farm, Berry Farm and Cherry Farm.
In each case the wheat is contaminated
with two things bran and husks. When
combined, the wheat must contain no more
than 5% bran and no more than 4% husks.
The miller wishes to make 50 tonnes of wheat
in total, by purchasing from each farm. Each
farms wheat contains the following amounts
of bran and husks.
Airy Farm
Berry Farm
Cherry Farm
Maximum amount of
contaminant allowed
Bran
3%
5%
7%
5%
Husks
5%
2%
6%
4%
Cost per tonne

$70
$60
$40
Airy Farm charges $70 per tonne, Berry Farm charges $60 per tonne and Cherry Farm charges
$40per tonne.
Use linear programming techniques to find the amount of wheat to purchase from each supplier
in order to keep costs to a minimum. That is:
a identify the decision variables
b define the constraint inequation caused by the restriction on bran
c define the constraint inequation caused by the restriction on husks
d define the remaining constraints
e graph the solution region
f define the objective function
g find the amount of wheat purchased from each supplier.
Think
a Identify the decision variables. Note that there
are exactly 50 tonnes of wheat needed so if x and

y come from Airy and Berry farms, then the rest
must come from Cherry Farm.
b (a) Define the constraint due to bran.
(b) Multiply the inequation by 100.

(c) Expand and collect like terms.
(d) Multiply the inequation by 1, so the sign
of inequality changes.
454
WriTe/draW
a Let x = tonnes of wheat purchased from Airy Farm.
Let y = tonnes of wheat purchased from Berry Farm.

Let (50 x y) = tonnes of wheat purchased from
Cherry Farm.
b 3% of x + 5% of y + 7% of (50 x y) 5% of
50 tonnes
0.03x + 0.05y + 0.07(50 x y) 0.05(50)
3x + 5y + 7(50 x y) 5(50)
3x + 5y + 350 7x 7y 250
4x 2y + 350 250
4x 2y 100
4x + 2y 100
c Define the constraint due to husks.
c 5% of x + 2% of y + 6% of (50 x y) 4% of
50 tonnes
0.05x + 0.02y + 0.06(50 x y) 0.04(50)
5x + 2y + 6(50 x y) 4(50)
5x + 2y + 300 6x 6y 200
x 4y + 300 200
x 4y 100
x + 4y 100
d Complete the list of constraints. Note also that
we need to look in the 1st quadrant only, since

all supplies of wheat must be non-negative.
Supply of wheat from Cherry Farm must be
non-negative too.
e 1 Graph the solution region.
d x0
y0
50 x y 0 or x y 50 or
x + y 50
e
y
50 A
25
0
Find the coordinates of the vertices of the

solution region.
(a) Point B is the intersection of
4x + 2y = 100 and x + 4y = 100.
(b) Multiply [2] by 4 to eliminate x from
the simultaneous equations.
(c) Solve for y.
(d) Substitute the value of y into [1] and
solve for x.
(e) Point C is the intersection of
x + 4y = 100 and x + y = 50.
(f) Subtract equations to eliminate x and
solve for y.
(g) Substitute the value of y into [3] and
solve for x.
f Define the objective function. The desired
result is the values of x and y which produce the

minimum cost.
g 1 (a) Substitute the coordinates of each
vertex into the objective function.

(b) Determine the minimum cost.
Determine the amounts from each

supplier.
Region required
B
25
50
100
Point A is (0, 50).

4x + 2y = 100
x + 4y = 100
4 [2]:
4x + 16y = 400
4 [2] [1]:
14y = 300
y = 21.43
Substitute into [1]: 4x + 2(21.43) = 100
4x + 42.86 = 100
x = 14.29
Thus, point B is (14.29, 21.43)
x + 4y = 100
x + y = 50
[2] [3]:
3y = 50
y = 16.67
x + 16.67 = 50
x = 33.33
Thus, point C is (33.33, 16.67)
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
f Cost = $70x + $60y + $40 (50 x y)
= 70x + 60y + 2000 40x 40y

Cost = 30x + 20y + 2000
g Point A: x = 0, y = 50
Cost = 30(0) + 20(50) + 2000 = $3000

Point B: x = 14.29, y = 21.43
Cost = 30(14.29) + 20(21.43) + $2000
= $2857.30
Point C: x = 33.33, y = 16.67
Cost = 30(33.33) + 20(16.67) + 2000
= $3333.30
Since point B gives minimum costs, purchase:
14.29 tonnes from Airy (x)
21.43 tonnes from Berry (y)
14.28 tonnes from Cherry (50 x y).
455
In order for there to be exactly two decision variables, there must be exactly three sources of material.
In Worked example 11 these were the three farms. If only two sources were available to provide the
blended composite, then the solution would be a line segment, not a feasible region. There is no limit on
the number of constraints (bran and husks); there can be as many of these as necessary.
Transportation problems
Consider a company which produces a single item in a number of factories for a number of showrooms.
Transportation problems are concerned with how many from each factory should be sent to each
showroom, so that each showrooms demand for the product is fully met. Furthermore, there are
different shipping costs between the factories and the showrooms. In Further Mathematics we are
restricted to two factories and two distributors.
Worked example 12
Birmingham Bicycle Builders makes bicycles at two factories and ships

them to two different distributors.
TUTorial
Factory A produces 100 bicycles; Factory B produces 150.
eles-1303
Worked example 12
Distributor X wants 70 bicycles;
Distributor Y wants 90.
Factory A
Factory B
Furthermore, the shipping costs between
Distributor X
$6
$7
factories (in dollars per bicycle) and
Distributor Y
$3
$5
distributors are shown in the table at right.
Use linear programming techniques to determine the number of bicycles shipped between
factories and distributors in order to minimise total shipping cost. That is:
a define the decision variables and summarise in a table
b define the constraints based on the fact that all shipments must be non-negative
c graph the solution region
d define the objective function
e determine the best way to ship to minimise cost.
Think
a 1 Define the decision variables.
(The controlling influence is what the

distributors want.)
(a) Distributor X needs 70 bicycles. Find
how many it gets from each factory.
(b) Proceed similarly for distributor Y.
456
WriTe/draW
a Let x = number of bicycles shipped to
distributor X from factory A.

Therefore 70 x is the number shipped to
X from factory B.
Let y = number of bicycles shipped to
distributor Y from factory A.
Therefore 90 y is the number shipped to
Y from factory B.
Summarise the decision variables, supply

and demand data in a table.
b 1 Define constraints based on the fact that all
Total
demand
Factory Factory from each
A
B
distributor
Distributor X
70 x
70
Distributor Y
90 y
90
Total supply
from each
factory
100
150
b x0
shipments must be non-negative amounts.
y0
70 x 0 or x 70
90 y 0 or y 90
Define the remaining constraints on each

factorys supply.
Factory A:
x + y 100
Factory B: 70 x + 90 y 150
160 x y 150
x y 10
x + y 10
c 1 (a) Graph the solution region. Note
that there are six constraints, but that

the first two force us to look at the
1st quadrant only.
(b) Label the vertices of the feasible region.
y
c 100
90
B
C
Region
required
D
A
10
F
0 10
x + y = 10
y = 90
2
Determine the coordinates of the vertices.

The intersection of a diagonal line with a
vertical or horizontal line is done easily
without using simultaneous linear equations
as follows.
For point C:
substitute y = 90 into x + y = 100.
For point D:
substitute x = 70 into x + y = 100.
d Determine the objective function from the
shipping cost table.
E
x
70 100
x + y = 100
x = 70
Point A: (0, 10)

Point B: (0, 90)
Point C: (10, 90)
Point D: (70, 30)
Point E: (70, 0)
Point F: (10, 0)
d Factory A to distributor X:
x bicycles at $6 per bicycle

Factory A to distributor Y:
y bicycles at $3 per bicycle
Factory B to distributor X:
(70 x) at $7 per bicycle
Factory B to distributor Y:
(90 y) at $5 per bicycle
Total cost = 6x + 3y + 7(70 x) + 5(90 y)
= 6x + 3y + 490 7x + 450 5y
= x 2y + 940
457
e 1 Determine the cost for each vertex and find
the minimum cost.
Determine the value of each variable, and

thus, the amount to ship from each factory to
each distributor.
e Point A: Cost = (0) 2(10) + 940 = 920
Point B: Cost = (0) 2(90) + 940 = 760

Point C: Cost = (10) 2(90) + 940 = 750*
*Minimum
Point D: Cost = (70) 2(30) + 940 = 810
Point E: Cost = (70) 2(0) + 940 = 870
Point F: Cost = (10) 2(0) + 940 = 930
Minimum costs occur when:

x = 10, y = 90.
Ship 10 from factory A to distributor X.
Ship 90 from factory A to distributor Y.
Ship (70 10) = 60 from factory B to
distributor X.
Ship (90 90) = 0 from factory B to
distributor Y.
Note that the demand from each distributor is always met. In Worked example 12, distributorX
received 10 + 60 = 70 bicycles, while distributor Y received 90 + 0 = 90. However, there is a surplus in
factory B of 90 bicycles. This surplus could be shipped to a third distributor. Under what conditions will
there be no surplus?
manufacturing problems
Manufacturing problems involve manufacturing more than one item (in Further Mathematics, exactly
two items) and having to share resources such as money, staff, parts or time. Worked examples 6 to 9 in
the previous section demonstrated such problems, as did questions 1 to 4 of Exercise 11C. Therefore,
there will be no more problems of this type until the Chapter review.
limitations of linear programming techniques

Many of the linear programming problems we have encountered required that the decision variables
be positive integers; for example, they referred to quantities like the number of bicycles shipped from
a factory or the number of calculators manufactured. However, what happens if the solution region for
such a problem has vertices that are not integers? Consider the following example.
A manufacturer makes two products blankets and cookware sets that need to be shipped in
special containers. Each blanket weighs 3.7 kg and has a volume of 6300 cm3. Each cookware set weighs
25 kg and has a volume of 5000 cm3. The shipping containers can hold 250 kg and have a maximum
volume of 200 000 cm3. Use linear programming techniques to determine the largest number of each
item that can be shipped in one container for optimal efficiency.
The decision variables are: let x = number of blankets shipped
let y = number of cookware sets shipped.
The constraints are: x 0
y0
3.7x + 25y 250
y
6300x + 5000y 200000 or
Region
required
20
6.3x + 5y 200 (dividing by 1000)
The solution region is shown at right.
The vertices are found as follows. The intersection of the two lines
shown (Point B) is found by solving
the simultaneous linear equations:
3.7x + 25y = 250
6.3x + 5y = 200
The solution is x = 26.98, y = 6.01.
The other vertices are (0, 10) and (31.7, 0).
The objective function, which we wish to maximise, is:
Objective function: number = x + y.
458
10
0
C
x
10 20 30 40
The values of the objective function are:

Point A: (0, 10); number = 10
Point B: (26.9, 6.01); number = 32.91* *Maximum
Point C: (31.7, 0); number = 31.7
Note that the optimal solution (26.9, 6.01) has non-integer values for x and y. How is it possible to
ship 26.9 blankets and 6.01 cooking sets? This is a class of problem known as integer programming,
which is beyond the scope of Further Mathematics; however, a possible solution is given as follows.
y
Region required
10
A
B
5
C
0
10
20
30
Consider the integer points closest to the optimal solution: (27, 6) and its nearest 8neighbours,
(26, 7), (27, 7), (28, 7), . . ., (28, 5).
Check each one in turn to see if they satisfy the constraints and choose the one that has the largest
objective function value.
The completion of this problem is left as question 7 in Exercise 11D.
exercise 11d
applications
1 We 11 A local restaurant owner buys his orange juice from three suppliers: A, B and C. In each case
the juice contains unwanted pulp and seeds. When combined, the juice must contain no more than
5% pulp and no more than 3% seeds. The owner wishes to purchase a total of 100litres of juice from
among the three suppliers. Each suppliers juice contains the following amounts of pulp and seeds:
Supplier A
Supplier B
Supplier C
Maximum amount of
contaminant allowed
Pulp
7%
6%
3%
5%
Seeds
5%
3%
2%
3%
Cost per litre ()

35
45
55
Supplier A charges $0.35 per litre, supplier B charges $0.45 per litre and supplier C charges
$0.55 per litre. Use linear programming methods to find the amount of juice to buy from each
supplier in order to minimise the cost. That is:
a identify the decision variables
b define the constraint inequation caused by the restriction on pulp
c define the constraint inequation caused by the restriction on seeds
d define the remaining constraints
e graph the solution region
f define the objective function
g find the amount of juice purchased from each supplier.
2 A canner of fruit salad can buy from three different suppliers, A, B and C, subject to the following
restrictions on the minimum amount of peaches and cherries in the salad.
Supplier A
Supplier B
Supplier C
Minimum amount of
ingredient allowed
Ingredient
Peaches
Cherries
23%
5%
20%
3%
30%
7%
22%
4%
Cost per kg
($)
1.10
0.90
1.40
Use linear programming techniques to find the amount of salad to buy

from each supplier to make up a total of 100kg with the minimum cost.
459
3 A refinery gets its petrol from three oil wells. Each well provides oil with a certain amount of lead and
iso-octane according to the following table. The blended product must contain a maximum of 3.5% lead
and a minimum of 65% iso-octane.
Ingredient
Oil well A
Oil well B
Oil well C
Amount of ingredient
allowed
Lead
4%
2%
6%
3.5%
maximum
Iso-octane
70%
60%
80%
65%
minimum
Cost per litre ($)

0.24
0.22
0.26
Use linear programming techniques to determine how much to buy, at minimum cost, from each well
per 100litres of petrol refined.
4 We 12 Kumquat Computers produces computers at its two factories and ships them to two
distributors. Each factory produces 35 computers per day.
Distributor X requires 30 computers; distributor Y requires 25.
The shipping costs (in dollars per computer) between the factories and the distributors are shown in the
table below:
Distributor X
Distributor Y
Factory 1
$25
$20
Factory 2
$55
$35
Use linear programming methods to find the number of computers shipped between factories and
distributors in order to minimise the cost. That is:
a define the decision variables
b define the constraints based on the fact that all shipments must be non-negative
c graph the solution region
d define the objective function
e determine the best way to ship to minimise cost.
5 A manufacturer of refrigerators has two factories: the first produces 60 refrigerators per week, the
second produces 25 per week. Their two distributors require 30 and 45 refrigerators respectively. The
shipping costs (in dollars per refrigerator) table is given below:
Distributor X
Distributor Y
Factory 1
$18
$20
Factory 2
$24
$27
Use linear programming techniques to determine the best way to ship to minimise cost.
6 A shoemaker has two factories which produce 50 and 80 dozen pairs each. These are shipped to
two factory outlets, Outlet X and Outlet Y which require 50 and 30 dozen pairs each respectively. The
shipping costs (in dollars per dozen pairs) table is given below:
Outlet X
Outlet Y
Factory 1
$14
$16
Factory 2
$11
$8
Use linear programming techniques to determine the best way to ship to minimise cost.
7 Refer back to the text example on pages 4589,
which illustrated a limitation of the linear

programming techniques used in this chapter.
The optimal solution involved non-integers but
the situation required integer solutions. The
9integer points surrounding the optimal
solution are shown in the diagram
{(26, 7), (27, 7), (28, 7), . . . (28, 5)}.
460
y
10
Region required
B
5
C
0
10
20
30
The constraints are: x 0

y0
3.7x + 25y 250
6.3x + 5y 200
The objective function is: number = x + y.
Check each integer point to see if the values satisfy the constraints and determine which one
maximises the objective function. That is, find the maximum numbers of blankets and cookware sets
that can be shipped.
8 mC A cereal retailer obtains a particular type of cereal from three different suppliers, P, Q and R,
subject to the following restrictions on the amounts of sultanas and dried apricots.
Sultanas
15%
19%
12%
14%
Supplier P
Supplier Q
Supplier R
Minimum amount of
ingredient needed
Apricots
12%
10%
15%
11%
Cost per kg ($)

1.20
0.90
1.10
The total amount of cereal required is 100 kg.
a If x = the number of kilograms of cereal from Supplier P and
y = the number of kilograms of cereal from Supplier Q,

then the constraint inequation caused by the restriction on sultanas is:
a 15x + 12y 1.20
B 3x + 7y 200
C 3x + 7y 200
d 3x + 5y 400
e 3x + 5y 400
b The inequation which is not a constraint for this situation is:
a 3x + 5y 400
B x0
C y0
d x + y 100
e x + y 100
c The feasible region for this situation is:
a
y
1
1333
100
y
100
80
2
663
287
0
287
2
663 80 100
Region required
y
100
80
1
2
663 100 1333
Region required
y
100
80
287
287
0
100 13313
287
Region required
y
100
80
1
2
663 100 1333
1
2
663 100 1333
Region required
Region required
9 mC The line shown below has the equation of the form 2y + 3x = 6c.
The value of c must therefore be:

a 2
B 5
C 6
d 6
e 5
y
15
10
5
0
10
15
461
Summary
linear inequations
Linear inequations are written in the form ax + by < c, where the < sign can be replaced by >, or
and have a corresponding linear equation ax + by = c.
The solution to a linear inequation is a region (or half-plane) either above or below the graph of the
corresponding linear equation.
To determine the solution region:
1. plot the corresponding linear equation that forms the boundary of the region
2. pick any point above or below the boundary line
3. if the point satisfies the linear inequation, then the solution region is half-plane, containing the
test point, otherwise it is the other half-plane. Shade the region not required.
4. inequations with the signs < or > do not have the equation line as part of the solution region and
are indicated with a dashed line.
Simultaneous linear
inequations
Simultaneous linear inequations are a collection of linear inequations that must be satisfied at the
same time.
To determine the solution region:
1. solve each inequation separately (on the same set of axes)
2. determine the region of overlap between all inequations.
linear programming
Linear programming problems are made up of three components:

1. a set of decision variables (in Further Mathematics, exactly two decision variables, x and y)
2. a set of constraints on these variables, expressed as a set of simultaneous linear inequations
3. an objective function of these variables, which is either minimised or maximised.
To solve the general linear programming problem:
1. define the decision variables
2. define the constraint inequations as given
3. graph the constraints as a set of linear inequations
4. determine the coordinates of the vertices of the feasible region
5. define the objective function and decide whether it is to be minimised or maximised
6. the best (or optimal) value of the objective function is at one of the vertices of the solution
region, so substitute each vertex in turn and compute the objective function
7. select the values of x and y which minimise (or maximise) the objective function.
applications
Manufacturing problems have the following features.

1. There are two items being made (corresponding to the decision variables x and y).
2. There are constraints on the number of each item to be made based on time, money, labour and
so on.
3. There is a profit (or cost) objective function which is to be maximised (orminimised).
Blending problems have the following features.
1. There is one item to be manufactured, with raw material coming from exactly three suppliers.
2. The raw material from the three suppliers is blended into a single item of a given size, weight or
volume.
3. The material contains components in varying amounts which, after blending, must meet some
minimal (or maximal) standard. There should be at least two components whose blended
amount is restricted. These determine the constraints for the problem.
4. The objective function is based on the differing costs of the material from the three suppliers
and is to be minimised.
Transportation problems have the following features.
1. There is a single item being transported from exactly two factories to two distributors.
2. Each distributor has a given demand which is the controlling influence, while each factory has a
given level of production.
3. The constraints are based on the fact that all shipments must be non-negative quantities.
4. The objective function is based on differing costs of transportation from each factory to each
distributor and is to be minimised.
462
Chapter review
y
1 The region shown represents the inequation:

a
B
C
d
e
x + 2y 10
x + 2y 10
2x + y 10
2x + y 10
2x y 10
m U lTip l e
C ho iC e
10
5
0
5
10
Region required
2 Consider the inequation 4x + 3y 12. Which of the following statements is true? Of the three points
(0, 0), (3, 0) and (0, 4):

(3, 0) and (0, 4) are the only ones in the solution region.
(0, 0) is the only one in the solution region.
All 3 are in the solution region.
a
B
C
d
e
3 The clear area in the figure below represents the intersection of the solution
regions of three inequations in the 1st quadrant. One of the inequations is

x y 0. The other two inequations are:
a y 10 and x + y 0
B y 10 and x + y 12
C y 10 and x + y 12
d y 10 and x + y 12
e y 10 and x + y 12
4 Consider the graph shown.
a The blue line indicates the boundary of the region with inequation:
y
15
10
5
0
10 15
Region required
y
25
20
15
10
5
25x + 18y 450

25x + 18y 450
9x + 5y 125
9x + 5y 125
0 5 10 15 20 25 x
none of these
Region required
b The point (0, 20) lies on the boundary of the region with inequation:
a 2x + 5y 100
B 2x + 4y 100
C 5x + 2y 100
e none of these
d 5x + 2y 100
c If the objective function is Profit = x + 2y, then the values of x and y which maximise profit are:
a (5, 18)
B (12, 8.2)
C (12, 15.2)
d (12, 8.3)
e (0, 20)
5 Refer to the figure in question 3.
a Two of the vertices of the solution region are (0, 0) and (0, 10). The other two vertices are:
a (10, 2) and (5, 5)
B (2, 10) and (5, 6)
C (2, 10) and (6, 5)
d (2, 10) and (6, 6)
e (2, 12) and (6, 6)
b If these inequations were from a linear programming problem where the objective function is
Profit = 2.3x + 5.1y, then the values of x and y which maximise profit are:
a (0, 0)
B (0, 10)
C (10, 2)
d (6, 6)
e (2, 10)
a
B
C
d
e
6 At a fruit farm the cost of strawberries (x) is
$3.00per punnet and the cost of raspberries (y)

is $2.50 per punnet. A supermarket wishes to
purchase no more than 150 punnets and wishes
to pay no more than $400. A pair of inequations
which satisfies these constraints is:
a 2x + 2y 400
B x + y 150
5x + 6y 400
x + y 400
C 6x + 5y 800
d 5x + 6y 800
x + y 150
x + y 150
e 6x + 5y 800
2x + 2y 150
463
7 In a blending problem with only two decision variables, the maximum number of constraints on these
variables is:
a 1 constraint inequation
B 2 constraint inequations
C 3 constraint inequations
d 4 constraint inequations
e unlimited
8 A horticulturist wants to produce an organic fertiliser which is a blend of fertilisers from Farmer Higgs,
Farmer Hoggett and Farmer Hubbard. The fertilisers are contaminated with grass seeds and the basis of
the fertiliser is sheep manure. Each fertiliser contains the following amounts of seeds and manure. The
costs are also shown.
Seeds
Manure
Cost per tonne
Farmer Higgs
5%
60%
$45
Farmer Hoggett
2%
30%
$40
Farmer Hubbard
7%
60%
$50
5% maximum
50% minimum
Amount of constituent
The horticulturist wishes to produce 50 tonnes of the blended fertiliser at minimum cost.
Let x = the number of tonnes of fertiliser from Higgs and y = the number of tonnes of fertiliser from
Hoggett.
a The constraint inequation caused by the restriction on seeds is:
a 2x + 5y 100
B x + y 50
C 5x + 2y 100
d x0
e 2x + 5y 100
b The constraint inequation caused by the restriction on manure is:
a 2x + 5y 100
B 3y 50
C y0
d 3y 50
e 12x + 3y 50
c The objective function would be:
a Cost = 50 5x 10y
B Cost = 2500 95x 90y
C Cost = 2500 + 44x + 39yw
d Cost = 2500 5x 10y
e Cost = 45x + 40y 50
d At right is the feasible region for this situation.
The number of tonnes of fertiliser obtained from Farmer Hubbard is closest to:
a 0
y
B 8
50
40
C 16
(8 13, 1623)
30
d 33
(33 13, 1623)
20
e 50
10
0 10 20 30 40 50 x
Region required
Sh orT
anS Wer
1 State the inequation of the region shown at right.

2 Sketch the region represented by the inequation 2x + 3y > 24.
3 Sketch the region represented by the simultaneous linear inequations
x
+ 2y 10 and 2x + 3y 24.
4 Find the intersection point of the two lines that form boundaries for the
two regions in question 3.
464
y
10
5
10 5 0
5
5 10
Region required
5 A manufacturer of school desks requires three workers to build each desk. There are two models of
desk; plain and computer. The time spent on each desk by each worker is outlined in the following
table.
Worker A
Worker B
Worker C
Plain desk
15 minutes
20 minutes
30 minutes
Computer desk
50 minutes
40 minutes
30 minutes
Total time available

for each worker
350 minutes
360 minutes
450 minutes
a Define the decision variables.

b State the constraints on these variables.
6 Sketch the feasible region for the data in question5.
7 For the desk manufacturer in question 5, a plain desk results in a profit of $50, while a computer desk
earns $90 profit.

a State the objective function.
b Find the coordinates of the vertices of the feasible region.
c Find the number of each type of desk to manufacture to yield maximum profit.
8 A drug company can purchase its ingredients from three suppliers. The ingredients must contain a
minimum amount of three chemicals: Alchemia, Biologica and Chemoblast. Each suppliers mix, the
minimum requirements and the costs are displayed in the following table.
Alchemia
Biologica
Chemoblast
Cost per kg
Xerxes Chemicals
2%
4%
1%
$30
Yayhoo Drugs
3%
8%
17%
$22
Zorro Manufacturing
8%
9%
2%
$26
Minimum amount of chemical

required
4%
6%
2.65%
Altogether, the company wants to purchase 100 kg of ingredients. By letting x represent the amount
of ingredients purchased from Xerxes and y be the amount of ingredients purchased from Yayhoo,
state the constraints on the variables.
9 The Prime Car Company requires batteries for its cars which are manufactured in two factories.
Supplier A can ship 31 batteries per day, while supplier B can ship 29.
Factory 1 requires 23 batteries per day; factory 2 requires 19.
Supplier A
Supplier B
Factory 1
$3
$13
Factory 2
$11
$7
The shipping costs are summarised in the above table.

a Define the decision variables for this problem.
b List the constraints on these variables given that all shipments must be non-negative amounts.
c List the constraints due to the fact that each supplier has a maximum amount of batteries.
1 The Clive Norman electrical store wishes to stock electric stoves and microwaves. They have a
maximum of $12 000 to spend. Each microwave costs $250, while each stove costs $300, and they can
be sold to consumers for $310 and $370 respectively. However, the supplier states that it takes 6 hours
to make a microwave, but 4hours to make a stove, and that they can give only 240 hours to meeting
Clive Normans demand.
a State the decision variables.
b State the constraint imposed by the suppliers time limit.
ex Ten d ed
r eS p o n S e
465
State the constraint imposed by Clive Normans investment limit.

Graph the solution region.
State the objective function.
Determine the best number of each model to order to maximise profits.
2 Complete the blending problem that was posed in question 8 in the Short answer section for the
production of 100 kilograms of drug at minimum cost. The relevant data are replicated in the table
below.
c
d
e
f
Alchemia
Biologica
Chemoblast Cost per kg
Xerxes Chemicals
2%
4%
1%
$30
Yayhoo Drugs
3%
8%
17%
$22
Zorro Manufacturing
8%
9%
2%
$26
Minimum amount of chemical required
4%
6%
2.65%
3 A manufacturer ships car engines to two distributors from its two factories.
Factory 1 can produce 300 engines per month; factory 2 produces 600.
Distributor 1 requires 200 engines per month, while distributor 2 requires 450.
The shipping costs between factory and distributor are shown in the following table.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Practice
VCE exam
questions
Use StudyON to
access all exam
questions on this
topic since 2002.
Factory 1
Factory 2
Distributor 1
$15
$20
Distributor 2
$20
$15

State the constraints.
Graph the solution region.
Define the objective function.
Find the optimal values of the decision variables.
Unfortunately, Factory 2s output drops from 600 to 350. This means that there is no surplus
production. Discuss what happens to the solution region and the resulting optimal values of the
decision variables.
4 The Fairday Fitness Equipment Company manufactures treadmills and exercise bikes. The company
wishes to make and sell as many of each as possible but is restricted by the time (in hours) available
each month for assembling, testing and transporting these items, as set out below.
a
b
c
d
e
f
Assembly
Testing
Transport
Treadmills
Exercise bikes
240
200
400
Maximum time available (hours)
a Use linear programming techniques to determine the maximum number of treadmills and exercise
bikes that should be made and sold.

diGiTal doC
doc-9493
Test Yourself
Chapter 11
466
b If the items are transported by air instead of by road, the time required is drastically reduced. It
will then require only 1 hour to transport each of the items, and the maximum time available for
transporting items per month will be reduced to only 120 hours. What effect will these changes
have on the number of items transported?
ICT activities
Chapter opener
diGiTal doC
10 Quick Questions doc-9484: Warm up with a quick quiz on linear
inequations and linear programming. (page 439)
11a
linear inequations
diGiTal doCS
SkillSHEET 11.1 doc-9485: Practise solving inequations with one
variable. (page 441)
SkillSHEET 11.2 doc-9486: Practise solving inequations with two
variables. (page 441)
doc-9487: Investigate linear inequations. (page 441)
TUTorial
We2 eles-1250: Watch a tutorial on how to graph an
inequation and show that a point satisfies the equation.
(page 441)
inTeraCTiViTY
Sketching inequations int-0083: Use the interactivity to identify the
feasible region of the half-plane. (page 439)
11B
diGiTal doC
WorkSHEET 11.1 doc-9488: Graphing solutions to inequations and
finding feasible regions. (page 445)
TUTorial
We4 eles-1301: Watch a tutorial on finding the solution to a system
of linear inequations. (page 443)
11C
linear programming
diGiTal doCS
SkillSHEET 11.3 doc-9489: Practise solving simultaneous equations
using the elimination method. (page 451)
SkillSHEET 11.4 doc-9490: Practise using the corner point method for
maximising or minimising the objective function. (page 451)
doc-9491: Investigate linear programming. (page 451)
WorkSHEET 11.2 doc-9492: Applications of linear programming
(page 453)
TUTorial
We 10 eles-1302: Watch a tutorial on maximising the objective
function. (page 450)
11d
applications
TUTorial
We 12 eles-1303: Watch a tutorial that includes all steps of
minimising an objective function. (page 456)
inTeraCTiViTY
Applications of linear programming int-0192: By using the
interactivity, explore optimisation of the objective function of a
real-life problem. (page 454)
Chapter review
diGiTal doC
467
Answers CHAPTER 11
linear ineQUaTionS and
linear proGramminG
y
10
10 5
5
linear inequations
6
2 a
10
10
10
10
5 0
5
10 15
2
0
10
5
10 5 0
5
10
9 C
exercise 11B
10
inequations
1
y
10
10 5 0
5
10
y
20
1
0
5
10
10 0
10
10
3
1
0
5
10
10
y
10
10
20
y
10
10 5 0
5
20
10
y
10
10
10
Simultaneous linear
10 5 0
5
y
10
10
10
7 B, E
8
y
10
5 0
5
10 5 0
5
5
0
y
10
y
10
10
5
10 5 0
5
Unless stated otherwise, for all graphical

indicates the region
answers to chapter11,
required.
exercise 11a
y
10
y
10
5 0
5
10 5 0
5
10
0
5
10
y
10
5
10 5 0
5
11
10
10
y
10
7
y
10
5
5
10
10
468
y
10
0
10 5
5
10
0
5
10
12 D
13 a 2x + 2y 20, x + y 5, x 15, y 15,
x 0, y 0
Objective function:
Calorie intake = 100x + 85y
Solution: x = 6, y = 8, Calories = 1280
y
20
15
10
15
5
0
5 10 15 20
10
(6, 8)
exercise 11C
linear programming
1 a x = number of model A made,
y = number of model B made.
b x 0, y 0, 5x + 18y 360,
5x + 4y 150
c
30
y = outdoor paint
Constraints: x 0, y 0, 3x + 8y 100,
x + y 30
Objective function:
Profit = 2.50x + 3.25y
Solution: x = 33.33, y = 0, Profit = $83.33
30
20
10
10 20 30 40
y = number of utilities sprayed
b x 0, y 0, 5x + 7y 140, 9x + 8y 183,
6x + 5y 120
y
25
5 10 15 20 25 30 35
7 x = number of roses
y = number of tulips
Constraints: x 0, y 0, x + y 3000,
x 3y, x 2y
Objective function: Income = 15x + 6y
Solution: x = 2250, y = 750,
Income = $38 250
y
3000
20
15
10
5 10 15 20 25
d Number = x + y
e x = 7, y = 15, Vehicles = 22
3 a x = models of monitor
y = models of disk drive

b x 0, y 0, 7x + 8y 320, 11x + 7y 319,
22x + 12y 594, 11x + 3y 264
y
40
(8, 33)
30
5 10 15 20 25 30
d Profit = 150 000x + 120 000y
x = 8, y = 33, Profit = $5 160 000
4 The solution would be x = 0, y = 6, with a
profit of $780.
5 x = number of apples
y = number of pieces of cheese
Constraints: x 0, y 0,
3x + 10y 98, 3x + 4y 50
(3000, 1500)
20 40 60 80 100
( $1000)
20 litres from A, 40 litres from each of

B and C.
2 x = kg purchased from supplier A
y = kg purchased from supplier B
100 x y = kg purchased from supplier C
Constraints: 7x + 10y 800, 2x + 4y 300,
x 0, y 0, x + y 100
80
(25, 62.5)
y = value of gold
Constraints: x 0, y 0, x + y 100 000,
x 2y 0, x 0.5y 0
Objective function:
Profit = 0.1x + 0.16y
Solution: x = 33 333.33,
y = 66 666.67, profit = $14 000
y
100
80
60
40
20
0
(33, 66)
(66, 33)
20 40 60 80 100
( $1000)
9 C
10 a x + y 50
(66.7, 33.3)
8 x = value of shares
( $1000)
(21, 11)
10
(20, 40)
f Cost = 20x 10y + 5500 (in cents)

g x = 20, y = 40. Cost = $47.00. Purchase
B
1000 (2000, 1000)
(3000, 1000)
C
A
(2250, 750)
x
0
1000 2000 3000
(15, 22)
20
y
100
80
60
40
20
y
100
2000
(28, 2)
d Profit = 2.5x + 4y
e x = 18, y = 15, Profit = $105
2 a x = number of sedans sprayed
y = litres purchased from supplier B

100 x y = litres purchased from
supplier C
b 4x + 3y 200
c 3x + y 100
d x 0, y 0, x + y 100
5
0
20
6 x = indoor paint
15
10
10
40
applications
1 a x = litres purchased from supplier A

0
region.
BF is x + y 50
AE is 12 000x + 12 500y 490 000
c C (25, 25)
D (20, 20)
d 20 sedans and 20 wagons
exercise 11d
c (10, 10) does not lie in the solution
b OC is y x
150
Objective function:
Cost = 0.3x 0.5y + 140
x = 25, y = 62.5, Cost = $101.25
Purchase 25 kg from A, 62.5 kg from B
and 12.5 kg from C
3 x = litres purchased from supplier A
y = litres purchased from supplier B
100 x y = litres purchased from
supplier C
Constraints: 2x + 4y 250,
x + 2y 150, x 0, y 0,
x + y 100
y
100
75
62.5
12 000x + 12 500y 490 000

yx
x0
y0
100
(50, 50)
(75, 25)
0
100125150
469
Objective function:
Cost = 0.02 x 0.04y + 26
x = 0, y = 75. Cost = $23
x = 50, y = 50. Cost = $23
Purchase 75 L from B and 25 L
from C (none from A) or purchase
50 L from A and 50 L from B (none
from C)
4 a x = computers from factory 1 to
distributor X
y = computers from factory 1 to
distributor Y
(30 x) = computers from factory 2 to
distributor X
(25 y) = computers from factory 2 to
distributor Y
b x 0, y 0, x 30, y 25, x + y 35,
x + y 20
c
(50 x) = dozen pairs of

shoes from factory 2 to distributor X
y
50
20
30 35
d Cost = 30x 15y + 2525
50
(30 y) = dozen pairs of shoes from

factory 2 to distributor Y x 0, y 0,
x 50, y 30, x + y 50, x + y 0
Cost = 3x + 8y + 790 x = 0, y = 0.
Cost = $790 Ship 50 from factory
2 to distributor X, 30 from factory
2 to distributor Y.
7 Feasible solutions are (26, 5), (27, 5),
(26, 6). Choose either of the last 2 points
(x + y = 32).
The maximum number of Blankets and
cookware sets that can be shipped is 32.
8 a B
b D
c D
9 B
ChapTer reVieW
e x = 30, y = 5, Cost = $1550
Ship 30 from factory 1 to distributor X,

5 from factory1 to distributor Y,
20 from factory 2 to distributor Y
5 Variables:
x = refrigerators from factory 1 to
distributor X
y = refrigerators from factory 1 to
distributor Y
(30 x) = refrigerators from factory 2 to
distributor X
(45 y) = refrigerators from factory 2 to
distributor Y
y
60
50
45
50 60
x 0, y 0, x 30, y 45,
x + y 60, x + y 50
Cost = 6x 7y + 1935
x = 15, y = 45, Cost = $1530
Ship 15 from factory 1 to distributor X,
45 from factory 1 to distributor Y,
15 from factory 2 to distributor X.
6 Variables:
x = dozen pairs of shoes from factory 1 to
distributor X
y = dozen pairs of shoes from
factory 1 to distributor Y
470
15 18 23.2
7 a Profit = 50x + 90y

b (0, 0), (0, 7), (10, 4),
(12, 3), (15, 0)
c x = 12, y = 3, Profit = $870
8 6x + 5y 400; 5x + y 300; x + 15y 65

9 a Let x be the amount from supplier A to
factory 1,
(23 x) be the amount from supplier B.
Let y be the amount from supplier A to
factory 2,
(19 y) be the amount from supplier B.
b x 0, y 0, x 23, y 19
c x + y 31, x + y 13
of stoves
a B
b A
c C
5 a D
b B
6 C
7 E
8 a E
b B
c D
d A
60
40
40 48
e Profit = 60x + 70y

f x = 30, y = 15, Profit = $2850
2 Let x = amount (kg) from Xerxes,
y = amount (kg) from Yayhoo and

100 x y = amount (kg) from Zorro.
Constraints: 6x + 5y 400,
5x + y 300, x + 15y 65,
x 0, y 0, x + y 100
Objective function:
Cost = 2600 + 4x 4y
10
b 6x + 4y 240
c 250x + 300y 12 000
y
d
ShorT anSWer
30
9
7
1 a x = number of microwaves, y = number
D
E
B
1 x + 2y 10
2
y
0
y
15
exTended reSponSe
mUlTiple ChoiCe
1
2
3
4
5 a x = plain, y = computer
b x 0, y 0, 15x + 50y 350,
6
25
20
20x + 40y 360, 30x + 30y 450
30
y
35
4 27,67
5
0
10 5
5
10
y
100
75
50
25
10
5
10 5 0
5
10
25 50 75 100
Solution: x = 0, y = 80, Cost = $2280

None supplied by Xerxes, 80 kg supplied
by Yayhoo and 20 kg by Zorro.
3 a Let x = shipment from factory 1 to
distributor 1, (200 x) from factory 2 to

distributor 1.
Let y = shipment from factory 1 to
distributor 2, (450 y) from factory 2 to
distributor 2.
b x 0, y 0, x 200, y 450, x + y 50,
x + y 300
c
y
300
d Cost = 5x + 5y + 10 750
e x = 200, y = 0, Cost = $9750
f The solution region collapses to just
the line x + y = 300 between x = 0

and x = 200.
The objective function remains
unchanged. In theory, any value of
x along this line is possible, but by
examining the objective function, the
larger the x-value, the smaller the cost,
so x = 200, y = 100 is the optimal
solution, with a cost of $10 250.
4 a 80 treadmills, 40 exercise bikes

b Number of treadmills and bikes
transported could be any combination

of 60 of each to 80 and 40 respectively,
as long as the sum equals 120 items.
50
0
50
200 300
471
Exam practice 4
CHAPTERS 14, 1011
Core and module 3 graphs and relations

1 A set of data has the least-squares regression line equation:
distance = 5.9 3.38 time

The correlation coefficient is r = 0.7891. The coefficient of determination is closest to:
a 0.623%
B 0.789%
C 62.3%
d 68.0%
e 78.9%
2 The gradient of a straight line that passes through the points (0,
a 2
1
2
7)
and (6, 5) is:
d 1
m U lTip l e
C ho iC e
15 minutes

one mark.
e 2
3 Which of the following pairs of straight lines is parallel?

a y = 5x and y = 5x
C y = 5x 2 and y = 2 5x
e 3y + 12x = 0 and 2y = 8x + 3
B 2x + 3y = 0 and 2x 3y = 5
d 2y + 5x = 4 and 4y = 10x 4
4 Which rule below is represented by the graph shown?
2 x ,
0x2
a y =
x + 6, 2 < x 6
x ,
0x4
B y =
x + 6, 4 < x 6
x + 4, 0 x 2
C y =
x + 6, 2 < x 6
x + 4, 0 x 4
d y =
x + 6, 4 < x 6
y
6
4
2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6x
2 x ,
0x 3
y=
x
2
3,
3< x 6
5 The solution to the following pair of simultaneous equations is:
2x + 3y = 10
5x 2y = 13
a (2, 2)
B ( 1, 4)
C (5, 0)
d (3, 1)
e (1, 3)
6 A company determines the cost of hiring a car based on the number of hours of hire. The graph below
shows the costs.
Cost ($)
80
60
40
20
0
2 4 6 8
Number of hours
Indy needs a car for 1 hour. An hour after that he will need a car for 3hours. How much will he save by
hiring a car for 5hours in total, rather than a car for 1 hour and then another car for 3hours?
a $40
B $50
C $60
d $70
e $120
7 For the feasible region shown, determine the maximum result for the objective function P = 8x + y.
a
B
C
d
e
25
28
37
40
44
y
(2, 9)
Feasible
region
3.5
Exam practice 4
473
8 A mobile refreshments van sells tea and coffee. The business profits $1.50 per cup of tea sold and
$1 per cup of coffee sold. To run successfully, the business needs the daily profits to exceed $250 per
lunch break.
Let x represent the number of cups of tea sold and y represent the number of cups of coffee sold.
An inequality representing this situation is:
a x + 1.5y > 250
B x + y 250
C x 1.5y
e 1.5xy < 250
Total marks = 8
d 1.5x + y > 250
e x T ended
r e SponS e
20 minutes
1 Eshe is saving up for a house and has kept track of how much she has saved towards it each quarter. A
linear regression line is fitted to her data using the least-squares method.
The equation of this trend line is:
savings this quarter = 308 + 122 quarter.
a By how much does Eshe increase her savings each month according to the trend line?
b Use the equation to predict how much Eshe will save in the 7th quarter.
c If Eshe actually saved $1250 that quarter, determine the residual amount.
[1 mark]
[1 mark]
[1 mark]
2 Eshe has moved into a new home and needs to choose her telephone provider. Company A offers a
monthly line rental fee of $52 plus a charge of 15 cents per call.
a Write a cost function to describe the monthly fees where CA represents the cost ($) and n
represents the number of calls per month.
[1 mark]
b i Company B offers a fixed fee of $64 per month including unlimited local calls. Construct
a graph showing the two cost functions for the competing companies for 0 n 100.
ii Using this graph, or otherwise, determine how many calls Eshe would need to make per month
for the offer from company B to be cheaper.
[1 + 1 = 2 marks]
3 Eshes job is to put together quotes for a consulting firm. She finds that she likes to split her work time
between the office and home.
Let x be the number of hours she spends working from home per week.
Let y be the number of hours she spends in the office per week.
Eshe does not like to work more than 42 hours per week.
The following inequalities apply to Eshes working week:
x0
y0
x + y 42.
a Eshe feels that she is happiest working at least twice as many hours in the office as she does from
home. Copy and complete the following by inserting the correct inequality sign.
y ___ 2x
[1 mark]
b Solve the simultaneous equations:
x + y = 42
[1]
y = 2x
[2]
[2 marks]
y
c Below is the graph of the equation x + y = 42. Clearly:
42
i draw in the line y = 2x and
ii indicate the feasible region represented
x + y = 42
by x 0, y 0, x + y 42 and y 2x.
0
42
[1 + 1 = 2 marks]
d Eshe realises she is more productive working from home, completing on average three quotes
diGiTal doC
doc-10194
Solutions
exam practice 4
474
per hour. At the office, Eshe completes two quotes per hour. Define the objective function where
P represents the number of quotes produced per week.
[1 mark]
e i Determine the hours Eshe should work from the home and from the office to maximise the
number of quotes she produces each week.
ii What is the maximum number of quotes she can produce each week under these
constraints?
[1 + 1 = 2 marks]
Total marks = 14
ChapTEr 12
Loans and investments

diGiTal doC
doc-9494
10 Quick Questions
ChapTEr ConTEnTS
12a
12b
12C
12d
12E
12F
12G
12h
12i
12J
Simple interest
Bonds, debentures and term deposits
Compound interest
Reducing balance loans the annuities formula
Reducing balance loans further calculations
Hire-purchase
Reducing balance and flat rate loan comparisons
Effective rate of interest
Perpetuities
Annuity investments
introduction to growth and decay

in business
Certain quantities in nature or in business may change in a uniform (constant) way over time. A change
may be an increase, as in the case of the value of an investment such as a Christmas Club savings
account or an investment property, or it may be a decrease, like the effects of inflation on the buying
power of money.
Growth and decay can often be modelled by equations or graphs. These, in turn, can be used to
analyse the situations being modelled and to make predictions about them. For instance, if we know
an equation that relates the falling value of a car to time, the future value of the car can be determined.
A falling value of this type is called depreciation.
In this chapter and the next, we will investigate the general principles of growth and decay and take
a more detailed look at specific examples in the business world, such as simple and compound interest,
depreciation, home loans and annuity investments.
Growth models
If a quantity of money increases in size over a period of time, it is growing. There are three basic models
of growth:
Straight-line or simple interest
Exponential or compound interest
Annuities (for example, superannuation).
decay models
If a quantity of money decreases in size over a period of time, it is decaying. There are three basic
models of decay:
Straight-line
Exponential or reducing balance
Annuities in arrears (for example, home loans).
ChapTEr 12 Loans and investments
475
12a
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Simple interest
People often wish to buy goods and services

that they cannot afford to pay for at the time, but
which they are confident they can pay for over a
period of time. The options open to these people
include paying by credit card (usually at a very
high interest rate), lay-by (where the goods are
paid off over a period of time with no interest
charged but no access to or use of the goods until
the last payment is made), hire-purchase, or a
loan from the bank.
The last two options usually attract what is
called simple interest. This is the amount of
money charged by the financial institution for the
use of its money. It is calculated as a percentage
of the money borrowed multiplied by the number
of periods (usually years) over which the money
is borrowed.
As an example, Monica wishes to purchase a
television for $550, but does not currently have
the cash to pay for it. She makes an agreement to borrow the money from a bank at 12% p.a. (per year)
simple interest and pay it back over a period of 5 years. The amount of interest Monica will be charged
on top of the $550 is:
$550 12% 5 years which is $330.
Therefore, Monica is really paying $550 + $330 = $880 for the television.
Besides taking out a loan, you can also make an investment. One type of investment is depositing money
into an account with a bank or financial institution for a period of time. The financial institution uses your
money and in return adds interest to the account at the end of the period.
Total amount of loan or investment = initial amount or principal
+ interest
(charged or earned)
A=P+I
Simple interest is the percentage of the amount borrowed or invested multiplied by the number of time
periods (usually years). The amount is added to the principal either as payment for the use of the money
borrowed or as return on money invested.
PrT
100
I = simple interest charged or earned ($)

P = principal (money invested or loaned) ($)
r = rate of interest per period (% per period)
T = time, the number of periods (years, months, days) over which the agreement
operates
In the case of simple interest, the total value of

investment increases by the same amount per period.
Therefore, if the values of the investment at the end
of each time period are plotted, a straight line graph
is formed.
Hint: The interest rate, r, and time period, T, must be
stated and calculated in the same time terms; for example:
1. 4% per annum for 18 months must be calculated over
112 years, as the interest rate period is stated in years
(per annum);
2. 1% per month for 2 years must be calculated over
24 months, as the interest rate period is stated in
months.
476
Value of Investment
I=
Time
WorkEd ExaMplE 1
Find the simple interest charged on borrowing $325 for 5 years at 3% p.a. (per annum or per year).
Think
1
Write the simple interest formula.
List the values of P, r and T. Check that r and T are

in the same time terms.
Use a calculator to evaluate.
Write your answer.
WriTE
PrT
100
P = $325
r = 3% per year
T = 5 years
I=
325 3 5
100
I = 48.75
The interest charged for borrowing $325 over
5years is $48.75.
I=
WorkEd ExaMplE 2
Jan invested $210 with a building society in a fixed deposit account that paid 8% p.a. simple
interest for 18 months.
a How much did she receive after the 18 months?
b Represent the account balance for each of the 18 months graphically.
a 1 Write the simple interest formula.

2
List the values of P, r and T. Check that r and

T are in the same time terms. Need to convert
18 months into years.
Substitute the values of the pronumerals into the

4
5
Write the answer.

Add the interest to the principal (total amount
received).
Write your answer.
b 1 As we are dealing with simple interest, the value
of the investment increases each month by the

same amount. To find the monthly increase, divide
the total interest earned by the number of months.
Draw a set of axes. Put time (in months) on the
horizontal axis and the amount of investment
(in $) on the vertical axis. Plot the points: the
initial value of investment is $210 and it grows
by $1.40 each month. (The last point has
coordinates (18 235.20).)
WriTE
PrT
100
P = $210
r = 8% per year
T = 18 months
= 112 years
a I=
210 8 1.5
100
= 25.2
The interest charged is $25.20.
I=
A=P+I
= 210 + 25.20
= 235.20
Total amount received at the end of
18months is $235.20.
25.20
b Increase per month =
18
= $1.40
Amount of investment
(in $)
Think
240
235
230
225
220
215
210
0
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Time (in months)
477
Finding P, r and T
In many cases we may wish to find the principal, interest rate or period of a loan. In these situations it
is necessary to rearrange or transpose the simple interest formula after (orbefore) substitution, as the
following example illustrates.
WorkEd ExaMplE 3
A bank offers 9% p.a. simple interest on an investment. At the end of 4 years the interest earned
was $215. How much was invested?
Think
WriTE
PrT
100
I = $215
r = 9% per year
T = 4 years
I=
List the values of I, r and T. Check that r and T

are in the same time terms.
Make P the subject by multiplying both sides

by 100 and dividing both sides by (9 4).
Write your answer in the correct units.
PrT
100
P94
215 =
100
215 100
P=
94
= 597.22
I=
The amount invested was $597.22.
Transposed simple interest formula

It may be easier to use the transposed formula when finding P, r or T.
The simple interest formula transposes:
to find the principal
to find the interest rate
to find the period of the loan or investment
100 I
rT
100 I
r=
PT
100 I
T=
.
Pr
P=
WorkEd ExaMplE 4
When $720 is invested for 36 months it earns $205.20 simple interest. Find the yearly interest rate.
Think
478
WriTE
100 I
PT
Write the simple interest formula, where rate is

the subject.
r=
List the values of P, I and T. T must be

expressed in years so that r can be evaluated in
% per year.
P = $720
I = $205.20
T = 36 months
= 3 years
r=
Write your answer.
The interest rate offered is 9.5% per annum.
100 205.20
720 3
= 9.5
WorkEd ExaMplE 5
An amount of $255 was invested at 8.5% p.a. How long will it take, to the nearest year, to earn
$86.70 in interest?
Think
WriTE
Write the simple interest formula, where time

is the subject.
Substitute the values of P, I and r. The rate,
r is expressed per annum so time, T, will be
evaluated in the same time terms, namely years.
Write your answer.
Exercise 12a
T=
100 I
Pr
P = $255
I = $86.70
r = 8.5% p.a.
100 86.70
255 8.5
=4
It will take 4 years.
T=
Simple interest
1 WE 1 Find the interest charged on the following amounts borrowed for the periods and at the rates given.
a $680 for 4 years at 5% p.a.
b $210 for 3 years at 9% p.a.
1
2
c $1020 at 12 % p.a. for 2 years

3
4
d $713 at 6 % p.a. for 7 years

2 Find the interest charged or earned on the following loans and investments:
a $690 loaned at 12% p.a. simple interest for 15 months
b $7500 invested for 3 years at 1% per month simple interest
c $25 000 borrowed for 13 weeks at 0.1% per week simple interest
3
4
diGiTal doCS
doc-9495
SkillSHEET 12.1
Substitution into
formulas
doc-9498
Simple interest
doc-9496
SkillSHEET 12.2
Conversion of units of
time
1
2
d $250 invested at 1 % per month for 2 years.

3 WE2a Find the amount to which each investment has grown after the investment periods shown in the
following examples:
a $300 invested at 10% p.a. simple interest for 24 months
b $750 invested for 3 years at 1% per month simple interest
c $20 000 invested for 3 years and 6 months at 11% p.a. simple interest.
4 MC If John had $63 in his bank account and earned 9% p.a. over 3 years, the simple interest earned
would be:
a $5.67
b $1701
C $17.01
d $22.68
E $27.00
5 MC A 4-year bond paid 7.6% p.a. simple interest. If Sonja bought a bond worth $550, the interest she
earned would be:

a $16.72
b $167.20
C $717.20
d $1672
E $30.40
1
4
6 WE2b Silvio invested the $1500 he won in Lotto with an insurance company bond that pays 12 % p.a.
simple interest provided he keeps the bond for 5 years.

a What is Silvios total return from the bond at the end of the 5 years?
b Represent the balance at the end of each year graphically.
7 Jill and John decide to borrow money to improve their boat, but cannot agree which loan is the better
value. They would like to borrow $2550. Jill goes to the Big-4 Bank and finds that they will lend her
the money at 1113% p.a. simple interest for 3 years. John finds that the Friendly Building Society will
lend the $2550 to them at 1% per month simple interest for the 3 years.
a Which institution offers the best rates over the 3 years?
b Explain why.
8 WE3 For each of the following, find the principal invested.
a Simple interest of 5% p.a., earning $307 interest over 2 years
b Simple interest of 7% p.a., earning $1232 interest over 4 years
c Simple interest of 8% p.a., earning $651 interest over 18 months
diGiTal doC
doc-9497
SkillSHEET 12.3
Substitution into the
simple interest formula
479
9 WE4 For each of the following, find the interest rate offered. Express rates in % per annum.
a Loan of $10 000, with a $2000 interest charge, for 2 years
b Investment of $5000, earning $1250 interest for 4 years
c Loan of $150, with a $20 interest charge, for 2 months
10 WE5 For each of the following, find the period of time (to the nearest month) for which the principal
was invested or borrowed.

a Investment of $1000 at simple interest of 5% p.a. earning $50
b Loan of $6000 at simple interest of 7% p.a. with an interest charge of $630
c Loan of $100 at simple interest of 24% p.a. with an interest charge of $6
11 Lennie earned $576 in interest when she invested in a fund paying 9.5% simple interest for 4years.
How much did Lennie invest originally?

12 Lennies sister Lisa also earned $576 interest at 9% simple interest, but she had to invest it for only
3years. What was Lisas initial investment?

13 James needed to earn $225 in one year. He invested $2500 in an account earning simple interest at a
rate of 4.5% p.a. paid monthly. How many months will it take James to achieve his aim?
14 Carol has $3000 to invest. Her aim is to earn $450 in interest at a rate of 5% p.a. Over what term would
she invest?
15 MC Peter borrowed $5000 and intended to pay it back in 3 years. The terms of the loan indicated
Peter was to pay 93% p.a. interest. The interest Peter paid on the loan was:
4
a $146 250
b $446.25
C $1462.50
d $121.88
E $1211.88
16 MC Joannes accountant found that for the past 2 years she had earned a total of $420 interest in an
account paying 6% simple interest. When she calculated how much she invested, the amount was:
a $350
b $3500
C $50.40
d $7000
E $70.00
17 MC A loan of $1000 is taken over 5 years. The simple interest is calculated monthly. The total amount
repaid for this loan is $1800. The simple interest rate per year on this loan is closest to:
a 8.9%
b 16%
C 36%
d 5%
E 11.1%
bonds, debentures and

term deposits
12b
debentures
If a company needs money, one option is for it to offer a debenture (a legal document detailing an investment
agreement) for sale to the public. An investor will pay an amount of money (principal) to the company, and
in return the company agrees to pay the investor interest at regular
intervals (monthly, quarterly or yearly). At the end of the agreed
term the principal is returned to the investor. The advantage of the
debenture is two-fold: first, the company has the use of the money
during the agreed period to make more money for the company
and second, the investor knows what their return will be for each
period and is guaranteed the return of the principal.
Term deposits
Term deposits allow an investor to lend money to a bank or
building society for a particular length of time. The money
cannot be withdrawn during the agreed period but earns a better
interest rate than in a normal savings account. At the end of the
term the interest plus the principal is paid back to the investor.
The advantage of the term deposit is that the money is secure
and the interest rate is better than that on a savings account.
The disadvantage, of course, is that if the money is needed
during the period, it cannot be withdrawn (except under special
circumstances agreed to by the bank).
480
investment bonds
Investment bonds are another form of investment which is offered to the investor by a bank or the
government, and interest is paid on the investment monthly, quarterly, six monthly or annually. The one
advantage is that the bond can be sold to someone else during the period before the maturation date. This
allows the investor some flexibility if the money is needed during the period of investment.
All the mentioned investment types offer advantages to the investor and to the institution. The
institution has the use of the money over a fixed period and the investor receives higher than normal
interest. All of these investments carry some risk and individuals must decide on which type to use based
on personal circumstances.
Bonds, debentures and term deposits are simple interest accounts.
WorkEd ExaMplE 6
Jaclyn buys $50 000 worth of debentures in a company. She earns 9.5% p.a., paid to her quarterly
(that is, every 3 months). If the agreed period of the debenture was 18 months:
a calculate the amount of interest Jaclyn will earn for each quarter
b calculate the total amount collected at the end of the term.
Think
a 1 Recognise debentures are simple interest
accounts. Write the simple interest formula.
WriTE
a I=
PrT
100
List the values of P, r and T. Convert the

interest rate period to quarters.
P = $50 000
r = 9.5% per year
= 9.5% 4 per quarter
= 2.375% per quarter
T = 1 quarter
I=
Write your answer.
Jaclyn will earn $1187.50 for each quarter.
b 1 There are 6 quarters in 18 months.
Alternatively, use the simple interest formula

with r = 9.5% p.a. and T = 1.5 years.
Write your answer.
50 000 2.375 1
100
= $1187.50
b Total interest = $1187.50 6
= $7125
or
50 000 9.5 1.5

100
= $7125
I=
The total interest earned is $7125.
WorkEd ExaMplE 7
Townbank offers a term deposit account paying investors 12.5% p.a. on investments over
$100 000 for 2 years or more. Peta decides to invest $150 000 in this account for 2 years.
How much interest will Peta earn at the end of the investment?
Think
1
Recognise term deposits are simple interest

accounts. Write the simple interest formula.
List the values of P, r and T. Check that r and T

are described in the same time terms.
WriTE
I=
PrT
100
P = $150 000
r = 12.5% p.a.
T = 2 years
481
50 000 12.5 2
100
= $37 500
I=
Write your answer.
Petas $150 000 invested for 2 years will earn

$37 500.
WorkEd ExaMplE 8
An investment bond is offered to the public at 9% p.a. Louise buys a bond worth $2000 that will
mature in 2 years. How much in total will Louise receive at the end of the 2 years?
Think
WriTE
I=
PrT
100
Recognise bonds are simple interest accounts.

List the values of P, r and T.
P = $2000
r = 9% p.a.
T = 2 years
I=
Use a calculator to evaluate.
I = $360
Add the interest to the principal.
A=P+I
= 2000 + 360
= 2360
Write your answer.
The $2000 investment bond will mature at the

end of 2 years to a total of $2360 at simple
interest of 9% p.a.
Exercise 12b
2000 9 2
100
bonds, debentures and term deposits
1 WE6 Spice Clothing company offers debentures paying 8% p.a. interest paid quarterly for a period
of 2 years. When $20 000 worth of Spice debentures are purchased, calculate the total return on the
investment.
2 WE 7 Harry decides to invest $2000 in a term deposit for 18 months. The bank offers 10.5%p.a.
interest paid each half-year. Calculate the interest Harry will earn on the investment.
diGiTal doC
doc-9498
Spreadsheet
Simple interest
1
2
3 WE8 An investment bond is advertised as paying 10 % p.a. interest on a 3-year investment. Elise
purchases a bond for $3000, but then needs to sell it after 18 months. How much will Elise receive at
the end of her 18-month investment?
4 Rabbit debentures, worth $10 000, were purchased for a period of 15 months. The debenture paid
12% p.a., payable each 3 months. What was the investment worth at the end of the 15months?
5 JNK Bank offers term deposits on amounts above $5000 at 12% p.a. payable each quarter for periods
longer than 2 years. Mr Smith invests $6000 in this term deposit for 212 years. What is Mr Smiths final
return on his money?
6 MC Debentures in TRADEX are issued at 9% p.a. The interest gained on an investment of $7000 over
3 years would be:

a $630
b $1890
C $18 900
d $7630
E $21 000
7 MC The rate of interest on a term deposit for 3 months is 4.25% per year. If $10 000 is invested in the
term deposit, the amount of interest earned over the 3 months is:
a $106.25
b $425
C $141.67
d $1062.50
482
E $1275
1
4
8 MC State government bonds pay interest of 7 % p.a. Philippa invested $2500 in the bonds which
mature in 5 years. Philippas income each quarter would be:

a $181.25
b $2718.77
C $45.31
d $725
E $72.50
9 The following term deposit rates were advertised by a bank in a magazine.
Toni had $5500 to invest. Calculate her

return if she invested the money in a term
deposit with this bank for:
a 35 days
b 120 days
c 1 year.
Hint: Express days as a fraction of a year.
Term
Rate
3059 days
4.2% p.a.
60149 days
4.7% p.a.
150269 days
5.0% p.a.
270365 days
5.4% p.a.
10 Dennis and Delia have $7500 to invest. They
know that they will need the money in

18months but are not sure how to invest it.
While surfing the internet, they see the
following three advertisements:
1
i investment bonds offered at 12 % p.a.
2
interest paid each 6 months
ii debentures in a company paying
12%p.a.with interest paid each quarter
3
iii a term deposit paying 11 % p.a.
4
interest paid each 3 months.
a Calculate their total return on each
investment.
b What did you notice about the time in
which the interest was calculated?
12C
Compound interest
As you have seen in simple interest calculations, the amount present at the start does not change
throughout the life of the investment. Interest is added at the end.
For investments, if interest is added to the initial amount (principal) at the end of an interest-bearing
period, then both the interest and the principal earn further interest during the next period, which in turn
is added to the balance. This process continues for the life of the investment. The interest is said to be
compounded.
The result is that the balance of the account increases at regular intervals and so too does the interest
earned.
Compound interest is illustrated in the next example.
Consider $1000 invested for 4 years at an interest rate of 12% p.a. with interest compounded annually
(added on each year). What will be the final balance of this account?
Time period
Starting principal, P ($)
Interest ($)
Balance ($)
1000
12% of 1000 = 120
1120
1120
12% of 1120 = 134.40
1254.40
1254.40
12% of 1254.40 = 150.53
1404.93
1404.93
12% of 1404.93 = 168.59
1573.52
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with compound
interest.
So the balance after 4 years is $1573.52.

During the total period of an investment, interest may be compounded many times, so a formula has
been derived to make calculations easier.
In the above example the principal is increased by 12% each year. That is, the end of year
balance = 112% or 1.12 of the start of the year balance.
483
Now let us look at how this growth or compounding factor of 1.12 is applied in the example.
Time period
Balance ($)
1120 = 1000 1.12
= 1000(1.12)1
1254.40 = 1120 1.12
1404.93 = 1254.40 1.12 = 1000 1.12 1.12 1.12
1573.52 = 1404.93 1.12 = 1000 1.12 1.12 1.12 1.12 = 1000(1.12)4
= 1000 1.12 1.12
= 1000(1.12)2
= 1000(1.12)3
If this investment continued for n years the final balance would be:
1000(1.12)n = 1000(1 + 0.12)n = 1000(1 +
12 n
).
100
The answer now is only in terms of information that was known at the start of the investment. From
this pattern we are able to write a general formula that can be used to calculate compound interest.
A = PRn
where A = final or total amount ($)

P = principal ($)
r
R = growth or compounding factor = 1 +
100
r = interest rate per period
n = number of interest-bearing periods
I=AP
where
A = final or total amount ($)

P = principal ($).
If the compound interest is used, the value of the

investment at the end of each period grows by an increasing
amount. Therefore, when plotted, the values of the
investment at the end of each period form an exponential
curve.
Now let us consider how the formula is used.
Value of investment
Note that the compound interest formula gives the total amount in an account, not just the interest
earned as in the simple interest formula.
To find the total interest compounded, I:
Time
WorkEd ExaMplE 9
Find the amount in the account (balance) and the interest earned after $5000 is invested for
4 years at 6.5% p.a., interest compounded annually.
Think
484
WriTE
r n
A = P 1 +
100
Write the compound interest formula.
List the values of n, r and P.
Simplify.
Evaluate to 2 decimal places.
A = $6432.33
Subtract the principal from the balance.
I=AP
= 6432.33 5000
= $1432.33
Write your answer.
The amount of interest earned is $1432.33 and the

balance is $6432.33.
n=4
r = 6.5
P = 5000
6.5 4
A = 5000 1 +
100
= 5000(1.065)4
In the last example, interest was compounded annually. However, in many cases the interest is
compounded more often than once a year, for example, quarterly (every 3months), weekly, or daily. In
these situations n and r still have their usual meanings and we calculate them as follows.
Number of interest periods, n = number of years number of interest periods per year
nominal interest rate per annum
Interest rate per period, r =
number of interest periods per year
Note: Nominal interest rate per annum is simply the annual interest rate advertised by a financial institution.
WorkEd ExaMplE 10
If $3200 is invested for 5 years at 6% p.a., interest compounded quarterly:

a find the number of interest-bearing periods, n
b find the interest rate per period, r
c find the balance of the account after 5 years
d graphically represent the balance at the end of each quarter for 5 years. Describe the shape
of the graph.
Think
WriTE
n = 5 (years) 4 (quarters)
= 20
a Calculate n.
b Convert % p.a. to % per quarter to match the time
b r% =
over which the interest is calculated.

Divide r % p.a. by the number of compounding
periods per year, namely 4. Write as a decimal.
c 1 Write the compound interest formula.
6% p.a.
100
= 1.5% per quarter
r = 1.5
r
A = P 1 +
100
List the values of P, r and n.
P = $3200, r = 1.5, n = 20
1.5
A = 3200 1 +
100
Simplify.
Write your answer.
d 1 Using a calculator, find the balance at the
20
= 3200(1.015)20
A = $4309.94
Balance of account after 5 years is $4309.94.
d
end of each quarter and plot these values on

the set of axes. (The first point is (0, 3200),
which represent the principal.)
Balance
4400
4100
3800
3500
3200
0
Comment on the shape of the graph.
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Quarter
The graph is exponential as the interest is added

at the end of each quarter and the following
interest is calculated on the new balance.
The situation often arises where we require a certain amount of money by a future date. It may be to
pay for a holiday or to finance the purchase of a car. It is then necessary to know what principal should be
invested now in order that it will increase in value to the desired final balance within the time available.
485
WorkEd ExaMplE 11
Find the principal that will grow to $4000 in 6 years, if interest is added quarterly at 6.5%p.a.
Think
WriTE
Calculate n (there are 4 quarters in a year).
Calculate r.
n = 6 4 = 24
6.5
r=
4
= 1.625
List the value of A.
A = $4000
Write the compound interest formula,

substitute and simplify.
r n
A = P 1 +
100
1.625
4000 = P 1 +
100
24
4000 = P(1.016 25)24

4000
P=
(1.01625)24
Transpose to isolate P.
P = $2716.73
Write a summary statement.
$2716.73 would need to be invested.
Sometimes we know how much we can afford to invest as well as the amount we want to have at a
future date. Using the compound interest formula we can calculate the interest rate that is needed to
increase the value of our investment to the amount we desire. This allows us to shop around various
financial institutions for an account which provides the interest rate we want.
We must first find the interest rate per period, r, and convert this to the corresponding nominal rate
per annum.
WorkEd ExaMplE 12
Find the interest rate per annum (to 2 decimal places) that would enable an investment of $3000
to grow to $4000 over 2 years if interest is compounded quarterly.
Think
WriTE
A = $4000
P = $3000
n=24
=8
List the values of A, P and n. For this example,

n needs to represent quarters of a year and
therefore r will be evaluated in % per quarter.
Write the compound interest formula and

substitute the known values.
A = PRn
4000 = 3000R8
Divide A by P.
4000
= R8
3000
1
Obtain R to the power of 1, that is, raise both

sides to the power of 18.
Replace R with 1 +
r
.
100
4 8 = 8 8 = R
(R )

3
1
4 8 = 1 + r

100
3
1
486
Isolate r and evaluate.
r
4 8
= 1
100 3
= 0.036 6146
r = 3.661 46
r % = 3.661 46% per quarter
Multiply r by the number of interest periods

per year to get the annual rate (to 2 decimal
places).
Annual rate = r % per quarter 4

= 3.661 46% per quarter 4
= 14.65% per annum
Write your answer.
Interest rate of 14.65% p.a. is required, correct

Note: Worked example 12 requires a number of operations to find the solution. This is one of the
reasons why most financial institutions use finance software for efficient and error-free calculations.
Most CAS calculators have a FINANCE function: Finance Solver. This can be used for compound
interest calculations as shown in the worked examples in this section. Finance Solver will also be used
extensively in the remaining topics of this chapter.
Finding time in compound interest

In the previous section we studied investments that compound over a period of time by manipulating
r
the compound interest formula, A = PRn, where R = 1 +
. Situations where A, P and r were unknown
100
were investigated.
This section deals with finding n, the number of interest-bearing periods; that is, to find the time
period of an investment. Possible methods to solve for n include:
1. trial and error
2. logarithms
3. using Finance Solver on a CAS calculator.
The value obtained for n may be a whole number, but it is more likely to be a decimal. That is, the
time required will lie somewhere between two consecutive integers. The smaller of the two integers
represents insufficient time for the investment to amount to the balance desired; the larger integer
represents more than enough time.
In practice, if this is the case, an investor may choose to:
(a) withdraw funds as soon as the final balance is reached, in which case a fee may be imposed for early
withdrawal
(b) withdraw funds at the first integral value of n after the final balance is reached; that is, when the
investment matures.
In this section, we will use Finance Solver to calculate the time period of an investment.
WorkEd ExaMplE 13
How long it will take $2000 to amount to $3500 at 8% p.a. with interest compounded annually?
Think
WriTE
A = $3500, P = $2000 and r = 8% p.a.
State the values of A, P and r.
Use the Finance Solver on your CAS calculator

to enter the following values:
n (N:) = unknown
r (I(%):) = 8
P (PV:) = 2000
A (FV:) = 3500
PpY: = 1
CpY: = 1
Solve for n.
n = 7.27 years
Interest is compounded annually, so n

represents years. Raise n to the next
whole year.
As the interest is compounded annually,

n = 8 years.
Write your answer.
It will take 8 years for $2000 to amount to $3500.
487
WorkEd ExaMplE 14
Calculate the number of interest-bearing periods, n, required and hence the time it will take
$3600 to amount to $5100 at a rate of 7% p.a., with interest compounded quarterly.
Think
WriTE
A = $5100, P = $3600 and r = 7% p.a.
State the values of A, P and r.
Enter the following values into the Finance

Solver on your CAS calculator:
n (N:) = unknown
r (I(%):) = 7
P (PV:) = 3600
A (FV:) = 5100
PpY: = 4
CpY: = 4
Solve for n.
n = 20.08 quarters
Write your answer using more meaningful

units.
As the interest is compounded annually,

n = 21 quarters.
Answer the question fully.
It will take 5 1 years for $3600 to amount to $5100.
Exercise 12C
Compound interest
For questions 1 to 15, use the compound interest formula to calculate the answer, then check your
answer using Finance Solver.
1 WE9 Use the compound interest formula to find the amount, A, when:
a P = $500, n = 2, r = 8
b P = $1000, n = 4, r = 13
c P = $3600, n = 3, r = 7.5
d P = $2915, n = 5, r = 5.25.
2 Find: i the balance, and ii the interest earned (interest compounded annually) after:
a $2000 is invested for 3 years at 8% p.a.
b $6000 is invested for 2 years at 5% p.a.
c $3425 is invested for 6 years at 7.5% p.a.
3 WE 10a Find the number of interest-bearing periods, n, if interest is compounded:
a annually for 5 years
b quarterly for 5 years
c semi-annually for 4 years
d monthly for 6 years
1
e 6-monthly for 4 years
2
f quarterly for 3 years and 9 months.
diGiTal doCS
doc-9499
SkillSHEET 12.4
Conversion of
rates of interest
doc-9500
Spreadsheet
Compound
interest
488
4 WE 10b Find the interest rate per period, r, if the annual rate is:
a 6% and interest is compounded quarterly
b 4% and interest is compounded half-yearly
c 18% and interest is compounded monthly
d 7% and interest is compounded quarterly.
5 WE 10c Find the balance of the account after:
a 2 years if $3000 is invested at 8% p.a., interest compounded quarterly
b 5 years if $2000 is invested at 6% p.a., interest compounded 6-monthly
c 4 years if $5000 is invested at 12% p.a., interest compounded monthly
d 7 years if $1500 is borrowed at 12% p.a., interest compounded quarterly.
6 WE 10d For each part in question 5, graphically represent the balance of the account after each
compound period.
7 Find the amount that accrues in an account which pays compound interest at a nominal rate of:
a 7% p.a. if $2600 is invested for 3 years (compounded monthly)
b 8% p.a. if $3500 is invested for 4 years (compounded monthly)
1
c 11% p.a. if $960 is invested for 5 years (compounded fortnightly)
2
d 7.3% p.a. if $2370 is invested for 5 years (compounded weekly)
e 15.25% p.a. if $4605 is invested for 2 years (compounded daily).
8 MC The greatest return is likely to be made if interest is compounded:
a
b
C
d
E
annually
semi-annually
quarterly
monthly
fortnightly
1
2
9 MC If $12 000 is invested for 4 years at 6.75% p.a., compounded fortnightly, the amount of interest
that would accrue would be closest to:

$3600
$4200
$5000
$12 100
$16 300
a
b
C
d
E
10 WE 11 Use the compound interest formula to find the principal, P, when:

a A = $5000, r = 9, n = 4
b A = $2600, r = 8.2, n = 3
c A = $3550, r = 1.5, n = 12
d A = $6661.15, r = 0.8, n = 36
11 Find the principal that will grow to:
a $3000 in 4 years, if interest is compounded 6-monthly at 9.5% p.a.
b $2000 in 3 years, if interest is compounded quarterly at 9% p.a.
1
4
c $5600 in 5 years, if interest is compounded quarterly at 8.7% p.a.

1
4
d $10 000 in 4 years, if interest is compounded monthly at 15% p.a.

12 Find the interest accrued in each case in question 11.
13 MC Lillian wishes to have $24 000 in a bank account after 6 years so that she can buy a new car.
The account pays interest at 15.5% p.a. compounded quarterly. The amount (to the nearest dollar) that
Lillian should deposit in the account now, if she is to reach her target, is:
a $3720
b $9637
C $10 109
d $12 117
E $22 320
14 WE 12 Find the interest rates per annum (to 2 decimal places) that would enable investments of:
a $2000 to grow to $3000 over 3 years if interest is compounded 6-monthly
b $12 000 to grow to $15000 over 4 years (interest compounded quarterly)
1
2
412
c $25 000 to grow to $40 000 over 2 years (compounded monthly)

d $43 000 to grow to $60 000 over
years (compounded fortnightly)
e $1400 to grow to $1950 over 2 years (compounded weekly).
15 MC What is the minimum interest rate per annum (compounded quarterly) needed for $2300 to grow
to $3200 in 4 years time?

a 6% p.a.
d 8% p.a.
b 7% p.a.
E 10% p.a.
C 9% p.a.
16 WE 13 Use Finance Solver on a CAS calculator to find out how long it will take (with interest
compounded annually) for:

a $2000 to amount to $3173.75 at 8% p.a.
b $9250 to amount to $16 565.34 at 6% p.a.
c $850 to amount to $1000 at 7% p.a.
d $12 000 to amount to $20 500 at 13.25% p.a.
489
17 WE 14 Calculate the number of interest-bearing periods, n, required, and hence the time in more
meaningful terms when:

A = $2100, P = $1200, r = 3% per half-year
A = $13 500, P = $8300, r = 2.5% per quarter
A = $16 900, P = $9600, r = 1% per month
A = $24 000, P = $16 750, r = 0.25% per fortnight
$7800 is to amount to $10 000 at a rate of 8% p.a. (compounded quarterly)
$800 is to amount to $1900 at a rate of 11% p.a. (compounded quarterly).
a
b
c
d
e
f
18 Wanda has invested $1600 in an account at a rate of 10.4% p.a., interest compounded quarterly.
How long will it take to reach $2200?

19 MC What will be the least number of interest periods, n, required for $6470 to grow to at least $9000
diGiTal doC
doc-9501
WorkSHEET 12.1
in an account with interest paid at 6.5% p.a. and compounded half-yearly?

a 10
b 11
C 12
d 20
20 About how long would it take for:
a $1400 to accrue $300 interest at 8% p.a., interest compounded monthly?
b $8000 to accrue $4400 interest at 9.6% p.a., interest credited fortnightly?
E 22
21 Jennifer and Dawn both want to save $15 000 for a car. Jennifer has $11 000 to invest in an account
with her bank which pays 8% p.a., interest compounded quarterly. Dawns credit union has offered her
11% p.a., interest compounded quarterly.
a How long will it take Jennifer to reach her target?
b How much will Dawn need to invest in order to reach her target at the same time as Jennifer?
Assume their accounts were opened at the same time.
introduction to annuities
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
When we invest money with a financial institution the institution pays us interest because it is using
our money to lend to others. Conversely, when we borrow money from an institution we are using the
institutions money and so it charges us interest.
In reducing balance loans, interest is usually charged every month by the financial institution and
repayments are made by the borrower on a regular basis. These repayments nearly always amount
to more than the interest for the same period of time and so the amount still owing is reduced. Since
the amount still owing is continually decreasing and interest is calculated on the current balance but
debited monthly, the amount of interest charged also decreases throughout the life of the loan.
This means that less of the amount borrowed is paid off in the early stages of the loan compared to
the end. If we graphed the amount owing against time for a loan it would look like the graph below.
That is, the rate at which the loan is paid off increases as the loan progresses.
Amount owing
Do more
Interact
with the annuities
formula.
Time
The terms below are often used when talking about reducing balance loans:
Principal, P = amount borrowed ($)
Balance, A = amount still owing ($)
Term = life of the loan (years)
To discharge a loan = to pay off a loan (that is, A = $0).
It is possible to have an interest only loan account whereby the repayments equal the interest added
and so the balance doesnt reduce. This option is available to a borrower who wants to make the smallest
repayment possible.
Though the focus of the next section is reducing balance loans, note that the theory behind reducing
balance loans can also be applied to other situations such as superannuation payouts, for people during
retirement, and bursaries. In each of these situations a lump sum is realised at the start of a period of
time and regular payments are made during that time. Regular payments are called annuities. So these
situations are often called annuities in arrears because the annuity follows the realisation of the lump sum.
490
reducing balance loans

the annuities formula
12d
The annuities formula can be used to find the amount still owing at any point in time during the term
of a reducing balance loan. An annuity is a regular payment. When a consumer borrows money from a
financial institution, that person contracts to make regular payments or annuities in order to repay the
sum borrowed over time.
The amount owing in a loan account for n repayments is given by the annuities formula:
An = PRn
where:
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Q(Rn 1)
R1
P = the amount borrowed

R = the compounding or growth factor for the amount borrowed
r
=1+
(r = the interest rate per repayment period)
100
Q = the amount of the regular repayments made per period
n = the number of repayments
An = the amount owing after n repayments
Note: Showing how the annuities formula is developed is not required in the Further Mathematics course.
WorkEd ExaMplE 15
A loan of $50 000 is taken out over 20 years at a rate of 6% p.a. (interest
debited monthly) and is to be repaid with monthly instalments of $358.22.
Find the amount still owing after 10 years.
Think
WriTE
State the loan amount, P, and the regular

repayment, Q.
P = 50 000
Q = 358.22
Find the number of payments, n, the interest

rate per month, r, and the growth factor, R.
n = 10 12
= 120
6
r=
12
= 0.5
r
R=1+
100
= 1.005
Substitute into the annuities formula.
A10 = PRn
TUTorial
eles-1304
Worked example 15
Q(Rn 1)
R1
= 50 000(1.005)120
358.22(1.005120 1)
1.005 1
Evaluate A10.
A10 = $32 264.98
Write a statement.
The amount still owing after 10 years will be

$32 264.98.
Note: If R is a recurring decimal, place the value in the calculator memory and bracket R if needed when
evaluating A.
Note that, even though 10 years is the halfway point of the term of the loan, more than half of the
original $50 000 is still owing.
The Finance Solver can be used in calculations involving the annuities formula in the same way it was
used in compound interest calculations described earlier.
491
WorkEd ExaMplE 16
Rob wants to borrow $2800 for a new sound system at 7.5%p.a., interest adjusted monthly.
1
a What would be Robs monthly repayment if the loan is fully repaid in 1 years?
2
b What would be the total interest charged?
Think
WriTE
a 1 State the value of P, n, r and R.
Substitute into the annuities formula to find

the regular monthly repayment, Q.
a P = 2800
n = 18
7.5
= 0.625
r=
12
0.625
R=1+
100
= 1.00625
Q=
=
PRn(R 1)
Rn 1
2800(1.00625)18(1.00625 1)
1.0062518 1
Evaluate Q.
Q = $164.95
Write a statement.
The monthly regular payment is $164.95 over

18 months.
b 1 Total interest = total repayments
amount borrowed
Write a statement.
b Total interest = 164.95 18 2800
= 2969.10 2800 = $169.10
The total interest on the $2800 loan over

18months is $169.10.
WorkEd ExaMplE 17
Josh borrows $12 000 for some home office equipment. He agrees to repay the loan over 4years
with monthly instalments at 7.8% p.a. (adjusted monthly). Find:
a the instalment value
b the principal repaid and interest paid during the:
i 10th r epayment
ii 40th repayment.
Think
a 1 State the value of P, n, r and R.
WriTE
a P = 12 000
n = 4 12
= 48
7.8
r=
12
= 0.65
0.65
R=1+
= 1.0065
100
2
Substitute into the annuities formula to find the

monthly repayment, Q.
Q=
=
492
PRn(R 1)
Rn 1
12 000(1.0065)48(1.0065 1)
1.006548 1
Evaluate Q.
Q = $291.83
Write a statement.
The monthly repayment over a 4-year period

is $291.83.
Find the amount owing after 9months.

(a) State P, n, R.
(b) Substitute into the annuities
formula.
P = 12 000, n = 9, R = 1.0065
A = PRn
Q( R n 1)
R 1
= 12 000(1.0065)9
ii
291.83(1.00659 1)
1.0065 1
Evaluate A9.
A9 = $10 024.73
Find the amount owing after

10months. Substitute (change n = 9 to
n = 10) and evaluate.
A10 = 12 000(1.0065)10
Principal repaid = A9 A10
Principal repaid = 10 024.73 9798.06

= $226.67
Interest paid = repayment

principal repaid
Write a statement.
Repeat steps 16 for A39 and A40.
Write a statement.
291.83(1.006510 1)
1.0065 1
= $9798.06
Total interest = $291.83 226.67

= $65.16
In the 10th repayment, $226.67 principal is
repaid and $65.16 interest is paid.
ii A39 = 12 000(1.0065)39
291.83(1.006530 1)
1.0065 1
= $2543.10
A40 = $2267.80
Principal repaid = A39 A40
= 2543.10 2267.80
= $275.30
Interest = 291.83 275.30
= $16.53
In the 40th repayment, $275.30 principal is

repaid and $16.53 interest is paid.

Exercise 12d
1 WE 15 A loan of $65 000 is taken out over 20years at a rate of 12% p.a. (interest debited monthly) and
is to be repaid with monthly instalments of $715.71. Find the amount still owing after:
a 5 years
b 10 years
c 15 years.
2 Matthew takes out a reducing balance loan of $75 000 over 25 years at a rate of 10% p.a. (interest debited
quarterly) which is to be repaid with quarterly instalments of $2048.39. Find the amount still owing after:
b 10 years
c 15 years.
diGiTal doC
doc-9502
Spreadsheet
reducing balance
loans
a 5 years
3 A loan of $52 000 is taken out over 15 years at a rate of 13% p.a. (interest debited fortnightly) and is to
be repaid with fortnightly instalments of $303.37. Find the amount still owing after:
b 8 years
c 12 years.
a 4 years
4 Link borrows $48000, taken out over 10 years and to be repaid in monthly instalments. (Note: As the
interest rate increases, the monthly repayment increases if the loan period is to remain the same.) Find
the amount still owing after 5 years if interest is debited monthly at a rate of:
a 6% p.a. and the repayment is $532.90
b 9% p.a. and the repayment is $608.04
c 12% p.a. and the repayment is $688.66
493
5 A loan of $20 000 has interest charged monthly at a rate of 9% p.a. What will be the amount still owing
after 3 years if the term of the loan is:

a 4 years and monthly repayments of $497.70 are made?
b 5 years and monthly repayments of $415.17 are made?
6 MC Peter wants to borrow $8000 for a second-hand
car and his bank offers him a personal loan for that
amount at an interest rate of 13% p.a., interest debited
fortnightly, with fortnightly repayments of $124.11
over 3years. After 2 years he wants to calculate how
much he still owes by using the annuities formula.
a Which of the following equations should he use?
a A = 8000(1.005)78
124.11(1.00578 1)
1.005 1
b A = 8000(1.05)52
124.11(1.0552 1)
1.05 1
C A = 8000(1.005)52
124.11(1.00552 1)
1.005 1
d A = 8000(1.05)78
124.11(1.0578 1)
1.05 1
124.11(1.0552 1)
1.005 1
b The actual amount that Peter still owes after 2 years is closest to:
a $2500
b $3000
C $3500
d $4000
E A = 8000(0.005)52
E $4500
7 MC Ben took out a loan for $20 000 to buy a new car. The contract required that he repay the loan
over 5 years with monthly instalments of $421.02. After 212 years Ben used the annuities formula to
obtain the expression below to calculate the amount he still owed.
421.02(1.00830 1)
0.008
The interest rate per annum charged by the bank for this reducing balance loan is:
a 1.008%
b 0.008%
C 0.096%
d 9.6%
E 12.096%
A = 20 000(1.008)30
8 WE 16 Sergios reducing balance loan of $12 000 has interest charged at 9% p.a., interest adjusted
monthly. Find:
i the monthly repayment
if the loan is fully repaid in:
a 2 years
b 3 years
ii the total interest charged

c 4 years
1
2
d 4 years.
9 In question 8 the only quantity which varied was the term of the loan. As the term of the loan increases,
what happens to:

a the repayment value?
b the amount of interest paid?
10 A loan of $94 000 is to be repaid over 20 years. Find:

i the repayment value
ii the total interest charged
if the loan is repaid:

a weekly at 13% p.a., interest adjusted weekly
b fortnightly at 13% p.a., interest adjusted fortnightly
c monthly at 13% p.a., interest adjusted monthly
d quarterly at 13% p.a., interest adjusted quarterly.
11 Based on your answers to question 10, when the frequency of repayments (and interest charged)
decreases, how does this affect:
a the repayment value?
b the total interest paid?
12 MC Which of the following would decrease the total amount of interest paid during the life of a loan?
(There may be more than one answer.)

a A fall in the interest rate
b A decrease in the frequency of repayments
C A greater amount borrowed
d A decrease in the term of the loan
E A rise in the interest rate
494
13 WE 17 Grace has borrowed $18 000 to buy a car. She agrees to repay the reducing balance loan over
5years with monthly instalments at 8.1% p.a. (adjusted monthly). Find:

b the principal repaid and the interest paid during:
i the 10th repayment
ii the 50th repayment.
14 Gail has agreed to repay a $74 000 reducing balance loan with fortnightly instalments over 20years at
9.75% p.a. (adjusted fortnightly). Find:

b the principal repaid and the interest paid during:
i the 1st repayment
ii the 500th repayment.
15 Terry is repaying a $52 000 loan over 15 years with quarterly instalments at 6.25%p.a. (adjusted
quarterly). Currently, 51 years have passed since the loan was drawn down (money borrowed).
2
How much does Terry still owe?

further calculations
12E
number of repayments
The situation often arises in reducing balance loans when a potential borrower knows how much
needs to be borrowed as well as the amount that can be repaid each month. The person then wants
to know how long the loan needs to be to accommodate these conditions, that is, to determine
the number of repayments, n, required. As with compound interest, n is calculated using Finance
Solver.
WorkEd ExaMplE 18
A reducing balance loan of $60 000 is to be repaid with monthly instalments of $483.36 at an
interest rate of 7.5% p.a. (debited monthly). Find:
a the number of monthly repayments (and, hence, the term of the loan in more meaningful units)
needed to repay the loan in full.
b the total interest charged.
Think
WriTE
a 1 Using the Finance Solver on your CAS
a n = 239.995 307 038 33
calculator enter the appropriate values:

n (N:) = unknown
r (I(%):) = 7.5
P (PV:) = 6 0 000
Q (Pmt:) = 483.36
A (FV:) = 0
PpY: = 12 (monthly)
CpY: = 12 (monthly)
n = 240 months
Solve for n.
Time =
240
years
12
= 20 years
4
Write a statement.
b 1 Total interest = Totalre payments
Principal repaid
Write a statement.
Term of loan needed is 20 years.

b Interest = 483.36 240 60 000
= $56 006.40
Total interest charged on the loan is $56 006.40.
495
Sometimes we may want to find the time for only part of the loan term. The procedure that is followed
is the same as in Worked example 18; however, A is zero only if we are calculating the time to repay the
loan in full. Otherwise we should consider the amount still owing at that time.
WorkEd ExaMplE 19
Some time ago, Petra borrowed $14 000 to buy a car. Interest on this reducing balance loan has
been charged at 9.2% p.a. (adjusted monthly) and she has been paying $446.50 each month to
service the loan. Currently she still owes $9753.92. How long ago did Petra borrow the money?
Think
WriTE
Identify A, P, Q and r and enter the following

values into the Finance Solver on your CAS
calculator:
n (N:) = unknown
r (I(%):) = 9.2
P (PV:) = 14 000
Q (Pmt:) = 446.50
A (FV:) = 9753.92
PpY: = 12 (monthly payments)
CpY: = 12 (monthly compounds)
n = 11.999 995 037 662
Solve for n.
Time = 1 year
Write a statement.
Petra has had the loan for the past 12 months.
n = 12 months
In the situations investigated so far, we have only considered calculating the time from the start of
the loan to a later date (including repayment in full). In fact, it doesnt matter what period of the loan is
considered; we can still use Finance Solver as we have already done. In using the calculator to do this,
we can use A and Ps such that they have the following meanings:
A = amount owing at the end of the time period
Ps = amount owing at the start of the time period.
WorkEd ExaMplE 20
A loan of $11 000 is being repaid by monthly instalments of $362.74 with interest being charged
at 11.5% p.a. (debited monthly). Currently, the amount owing is $7744.05. How much longer will
it take to:
a reduce the amount outstanding to $2105.11?
b repay the loan in full?
Think
a 1 Let Ps be the amount still owing at the start
of the time period. State A, Ps, Q and r.
496
WriTE
a A = 2105.11, Ps = 7744.05, Q = 362.74,
r = 11.5% p.a.
Using the Finance Solver on your CAS

calculator, enter the following values:
n (N:) = unknown
r (I(%):) = 11.5
Ps (PV:) = 7744.05
Q (Pmt:) = 362.74
A (FV:) = 2105.11
PpY: = 12
CpY: = 12
n = 17.999 988 603 29
Solve for n.
n = 18 months
Interpret the results and write a statement.
b 1 Repeat part a, entering the appropriate values
into the Finance Solver. Enter FV: = 0 to

represent the loan is fully repaid.
Write a statement.
It will take another 11 years to reduce the

2
amount owing to $2105.11.
b n = 23.999 534 856 457
= 24 months
It will take another 2 years to repay the

loan in full.
Effects of changing the repayment

Since most loans are taken over a long period of time it is probable that a borrowers financial situation
will change during this time. For instance, a borrower may receive a pay rise and so their take home pay
is greater per week or fortnight. The person may then choose to increase the value of the repayments
made to service the loan.
It may also be that a persons financial situation deteriorates, in which case he/she may request from
their institution that the repayment value be decreased.
In this section we will look at the effect that changing the repayment value has on the term of the loan
and the total interest paid.
WorkEd ExaMplE 21
A reducing balance loan of $16 000 has a term of 5 years. It is to be repaid by monthly instalments
at a rate of 8.4% p.a. (debited monthly).
a Find the repayment value.
b What will be the term of the loan if the repayment is increased to $393.62?
c Calculate the total interest paid for repayments of $393.62.
d By how much does the interest figure in c differ from that paid for the original offer?
Think
a 1 (a) Write the equation for Q.
WriTE
a Q=
PRn(R 1)
Rn 1
(b) Give the values of P, n, r and R.
P = 16 000, n = 5 12
= 60
8.4
r=
12
= 0.7
R = 1.007
Substitute into the annuities formula to

evaluate Q.
Q=
Write a statement.
$16 000 to be paid off in 5 years at 8.4% p.a.

will need monthly repayments of $327.49.
b 1 Using the Finance Solver on your CAS
16 000(1.007)60(1.007 1)
1.00760 1
= $327.49
b n = 47.999 695 088 867
calculator, enter the following values:

n (N:) = unknown
r (I(%):) = 8.4
P (PV:) = 1 6 000
Q (Pmt:) = 393.62
A (FV:) = 0
PpY: = 12
CpY: = 12
2
Solve for n.
n = 48 months
497
48
years
12
= 4 years
Time =
Write a statement.
The new term of the loan would be

4 years.
c Interest paid = total repayments
principal repaid
d 1 (a) Review the known quantities.
c When term = 4 years, Q = 393.62.
Interest = 48 393.62 16 000

= $2893.76
d When term = 5 years, Q = 327.49.
Interest = 60 327.49 16 000

= $3649.40
(b) Find the interest difference.
Interest difference = 3649.40 2893.76

= $755.64
Write a statement.
If the repayment is increased from $327.49 to

$393.62 per month then $755.64 is saved in
interest payments.
If a borrower does increase the value of each repayment and if all other variables remain the same,
then the term of the loan is reduced. Conversely, a decrease in the repayment value increases the term of
the loan. There are two stages to the loan, each with a different repayment.
WorkEd ExaMplE 22
Brad borrowed $22 000 to start a business and agreed to repay the loan over 10 years with
quarterly instalments of $783.22 and interest debited at 7.4% p.a. However, after 6 years of the
loan Brad decided to increase the repayment value to $879.59. Find:
a the actual term of the loan
b the total interest paid
c the interest savings achieved by increasing the repayment value.
Think
a 1 To find A after 6 years:
(a) First identify P, Q, n, r and R.
(b) Find A24 (the balance owing after

6years).
2
498
Now find the n value to reduce $10 761.83 to

zero; that is, the remaining part of the loan.
Identify P and Q.
WriTE
P = 22 000, Q = 783.22
n=64
= 24
7.4
r=
4
= 1.85
R = 1.0185
A24 = 22 000(1.0185)24
783.22(1.018524 1)
1.0185 1
= $10 761.83
P = 10 761.83, Q = 879.59
Using the Finance Solver, enter the

appropriate values.
n (N:) = unknown
r (I(%):) = 7.4
P (PV:) = 1 0 761.9
Q (Pmt:) = 879.59
A (FV:) = 0
PpY: = 4
CpY: = 4
n = 14.000 122 313 731
Solve for n.
Time = 31 years
Find the total term of the loan.
Total term = 6 + 31
n = 14 quarters
2
= 91 years
2
b 1 For the two-repayment scenario:
Interest paid = Totalre payments

Principal repaid
In this case, in two stages.
For the same repayment scenario:

Q = 783.22 for 10 years.
c 1 Find the difference between the
twoscenarios.
2
Write a statement.
b For the two-repayment scenario:
Interest = 783.22 24 + 879.59 14 22 000

= $9111.54
For the same repayment scenario:
Interest = 783.22 40 22 000
= $9328.80
c Interest difference = 9328.80 9111.54
= $217.26
Brad will save $217.26 interest by increasing

his repayment value.
By increasing his quarterly repayment by almost $100 Brad managed to reduce the overall cost of his
loan by $217.26 and paid it off 6 months sooner. This saving may not seem significant, but, the larger the
saving the longer the original term and the greater the amount borrowed.
Frequency of repayments
In this section we investigate the effect on the actual term of the loan, and on the total amount of interest
charged, of making more frequent repayments. While the value of the repayment will change, the actual
outlay will not. For example, a $3000 quarterly (each 3months) repayment will be compared to a $1000
monthly repayment. That is, the same amount is repaid during the same period of time in each case.
So the only variable will be how often repayments are made. In all cases in this section interest willbe
charged just before a repayment is made, although this may not be the case in practice.
WorkEd ExaMplE 23
Tessa wants to buy a dress shop. She borrows $15 000 at 8.5% p.a. (debited prior to each
repayment) of the reducing balance. She can afford quarterly repayments of $928.45 and
this will pay the loan in full in exactly 5 years.
One-third of the quarterly repayment gives the equivalent monthly repayment of $309.48.
The equivalent fortnightly repayment is $142.84.
Find:
i the term of the loan and
ii the amount still owing prior to the last payment if Tessa made repayments:
a monthly
b fortnightly.
499
Think
ii
ii
WriTE
Identify the given values. Enter the appropriate

values using the Finance Solver. Remember that
PpY: = 12 and
CpY: = 12
for monthly repayments.
i For monthly repayments:
P = 15 000, Q = 309.48,
I = 8.5% p.a., n = ?
Solve for n.
n = 59.582 518 723 273
The value obtained for n is 59.58 which means

that a 60th repayment is required. That is,
n = 60.
n = 60 months
Term of loan = 5 years
To find the amount still owing prior to the

last payment, find A when n = 59. Enter the
appropriate values using Finance Solver:
n = 59
I = 8.5
PV = 1500
Pmt = 309.48
PpY: = 12
CpY: = 12
Solve for FV.
State the amount still owing.
Enter the appropriate values using the Finance

Solver on your CAS calculator. Remember that
PpY: = 26 and
CpY: = 26
for fortnightly repayments.
Solve for n.
The value obtained for n is 128.85 which

means that a 129th repayment is required.
That is, n = 129.
To find the amount still owing prior to the last

payment, find A (or FV) when n = 128. Enter
the appropriate values using Finance Solver:
n = 128
I = 8.5
PV = 15 000
Pmt = 142.84
PpY: = 26
CpY: = 26
Solve for FV.
State the amount still owing.
ii FV = 179.273 603 537 66
The amount still owing prior to the

last payment is $179.27.
b i For fortnightly repayments:
P = 15 000, Q = 142.84,
I = 8.5% p.a., n = ?
n = 128.847 104 593 38
n = 129 fortnights
Term of loan = 4 years, 25 fortnights
ii FV = 120.636 212 821 95
The amount still owing prior to the

last payment is $120.64.
It can be seen from the example that while the same outlay is maintained there may be a slight
decrease in the term of a loan when repayments are made more often. Let us now find what the saving
is for such a loan. In this situation we should consider the final (partial) payment separately because the
amount of interest that it attracts is less than a complete repayment, Q.
The calculation of the total interest paid is now calculated as usual:
Total interest = total repayments principal repaid.
500
WorkEd ExaMplE 24
In Worked example 23, Tessas $15 000 loan at 8.5% p.a. gave the following three scenarios:
i quarterly repayments of $928.45 for 5 years
ii monthly repayments of $309.48 for 59 months with $179.27 still outstanding
iii fortnightly repayments of $142.84 for 128 fortnights with $120.64 still owing.
Compare the total interest paid by Tessa if she repaid her loan:
a quarterly
b monthly
c fortnightly.
Think
WriTE
a For quarterly repayments
a For quarterly repayments:
b 1 For monthly repayments
b For monthly repayments:
Total interest = total repayments

principal repaid
total interest = 928.45 20 15 000

= $3569
Find r and A59. (Refer to Worked

example 23.)
8.5
% = 0.7083%
12
A59 = $179.27
Calculate the interest on A59 to find the final

repayment.
Interest on A59 = 0.7083% of $179.27

= 0.007 083 179.27
= $1.27
Final repayment = 179.27 + 1.27
= $180.54
Calculate the total interest paid.
Total interest
= 309.48 59 + 180.54 15 000
= $3439.86
c 1 Fortnightly repayments
r=
c For fortnightly repayments:
Find r and A128. (Refer to Worked

example 23.)
8.5
% = 0.3269%
26
A128 = 120.64
Calculate the interest on A128 to find the final

repayment.
Interest on A128 = 0.3269% of $120.64

= 0.003 269 120.64
= $0.39
= $121.03
Calculate the total interest paid.
Total interest
= 142.84 128 + 121.03 15 000
= $3404.55
Calculate the interest saving with monthly

repayments over quarterly repayments.
Monthly interest saving

= 3569 3439.86
= $129.14
Calculate the interest saving with fortnightly

repayments over quarterly repayments.
Fortnightly interest saving

= 3569 3404.55
= $164.45
Write a comparison statement.
Tessa saves $164.45 if she repays fortnightly

rather than quarterly and $129.14 if she repays
monthly rather than quarterly.
r=
The slight time savings calculated in Worked example 23 when repayments were made more often
have now been transformed to money savings. The saving increases as the frequency of repayment
increases. This is because the amount outstanding is reduced more often and so the amount of interest
added is slightly less. A saving of $164 over 5 years, out of more than $18 000 repaid, might not seem
much but the saving increases as the term of the loan increases and as the amount borrowed increases.
501
Changing the rate

Of all the variables associated with reducing balance loans, the one that is most likely to change during
the term of a loan is the interest rate. These rates rarely stay the same for the life of a loan; for most
loans the rate will change several times.
The Reserve Bank of Australia is the main monetary authority of the Federal Government and, as
such, is the overall guiding influence on monetary factors in the Australian economy. Consequently, it
indirectly controls the lending interest rates of financial institutions here.
There is usually some variation in rates between institutions; for example, a lower rate may be
designed to attract more customers. Within each institution there are rate variations as well for different
types of reducing balance loans. Banks advertise their loan rates to attract customers.
In this section we investigate the effect that changing the interest rate has on the term of the loan
and on the total interest paid. It should be remembered that as the interest rate increases so too will the
term (if Q remains constant) of the loan since more interest needs to be paid.
First, let us simply compare loan situations by varying only the rate.
WorkEd ExaMplE 25
A reducing balance loan of $18 000 has been taken out over 5 years at 8% p.a. (adjusted
monthly) with monthly repayments of $364.98.
a What is the total interest paid?
b If, instead, the rate was 9% p.a. (adjusted monthly) and the repayments remained the same,
what would be:
i the term of the loan?
ii the total amount of interest paid?
Think
WriTE
a For 8% p.a.:
Total interest = total repayments principal repaid
i Using the Finance Solver, enter the
appropriate values.
Remember that PpY: and CpY: will both equal
12 for monthly repayments.
N: = 61.81 means 61 full repayments plus a
final lesser payment.
ii
502
Find A61 to calculate the amount still

owing.
Enter the following values:
n = 61
I=9
PV = 18 000
Pmt = 364.98
PpY: = 12
CpY: = 12
Solve for FV and interpret the result.
For 8% p.a.:
Total interest = 364.98 60 18 000
= $3898.80
i For 9% p.a.:
P = 18 000, Q = 364.98, I = 9, A = 0,
n=?
n = 61.810 665 384 123
n = 62 months
Term = 5 years, 2 months
ii FV = 293.88 667 287 7
The amount still owing after 61 repayments

is $293.88
Calculate the interest on A61 to find the

9
final repayment. r = 12
= 0.75%.
Interest on final repayment

= 0.75% of $293.88
= $2.20
= $296.08
Total interest = total repayments

principal repaid.
Total interest paid

= 364.98 61 + 296.08 18 000
= $4559.86
In the previous example the rate was increased by only 1% p.a. on $18 000 for only 5years, yet the
amount of interest paid has increased from $3898.80 to $4559.86, a difference of $661.06. This difference
takes on even more significant proportions over a longer period of time and with a larger principal.
Let us now consider varying the rate during the term of the loan.
WorkEd ExaMplE 26
Natsuko and Hymie took out a loan for home renovations.

The loan of $42 000 was due to run for 10years and attract
interest at 7% p.a., debited quarterly on the outstanding balance.
Repayments of $1468.83 were made each quarter. After 4 years
the rate changed to 8% p.a. (debited quarterly). The repayment
value didnt change.
a Find the amount outstanding when the rate changed.
b Find the actual term of the loan.
c Compare the total interest paid to what it would have been if
the rate had remained at 7% p.a. for the 10 years.
Think
a 1 Rate changes after 4 years; that is, n = 16.

2
a P = 42 000, Q = 1468.83, I = 7%,
State P (PV:), Q (Pmt:), interest (I(%):) and n (N:).
n = 16, A = ?
Find A16 (FV:) using a CAS calculator.
FV = 285 84.356 811 602

The amount outstanding when the rate
changed is $28 584.36.
b 1 Find n to repay $28 584.36 in full at the new
WriTE
b New interest rate of 8%:
rate. (Use Finance Solver to enter the following

values: I = 8, PV = 28 584.36, Pmt = 1468.83,
FV = 0, PpY: = 4 and CpY: = 4)
n = 24.896 005 939 422

= 25 quarters
Time = 61 years
Find the total term of the loan, that is, time at

7% plus time at 8%.
Term = 4 years + 61 years
c 1 Find A24 to calculate the amount still owing.
(That is, on your calculator change the value

of n to 24 and sove for FV.)
= 1014 years
c FV = 1291.669 456 564 649
The amount still owing after the 24th

repayment is $1291.61
Calculate the interest on the outstanding

amount to find the final repayment.
r = 84 = 2%
Interest on final payment

= 2% of $1291.61
= $25.83
= $1317.44
Find the total interest for the rate change scenario.

The number of repayments is 40 at $1468.83
plus 1 at $1317.44.
For the rate change scenario, total interest

= 1468.83 40 + 1317.44 42 000
= $18 070.64
Calculate the total interest if the rate remained

at 7%.
For the rate at 7% only, total interest

= 1468.83 40 42 000
= $16 753.20
Find the interest difference between the

twoscenarios.
Interest difference = 18 070.64 16 753.20

= $1317.44
Write a comparison statement.
An extra $1317.44 interest will be paid due to

the interest rate change from 7%p.a. to 8%p.a.
503
In the situations studied so far the repayment value, Q, remained the same, even though the rate varied.
In practice, this is what happens if the rate decreases and so the term of the loan decreases. However,
when the rate increases, financial institutions will generally increase the repayment value to maintain
the original term of the loan. This was discussed in the section Changing the repayment. If this is not
done the term of the loan can increase quite dramatically. In fact this may occur to such an extent that the
repayments are insufficient to cover the interest added, so that the amount outstanding increases.
Consider a $44 000 loan over 15 years at 10% p.a. (monthly).
Monthly repayments = $472.83
After 5 years the amount owing = $35 779.02
Suppose the interest rate rises dramatically to 16% p.a.
After a further 10 years under these conditions the amount owing = $37 014.72
That is, the amount owing has increased.
This situation is not beneficial to either the lender or the borrower.
interest only loans

Interest only loans are loans where the borrower makes only the minimum repayment equal to the
interest charged on the loan. As the initial principal and amount owing is the same for the period of
this loan, we could use either the simple interest formula or a CAS calculator to solve problems of this
type. When using Finance Solver, the present value (PV:) and future value(FV:) are entered as the same
amount. Note that the future value is negative to indicate money owed to the bank.
This type of loan is used by two kinds of borrowers: investors in shares and/or propertyor families
that are experiencing financial difficulties and seek short-term relief from high repayment schedules.
WorkEd ExaMplE 27
Jade wishes to borrow $40 000 to invest in shares. She uses an interest only loan to minimise her
repayments and hopes to realise a capital gain when she sells the shares at a higher value. The term of
the loan is 6.9% p.a. compounded monthly with monthly repayments equal to the interest charged.
a Calculate the monthly interest-only repayment.
b If, in 3 years, she sells the shares for $50 000, calculate the profit she would make on this
investment strategy.
Think
a 1 Identify P, r and T, where T is equal to one
payment period.
2
Evaluate I using the simple interest formula.
WriTE
a P = 40 000, r = 6.9% p.a.
T = 1 month =
I=
=
Write your answer.
b 1 Find whether the capital gain on the shares
exceeds the amount paid in interest.
504
Write a statement.
1
th year
12
PrT
100
40 000 6.9
1
12
100
= $230
The monthly repayment to pay the interest only
for the loan is $230.
b Capital gain = selling price purchase price
= $50 000 $40 000

= $10 000
Total interest charged = repayment number of
payments
= $230 36
= $8280
Profit = Capital gain Loan cost
= $10 000 $8280
= $1720
Jade will make a profit of $1720.

further calculations
Exercise 12E
1 WE 18 Jim has a reducing balance loan of $3500 that he is using for a holiday and has agreed to repay
it by monthly instalments of $206.35 at a rate of 7.6% p.a. (interest debited monthly). Find:
a the number of repayments needed to repay in full and this time in years
2 Aimee has borrowed $5500 for
some new outdoor furniture. She
is to repay the reducing balance
loan by quarterly instalments of
$861.29 with interest debited
quarterly at 9.4% p.a. Find:
a how long it will take Aimee
to repay the loan in full
diGiTal doC
doc-9502
Spreadsheet
reducing balance
loans
3 WE 19 Melpomenis loan of
$22 000 was taken out some time

ago. Interest has been charged at
7.8%p.a. (adjusted monthly) and
monthly repayments of $443.98
have serviced the loan. If the
amount still owing is $14 209.88:
a How long ago was the loan taken out?
b What was the term of the loan?
4 Some time ago, Elizabeth took out a loan of $25 000. Interest has been charged at 10.5%p.a. (adjusted
monthly) and monthly repayments of $537.35 have serviced the loan. If the amount still owing is
$11 586.64:
a how long ago was the loan taken out?
b what was the term of the loan?
5 MC A reducing balance loan of $80 000 is taken out at 7.9% p.a. (adjusted monthly) to finance the
purchase of a boat. It is to be repaid with monthly instalments of $639.84. The loan will be paid in full in:
a 10 years
b 15 years
C 20 years
d 22 years
E 25 years
6 MC Stuart has decided to borrow $85 000 to set up a business that makes garden ornaments. He will
repay this amount plus interest, charged at 6.6% p.a. (debited monthly), over 20 years with monthly
instalments of $638.75. If he wanted to use the annuities formula to find out how long it would be
before the amount he still owed fell below $50 000, the equation that he should use is:
638.75(1.0055240 1)
a 50 000 = 85 000(1.0055)n
1.0055 1
n 1)
638.75(1.0055
b 50 000 = 85 000(1.0055)n
1.0055 1
n 1)
638.75(1.0055
C 85 000 = 50 000(1.0055)n
1.0055 1
n 1)
638.75(1.0055
d 0 = 85 000(1.0055)n
1.0055 1
638.75(1.0055n 1)
n
E 0 = 85 000(1.0055)
1.0055 1
7 WE20 Gilas reducing balance loan of $9000 is to be repaid by monthly instalments of $230.43 with
interest charged at 10.5% p.a. (debited monthly).
a Currently, the amount owing is $8069.78. How much longer will it take to:
i reduce the amount owing to $3822.20?
ii repay the loan in full?
b Some time later the amount owing has fallen to $3226.06. How much longer will it take to:
i reduce the amount owing to $1341.23?
ii repay the loan in full?
505
8 WE21 Megan wanted to borrow $50 000 and was offered a reducing balance loan over 20years
at 6.9% p.a. (adjusted monthly) with monthly instalments.

a What will be the monthly repayment value?
b What would be the term of the loan if instead the repayment was:
i increased to $577.97?
ii increased to $486.33?
iii decreased to $361.85?
iv decreased to $352.90?
c In each case in b above, calculate the total interest paid.
d For each case above, calculate the interest difference from the original offer.
9 WE22 Jack borrowed $20 000 and agreed to repay the loan over 10 years with quarterly instalments
of $750.48 with interest debited quarterly at 8.6% p.a. However, after 5years he decided to increase the
repayment value. Find:
i the actual term of the loan
ii the total interest paid
iii the interest saving achieved by increasing the repayment if the quarterly repayment was
increased to:
a $901.48
b $1154.34
10 MC Robin borrowed $25 000 and agreed to repay this reducing balance loan over 10years with
quarterly instalments of $975.06, interest being charged at 9.5% p.a. After 4years Robin increased her
repayment value to $1167.17. The term of her loan will be closest to:
a 6 years
b 7 years
C 8 years
d 9 years
E 10 years
3
4
11 MC A loan of $25 000 is repaid in 2 stages over 8 years with quarterly instalments. For the first
4 years the repayment was $975.06 and was increased to $1167.17 for the remaining time. The total
amount of interest charged would be closest to:
a $9000
b $10 000
C $11 000
d $12 000
E $13 000
12 Anne is repaying a $26 000 loan over 8 years with monthly instalments of $383.61 at 9.2%p.a., debited
monthly on the outstanding balance. She has made 2 years worth of repayments but would like to
repay the loan in full in the next 5 years. Find:
a the amount that she still owes
b the monthly repayment value needed to repay in full.
13 WE23 A reducing balance loan of $30 000 has interest charged at 9% p.a. (debited before each
repayment) and can be repaid by quarterly instalments of $1145.32 over exactly 10years. The
equivalent monthly repayment is $381.77 and the equivalent fortnightly one is $176.20. Find the term
of the loan and the amount still owing before the final repayment if repayments are made:
a monthly
b fortnightly.
14 Phul has a reducing balance loan of $40 000. The loan has interest charged at 8% p.a. (debited before
each repayment) and can be repaid by quarterly instalments of $1462.23 over exactly 10years. The
equivalent monthly repayment is $487.41 and the equivalent fortnightly one is $224.96. Find the term
of the loan and the amount still owing before the final repayment if repayments are made:
a monthly
b fortnightly.
15 WE24 A loan of $25 000 attracts interest at 8.25% p.a. on the outstanding balance and the following
four scenarios are available:

i half-yearly repayments of $3101.48 for 5 years
3
ii quarterly repayments of $1550.74 for 4 years with $1217.93 still owing
4
iii monthly repayments of $516.91 for 58 months with $512.33 still owing
iv fortnightly repayments of $238.58 for 127 fortnights with $140.27 still owing.
Compare the total interest paid if the loan is repaid:
a half-yearly
b quarterly
c monthly
d fortnightly.
16 MC Betty has borrowed $65 000 to finance her plant and
flower nursery. If Betty chooses to repay the loan, which

attracts interest at 9.3% p.a. on the outstanding balance, by
fortnightly repayments of $309.66 rather than the equivalent
monthly repayment of $670.92, then,
a the term of the loan will be:
a 14 years 11 months
b 14 years 25 fortnights
C 15 years
d 15 years 1 fortnight
E 15 years 1 month
506
b the amount she will save is closest to:

a $240
d $300
b $260
E $320
C $270
17 WE25 A reducing balance loan of $25 000 has been taken out over 5 years at 8% p.a. (adjusted
monthly) with monthly repayments of $506.91.

a What is the total interest paid?
b If, instead, the rate was 9% p.a. (adjusted monthly) with the same repayments maintained, what
would be:
i the term of the loan now?
ii the total interest paid?
c If, instead, the rate was 10% p.a. (adjusted monthly) with the same repayments maintained, what
would be:
i the term of the loan now?
ii the total interest paid?
18 WE26 Peters reducing balance loan of $125 000 over 20 years attracts interest at 10.2% p.a. (adjusted
quarterly). Repayments of $3678.16 per quarter are made.
During the loan the interest rate is increased to 10.75% p.a. (adjusted quarterly), but the quarterly
repayment remains unchanged. Find:
a the amount outstanding when the rate changes
b the actual term of the loan
c the total interest paid compared to the amount it would have been if the rate had remained at
10.2% p.a. for the 20 years if the rate changed after:
1
i 5 years
ii 10 years
iii 6 years.
2
19 Andrews reducing balance loan of $52 000 over 15 years attracts interest at 11.75%p.a. (adjusted
fortnightly). Repayments of $283.92 per fortnight are made.

During the loan the interest rate is increased to 12.5% p.a. (adjusted fortnightly), but the
fortnightly repayment remains unchanged. Find:
a the amount outstanding when the rate changes
b the actual term of the loan
c the total interest paid compared to what it would have been if the rate had remained at 11.75% p.a.
for the 15 years if the rate changed after:
i 2 years
1
ii 12 years.
2
20 MC Clints $28 000 loan for his house extensions has interest debited every month at 12%p.a. of the
outstanding balance. The loan was due to run for 10 years and he was to make repayments of $401.72 per
month to service the loan. After he had made 50repayments his credit union reduced the interest rate to
10.75% p.a. (adjusted monthly) for the remainder of the loan.
a If Clint maintained the monthly repayment, the term of the loan would be:
3
1
3
a 9 years
b 10 years
C 10 years
4
4
4
d 11 years
E 12 years
b The total interest paid by Clint would lie between:
a $18 700 a nd $18 800
b $18 800 a nd $18 900
C $18 900 a nd $19 000
d $46 800 a nd $46 900
E $46 900 a nd $47 000
21 WE27 The Risky brothers want to invest in $140 000 worth of shares. They use other peoples money
and take out an interest only loan from the bank. The loan is at 10.8% p.a. compounded quarterly with
quarterly repayments.
a Calculate the quarterly repayment amount.
b If in 1 year they sell the shares for $152 000, calculate the amount of profit or loss they made on
this investment strategy.
22 MC The Bigs have had a new addition to the family and John, the father, takes 12 months of leave
from work to stay at home. To financially cope, they ask their bank manager for an interest only loan
for this period on the outstanding amount on their home loan, which is currently $210 000. If the terms
of the interest only loan are 6.79% p.a. compounded fortnightly, the fortnightly repayments will be
closest to:
a $548.42
b $1188.25
C $14 637
d $4879
E $21 032.18
diGiTal doC
doc-9503
WorkSHEET 12.2
507
12F
hire-purchase
People buy on hire-purchase when they cannot afford to buy the goods for cash. A deposit is usually paid and
the balance is paid over a fixed period of time. The retailer arranges a contract with a financial institution and
the purchaser pays regular instalments including interest at a flat rate to the financial institution.
A flat rate is the same as simple interest rate.
The interest charged is added onto the balance owing and then divided into the equal instalments.
Advantages of this form of buying are:
1. the purchaser has the use of the goods while paying them off
2. the cost of the goods is spread over a long term in small amounts.
The disadvantages are more complex:
1. the purchaser pays more for the goods in the long run
2. the goods are legally owned by the finance company until they are fully paid off
3. any forfeit on making the regular payments entitles the finance company to repossess the goods as
well as retain all past payments made.
The main stages of hire-purchase interest and total price calculations are:
Step 1. Check the price of the goods.
Step 2. Pay any deposit.
Step 3. Set up the balance as a loan.
Loan amount = price of goods deposit paid
Step 4. Calculate the interest on the loan using the simple interest formula.
Step 5. The total amount to be repaid is the sum of the balance and the interest.
Step 6. Establish regular payments/instalments.
total amount
Instalment amount =
number of instalments
Step 7. Total cost of goods = deposit + loan amount + interest
or
= deposit + instalment amount number of instalments
WorkEd ExaMplE 28
A ring with a marked price of $1800 is

offered to the purchaser on the following
terms: $200 deposit and the balance to be
paid over 24 equal monthlyinstalments with
interest charged at 11.5% p.a. flat rate. Find:
a the total interest paid
b the monthly repayments
c the total cost of the ring.
Think
a 1 Write the cash price.
508
TUTorial
eles-1306
Worked example 28
WriTE
a Cash price = $1800
Determine the deposit.
Deposit = $200
Calculate the amount of the loan required.
Balance or loan amount = cash price deposit

= $1800 $200
= $1600
List P, r and T.
P = $1600
r = 11.5% per year
T = 2 years
Write the simple interest formula, substitute

the values of the pronumerals into it and
evaluate.
I=
Write your answer.
PrT
100
1600 11.5 2
=
100
= $368
Total interest to be paid is $368.
b Total repayment amount = $1600 + $368
b 1 Add the interest to the principal.
= $1968
Calculate the monthly repayments.
Regular payment =
total amount
number of repayments
$1968
24
= $82
=
Write your answer.
The regular monthly repayments are $82.

c Total cost = marked price + interest
c 1 Calculate the cost of the ring.
= $1800 + $368
= $2168
Write your answer.
The total cost of the ring is $2168.
Weekly instalment advertising

Many retailers use the option of hire-purchase to attract new sales. They also choose to advertise
the instalment amount as it can seem to be very manageable. Buyers should investigate the entire
arrangement offered and find answers to questions such as:
1. What is the interest rate?
2. How does it compare to bank rates?
3. What is the total cost of the item?
4. How much interest is charged?
WorkEd ExaMplE 29
The following advertisement for a laptop computer was found in a newspaper.
Computer for sale

Cash price $2695
or pay only a third deposit and
104 weekly instalments of only $25.97.
If there is a total of 104 weekly instalments and a third deposit, find:
a the interest charged
b the interest rate (correct to 1 decimal place)
c the total cost of the computer.
Think
a 1 Write the cash price.

2
Calculate the deposit.
WriTE
a Cash price = $2695
Deposit = 1 of $2695
3
= $898.33
3
Calculate the amount of the loan.
Loan amount = $2695.00 $898.33

= $1796.67
Calculate the total cost of the loan, that is,

the total of the loan and the interest charged
paid by weekly instalments.
Total cost of loan = $25.97 104

= $2700.88
509
Calculate the interest charged and write

your answer.
b 1 Use the transposed simple interest formula
to find r, the interest rate on the loan. Check

that T is expressed in years to evaluate the
interest rate in % per annum.
Write your answer.
c 1 Calculate the total cost of the computer.
Write your answer.
Exercise 12F
Interestc harged = total amount loan

I=AP
= 2700.88 1796.67
= 904.21
Interest on the $1796.67 loan is $904.21
b P = $1796.67
I = $904.21
T = 104 weeks
= 2 years
100 t
r=
PT
100 904.21
=
1796.67 2
= 25.163 496 91
The interest rate for this hire-purchase is

25.2% p.a., correct to 1 decimal place.
c Total cost = deposit + loan + interest
= 898.33 + 1796.67 + 904.21

= $3599.21
The total cost for the computer including

interest on the loan is $3599.21.
hire-purchase
1 WE28 Debbie and Peter purchased a lounge suite on hire-purchase. The cash price was $2500.
Peter and Debbie paid $250 deposit and signed an agreement to pay the balance in 36equal monthly
instalments. If the hire-purchase company charges 14%p.a. simple interest, find:
a the total interest paid
b the monthly repayments
c the total cost of the lounge suite.
2 When buying new appliances for a recently renovated kitchen, Cheryl bought, from the same
supplier, a refrigerator worth $490, a stove worth $350 and a dishwasher worth $890. If she paid
$450 deposit and paid the balance over 48 months in equal monthly instalments at 12%p.a. simple
interest, find:
a Cheryls monthly instalments
b the total amount Cheryl paid for the goods.
3 While on holidays in Noosa, Jan saw a bracelet she could not live without. The marked price was
$2000. The jewellery shop owner offered her a discount of 15% if she paid a deposit of $250. Jan paid
the deposit and signed a hire-purchase agreement that she would pay the balance of the bracelets cost
at 15% p.a. flat rate with 24 equal monthly instalments.
a What was the price of the bracelet after the 15% discount?
b Calculate the balance Jan was to pay back.
c Calculate the interest Jan paid.
d Calculate Jans monthly instalment.
e How much did Jan pay altogether for the bracelet?
4 WE29 The cash price of a suit is $1800. If a customer pays a deposit of $300 and pays equal monthly
instalments of $60 over 21 years, calculate:

2
a the amount of interest charged
b the flat rate of interest
c the total paid for the suit.
510
5 A used car has a marked price of $7500. The dealer gives two choices of payment:
i no deposit, with the $7500 paid in equal monthly instalments of $250 for 3 years
ii $1500 deposit, paying interest of 12% p.a. and making equal monthly repayments for 3 years.
a Calculate the interest rate in choice i.
b Which deal is best for the purchaser? Why?
6 MC An electric guitar is bought on hire-purchase for a
$250 deposit and monthly instalments of $78.50 for 3 years. The

cash price for this guitar is $2500. The interest rate is closest to:
a 9.5%
b 7%
C 8.5%
d 8%
E 7.5%
7 MC Carpeting the home is not cheap, Rob stated.
Hire-purchase is the answer, replied Tom.
The cost of the carpet for the house is $9500. Rob and Tom
place a deposit of $1500 and plan to pay it back weekly over
4 years at 13% interest per year. The weekly instalment is:
a $253.37
b $62.20
C $46.20
d $58.46
E $462.00
8 MC A salesman told a couple that if they bought a television at
$890 today, he would allow a deposit of $100 plus $8.65 weekly
for 2 years. The interest rate charged is:
1
a 10%
b 7%
C 6.5%
d 9 %
2
9 For the camera in the advertisement, find:
i the total paid
ii the interest rate
for both option A and option B.
E 7.5%
THIS CAMERA CAN BE YOURS! EASY TERMS!

CASH PRICE $780 OR
Option A
No deposit and $37.70
monthly payments
for 2 years or
Option B
$100 deposit and $26.72
paid monthly for 30 months
10 A company advertised a dining room suite for $2500. You could pay:
a cash and receive a 10% discount, or
b $200 deposit and 5% p.a. interest on the remainder for 3 years, or
c $300 deposit and 4.5% p.a. on the
remainder for 31 years.

2
What is the total paid on each deal?
11 Carefully read the advertisement at right
for the cash price and regular instalments
for the LCD television. The term of the
repayments is for 3 years with 20%
deposit.
Calculate:
a the flat interest rate
b the total cost of the TV under the
hire-purchase plan
c the increase in cost over a cash sale.
$1095 or $15.40 fortnightly
511
reducing balance and flat rate

loan comparisons
12G
inTEraCTiViTY
int-0193
Comparing
investment options
As we have seen in previous sections, with reducing balance loans, interest is calculated on the current
balance and debited to the loan account at regular intervals just before repayments are made. Since the
balance continually reduces, the amount of interest charged also reduces.
In contrast, flat rate loans charge a fixed amount of interest as a percentage of the original amount
borrowed. This is calculated at the start of a loan and added to the amount borrowed. Since it is a flat rate
based on a fixed amount, the simple interest formula is used to calculate the interest:
I=
PrT
.
100
Let us compare the two types of loan under similar circumstances.

WorkEd ExaMplE 30
A loan of $12 000 is taken out over 5 years at 12% p.a. Find:
a the monthly repayment
b the total amount of interest paid
if the money is borrowed on:
i a flat rate loan
ii a reducing balance loan.
Think
TUTorial
eles-1307
Worked example 30
WriTE
For a flat rate loan:

State P, r and T.
PrT
Find the interest by using I =
.
100
i For a flat rate loan:
P = 12 000, r = 12, T = 5
12 000 12 5
I=
100
= $7200
Find the amount to repay, A.

Total repaid = P + I.
A=P+I
= 12 000 + 7200
= $19 200
Find the monthly repayment.

(First find n.)
n = 12 5 = 60
Repayment = 19 200 60
= $320/month
i State the total amount of interest paid.
a ii For a reducing balance loan:
(a) Find P, n, r and R
(b) Find the monthly repayment, Q,

PRn(R 1)
using Q =
Rn 1
b ii Find the total interest paid
(total repayments principal repaid).
i The total amount of interest paid is $7200.
a ii For a reducing balance loan:
P = 12 000, n = 5 12
= 60,
12
r=
12
=1
R = 1.01
12 000(1.01)60 (1.01 1)
1.0160 1
= $266.93/month
The monthly repayment is $266.93.
Q=
b ii Total interest paid
= 266.93 60 12 000
= $4015.80
In Worked example 30, the difference between the two loan types is significant. For the reducing
balance loan, each month $53.07 less is repaid and overall $3184.20 less interest is paid.
512
The percentage saving over this short loan is:

percentage interest saving =
3184.20
100%
7200
= 44.23%.
Choosing a reducing balance loan rather than a flat rate loan results in a smaller repayment value
or a shorter term and in both cases an interest saving. Now let us consider what flat rate of interest is
equivalent to the rate for a reducing balance loan.
WorkEd ExaMplE 31
A reducing balance loan of $25 000 is repaid over 8 years with monthly instalments and interest
charged at 9% p.a. (debited monthly).
Find:
a the repayment value
c the equivalent flat rate of interest for a loan in which all other variables are the same.
Think
WriTE
a For a reducing balance loan:
First find P, n, r and R.
P = 25 000, n = 8 12
= 96.
9
r = 12
= 0.75
R = 1.0075
Q=
Find Q.
PQn(R 1)
Rn 1
25 000(1.0075)96(1.0075 1)
(1.007596 1)
= $366.26
b Total interest = total repayments principal repaid
b Total interest = 366.26 96 25 000
c For a flat rate loan:
c For a flat rate loan:
(i) State I, P and T.

(ii) Find r using I =
PrT
.
100
= $10 160.96
I = interest from reducing balance loan

= 10 160.96
P = 25 000, T = 8
25 000 r 8)
10 160.96 =
100
= 2000 r
r = 5.08%
The equivalent flat rate of interest is 5.08%.
Worked example 31 illustrates that an interest rate of 9% p.a. on the outstanding balance is equivalent
to a flat rate of only 5.08% p.a., which again is a major difference between the two loan types.
Finally, we consider the effect on the amount that can be borrowed at a given rate for both types of loan.
WorkEd ExaMplE 32
A loan of $76 000 is repaid over 20 years by quarterly instalments of $2205.98 and interest is
charged quarterly at 10% p.a. of the outstanding balance.
Find:
a the total amount of interest paid
b the amount which can be borrowed on a flat rate loan in which all other variables are the same
as above
c the difference in the amount borrowed between the two types of loan.
513
Think
a 1 For a reducing balance loan:
n = 20 4
= 80
Interest = 2205.98 80 76 000
= $100 478.40
Write a statement.
The total amount of interest paid

is $100 478.40.
b For a flat rate loan:
(a) State I, r and T. I is the same as for the

reducing balance loan.
(b) Use the simple interest formula to find P.
I = 100 478.40, r = 10, T = 20

PrT
I=
100
P 10 20
100 478.40 =
100
=2P
P = $50 239.20
Write a statement.
For a flat rate loan, $50 239.20 can

be borrowed.
c 1 Find the difference between the principals
for the two loan types.

2
Find the total interest.
b 1 For a flat rate loan:
WriTE
Write a statement.
c The difference in the amount borrowed
= 76 000 50 239.20
= $25 760.80
Under the same conditions a $76 000 reducing

balance loan is equivalent to a $50 239.20 flat
rate loan.
The greater financial benefit of the reducing balance loan over the flat rate loan is again evident, this
time in terms of the amount that can be borrowed in the first place.
reducing balance and flat rate

loan comparisons
Exercise 12G
diGiTal doC
doc-9502
Spreadsheet
reducing balance
loans
1 WE30a Calculate the monthly repayment for money borrowed on:

a a flat rate loan
b a reducing balance loan, if the loan was for:
i $15 000 over 5 years at 9% p.a.
ii $30 000 over 10 years at 8% p.a.
2 WE30b For the loan situations outlined in question 1 calculate the total amount of interest paid for
both types of loan.

3 Calculate the quarterly repayment for money borrowed on:
a a flat rate loan
b a reducing balance loan, if the loan was for:
i $8000 over 3 years at 6% p.a.
ii $28 000 over 8 years at 10% p.a.
4 For the loan situations outlined in question 3 calculate the total amount of interest paid for both types
of loan.
5 Minnies loan of $6000 is taken out over 2 years at 11% p.a. Calculate:
a the monthly repayment
b the total amount of interest paid, if the money was borrowed on:
i a flat rate loan
ii a reducing balance loan.
514
6 The flat rate loans outlined below are repaid by monthly instalments. For each loan, calculate:
i the total amount of interest paid
ii the monthly repayment
iii the term of a reducing balance loan which has the same principal, monthly repayment and
interest rate
iv the interest saving achieved by using the reducing balance option.
a $14 000 borrowed over 5 years at 9% p.a.
b $21 000 borrowed over 5 years at 8% p.a.
c $90 000 borrowed over 20 years at 12% p.a.
7 Mike borrows $24 000 over 6 years at a flat rate of 10% p.a. and agrees to repay the loan with monthly
10
11
12
13
repayments.
a Calculate the total interest charged.
b Calculate Mikes monthly repayment.
c Calculate the term of the loan if Mike had borrowed the money on a reducing balance loan which
had the same monthly repayment and interest rate.
d Calculate the interest saving Mike would have achieved if he had used the reducing balance option.
If $11 000 is repaid over 5 years with monthly instalments, the loan that would require the greatest
repayment value would be:
a a flat rate loan at 9% p.a.
b a flat rate loan at 10% p.a.
C a reducing balance loan at 11% p.a.
d a reducing balance loan at 12% p.a.
E a reducing balance loan at 13% p.a.
WE31 A reducing balance loan of $24 000 is repaid over 10 years with monthly instalments and
interest charged at 6.6% p.a. (debited monthly). Calculate:
c the equivalent flat rate of interest for a loan in which all other variables are the same.
Aaron repaid a loan of $14 000 over 3 years with quarterly instalments and interest charged at 7.6% p.a.
of the reducing balance, debited quarterly. Calculate:
c the rate of interest for the equivalent flat rate loan in which all other variables were the same.
Rachel repaid a loan of $46 000 over 10 years with fortnightly instalments and interest charged at
9.3%p.a. of the reducing balance, debited fortnightly. Calculate:
c the rate of interest for the equivalent flat rate loan in which all other variables were the same.
WE32 Alice takes out a reducing balance loan for $27 000 and will repay it over 5 years by quarterly
instalments of $1899.75 at an interest rate of 14% p.a. (debited quarterly). Calculate:
a the total amount of interest to be paid
b the amount which Alice could have borrowed if, instead, she had chosen a flat rate loan with the
same details except the principal
c the difference in the amount borrowed for the two different loan scenarios.
A loan is repaid over 20 years by monthly instalments with interest charged monthly at 9% p.a. of the
outstanding balance. Calculate:
i the total amount of interest paid
ii the amount which can be borrowed on a flat rate loan in which all other variables are the same
as above, if the amount borrowed on the reducing balance loan was:
a $65 000 and the repayment is $584.82
b $84 000 and the repayment is $755.77
c $54 000 and the repayment is $485.85.
14 MC A reducing balance loan of $19 000 is repaid over 4 years with monthly instalments and interest
charged at 7.5% p.a. (debited monthly). The flat rate of interest that would allow $19000 to be
borrowed over the same time and with the same repayments would be closest to:
a 7.5% p.a.
b 7% p.a.
C 4% p.a.
d 4.5% p.a.
E 5% p.a.
15 MC Sarahs reducing balance loan of $9000 is repaid over 2 years with fortnightly instalments and
interest charged at 8.4% p.a. (debited fortnightly). If a flat rate loan was repaid over the same time, at
the same rate and with the same repayment value, the amount borrowed would be closest to:
a $4500
b $5000
C $5500
d $8500
E $9000
515
12h
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch a
video about
effective interest
rates.
When purchasing goods on hire-purchase (simple interest loan) or through a reducing balance loan, the
finance company lending the money hopes to make the deal look as attractive as possible. Some details,
therefore, are not prominently stated to the customer. One such detail is the effective rate of interest. In
a simple interest loan, the amount borrowed reduces over the term of the loan, but the customer is still
paying interest on the total initial loan amount. The effective interest rate is the equivalent reducing
balance interest rate taken over the contract period.
There are two ways of converting flat rate (simple interest) to effective rate.
1. Estimation:
Effective interest rate is a little less than 2 flat interest rate.
2. Calculation:
2n
Effective interest rate =
flat rate where n is the number of payments.
n+1
That is, on a loan of $100 at 10% interest over 4 years with yearly repayments, the interest charged is:
I = 100 0.10 4 = $40.
24
The effective interest rate is
10% = 16% (assuming yearly repayment).
4+1
This means that, even though the person is paying $40 interest, the effective interest rate over the
period is actually 16%, not 10%. The longer the period of the loan, the higher the effective interest rate.
This is shown clearly in the following table.
Year
Principal
owing ($)
Repayment of
principal ($)
Flat rate of
interest paid (%)
Effective rate of
interest paid (%)
100
25
10% of 100 = 10
16% of 100 = 16
75
25
10% of 100 = 10
16% of 75 = 12
50
25
10% of 100 = 10
16% of 50 = 8
25
25
10% of 100 = 10
16% of 25 = 4
$40
$40
$100
Total interest =
$40
Flat ate
r =
10%
Effective
ra
te = 16%
WorkEd ExaMplE 33
Jason decides to borrow money for a holiday. If a personal loan is taken over 4 years with equal
quarterly repayments at 12% p.a. flat rate (simple interest), calculate the effective rate of interest
(correct to 1 decimal place).
Think
516
WriTE
Write the flat rate and number of instalments.
Flat rate = 12%

n=44
= 16
Write the formula for effective rate of interest.
Effective rate =
Substitute n = 16 and r = 12.
Effective rate =
Write your answer. Check the answer by

estimating the rate which is less than 2 12%
(or 24%) p.a.
The effective interest rate is 22.6% p.a. for a flat

rate loan of 12% with sixteen instalments, correct
to 1 decimal place.
2n
flat rate
n+1
2 16
12
16 + 1
= 22.588
Exercise 12h
1 WE33 William is to purchase a new video recorder. If William pays $125 monthly instalments over
3years at an interest rate of 11.5% p.a. simple interest, what effective interest rate is he paying?
2
Item
a Television
b New car
c Clothing
d Refrigerator
5
6
Cash price
($)
$875
$23 990
$550
$1020
Deposit
($)
$150
$2000
$100
Monthly
instalment ($)
Simple
interest rate
8% p.a.
10% p.a.
7.5% p.a.
Term of
loan
2 years
5 years
1 year
63% p.a.
18 months
$50
diGiTal doC
doc-9504
Spreadsheet
Effective rates of
interest
For each of the items in the above table, calculate:

i the total amount of interest charged on each item
ii the total amount paid over the period given for each item
iii the monthly instalment on each item
iv the effective interest rate.
A camera valued at $1200 is purchased using a hire-purchase agreement. A deposit of $200 is required
and equal monthly instalments of $75 are paid over the 18-month agreed period. Calculate:
a the flat (simple) interest rate per annum
b the effective interest rate.
The bank approves a personal loan of $5000. A flat interest rate of 12.5% p.a. is charged, with
repayments to be made over a 9-month period in equal weekly instalments. Calculate:
a the weekly instalment
b the effective interest rate.
Calculate the effective interest rate on a loan of $1000 if the monthly repayments are $60 and the loan
is to be repaid over 2 years. (Hint: First calculate the simple interest rate.)
MC For a flat interest rate of 4.85% p.a. charged on a hire-purchase with monthly repayments over
2years, the effective rate of interest is:
a 2.425%
b 4.85%
C 9.3%
d 9.7%
E 9.6%
7 MC A reducing balance loan was used to purchase a home theatre system valued at $2500. If the loan is
paid off with quarterly repayments over 3 years at 9.6% p.a., then the effective interest rate is closest to:
a 17.7%
b 4.8%
C 5.2%
d 9.6%
E 19.1%
8 MC For a simple interest rate of 8% p.a. charged on a hire-purchase with weekly repayments over
6months, the effective interest rate is closest to:

a 15.4%
b 16%
d 15.7%
E 9.6%
C 3.9%
9 MC If the effective interest rate is 8.5% p.a. on a
hire-purchase with monthly repayments over 4 years,

then the flat interest rate is closest to:
a 16.7%
b 17%
C 4.3%
d 9.7%
E 4.1%
10 Carefully read the advertisement (including the small
print) for the purchase of the gadget at right and

calculate:
a the flat interest rate
b the effective interest rate
c the total cost under the hire-purchase plan
d the increase in cost over a cash sale.
$599
or
$4.21
weekly
(one-third
deposit
over two
years)
517
12i
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
perpetuities
A perpetuity is an annuity where a permanently invested sum of money provides regular payments that
continue forever.
Many scholarships or grants offered to students at universities are provided by funds known as
perpetuities.
The funds last for an indefinite period of time as long as the amount paid out is the same as the interest
earned on the initial lump sum deposited. The type of investment that is used to earn the interest is usually
a bond, which offers a fixed interest amount, paid on a regular basis, over a long period of time. Wealthy
people who wish to encourage and support a worthwhile cause usually set up these perpetuities.
The balance of the amount invested does not change and is the same for an indefinite period.
The perpetuity formula is:
Pr
100
where
Q = the amount of the regular payment per period ($)
P = the principal ($)
r = the interest rate per period (%).
Q=
Notes
1. The number of payments each year must be the same as the compounding period of the given interest
rate.
2. The Finance Solver can be used in calculations involving perpetuities. As the principal does not
change, the present value (PV: or negative cash flow) and the future value(FV: or positive cash flow)
are entered as the same amount, but with opposite cash flows.
WorkEd ExaMplE 34
MC Robert wishes to use part of his wealth to set up a scholarship fund to
help young students from his town further their education at university.
TUTorial
Robert invests $200 000 in a bond that offers a long-term guaranteed interest
eles-1308
Worked example 34
rate of 4% p.a. If the interest is calculated once a year, then the annual
amount provided as scholarship will be:
a $188 000
b $228 000
C $666.67
d $8000
E $4000
Think
1
Write the perpetuity formula.
List the values of P and r.

calculate the amount provided.
Select the appropriate answer.
WriTE
Pr
100
P = $200 000 and r = 4% p.a.
Q=
$200 000 4
100
= 8000
The annual amount provided for the scholarship
is $8000. Therefore d is thecorrect answer.
Q=
Finding P and r
As was the case with earlier sections in this chapter, there are calculations where we need to find the
principal (P) or interest rate (r) needed to provide a certain regular payment (Q). For example, how much
needs to be invested at 3% p.a. interest to provide a $10 000 annual grant, or what interest rate is needed
so that $100 000 will provide a $4000 yearly scholarship indefinitely? Other calculations involve finding
what extra amount could be granted annually as a scholarship if the interest is compounded monthly in
each year rather than once a year and the scholarship paid in two equal six-monthly instalments.
The perpetuity formula can be transposed to:
100 Q
100 Q
P=
and r =
r
P
518
If the frequency of the payments each year is not the same as the compounding period of the given
interest rate, then the Finance Solver is to be used with different values for PpY and CpY.
Notes
1. The principal must be known to use the Finance Solver.
2. The Finance Solver gives the interest rate per annum.
WorkEd ExaMplE 35
A Rotary Club has $100 000 to set up a perpetuity as a grant for the local junior sporting clubs.
The club invests in bonds that return 5.2% p.a. compounded annually.
a Find the amount of the annual grant.
b What interest rate (compounded annually) would be required if the perpetuity is to provide
$6000 each year?
The Rotary Club wants to investigate other possible arrangements for the structure of the grant.
c How much extra would the annual grant amount to if the original interest rate was compounded
monthly?
d What interest rate (compounded monthly) would be required to provide 4 equal payments of
$1500 every 3 months? Give your answer correct to 2 decimal places.
Think
a 1 Write the perpetuity formula and list the
values of P and r.
WriTE
Pr
100
P = $100 000 and
r = 5.2% p.a.
a Q=
$100 000 5.2

100
Q = 5200

find the value of the annual grant.
Q=
Write a statement.
The amount of the annual grant is $5200.
b 1 Write the perpetuity formula and list the
values of P and Q.

find the interest rate.
Write a statement.
c 1 As the frequency of the payment is not
the same as the compounding period, the

perpetuity formula cannot be used. Use the
Finance Solver and enter the values as follows.
n (N:) = 1
r (I(%):) = 5.2
P (PV:) = 100 000
Q (Pmt:) = unknown
A (FV:) = 1 00 000
PpY: = 1 (one payment per year)
CpY: = 12 (there are 12 compound periods
per year)
Solve the Pmt.
2
Compare the sizes of the 2 grants and write a

statement.
100 Q
P
P = $100 000 and
Q = $6000
b r=
100 6000
100 000
r=6
r=
For a $100 000 perpetuity to provide $6000 a

year, the bond needs to offer an interest rate of
6% p.a.
c Pmt = 5325.741 057 054
If the interest was compounded monthly, the

annual grant would amount to $5325.74
The extra amount is $5325.74 $5200 = $125.74.

If the interest is compounded monthly, the
annual grant would increase by $125.74.
519
d 1 As the frequency of the payment is notthe
same as the compounding period, the

perpetuity formula cannot be used. Use
the Finance Solver and enter the values as
follows.
n (N:) = 1
r (I(%):) = unknown
P (PV:) = 100 000
Q (Pmt:) = 1500
A (FV:) = 100 000
PpY: = 4 (four payments per year)
CpY: = 12 (there are 12 compound
periods per year)
Solve for I to find the required interest rate.
2
Write a statement.
d I = 5.970 247 527 183
r = 5.97
An interest rate of 5.97% p.a. compounded

annually is needed to provide four equal
payments of $1500, correct to 2 decimal places.
WorkEd ExaMplE 36
A benefactor of a college has been approached to provide a Year 7 scholarship of $1000 per term.
He is able to get a financial institution to offer a long-term interest rate of 8% per annum. What
is the principal that needs to be invested?
Think
1
WriTE
Write the perpetuity formula and list the values

of Q and r. Both Q and r need to be expressed
in the same period of time.
100 Q
r
Q = $1000 per term (4 terms per year)
R = 8% p.a.
8
=
P=
= 2% per term
100 1000
2
= 50 000
Substitute the values into the formula and find

the value of the annual grant.
P=
Write a statement.
The principal that needs to be invested to provide

a scholarship of $1000 per term at an annual
interest rate of 8% is $50 000.
Note that the Finance Solver cannot be used in the previous worked example as the principal is not
known. (Both PV: and FV: would be unknowns.)
Exercise 12i
perpetuities
MC The owner of a search engine company uses part of his wealth to set up research grants
to help young Australian scientists with their endeavours. He invests $350 000 in a bond that offers
a long-term guarantee of 5% p.a. If the interest is calculated once a year, then the annual amount
provided as a research grant will be:
a $70 000
b $17 500
C $1750
d $7000
E $3500
1 WE34
2
a
b
c
d
520
Use the perpetuity formula to calculate the annuity as specified in each of the following.
$400 000 invested at 4% p.a., paid once a year
$300 000 invested at 1% per quarter, paid 4 times each year
$100 000 invested at 12% p.a., calculated monthly, paid out monthly
$2 million invested at 6% p.a., compounded quarterly, paid out every 3 months
3 Check your answers to question 2 using the Finance Solver on a CAS calculator.
4 WE35 An AFL club has $80 000 to set up a perpetuity as a grant for the local senior sporting clubs.
The club invests in bonds that return 4% p.a. compounded annually.

b What interest rate (compounded annually) would be required if the perpetuity is to provide
6
7
9
10
$5000 each year?

The club wishes to investigate other possible arrangements for the structure of the grant.
c How much extra would the annual grant amount to if the original interest rate was compounded
quarterly?
d What interest rate (compounded monthly) would be required to provide 12 equal monthly
payments of $400?
Use the perpetuity formula to calculate the interest rate (p.a.) required for each of the following
perpetuities.
a $400 000 provides $5000 per annum with interest compounded annually.
b Half a million dollars provides $1000 each month with interest compounded monthly.
c $800 000 provides $30 000 every six months with interest compounded biannually.
d $100 000 provides $200 per fortnight with interest calculated fortnightly.
Check your answers to question 5 using the Finance Solver on a CAS calculator.
Use the Finance Solver on a CAS calculator to calculate the interest rate required for each of the
following perpetuities. Give your answers correct to 2 decimal places.
a $400 000 provides $5000 per annum with interest compounded monthly.
b Half a million dollars provides $1000 each month with interest compounded annually.
c $800 000 provides $30 000 every six months with interest compounded quarterly.
d $100 000 provides $200 per fortnight with interest compounded monthly.
WE36 A benefactor of a college has been approached to provide a Year 9 scholarship of $200permonth.
He is able to get a financial institution to offer a long-term interest rate of 3.6% per annum, compounded
monthly. What is the principal that needs to be invested?
MC The total amount given by the perpetuity in question 8 over a 50-year period is:
a $10 000
b $2400
C $57 000
d $66 700
E $120 000
Use the perpetuity formula to calculate the initial sum to be invested in a perpetuity specified as follows:
a A $1200 per annum grant from a fund offering 6% p.a. compounded annually
b A $10 000 per annum grant from a fund offering 4.5% p.a. compounded annually
c A $300 per month scholarship from a fund offering 0.5% per month
d A $120 per month grant from a fund offering 3% p.a. compounded monthly.
12J
annuity investments
A savings plan, like a Christmas Club account, is an investment where an initial sum as well as regular
deposits are made. The interest earned is calculated regularly on the balance of the investment, which
increases with each regular deposit (annuity). This is similar to reducing balance loans with the main
difference being that the principal amount is growing. Superannuation is a common annuity investment plan.
Superannuation
Most, if not all, Australians will have to provide for themselves in their retirement rather than
relying on the governmentsage pensions. To provide for their future, all working Australians have a
superannuation fund into which money is contributed by their employers, and optionallytopped up by
the employee, each pay period. The sum accumulates over many years, until retirement age, when the
money can be withdrawn. The funds can then be placed into an annuity or perpetuity that pays for the
retirees living expenses and lifestyle.
This is where superannuation calculations become tricky. You need to work out the amount of money
you must save to give you that retirement income. This depends on all sorts of variables, such as the
initial deposit, regular instalments, investment returns, inflation and tax rates.
The accumulated money, deposited by the workers, is invested in shares and properties, over many
years by financial institutions (also known as superannuation fund managers). The performance of these
superannuation fund managers varies from year to year. For the scope of this exercise, we will assume a
521
constant rate of return (interest rates remain the same). Also, the effects of inflation and taxation will not
be considered.
The money that accumulates in these annuity investments can be calculated using the annuities
formula in a similar way to that used in reducing balance loans. The difference is that the amount (A)
grows with the addition of a regular payment (Q). The formula is:
Q(Rn 1)
An = PRn +
R1
where:
P = the initial amount invested
R = the compounding or growth factor
r
(r = the interest rate per payment period)
=1+
100
Q = the amount of the regular payments made per period
n = the number of payments
An = the balance after n payments.
The Finance Solver can also be used in a similar way to reducing balance loans, with one
difference the cash flows are reversed (opposite signs).
WorkEd ExaMplE 37
Helen currently has $2000 in a savings account that is averaging an interest rate of 8%p.a.
compounded annually. She wants to calculate the amount that she will receive in 5 years time
when she plans to go on an overseas trip.
a If she deposits $6000 each year, find (to the nearest $1000) the amount available for her
overseas trip.
b If she places her $2000 and increases her deposits to $7000 each year into a different savings
account that can offer 9% p.a. compounded annually, find (to the nearest $1000) the amount
available for her overseas trip.
c Calculate the extra amount saved by investing $7000 each year at 9% p.a. compared with
$6000 each year at 8% p.a.
Think
a 1 State the value of P, Q, n, r and R.
Write the annuities formula and substitute in

the values.
WriTE
a P = $2000,
Q = $6000,
n = 5,
r = 8 and
R = 1.08
A = PRn +
Q(Rn 1)
R1
= 2000 1.085 +
3
Evaluate A.
Write a statement, rounding the answer

correctly.
b 1 State the value of P, Q, n, r and R.
6000(1.085 1)
1.08 1
= $38 138.26
The final balance of the investment after 5years
is $38 000, correct to the nearest $1000.
b P = $2000,
Q = $7000,
n = 5,
r = 9 and
R = 1.09
2

the values.
A = PRn +
Q(Rn 1)
R1
= 2000 1.095 +
3
522
Evaluate A.
= $44 970.22
7000(1.095 1)
1.09 1
Write a statement, rounding the answer

correctly.
c The extra amount saved is the difference between

the amounts found in parts a and b.
The final balance of the investment after

5years, if Helen deposits $7000 each year into
an account offering 9% p.a., would be $45 000,
correct to the nearest $1000.
c The extra amount is
$45 000 $38 000 = $7000.
planning for retirement

When do you want to retire, and how many years will you want to spend in retirement? How much
money will you need? An Australian male is now expected to live to 78 years of age and an Australian
female to 83 years of age. So, most people will need to plan on 20 to 25 years in retirement. A
common target is 60 to 65 per cent of your pre-retirement income (bearing in mind that you wont
have to pay for expenses such as commuting, work clothes and, hopefully, mortgage repayments by
then, and you may be entitled to a part pension and/or tax concessions). So, if you earn $60 000 a year
now, a starting point might be to think of a retirement income of about $36 000 a year. Remember,
these figures are in todays dollars.
Planning for retirement is an issue that youll need to revise regularly, maybe with a financial planner.
The annuities formula and the Finance Solver can be used to calculate how much money is needed under
different financial situations.
WorkEd ExaMplE 38
Andrew is aged 45 and is planning to retire at 65 years of age. He estimates that he needs $480 000
to provide for his retirement. His current superannuation fund has a balance of $60 000 and is
delivering 7% p.a. compounded monthly.
a Find the monthly contributions needed to meet the retirement lump sum target.
b If in the final ten years before retirement, Andrew doubles his monthly contribution calculated
from a, find the new lump sum amount needed for retirement.
c How much extra could Andrew expect if the interest rate from part b is increased to 9%p.a.
(for the final 10 years) compounded monthly. Round the answer to the nearest $1000.
Think
a 1 Identify the initial amount (P) and
the final amount (A).
WriTE
P = $60 000, A = $480 000
Find the number of payments, n, the

interest rate per month, r, and the
growth factor, R.
n = 20 12 = 240
r = 7% per annum
7
= % per month
12
= 0.583
r
R=1+
100
= 1.00583
Write the annuities formula and

substitute in the values.
A = PRn +
Q(Rn 1)
R1
480 000 = 60 000 1.00583 240 +

480 000 = 242 324.33 +
Q(1.00583 240 1)
(1.00583 1)
Q 3.038 738 849

0.00583
= 242 324.33 + Q 520.93

4
Evaluate Q.
Write a statement.
Q = $456.26
The monthly contribution to achieve a retirement
lump sum of $480 000 is $456.26.
523
b 1 We need to find the balance after the
first ten years with Q = $456.26 and

n = 120. Enter the values into the
formula and solve for A.
b A = PRn +
Q(Rn 1)
R1
456.26 (1.00583120 1)
= 60 000 1.00583120 +
1.00583 1
= $199 551.36
State the values used for the

final ten years and substitute
them into the formula.
P = $199 551.36, n = 120, R = 1.00583 and

Q = $912.52 (2 456.26)
Q(Rn 1)
A = PRn +
R1
912.52 (1.00583120 1)
= 199 551.36 1.00583120 +
1.00583 1
State the new value of A.
A = $558 974.01
Write a statement.
The new lump sum will be $558 974.00.
c 1 Calculate the new growth factor.
c r = 9% per annum
9
% per month
12
= 0.75
r
R=1+
100
= 1.0075
=
Q(Rn 1)
R1
912.52 (1.0075120 ) 1
= 199 551.36 1.0075120 +
1.0075 1
= $665 757.29
Substitute the values into the

formula for A and evaluate.
A = PRn +
Find how much extra is expected by

finding the difference between the
two amounts.
The difference expected is $665 757.29 $558 974.01

= $106 783.28.
Write a statement, rounding the

answer appropriately.
If the interest rate is increased to 9% for the final

10years, Andrew could expect an extra $107 000,
correct to the nearest $1000.
Once a lump sum has been realised, the funds are transferred or rolled over to a suitable annuity. This
annuity will then provide a regular income to live on. There are two options:
1. Perpetuities. As seen in the previous exercise, these annuities provide a regular payment forever.
This has two benefits. Firstly, it will provide for the retiree no matter how long they live and
secondly, the perpetuity could be willed to relatives who in turn will collect the same annuity
indefinitely.
2. Annuity reducing balance. This is the same as reducing balance loans except the fund manager
borrows the money and pays the retiree a regular income for a specified number of years. The main
disadvantage is if the retiree outlives the term of the reducing balance annuity; that is, the money
runs out.
WorkEd ExaMplE 39
Jarrod is aged 50 and is planning to retire at 55. His annual salary is $70 000 and his employer
contributions are 9% of his gross monthly income. Jarrod also contributes a further $500 a
month as a salary sacrifice (that is, he pays $500 from his salary into the superannuation fund).
The superfund has been returning an interest rate of 7.2% p.a. compounded monthly and his
current balance in the superfund is $255 000.
a Calculate Jarrods total monthly contribution to the superannuation fund.
b Calculate the lump sum that he can receive for his planned retirement at age 55.
524
Jarrod has two options for setting up an annuity to provide a regular income after he retires
at 55.
1. A perpetuity that offers monthly payments at 8% p.a. compounded monthly.
2. A reducing balance annuity, also paid monthly at 8% p.a., compounded monthly.
c Calculate the monthly annuity using option 1. Express the annual salary from this option as a
percentage of his current salary.
d Calculate the monthly annuity using option 2 if the fund needs to last for 25 years. Express the
annual salary from this option as a percentage of his current salary.
Think
a 1 Calculate the total contributions made by
a The employer contribution is 9% of the gross
Jarrods employer.
monthly income.
70 000
9% of
12
= 0.09 5833.33
= $525
Calculate the total monthly contribution

made to the superannuation fund.
The total monthly contributions are the

employer contributions and Jarrods
contribution. That is, $525 + $500 = $1025.
b 1 State the value of P, Q, n, r andR.

2
WriTE

the values of the pronumerals.
Evaluate.
b P = $255 000, Q = $1025, n = 60, R = 1.006
A = PRn +
Q(Rn 1)
R1
= 255 000 1.00660 +

= $438 869.90
Write a statement.
c 1 Write the perpetuity formula and list the
values of P and r.
1025(1.00660 1)
1.00660 1
The lump sum available for retirement is

$438 869.90.
c Q=
Pr
100
P = $438 869.90 and r = 8% p.a.
438869.90 8
100
= $35 109.59 per year

find the value of the annual payment.
Q=
Calculate the monthly payment.
The monthly payment is

= $2925.80.
Express the yearly payment as a percentage

of his current annual salary.
35 109.59
100%
70 000
= 50.16%
Write a statement.
The perpetuity will provide $2925.80 a

month which is equivalent to 50.16% of
his current salary (in todays value of
the money).
d 1 State the values of P, A, n and R.

the values.
35 109.59
12
d P = $438 869.90, A = 0, n = 300
R = 1.006
A = PRn
Q( R n 1)
R 1
0 = 438 869.90 1.006 300
(25 12),
Q(1.006 300 1)
1.006 1
525
Calculate the monthly payment.
Q = $3387.27
The monthly payment is $3387.27.
Express the yearly payment as a percentage

of his current annual salary.
The yearly payment will be $3387.27 12

= $40 647.24.
As a percentage of his current annual salary,
40 647.24
100% = 58.07%
70 000
Write a statement.
The reducing balance annuity will provide

$3387.27 a month which is equivalent to
58.07% of his current salary (in todays value of
the money).
The treatment of superannuation in this exercise presents the basics only, but includes most of the
mathematical techniques for analysing a retirement plan and understanding annuity investments. There
are other issues or factors such as taxation laws, the effects of inflation and other sources that can
contribute to a retirement plan. These are not required for the Further Mathematics course.
Exercise 12J
annuity investments
1 WE37 Barbara currently has $60 000 in an investment account that is averaging an interest rate of
6% p.a., compounded annually. She wants to calculate the amount that she will receive after 20 years.
a If she deposits $9000 each year, find (to the nearest $1000) the amount available for her after
20years.
b If she places her $60 000 and increases her deposits to $10 000 each year into a different savings
account that can offer 8% p.a. compounded annually, find (to the nearest $1000) the amount
available for her after 20 years.
c Calculate the extra amount saved by investing $10 000 each year at 8% p.a. compared with
$9000 each year at 6% p.a.
2 Find the final value of the following annuity investments.
a An initial amount of $10 000 earning 6.4% p.a. with annual contributions of $7000 for thenext
30years.
b An initial amount of $400 000 earning 10.4% p.a. with annual contributions of $12 000 for the
next 5 years.
c An initial amount of $0 earning 7.2% p.a. compounded monthly with monthly contributions of
$1200 for the next 15 years.
3 WE38 Justin is aged 38 and is planning to retire at 60 years of age. He estimates that he needs
$680 000 to provide for his retirement. His current superannuation fund has a balance of $40 000 and is
delivering 5% p.a. compounded monthly.
b If in the final ten years before retirement, Justin doubles his monthly contribution calculated from a,
find the new lump sum amount needed for his retirement.
c How much extra could Justin expect if the interest rate from part b is increased to 8% p.a.
compounded monthly (for the final 10 years)? Round the answer to the nearest $1000.
4 Find the contributions required to meet the following superannuation goals.
a A final payout of $800 000 if the current sum is $300 000 with 10 years to go, with a superannuation
fund delivering 6% p.a. compounded annually.

Contributions are to be paid once a year.
b A final payout of $375 000 if the current sum is
$60 000 with 20 years to go. The contribution is paid
monthly into a fund averaging 8.4% p.a. compounded
monthly.
c A final payout of $1 million if the current sum is
$160 000 with 20 years to go. The contribution is paid
monthly into a fund averaging 8.4% p.a. compounded
monthly.
526
5 For each of the superannuation plans in question 4, find:

i the total contributions made during the period stated
ii the interest earned during the period stated.
6 A superannuation plan for the past 30 years has had the following four stages. Calculate the total
amount in the superannuation fund at the end of each stage.

a Stage 1: An initial amount of $0 earning interest at 4% p.a. compounded annually with annual
contributions of $3000 for ten years.
b Stage 2: The final balance from Stage 1 now earning interest at 6% p.a. compounded monthly
with monthly contributions of $600 for twelve years.
c Stage 3: The final balance from Stage 2 now earning interest at 12% p.a. compounded monthly
with monthly contributions of $1000 for two years.
d Stage 4: The final balance from Stage 3 now earning interest at 9% p.a. compounded monthly
with monthly contributions of $1000 for the final six years.
7 Mr Rookie is aged 25 and is planning to retire at 55 years of age. He estimates that he needs $880 000
to provide for his retirement. His current superannuation fund has a balance of $600 and is delivering
7% p.a. compounded monthly.
b If in the final ten years before retirement, Mr Rookie adds a further $300 to his monthly
contribution calculated from a, calculate the new lump sum for retirement.
8 WE39 Jomar is aged 48 and is planning to retire at 55. His annual salary is $50 000 and his employer
contributions are 9% of his gross monthly income. Jomar also contributes a further $440 a month as a
salary sacrifice. The superannuation fund has been returning an interest rate of 9.6% p.a. compounded
monthly and his current balance in the fund is $110 000.
a Calculate the total monthly contribution to the superannuation fund.
b Calculate the lump sum that he can get when he retires at age 55.
Jomar has two options for setting up an annuity to provide a regular income after he retires at 55.
i A perpetuity that offers monthly payments at 10% p.a. compounded monthly
ii A reducing balance annuity also paid monthly at 9% p.a. compounded monthly
c Calculate the monthly annuity using option i. Express the annual salary from this option as a
percentage of his current salary.
d Calculate the monthly annuity using option ii if the fund needs to last for 20 years. Express the
annual salary from this option as a percentage of his current salary.
e Choose the best option and explain why.
9 Find the annual salary in retirement for the following
investments.
a An initial amount of $30 000 earning 7.65% p.a. with
annual contributions of $10 000 for the next 27 years.
The retirement income comes from a perpetuity fund
offering 6.4% p.a.
b An initial amount of $300 000 earning 9.4% p.a. with
annual contributions of $12 000 for the next 5 years.
The retirement income is paid monthly from a reducing
balance annuity that has a term of 15 years offering
10% p.a. compounded monthly.
c An initial amount of $0 earning 7.2%p.a. compounded
monthly with monthly contributions of $1200 for the
next 15 years. The retirement income is paid monthly
from a reducing balance annuity that has a term of
20years offering 8% p.a. compounded monthly.
10 MC Claire is aged 48 and is planning to retire at 65. Her annual salary is $60 000 and her employer
contributions are 10% of her gross monthly income. The superannuation fund has been returning an
interest rate of 9.6% p.a. compounded monthly. Claires current balance is $92 200 which she wants to
grow to $800 000. The extra amount that Claire will have to contribute each month to ensure this final
payout is achieved is closest to:
a $0
b $1990
C $650
d $150
E $240
527
11 MC Lee has $80 000 in an investment with monthly contributions of $850 earning an interest rate of
8% p.a., interest debited quarterly. Lee is aged 42 and wishes to retire at 60 years of age.
Which of the following equations should he use to find the final value of the investment?
2550(1.0272 1)
850(1.0872 1)
b A = 80 000 1.0272 +
a A = 80 000 1.0872 +
(1.02 1)
(1.08 1)
C A = 80 000 1.0272 +
850(1.0272 1)
(1.02 1)
E A = 80 000 1.0272
3440(1.0272 1)
(1.02 1)
d A = 80 000 1.0818 +
2550(1.0818 1)
(1.08 1)
12 Use a CAS calculator to calculate the unknown value in each of the following annuity investments.
a A superannuation funds performance is often measured by the interest rate returned on
superannuation investments. What is the required interest rate compounded monthly, if a current
balance of $100 000 is to mature to $800 000, if there is 20 years to go with monthly contributions
of $408 per month?
b A fund that returned 5.2% p.a. compounded monthly had grown from $25 000 to $250 000 where
the monthly contributions to the fund were $600. How long did it take for this fund to achieve
this?
c An investment account has a current balance of $156 000, which has had $6100 annual
contributions earning 6% p.a. compounded annually. What was the initial amount in the
account 8years ago?
528
Summary
Simple interest
A=P+I
I=
PrT
100
where A = Total amount ($)

P = Principal or amount borrowed or invested ($)
I = Simple interest charged or earned ($)
I = Simple interest charged or earned ($)
P = Principal (money invested or loaned) ($)

r = Rate of interest earned per period (% per period)
T = Time, the number of periods over which the agreement operates
Interest rate, r, and time period, T, must be stated and calculated in the same time terms.
100 I
To find the principal
P=
rT
100 I
To find the interest rate
r=
PT
100 I
To find the period of the loan or investment
T=
Pr
bonds, debentures
and term deposits
Term investments with governments are called bonds.

Term investments with companies are called debentures.
Term investments with banks are called term deposits.
All three are investments for a fixed period of time offering a simple interest rate.
Compound interest
Compound interest is calculated using the formula:

A = PRn where A = final amount ($)
P = principal ($)
r
R = growth or compounding factor = 1 +
100
r = interest rate per period
n = number of interest-bearing periods
For compound interest, I = A P
Finance Solver on a CAS calculator can be used to solve compound interest problems, especially
calculations to find time.
reducing balance
loans the
annuities formula
The annuities formula for reducing balance loans:

To find the amount still owing, A
Q(Rn 1)
A = PRn
where A = amount owing after n repayments
R1
P = amount borrowed
Q = repayment value
n = number of repayments made
r
, r = interest rate per period
R=1+
100
To find the repayment value, Q
PRn(R 1)
Q=
R1
reducing balance
loans further
calculations
Number of repayments
Finance Solver is used to find the number of repayments required to repay a loan in full.
Effects of changing the repayment
Increasing the size of the repayment decreases the amount of interest paid and decreases the term
of the loan.
Frequency of repayments
Increasing the frequency of the repayment decreases the total interest paid and may decrease the
term of the loan.
529
Changing the rate

Increasing the interest rate increases the total interest paid and generally increases the term of the
loan.
Using Finance Solver
where N: = the number of repayments
I(%): = the nominal interest rate (must enter as % per annum)
PV: = the amount borrowed or the current amount owed (enter as a positive number as cash is
flowing to you from the bank; a positive cash flow)
Pmt: = regular payment amount (enter as a negative number as the cash is flowing from you to
the bank; a negative cash flow)
FV: = the final amount owing (enter as 0 if the loan is fully repaid or enter the amount still
owing as a negative number)
PpY: = number of payments per year, for example quarterly; PpY = 4
CpY: = number of compounds per year, for example monthly adjusted; CpY = 12
PmtAt: Leave END highlighted as normally interest is charged at the end of the month.
hire-purchase
Hire-purchase is a loan for goods with interest calculated using flat rate (simple) interest and
regular payments.
The main stages of calculations are:
1. Loan amount = price of goods deposit paid
2. Flat rate interest on the loan is calculated using the simple interest formula.
total amount
3. Instalment amount =
number of instalments
4. Total cost of goods = deposit + loan amount + interest or
= deposit + instalment amount number of instalments
reducing balance
and flat rate loan
comparisons
Reducing balance loans are of greater financial benefit to a borrower than flat rate loans since
interest for:
(a) reducing balance loans is calculated on the amount outstanding each period, which continually
decreases throughout the life of the loan
(b) flat rate loans is calculated on the amount borrowed.
Only the effective interest rate can be directly compared with a compound interest rate as they both
take into account the reduction of the principal amount.
PrT
For flat rate loans I =
100
where I = interest charged
P = amount borrowed
r = interest rate per annum
T = term of loan (in years)
For reducing balance loans
Interest charged = total repaid amount borrowed
Effective rate of
interest
The effective interest rate is a true indication of the interest rate on a loan. It is calculated using a
flat interest rate when the loan is progressively being reduced, such as in hire-purchases.
1. Estimation:
Effective interest rate is a little less than 2 flat interest rate.
2. Calculation:
2n
Effective interest rate =
flat rate where n is the number of payments.
n+1
530
perpetuities
A perpetuity is an annuity where a permanently invested sum of money provides regular payments
that continue forever.
The perpetuity formula is:
Pr
Q=
where Q = the amount of the regular payment per period ($)
100
P = the principal ($)
r = the interest rate per period (%)

The perpetuity formula can be transposed to:
100 Q
100 Q
P=
and
r=
r
P
When using the perpetuity formula, the number of payments each year must be the same as the
compounding period of the given interest rate.
The Finance Solver can be used in calculations involving perpetuities. It is to be used if the
frequency of the payments each year is not the same as the compounding period of the given
interest rate. Different values are entered for PpY: and CpY:.
1. PV: (negative cash flow) and FV: (positive cash flow) are entered as the same amount, but with
opposite cash flows.
2. N: can take any value, as the balance never changes.
The Finance Solver cannot be used if the principal is unknown.
annuity investments
An annuity investment is an investment where an initial sum and regular deposits are made. The
interest earned is calculated regularly on the balance of the investment, which increases with each
regular deposit (annuity).
Superannuation is a type of annuity investment.
The money that accumulates in an annuity investment (or superannuation fund) can be calculated
using the formula:
Q(Rn 1)
An = PRn +
R1
where: P = the initial amount invested
R = the compounding or growth factor
r
(r = the interest rate per payment period)
=1+
100
Q = the amount of the regular payments made per period
n = the number of payments
An = the balance after n payments.
531
Chapter review
M U lT ip l E
C h oiCE
1 Two banks pay simple interest on short-term deposits. Bank A pays 6% p.a. over 4 years and BankB
pays 6.5% p.a. for 31 years. If $5000 was invested in each account, the difference between the two
2
banks final payout figure is:

a $0
b $1200
C $1137.50
d $150
E $62.50
2 Clayton has invested $360 in a bank for 3 years at 8% simple interest each year. At the end of the
3years, the total amount he will receive is:

a $86.40
b $236.80
C $28.80
d $388.80
E $446.40
3 A loan of $5000 is taken over 5 years. The simple interest is calculated monthly. The interest bill on
this loan is $1125. The simple interest rate per year on this loan is:
a 3%
b 4.5%
C 3.75%
d 5%
E 3.5%
4 A loan of $10 000 is taken over 10 years. The total interest bill on this loan is $2000. The simple
interest rate per year on this loan is:

a 3%
b 4.5%
5 A 6-year bond pays
81 %
2
C 2%
d 5%
E 2.5%
p.a. simple interest. If Rhonda bought a bond worth $500, the interest she
would earn would be:

a $250
b $255
C $2550
6 Simple interest was calculated on a term deposit of 5 years at
d $233.75
E $230
33 %
4
p.a. When Leigh calculated her total

return on her investment principal of $350, her return was:
a $415.63
b $400
C $65.63
d $131.25
E $481.25
7 An investment of $4500 earns compound interest at a rate of 6.4% p.a. and is made for 5years. The
balance in the account at the end of the investment period, if interest is compounded quarterly, is:
a $6181.40
b $4871.71
C $6136.50
d $15 561.27
E $8592.20
1
8 After 4 years $1200 has grown to $1750 in an account where interest is compounded monthly. The
2
annual interest rate is:
a 7.0%
b 0.7%
C 8.4%
d 3.2%
E 38%
9 A sum of $850 is invested at 8% p.a. compound interest, credited fortnightly. For the balance to grow to
$1200 the investment should be left for a minimum of:

a 112 years
b 113 years
d 4 years 9 fortnights
E 5 years
C 4 years 8 fortnights
10 In an account which pays compound interest at 12% p.a., credited daily, an investment of $13 000 will
accrue $4000 interest in:

a 2 years 86 days
b 2 years 87 days
C 3585 days
d 9 years 301 days
E 10 years
11 A loan of $14 000 is taken out over 4 years at 9.75% p.a. (debited fortnightly) on the outstanding
balance. The fortnightly repayment needed to repay the loan in full, to the nearest dollar, is:
a $135
b $145
C $163
d $170
E $319
12 Rachel repaid a reducing balance loan of $22 000 in 5 years by quarterly repayments and with interest
charged quarterly at 8.2% p.a. on the outstanding balance. The total amount of interest that she paid
was closest to:
a $27 000
b $5000
C $5100
d $9000
E $10 000
13 The number of monthly repayments required to repay a $41000 reducing balance loan in full, if the
repayments are $588.39 and interest is debited monthly at 10.5% p.a., will be closest to:
a 500
b 600
C 90
d 100
E 110
14 A reducing balance loan of $56 000 is repaid by quarterly instalments of $1332.24 over 15 years at an
interest rate of 5% p.a. (adjusted quarterly). If, instead, repayments of $1500 per quarter were made
throughout the loan (other variables remaining unchanged), the term of the loan would be:
a 15 years
532
b 14 years
3
4
C 12 years
1
2
d 12 years
E 12 years
Questions 15 to 17 refer to the followinginformation. A reducing balance loan of $24 000 attracting
interest at 6.5% p.a. can be repaid over 5years by either quarterly repayments of $1415.18 or fortnightly
repayments.
15 The fortnightly repayment value is between:
a $120 and $140
b $140 and $160
C $160 and $180
d $180 and $200
E $200 and $220
16 The interest saving achieved by repaying fortnightly is closest to:
a $4100
b $4300
C $140
d $160
E $180
17 If, instead, a rival institution offered a rate of 5.5% p.a., the quarterly repayment value that would
enable the loan to be repaid in full in the same time would be between:
a $1350 and $1375
b $1375 and $1400
C $1400 and $1425
d $1425 and $1450
E $1450 and $1500
18 A pearl necklace is purchased on hire-purchase for $225 deposit with equal monthly payments of $80
for 2 years. The cash price is $2000. The interest rate is:
a 3.5%
b 6%
C 4%
d 8%
E 7.5%
Questions 19 and 20 refer to the following information.
Jed borrowed $33 000 from his bank to set up a hobby farm. The loan is at 8% p.a., debited monthly on the
balance outstanding and with repayments of $400.38 made after each interest debit for 10 years. Kylie also
borrowed $33 000 over 10years from her building society at 8% p.a. flat rate of the amount borrowed.
19 The total interest that Jed paid was:
a more than the total interest that Kylie paid by just over $11 350
b less than the total interest that Kylie paid by just over $11 350
C more than the total interest that Kylie paid by just over $15 000
d less than the total interest that Kylie paid by just over $15 000
E more than the amount he borrowed
20 The difference between the repayment values of Jed and Kylie, to the nearest dollar, was closest to:
a $50
b $55
C $90
d $95
E $150
21 A hire-purchase contract specifies that there are to be monthly payments for 2 years. The flat rate of
interest is 6.3% p.a. The effective interest rate for this contract is closest to:
a 12.1%
b 11.6%
C 8.4%
d 6.3%
E 12.6%
22 A wealthy businesswoman sets up a cancer research grant. She invests $125 000 into government bonds
that offer 5% p.a. calculated annually. The annual grant would be:
a $1560
b $6250
C $25 000
d $6370
E $1250
23 A scholarship of $500 per term is provided for by a perpetuity invested in a fund offering 4.8% per
annum, compounded quarterly. The amount that needs to be invested is closest to:
a $10 400
b $41 700
d $20 800
C $166 700
E $9600
24 Justina wants a retirement income of $36 000 per annum paid monthly from the final payout of
her superannuation fund of $480 000. If the income is from an annuity that lasts for 30 years, the
required interest rate compounded monthly can be calculated using which one of the following
formulas?
3000( R360 1)
a 0 = 480 000 R360
( R 1)
b 0 = 480 000 R30
36 000( R30 1)
( R 1)
480 000( R30 1)

( R 1)
360
3000( R 1)
d 0 = 480 000 R360 +
( R 1)
C 36 000 = 480 000 R30
E 0 = 36 000 R30
480 000( R30 1)

( R 1)
533
25 Which of the following equations should Justina use to find the initial superannuation deposit
made 30 years prior to the superannuation maturing, given that the interest rate was averaging
6.0% p.a. compounded monthly with $360 monthly contributions from her employer?
360
a 480 000 = P 1.005360
b P = 480 000 1.0630 +
360(1.005 1)
(1.005 1)
36 000(1.0630 1)
(1.06 1)
C 36 000 = 480 000 1.005360 +

d 480 000 = P 1.005360 +
E 480 000 = P 1.0630 +
360(1.005360 1)
(1.005 1)
360(1.005360 1)
(1.005 1)
360(1.0630 1)
(1.06 1)
26 Kerry Green borrows $305 000 to invest in an apartment. She wishes to use the banks money to
purchase the property. If the terms of an interest only loan are 6.47% p.a. compounded monthly, the
monthly repayment is closest to:
a $1644.45
b $19 733.50
C $30 611.62
d $1644.46
E none of the above
Sh orT
anS WEr
1 Cynthia invested $270 with a building society in a fixed deposit account that paid 8% p.a. simple
interest for 4 years. How much did Cynthia receive at the end of the 4 years?
2 A bank offers 8.5% p.a. simple interest on an investment. At the end of 3 years the interest earned was
$765. How much was invested?

3 If $725 is invested for 3 years and earns $206.65 interest, calculate the yearly interest rate.
1
2
3
4
4 Jack put some money away for 4 years in a bank account which is paying 3 % p.a. interest. He found
on his bank statement he had earned $67.50. How much did Jack invest?
1
2
5 Steve invested the $1800 he won at the races in an insurance company bond that pays 12 %p.a. provided
he keeps the bond for 4 years. What is Steves total return from the bondat the end of the 4 years?
6 An investment bond is offered to the public at 10% per year. Louis buys a bond worth $4000 that will
mature in 21 years. How much in total will Louis receive at the end of the 21 years?
2
7 If $5400 is to be invested for 5 years, which of the options below would be the most productive to use?
a 12% p.a. simple interest
b Compound interest at 11.8% p.a., credited quarterly
c Compound interest at 11.7% p.a., credited monthly
8 What amount must be invested at 9.25% p.a., interest compounded 6-monthly, if it is to grow to $5000
over 4years?
9 How much interest would $950 earn if it was invested for 3 years at 12% p.a., interest credited daily?
10 How long would it take for $2000 to amount to $3450 by earning interest at 6.8% p.a., compounded
monthly?
Questions 11 to 13 refer to the following information. Helmut and Su-Li want to buy a boat, so they
borrow $70 000 at 7% p.a. (adjusted monthly) on the balance outstanding and agree to repay the loan
over 20 years with instalments of $542.71 per month.
11 Find the total amount of interest to be paid.
12 Determine the amount still owing after 10 years.
13 If the repayment value is increased to $600 per month after 10 years, calculate the term of the loan.
534
14 Frieda is repaying a $55 000 housing loan with interest calculated quarterly at 7%p.a. of the amount
outstanding. Quarterly repayments of $1487.93 are being made to service the loan. Twenty repayments
have already been made. Frieda decides to change her repayments to $250 per fortnight. The bank
responds by adjusting interest fortnightly.
Calculate the difference that these changes would make to the overall term of the loan.
15 Bert and Ernie have just finished repaying a 5-year, $8000 reducing balance loan, which they required
to re-carpet their home. During the first year interest was debited monthly at 8.5%p.a.; during the next
2years the rate fell to 8% p.a. but rose to 8.3% p.a. for the remaining period of the loan. Before signing
their contract Bert and Ernie were also given the option of fixing the interest rate at 8.25% p.a. (debited
monthly) for the term of the loan. By considering the total amount of interest that they paid, determine
whether Bert and Ernie made the right decision in choosing the variable interest rate for the loan rather
than the fixed rate.
16 The cash price of a car is $18 000. If a customer pays a deposit of $3000 and pays equal monthly
instalments of $300 over 5years, calculate:
a the amount of interest charged
b the flat rate of interest
c the total paid for the car
d the effective interest rate.
17 Bill and Ben would like to borrow $45 000 to buy a yacht. They have been given two options from
different banks, the details of which are outlined below.
a Bank A: Borrow money at 13% p.a. of the reducing balance, adjusted monthly for 10years.
b Bank B: Borrow money for 10 years at a flat rate of 9% p.a. of the amount borrowed.
By calculating the overall cost of each loan, determine which bank would provide the best option for
Bill and Ben.
18 The actors guild provides a donation of $1.2million dollars to be set up as a perpetuity thatearns
7.2% p.a. in interest, compounded annually.

b What interest rate compounded monthly would provide the same annual grant?
19 Use the Finance Solver to calculate the unknown value in each of the following annuity investments.
a A superannuation fund is to grow from $40 000 to $400 000 in 10 years where the interest rate is
expected to be 7.7% p.a. compounded quarterly. What would the quarterly contributions need to
be to achieve this growth?
b A superannuation funds performance is often measured by the interest rate returned on
superannuation investments. What is the required interest rate, compounded monthly, if a current
balance of $40 000 is to mature to $400 000, if there is 20 years to go with monthly contributions
of $200 per month?
Task 1
1 Geoff wants to buy a windsurfer. Its retail price is $3995. Geoffs first option for financing the purchase
E x TEn d Ed
rES p o n S E
is using hire-purchase. The terms offered by Your Money Finance Company are 10% deposit with
fortnightly instalments over 2 years at an interest rate of 7.8% per annum.
a How much will Geoff need to withdraw from his savings account to pay the deposit?
b Calculate the fortnightly repayments and total interest charge.
c What is the total cost of the windsurfer?
d A personal loan is advertised at 13.5% per annum. For Geoff to compare the interest rate he needs
to convert the hire-purchase flat rate of interest to the effective interest rate. Calculate the effective
interest rate.
2 Another option is for Geoff to save up until he has the cash to pay for the windsurfer. He can place
the balance of his savings account, $1983.50, into a term deposit offering 5.6% per annum for a
2-year term.
a Calculate the total value of his investment at the end of 2 years.
535
b Geoff uses the term deposit investment towards the purchase of the windsurfer. What extra
fortnightly savings will be needed over the next 2 years to make up the balance of $3995?
c What is the main attraction of the hire-purchase option over the options in 2a and b?
Task 2
Rhiannon is investigating a loan of $12 000 to be used to finance the purchase of a car. The finance
market is very competitive and Rhiannon chooses to investigate several options.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Practice
VCE exam
questions
Use StudyON to
access all exam
questions on this
topic since 2002.
Option 1: A flat rate loan at 7.2% p.a. with 36 monthly repayments

Option 2: A personal loan over 3 years at 12.75% p.a. calculated fortnightly on reducing balance
Option 3: A personal loan over 3 years at 3.0% per quarter on reducing balance
Option 4: Loan consolidated with her current home loan at 7.92% p.a. over a 15-year term calculated
monthly with monthly repayments.
1 a i Complete the interest rate per month for each of the options (to 1 decimal place).
Option
Interest rate per
month (%)
ii Calculate the effective interest rate for the option 1 flat rate loan.
b Calculate the interest charged for the option 1 flat rate loan.
c Calculate the monthly repayment for the flat rate loan (to the nearest dollar).
2 a Calculate the fortnightly repayments and total interest charged for the option 2 loan (to the nearest
dollar).
diGiTal doC
doc-9505
Test Yourself
Chapter 12
536
b Calculate the quarterly repayments and total interest charged for the option 3 loan.
3 a Calculate the increase in home loan monthly repayments if the $12000 is consolidated with option 4.
b Calculate the total interest charged using option 4 over the 15 years.
ICT activities
Chapter opener
diGiTal doC
10 Quick Questions doc-9494: Warm up with a quick quiz on loans
and investments. (page 475)
12a
Simple interest
diGiTal doCS
SkillSHEET 12.1 doc-9495: Practise substitution into formulas.
(page 479)
SkillSHEET 12.2 doc-9496: Practise conversion of units of time.
(page 479)
SkillSHEET 12.3 doc-9497: Practise substitution into the simple interest
formula. (page 479)
Spreadsheet doc-9498: Investigate simple interest. (pages 479, 482)
12C
Compound interest
diGiTal doCS
SkillSHEET 12.4 doc-9499: Conversion of rates of interest (page 488)
Spreadsheet doc-9500: Investigate compound interest. (page 488)
WorkSHEET 12.1 doc-9501: Simple and compound interest
calculations (page 490)
12d reducing balance loans the

annuities formula
diGiTal doC
Spreadsheet doc-9502: Compare reducing balance loans.
(pages 493, 505, 514)
TUTorial
WE 15 eles-1304: Watch a tutorial on using the annuities formula
to calculate an amount still owing. (page 491)
12E
reducing balance loans further calculations
diGiTal doC
WorkSHEET 12.2 doc-9503: Calculations using the annuities formula
(page 507)
12F
hire-purchase
TUTorial
WE28 eles-1306: Watch a tutorial on calculating repayments,
total interest and total cost for a hire-purchase situation.
(page 508)
12G reducing balance and flat rate

loan comparisons
TUTorial
WE30 eles-1307: Watch a tutorial on comparing reducing balance
and flat rate loan interest and repayments. (page 512)
inTEraCTiViTY
Comparing investment options int-0193: Use the interactivity to
explore comparisons between various investment options.
(page 512)
12h
diGiTal doC
Spreadsheet doc-9504: Investigate effective rates of interest.
(page 517)
12i
perpetuities
TUTorial
WE34 eles-1308: Watch a tutorial on using a CAS calculator to
determine perpetuities. (page 518)
Chapter review
diGiTal doC
537
Answers CHAPTER 12
loanS and inVESTMEnTS
Exercise 12a
4 a
c
5 a
c
6 a
Simple interest
b $56.70
d $336.89
b $2700
d $131.25
b $1020
1 a $136.00
c $255.00
2 a $103.50
c $325
3 a $360
c $27 700
4 C
5 B
6 a $2418.75
b
1.5%
1.5%
$3514.98
$8061.13
17
Balance
3300
3150
b
2600
1900
2400
Balance
Balance ($)
2100
1700
1500
1
3 4
Year
11
12
13
14
15
17
should not be connected if space allows.
a loan while The Friendly Building

Society charges 12%
(=12 1% per month).
a $3070
b $4400
c $5425
a 10%
b 6.25%
c 80%
a 1 year
b 18 months
c 3 months
$1515.79
$2133.33
24 months
3 years
C
16 B
B
Exercise 12b bonds, debentures and

term deposits
1 $3200
2 $315
3 $472.50
4 $1500
5 $1800
6 B
7 A
8 C
9 a $22.15
b $84.99
c $297
10 a i $1406.25
ii $1350
iii $1321.88
b No difference
Exercise 12C
1 a
c
2 a
b
c
3 a
d
538
Compound interest
$583.20
b $1630.47
$4472.27
d $3764.86
i $2519.42
ii $519.42
i $6615
ii $615
i $5285.81
ii $1860.81
5
b 20
c 8
72
e 9
f 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 x
Period
c Note: As each value is discrete, points
Balance
8000
6500
5000
0
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Month
d Note: As each value is discrete, points
should not be connected if space

allows.
4500
Balance
10
2200
3000
1500
0
7 a $605.60
c $795.77
e $1641.82
8 E
9 B
10 a $3542.13
c $2969.18
11 a $2069.61
c $3564.10
12 a $930.39
c $2035.90
13 B
14 a 13.98%
c 18.95%
e 16.59%
15 8.34%, that is, D
18
19
20
21
2000
7 a The Big-4 Bank offers the best rates.

1
b The Big-4 Bank charges 11 3 % p.a. for
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Period
8 12 16 20 24 28
Period
b $1314.84
d $1043.10
b
d
b
d
b
d
$2052.54
$5000
$1531.33
$5307.05
$468.67
$4692.95
b 5.62%
d 7.41%
6 years
10 years
3 years
5 years
1
a 19, 9 years
2
b 20, 5 years
3
c 57, 4 years
4
d 145, 5 years 15 fortnights
1
e 13, 3 years
4
f 32, 8 years
1
13, 3 4 years
B
1
a n = 30, 2 years
2
b n = 119, 4 years 15 fortnights
a 4 years
b $9718.11
16 a
b
c
d
3000
2300
2%
1.75%
$2687.83
$3431.89
3450
2500
b
d
b
d
Exercise 12d reducing

1 a $59 633.49
c $32 172.59
2 a $70 570.81
c $51 420.42
3 a $46 102.98
c $19 556.12
4 a $27 564.36
c $30 958.81
5 a $5691.20
6 a C
7 D
8 a i $548.22
b i $381.60
c i $298.62
d i $271.07
9 a Decreases
b Increases
10 a i $253.92
b i $507.97
c i $1101.28
d i $3311.33
11 a Increases
12 A, D
13 a $365.84
b i $259.59, $106.25
ii $339.75, $26.09
14 a $323.73
b i $46.23, $277.50
ii $299.28, $24.45
15 $38 231.10
balance loans
b $49 884.16
b $63 313.07
b $36 196.88
b $29 291.80
b $9087.53
b B
ii
ii
ii
ii
$1157.28
$1737.60
$2333.76
$2637.78
ii
ii
ii
ii
b
$170 076.80
$170 144.40
$170 307.20
$170 906.40
Increases
Exercise 12E reducing balance

loans further calculations
1
1 a n = 18, 1 years
b $214.30
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
a n = 7, 1 years
4
a n = 24, 2 years
a n = 36, 3 years
b $529.03
b 5 years
b 5 years
a i 2 years
ii 3 years
D
B
b i
3
4
year
8 a $384.65
b i 10 years
iii 23 years
ii
1
2
1
14
years
ii 13 years
1
2
iv 24 years
ii
iii
iv
$19 356.40 $25 867.48 $49 870.60 $53 752.60
$22 959.60 $16 448.52 $7554.60 $11 436.00

less
less
more
more
9
a
ii
9 years
$9433.28
iii
$585.92
b
8 years
$8861.68
$1157.52
10 D
11 E
12 a $21 164.60
b $441.40
13 a 10 years, A119 = $44.21
b 9 years 24 fortnights, A257 = $100.27
14 a 10 years, A119 = $102.61
b 9 years 24 fortnights, A257 = $185.59
15
Frequency
a Half-yearly
b Quarterly
19 a
b
c
20 a
b
21 a
b
22 A
5440.38
C
B
$5414.60
i 5 years 2 months
ii
i 5 years 4 months
ii
i $112 402.98
ii
iii $107 210.37
1
i 21 years
ii
4
iii 21 years
$169 252.80
i $18 139.87 m ore
ii $6223.13 more
iii $13 515.37 m ore
i $49 139.65
ii $15 959.17
i 16 years 9 fortnights
ii 15 years 1 fortnight
$58 728.80
i $9663.89 more
ii $194.87 more
A (no calculations needed)
C
$1260
$6960
Exercise 12F
1 a
c
2 a
3 a
c
d
6014.80
5496.63
d Fortnightly
Saving
($)
5707.11
c Monthly
16 a
b
17 a
b
c
18 a
Total interest
($)
$945
$3445
$39.47
$1700
$435
$78.54
hire-purchase
b $88.75
b $2344.56
b $1450
e $2134.96
$307.69
saving on
half-yearly
$518.17
saving on
half-yearly
$574.42
saving on
half-yearly
4 a $300
c $2100
2
$9660.
C
D
B
Option A i $904.80
ii 8%
ii 7.15%
Option B i $901.60
10 a $2250
b $2845
c $2846.50
11 a 12.4%
b $1420.20
c $325.20
6
7
8
9
Exercise 12G reducing balance and flat

rate loan comparisons
1 a i $362.50
ii $450
b i $311.38
ii $363.98
$6 750
$3 682.80
ii
$24 000
$13 677.60
$1281.51
$1 440
$801.28
ii
$22 400
$13 008.32
ii
$305
$279.65
$1320
$711.60
ii
iii
c N: = 1
$6 300 $338.33 4 yrs 2 mths
$3 475.29
$8 400
$4 586.57
c $216 000
1
4
$1275 10 yrs
7 a $14 400
3
c 4 years
4
8 B
9 a $273.74
c 3.69% p.a.
10 a $1315.72
c 4.26% p.a.
11 a $272.06
c 5.38% p.a.
12 a $10 995
c $11 292.86
13
i
$149 189.70
b $533.33
d $8194.04
b $8848.80
b $1788.64
b $24 735.60
b $15 707.14
ii
$75 356.80
$41 864.89
$97 384.80
$54 102.67
$62 604
$34 780
14 C
15 A
I%: = 12
PV: = 100 000
Pmt: = 1000
FV: = 100 000
PpY: = 12
CpY: = 12
PmtAt: = END
iv
$490 4 yrs 3 mths
b 9.25%
d $38.51
perpetuities
I%: = 4
PV: = 400 000
Pmt: = 16 000
FV: = 400 000
PpY: = 1
CpY: = 1
PmtAt: = END
rate 42.24%
C
D
A
C
a 4.82%
c $637.51
1 B
2 a $16 000 per year
b $3000 per quarter
c $1000 per month
d $30 000 per quarter
3 a N: = 1
b N: = 1
$733.44
$1575
6
7
8
9
10
Exercise 12i
$786.67
i
ii
1 22.38%
2 a i $116
ii $991
iii $35.04
iv 15.36%
b i $10 995
ii $34 985
iii $549.75
iv 19.67%
c i $33.75
ii $583.75
iii $40.31
iv 13.85%
d i $98.21
ii $1118.21
iii $59.35
iv 12.79%
3 a 23.33%
b 44.21%
4 a $151.90
b 24.32%
5 Simple interest rate 22%; effective interest
5 a 63%
b Choice i. The total price for choice i is
$9000; the total price for choice ii is
$6333.26
$7331.64
$91 558.99
20 2 years
Exercise 12h
b 8%
4 a
c
5 a
c
6 a
$3200 per year

$48.32
1.25%
7.50%
N: = 1
I%: = 1.25
PV: = 400 000
Pmt: = 5000
FV: = 400 000
PpY: = 1
CpY: = 1
PmtAt: = END
c N: = 1
I%: = 7.5
PV: = 800 000
Pmt: = 30 000
FV: = 800 000
PpY: = 2
CpY: = 2
PmtAt: = END
I%: = 4
PV: = 300 000
Pmt: = 3000
FV: = 300 000
PpY: = 4
CpY: = 4
PmtAt: = END
d N: = 1
I%: = 6
PV: = 2 000 000
Pmt: = 30 000
FV: = 2 000 000
PpY: = 4
CpY: = 4
PmtAt: = END
b 6.25%
d 6%
b 2.40%
d 5.20%
b N: = 1
I%: = 2.4
PV: = 500 000
Pmt: = 1000
FV: = 500 000
PpY: = 12
CpY: = 12
PmtAt: = END
d N: = 1
I%: = 5.2
PV: = 100 000
Pmt: = 200
FV: = 100 000
PpY: = 26
CpY: = 26
PmtAt: = END
539
7 a N: = 1
b N: = 1
I%: = 1.242895218
I%: = 2.426576795
PV: = 400 000
PV: = 500 000
Pmt: = 5000
Pmt: = 1000
FV: = 400 000
FV: = 500 000
PpY: = 1
PpY: = 12
CpY: = 12
CpY: = 1
PmtAt: = END
PmtAt: = END
r = 1.24% p.a.
r = 2.43% p.a.
c N: = 1
d N: = 1
I%: = 7.430975749 I%: = 5.20606734
PV: = 800 000
PV: = 100 000
Pmt: = 30 000
Pmt: = 200
FV: = 800 000
FV: = 100 000
PpY: = 2
PpY: = 26
CpY: = 4
CpY: = 12
PmtAt: = END
PmtAt: = END
r = 7.43% p.a.
r = 5.21% p.a.
8 $66 666.67
9 E
10 a $20 000
b $222 222.22
c $60 000
d $48 000
Exercise 12J
1 a
b
c
2 a
b
c
3 a
b
c
4 a
b
c
540
annuity investments
$523 000
$737 000
$214 000
$658 273.18
$729 849.11
$387 038.42
$1168.46
$861 442.14
$238 000
$19 933.98 per year
$88.74 per month
$236.64 per month
5 a i $199 339.80
ii $300 660.20
b i $21 297.60
ii $293 702.40
c i $56 793.60
ii $783 206.40
6 a $36 018.32
b $199 954.70
c $280 862.88
d $575 999.51
7 a $717.34
b $931 925.99
8 a $815
b $311 900.16
c $2599.17 per month, 62.4%
d $2806.25 per month, 67.4%
e Answers will vary
9 a $66 904.69
b $69 958.08
c $38 848.08
10 D
11 B
12 a 8.5%
b Approximately 16 years and 8 months
c $59 996.59
13 18 4 years
14 If changes not made, term = 15 years.
15
16
17
18
19
ExTEndEd rESponSE
ChapTEr rEViEW
MUlTiplE ChoiCE
1
6
11
16
21
26
E
A
C
D
A
D
2
7
12
17
22
E
A
B
B
B
3
8
13
18
23
B
C
E
C
B
4
9
14
19
24
C
D
C
B
A
5
10
15
20
25
ShorT anSWEr
1 $356.40
3
5
7
9
11
9 2%
$2700
c
$411.58
$60 250.40
2 $3000
4
6
8
10
12
With changes, term = 13 years

20fortnights.
So difference in term = 1 year 6 fortnights.
Fixed: interest = $1790.20
Variable: interest = $1784.51 so correct
decision is variable, $5.69 better off.
a $3000
b 4%
c $21 000
d 7.9%
Bank A: total paid = $80 628;
Bank B: total paid = $85 500 so Bank A is
best option by $4872.
a $86 400
b 6.97%
a $5287.59
b 9.39% p.a.
$400
$5000
$3482.46
8 years 1 month
$46 741.44
B
B
E
D
D
Task 1
1 a $399.50
b $79.93 per fortnight; $560.90 interest
c $4555.90
d 15.3% p.a.
2 a $2205.65
b $34.41
c Immediate use of the windsurfer.
Task 2
1 a i 0.6%, 1.1%, 1.0%, 0.7%
ii 14%
b $2592
c $406
2 a $186, $2470
b $1206, $2467
3 a $114.12
b $8541.60
Chapter 13
Financial transactions
and asset value
diGital doC
10 Quick Questions
doc-9506
Chapter ContentS
13a
13b
13C
13d
13e
13F
Bank accounts
Financial computations
Flat rate (straight line) depreciation
Reducing balance depreciation
Unit cost depreciation
Inflation
13a
bank accounts
Most banks offer their customers savings accounts with interest that is usually paid on:
1. the minimum monthly balance
2. the daily balance.
The interest is added at a specified time say once or twice a year as nominated by the bank, for
example, on the first day of June and December of each year. The more frequently the interest is added,
the better for the customers.
Savings accounts minimum monthly balances

To calculate interest on a minimum monthly balance saving account, the bank looks at the balances of the
account for each month and calculates the interest on the smallest balance that appears in each month.
Worked example 1
At the beginning of March, Ryan had $621 in his savings bank account. On 10 March he deposited
$60. If the bank pays 8% p.a. interest paid monthly and calculated on the minimum monthly
balance, calculate the interest Ryan earns in March.
think
Write
The smallest balance for March is $621,

as the only other transaction in that month
increased the balance.
Minimum monthly balance for March is $621.
I=
List the values of P, with r and T in months.
PrT
100
P = $621
8
r = 12 % per month
T = 1 month
8
Write your answer.
I=
621 12 1
100
= 4.14
The interest earned for the month of March

was $4.14.
Chapter 13 Financial transactions and asset value
541
The minimum monthly balance method is used in Worked example 2.

Worked example 2
The passbook page at right shows the transactions

for July. Find the interest that will be earned in July
if the bank pays 7% p.a. simple interest on the
minimum monthly balance.
think
To find the smallest balance for July, look

at all the running balances. Also check
balances at the start and end of the month.
Notice that the balance on 1 and 2 July, if
shown, would have been $237.50.
List the values of P, r and T in months.
Write your answer.
Date
3/7
7/7
21/7
28/7
Deposit
$100
$500
$50
Withdrawal Balance
$337.50
$837.50
$678
$159.50
$209.50
Write
Minimum monthly balance for July is $159.50.
PrT
100
P = $159.50
7
r = 12% per month
T = 1 month
7
159.50 12 1
I=
100
= 0.93
The interest earned for July was $0.93.
I=
Savings accounts daily balances

To calculate the interest on a daily balance savings account, the bank looks at the balances of the account
on each day and calculates the interest on that balance. The number of days each balance is maintained
is used to calculate the interest. When doing these calculations for yourself, you need to set out your
working carefully by, for example, using tables.
Lets investigate Worked example 2 again, using the daily balance method.
Worked example 3
Use the daily balance method to find the interest that will be earned in July,
if the bank pays 7% p.a. simple interest on the daily balance.
think
542
Set up a table showing each new balance

and the number of days the balance
applies. Look at all running balances
including those for 1 and 31July.
Calculate the interest for each

balance. As the interest rate is given
as percentage per annum, express the
number of days as a fraction of a year;
2
for example, 2days = 365 of a year.
tUtorial
eles-1309
Worked example 3
Write
Number
Simple interest Interest
Balance
of days the
calculations
earned
($)
balance applies
($)
($)
2
237.50 7 365
$237.50
$337.50
100
4
337.50 7 365
$837.50
14
837.50 7 365
$159.50
$209.50
100
$0.0911
$0.2589
14
100
7
159.50 7 365
100
4
209.50 7 365
100
$2.2486
$0.2141
$0.1607
Sum the interest. The calculations were to

hundredths of a cent for accuracy.
Interest for month = $2.9734
Round to the nearest cent.
$2.9734 $2.97
Write your answer.
The interest earned for July was $2.97.
The daily balance method offers more interest than the minimum monthly balance method
because it credits the customer for all monies in the account.
Credit cards
Credit cards allow you to purchase goods and services without paying for them by cash or EFTPOS.
Credit cards are also used for cash advances, paying bills or making purchases over the telephone or
via the internet. When applying for credit cards like Visa, MasterCard or Bankcard, a customer is often
given a choice of having either an interest-free period (for up to 55 days) for a small annual fee or no
fee payable and no interest-free period. Each cardholder is offered a certain limit of credit. A monthly
statement showing all transactions for the previous month is issued and the customer is expected to make
a monthly payment.
For the examples and exercises in this chapter, minimum payments
for credit card accounts are calculated as follows.
1. Balance less than $25
If the closing balance of the statement is less than $25,
the minimum payment is the same as the closing balance.
2. Balance more than $25
Where the closing balance is greater than $25, the minimum
payment to be made is the greater of:
(a) $25
(b) 1.5% of the closing balance (rounded down to the nearest
$1) if the closing balance exceeds $1700.
Note: If the closing balance is greater than the credit limit of the
card, then the minimum payment must also include the excess of
the balance over the credit limit of the card.
Worked example 4
For the following credit card summary details, complete the table.
Opening
balance
$560.50
$1425.60
$400.10
Payments
and credit
$560.50
$25.00
$400.10
Purchases
and other
charges
$240.60
$456.30
$630.00
Interest
Nil
$60.05
$50.00
think
a Calculate the closing balance. Closing balance =
Opening balance Payments + Purchases +

Interest.
b The closing balance is below the credit limit and
Closing
balance
a
c
$680.00
Credit
limit
$1000
$2000
$500
Minimum
monthly
payment
b
d
e
Write
a Closing balance = $560.50 $560.50
= $240.60
+ $240.60 + $0
b The minimum payment is $25.
less than $1700. Therefore, the minimum payment

is $25.
c Calculate the closing balance. Closing balance =
Opening balance Payments + Purchases +

Interest.
c Closing balance = $1425.60 $25 + $456.30
= $1916.95
+ $60.05
543
d 1 The closing balance is below the credit limit
and is greater than $1700. Calculate 1.5% of

the closing balance.
d 1.5% of the closing balance

1.5
= 100 $1916.95
= $28.75
Round the answer down to the nearest

dollar and write a statement.
The minimum monthly payment on a closing

balance that is below the credit limit and greater
than $1700, is $28.
e 1 The closing balance is greater than the
e The excess is the difference between the closing
credit limit. Calculate the excess of the

closing balance over the credit limit.
balance and the credit card limit.

= $680 $500
= $180
The closing balance is less than $1700.

The minimum payment for a closing
balance less than $1700 is $25. The total
amount payable is the excess plus the
minimum payment.
The total amount to be paid is the excess plus the

minimum payment
= $180 + $25
= $205
For up to 55 days interest free credit cards, no interest is charged if the amount is paid in full by the
due date, which is usually 25 days from the date of the statement.
The least understood feature of credit cards is what happens if the closing balance is not repaid in full
by the due date. In these circumstances, the cardholder temporarily loses the interest-free option. Interest
is usually charged on the outstanding balance from the day of the first purchase (that is, it is backdated)
until the outstanding balance is paid in full. Any purchases made before the balance is fully repaid are
also added to the total. So basically, if the balance is not paid in full by the due date, the card is effectively
a no interest-free period credit card account.
Worked example 5
For a 55 days interest-free credit card, there was an outstanding balance

of $400.00. A late payment is to be made on 26 June, 10 days after the due
date. There was a further purchase of $200.00, 5 days before the payment
was made in full and is not recorded in the given account and purchase
summary as shown. The annual interest rate for this credit card is 18.0% p.a.
calculated daily.
tUtorial
eles-1310
Worked example 5
Statement period: 22 April22 May 2012

Payment due: 16 June 2012
Account Summary
Opening
balance
$560.50
Payments
and credit
$560.50
Purchases
and other
charges
$400.00
Purchase Summary
Date
Item
2 May 2012
Hardware Place
20 May 2012
Dindin Restaurant
Interest
Nil
Credit
Nil
Nil
Closing
balance
$400.00
Credit
limit
$1000.00
Debit
$250.00
$150.00
Calculate the interest charged and the payment required to fully pay the balance of the
credit card.
544
Minimum
monthly
payment
$25.00
think
Write
18%
365
= 0.049 315%
Interest will be charged on all purchases

from the date of purchase until payment is
made in full. Identify the daily interest rate.
The daily interest rate =
Identify each purchase amount, the number

of days between each purchase date and
the payment date and calculate the interest
charged on each purchase using the simple
interest formula.
Hardware Place purchase: $250 on 2 May. Number

of days between the purchase date and the payment
date is 55.
0.049315
Interest = 250
55
100
= $6.78
Dindin Restaurant purchase: $150 on 20May.
Number of days between the purchase date and the
payment date is 37.
0.049315
Interest = 150
37
100
= $2.74
Third purchase: $200 on 21 June. Number of days
between the purchase date and the payment date is 5.
0.049315
Interest = 200
5
100
= $0.49
Calculate the total interest charged.
Total interest charged = $6.78 + $2.74 + $0.49

= $10.01
Calculate the payment required to pay the

credit card in full. This includes the closing
balance on the statement plus the new
purchases and the interest charged.
Total payment = closing balance

+ new purchases + interest
= $400 + $200 + $10.01
= $610.01
exercise 13a
bank accounts
1 We1 A bank savings passbook showed that the opening balance for the month was $2150. That
month, Paul paid his share of the bills as follows:

Electricity $21.60
Telephone $10.30
Rent $52.00
Paul also deposited his wage of $620 for the month into the account.
a What was Pauls minimum monthly balance?
b If the bank pays 5.5% p.a. paid monthly on the minimum monthly balance, how much interest did
Paul earn in the month?
2 We2
Date
1/5
3/5
7/5
19/5
27/5
Deposit
Withdrawal
$12
$16
$8
$10
Balance
$27.50
$39.50
$23.50
$15.50
$25.50
Robertas passbook shows the above transactions for May. Find the interest Roberta will earn in May
if the bank pays 6% p.a. simple interest:
a on the minimum monthly balance
b We3 on the daily balance.
diGital doCS
SkillSHEET 13.1
doc-9507
minimum
monthly balance
doc-9498
Spreadsheet
Simple interest
3 For the month of July, Rhonda received $3.20 in interest on her savings account. Rhondas minimum
balance in July was $426.20. What was the per annum simple interest rate offered by the bank?
4 Kristen receives the following statement from her bank. Due to a computer error the interest and
balances were not calculated.

545
Kristen rang the bank and was told that she received interest at a rate of 6 4% p.a. paid monthly
on her minimum monthly balance. Copy out Kristens statement and fill in the balances and interest
payments.
2012
Transaction
1 May
Balance B/F
3 May
Cheq 4217
7 May
Deposit
Debit
Credit
Balance
2132.20
460.27
230.16
17 May
Cheq 4218
891.20
26 May
Wages
31 May
Interest
2 June
Deposit
8 June
Cheq 4220
2217.00
19 June
Cheq 4219
428.50
21 June
Cheq 4222
16.80
23 June
Wages
30 June
Interest
1 July
Deposit
4 July
Cheq 4221
36.72
18 July
Cheq 4223
280.96
26 July
Wages
1740.60
31 July
Interest
_______
1740.60
415.10
1740.60
22.80
5 Using the bank statement from question 4, another bank offers to show Kristen that daily balance
interest credited each quarter is more rewarding. The interest is still 6.75% p.a. but is only credited at
the end of the quarter, that is, on 31 July. Calculate:
a the interest for the quarter ending July
b the increase in interest earned using the daily balance method.
Hint: This could be done using a spreadsheet or a CAS calculator.
6 Clark Kent has the following income and expenses for August and September.
Income:
$1410.20 salary each fortnight beginning 4 August

$461.27 income tax refund on 5 September
$68.20 cheque from health fund on 10 August
Expenses:
$620.80 rent on 20 August and 20 September
$180.64 telephone account on 2 September
$150.26 electricity account on 15 August
$180.00 Visa account on 30 August
$327.60 health fund on 5 August and 5 September
1
Design a statement (as for question 4) for Clark, remembering that he receives 7 2%interest paid on
the last day of each month on the minimum monthly balance in the account.
7 For each of the following, assuming the first given date is the purchase date and the second given date
is the payment date, determine the number of days between the dates. Check your answer using a CAS
calculator.
a 2 February 2008 and 4 March 2008
b 2 February 2009 and 4 March 2009
c 3 August 2010 and 5 November 2010
d 18 November and 14 December.
546
8 We4 For each of the following credit card summary statements, complete the table.
Opening
balance
$860.50
$1825.60
$458.10
Payments
and credit
$860.50
$45.00
$458.10
Purchases
and other
charges
$320.60
$56.30
$630.00
Interest
Nil
$30.05
$50.00
Closing
balance
a
c
$680.00
Credit
limit
$1500
$2000
$500
Minimum
monthly
payment
b
d
e
9 For each of the following credit card summary statements, complete the table.
Opening
balance
$560.50
$925.60
$400.10
Payments
and credit
$560.50
$25.00
$400.10
Purchases
and other
charges
a
c
$6300.00
Interest
Nil
$60.05
$50.00
Closing
balance
$800.00
$2550.55
e
Credit
limit
$1000
$2000
$5000
Minimum
monthly
payment
b
d
f
10 We5 For a 55 days interest-free credit card, there was an outstanding balance of $295.00. Alate
payment is to be made on 16 June, 15 days after the due date. There was a further purchase of $300.00,
12 days before the payment was made in full and is not recorded in the given account and purchase
summary as shown. The annual interest rate for this credit card is 16.9% p.a. calculated daily.
Statement period: 6 April6 May 2012
Payment due: 1 June 2012
Account Summary
Opening
Payments
Purchases and
Closing
balance
and credit
other charges Interest balance
$1560.50
$1560.50
$295.00
Nil
$295.00
Purchase Summary
Date
Item
Credit
$1560.50
12 March 2012
Payment Received
Nil
23 April 2012
Village Cinemas
Car Sound Installers
Nil
4 May 2012
Credit
limit
$500.00
Minimum
monthly payment
$25.00
Debit
Nil
$120.00
$175.00
Calculate the interest charged and the payment required to fully pay the balance of the credit card.
11 For the 55 days interest-free credit card statement shown below, calculate the payment amount required
to pay in full, if the payment was made on:

a 18 September
b 18 October.
There have been no further purchases made and the annual interest rate for this credit card is 12.9%,
with interest calculated daily.
Statement period: 15 August15 September 2012
Payment due: 9 October 2012
Account Summary
Opening balance
$0.00
Purchase Summary
Date
17 August 2012
14 September 2012
Payments
and credit
$0.00
Purchases and
other charges
$900.00
Interest
Nil
Item
Bikes R You
Poles Store
Credit
Nil
Nil
Debit
$600.00
$300.00
Closing
balance
$900.00
547
12 The following information appears on a credit card statement.
Statement period: April 2 to May 1

Payment due date: May 26
Opening balance: $0.00
Date
Transaction details
April 3
FIT Fitness Club
April 9
IGA Knox
April 16
Shoobiz
May 1
Tavern Club
Amount
$80.00
$289.00
$25.50
$69.95
a Calculate the number of days of interest-free period for each of the transactions.
b Calculate the payment required by the due date in order to avoid interest being charged.
c Complete the following paragraph.
To make full use of the up to 55 days interest-free option, the purchases should be made at the
of the statement period. The payment required to maintain the up to 55 days
interest-free option is for an amount of
before the date of
.
13b
In the financial world there are many and varied computations that are performed to measure different
types of costs, values, taxes and so on. Here we consider some basic financial calculations.
discount
A discount is an amount of money by which the price of an item is reduced. If expressed as a percentage
of the original price, it is called a percentage discount.
Discount ($) = original price sale price
Percentage discount (%) =
discount
100
original price
Worked example 6
A department store offers a discount on all goods in their store during their
summer sale.
a Calculate the percentage discount on a book reduced from $40 to $34.
If the same percentage discount is offered on all goods in the store, find:
b the sale price of a T-shirt originally priced at $39
c the discount on a DVD that has an original price of $29.95
d the original price and discount if the sale price of a television set is $297.50.
think
a 1 Evaluate the discount amount.
Express the discount as a percentage of the

original price.
tUtorial
eles-1311
Worked example 6
Write
a Discount = original price sale price
= $40 $34
= $6
Percentage discount =
=
discount
100
original price
6
40
100
= 15%
The book is reduced by 15%.
b 1 Calculate the discount then subtract this
amount from the original price to find the sale

price.
b Discount is 15% of the original price
= 15% of $39
= 15 39
100
= $5.85
548
Sale price = original price discount

= $39 $5.85
= $33.15
The sale price of the T-shirt is $33.15.
2
Alternatively, a discount of 15% is equivalent

to 85% of the original price (100%15%).
c 1 The discount is 15% of the original price.
85
85% of $39 = 100 39

= $33.15
c Discount is 15% of the original price
= 15% of $29.95
15
= 100 29.95
= 4.4925
2
Round the answer to 2 decimal places.
d 1 Express the sale price as a percentage of the
The discount on the DVD is $4.49.

d The sale price is 85% of the original price.
original price.
2
Let x represent the original price of the

television set. Write a statement and solve
for x.
Sale price is 85% of x

$297.50 = 85% of x
85
x
297.50 =
100
297.50 = 0.85x
x = 350
The original price of the television set is $350.
Calculate the discount by subtracting the sale

price from the original price.
Discount = original price sale price

= $350 $297.50
= $52.50
The discount on the television set is $52.50.
Goods and Services tax (GSt)

The Goods and Services Tax (GST) is a broadbased tax on most goods, services and other items
sold or consumed. The tax is collected by retail
businesses or service providers and passed on to
the Australian Taxation Office. In Australia, the
GST is calculated as a fixed 10% of the purchase
price of the goods.
Sale price = purchase price
+ 10% of the purchase price
= 110% of the purchase price
= 1.1 the purchase price
If the sale price that includes the GST is known,
then the pre-GST price can be found as follows:
Sale price = 1.1 the purchase price
(pre-GST price)
sale pric
pr e
Purchase price =
1.1
The GST amount = sale price purchase price
sale pric
pr e
= sale price
1.1
1
= 11 sale price
549
Worked example 7
For the following taxable items, find:

a the sale price that includes the GST, for a dining table that has a pre-GST price of $700
b the pre-GST price and the amount of the GST paid on a car that was bought for $23 000.
think
Write
a The sale price that includes the GST is equal
a Sale price = 1.1 the purchase price
b 1 The price of the car (including the GST) is
b The sale price of the car is $23 000.
to 1.1 the purchase price.
= 1.1 $700
= $770
The sale price of the dining table that includes
the GST is $770.
$23 000.
sale price
1.1
23000
=
1.1
= 20 909.090 91
Calculate the pre-GST price by dividing the

sale price by 1.1.
The pre-GST price =
Round the answer to 2 decimal places and

write a statement.
The pre-GST price is $20 909.09.
Calculate the GST amount by subtracting the

pre-GST amount from the sale price.
The GST amount = sale price pre-GST price

= $23 000 $20 909.09
= $2090.91
Alternatively, calculate the GST amount by

multiplying the sale price by 1 .
Alternatively, the GST amount

1
= 11 sale price
11
= 11 $23 000
= $2090.91
duty
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Duty (previously stamp duty) is a tax on certain transactions including transfers of land, motor vehicle
registrations and transfers, insurance policies, mortgages and hire-purchase agreements.
The rate of duty varies from state to state and according to the type and value of the transaction
involved. The simplest type of duty is a set percentage of the transaction amount. One such type of duty
is on the sale of real estate property. This is summarised in the following table. These rates are current at
the time of publication.
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
550
State Revenue Office of Victoria Duty schedule for property transfers

Value of real estate property
Tax rates
$0$25 000
1.4% of the dutiable value of the property
$25 001$130 000
$350 plus 2.4% of the dutiable value in excess of $25 000
$130 001$440 000
$2870 plus 5% of the dutiable value in excess of $130 000
$440 001$550 000
$18 370 plus 6% of the dutiable value in excess of $440 000
$550 001$960 000
$28 070 plus 6% of the dutiable value in excess of $550 000
More than $960 000
5.5% of the dutiable value
Another type of duty schedule is calculated as a dollar amount for every lump sum of money. The most
common example is the duty payable on transfer of vehicle ownership.
State Revenue Office of Victoria Duty schedule for transfer of
vehicle ownership
New vehicle
Non-passenger
(commercial)
Dutiable value of vehicle
Passenger
Used vehicle
$0$57 009
$5 per $200 or
part thereof
$5 per $200 or
part thereof
$8 per $200 or
part thereof
Exceeding $57 009
$5 per $200 or
part thereof
$10 per $200 or

part thereof
$8 per $200 or
part thereof
Worked example 8
Alisha purchases a two-bedroom unit for $365 000 and a new car for $37 100. Using the
two Victorian duty tables provided above, calculate the duty payable.
think
Write
Identify the matching property value bracket

for the cost of the unit.
$365 000 is in the $130 001 to $440 000 bracket.
Calculate the duty payable. This consists of

$2870 plus 5% of property value in excess of
$130 000.
The property excess of $130 001 is $234 999

($365 000 $130 001).
The duty payable = 2870 + 5% of $234 999
= 2870 + 0.05 234 999
= 2870 + 11 749.95
= $14 619.95
Write a statement.
The duty payable on the unit is $14 619.95.
Identify the duty payable for the new car

from the matching car price bracket and
category of vehicle.
The duty payable on a new passenger car less than

$57 009 is $5 for every $200 or part thereof.
Calculate the multiples of $200 in the car

price. Remember to round up at all times as
the rate is for every $200 or part thereof.
There are 185.5 multiples of 200 in 37 100.

(37 100 200)
Round this to 186.
Calculate the duty using the rate specified

and write a statement.
The duty payable on the new passenger car is

$5 186 = $930.
551
Capital gains
A capital gain (or loss) is the difference between the cost price and the selling price of an item.
Capital gain ($) = sale price cost price
In the case where these items generate an income (for example, property investments and shares), and
a capital gain has been made, this gain can be taxed (capital gains tax). Various methods are used for
calculating capital gains tax and this is beyond the scope of this course.
Costs associated with the purchase or sale of the item (for example, solicitors fees, stamp duty, agents
fees, and so on) can be deducted from the capital gain. In terms of investments, this would result in the
investor paying a lower amount of capital gains tax. Another factor considered in calculating capital gain is
the rate of inflation for that period. Inflation will not be considered in our capital gain calculations.
Worked example 9
Val purchased a property for $300 000 and sold it 2 years later for $430 000. At the time of
purchase, Vals duty, solicitors fees and other set up costs totalled $7000. When she sold the
property, her solicitors fees and agents commission totalled $5500.
a Calculate the capital gain, ignoring the associated purchase and selling costs, and express the
gain as a percentage of the purchase price (correct to 1 decimal place).
b Assuming the property was an investment property, how much of the gain would be liable for
capital gains tax (ignoring inflation)?
think
Write
a 1 The capital gain is the difference
between the cost price and the selling

price of the property.
2
Express the gain as a percentage of the

purchase price.
b 1 Calculate the total cost associated with
a Capital gain = sale price cost price
= $430 000 $300 000

= $130 000
$130 000
100
$300 000
= 43.3%, correct to 1 decimal place
Percentage gain =
b The total cost associated with the purchase and sale
the purchase and sale of the property.
of the property
= $7000 + $5500
= $12 500
Deduct these costs from the gain

calculated in part a.
$130 000 $12 500 = $117 500

The amount of the capital gain, excluding inflation,
that would be liable for capital gains tax would be
$117 500.
exercise 13b
1 We6 A department store offers a discount on all goods in the store during its winter sale.
a Calculate the percentage discount on a jacket reduced from $140 to $112.
b the sale price on a business shirt originally priced at $49
c the discounted amount on a CD that has an original price of $14.95
d the original price and discount if the sale price on a stereo system is $199.92.
2 Find the percentage discount for the following sales, correct to the nearest whole number.
a The price of a DVD player is reduced from $129 to $89.
b Sports socks are sold for $2 when the recommended retail price was $7.
c A car that costs $22 500 is to be reduced in price by $1500.
3 Calculate the sale price of the following items with the discounts as specified.
a A rug with an original price of $250 is discounted by 10%.
1
b A television with an original price of $300 is discounted by 33 3%.
c A set of bed sheets with a recommended retail price of $69.95 is discounted by 20%.
552
4 Find the original price and discount amount for the following sale items.
1
a Given a 12 % discount, the sale price on a home theatre system was $2800.
2
b Given a 12% discount, the sale price on an LCD television was $2640.
c Given a 10% discount, the sale price on a leather jacket was $269.10.
5 We7 For the following taxable items, find:
a the sale price that includes the GST, for a television that has a pre-GST price of $1200
b the pre-GST price and the amount of the GST paid on a car that was bought for $19 990.
6 Copy and complete the following table.
Goods or service
Purchase price or service fee
Washing machine
$890.00
Picture frame
Refrigerator
Plumbers service fee
Lamp side table
New car
Dental visit
GST amount
Sale price
$18.00
$120.00
$150.00
$45.00
$4.50
$25 600.00
$187.50
7 We8 Jarrod purchases a one-bedroom apartment for $285 000 and a used car for $11 000. Using the
two Victorian duty tables provided before Worked example 8, calculate the duty payable.
8 The two tables below are the duty schedules for property transfers and motor vehicle transfers for the
state of New South Wales, correct at the time of publication.

State Revenue Office of NSW Duty schedule for property transfers
Value of real estate property
Tax rates
0 to $14 000
$1.25 per $100
$14 001 to $30 000
$175 plus $1.50 per $100 in excess of $14 000
$30 001 to $80 000
$80 001 to $300 000
$300 001 to $1 million
Over $1 million
$40 490 plus $5.50 per $100 in excess of $1 million
State Revenue Office of NSW Duty schedule for transfer of vehicle ownership
Value of vehicle
New or used vehicles
Up to $45 000
$3 per $100 or part thereof
Exceeding $45 000
$1350 plus $5 per $100 or part thereof
Use the tables to calculate the duty on the purchase of a one-bedroom apartment for $285 000 and
a used car for $11 000 in New South Wales. Compare your answers with the answers obtained in
question 7.
9 For the following sales, calculate the duty payable on the transfer, if the sales were in:
i Victoria (see tables on page 551)
ii New South Wales (see tables on page 553).
a A new car with a sale price of $34 600
b A used car with a sale price of $19 000
553
c A suburban home with a sale price of $492 000

d A country farmlet purchased for $250 000
10 mC A new Audi motor vehicle has a purchase price of $62 000.
a If a 9% discount is offered, the reduced purchase price will be:
a $5580
d $67 580
b $55 800
e $59 900
C $56 420
a $62 060
d $5640
b $62 000
e $60 000
C $6200
a $850
d $2200
b $1350
e $3100
C $1860
b The sale price that includes a discount of 9% and the GST, will be closest to:
c The duty payable for a new Audi costing $62 000 in New South Wales would be:
11 We9 Vic purchased a property for $250 000 and sold it 3 years later for $335 000. At the time of
purchase, Vics duty, solicitors fees and other set up costs totalled $12 000. When he sold the property,
his solicitors fees and agents commission totalled $10 500.
a Calculate the capital gain, ignoring the associated purchase and selling costs, and express the gain
as a percentage of the purchase price.
12 Rochelle bought a parcel of shares worth $20 000. She paid brokerage fees of $200. She now plans to
sell the shares this will incur a cost of $250 in brokerage fees. Calculate her net capital gain if she
sells the shares for $40 000 and express this gain as a percentage of the purchase price.
13 Calculate the capital gain in each of the following financial transactions and express the gain as a
percentage of the purchase price.

a The purchase price of a property was $165 000 and the selling price was $258 000.
b The purchase price of a parcel of shares was $10 000 and the selling price was $25 000.
c The purchase price of a property was $420 000 and the selling price was $499 000.
d The purchase price of a property was $192 000 and the selling price was $368 000.
14 A property was purchased in January 1999 for $134 000. Its value increased by an average of
2.5% p.a. Following this pattern, calculate the expected selling price of the property in January
2005, ignoring inflation and any other costs. Express the capital gain as a percentage of the
purchase price.
diGital doC
doc-9508
WorkSHEET 13.1
15 Joanne buys 20 000 shares at $2.00 each as an investment. She sells the shares at $3.50 each, 15 months
later. Her total brokerage fee for buying and selling the shares on the internet was $60.00. Calculate the
net capital gain and express this gain as a percentage of the purchase price.
depreciation
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact with
depreciation.
Many items such as antiques, jewellery or real estate increase in value (appreciate or increase in capital
gain) with time. On the other hand, items such as computers, vehicles or machinery decrease in value
(depreciate) with time as a result of wear and tear, advances in technology or a lack of demand for those
specific items.
The estimated loss in value of assets is called depreciation. Each financial year a business will set
aside money equal to the depreciation of an item in order to cover the cost of the eventual replacement of
that item. The estimated value of an item at any point in time is called its book value.
When the book value becomes zero, the item is said to be written off. At the end of an items
useful or effective life (as a contributor to a companys income) its book value is then called its
scrap value.
Book value = cost price total depreciation to that time
When book value = $0, then the item is said to be written off.
Scrap value is the book value of an item at the end of its useful life.
There are 3 methods by which depreciation can be calculated. They are:
1. flat rate depreciation
2. reducing balance depreciation
3. unit cost depreciation.
554
13C
If an item depreciates by the flat rate method, then its value decreases by a fixed amount each unit time
interval, generally each year. This depreciation value may be expressed in dollars or as a percentage of
the cost price.
This method of depreciation may also be referred to as prime cost depreciation. Since the depreciation
is the same for each unit time interval, the flat rate method is an example of straight line (linear) decay.
The relationship can be represented by the linear equation:
BVT = P dT where
P = cost price ($)
d = rate of depreciation ($ per year)
BVT = book value ($) after time, T
= fixed amount per year or
T = time since purchase (years)
= percentage of P per year
We can use this relationship to analyse flat rate depreciation or we can use a depreciation schedule
(table) which can then be used to draw a graph of book value against time. The schedule displays the
book value after each unit time interval, that is:
Time, T
Depreciation, d
Book value, BVT
Worked example 10
Fast Word Printing Company bought a new printing press for $15 000 and chose to depreciate it
by the flat rate method. The depreciation was 20% of the prime cost price each year and its useful
life was 4 years.
a Find the annual depreciation.
b Draw a depreciation schedule for the useful life of the press and use it to draw a graph of book
value against time.
c Find the relationship between the book value and time and use it to find the scrap value.
think
a 1 State the cost price.
Write/draW
a P = $15 000
Find the depreciation rate as

20% of the prime cost price.
d = 20% of $15 000

= $3000 per year
Write your answer.
Annual depreciation is $3000.
b 1 Draw a depreciation
schedule for 04 years, using

depreciation of $3000 each
year and a starting value of
$15 000.
0
1
2
3
4
Draw a graph of the tabled

values for book value against
time.
c 1 Set up the equation:
BV = P dT. State d and P.
Book value ($)
b Time, T (years) Depreciation, d ($) Book value, BV ($)

T
V
15 000
12 000
9 000
6 000
3 000
0
15 000
12 000
9000
6000
3000
3000
3000
3000
3000
2
3
4
Time (years)
d = 3000
P = 1 5 000
BVT = 15 000 3000T
The press is scrapped after

4 years so substitute T = 4
into the equation.
BV4 = 15 000 3000(4)

= 1 5 000 12 000
BV4 = $3000
Write your answer.
The scrap value is $3000.
555
Note: If finding time, T, or depreciation, d, simply substitute into the equation, isolate the required
pronumeral and solve.
The depreciation schedule gives the scrap value, as can be seen in the previous example. So too does a
graph of book value against time, since it is only drawn for the items useful life and its end point is the
scrap value.
Businesses need to keep records of depreciation for tax purposes on a year-to-year basis. What if an
individual wants to investigate the rate at which an item has depreciated over many years? An example
is the rate at which a private car has depreciated. If a straight line depreciation model is chosen, then the
following example demonstrates its application.
Worked example 11
Jarrod bought his car 5 years ago for $15 000. Its current market value is
$7500. Assuming straight line depreciation, find:
tUtorial
eles-1312
Worked example 11
a the cars annual depreciation rate

b the relationship between the book value and time, and use it to find when the car will have a
value of $3000.
think
a 1 Find the total depreciation over the 5years and
a Total depreciation
thus the rate of depreciation.
= cost price current value

= $15 000 $7500
= $7500
Rate of depreciation
total depreciation
=
number of years
$7500
=
5 years
= $1500 per year
Write your answer.
The annual depreciation rate is $1500.
b 1 Set up the book value equation.
556
Write
b BVT = P dT
BVT = 15 000 1500T
Use the equation and substitute

BVT = $3000 and transpose the equation to
find T.
When BVT = 3000,

3000 = 15 000 1500T
1500T = 3000 15 000
1500T = 12 000
12 000
T=
1500
=8
Write your answer.
The depreciation equation for the car is

BVT = 15 000 1500T. The book value will
reach $3000 when the car is 8 years old.
exercise 13C
1 We10 A mining company bought a vehicle for $25 000 and chose to depreciate it by the flat rate
method. The depreciation was 20% of the cost price each year and its useful life was 4years.

b Draw a depreciation schedule for the items useful life and draw a graph of book value against time.
c Find the relationship between book value and time. Use it to find the scrap value.
2 All Clean carpet cleaners bought a cleaner for $10 000 and chose to depreciate it by the flat rate
V
3
Book value ($)
2
1
1500
1000
500
0 1 2 3 4 5 T
Time (years)
V
800
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0 1 2 3 4 5T
Time (years)
0 1 2 3 4T
Time (years)
d
Book value ( $1000)
Book value ( $1000)
Book value ($)
method. The depreciation was 15% of the cost price each year and its useful life was 5years.
b Draw a depreciation schedule for the items useful life and draw a graph of book value against time.
For the situations outlined in questions 3 and 4:
a draw a depreciation schedule for the items useful life and draw a graph of book value against time
b find the relationship between book value and time. Use it to find the scrap value.
A farming company chose to depreciate a tractor by the prime cost method and the annual depreciation
was $4000. The tractor was purchased for $45 000 and its useful life was 10 years.
A winery chose to depreciate a corking machine, that cost $13 500 when new, by the prime cost
method. The annual depreciation was $2000 and its useful life was 6 years.
For the situations outlined in questions 5 and 6:
a find the annual depreciation
b draw a depreciation schedule for the items useful life and draw a graph of book value against time
c find the relationship between book value and time. Use it to find how long it will take for the item
to reach its scrap value.
Machinery is bought for $7750 and depreciated by the flat rate method. The depreciation is 20% of the
cost price each year and its scrap value is $1550.
An excavation company buys a digger for $92 000 and depreciates it by the flat rate method. The
depreciation is 15% of the cost price per year and its scrap value is $9200.
We11 For the situations described below, and using a straight line depreciation model, find:
i the annual rate of depreciation
ii the relationship between the book value and time and use it to find at what age the item will be
written off, that is, have a value of $0.
a A car purchased for $50 000 with a current value of $25 000; it is now 5 years old
b A stereo unit bought for $850 seven years ago; it now has a current value of $150
c A refrigerator with a current value of $285 bought 10 years ago for $1235
Each of the following graphs represents the flat rate depreciation of four particular items. In each case
determine:
i the cost price of the item
ii the annual depreciation
iii the time taken for the item to reach its scrap value or to be written off.
V
18
16
12
8
4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8T
Time (years)
557
9 mC A 1-tonne truck, bought for $31 000, was depreciated using the flat rate method. If the scrap value
of $5000 was reached after 5 years, the annual depreciation would be:
a $31
b $1000
C $5200
d $6200
e $26 000
10 mC The depreciation of a piece of machinery is given by the equation, V = 6000 450T. The
machinery will have a book value of $2400 after:

a 7 years
b 8 years
C 9 years
d 10 years
e 24 years
11 The depreciation of a computer is given by the equation, V = 3450 280T. After how many years will
the computer have a book value of $1770?

12 mC Listed below are the depreciation equations for 5 different items. Which item would be written
off in the least amount of time?

a V = 650T + 7000
d V = 750T + 6000
b V = 750T + 7000
e V = 850T + 6000
C V = 650T + 6000
13 A business buys two different photocopiers at the same time. One costs $2200 and is to be depreciated
by $225 per annum. It also has a scrap value of $400. The other costs $3600 and is to be depreciated by
$310 per annum. This one has a scrap value of $500.
a Which machine would need to be replaced first?
b How much later would the other machine need to be replaced?
14 mC A car valued at $20 000 was bought 5 years ago for $45 000. The straight line depreciation model
is represented by:
a V = 20 000T + 45 000
d V = 45 000 20 000T
13d
interaCtiVitY
int-0194
reducing balance
depreciation
b V = 5000T + 45 000
e V = 45 000 25 000T
C V = 45 000 4000T
reducing balance depreciation
If an item depreciates by the reducing balance method then its value decreases by a fixed rate each
unit time interval, generally each year. Thisrate is a percentage of the previous book value of the
item.
Reducing balance depreciation is also known as diminishing value depreciation.
Worked example 12
Suppose the new $15 000 printing press considered in Worked example 10 was depreciated by the
reducing balance method at a rate of 20% p.a. of the previous bookvalue.
a Generate a depreciation schedule for the first 4 years of work for the press.
b What is the book value after 4 years?
c Draw a graph of book value against time.
think
a 1 Find the depreciation for the first year.
558
Write/draW
d1 = 20% of 15 000
= $3000
Find the book value after the first year.

Book value = cost price depreciation.
BV1 = 15 000 3000

= $12 000
Calculate year 2 depreciation and book value

after 2 years.
d2 = 20% of $12 000

= $2400
BV2 = 12 000 2400
= $9600
Repeat the process for the next 2years.
d3 = 20% of 9600
= $1920
BV3 = 9600 1920
= $7680
d4 = 20% of 7680
= $1536
BV4 = 7680 1536
= $6144
Draw the depreciation schedule.
b State the book value after 4 years from the
Time,
T (years)
0
1
2
3
4
c Draw a graph of the book value against time.
Depreciation,
d ($)
3000
2400
1920
1536
Book value,
BVT ($)
15 000
12 000
9600
7680
6144
b The book value of the press after 4 years will
depreciation schedule.
be $6144.
c
Book value ( $1000)
V
16
14
12
10
8
6
0
2
3
Time (years)
4T
It is clear from the graph and the schedule that the reducing
balance depreciation results in greater depreciation during
the early stages of the assets life (the book value drops
more quickly at the start since the annual depreciation falls
from $3000 in year 1 to $1536 in year 4).
Currently, the Australian Taxation Office allows
depreciation of an asset as a tax deduction. This means that
the annual depreciation reduces the amount of tax paid by
a business in that year. The higher the depreciation, the
greater the tax benefit. Therefore, depreciating an asset by
the reducing balance method allows a greater tax benefit
for a business in the beginning of an assets life rather than
towards the end. In contrast, flat rate depreciation remains
constant throughout the assets life. People have a choice
as to whether they depreciate an item by the flat rate or
reducing balance methods, but once a method is applied to
an article it cannot be changed for the life of that article.
The percentage depreciation rates, which are set by the
Australian Taxation Office, vary from one item to another
but for each item the rate applied for the reducing balance
method is greater than that for the flat rate method.
Let us compare depreciation for both methods.
Worked example 13
A transport business has bought a new bus for $60 000. The business has the choice of depreciating
the bus by a flat rate of 20% of the cost price each year or by 30% of the previous book value each
year.
a Generate depreciation schedules using both methods for a life of 5 years.
b Draw graphs of the book value against time for both methods on the same set of axes.
c After how many years does the reducing balance book value become greater than the flat rate
book value?
559
Write/draW
think
year.
Generate a flat rate depreciation schedule
for 05 years.
a d = 20% of $60 000
= $12 000 per year
Generate a reducing balance depreciation

schedule. Annual depreciation is 30%
of the previous book value. Subtract this
from the previous book value to ascertain
the present book value. Continue to
calculate the book value for a period of
5 years.
b Draw graphs using values for V and T from
the schedules. In this instance the blue line

is the flat rate value and the red curve is the
reducing balance value.
c Look at the graph to see when the reducing
Time,
T (years)
Depreciation,
d ($)
Book value,
BVT ($)
60 000
12 000
48 000
12 000
36 000
12 000
24 000
12 000
12 000
12 000
0
Book
value,
BVT ($)
Time,
T (years)
Depreciation,
d ($)
60 000
30% of 60 000 = $18 000
42 000
30% of 42 000 = $12 600
29 400
30% of 29 400 = $8820
20 580
30% of 20 580 = $6174
14 406
30% of 14 406 = $4321.80 10 084.20
Book value ( $1000)
a 1 Calculate the flat rate depreciation per
V
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
2 3 4 5 T
Time (years)
c The book value for the reducing balance method
balance curve lies above the flat rate line.

State the first whole year after this point of
intersection.
is greater than that of the flat rate method after

4 years.
We can write a general formula for reducing balance depreciation which is similar to the compound
interest formula, as discussed in chapter 12, except that the rate is subtracted rather than added to 1.
The reducing balance depreciation formula is:
r T
BVT = P 1
100
BVT
r
P
T
= book value after time, T

= rate of depreciation
= cost price
= time since purchase.
That is, given the cost price and depreciation rate we can find the book value (including scrap value)
of an article at any time after purchase.
Let us now see how we can use this formula.
560
Worked example 14
The printing press from Worked example 12 was depreciated by the reducing balance method
at 20% p.a. What will be the book value and total depreciation of the press after 4years if it cost
$15 000 ne w?
think
Write
State P, r and T.
P = 15 000, r = 20, T = 4
Substitute into the depreciation formula and

simplify.
r T
BVT = P 1
100
20
BV4 = 15 000(1 100 )4

= 15 000(0.8)4
= $6144
Evaluate.
Total depreciation is:

cost price current book value.
Total depreciation = P BV
= 15 000 6144
= $8856
The book value of the press after 4 years will be
$6144 and its total depreciation will be $8856.
ef fective life
The situation may arise where the scrap value is known and we want to know how long it will be before
an item reaches this value; that is, its useful or effective life.
r T
, T is needed.
So, in the reducing balance formula BV = P 1
100
Worked example 15
A photocopier purchased for $8000 depreciates by 25% p.a. by the reducing balance method. If
the photocopier has a scrap value of $1200, how long will it be before this value is reached?
think
Write
State the values of BV, P and r.
Substitute the values of the pronumerals into the

formula and simplify.
BV = $1200, P = $8000 and r = 25%

r T
BV = P 1
100
25 T
1200 = 8000 1
100
1200 = 8000 (0.75)T
0.15 = (0.75)T
Use calculator to find the value of T.
Interest is compounded annually, so T represents

years. Raise T to the next whole year.
Write your answer.
exercise 13d
T = 6.59 years
As the depreciation is calculated once a year,
T = 7 years.
It will take 7 years for the photocopier to reach
its scrap value.
1 We12 A farming company chose to depreciate its new $60 000 bulldozer by the reducing balance
method at a rate of 20% p.a. of the previous book value.

a Draw a depreciation schedule for the first 4 years of the bulldozers life.
b What is its book value after 4 years?
561
2 A retail store chose to depreciate its new $4000 computer by the reducing balance method at a rate of
40% p.a. of the previous book value.

a Draw a depreciation schedule for the first 4 years of the computers life.
b What is its book value after 4 years?
3 We 13 A caf buys a cash register for $550. The owner has the
choice of depreciating the register by the flat rate method (at 20%
of the cost price each year) or the reducing balance method (at 30%
of the previous book value each year).
a Draw depreciation schedules for both methods for a life of
5years.
b Draw graphs of book value against time for both methods on
c After how many years does the reducing balance book value
become greater than the flat rate book value?
4 Speedy Cabs taxi service has bought a new taxi for $30 000. The
company has the choice of depreciating the taxi by the flat rate
1
method (at 333% of the cost price each year) or the diminishing
value method (at 50% of the previous book value each year).
a Draw depreciation schedules for both methods for 3 years.
b Draw graphs of book value against time for both methods on the same set of axes.
c After how many years does the reducing balance book value become greater than the flat rate
book value?
5 We 14 Using the reducing balance formula, find BV (to 2 decimal places) given:
a P = 20 000, r = 20, T = 4
b P = 30 000, r = 25, T = 4
c P = 45 000, r = 15, T = 6
d P = 2675, r = 22.5, T = 5

6 mC A refrigerator costing $1200 new is depreciated by the reducing balance method at 20% a year.
After 4 years its book value will be:

a $240
b $491.52
C $960
d $1105
e $2488.32
7 The items below are depreciated by the reducing balance method at 25% p.a. What will be the book
value and total depreciation of:
a a TV after 8 years, if it cost $1150 new?
b a photocopier after 4 years, if it cost $3740 new?
c carpets after 6 years, if they cost $7320 new?
8 The items below are depreciated at 30% p.a. by the diminishing value method. What will be the book
value and total depreciation of:

a a lawn mower after 5 years, if it cost $685 new?
b a truck after 4 years, if it cost $32 500 new?
c a washing machine after 3 years, if it cost $1075 new?
9 mC After 7 years, a new $3000 photocopier, which devalues by 25% of its book value each year, will
have depreciated by:

a $400.45
d $2599.55
b $750
e $2750
C $2250
10 mC New office furniture valued at $17 500 is subjected to reducing balance depreciation of 20% p.a.
and will reach its scrap value in 15 years. The scrap value will be:
a less than $300
b between $300 and $400
d between $500 and $600
e between $600 and $700
C between $400 and $500
11 mC A new chainsaw bought for $1250 has a useful life of only 3 years. If it depreciates annually at
60% diminishing value rate, its scrap value will be:

a $0
b $60
d $250
e $270
C $80
12 We 15 Use the Finance Solver to find T (to 2 decimal places), given:

a BV = $3000, P = $40 000, r = 20
b BV = $500, P = $3000, r = 30
c BV = $900, P = $4500, r = 25
d BV = $1500, P = $7600, r = 15.
562
13e
The flat rate and reducing balance depreciations of an item are based on the age of the item. With the
unit cost method, the depreciation is based on the possible maximum output (units) of the item. For
instance, the useful life of a truck could be expressed in terms of the distance travelled rather than a fixed
number of years for example, 120 000 kilometres rather than 6years. The actual depreciation of the
truck for the financial year would be a measure of the number of kilometres travelled. (The value of the
truck decreases by a certain amount for each kilometre travelled.)
Worked example 16
A taxi is bought for $31 000 and it depreciates by an average of 28.4 cents
per kilometre driven. In one year the car is driven 15 614 km. Find:
a the annual depreciation for this particular year
b its useful life if its scrap value is $12 000.
think
a 1 Depreciation amount
= distance travelled rate
b 1 Total depreciation
= cost price scrap value

Distance travelled
total depreciation
=
rate of depreciation
where rate of depreciation
= 28.4 cents/km
= $0.284 per km
State your answer.
tUtorial
eles-1335
Worked example 16
Write
a d = 15 614 $0.284
= $4434.38
Annual depreciation for the year is $4434.38.

b Total depreciation = 31 000 12 000
= $19 000
19 000
Distance travelled =
0.284
= 66 901 km
The taxi has a useful life of 66 901 km.
Worked example 17
A photocopier purchased for $10 800 depreciates at a rate of 20 cents for every 100 copies made. In
its first year of use 500 000 copies were made and in its second year, 550 000. Find:
a the depreciation each year
b the book value at the end of the second year.
think
a To find the depreciation, identify the rate and
number of copies made.

Express the rate of 20 cents per 100 copies
in a simpler form of dollars per 100 copies,
0.20
that is $0.20 per 100 copies or
.
100 copies
b Book value = cost price total depreciation
Write
a Depreciation = copies made rate
d1 = 500 000
0.20
100 copies
= $1000
Depreciation in the first year is $1000.
0.20
d2 = 550 000
100 copies
= $1100
Depreciation in the second year is $1100.
b Total depreciation after 2 years
= 1000 + 1100
= $2100
Book value = 10 800 2100
= $8700
563
Worked example 18
The initial cost of a vehicle was $27 850 and its scrap value is $5050. If the vehicle needs to be
replaced after travelling 80 000 km (useful life):
a find the depreciation rate (depreciation ($) per km)
b find the amount of depreciation in a year when 16 497 km were travelled
c find the book value after it has been used for a total of 60 000 km
d set up a schedule table listing book value for every 20 000 km.
think
Write
a 1 To find the depreciation rate, first find the total
depreciation.
Total amount of depreciation
= cost price scrap value
Find the rate of depreciation.
It is common to express rates in cents per use
if less than a dollar.
b Find the amount of depreciation using the rate
calculated.
Amount of depreciation is always expressed in
dollars.
c 1 To find the book value, first calculate the
amount of depreciation for a use of 60 000 km.
2
Calculate the book value. In this case the

60 000 km has been travelled from when the
car was new so the previous book value is
$27 850.
Write your answer.
d Calculate the book value for every 20 000 km
of use and summarise in a table.
a Total amount of depreciation
= 27 850 5050
= $22 800
total depreciation
total distancee ttravelled
22800
=
80 000
= $0.285 per km
= 28.5 cents per km
b Amount of depreciation
= amount of use rate of depreciation
= 16 497 28.5
= 470 165 cents
= $4701.65
c Amount of depreciation = 60 000 28.5
= 1 710 000 c ents
= $17 100.00
Book value
= previous value amount of depreciation
= 27 850 17 100
= $10 750
Book value after the car has been used for
60 000 km is $10 750.
d For every 20 000 km,
amount of depreciation = 20 000 0.285
= $5700
Depreciation rate =
Use (km)
0
20 000
40 000
60 000
80 000
exercise 13e
Book value ($)

$27 850
$22 150
$16 450
$10 750
$5050
1 We 16 Below are depreciation details for 3 vehicles. In each case find:

i the annual depreciation
ii the useful life (km).
Purchase price ($)

a 25 000
b 21 400
c 29 600
564
Scrap value ($)

10 000
8000
12 000
Average rate of
depreciation (c ents / km)
26
21.6
28.5
Distance travelled
in first year (km)
12 600
13 700
14 000
In each situation in questions 2 to 3, find:

a the annual depreciation
b the items useful life.
2 A company buys a $32 000 car which depreciates at a rate of 23 cents per km driven. It covers
15 340 km in the first year and has a scrap value of $9500.

3 A new taxi is worth $29 500 and it depreciates at 27.2 cents per km travelled. In its first year of use it
travelled 28 461 km. Its scrap value was $8200.

We17 In each situation in questions 4 to 6, find:
a the depreciation for each year
4 A photocopier is bought for $8600 and it depreciates
at a rate of 22 cents for every 100 copies made. In its

first year of use, 400 000 copies are made and in its
second year, 480 000 copies are made.
5 A photocopier purchased for $7200 depreciates at a
rate of $1.50 per 1000 copies made. In its first year

of use, 620 000 copies were made and in its second
year, 540 000 were made.
6 A printing machine was purchased for $38 000 and
depreciated at a rate of $1.50 per million pages

printed. In its first year 385 million pages were
printed and 496 million in its second year.
7 A photocopier bought for $11 300 depreciates at a rate of 2.5 cents for every 10 copies made. Copy and
complete the table below.

Time
(years)
1
2
3
4
5
Copies made
per year
350 000
425 000
376 200
291 040
385 620
Annual
depreciation ($)
Book value at end

of year ($)
8 A corking machine bought for $14 750 depreciates at a rate of $2.50 for every 100 bottles corked. Copy
and complete the table below.

Time
(years)
1
2
3
4
5
Bottles corked
per year
40 000
42 500
46 700
38 250
43 060
Depreciation ($)
Book value
at end of year ($)
9 mC A vehicle is bought for $25 900 and it depreciates at a rate of 21.6 cents per km driven. After its
first year of use, in which it travels 13 690km, the book value of the vehicle is closest to:
a $1000
b $3000
C $20 000
d $23 000
e $25 000
In each situation in questions 10 and 11, find:
a the depreciation for each year
10 A company van is purchased for $32 600 and it depreciates at a rate of 24.8 cents per km driven. In its first
year of use the van travels 15 620km and it travels 16 045km in its second year.
11 A taxi is bought for $35 099 and it depreciates at a rate of 29.2 cents per km driven. It travels 21 216km
in its first year of use and 19 950km in its second year.

565
12 A car bought for $28 395 depreciates at a rate of 23.6 cents for every km travelled. Copy and complete
the table below.

Time
(years)
Distance
travelled (km)
13 290
15 650
14 175
9 674
16 588
Depreciation ($)
Book value
at end of year ($)
13 We18 A delivery service purchases a van for $30 000 and it is expected that the van will be written off
after travelling 200 000 km. It is estimated that the van will travel 1600km each week.
Find the depreciation rate (charge per km).
Find how long it will take for the van to be written off.
Find the distance travelled for the van to depreciate by $13 800.
Find its book value after it has travelled 160 000 kilometres.
Set up a schedule table for the value of the van for every 20 000 kilometres.
a
b
c
d
e
14 A car is bought for $35 000 and a scrap value of $10 000 is set for it. The following three options for
depreciating the car are available:

i flat rate of 10% of the purchase price each year
ii 20% p.a. of the reducing balance
iii 25 cents per km driven (the car travels an average of 10 000 km per year).
a Which method will enable the car to reach its scrap value sooner?
b If the car is used in a business the annual depreciation can be claimed as a tax deduction. What
would the tax deduction be in the first year of use for each of the depreciation methods?
c How would your answers to part b vary for the 5th year of use?
15 mC A machine which was bought for $8500 was depreciated at the rate of 2 cents per unit produced.
diGital doC
doc-9509
WorkSHEET 13.2
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch
a video about
inflation.
566
By the time the book value had decreased to $2000, the number of units produced would be:
a 75 000
b 100 000
C 125 000
d 300 000
e 325 000
16 mC An $8500 machine depreciates by 2 cents/unit. By the time the machine had depreciated by
$5000, it would have produced:
a 275 000 units
b 250 000 un its
C 225 000 un its
d 175 000 units
e 150 000 un its
13F
inflation
The term inflation is often used when talking about prices. It is a measure of the average increase in the
price of goods and services from one year to the next. The effect of inflation (price increases) is that
money loses its value and therefore its purchasing power (how much we can buy with it).
Inflation is often expressed as a rate per year and so indicates the annual increase in the price of a
fixed set of goods and services. An average of the annual inflation rates over several years can be used
to make price calculations of items. Since the prices increase by a fixed rate each year, inflation is an
example of exponential growth.
For example, consider an average inflation rate of 8% p.a. and a current price of $1.65 for a carton of
milk. What will be the price in 2 years time?
Growth factor = 100% + 8%
= 1 + 0.08
= 1.08
Price in 1 years time = 1.65 1.08
= $1.78
= $1.92
So, inflation rate works in much the same way as compound interest. In fact we can use the compound
interest formula as follows:
where A = price after time, T
A = PRT
P = original price ($)
T = time in years
r
where r is the inflation rate (the compound or growth factor).
R=1+
100
Worked example 19
The cost of a cinema ticket is $13.50. Assuming an average inflation rate of

5% p.a.:
a complete the following table to show the cost of the ticket for each of the next
four years
Number of years time
Price of ticket ($)
0
13.50
tUtorial
eles-1313
Worked example 19
b display the cost of the ticket for the next four years graphically
c calculate the price of the ticket in 6 years time.
think
Multiply the growth factor by $13.50 to find

the price in 1 years time. Multiply this new
price by the growth factor to find the price in
2 years time. Continue with this process until
the price in 4years time is calculated.
Note that the formula
r T
A = P(1 +
) could have been used to find
100
the value after each year.
Record the prices in the table.
b Represent the information in the table from part a
on a graph. Place the years on the horizontal axis

and the price of the ticket on the vertical axis. Join
the points with a smooth curve as it is an example
of exponential growth.
a The growth factor is 1.05.

= 14.175
= $14.18
= 14.883 75
= $14.88
Price in 3 years time = 14.883 75 1.05
= 15.627 94
= $15.63
Price in 4 years time = 15.627 94 1.05
= 16.409 34
= $16.41
Number of
0
1
2
3
4
years time
Price of
13.50 14.18 14.88 15.63 16.41
ticket ($)
b
Price of tickets ($)
a 1 The growth factor is 1.05 (100% + 5%).
Write/draW
17
16
15
14
13
0
c 1 List P, r and T.
2
1 2 3 4
Time (years)
c P = $13.50, r = 5% and T = 6
r T
)
100
5 6
= 13.50(1 +
)
100
= 13.50(1.05)6
= $18.09
The price of the ticket in 6 years time is $18.09.
A = P(1 +
567
exercise 13F
inflation
1 We19a, b In each of the following cases:

i complete a table of values to show the cost of each item for each of the next 4years using the
given inflation rate

ii display the cost of the item for the next four years graphically.
The cost of a magazine is currently $4.50 and the average inflation rate is 5%p.a.
The cost of a loaf of bread is currently $3.45 and the average inflation rate is 4%p.a.
The cost of a sports top is currently $40.00 and the average inflation rate is 3.8%p.a.
The cost of a litre of petrol is currently $1.15 and the average inflation rate is 4.3%p.a.
We19c In each case below find the price of the item in:
a 5 years time if it now costs $15 and the average inflation is 4% p.a.
b 6 years time if it now costs $290 and the average inflation is 5% p.a.
c 4 years time if it now costs $42 000 and the average inflation is 4.3% p.a.
d 2 years time if it now costs $6870 and the average inflation is 3.8% p.a.
What could you have expected to pay for an item:
a 5 years ago if it now costs $15 and the average inflation has been 4% p.a.?
b 6 years ago if it now costs $290 and the average inflation has been 5% p.a.?
c 4 years ago if it now costs $42 000 and the average inflation has been 4.3% p.a.?
d 2 years ago if it now costs $6870 and the average inflation has been 3.8% p.a.?
How many years (to the nearest year) would it take for the price of an item to go from:
a $25.00 to $34.21 if the average inflation during the time was 4% p.a.?
b $1.30 to $1.74 if the average inflation during the time was 5% p.a.?
c $500.00 to $623.09 if the average inflation during the time was 4.5% p.a.?
d $12 000 to $17 796 if the average inflation during the time was 8.2% p.a.?
The price of a standard cricket bat changes from $140 to $190 over a 6-year period. Find the average
annual inflation rate during this time.
The price of 100W light bulbs changes from 85 cents to $1.03 over a 5-year period. Find the average
annual inflation rate during this time (to 2 decimal places).
Calculate the average inflation rate for the 9-year period 20002009 of the items in the table (to
1decimal place):
a
b
c
d
5
6
7
Item
Model aeroplane
b Pen
c Can of Coke
d Council rates
a
2000 Price ($)

23.95
0.97
1.67
950.00
2009 Price ($)

29.95
1.20
2.10
1100.00
8 At the start of 2002 the price of a tennis racquet was $110.50. Using an average inflation rate of 14%
per annum, find the price of this racquet at the start of 2013.
9 In 2002 the cost of a plot of land was $75 000. Find the 2012 cost of the plot (to the nearest $100) if the
inflation rate has been 5.2% per annum.
10 mC In a year when the inflation rate was 12.4% and the cost of a book at the start of the year was
$8.95, the cost at the end of the year would be closest to:
a $6
b $8
C $10
d $12
e $13
11 mC In a year when the price of a cubic metre of firewood was $35, the inflation rate over the past
three years when its cost rose from $25 would be closest to:
a 9%
b 10%
d 12%
e 13%
568
C 11%
Summary
Savings accounts
minimum monthly and
daily balances
Two methods used by banks for calculating interest on savings accounts are:
1. minimum monthly balances
2. daily balances.
Daily balances offer the best interest rate for investors.
Look at the balances on the first and last day of the month when establishing the minimum
monthly balance or daily balances.
1
Express days as a fraction of a year; for example, 1 day = 365 of a year.
Credit cards
Credit cards can have the following options: no annual fee and no interest-free period or an annual
fee plus a specific interest-free period.
All transactions made with a no interest-free period credit card are charged interest from the date
of purchase.
For an interest-free period credit card, if the closing balance is paid in full by the due date, no interest
is incurred. Otherwise, interest is charged from the date of purchase until the balance is paid.
Financial
computations
A discount is an amount of money by which the price of an item is reduced. If expressed as a

percentage of the original price, it is called a percentage discount.
Discount ($) = original price sale price
discount
Percentage discount (%) =
100
original
alprice
The Goods and Services Tax (GST) is a broad-based tax on most goods, services and other items sold
or consumed. In Australia, the GST is calculated as a fixed 10% of the purchase price of the goods.
Sale price = 1.1 the purchase price
If the sale price that includes the GST is known, then the pre-GST price can be found as follows:
sale price
Purchase price =
.
1.1
The GST amount = sale price purchase price
1
=
sale price
1.1
Duty is a tax on certain transactions including transfers of land, motor vehicle registrations and
transfers, insurance policies, mortgages and hire-purchase agreements.
A capital gain (or loss) is the difference between the cost price and the selling price of an item.
Capital gain ($) = sale price cost price
depreciation
There are 3 methods by which depreciation can be calculated:

1. flat rate depreciation
2. reducing balance depreciation
3. unit cost depreciation.
An item is written off when its book value becomes zero.
Scrap value is an items book value when it is no longer used.
Flat rate depreciation
To make calculations in flat rate depreciation, use the formula:

BVT = P dT
where BVT = book value after T years ($)
P = purchase or cost price ($)
T = time (years of depreciation)
d = rate of depreciation ($ per year)
= fixed amount per year or
= percentage of P per year
Flat rate depreciation is also known as prime cost depreciation.
Total depreciation = cost price current value
total depreciation
Rate of depreciation =
number of years
569
reducing balance
depreciation
Reducing balance depreciation is an example of exponential decay and is calculated using the
formula:
r T
BVT = P 1
where BVT is the book value after time, T
100
P is the cost price
r is the rate of depreciation
T is the time since purchase
To find time in reducing balance depreciation use the Finance Solver on a CAS calculator.
Unit cost depreciation is based on how much an item is used.

Current book value ($) = previous book value ($) amount of depreciation ($)
Amount of depreciation ($) = amount of use rate of depreciation ($ per use)
amount of depreciation ($)
Rate of depreciation ($ per use) =
amount of use
inflation
Inflation rate is a measure of the average percentage growth in the cost of goods and services over
a period of years.
It is an example of exponential growth and we can use the compound interest formula as follows:
A = PRT
where A = price after time, T
P = original price ($)
T = time in years
r
R=1+
where r is the inflation rate
100
570
Chapter review
1 In the bank statement shown below, the minimum balance for the month is:
Date
5/4
7/4
9/4
23/4
a $456.50
d $451.50
Transaction
Transfer from CBR
Salary
Cheque 23456
ATM Rowville
Deposit
$100
$1500
Withdrawal
$1380
$125
b $1956.50
e $356.50
Balance
$456.50
$1956.50
$576.50
$451.50
m U ltip l e
C ho iC e
C $576.50
2 The minimum monthly payment on a credit card (interest rate of 0.04% daily) with an outstanding
balance of $1200 and a credit limit of $2000 is:

a $48
b $14.40
C $25
d $18
e $200
3 A dress was bought at a 15% off sale for $85. The original price for the dress was:
a $100
b $72.25
C $97.75
d $115
e $105
4 An electrician charged Rochelle $234.50 (including GST) for installing light fittings at her apartment.
The amount of GST that is passed on to the Australian Taxation Office is:
a $34.50
b $21.32
C $23.45
d $22.50
e $2.50
5 Joanna bought 2500 shares at $2.10 each. She sells the shares at $5.50 each, 15 months later. Her total
brokerage fee for buying and selling the shares on the internet was $50.00. The amount of capital gain
made by Joanna is equal to:
a $13 750
b $8500
C $8450
d $5250
e $3060
6 A machine bought for $8500 is depreciated by the flat rate method. If its useful life is 6years and its
scrap value is $1000 then the annual depreciation will be:
a $1417
b $1583
C $7500
d $7494
e $1250
The following information refers to questions 7 to 9.
A refrigerator valued at $1250 is depreciated at 25%p.a. of the previous book value.
7 The book value of the refrigerator after 4 years will be:
a $395.51
d $4.88
b zero
e $1245.12
C $1150
8 The total depreciation after 4 years will be:

a $2150
d $4.88
b $1245.12
e $100
C $854.49
9 If the refrigerator has a scrap value of $200 then its useful life will be closest to:
a 5 years
d 4 years
b 6 years
e 3 years
C 7 years
The following information refers to questions10 and 11.

A car was purchased for $32 600 and depreciated at a rate of 25.6 cents per km driven.
10 The depreciation in a year when the car travelled 15780 km would be:
a $31 983.59
b $28 560.32
C $5020
d $4039.68
e $616.41
11 If the car travelled an average of 15000 km each year then it would be written off after:
a 2 years
b 3 years
C 4 years
d 8 years
e 9 years
12 The inflation rate for the past 6 years has averaged 3.75% per annum. If the salary of a teacher 6 years
ago was $38 000 then the teacher, to maintain the standard of earnings at the present time, should be
receiving close to:
a $44 000
b $45 000
C $46 000
d $47 000
e $48 000
571
S h ort
a n S Wer
1 At the beginning of July, Ross had $580 in his savings bank account. On 15 July he withdrew $80. If
the bank pays 8% p.a. interest paid monthly, calculate the interest Ross earns in July:
a if calculated on the minimum monthly balance
b if calculated on the daily balance.
2
Date
1/5
3/5
7/5
19/5
27/5
Deposit
Withdrawal
$28.80
Balance
$302.20
$273.40
$12
$ 6
$10
Deborahs passbook shows the above transactions for May. Calculate the interest Deborah will earn
3
in May if the bank pays 4 4 % p.a. simple interest monthly:
a on the minimum monthlylance
ba
b on the daily balance.
3 Using the guidelines from pages 543 and 544, state the minimum monthly payment for each of the
following credit card accounts.

a A balance of $876.54 with a credit limit of $3000 and interest charged at 15.9%p.a.
b A balance of $876.54 with a credit limit of $500 and interest charged at 15.9%p.a.
c A balance of $1840.00 with a credit limit of $2000 and interest charged at 15.9%p.a.
4 A electrical store offers a discount on all their goods during their closing down sale.
a Calculate the percentage discount on a washing machine reduced from $940 to $799.
b the sale price on an LCD television originally priced at $1390
c the discounted amount on a refrigerator that has an original price of $2995.
5 Use the duty table on page 551 to calculate the transfer duty on the following purchases of property in
Melbourne.
a A four-bedroom house purchased for $650 000
b A five-bedroom mansion purchased for $1.5 million
c A block of land purchased for $65 000
6 Anna-Louise purchased a property for $150 000 and sold it 2 years later for $220 000. At the time of
purchase, duty, solicitors fees and other set up costs totalled $6200. When she sold the property, her
solicitors fees and agents commission totalled $10 800.
a Calculate the capital gain, ignoring the associated purchase and selling costs, and express the gain
as a percentage of the purchase price.
7 A computer is depreciated by the prime cost method at 15% p.a. If it was bought for $4900 how many
years elapsed before it was written off?

8 Furniture is bought for $15 000 and depreciated at 18% p.a. by the reducing balance method. What
would its value be in 6 years time?

9 A taxi depreciates at 29.5 cents per km driven. If it was bought for $29 600, how far would it have
travelled for it to be valued at $10 000?

10 A taxi was purchased for $38 000 and it depreciates at an average rate of 30 cents per km driven.
During its first year the taxi travelled 21 650 km and during its second it travelled 19 880 km. Find:
a the depreciation in each of the first 2 years
b how far the car had travelled if its total depreciation was $20 000
c how far the car had travelled when it reached its scrap value of $5000.
11 A stamp collection was purchased 12 years ago for $3350. It has increased in value at the same rate as
inflation. It is currently valued at$5680.

a Find the inflation rate.
b How long will it take for the stamp collection to double invalue?
c How long ago did it have a value of $4980?
d Graph its value over the first 10years on a CAS calculator or spreadsheet.
572
task 1
1 Date
4 August
8 August
19 August
27 August
28 August
Description
Debit
ATM
Deposit
EFTPOS
Salary
ATM
100.00
Credit
Balance
e x ten d ed
reS p o n S e
325.60
975.60
119.50
1527.40
2383.50
1983.50
a Complete the missing credits, debits and balances in the shaded areas of the above account.
b The bank is offering 2.4% p.a. on the minimum monthly balance. What is the interest rate per month?
c Calculate the interest that was earned for the month of August.
2 On 27 July 2011, Ryan purchased a shirt at a 30% off sale, for $14 and paid for it on his credit card.
a Find the original price of the shirt.
b How much money did Ryan save on the purchase of the shirt at a sale?
Ryans credit card is a 55 days interest free card. At the end of July, there was an outstanding
balance of $264.00 as shown in the summary account given below. The annual interest rate for this
credit card is 12.9% p.a. calculated daily.
c State the minimum monthly payment and the latest payment date.
Statement period: 1 July31 July 2011
Payment due: 25 August 2011
Account Summary
Opening
balance
$560.50
Payments
and credit
$560.50
Purchases
and other
charges
$264.00
Purchase Summary
Date
Item
2 July 2011
Ticketek-concert tickets
27 July 2011
Clothing
Interest
Nil
Credit
Nil
Nil
Closing
balance
$264.00
Credit
limit
$1000.00
Minimum
monthly
payment
Nil
Debit
$250.00
$14.00
Ryan is unable to pay by the due date; however, he plans to pay in full on August 30, 5 days after
the due date. There was a further purchase of $100 on August 2, which is not recorded in the given
account and purchase summary as shown above.
d Calculate the interest charged if the payment is made on August 30.
e Calculate the repayment required to fully pay the balance of the credit card.
The concert tickets (for $250) charged to Ryan, include a GST component.
f Calculate how much GST Ryan has contributed by purchasing the tickets.
task 2
1 Alisha has saved a sum of money and has several
options when she turns 18. She chooses to investigate

these options.
a Option 1 is for her to use the sum of $10 000 towards
a new 4WD car valued at $27 000. She can get it on
a hire-purchase agreement with $10 000 deposit and
monthly instalments over 4years at 6% p.a.
i Calculate the monthly instalments.
ii What is the total cost of the car?
iii What is the effective interest rate?
573
b Another option is to buy a second-hand car for $12 000. Alisha can borrow the extra $2000 at
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Practice
VCE exam
questions
Use StudyON to
access all exam
questions on this
topic since 2002.
7% p.a. compounded annually for 3 years with a single payment at the end of the term.
i Find the amount of interest Alisha will have to pay at the end of the 3 years for the $2000 loan.
ii What will be the total cost of the car?
c The third option is to buy a reliable car for $5000 and use the other $5000 to buy a collectable
painting, the value of which will increase at the same rate as inflation.
i What is the expected value of the painting in 4 years time if inflation is running at 5% p.a.?
ii The $5000 car is expected to depreciate at 10% p.a. using the straight line depreciation model.
What is its book value in 4 years time?
d The other 2 cars, being up-market models, depreciate at 15% p.a. on reducing value.
i What will be the book value in 4 years time for the $27 000 4WD car?
ii What will be the book value in 4 years time for the $12 000 car?
iii Find which of the three options loses the most money.
2 Complete question 1 and use the information to fill in a copy of the following table.
Description
Cost of loan (interest charged only)
Depreciation of goods
diGital doC
doc-9510
Test Yourself
Chapter 13
574
Total cost
Less benefits (for example, increase in value)
Total cost
$27 000
4WD car
$12 000
car
$5000 car
and painting
ICT activities
Chapter opener
diGital doC
financial transactions and asset value. (page 541)
13a
bank accounts
diGital doCS
SkillSHEET 13.1 doc-9507: Minimum monthly balance (page 545)
Spreadsheet doc-9498: Investigate simple interest. (page 545)
tUtorialS
We 3 eles-1309: Watch how to determine the interest earned
using the daily balance method. (page 542)
We 5 eles-1310: Watch a tutorial on calculating the interest
charged to pay the balance of a credit card. (page 544)
13b
diGital doC
WorkSHEET 13.1 doc-9508: Percentage discount, stamp duty and
account transactions (page 554)
tUtorial
We 6 eles-1311: Watch a tutorial on how to calculate percentage
discounts and original prices. (page 548)
13C
tUtorial
We 11 eles-1312: Watch a worked solution on calculating a cars
annual depreciation rate. (page 556)
13d
interaCtiVitY
Reducing balance depreciation int-0194: Use the interactivity to
consolidate your understanding of reducing balance depreciation.
(page 558)
13e
diGital doC
WorkSHEET 13.2 doc-9509: Calculate book value, depreciation and
scrap value. (page 566)
tUtorial
We 16 eles-1335: Watch how to calculate annual depreciation and
useful life given scrap value. (page 563)
13F
inflation
tUtorial
We 19 eles-1313: Watch a worked example on calculating
inflation. (page 567)
Chapter review
diGital doC
575
Answers CHAPTER 13
Balance B/F
3 May
Cheq 4217
7 May
Deposit
17 May Cheq 4218
Credit
Balance
2132.20
460.27
1671.93
230.16 1902.09
891.20
26 May Wages
1010.89
1740.60 2751.49
31 May Interest
5.69 2757.18
2 June
Deposit
415.10 3172.28
8 June
Cheq 4220
2217.00
955.28
19 June Cheq 4219
428.50
526.78
21 June Cheq 4222
16.80
509.98
23 June Wages
Washing
machine
Picture
frame
22.80 2276.25
Deposit
4 July
Cheq 4221
36.72
2239.53
18 July Cheq 4223
280.96
1958.57
26 July Wages
1740.60 3699.17
31 July Interest
Date
Transaction
4 Aug
Salary
5 Aug
Health fund
11.02 3710.19
b $14.45
Debit
Credit
1082.60
68.20 1150.80
10 Aug Health fund

15 Aug Electricity a/c 150.26
1000.54
1410.20 2410.74
18 Aug Salary
20 Aug Rent
620.80
1789.74
30 Aug Visa
180.00
1609.74
6.25 1615.99
31 Aug Interest
1410.20 3026.19
1 Sept
Salary
2 Sept
Telephone a/c 180.64
5 Sept
Tax refund
5 Sept
Health fund
576
$979.00
$16.36
$1.64
$18.00
Refrigerator
$1200.00
$120.00
$1320.00
Plumbers
service fee
$150.00
$15.00
$165
Lamp side
table
New car
Dental visit
3768.62
1410.20 5178.82
$4.50
$49.50
$23 272.73 $2327.27 $25 600.00

$170.45
$17.05
$187.50
is cheaper in New South Wales.
exercise 13C
depreciation
1 a $5000
17.78 5196.60
b
d
b
d
$45.00
9 a i $865
ii $1038
b i $760
ii $570
c i $21 490
ii $17 630
d i $8870
ii $7240
10 a C
b A
c D
11 a $85 000, 34%
b $62 500
12 $19 550, 97.75 %
13 a $93 000, 56.4%
b $15 000, 150 %
c $79 000, 18.8 %
d $176 000, 91.7 %
14 $155 398.92, 15.97 %
15 $29 940, 74.85 %
1410.20 4389.42
620.80
30 Sept Interest
31 days
94 days
$320.60
$1866.95
$205.00
$800.00
$1589.90
$6350.00
2979.22
327.60
29 Sept Salary
7 a
c
8 a
c
e
9 a
c
e
2845.55
461.27 3306.82
15 Sept Salary
20 Sept Rent
$89.00
7 $10 620, $440

8 $8465, $330. For these two items, the duty
Balance
1410.20 1410.20
327.60
Purchase
price or
GST
service fee amount Sale price
$890.00
2.87 2253.45
1 July
5 a $34.03
6
Goods or
service
1740.60 2250.58
30 June Interest
b $39.20
20%
$2.99
d $249.90, $49.98
31%
b 71%
7%
$225
b $200
$55.96
$3200, $400
b $3000, $360
$299, $29.90
$1320
$18 172.73, $1817.27
30 days
26 days
$25.00
$28.00
b $25.00
d $588.55
f $1445.00
Flat rate (straight line)
V
25
20
15
10
5
0
3 a
10 000
8000
6000
4000
2000
0
c BV = 5000T + 25 000, $5000
1 2 3 4 5
Time (years)
V
40
30
20
10
0 2 4 6 8 10 T
Time (years)
4 a
$5000
BV
13 500
1500
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T
Time (years)
b BV = 2000T + 13 500, scrap value is
$1500
5 a $1550
b
V
8
6
4
2
0
1 2 3 4 T
Time (years)
c BV = 1550T + 7750, 4 years

6 a $13 800
BV
b
92 000
9200
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T
Time (years)
c BV = 13 800T + 92 000, 6 years

7 a i $5000 per year
ii 10 years old
b i $100 per year
ii 8 2 years old
c i $95 per year
ii 13 years old
8 a i $3000
ii $500
iii 5 years
b i $1750
1 2 3 4T
Time (years)
b BV = 4000T + 45 000, scrap value is

Book value ($)
1 May
Debit
1 a
c
2 a
c
3 a
c
4 a
c
5 a
b
6
Book value ( $1000)
Transaction
exercise 13b
Book value ($)
2009
2 a $1500
b
Book value ($)
bank accounts
1 a $2066.10
b $9.47
2 a 8 cents
b 12 cents
3 9%
4
$603.15
11 a $900.00
b $916.75
12 a 53 days, 47 days, 40 days, 25 days
b $464.45
c start, $465.45, May 26
Book value ( $1000)
exercise 13a
10 Interest charged $8.15; payment required
Book value ( $1000)
FinanCial tranSaCtionS
and aSSet ValUe
ii $500
1
2
iii 3 years
c i $800
ii $140
iii 5 years
d i $18 000
ii $2400
iii 7 2 years
12 E
9 C
10 B
11 6
13 a The cheaper machine
14 B
b 2 years
4 a
Time Depreciation
(years)
($)
Book value
($)
60 000
12 000
48 000
9600
38 400
7680
30 720
6144
24 576
Time
(years)
Book value ($ '000)
2 a
4000
1600
2400
960
1440
576
864
345.60
518.40
Book value ($)
b $518.40
c
BV
$3136.44
$25 258.56
$3693.40
$21 565.16
30 000
$3345.30
30 000 0
$18 219.86
15 000 15 000
$2283.06
$15 936.80
$3914.77
$12 022.03
10 000 10 000 2
7500
7500
10 000
3750
3750
V
30
0 3
c 3 years
20
2000
1000
1 2 3 4 T
Time (years)
3 a
Flat rate
Reducing balance
Book
Time Dep. value Time Dep.
(years) ($)
($) (years) ($)

i $3276
ii 57 692 km
i $2959.20
ii 62 037 km
i $3990
ii 61 754 km
$3528.20
b 97 826 km
$7741.39
b 78 309 km
$880, $1056
b $6664
$930, $810
b $5460
$577.50, $744
b $36 678.50
Annual
depreciation
$875
Book
value
($)
$1062.50
Book value at
end of year
$10 425
$9362.50
$940.50
$8422
550
550
$727.60
$7694.40
110
440
165
385
$964.05
$6730.35
110
330
115.50 269.50
Depreciation
Book value at
end of year
110
220
80.85 188.65
110
110
56.60 132.05
110
39.62
Book value ($)
c 4 years
V
600
400
200
0
92.43
1 2 3 4 5T
Time (years)
Distance (km)
$1000
$13 750
$1062.50
$12 687.50
$1167.50
$11 520
$956.25
$10 563.75
$1076.50
$9487.25
9 D
10 a $3873.76, $3979.16
b $24 747.08
11 a $6195.07, $5825.40
b $23 078.53
Value ($)
30 000
20 000
27 000
40 000
24 000
60 000
21 000
80 000
18 000
100 000
15 000
120 000
12 000
140 000
9000
160 000
6000
180 000
3000
200 000
1
2
3 T
Time (years)
15 cents per km
2 years 21 weeks
92 000 km
$6000
5 a $8192
b $9492.19
c $16 971.73
d $747.88
6 B
7 a $115.13, $1034.87
b $1183.36, $2556.64
c $1302.80, $6017.20
8 a $115.13, $569.87
b $7803.25, $24 696.75
c $368.73, $706.27
9 D
10 E
11 C
12 a 11.61
b 5.02
c 5.59
d 9.98
1 a
b
c
2 a
3 a
4 a
5 a
6 a
7
3000
13 a
b
c
d
e
10
exercise 13e
4000
Book
value
($)
Dep.
($)
20
Book value
($)
Time
(years)
10 000 20 000 1
40
Time Depreciation
(years)
($)
Book value at
end of year
60
1 2 3 4T
Time (years)
Depreciation
Reducing balance
Book
value
($)
Dep.
($)
b $24 576
c
V
12
Flat rate
14 a Reducing balance depreciation (6 years
compared to 8years and 10 years)

$3500
$7000
$2500
$3500 (same)
$2867.20 ($4132.80 less)
$2500 (same)
b i
ii
iii
c i
ii
iii
15 E
16 B
exercise 13F
inflation
1 a i
Number
of years
time
Current
price
Price of
item ($)
4.50
ii
Price of magazine ($)
1 a
reducing balance
Book value ( $1000)
exercise 13d
depreciation
4.73 4.96 5.21 5.47
5.50
5.00
4.50
4.00
0
b i
1 2 3 4
Time (years)
Number
of years
time
Current
price
Price of
item ($)
3.45
3.59 3.73 3.88 4.04
577
Price of loaf of bread ($)
ii
2 a $18.25
c $49 703.45
3 a $12.33
c $35 490.50
4 a 8
b6
5 5.2% p.a.
7 a 2.5% p.a.
c 2.6% p.a.
8 $242.54
10 C
4.20
4.00
3.80
3.60
3.40
3.20
3.00
0
1 2 3 4
Time (years)
c i
Number
Current
of years
price
time
Price of
40.00
item ($)
mUltiple ChoiCe
1 E
5 C
9 B
41.52 43.10 44.74 46.44
1 2 3 4
Time (years)
Price of a
litre of petrol ($)
ii
1.15
4 B
8 C
12 E
1.20 1.25 1.30 1.36
d
5800
1.30
1.20
1.10
1.00
0
578
3 A
7 A
11 E
1 a $3.33
b $3.64
2 a $1.08
b $1.15
3 a $25
b $401.54
c $27
b $1181.50
4 a 15%
c $449.25
5 a $34 070
b $82 500
c $1310
b $53 000
6 a $70 000, 46.7%
7 7 years
8 $4560.10
9 66 441 km
10 a $6495, $5964
b 66 667 km
c 110 000 km
b 16 years
c 3 years
11 a 4.5%
Value
Price of sports top ($)
Number
Current
of years
price
time
Price of
item ($)
2C
6E
10 D
Short anSWer
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
d i
$388.63
$7402.04
$216.40
$6376.20
5
d 5
3.92% p.a.
2.4% p.a.
1.6% p.a.
$124 500
D
Chapter reVieW
ii
b
d
b
d
c
6
b
d
9
11
5200
4600
4000
3400
1 2 3 4
Time (years)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 x
Year
extended reSponSe
Task 1
1 a $650.00 Credit, $856.10 Balance,
$400.00 Debit
b 0.2% per month
c $0.65
2 a $20
b $6
c $25, August 25
d $6.37
e $370.37
f $22.73
Task 2
1 a i $439.17
ii $31 080
iii 11.8% p.a.
b i $450.09
ii 12 450.09
c i $6077.53
ii $3000
d i $14 094.17
ii $6264.08
iii The $27 000 car option
2
$27 000
Description 4WD car
Cost of loan
(interest
charged only)
$12 000
car
$5000
car and
painting
4080.00
450.09
Depreciation
12 905.83
of goods
5735.92
2000.00
31 080.00 12 450.09
10 000.00
Total cost
Less benefits
(for example,
increase in
values)
Total cost
31 080.00 12 450.09
1077.53
8922.47
Exam practice 5 CHAPTERS 14, 12 AND13

Core and module 4 business-related
mathematics
m U ltip l e
C ho iC e
15 minutes

one mark.
1 The data in the table below have been smoothed using a 3-point moving mean.
Month
Attendance
Smoothed data
1
34
2
39
35
3
32
36
4
a
37
5
b
42
6
47
46
7
49
49
8
51
50
9
50
The values of a and b respectively are:

b 37 and 47
C 32 and 47
e 36 and 42
A simple interest investment of $2500 earns $450 over 3 years. The simple interest rate per annum is:
a 3.0%
b 4.5%
C 5.5%
d 6.0%
e 18.0%
$15 000 is deposited into an account earning compound interest monthly at a rate of 5.5% p.a. The
interest earned, in dollars, at the end of 2 years is closest to:
a $825
b $1650
C $1740
d $3268
e $16 740
A $76 000 reducing balance loan is credited monthly with repayments of $825. If interest is charged at
8.5% per annum calculated monthly, how much is still owed after the 20th repayment?
a $34 860
b $59 500
C $69 864
d $71 023
e $105 182
A television is priced at $2695. A $420 deposit is paid, with the remainder repaid through hire-purchase.
Repayments of $150 are paid monthly for 18 months. The flat rate of interest paid is closest to:
a 14% p.a.
b 24% p.a.
C 26% p.a.
d 28% p.a.
e 45% p.a.
The average rate of inflation over the past 3 years has been 3.8%. If the price of a loaf of bread has
risen with inflation, what did it cost three years ago if it costs $4.45 now?
a $3.28
b $3.41
C $3.98
d $4.62
e $4.98
A computer is purchased for $5450. If it depreciates at the rate of 14% p.a. by the reducing balance
method, after how many years will its book value be $2564?
a 2
b 3
C 4
d 5
e 6
An extended family wants to set up a perpetuity to care for a disabled family member. They want to
be able to draw approximately $1200 per month from a fund offering 5.4% p.a. compounded monthly.
How much will they need to invest, correct to the nearest dollar?
a $22 222
b $144 000
C $222 222
d $266 667
e $648 000
The annual interest rate, compounded quarterly, required for $10 000 to amount to $230 000 in 15years
with quarterly payments of $1500 is:
a 2.3%
b 7.5%
C 9.2%
d 15.1%
e 18.8%
For a hire-purchase with monthly repayments of $200 over 3 years, the effective rate of interest is
approximately 22%. The flat rate of interest charged per annum is closest to:
a 11.3%
b 14.7%
C 20.1%
total marks = 10
d 33.0%
e 42.8%
a 37 and 42
d 38.3 and 41.7
10
1 Data were collected relating the number of hours of study done on average per night, t, to the average marks
received during that weeks assessment, m.

t
m
0.5
47
ex ten d ed
r eS p o n S e
30 minutes
62
65
81
78
85
58
76
83
85
4.5
77
2.5
72
Exam practice 5
579
The data were graphed to produce the following.
Marks received (m)
90
80
70
60
50
40
0
3 4
Time (t)
Find the equation of the least-squares regression line, in terms of m and t.
[1 mark]
2 a A residual analysis is performed on data in question 1. Find the values of a and b in the table below.
t
m
Predicted m
Residuals
0.5
1
47
62
59.35 62.3
12.35
0.3
2
65
68.2
5
81
85.9
3.2
4.9
3
78
a
b
2
85
68.2
16.8
1
58
62.3
4.3
2
76
68.2
7.8
4
83
80
3
5
4.5
2.5
85
77
72
85.9 82.95 71.15
0.9 5.95
0.85
[2 marks]
b A y versus log10 (x) transformation is applied to the data. What is the new regression equation?
[1 mark]
3 Haruki runs an architecture business and needs to purchase a new computer and software package that
is selling for $4575, including 10% GST.

a What amount of GST will Haruki pay on this purchase?
[1 mark]
b The retailer offers Haruki a 12% discount, including GST. Determine the price offered by
the retailer.
[2 marks]
4 a The computer in question 3 depreciates using reduced balance depreciation at a rate of 18% per year.
After how many whole years will it be worth less than half its purchase price?
[2 marks]
b i An A3 printer that Haruki purchases on the same day as the computer depreciates at a rate of
$0.05 per A3 print. The printer is purchased for $680 and makes 7600 prints in its first 2 years.
What is its book value, in dollars, at the end of this time?
ii The printers scrap value is $120. How many prints will it make within its useful life?
[1 + 1 = 2 marks]
5 Haruki charges clients 5% p.a. interest on overdue invoices. An invoice for $7800 issued on
diGital doC
doc-10195
Solutions
exam practice 5
580
1 October is due on 8October. On 1 November, when Haruki next sends an invoice to the
client, he charges interest for all days the invoice has been overdue so far.
a How many days is the payment now overdue?
[1 mark]
b Calculate the interest Haruki should charge on the overdue amount.
[1 mark]
6 Harukis business is growing so he decides to purchase a new, larger office space. He finds a new space
selling for $750 000 and determines that the business will need to take out a loan of 78% of the total value.
a What amount of money does Harukis business need to borrow?
[1 mark]
b Haruki investigates taking out a reducing balance loan for a term of 20 years, with monthly
repayments and an interest rate of 8.2% calculated and charged monthly.
i What would the monthly repayments be on this loan?
ii How much would still be owed on the loan after 5 years?
iii After 5 years, Haruki decides to increase his monthly payment to $7000.
How many more years will it take to pay off the loan? Write the years
[1 + 1 + 2 = 4 marks]
total marks
= 18
Chapter 14
Undirected graphs and networks

DiGital DoC
doc-9511
10 Quick Questions
Chapter ContentS
14a
14B
14C
14D
Basic concepts of a network

Planar graphs and Eulers formula
Paths and circuits
Trees and their applications
14a
What do the telephone system, the Australian Army, your family tree and the internet have in common?
The answer is that they can all be considered networks. In this section we will learn the basics of
a network along with some new terms, including: node or vertex, path or edge, loop, degree, and
undirected graph and subgraph.
Definition of a network
The simplest possible definition of a network, which will suit our purposes throughout this chapter, is:
A network is a collection of objects connected to each other in some specific way.
In the case of the telephone system, the objects are telephones (and exchanges, satellites . . .).
In the case of the Australian Army, the objects are units (platoons, companies, regiments, divisions. . .).
In the case of the internet, the objects are computers; while your family tree is made up of parents,
grandparents, cousins, aunts . . .
The mathematical term for these objects is a node or vertex. Consider the
2
1
network represented at right. This is perhaps the simplest possible network. It
consists of two vertices (circles labelled 1 and 2) and one connection between
them. This connection is called an edge (or a path).
In the case of the telephone system, the edges are the cables connecting homes and exchanges; in the
Australian Army they are the commanding officers of various ranks; while in the family tree the links
between the generations and between husband and wife can be considered as edges.
The first distinguishing features of a network are the total number of vertices and total number
of edges.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
WorkeD exaMple 1
Count the number of vertices and edges in the network shown at right.
think
1
Count the vertices by labelling them with

numbers.
Write/DraW
Thus, there are 5 vertices.

Chapter 14 Undirected graphs and networks
581
Count the edges by labelling them with letters.
Thus, there are 6 edges.
There are two things worth noting about this classification of a network:
1. the vertices and edges can be labelled in any order, using any suitable labelling system
2. vertices may have different numbers of edges connected to them. How many edges are connected to
vertex 2 in Worked example 1?
the degree of a vertex

Each vertex may have a number of edges
connecting it with the rest of the network. This
number is called the degree. To determine the
degree of a vertex, simply count its edges. The
following table shows the degree of each vertex
in Worked example 1.
Vertex
Degree
A vertex with degree 0 is not connected to

any other vertex, and is called an isolated
vertex.
An edge which connects a vertex to itself is called a loop and contributes 2 towards the degree.
If two (or more) edges connect the same pair of vertices they are called parallel edges (or multiple
edges) and all count towards the degree. Otherwise, if there is only one connection between two vertices,
the connection is called a simple, or single, connection.
WorkeD exaMple 2
Determine the degree of each vertex (node) in the figure shown.

1
2
think
582
3
Write
Node 1: Has 2 simple edges.
Degree of node 1 = 2
Node 2: Has 3 simple edges and 1 loop.
Degree of node 2 = 3 + 2
=5
Node 3: Has no edges an isolated node.
Degree of node 3 = 0
Node 4: Has 2 simple edges and 3parallel

edges.
=5
Node 5: Has 1 simple edge and 3parallel

edges.
=4
representations of networks
So far we have seen the graphical representation of a network as a two-dimensional collection of vertices
and edges. Hence, networks are sometimes called graphs. There are other ways to represent the network
without losing any of its essential features:
1. labelling vertices and labelling edges according to their vertices
2. matrix representation.
To label vertices, simply list them. If there are three vertices labelled A, B, and C write V = {A, B, C}.
To label edges according to their vertices, identify the vertices that the edge connects. If an edge connects
vertex 1 with vertex 3, we represent the edge as (1,3). If there is a loop at vertex 4, its edge is (4, 4). If there
are 2 parallel edges between vertices2 and 4, we write (2, 4), (2, 4).
WorkeD exaMple 3
Label the vertices and edges for the figure shown, as in Worked example 2.
think
Write
Label the vertices.
V = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
Examine each edge, in turn.

Vertex 1vertex 4
Vertex 1vertex 2
Vertex 2vertex 2 (loop)
Vertex 2vertex 4
Vertex 2vertex 5
Vertex 4vertex 5 (3 parallel edges)
(1, 4)
(1, 2)
(2, 2)
(2, 4)
(2, 5)
(4, 5), (4, 5), (4, 5)
Combine vertices and edges into a list.
V = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
E = {(1, 4), (1, 2), (2, 2), (2, 4), (2, 5), (4, 5),
(4, 5), (4, 5)}
There are several points to note about this representation:

1. there is no 3 in the list of edges (E ). This implies it is an isolated vertex.
2. the number of pairs in E {(1, 4), (1, 2) . . .} = 8 which must be the same as the number of edges
3. the number of times a vertex appears anywhere inside E equals the degree of the vertex. For example,
the digit 4 appears 5 times, so the degree of vertex 4 = 5.
4. from this representation of V and E we can construct (or reconstruct) the original graph.
WorkeD exaMple 4
Construct a graph (network) from the following list of vertices and edges.
V = {A, B, C, D, E}
E = {(A, B), (A, C), (A, D), (B, C), (B, D), (B, D), (C, E), (D, E), (E, E)}
think
1
Start with a single vertex, say vertex A, and

list the vertices to which it is connected.
Construct a graph showing these connections.
Take the next vertex, say B, and list the vertices

to which it is connected.
Write/DraW
Vertex A connected to B, C and D.
Vertex B is connected to A (already

done), Cand D (twice: parallel edge).
583
Add the edges from step 3.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for vertex C.
Vertex C is connected to
A (already done), B(already
done) and E.
D
E
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for vertex D and, finally,

add the loop (E, E).
As a check, count the edges in the list E(9)
and compare it with the number of edges in
your final graph.
Vertex D is connected to A
(already done), B(already
done) and E.
Vertex E is connected to C
(already done), D(already
done) and E (loop).
D
E
There may be other geometric configurations which can be drawn from the same vertex and edge lists,
but they would be equivalent (or isomorphic) to this one.
Matrix representation of networks

A method of representing a network in concise form is through the use of a matrix. Recall that a matrix
is a rectangular collection, or grid of numbers. To represent the network, write the names of the
vertices above the columns of the matrix and to the left side of the rows of the matrix. The number of
edges connecting vertices is placed at the intersection of the corresponding row and column. This is best
shown with an example.
WorkeD exaMple 5
Represent the network shown (from Worked example 4) as a matrix.

think
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with matrices.
584
Set up a blank matrix, putting the vertex names

across the top and down the side. Thus there are
25 possible entries inside the matrix.
Consider vertex A. It is connected to vertices B, C,

and D once each, so put a 1 in the corresponding
columns of row1 and in the corresponding row
of column 1.
Consider vertex B. It is connected to C once and D

twice. Put 1 and 2 in the corresponding columns of
row 2 and in the corresponding rows of column 2.
Write
A B C D E
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
A
B
C
D
E
A B C D E
1 1 1
1
1
1
A B C D E
1 1 1
1
1 2
1 1
1 2
D
E
Repeat for vertices C, D and E.

Vertex C is connected to vertex E once, so put a 1
in the corresponding column of row 3 and in the
corresponding row of column 3 (shown in red).
Vertex D is connected to vertex E once, so put
a 1 in the corresponding column of row 4 and
in the corresponding row of column 4 (shown
in black).
Vertex E is connected to itself once (loop), so
put a 1 in the corresponding column 5, row 5.
Note: Only one entry is needed for loops (shown
in green). A value of 1 in the leading diagonal
denotes a loop in the network, connecting a
vertex to itself. This is important to understand
when calculating the degree.
Complete the matrix by placing a 0 in all
unoccupied places.
A
B
C
D
E
A B C D E
1 1 1
1
1 2
1 1
1
1 2
1
1 1 1
A
B
C
D
E
A
0
1
1
1
0
B
1
0
1
2
0
C
1
1
0
0
1
D
1
2
0
0
1
E
0
0
1
1
1
Check your result by comparing the entries in the

matrix with the original network representation.
This is best done on a vertex-by-vertex basis.
In matrix representation:
1. the sum of a row (or a column) gives a degree of that vertex,
except where a loop is present. Where a loop is present
(denoted by a 1 in the leading diagonal), add 1 to the sum
of the row or column.
2. if an entire row and its corresponding entire column has
only 0s then that vertex is isolated
3. the matrix is diagonally symmetric.
exercise 14a
A B C D
A 0 1 1 1
B 1+0+1+2+
C 1 1 0 0
D 1 2 0 0
E 0
0
4
E
0
0
1
1
1
1
3+1=4
=4
3+1=4
1 We1 Count the number of vertices and edges in the following networks.
a
585
2 MC The number of vertices and edges in the figure at right is:

a
B
C
D
e
Vertices = 7, edges = 7
3 We2 Determine the degree of the labelled vertices in each diagram.

a
b
A
B
C
B
f
C
B
4 MC Which of the networks in question 3 above has an isolated node?

a b
B c
C d
e None of these
D e
5 MC The degree of vertex A in the figure at right is:
a 3
C 5
e 7
B 4
D 6
6 We3 List the vertices and label all the edges, according to their vertices, in each of these diagrams.
a
3
2
C
D
Z
d
B
D
7 We4 Construct a network from the following list of vertices and edges.
a V = {1, 2, 3, 4}
E = {(1, 2), (1, 4), (2, 3), (3, 4)}
b V = {A, B, C, D, E}
E = {(A, B), (A, C), (A, C), (B, B), (B, C), (B, D), (C, D)}
c V = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
E = {(1, 2), (1, 4), (1, 6), (2, 3), (2, 6), (3, 4), (4, 6)}
8 Consider a network of 4 vertices, where each vertex is connected to each of the other 3 vertices with a
single edge (no loops, isolated vertices or parallel edges).

a List the vertices and edges.
b Construct a diagram of the network.
c List the degree of each vertex.
586
9 Repeat question 8 for:

i a network of 5 vertices
ii a network of 8 vertices.
10 Using the results from questions 8 and 9, predict the number of edges for a similar network of:
a 10 vertices
b 20 vertices
c 100 vertices.
Note that the increase in the number of edges is one of the problems that had to be overcome in the
design of computer networks.
11 Construct a network representing the following family tree. Use a single node to represent each married
couple.
Allan and Betty had 3 children: Charles, Doris and Earl.
Charles married Frances and had 2 children, George and Harriet.
Doris married Ian and had 1 child, John.
Earl married Karen and had 3 children, Louise, Mary and Neil.
12 We5 Copy and complete the matrix representation of the network
at right. The first few entries are shown.

1 2 3 4 5
0 1 1 0 0
1
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
3
2
13 Represent the following networks by matrices.

a
1
14 Construct networks from the following matrix representations.
Note that the number of rows = number of columns = number of vertices. Watch out for loops.
a
0
1
1
0
14B
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
2
2
0
1
2
1
1
0
0
2
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
2
0
2
0
0
2
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
1
0
0
planar graphs and eulers formula
A planar graph is a special kind of network or graph. The additional properties of planar graphs will
allow us to map two-dimensional and even three-dimensional objects into graphs.
Degenerate graph
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
See more
Watch a
video about planar
graphs and Eulers
formula.
A graph with no edges is called a degenerate, or null, graph.
Complete graph
A graph where all vertices are connected directly to all other vertices without parallel edges or loops is
called a complete graph.
587
The figure below left is degenerate; the one below right is complete. How many edges would there be
in a complete graph of 6 vertices?
2
3
5
A complete graph
A degenerate graph
For a complete graph, if E = number of edges and V = number of vertices then E =
planar graphs
V (V 1)
.
2
A planar graph can be defined as follows: If a graph (network) has no edges (paths) which cross, then it
is a planar graph.
Consider the following graphs.
a
A
C
4
D
E
F
Figure a is a planar graph because none of the paths {A, B, C, D, E, F} cross each other.
Figure b is apparently not a planar graph because the path (A, D) crosses the path (B,C).
Is figure c a planar graph?
the regions of a planar graph

Consider a simplified version of the graph in figurea, as shown below. Note that
the large circular vertices have been replaced by small black circles. Otherwise
this is the identical network to figure a.
Now, observe how this planar graph can be divided into 3 regions: region
I, region II and regionIII.
II
Note also that one of the regions (III) will always be infinite, because
I
it continues beyond the bounds of the diagram. All the other regions have
III
a finite area. These regions are also called faces, for a reason which will
soon become apparent.
The reason one region becomes infinite can be seen by considering the fact that when you look at
three-dimensional objects, you cant see all the faces at the same time, no matter from which angle you look.
Converting non-planar graphs

Although it may appear that a graph is not planar, by modifying the graph it may become clearly planar.
There is no specific method, but by trial and error it may be possible to remove all the crossing
paths. (It may also help to imagine the nodes as nails in a board and the edges as flexible rubber bands.)
Alternatively, it may be possible to move the vertices so that the connecting edges dont cross. If there
are no crossings left, the graph is clearly planar.
WorkeD exaMple 6
Convert the graph below to a planar graph. Indicate the faces (regions) of the planar graph.
1
588
think
1
Confirm that the graph is non-planar.

E = {(1, 3), (1, 4), (2, 3), (2, 4), (3, 5), (4, 5)}
Two crossings could be eliminated if

vertex 2 were exchanged with vertex3.
Redraw the modified graph.
Check that all the edges are connected
to the same vertices.
Write/DraW
Edge (1, 3) crosses (2, 4).

Edge (3, 5) crosses (1, 4) and (2, 4).
1
E = {(1, 3), (1, 4), (2, 3), (2, 4), (3, 5), (4, 5)}
3
Placing node 5 inside the rectangle is one

way of eliminating all crossings. Note that
this planar graph is only one of several
possible answers.
3
5
4
4
Define the faces (regions).
3
I 5
II
III
The degree of each face is the number of edges defining that region. Consider the last figure in Worked
example 6.
Face I is defined by edges (1, 3), (1, 4), (4, 5) and (5, 3), so its degree = 4.
Face II is defined by edges (3, 5), (5, 4), (4, 2) and (2, 3), so its degree = 4.
Face III is defined by edges (1, 3), (1, 4), (4, 2) and (2, 3), so its degree = 4.
In almost all cases, each region will have a degree of at least 3. Why? Can you think of exceptions?
WorkeD exaMple 7
Find the degree of each face of the graph shown in the figure at right.
think
1
Write/DraW
Define the edges and faces of the graph.
II
I
III
IV
2
E = {(1, 2), (2, 3), (3, 4), (4, 5), (5, 6), (6, 1), (1, 7),
(5, 7), (4, 7), (2, 7)}
Count the edges for each face.
For example:
Face I edges (1, 2), (2, 7), (7, 1)
Face II edges (1, 6), (6, 5), (5, 7),
(7, 1).
Face I degree = 3
Face II degree = 4
Face III degree = 3
Face IV degree = 4
Face V degree = 6
589
Converting three-dimensional solids to

planar graphs
Another application of planar graphs is the conversion of the graph representing a three-dimensional
solid (with flat faces) to a planar graph.
WorkeD exaMple 8
The figure at right shows a cube with vertices,

V = {A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H}.
Convert this to a planar graph.
H
D
E
A
think
Write/DraW
E = {(A, B), (A, D), (A, E), (B, C), (B, F),
(C, D), (C, G), (D, H), (E, F), (E, H),
(F, G), (G, H)}
List the edges (12 in all).
Imagine the three-dimensional cube

collapsing to a two-dimensional graph.
Try collapsing the face ABCD into the face
EFGH.
H
D
E
3
Check the edges to see that they are the

same as in step 1. Note also the edges
(A, E), (B, F), (C, G) and (D, H) which
link the collapsed faces.
There are some other interesting features of this planar graph:

1. the planar graph is, in a sense, a two-dimensional projection of the original cube
2. the original base of the cube (ABFE) has become the infinite region of the planar graph.
eulers formula
By now it may be clear that there is a mathematical relationship between the vertices, edges and faces of
planar graphs.
In fact, it is the same relationship that you may have learned when studying solid geometry:
Vertices = edges faces + 2
V=EF+2
WorkeD exaMple 9
Verify Eulers formula for the cube of the last figure in Worked example 8.
think
590
Write/DraW
List the vertices.
V = {A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H}
Count the vertices.
V=8
List the edges.
E = {(A, B), (A, D), (A, E), (B, C), (B, F), (C, D),
(C, G), (D, H), (E, F), (E, H), (F, G), (G, H)}
Count the edges.
E = 12
Define the faces (regions).
IV
D
I
C
III
V
A
B
II
VI
There are 6 faces in all:

{I, II, III, IV, V, VI}
F=6
6
Confirm Eulers formula by substitution.
V=EF+2
8 = 12 6 + 2
8=8
Therefore, Eulers formula is verified.
Note that the cube is a form of prism (an object with a uniform cross-section), and all prisms can be
converted to planar graphs using the above technique of one face collapsing into another.
exercise 14B
1 We6 Modify the following graphs so that their representations are planar.
a
3
4
2 MC The graph represented in the figure at right is apparently
not planar because:

a edge (A, C) crosses edge (B, E)
E
F
B edge (A, D) crosses edge (E, F)
C edges (A, E), (F, E), (C, E) and (B, E) intersect
D vertex E has a degree of 4
C
D
e none of the above
3 MC A complete graph with 7 vertices would have at least:
a 7 edges
B 14 edges
C 21 edges
D 28 edges
e 42 edges
4 a We7 By moving vertex F only, modify the graph in question 2 so that it is clearly planar.
b How many faces are there in your planar graph?
c Find the degree of each face.
5 a By moving vertex 5 only, modify the graph at right so that it is
1
2
clearly planar.
b How many faces are there in your planar graph?
(Hint: You may have to use curved edges to
connect all the vertices.)
6
591
6 We8 Convert the three-dimensional triangular prism below to a planar graph.

F
D
C
A
7 MC The degree of vertex E in the figure at right is:

a 1
C 3
e 5
B 2
D 4
8 MC The sum of the degrees of all the vertices in the figure in question 7 is:
a 8
B 16
C 22
D 24
e 26
9 We9 Verify Eulers formula for the figure in question 7.

10 Show that the sum of the degrees of all the vertices of any planar graph is always an even number.
Also show that if S = sum of the degrees, and E = number of edges, that S = 2E. (This is known as the
handshaking lemma.)
11 In a planar graph, the number of edges = 5, the number of vertices = 4, therefore the number of faces is:
a 1
B 3
C 9
e unable to be determined from the given information
D 11
12 Convert the rectangular pyramid shown below into a planar graph.

E
D
A
C
B
13 Convert a triangular pyramid to a planar graph. Verify Eulers formula for your graph.
14 The diagram at right is a crude floor plan for a small house with
6 rooms, labelled A, B, . . ., F. Convert this plan to a planar graph

where rooms are considered as vertices.
(Hint: What should the edges be?)
DiGital DoC
doc-9512
WorkSHEET 14.1
15 Eight people in a room shake hands with each other once.

a How many handshakes are there?
b Represent the handshakes as a complete graph.
c Represent the handshakes as a matrix.
14C
B
F
E
A
D
paths and circuits
In planar graphs we can define a path as a sequence of edges and look at various sequences or pathways
through the network. Sometimes you may wish to have a path that goes through all nodes only once, for
example, for a travelling salesperson who wishes to visit each town once. Sometimes you may wish to
use all edges only once, such as for a road repair gang repairing all the roads in a shire.
path
A path is a sequence of edges which may connect a starting node to an
ending node. For example, consider travelling from node 1 to node 3 in the
figure at right. A path could be specified via node 2, namely AB, or by
specifying the vertices, 123. Alternatively one could take the path CED,
or CF. Each of these routes is a path.
592
3
B
A
1
D
4
F
E
C
5
Connected graphs
If there is a path between all possible pairs of vertices, then it is a connected graph.
For example, in the figure below left, there is no path between vertices 1 and 2, nor between vertices
3 and 4, so it is not a connected graph. However, if we add a single edge, as in the figure below right,
between vertices 1 and 2, the entire graph becomes connected.
2
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
euler paths
Consider a path where every edge is used only once, as in our road repair gang example.
An Euler path is one which uses every edge exactly once.
1. For an Euler path to exist, all vertices must be of an even degree or there must be exactly twovertices
of odd degree.
2. If the degrees of all the vertices are even numbers, start with any vertex. In this case the starting vertex
and ending vertex are the same.
3. If there are two vertices whose degree is an odd number use either as a starting point. The other vertex
of odd degree must be the ending point.
WorkeD exaMple 10
Using the figure below, identify an Euler path.

2
3
B
A
1
think
tUtorial
eles-1314
Worked example 10
D
4
F
E
C
5
Write
Determine a starting vertex. Since there are

vertices (3 and 5) whose degree is an odd
number, use one of these to start.
Use vertex 3 as the start.
Attempt to find a path which uses each

edge exactly once.
You are allowed to visit a vertex more
than once; it is only edges that are restricted
to one use.
BACFDE or
BACEDF or
DEFBAC are all Euler paths.
There are several other possible Euler paths.
Note that the starting vertex and ending vertex are not the same, but we started and ended on the vertices
with odd degree (vertices 3 and 5).
euler circuits
With our road repair gang example, it would be desirable that the Euler path started and finished at the
same point. This kind of Euler path is called an Euler circuit; that is, an Euler circuit is an Euler path
where the starting and ending vertices are the same.
It is important to note that an Euler circuit cannot exist for planar graphs that have any vertices whose
degree is odd. In such graphs there is no Euler circuit. Therefore, the planar graph of Worked example 10
does not contain an Euler circuit because vertices 3 and 5 were of odd degree.
593
WorkeD exaMple 11
Find an Euler circuit for the planar graph shown below.

2
3
B
A
1
tUtorial
eles-1315
Worked example 11
D
4
E
C
5
think
Write
Confirm that all vertices have even degree.
Pick any vertex to start and determine

a path that uses each edge and ends
at the same vertex.
Vertex 1 degree = 2
Vertex 2 degree = 2
Vertex 3 degree = 2
Vertex 4 degree = 2
Vertex 5 degree = 2
Start with vertex 1. Then the Euler circuit
could be:
ABDEC or
CEDBA
an euler circuit algorithm

For some networks, it may be difficult to determine an Euler circuit, even after determining that all
vertices have even degree. Here is an algorithm that guarantees an Euler circuit.
Consider a network where all vertices are of even degree. Let V = {1, 2, 3 . . .} be the list of vertices.
Step 1. Choose a starting vertex from the list V. Call this vertex vertex A.
Step 2. From vertex A, find the smallest possible path which returns to vertex A. This is a subcircuit of
the original network. Let S be the list of vertices in this subcircuit.
Step 3. For each vertex in S, choose a single vertex in turn as the starting vertex of a different subcircuit.
It should also be as small as possible, and not use any previously used edge.
Step 4. For each of these new subcircuits (if there are any), add any new vertices to the list in S.
Step 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until there are no more new vertices, edges or subcircuits left; that is, the
lists S and V are the same.
Step 6. Join the subcircuits at their intersection points.
WorkeD exaMple 12
Find one possible Euler circuit for the network below using the Euler circuit algorithm.
4
5
7
2
10
1
9
think
1
Choose a starting vertex, and find its smallest

subcircuit.
The subcircuit is marked in red.
Write/DraW
Vertex 1 is selected.
The path 1231 is the smallest possible.
4
5
7
2
10
1
9
594
S = {1, 2, 3}
From vertex 2, there is a subcircuit
24562.
Create the list S from the first subcircuit.

Find new subcircuits, not using any edges
already used (apply step 3 of the algorithm).
The new subcircuit is marked in blue.
Note that this subcircuit does not use
any previously used edges.
5
7
2
10
1
8
9
3
Add to the list S (apply step 4 of the algorithm).
S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
Find the new subcircuits (re-apply step3).

The new subcircuit is marked in green.
From vertex 3, there is a subcircuit

39876103.
4
5
7
2
10
1
9
Add to list S (re-apply step 4).

Check that all vertices are in the list (step 5).
S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10}
= V, so stop.
Apply step 6.
Form the Euler path, starting with the first
subcircuit, and proceeding through all the other
subcircuits at their intersections. Note that the
second subcircuit is in the 1st set of square
brackets [ ] and the next sub-circuit is in the
2nd set of square brackets [ ].
The red circuit and the blue circuit are connected

at vertex 2.
The red circuit and the green circuit are connected
at vertex 3.
Euler circuit =
1 [24562] [39876103] 1
List the Euler circuit.
124562398761031
hamiltonian paths and circuits

In Euler paths and circuits each edge was used exactly once, while vertices could be re-used. Now,
consider the case where it is desirable to use each vertex exactly once, as in our travelling salesman
problem mentioned at the start of this section.
A Hamiltonian path uses every vertex exactly once. It is important to note that not all edges need to be
used. Furthermore, there can only be up to 2 vertices with degree 1 (dead ends). In this case these would
be the start and/or the finishing vertices.
WorkeD exaMple 13
Determine a Hamiltonian path in the planar

graph shown at right.
3
5
4
1
think
1
Choose a starting node. If there is a vertex with

degree = 1, then use it to start.
tUtorial
eles-1316
Worked example 13
Write
Since there are no vertices with degree 1, choose

any node to start. Choose vertex 1.
595
Attempt to visit each vertex. This will work for

all feasible planar graphs.
The Hamiltonian path found is shown
in red.
The path
connecting
nodes
12345 was
chosen as one of
the Hamiltonian
paths.
3
5
4
Note that there are several possible Hamiltonian paths for the planar graph in Worked example13 and
there are several paths which will not result in a Hamiltonian path. Can you find such a path?
hamiltonian circuits
When determining a Hamiltonian path, sometimes it is desirable to start and finish with the same vertex.
For example, our travelling salesperson may live in one of the towns (vertices) she visits and would like
to start and finish at her home town after visiting all the other towns once. This is similar to the concept
of an Euler circuit.
A Hamiltonian circuit is a Hamiltonian path which starts and finishes at the same vertex.
WorkeD exaMple 14
Determine a Hamiltonian circuit in the planar graph shown below. (This is

the same graph used in Worked example 13.)
2
tUtorial
eles-1317
Worked example 14
3
5
1
think
4
Write
Choose a starting (and finishing) vertex.
Choose vertex 1.
Attempt to visit each vertex and return to

vertex 1. The Hamiltonian circuit found is
shown in red.
The path
connecting nodes
123541 was
chosen as one of
the Hamiltonian
circuits.
exercise 14C
3
5
4
paths and circuits
1 We10 Using the figure at right and starting at vertex 1, identify
an Euler path.
2 Choosing the other vertex of degree 3 in the figure in question 1,
identify another Euler path.
3 Using the figure at right and starting at vertex 1, identify an Euler path.
4 Starting with a vertex of degree 4 from the figure in question 3,
identify another Euler path.
F
J
596
C
D
5 We11 Using the figure at right and starting at vertex1,
identify an Euler circuit.
5
1
4
6 MC Considering the networks from questions 1 and 3, as shown, which have Euler circuits?
a Both
B Neither
C Figure a only
e None of the above
D Figure b only
a
B
A
B
A
F
1
F
D
7 Using the graph shown at right, determine:

a an Euler path
b an Euler circuit starting at vertex 1 (circled in red).
M
S
H
Q
R
C
F
E
8 MC What additional edge should be added to the planar
graph in the figure at right so that it could be possible

to define an Euler circuit?
a CA
B FA
C FD
D EB
e None of the above
9 We 12 Find an Euler circuit for the graph at right, using
the Euler circuit algorithm.
10 MC In which of the following does an Euler circuit exist?

1
1
3
4
6
D
2
3
597
11 We13 Starting at vertex 2, determine a Hamiltonian path for the
graph at right.
1
7
6
12 Starting at vertex 7, determine a Hamiltonian path for the
graph at right.
7
2
13 We14 Starting at vertex 2, determine a Hamiltonian circuit
for the graph at right.

1
7
6
5
2
14 MC Which of the following paths is a Hamiltonian circuit
for the figure at right?

a 2345612
C 25345612
e 216452
B 23452
D 256432
3
1
4
6
15 MC The path shown in red in the figure at right is:

a
B
C
D
e
an Euler path
an Euler circuit
a Hamiltonian path
a Hamiltonian circuit
none of the above
16 Using the network shown at right:

a determine an Euler path
b determine an Euler circuit
c determine a Hamiltonian path
d determine a Hamiltonian circuit.
3
F
4
2
A
B
1
5
2
17 MC The network shown at right has:

a
B
C
D
e
an Euler circuit and a Hamiltonian path

a Hamiltonian path and circuit
an Euler path and a Hamiltonian circuit
an Euler path only
none of the above
5
1
3
598
4
3
7
8
10
2 9
19 The Police Commissioner wishes to give the
impression of an increased police presence on the roads. The

roads that the commissioner has to cover are depicted in the
network diagram at right. A speed camera is set up once
during the day on each of the roads.
a Determine a path that the police officer could follow so
that she does not travel more than once on any road.
b What type of path is this?
5 6
18 a Using the network shown at right, what two edges should be
added to the network so that it has both an Euler circuit and a

Hamiltonian circuit?
b Determine these two paths.
Starcomed
Larebil
Yrtnuoc
Noitaneno
Ruobal
20 The police officer knows that there is a dirt track
linking the towns of Larebil and Yrtnuoc. She

wishes to meet the commissioners instructions
but also wishes to start and finish in her
home town, Larebil.
a Determine a path that would meet both the
police officers and the commissioners requirements.
Starcomed
Larebil
Yrtnuoc
Ruobal
Noitaneno
21 A security company, Wotchemclose, is responsible for patrolling stores in the towns from question
20. The company wants a patrol car to visit each town once each night without resorting to using the
dirt road.
a If the security guard starts at Ruobal, determine a path that will meet the companys requirements.
22 A physical education teacher, I. M. Grate, wishes to plan an orienteering course through a forest
following marked tracks. She has placed checkpoints at the points shown in the diagram at right. The
object of any orienteer is to visit each of the checkpoints once to
F
collect a mark.
B
E
a What path could an efficient orienteer follow if the course
starts at C and finishes at B?
C
b What path should the orienteer follow if starting and
A
finishing at C?
D
c What type of paths are these?
14D
DiGital DoC
doc-9513
WorkSHEET 14.2
trees and their applications
There are many applications where only part of the network is required as a solution to a problem. This
section will look at such problems involving subgraphs, cycles and trees. To begin with we need a few
more definitions.
Graphs and subgraphs
interaCtiVitY
int-0195
Minimum spanning
trees and shortest
paths
Until now we have used the term network to refer to a collection of vertices and edges. This network can
also be called a graph. In practice, a graph should have at least 2 vertices and 1 edge. All or part of this
graph can be considered as a subgraph.
For example, in the figure at right, the entire network can be considered
as a graph, while the path in red can be considered as a subgraph.
2
3
Another subgraph could be defined by the path 12341.
A minimum subgraph could be defined by the path 12.
5
Often the edges in a graph are not just simply connectors, but could be
4
assigned some quantity, such as distance, time or cost. For example, in the
1
figure above, the distance between vertex 1 and vertex 2 could be assigned a
distance of 40 metres. If the graph contains such quantities, then it is called a
weighted graph.
Cycles
A cycle is a subgraph whose path contains at least 3 vertices and whose start and end vertices are the
same. This is a similar concept to Hamiltonian circuits. For example, in the figure above, the subgraph
defined by the path 3453 is a cycle. Once you have returned to the starting vertex, the cycle is
complete. So, for example, the path 3453453 is not a (simple) cycle.
trees
A tree is a connected subgraph which cannot contain any:
1. loops
2. parallel (or multiple) edges
3. cycles.
599
WorkeD exaMple 15
Determine whether each of the figures below is a tree, and if not, explain why not.
a
think
Write
Examine each figure in turn, looking

for loops, parallel edges or cycles.
Examine figure a.
Figure a has parallel edges (at the top) so it is not a tree.
Examine figure b.
Figure b has no loops, parallel edges or cycles so it is a tree.
Examine figure c.
Figure c has a cycle (at the top) so it is not a tree.
Examine figure d.
Figure d has a loop (at the bottom) so it is not a tree.
The advantage of trees within a network is that the tree could determine an efficient connection
between vertices in the sense that there is a minimum distance, cost or time.
Shortest paths
Sometimes it may be useful to determine the shortest path between 2 selected vertices of a graph. For
example, when going shopping, a person may leave his home and travel east via the playground, or north via
the parking lot and still end up at the same shop. In one case the distance travelled may be the minimum.
WorkeD exaMple 16
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Determine the shortest path between nodes A and F in

the figure at right. Nodes are labelled A . . . G and distances
(in metres) between them are labelled in blue.
5
4
D
13
6
C
7
6
F
think
B
8
E
tUtorial
eles-1318
Worked example 16
9
G
Write
From the starting node, by inspection,

determine the possible trees between A and F.
(1) ACEDF
(2) ACDF
(3) ACDEF
(4) ACEF
For each tree, calculate the total distance

travelled.
(1) 5 + 8 + 7 + 13 = 33
(2) 5 + 4 + 13 = 22
(3) 5 + 4 + 7 + 6 = 22
(4) 5 + 8 + 6 = 19
Choose the path with the shortest distance.
Path ACEF is the shortest path with a distance

of 19 m.
When choosing the possible paths in step 1, there is no point in finding paths that are not trees. There
will always be a tree which covers the same vertices in less distance. Non-tree paths will include cycles
and loops, which only add to the total distance.
600
a shor test path algorithm

Sometimes it can be difficult to list all the paths between the starting and ending vertex. Here
is an algorithm which guarantees the shortest path assuming that the starting vertex
is already chosen.
Step 1. From the starting vertex, find the shortest path to all other directly connected vertices.
Include all such vertices, including the starting one in the list S = {A, B, . . .}.
Step 2. Choose a vertex (V) directly connected to those in S and find the shortest path to the starting
vertex. Generally, there is one possible path for each degree of V, although some obvious paths
can be eliminated immediately.
Step 3. Add the new vertex, V, to the list S.
Step 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all vertices are in S. Find the shortest path to the vertex you want.
WorkeD exaMple 17
Find the shortest path from vertex 1 to vertex 9.

Vertices are labelled in black, distances in blue.
(Note: Lines are not to scale.)
2
4
3
8
3
1
6
4
think
1
From the starting vertex (1), find the shortest

path to each of the vertices directly connected
to it.
7
3
9
7
9
2
4
5
4
7
8
2
3
9
12
Write
From To Via Distance

1
2 4
1
3 8
1
3
2 4+3=7
1
4 6
Determine the set of vertices, S.
S = {1, 2, 3, 4}
Apply step 2 of the algorithm for a vertex

connected directly to one in S.
Select vertex 5.
1
5
3 7 + 7 = 14
1
5
4 6 + 9 = 15
Apply step 3 of the algorithm and add to the set

of vertices, S.
S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
Re-apply step 2 of the algorithm for another

vertex directly connected to one in S.
Select vertex 6.
1
6
2 4 + 7 = 11
1
6
3 7 + 3 = 10
1
Re-apply step 3 of the algorithm and add to the

set of vertices, S.
S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6}
Re-apply step 2 for another vertex directly

connected to one in S.
Select vertex 7.
1
7
6 10 + 2 = 12
1
7
3
7 + 9 = 16
7
shortest path to 3
shortest path to 4
shortest path to 5
shortest path to 6
7 + 9 + 2 = 18
shortest path to 2
shortest path to 7
14 + 4 = 18
601
Re-apply step 3 and add to the set of vertices, S.
S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7}

Select vertex 8.
1
8
6 10 + 5 = 15
1
8
7 12 + 4 = 16
10
Re-apply step 3 and add to the set of

vertices, S.
S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8}
11

Select vertex 9.
shortest path to 8

1
15 + 3 = 18
12 + 2 = 14
14 + 12 = 26
shortest path to 9
12
Re-apply step 3 and add to the set of

vertices, S.
S = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9} Stop, because all

vertices are in the list.
13
Apply step 4 and determine the

shortest path.
1 to 9 via 7
(see step 11)
1 to 7 via 6
(see step 7)
1 to 6 via 3
(see step 5)
1 to 3 via 2
(see step 1)
1 to 2
(see step 1)
Path = 123679
Distance = 4 + 3 + 3 + 2 + 2 = 14.
Spanning trees
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with minimum
spanning trees.
75
In the network shown at right, the vertices represent school buildings and
the edges represent footpaths. The numbers represent the distance, in metres,
between the buildings. The school council has decided to cover some of the
footpaths so that the students can access any building during rainy weather
without getting wet. Three possible trees which would accomplish this are
shown in the figures below.
50
78
62
45
32
100
75
50
62
45
50
50
32
78
78
62
32
100
Note that each of these trees included all the vertices of the original path. These trees are called
spanning trees because of this property. In practice, the school council would like to make the total
distance of covered footpaths as small as possible, in order to minimise cost. In this case, they would
have the minimum spanning tree. Can you determine which of the above figures is the minimum
spanning tree?
Minimum spanning tree and prims algorithm

One method of determining the minimum spanning tree is called Prims algorithm. The steps are as
follows:
Step 1. Choose the edge in the network which has the smallest value. If 2 or more edges are the smallest,
choose any of these.
Step 2. Inspect the 2 vertices included so far and select the smallest edge leading from either vertex.
Again, if there is a tie, arbitrarily choose any one.
602
Step 3. Inspect all vertices included so far and select the smallest edge leading from any included vertex.
If there is a tie, choose any, arbitrarily.
Step 4. Repeat step 3 until all vertices in the graph are included in the tree.
WorkeD exaMple 18
Determine the minimum spanning tree for the

network at right representing footpaths in a school
campus.
Find the edge with the smallest distance.

This can be done by listing all the edges and
choosing the smallest.
50
78
C
think
75
45
62
tUtorial
eles-1319
Worked example 18
32
A
100
Write
AB = 32, by inspection
75
78
45
Inspect A and B and find the shortest edge

connecting one of these to a third vertex.
AE = 62 choose this
AC = 100
BD = 75
75
Inspect A, B and E and find the shortest edge

connecting one of these to another vertex.
AC = 100
EC = 45 choose this
ED = 50
BD = 75
45
Continue until all vertices have been connected.

In this case only vertex D remains.
BD = 75
ED = 50 choose this
CD = 78
75
Since all vertices have been connected, this is

the minimum spanning tree.
Calculate the total distance of the minimum
spanning tree.
50
45
A
100
75
50
78
45
32
62
A
100
50
Total distance
= 32 + 62 + 45 + 50
= 189 m
32
62
C
5
A
100
D
78
32
62
C
4
50
C
3
A
100
D
78
32
62
C
2
50
45
62
32
A
In some cases you may be required to find the maximum spanning tree instead of the minimum
spanning tree. In this case, Prims algorithm works by finding the largest edges at each stage instead
of the smallest edges.
603
WorkeD exaMple 19
The figure at right represents a telephone network connecting

6 towns, A, B . . . F. The numbered edges represent the capacity of
the telephone connection between the towns connected, that is, the
maximum number of calls that can be made at the same time along
that edge.
A telephone engineer wishes to determine the maximum capacity
of the system in terms of a tree connecting all the towns so that calls
can be routed along that tree.
think
1
Because this is a maximum spanning tree, find

the edge with the largest capacity.
58
54
35
56
60 41
58
37
58
This is edge EF (62).
56
60 41
58
37
58
This is edge FC (60).
56
60 41
58
37
35
56
60 41
58
37
58
54
35
604
Maximum capacity
= 66 + 62 + 60 + 58 + 58
= 304 telephone calls at the same time.
62
F
56
53
66
49
45
Determine maximum capacity.
62
F
45
54
53
66
49
58
62
F
AB (58) and BD (58)

are the edges selected.
54
35
53
66
49
Repeat until all towns are connected.
62
F
45
54
35
Inspecting edges from vertices, A, E and F, find

the edge with the largest capacity.
66
49
This is edge AE (66).
53
Write
45
Inspect edges from vertices A and E, find the

edge with the largest capacity.
62
F
45
66
49
60 41
58
37
53
exercise 14D
1 We15 Consider the figure at right. Which of the paths marked in red
on the figures below are trees?

a
2 Determine all the trees connecting vertices A and B, without going through vertex F.
B
D
A
3 Determine all the trees connecting vertices A and B, without going through vertex F.
B
F
D
A
4 MC Consider the following paths:

i ABCEFDA
ii ADFECB
iii ABDA
iv ABDFEC
B
A
Which (if any) are trees?

a All are trees
B i and iv only
e None are trees
D iv only
5 MC Which of the following statements is true?
a A Hamiltonian circuit is a tree.
B A tree can contain multiple edges or loops.
C A Hamiltonian path is not a tree.
D A tree can visit the same vertex more than once.
e A tree can have one edge.
C ii and iv only
6 We16 Determine the shortest path from A to B, where the distances (in blue) are in kilometres.
A
4
10
5
9
5
605
7 We17 The network at right represents the time (blue numerals
10
9
2
6 5
3
1
10
1 11
3
in minutes) that it takes to walk along pathways connecting 8features

in a botanical garden. Vertices 1 and 8 are entrances. Find the minimum
time to walk between the entrances, along pathways only.
12
8
11
13
8
D
17
10
11
6
3
2
8 Referring to the network at right, where distances are in km, find:
a the shortest path from B to F
b the shortest path from A to C
c the shortest path from E to C.
15
16
Questions 9 to 12 refer to the network shown in the figure below. Vertices are labelled, A, B . . . H and
the time it takes to travel between them, in minutes, is given by the numbers in blue.
B
7
9
4
7
A
9 C
7
10
D 8
12
15
E
9 List all possible trees connecting A and H, passing through B.
10 MC The total number of possible trees connecting A and H is given by:
a 8
D 15
B 10
e 28
C 12
11 MC The shortest time it would take to travel between A and H is given by the tree:
a ABFH
B ABFGH
D ACFGH
e AEH
C ACFH
12 Find another tree connecting A to H which would also yield the minimum time.
13 The figure at right shows a network connecting vertices A . . . H
a How many different trees are there connecting A to G?
b Find the shortest path connecting A to G.
c How many different trees are there connecting D to F?
d Find the shortest path connecting D to F.
6
A
14 We 18 Find the minimum spanning tree for the network shown

in question 13.
7
G
7 E
8
4
3
H
5
15 MC The total length of the minimum spanning tree in question 13 is:

a 20
D 51
B 37
e 66
C 40
16 Using Prims algorithm, determine the length of the minimum spanning tree in each of the graphs
shown below.
a
36
18
12
24
13
24
6
15
16
32
c
23
26
15
14
6
5
4
4
10
606
17 MC In the figure below, the calculations using Prims algorithm for the minimum spanning tree
would be:
6
5
4
2
a 2+4+4+5+7
D 4+5+7+4
13
B 4+4+5+7
e 20
C 4+4+6+7
18 MC The value of the minimum spanning tree in the figure in question 17 is:
a 20
D 46
B 21
e none of these
C 23
19 Draw the minimum spanning tree in each of the following graphs and calculate the total length:
a
4
2
11
16
5
4
28
14 17
9
12
23
5
2
13
1
12
5
11
8
14
19
7
14
3
3
3
7
4
4
5
2
4
20 We 19 Flyemsafe Airlines wish to service six cities. The directors have decided that it is too costly to
have direct flights between all the cities. The airline needs to minimise the number of routes which they
open yet maximise the total number of passengers that they can carry. The network diagram below right
has edges representing routes and vertices representing cities. The numbers on the edges are projected
capacities. Find:
a the maximum spanning tree that will meet the airlines requirements
b the total carrying capacity of this tree.
D
267
299
386
E
346
F
293
179
301
456
317
243
356
B
121
607
21 A fairground has 5 main attractions which are joined by paths to the entrance/exit gate. The numbers
show the distance along the paths in metres.

C
80
120
F
90
D
85
B
70
150
200
A
40
E
30
Entrance/exit
a Draw an undirected graph to represent the fairground and then write down:
i the number of edges
ii the number of vertices
iii the degree of each vertex.
b What is the minimum distance a person would have to walk to visit every attraction, beginning
and ending at the entrance/exit?

c If each attraction needs to be able to communicate via a phone line, draw the minimum possible
tree to represent this.

d Complete a matrix for the graph shown.
e Following a Hamiltonian circuit would be an efficient way to visit every attraction in the
fairground. Suggest a route a visitor could follow in order to create a Hamiltonian circuit,
beginning and ending at the entrance/exit.
608
Summary
Basic concepts of a
network
Networks (or graphs) are a collection of vertices (or nodes) connected by edges (or paths).
The degree of a vertex is the number of connecting edges it has.
If a vertex is not connected to any other vertex, it is isolated and has a degree of 0.
An edge connecting a vertex to itself is called a loop, and has a degree value of 2.
If a pair of vertices has more than 1 connecting edge, the connection is multiple or parallel.
Each edge counts towards the degree.
If a pair of vertices has exactly 1 connecting edge, then the edge is simple, or single.
Networks can be represented by a list of vertices, V = {A, B, C, . . .} and pairs showing the edges,
E = {(A, B), (A, C), (B, B), . . .}.
Networks can also be represented by a matrix, where each entry in the matrix can be denoted
by di, j.
(a) If there is no edge connecting vertex i with vertex j, then di, j = 0.
(b) If there is a loop connecting vertex i with itself then di, j = 2.
(c) If there are n edges connecting vertex i with vertex j then di, j = n.
(d) If the nth row and nth column are all zeros, then vertex i is isolated.
(e) The total degree of the nth vertex is the sum of all the numbers in the nth column (or row),
except where there are loops. In these cases, add 1 to the sum of the row or column.
(f) The matrix is always diagonally symmetric.
A graphical representation of a network can be generated either from the list of vertices and edges
or from the matrix representation.
planar graphs and

eulers formula
A network (or graph) can be called a planar graph if there are no edges that cross.
Some graphs that appear non-planar may be modified by moving vertices or edges so that they are
clearly planar.
A degenerate graph is one with no edges.
A complete graph is one where all vertices are connected to all other vertices.
V (V 1)
For a complete graph, if E = number of edges and V = number of vertices, then E =
.
2
Planar graphs can be divided into regions or faces. One region is always infinite, while the others
are always closed areas.
The degree of each face is the number of edges defining the region.
A three-dimensional solid (with flat faces) can be converted to a planar graph, with the vertices
representing the vertices of the solid. The edges of the graph represent edges of the solid. Regions
of the graph do not exactly correspond to the faces of the solid.
In a planar graph, let V = number of vertices, E = number of edges, F = number of faces.
Then V = E F + 2. This is known as Eulers formula.
paths and circuits
A path is a sequence of vertices (and connecting edges) in a graph.

A circuit is a path that starts and ends at the same vertex.
An Euler path uses every edge exactly once.
(a) For an Euler path to exist all vertices must be of even degree, or there must be exactly two
vertices of odd degree.
(b) If all vertices are even, then the Euler path may start on any vertex.
(c) If there are 2 odd vertices, then the Euler path must start on one of the odd vertices and must
finish on the other.
An Euler circuit is an Euler path that starts and ends on the same vertex. For an Euler circuit to
exist, all vertices must be of even degree.
A Hamiltonian path uses every vertex exactly once. For a Hamiltonian path to exist, there can be
up to 2vertices of degree 1.
A Hamiltonian circuit is a Hamiltonian path that starts and ends on the same vertex.
609
trees and their

applications
610
Any part of a graph, including some or all of its vertices and edges, is called a subgraph.
A weighted graph has edges that represent a physical quantity, such as distance, time or cost.
The value of the weight of the edge is then the distance (or time or cost) between the vertices it
connects.
A cycle (or circuit) is a subgraph with at least 3 vertices, and whose start and end vertices are the
same.
A tree is a connected subgraph that does not contain loops, cycles or parallel edges.
The shortest path between 2 vertices on a weighted graph is a tree whose total length (time, cost) is
the smallest possible.
A spanning tree is one that connects all the vertices.
The minimum (maximum) spanning tree is the spanning tree whose total length (time, cost)
is a minimum (maximum).
Chapter review
Questions 1 and 2 refer to the network shown below.
M U ltip l e
C ho iC e
C
D
E
1 The sum of the degrees of all the vertices in the network is:
a 5
B 10
C 12
D 13
e 14
2 The list of edges can be written as:

a
B
C
D
e
{A, B, C, D, E}
{(A, A), (B, B), (C, C), (D, D), (E, E)}
{(A, B), (A, C), (A, D), (B, C), (B, D), (C, D), (D, E)}
{(A, B), (A, C), (A, D), (B, C), (C, D), (D, E)}
{(A, B, C, D), (B, A, C, D), (C, A, B, D), (D, A, B, C, E), (E, D)}
3 From the following matrix representation of a network with vertices A, B, C, D, E, the degree of
vertex A is:
A
B
C
D
E
a 1
B 2
A
1
2
1
0
1
B
2
0
1
0
0
C
1
1
0
0
1
D
0
0
0
0
0
C 5
E
1
1
1
0
0
D 6
e 10
D D
e E
4 Using the matrix in question 3, the isolated vertex is:

a A
B B
C C
5 A certain planar graph with 6 vertices can be divided into 4 regions (or faces). How many edges
does it have?
a 2
B 6
C 8
e Cannot be determined from the given information
D 10
6 Consider the networks i, ii, iii and iv. Which are connected graphs?
i
ii
iii
a i only
D ii and iv
B i, ii and iii
e All are connected.
7 For the graph at right, which is a Hamiltonian path?

a
B
C
D
e
CGAHGFEDBACBE
CGHABDEBC
CGHABDEF
ABCDEFGH
There is no Hamiltonian path for this graph.
8 For the graph in question 7, an Euler path:

a
B
C
D
e
iv
C i and iii
B
C
D
F
does not exist because there are 2 vertices whose degree is 3

exists because there are exactly 2 vertices whose degree is 3
exists because there is an even number of vertices
must not start on a vertex with odd degree
requires the starting vertex and the ending vertex to be the same
611
9 The shortest path from H to E is:
A
10
9
4
H 7
4
C
8
11
G
a 24
D 27
9 5
E
3D
8
F
B 25
e 28
C 26
10 The length of the minimum spanning tree for the graph in question 9 is:
a 39
D 49
B 40
C 43
e dependent upon the starting vertex
11 A connected planar graph has 12 edges. This graph could have:

a
B
C
D
e
Sh ort
anS Wer
5 vertices and 6 faces

1 For the network in Multiple choice question 9:

a label the vertices and edges in terms of the vertices
b write a matrix representation of the network.
2 Draw a diagram of a network represented by V = {A, B, C, D, E, F} and E = {(A, B), (A, C),
(B, C), (B, D), (B, E), (C, F), (D, E), (E, F)}. Calculate the sum of the degrees of all the vertices.
3 a Convert the network in the figure at right to a planar graph.
b Confirm Eulers formula for the result.
4 Starting at vertex A, determine an Euler circuit in the figure below.
C
B
A
C
E
D
F
E
5 Starting at vertex A, determine two different Hamiltonian circuits for the graph in question 4.
6 In a town there are five friends: Paul, Ben, Kevin, Matt and David. The friends houses are linked by
the number of footpaths as given in the matrix below.

0
2
1
0
1
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
Due to an oversight, the names of all the friends were not listed with the rows and columns;
however, the following information is known:
Ben and Paul have two footpaths between their houses.
There is only one path between Kevin and each of his friends.
Paul and David have one path linking their houses to each other.
The second column in the matrix representation above represents Pauls edges.
a Redraw the matrix with the names in their correct places above the columns and beside the rows.
b Using the answer to parta, draw the network of footpaths and houses.
612
7 Use the information in question 6 to complete the following.

a Redraw the network and add a path to it that will enable an Euler circuit to be travelled by the
young men.
b Why would the friends wish there to be the extra footpath in their network of footpaths?
c Using the new network diagram, state an Euler circuit.
8 Determine a Hamiltonian path for the network drawn below.
2
3
9
4
5
1
6
8
7
9 The figure at right represents rail connections between 11 towns.
15
B
A telegraph system is to be set up connecting all the towns. Find

the shortest total distance for this system. Note that messages can
be relayed from one station to another via a third station.
31
45
C
23
21
15 13
H
F 12 J
19 18 23
D
K
11
L
44 21
27
23
17
1 The plan below represents a botanical garden in the town of Lovely Banks. There are 6 features (Oak
tree, Kiosk, Flower beds, Pine tree, Gazebo and Lake) and 4 entrances. Paths connecting various
features are drawn as red lines and can be taken as straight lines connecting the dots for each feature.
e x ten D eD
reS p o n S e
Entrance 1
Kiosk
Oak tree
Entrance 2
Entrance 4
Lake
Flower beds
Gazebo
Pine tree
Entrance 3
50
100
Scale in metres
150
200
a Draw this network of 10 vertices as a planar graph.

b A visitor arriving at Entrance 2 wishes to travel along all paths exactly once. This is not possible,
but, by adding a new path between two features, it will become possible. Add this new path
and determine the visitors path. What kind of path is this?
c Measure the distance along the paths using a ruler and the scale at the bottom of the plan. Quote
distances to the nearest 5 metres. (Do not include the path from part b.)
d Find the shortest path that connects all the vertices (including entrances). What kind of path is
this? Make a drawing of this path. (Do not include the path from part b.)
e Find the shortest path between Entrance 4 and Entrance 2. (Do not include the path from
part b.)
613
2 In a state forest there are six camp sites: Angel
Valley, Booming Falls, Crater Face, Dewey Seat,

Echidna Spike and Fearful Drop. The camp sites
have walking tracks linking them to various
other camp sites. The matrix representing the
walks and camp sites is given below.
A
B
C
D
E
F
A 1
0
1
3
1
0
B 0
0
1
1
0
0
C 1
1
0
1
0
1
D 3
1
1
0
0
1
E 1
0
0
0
0
1
F 0
0
1
1
1
0
a In the matrix above, how many loops are there?
b In the matrix above, how many multiple edges are there?
c State the degree of vertex A.
d State the degree of vertex D.
e Represent the matrix above as a planar graph.
f From the graph draw any tree.
Questions 3 to 6 are based upon information obtained from answers to question 2, specifically the
drawing of the graph in 2e.
3 Two of the paths from A to D have been closed due to wash-outs, and the loop out from A has been
closed due to the next week being the breeding season for the rare albino ground-dwelling earthworm.
The rangers have provided the following matrix of distances (km) between the camp sites.
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
0
24
21
6
B
0
15
8
C
0
26
16
D
0
10
E
0
7
F
0
a Why are the zeros running through the diagonal?
b What do the dashes () indicate in terms of pathways between camp sites?
c Fill in the blank spaces in the matrix.
d Was it necessary to complete the matrix? Why or why not?
e Redraw the network with the closed paths removed, but include the distances given in the matrix.
4 A group of members from TLTHTB Fitness Club wish to complete a run which includes each of the
paths over three days.
a Starting at A, plan a course for the runners so that each path is covered exactly once.
c Is it possible to meet the requirements of the group and also have the start and finish at A?
Why or why not?
d If your answer to part c was no:
i could you suggest one path which the rangers must add to enable the circuit to be completed?
ii would this still enable the network to be planar?
e If the graph was no longer planar, what would this mean about the actual paths?
5 Another group, The Walkers Club, is planning to camp at camp site F. They wish to visit each camp site
during their 3-day stay and return to their base camp each night by bus. The total distance that they plan
to cover over the three days is 47 km. Assuming that the walks get progressively longer and that no
walk is over 20 km:
a draw and clearly label each of the daily walks
b draw the minimum spanning tree and calculate the total distance of this tree
c determine what requirement of the walkers prevents the minimum spanning tree being utilised.
614
6 Recyclable materials are to be collected from households in a part of a particular suburb. The network
below represents this area, where the numbered dots are street intersections and the edges are the
streets. The numbers (in blue) indicate the lengths (in metres) of the streets between intersections.
2
140
200
140
130
3
8
60
100
9
100
120
150
140
110
7
80
160
100
10
90
Does this network represent a planar graph? Explain your answer.

Verify Eulers formula for this network.
Represent the network as a matrix.
The collectors wish to travel along each street once only, in order to keep travel distance to a
minimum. What sort of path is needed? Determine this path.
e As well as the criterion mentioned in part d above, they would also like to start and finish at the
same intersection. What sort of path is this? If this is possible, determine this path. If it is not,
what would need to happen for it to be possible?
f The Transport Department has placed traffic density monitors at each intersection. Determine
a route that a departmental officer could take in order for her to collect all the monitors without
retracing a street. What would this path be called?
g A taxi driver wants to transport a customer from 1 to 10. Determine the shortest distance for him
to travel between intersections 1 and 10 and indicate this path.
7 An airfreight company operates out of Melbourne (M) to Geelong (G), Ballarat (B), Castlemaine (C),
Seymour (S), Mansfield (F) and Warragul (W). A planar graph of the companys flight network is
outlined below, with distances shown in kilometres. Note that some flight paths, such as Melbourne to
Warragul, are prohibited so they do not appear on the network.
a
b
c
d
65
85
100
85
M
70
80
G
140
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Practice
VCE exam
questions
Use StudyON to
access all exam
questions on this
topic since 2002.
145
125
95
85
a Verify Eulers formula for this network.

b Represent the network as a matrix.
c The company wishes to fly to all six of these satellite towns and return to Melbourne.
Mathematically, what is this type of path called? Determine the two possible flight paths for this.
d Draw a spanning tree for this network.
e Now determine the minimum spanning tree and the total distance represented. Comment on the
usefulness of this for the company.
DiGital DoC
doc-9514
Test Yourself
Chapter 14
615
ICT activities
Chapter opener
DiGital DoC
undirected graphs and networks. (page 581)
14B
DiGital DoC
WorkSHEET 14.1 doc-9512: Construct networks from matrices,
represent 3-dimensional objects using a planar graph, use Eulers
formula ( page 592)
14C
paths and circuits
DiGital DoC
WorkSHEET 14.2 doc-9513: Identify Euler paths and circuits and
Hamiltonian paths and circuits. (page 599)
tUtorialS
We10 eles-1314: Watch a tutorial on how to identify an Euler path.
( page 593)
We11 eles-1315: Watch a tutorial on how to identify an Euler
circuit. ( page 594)
We13 eles-1316: Watch a tutorial on how to identify a Hamiltonian
path. ( page 595)
616
We14 eles-1317: Watch a tutorial on how to identify a Hamiltonian

circuit. ( page 596)
14D
tUtorialS
We16 eles-1318: Watch a tutorial on determining the shortest
path. ( page 600)
We18 eles-1319: Watch a tutorial on determining the minimum
spanning tree. ( page 603)
interaCtiVitY
Minimum spanning tree and shortest paths int-0195: Use the
interactivity to consolidate your understanding of minimum spanning
trees and shortest paths. ( page 599)
Chapter review
DiGital DoC
progress. ( page 615)
Answers CHAPTER 14
ii a V = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8}
UnDireCteD GraphS anD

netWorkS
exercise 14a Basic concepts of a
network
1 a Vertices = 5, edges = 5
b Vertices = 6, edges = 9
c Vertices = 6, edges = 8
d Vertices = 7, edges = 11
e Vertices = 7, edges = 9
f Vertices = 9, edges = 16
2C
3 a deg(A) = 2, deg(B) = 2, deg(C) = 1
b deg(A) = 3, deg(B) = 4, deg(C) = 2
c deg(A) = 3, deg(B) = 4, deg(C) = 4
d deg(A) = 4, deg(B) = 2, deg(C) = 6
e deg(A) = 4, deg(B) = 1, deg(C) = 0
f deg(A) = 3, deg(B) = 8, deg(C) = 3
4D
5D
6 a V = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
E = {(1, 2), (1, 3), (2, 3), (3, 4), (4, 5)}
b V = {U, V, W, X, Y, Z}
E = {(U, V), (U, W), (U, X), (V, W),
(V, X), (V, Z), (W, X), (W, Y), (X, Z)}
c V = {A, B, C, D, E, F}
E = {(A, B), (A, D), (A, E), (B, D),
(B, E), (B, E), (C, D), (D, F)}
d V = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7}
E = {(1, 2), (1, 3), (1, 5), (2, 4), (2, 6),
(2, 6), (2, 6), (2, 7), (3, 3), (3, 6),
(5, 7)}
e V = {A, B, C, D, E, F, G}
E = {(A, B), (B, C), (B, E), (B, F),
(C, E), (C, F), (E, F), (E, G), (F, G)}
f V = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9}
E = {(1, 5), (1, 6), (1, 8), (2, 5), (2, 7),
(2, 9), (3, 4), (3, 5), (3, 8), (4, 5),
(4, 9), (5, 6), (5, 7), (5, 8), (5, 9),
(6, 7)}
7 a
E
2
c
2
E = {(1, 2), (1, 3), (1, 4), (1, 5), (1, 6),
(1, 7), (1, 8), (2, 3), (2, 4), (2, 5),
(2, 6), (2, 7), (2, 8), (3, 4), (3, 5),
(3, 6), (3, 7), (3, 8), (4, 5), (4, 6),
(4, 7), (4, 8), (5, 6), (5, 7), (5, 8),
(6, 7), (6, 8), (7, 8)}
2 B
4 a B
c 4950
DI
H
E III
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
2
12
3
4
5
2
1
0
1
0
0
3
1
1
0
1
0
4
0
0
1
0
1
13 a
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
3
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
3
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
6
4
4
C
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
b 6
0
1
0
0
0
0
Face II: degree = 3

Face III: degree = 4
Face IV: degree = 4
Face V: degree = 4
N
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
5
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
IV F
EK
3 C
b 5
c Face I: degree = 3
II
I
5 a
G
C
CF
e Already planar
9 i a V = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}
E = {(1, 2), (1, 3), (1, 4), (1, 5), (2, 3),
(2, 4), (2, 5), (3, 4), (3, 5), (4, 5)}
b
c Degree of each
5
vertex = 4
c Degree of each vertex = 7

10 a 45
b 190
11
AB
14 a
8 a V = {1, 2, 3, 4}
E = {(1, 2), (1, 3), (1, 4), (2, 3), (2, 4),
(3, 4)}
b 1
c Degree of each
3
vertex = 3
exercise 14B planar graphs and eulers

formula
1 Answers may vary. Below are suggested
solutions.
D
E
V = 8, E = 13, F = 7, so 8 = 13 7 + 2
Since the degree of a single node is
determined by the number of edges (E )
leaving it, and each such edge must
be the entering edge of another node,
each edge is counted twice in the sum of
degrees (S). Thus the sum must be an even
number. And since each edge is counted
twice S = 2E.
11 B
7
8
9
10
12 D
C
E
13 V = 4, E = 6, F = 4, so 4 = 6 4 + 2.
B
b 1
14
F
E
A
D
The edges should represent the doorways

between rooms. (Note: The hall space
between rooms E and D belongs to room
F. Similarly, the hall space between rooms
B and C belongs to room A.)
617
15 a 28
b
D
F
A
B
C
c D
E
F
G
H
A
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
9
10
11
12
13
14
B
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
C
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
D
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
E
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
F
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
G
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
H
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
exercise 14C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
paths and circuits

ABCDEFG
EFGDCBA
ABCDEGFHJ
AJHEGFDCB
1253451
D
a AGLMSHJKFPERDO
CQBN
b HSMLGANBQCOPF
EDRKJ
B
13456785321
D
2165437
7654321
21654732
A
C
a 2134523
b Cannot be done (odd vertices)
c 12345
d 134521
E
a Join 4 to 7 and 3 to 8.
b Euler circuit = 3213415476
107810983; Hamiltonian circuit
= 321547610983
a YRNYSLNL
b An Euler path
a LSYRNYLNL
b An Euler circuit
a RYSLN
b A Hamiltonian path
a CDAEFB
b CAEFBDC
c Hamiltonian path, Hamiltonian circuit
(1 of 2 possible answers)
c 86
14
E
D
C
A
7
3
4
3
2
3
4
D
E
386
301
346
2
5
8
11
356
456
G H
B 1
D 0
G 1
H 1
2 Diagram may be somewhat different from
figure. Sum of degrees = 16
trees and their

applications
1 b, d
2 ACB; ADCB; AEDCB
3 ACB; ADB; ACDB; ADCB;
AEDB; AEDCB
4 C
5E
6 17 km
7 16 minutes
8 a 28 km
b 17 km
c 28 km
40
E
Entrance/exit
C
B
200
A
30
i 9
ii 6
iii A4, B4, C2, D3, E2, F3
b 430 m
3 a
A
70
150
120
85
C 1
b 1845 passengers
21 a
C
80
90
3 D
6 C
9 C
A 0
C
C
B
C
E = {(A, B), (A, C), (A, G), (A, H),

(B, C), (B, D), (B, E), (D, E), (E, F),
(F, G), (G, H)}
17
20 a
1
4
7
10
12
12
d 29
F
1
0
1
0
0
0
1 a V = {A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H}
11
16
E
1
1
0
0
0
0
Short anSWer
7
7
2
D
1
1
0
1
0
1
MUltiple ChoiCe
b 49
C
0
1
0
1
0
1
Chapter reVieW
5
4
B
1
0
1
0
1
0
e EADFCBE
A
0
1
1
1
1
1
A
B
C
D
E
F
15 B
16 a 12 + 13 + 18 + 24 = 67
b 6 + 8 + 9 + 16 + 15 = 54
c 5 + 10 + 14 + 26 = 55
d 4 + 4 + 6 + 7 = 21
17 B
18 A
7
19 a 32
2 1
C
D
4
C
exercise 14D
618
ABFH; ABFGH; ABFGEH;

C
D
ADGH
a 5
b 18
c 7
d 19
b V = 5, E = 6, F = 3, thus 5 = 6 3 + 2
4 ABCDBFDEFA
5 ABCDEFA or AFEDCBA
6 a
Ben Paul Matt David Kevin
Ben
Paul
Matt
David
Kevin
0
2
1
0
1
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
Ben
A B C D E F
A 0
24 21 6
B
0 15 8
C 24 15 0 26 16
D 21 8 26 0
10
E 6
0
7
F
16 10 7
0
d No, the matrix is symmetrical about the
zeros.
David
Matt
7 a
Paul
Kevin
Ben
Paul
Kevin
David
Matt
b So they could start and finish at the
same house.
c MDPBMKPBKDM
8 123456789
9 Distance = 199 km
e A
A
15 31 E 23 G
B 23
21
44 1715
45
13 H
21
F 12 J
C 27 D 19
18 23
K
11 L
E1
OT
E4
b
c
d
e
E3
An Euler circuit: E2KLFKE1

OTE4LE3E4GE3PTFE2
Others possible
E1 55 K 50
OT 40
45
50
90
L 65
E4
135
65
40
G 105
45
E3
b A
E2
35
F
40
PT
d Minimum
spanning tree;
distance = 400 m
e A
E1 K 50
OT 40 55
45 65
50
90
L
E4
135 65
40
G 110
45
E3
f Answers will
vary.
B
D
3 a With the loops removed there are no
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
paths leaving any camp site and coming

directly back to the camp site.
b There are no walks between these camp
sites.
E
7
F
10
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
MGWFSCBM and
MBCSFWGM
d Several possibilities
S
B
M
G
15
B
8
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
c A Hamiltonian circuit
D
6
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
46 km
c The requirement that they must return to
E2
35
F
40
PT
b 3
d 6
E
e E2KLE4, distance = 185 m

2 a 1
c 7
possible but they must start at either A

or F.)
Euler path
No, there are two vertices of odd degree.
i A path from A to F
ii Yes
The walks would most likely have
intersections.
Day 2
Day 1 7
16
F
B
Day 3
10 8
b Connect Flower bed to Lake
g
7 a
26
5 a A 6
E
PT
15
4 a AEFDACDBCF (Others are
E2
16
B
8
but the path must start at vertex 2 or 5

and finish at the other (as there are two
vertices of odd degree).
21347109763258965
Euler circuit. Not possible as all vertices
must be of an even degree. Another
street needs to be added between
intersections 2 and 5.
One possible path is
12347658910.
A Hamiltonian path
Shortest path is 136910 and is 450 m.
V = 7, E = 11, F = 6, so 7 = 11 6 + 2
extenDeD reSponSe
1 a
24
6 E
7
F
21 10
d Euler path. Several options are possible,
camp and cover no more than 20 km per

day.
6 a Yes. No edges cross.
b V = 10, E = 15, F = 7, so 10 = 15 7 + 2
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
c
0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
M
G
Total distance = 510 km

Of little use because they need to start and
finish in Melbourne and flight paths would
backtrack.
619
ChapTer 15
Directed graphs and networks

diGiTal doC
doc-9515
10 Quick Questions
ChapTer ConTenTS
15a
15b
15C
15d
15e
Reachability and dominance in directed networks

Critical path analysis
Critical path analysis with backward scanning and crashing
Network flow
Assignment problems and bipartite graphs
reachability and dominance

in directed networks
15a
A directed graph (or digraph) is a graph or network where every edge has a direction. Directed graphs
can be used to represent many situations, such as traffic flow, competitions between teams or the order of
activities in a production line.
reachability
Town B
As the name suggests, reachability is the concept of how it is possible
to go from one vertex in a directed network to another. The different
pathways that link the vertices are analysed.
Town C
Town A
Consider the directed network at right, representing possible pathways
(routes) from town A to town C. By inspection, it can be seen that there
are two pathways that go directly from A to C, without passing through B.
That is, there are two one-stage pathways from A to C. A one-stage pathway is one that includes
one edge only.
There are also two pathways that go from A to C via B. These are called two-stage pathways.
A two-stage pathway is one that contains two edges only.
Notice that there are no routes entering town A but there are four leaving it. We say that the indegree of
A is zero, while its outdegree is four. The indegree is the number of edges moving into a vertex and the
outdegree is the number of edges moving away from a vertex. The indegree of B is two and its outdegree is
one. The indegree of C is three and its outdegree is zero. A is the source and C is the sink of the network.
matrix representation
The one-stage and two-stage pathways for a directed network can be
represented in matrix form. The matrix at right displays all of the possible
one-stage pathways for the previous network. It is commonly known as the
adjacency matrix and is denoted by A.
The matrix shows that there are two one-stage pathways from A to B
and two one-stage pathways from A to C. There is also a one-stage
pathway from B to C. Notice that the sum of each row is equal to the
outdegree of each vertex and the sum of each column is equal to the
indegree of each vertex. This can be a useful tip to ensure you have
completed the adjacency matrix correctly.
A
From B
C
A
0
0
0
To
B
2
0
0
C
2
1
0
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
0 2 2
A = 0 0 1
0 0 0
Adjacency matrix
ChapTer 15 Directed graphs and networks
621
The matrix at right displays all of the possible

To
A B C
two-stage pathways of the network. This matrix is
denoted by A2. There are two two-stage pathways from
0 0 2
A 0 0 2
2
A to C (via B).
From B
A = 0 0 0
0 0 0
Note that it is also possible to represent other stage

C 0 0 0
0 0 0
pathways in matrix form; for example, three-stage is
denoted by A3, four-stage is denoted by A4 and so on. This text will only concentrate on representing up
to two-stage pathways in matrix form.
Worked example 1
Wendy is a businesswoman working in town A and wishes to

meet with a colleague in town D. She also needs to pick up
some documents from town B to take to the meeting.
a Find the number of two-stage paths that Wendy could
take and name them.
b Find the number of three-stage paths that Wendy could
take and name them.
c Represent the one-stage and two-stage pathways of the directed
network in matrix from.
Think
a 1 Find the number of pathways from A to B
Town B
Town D
Town A
Town C
WriTe
a There are two paths from A to B.
(first stage).
2
Find the number of pathways from B to D

(second of the two stages).
There is only one path from B to D.
Write the pathways.
There are 2 two-stage paths.

ABD and ABD
b 1 What two-stage pathways are possible from

2
b The only two-stage path from B to D is
B to D?
BCD.
Write the pathways.
The only three-stage paths are ABCD

and ABCD.
There are two possible routes.
c 1 Draw a matrix to show all the possible
one-stage pathways throughout the network.
622
A
B
From
C
D
2
0
0
0
The matrix can be represented without the

labels along the side and the top.
A=
Repeat steps 1 and 2 and display all the twostage pathways throughout the network.
A2 =
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
To
B C
2 1
0 1
0 0
0 0
A
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
2
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
3
1
1
0
D
1
1
1
0
dominance
If an edge in a directed network moves from A to B, then it can be said that A is dominant, or has a greater
influence, over B. If an edge moves from B to C, then B is dominant over C. However, we often wish to
find the dominant vertex in a network; that is, the vertex that holds the most influence over all the other
vertices. This may be clearly seen by inspection, by examining the pathways between the vertices. It may
be the vertex that has the most edges moving away from it. Generally speaking, if there are more ways
to go from A to B than there are to go from B to A, then A is the dominant vertex. In Worked example 1,
town A is dominant over all the other vertices (towns) as it has edges moving to each of the other vertices.
Similarly, B has edges moving to C and D, so B is dominant over C and D and C is dominant over D.
Using this inspection technique, we can list the vertices in order of dominance from A then B then C and
finally D.
However, the dominant vertex in a directed network may not be easily determined by inspection.
There may be an edge moving from A to B and another one from B to A. What is the most dominant
then? A more formal approach to determine a dominant vertex can be taken using matrix representation.
Using the matrices from Worked example 1, this approach is outlined below.
Take the matrices that represent the one-stage pathways (the adjacency matrix, A) and twostage pathways (A2) and add them together. (When adding matrices, simply add the numbers in the
corresponding positions.)
A
+
A2
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
3
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
3
1
0
0
4
2
1
0
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with dominance.
The resulting matrix, which we will call the resultant matrix, consists of all the possible one- and
two-stage pathways in the network. By taking the sum of each row in this matrix, we can determine the
dominant vertex. The dominant vertex belongs to the row that has the highest sum.
The first row corresponds with vertex A and has a sum of 9. Row 2 (vertex B) has a sum of 3, row 3
(vertex C) has a sum of 1 and row 4 (vertex D) has a sum of 0. The highest sum is 9, so the dominant
vertex is A. The order of dominance is the same as for the inspection technique described earlier.
This formal approach just described is not the only technique used to determine dominance in
a network. Other approaches are possible, but this section will concentrate only on the inspection
technique and summing the rows of the matrix that results from A + A2.
The concept of dominance can be applied to various situations such as transportation problems,
competition problems and situations involving relative positions.
Worked example 2
The results of a round robin (each competitor plays each other once)
tennis competition are represented by the directed graph at right.
a By inspection, determine the dominant vertex (dominant
A
competitor); that is, the winner. Rank the competitors in
finishing order.
b Confirm your answer to part a by finding the matrix, A + A2,
and summing the rows of this matrix.
B
C
A
B
means A beats B
Think
a Vertex D has arrows moving to all other
vertices, so D is the dominant vertex. VertexC

is dominant over B and A and vertex A is
dominant over B. List the competitors (vertices)
in finishing order. (It is clear that B is the loser
as all the arrows lead into it.)
WriTe
a The finishing order from first to fourth is D, C,
A and B.
623
b 1 Find the adjacency matrix, A (representing
all of the one-stage pathways in the directed

graph).
A=
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Find A2, the matrix representing all the twostage pathways in the matrix.
A2 =
Find the resultant matrix when A and A2 are

added (add the numbers in the corresponding
positions).
The resultant matrix is
Determine the sum of each row of the

resultant matrix.
The sum of the first row (vertex A) is 1, the

second row (vertex B) is 0, the third row
(vertex C) is 3 and the final row (vertex D) is 6.
Write a statement. The row with the highest

sum is the dominant vertex and the row with
the lowest sum is the least dominant.
D is the winner, followed by C, then A and

finally B.
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
1
0
2
3
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
reachability and dominance in

directed networks
exerCiSe 15a
1 We 1a, b For each directed network below determine the number and name of the:
i one-stage paths
ii two-stage paths
iii three-stage paths.
from A to D.
a
A
C
B
C
D
E
E
B
2 We 1c Represent the one-stage and two-stage pathways of the directed networks in question 1 in
matrix form.
624
3 The directed graph at right represents part of a river system where
the water flows from the lake, L1, to another lake, L2. If fish eggs
flow from L1 to L2, via how many different routes is it possible for
the eggs to go? Name all the routes.
L1
L2
4 The bus routes between certain landmarks are shown at right. Name
all the different routes by which it is possible to reach:

a D from A
b A from D
c B from D.
D
B
G
5 The directed network at right represents the pathways available to
students as they move around their school. Name the different pathways
by which the students can get from the:
a office to the gym
b common room to the science block
c science block to the common room
given that they wish to make a:
i one-stage trip
ii two-stage trip
iii three-stage trip.
S
O
G = gym
S = science block
O = office
C = cafeteria
R = common room
B
6 We2 The results of a round robin chess competition are
represented by the directed graph at right.

competitor); that is, the winner. Rank the competitors in finishing
order.
b Confirm your answer to part a by finding the matrix, A + A2, and
summing the rows of this resultant matrix.
D
A
B
means A beats B
7 The results of a round robin basketball competition
are represented by the directed graph at right.

team); that is, the winner. Rank the teams in finishing order.
b Confirm your answer to part a by finding the matrix, A + A2,
and summing the rows of this resultant matrix.
A
B
means A beats B
625
8 Determine the dominant vertex for each of the following directed graphs.
b
a
C
S
P
A
Q
c
W
Z
G
Y
D
9 mC In the directed graph shown, the dominant vertex (by inspection) is:
a Q
d T
b R
e U
C S
R
S
U
P
10 The personnel management roles of six employees are shown in the directed graph below.
a Which employee(s) exerts most influence in this group?
b Which employee(s) exerts least influence?
c Determine the order of influence of all six employees.
B
C
A
E
F
B
C
means B manages C
15b Critical path analysis

activity charts and networks
In any process, ranging from our daily schedule to major construction operations, tasks need to be
completed within a certain period of time.
Consider Friedas morning schedule, where she needs to eat her cooked breakfast, download her email
and read her email. The first two tasks take 6 minutes and 1 minute respectively, while the last takes
2 minutes. Frieda needs to complete all these tasks in 7 minutes. How might she accomplish this?
Clearly, she needs to be able to do some tasks simultaneously. Although this seems like a simple
problem, let us look at what might happen each minute.
626
Time
1st minute
2nd minute
3rd minute
4th minute
5th minute
6th minute
7th minute
Activity
Activity
Download email
Eat breakfast
Eat breakfast
Eat breakfast
Eat breakfast
Eat breakfast
Eat breakfast
Read email
Read email
More complex activities require more planning and analysis. A network diagram can be used to
represent the flow of activities.
In the figure below, the edges of our network represent the three activities of downloading (B), reading
(C) and eating (A). The left node represents the start of all activity, the right node the end of all activity and
the middle node indicates that activity B must occur before activity C can begin. In other words, activity B
is the immediate predecessor of activity C.
B, 1
C, 2
A, 6
Another way of representing this information is in an activity chart.

Activity letter
A
B
C
Activity
Eat breakfast
Download email
Read email
Predecessor
Time (min)
6
1
2
This chart also shows that activity B (downloading) is the immediate predecessor ofactivity C
(reading), and that activities B and A have no predecessors.
An alternative network diagram is shown below.
B, 1
C, 2
A, 6
The activities can be undertaken only in a certain sequence, so arrowheads are placed on the edges.
Because of the implied direction, these networks are called directed graphs or directed networks. (The
edges in a directed graph represent a one-way path between the nodes, as compared with undirected
graphs where the edges represent a two-way path between the nodes.)
We can use the network diagram to help Frieda reduce the total time spent on the tasks. If the tasks
were spread out in a straight line, so that no two tasks were completed at the same time, then they would
take her 9 minutes. The diagram shows that some of Friedas tasks can be carried out simultaneously. Let
us investigate the time savings that can be made.
To determine the time saving, first determine the earliest start time for each activity.
Forward scanning
By forward scanning through a network we can calculate the earliest start times for each activity and
the earliest completion time for the whole project. The earliest start time (EST) is the earliest that any
activity can be started after all prior activities have been completed. The EST is determined by looking at
all the previous activities, starting with the immediate predecessors and working back to the start of the
project. An activity can start no earlier than the completion of such predecessors. Obviously, the EST for
the first activity is 0.
The EST can be recorded on a network diagram by using triangles and boxes, as shown in the
following diagrams. The activity is represented by the edge between the nodes. The duration (TX) of
the activity is represented as the number above the edge. The earliest start time of activity X (ESTX) is
recorded in the triangle preceding the edge.
ESTX
X, TX
627
When a network includes two or more activities, the same labelling process is used.
ESTY
ESTX
Y, TY
X, TX
The purpose of the boxes beneath the triangles will be explained in a later section.
Worked example 3
Use forward scanning to determine the earliest completion time for Friedas
initial three tasks.
Think
1
WriTe/draW
Begin with the network diagram.
B, 1
TUTorial
eles-1320
Worked example 3
C, 2
A, 6
Add boxes and triangles near each of the nodes.

B, 1
C, 2
A, 6
The earliest start time (EST) for each node is

entered in the appropriate triangle. Nodes with
no immediate predecessors are given the value of
zero.
As activities B and A have no immediate

predecessor then their earliest start time is zero.
B, 1
C, 2
A, 6
4
Move to another node and enter the earliest

start time (EST) in its triangle. In the case of
activity C, it must wait one minute while its
immediate predecessor, B, is completed.
B, 1
C, 2
A, 6
5
The last nodes earliest start time is entered.

When more than one edge joins at a node then the
earliest start time is the largest value of the paths
to this node. This is because all tasks along these
paths must be completed before the job is finished.
There are two paths converging at the final
node. The top path takes 3 minutes to complete
and the bottom, 6 minutes. The larger value is
entered in the triangle.
Path BC = 1 + 2 = 3 minutes
Path A = 6 minutes
The earliest completion time is the value in the

triangle next to the end node.
All tasks can be completed in 6 minutes.
B, 1
C, 2
A, 6
It is important for anybody planning many tasks to know which tasks can be delayed and which tasks
must be completed immediately. In Worked example 3, the eating must be commenced immediately if
the 6-minute time is to be attained, whereas downloading the email could be delayed three minutes and
still allow enough time for it to be read while eating.
Let us now extend Friedas activity chart to a more complex set of activities for her morning routine.
628
Activity letter
Activity
Predecessor
Time (min)
Prepare breakfast
Cook breakfast
Eat breakfast
B, E, G
Have shower
Get dressed
Brush teeth
C, H
Download email
Read email
B, E, G
Total time
25
The network diagram for these activities is shown below.

E, 4
D, 4
A, 4
B, 2
C, 6
G, 1
H, 2
F, 2
Worked example 4
Using all the activities listed in Friedas morning routine, find the earliest completion time and
hence identify those tasks that may be delayed without extending the completion time.
Think
1
WriTe/draW
Add the boxes and triangles to

the directed network diagram.
D, 4
A, 4
Begin forward scanning. The

earliest start time (EST) for the
first three nodes in the path can
be entered immediately.
Calculate the time values for the

paths to the fourth node. Enter
the largest value (or longest
time) into the appropriate
triangle.
C, 6
G, 1
H, 2
F, 2
8
0
D, 4
A, 4
E, 4
B, 2
E, 4
B, 2
C, 6
G, 1
H, 2
F, 2
ADE = 4 + 4 + 4
= 12 minutes
AB = 4 + 2
= 6 minutes
AG = 4 + 1
= 5 minutes
8
0
A, 4
D, 4
E, 4
12
B, 2
C, 6
G, 1
H, 2
F, 2
629
Repeat step 3 for the next node.

Note that calculations begin by
using the time from the previous
node (12 minutes).
AEC = 12 + 6
= 18 minutes
AEH = 12 + 2
= 14 minutes
8
0
D, 4
A, 4
5
There is only one path to the

last activity (F). Add its time
requirement to that of the
previous node (18 minutes).
Identify sections of the network

where there was a choice of
paths. There are two such
sections of the network. Examine
the first one (the 4th node).
18
B, 2
C, 6
G, 1
H, 2
F, 2
8
4
D, 4
A, 4
The time in the last triangle

indicates the earliest completion
time.
12
ACF = 18 + 2
= 20 minutes
Earliest completion time is 20 minutes.
0
E, 4
E, 4
12
18
B, 2
C, 6
G, 1
H, 2
20
F, 2
Earliest completion time = 20 minutes
8
4
E, 4
D, 4
12
B, 2
G, 1
List and total the time for each path DE = 4 + 4 = 8 minutes

through this section of the network.
B = 2 minutes
Activities on the path with the
G = 1 minute
largest value cannot be delayed.
Activities B and G can be delayed.
Repeat step 8 for the next

section identified in step 7.
12
C = 6 minutes
H = 2 minutes
Activity H can be delayed.
The path through the network which follows those

activities that cannot be delayed without causing the entire project
to be delayed is called the critical path.
Therefore the critical path for the activities listed in Friedas
morning routine would be ADECF. It is easily seen that this
path takes the longest time (20 minutes).
Float time and latest start time

Float time is the difference in time between those paths that cannot be
delayed and those that can. When planning projects, paths with float
time are often delayed if there is a cost saving, otherwise, they are done
as soon as possible if this is more appropriate. The latest start time
for such activities is defined as the latest time they may begin without
delaying the project.
630
18
C, 6
H, 2
Worked example 5
Work out the float time for activities B and G in Worked example 4, and hence identify the latest
8
starting time for these activities.
4
E, 4
D, 4
12
B, 2
G, 1
Think
WriTe
List the alternative paths for the section

containing activities B and G and the times for
these alternatives.
DE = 4 + 4
= 8 minutes
B = 2 minutes
G = 1 minute
Subtract the smaller times separately from the

maximum time.
Float time for activity B = 8 2

= 6 minutes
Float time for activity G = 8 1
= 7 minutes
Look up the earliest completion time for the

activity on the critical path and subtract the
activity times.
DE is on the critical path.

Earliest completion time = 12 minutes
Latest start time for
activity B = 12 2
= 10 minutes
activity G = 12 1
= 11 minutes
The float times indicate the amount of time for which these activities can be delayed without delaying
the completion of all tasks. Furthermore, activity B could begin up to 6 minutes (4 + 6) after the start of
the critical activity (D), while G could begin up to 7 minutes (4 + 7) after the same critical activity (D).
There will be a more formal treatment of float time in the next section.
drawing network diagrams

Let us now look at how networks are prepared from activity charts. As an example, we shall see how
Friedas morning schedule network was prepared.
Worked example 6
From the activity chart below, prepare a network diagram of Friedas morning schedule.
Activity letter
Activity
Predecessor
Time (min)
Prepare breakfast
Cook breakfast
Eat breakfast
B, E, G
Have shower
Get dressed
Brush teeth
C, H
Download email
Read email
B, E, G
Total time
25
631
Think
1
Begin the diagram by drawing the starting

node.
(a) Examine the table looking for

activities that have no predecessors.
There must be at least one of these.
Why?
(b) This activity becomes the first edge
and is labelled with its activity letter
and arrowhead.
Activity A has no predecessors.
(a) List all activities for which A is the

immediate predecessor.
(b) Add a node to the end of the edge for
activity A.
(c) Create one edge from this node for
each of the listed activities.
Label these edges.
Note: The end node for each of these
activities is not drawn until either you
are certain that it is not the immediate
predecessor of any later activities,
orall activities have been completed.
Activity B has A as an immediate predecessor.

Activity D has A as an immediate predecessor.
Activity G has A as an immediate predecessor.
632
WriTe/draW
Repeat step 3 for activity D. Since it is the

only immediate predecessor of activity
E, this can be added to the diagram.
Otherwise, activity E could not be
added yet.
(a) Repeats tep 3 for activities B and G.
They have no activities for which
they are the only predecessors. Since
activity C is preceded by all of B, G
and E, join all the edges at a single
node.
(b) Add activity C after this joining node.
Note that activity H is also preceded
by all of B, G and E but not by
activity C.
Determine whether activity C and H are
independent of each other. Since they are
independent, activity H starts from the
same node as activity C.
The last activity is F, which has C and H
as its immediate predecessors. Therefore
join C and H with a node, then add an
edge for F. Since F is the final activity,
also add the end node.
Add the time required for each activity
next to its letter.
D
A
B
G
D
B
D
A
D
A
D
A
D, 4
A, 4
E, 4
B, 2
C, 6
G, 1
H, 2
F, 2
exercise 15b
1 mC Consider the network diagram at right. Times shown are in minutes.

a Which of the following statements is true?
Activity A is an immediate predecessor of F.

Activity D is an immediate predecessor of F.
Activity F must be done before activity D.
Activity F must be done before activity E.
Activity D is an immediate predecessor of E.
b The minimum time taken to complete all activities is:
a 19 minutes
b 21 minutes
C 23 minutes
A, 7
a
b
C
d
e
B, 9
C, 12
D, 8
F, 9
E, 4
d 28 minutes
e 49 minutes
2 We3 Refer to the diagram below.

B, 2
C, 5 E, 6
F, 4
A, 3
D, 9
G, 8
H, 11
a Use forward scanning to determine the earliest completion time.

b We4 Identify tasks that may be delayed without increasing the earliest completion time.
3 Determine the critical path for the network in question 1.
4 mC Refer to the network diagram at right.
a The number required in the triangle above the
node after activities B and F is:

a 0
b 4
C 5
d 8
e 13
b The number required in the triangle above the
node after activity E is:
a 5
b 9
C 10
d 18
e none of these
c The earliest completion time for all tasks is:
a 27
b 24
C 21
d 18
e 15
D, 6
0
G, 18
A, 3
B, 4
E, 5
H, 8
C, 5
F, 8
J, 6
5 a Find the earliest start time for each node in the network shown below.
J, 11
D, 8 G, 6
L, 8
K, 9
H, 10
M, 7
E, 10
B, 15
A, 10
C, 12
F, 25
b Hence, find the earliest completion time for the project.
6 From the network diagram in question 1, produce an activity chart.
7 From the network diagram in question 4, produce an activity chart.
8 From the network in question 5, produce an activity chart.
9 For the network in question 4:
a find the critical path
b We5 determine which activities have float time and hence calculate their float times
c determine the latest start time for all non-critical activities.
10 For the network in question 5:
a find the critical path
b determine which activities have float time.
633
11 We6 Prepare a network diagram from each of the activity charts below.
a
Activity
A
B
C
Immediate predecessor
Activity
D
E
F
G
D
D
E, F
Activity
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
A
A
C
B
B
F
D, E, G
J, H
D, E, G
Activity
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
N
O, T
P
N
S, Y
O, T
O, T
V
Y
R
X
12 When a personal computer is being assembled the following processes must be performed.
Activity letter
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Activity
Install memory board
Install hard drive
Test hard drive
Install I/O ports
Install DVD drive
Test DVD drive
Install operating system
Test assembled computer
Total time
Predecessor
A
B, E
A
D
E
C, F
G
Time (min)
2
20
4
5
3
5
10
12
61
a Construct a network diagram.

b Determine the minimum time in which all tasks
could be completed.
Critical path analysis with backward

scanning and crashing
15C
With more complex projects requiring the coordination of many activities, it is necessary to record more
information on the network diagrams and to display the information more formally using charts.
In the previous section the float times and the critical path were worked out using somewhat informal
methods. In this section a more formal method will be shown to enable float times to be calculated and
the critical path to be determined. This method involves backward scanning.
634
requirements for critical path analysis

Along with the informal rules and techniques already developed in the previous section, we need to
define two more rules that must be followed in order to successfully complete a critical path analysis of
a network.
Rule 1. Two nodes can be connected directly by a maximum of one edge.
Consider the following activity table, and associated network diagram.
Activity letter
A
B
C
A, B
A, 5
Time (min)
5
4
6
C, 6
B, 4
For activity C to have both A and B as predecessors, activities A and B must be drawn as parallel
edges. Clearly this does not meet the requirement of Rule 1, which allows for only one edge (activity)
connecting two nodes.
Violation of this rule does not affect forward scanning and the calculation of minimum completion
time but will cause problems when identifying the critical path using the method of backward scanning
described later in this section. A method for dealing with parallel edges will be suggested below.
Rule 2. An activity must be represented by exactly one edge. Consider the two network diagrams
below.
A
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept: 10
A
A
The left-hand drawing indicates two separate flows along the same edge. If A were a water pipe, how
could you keep the two flows separate? The right-hand example suggests that A can happen at the same
time as B while still being its immediate predecessor.
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
backward scanning
To complete critical path analysis, a procedure called backward scanning must be performed.
Backward scanning starts at the end node and moves backward through the network subtracting the
time of each edge from the earliest start time of each succeeding node. When two or more paths are
followed back to the same node the smallest such difference is recorded. The results of each backward
scanning step yield the latest start time for each activity. Latest start time is the latest time an activity
can start without delaying the project.
Earliest finish time (EFT) for an activity is equal to the earliest start time (EST) of the activity plus its
duration (T).
The following diagram illustrates the activity X.
ESTX
X, TX
The earliest finish time for activity X (EFTX) will be the earliest start time for activity X (ESTX) plus
the duration of activity X (TX).
EFTX = ESTX + TX
The following diagram illustrates two activities X and Y, where activity Y directly follows activity X.
ESTX
LSTX
ESTY
LSTY
X, TX
Y, TY
EFTX = ESTX + TX
635
As previously established, ESTX is represented by the triangle preceding activity X (in pink on the
diagram above). The latest start time for activity X (LSTX) is represented by the blue box preceding the
activity. The same applies for activity Y and all following activities.
Note that EFT cannot be read from the triangles or boxes; it must be calculated.
Float time, also called slack, is the maximum time that an activity can be delayed without delaying a
subsequent activity on the critical path and thus affecting the earliest completion time.
From the above, it can be seen that there is a relationship between float time and the other quantities,
namely:
Float time for activity X = Latest start time for activity Y (LSTY) Earliest Start Time for activity
X (ESTX) duration of activity X (TX)
That is:
Float timeX = LSTY ESTX TX
where activity Y directly follows activity X.

The technique of backward scanning is best explained with an example.
Worked example 7
The network diagram at right has been constructed for a project

manager. Use forward and backward scanning to clearly display the
critical path and to list any float times.
A, 3
C, 6
B, 5
Think
1
D, 2
WriTe/draW
Forward scan through the network and

record the earliest start time (EST) for each
activity in the appropriate triangle.
A, 3
C, 6
B, 5
D, 2
5
Begin backward scanning.

(a) Start at the end node and trace backwards
along all paths from this node.
(b) Subtract the times of the activities
along each path from the earliest finish
time (EST = 9) and record the value
in the box at the previous node. These
values are the latest start times (LST)
for the activities leaving this node.
Repeat the process backwards through the
diagram. Where two (or more) paths come
together (activities A and B), record the
smaller value in the box.
Along path C: 9 6 = 3
Along path D: 9 2 = 7
3
3
A, 3

activity C (LSTC) = 3
activity D (LSTD) = 7
C, 6
9
9
D, 2
B, 5
5
7
Along path A: 3 3 = 0
Along path B: 7 5 = 2
Smallest value = 0.
3
3
A, 3
C, 6
0
0
9
9
B, 5
D, 2
5
7
636
The critical path can now be clearly

identified. It is the path that has the same
numbers in both the triangles and boxes at
any node.
Remember to include all such nodes in the
critical path.
Critical path is AC (as shown

in pink).
3
3
A, 3
C, 6
0
0
9
9
B, 5
D, 2
5
7
(a) Float times are calculated now.

Construct a table with the headings
shown.
(b) Record the times from the triangles in
the earliest start times (EST) column,
the times in the boxes in the latest
start time (LSTY) column as well as
the activity times (TX). Calculate float
times using the equation:
FloatX = LSTY ESTX TX
In this example the float times are
also the differences between the
corresponding times in the boxes and
triangles. This is not the rule in the
general case.
Earliest Latest start

start time time of the
Activity of this
following
Activity time
activity
activity Float
X
(TX)
(ESTX)
(LSTY)
time
A
3
0
3
0
B
5
0
7
2
C
6
3
9
0
D
2
5
9
2
For activity D: Float = 9 5 2
=2
For activity C: Float = 9 3 6
=0
For activity B: Float = 7 0 5
=2
For activity A: Float = 3 0 3
=0
The previous example is fairly simple as the critical path could easily be determined by direct inspection.
There is only one path that is not on the critical path, therefore the calculation of float time is also simple.
In the real world, the problems are more complicated and so require the use of the formal method. Float
times are important for the efficient management of any project. They enable the manager to determine
what delays can be tolerated in the project. For example, the manager in charge of a building site is able
to tell sub-contractors that they have a time window in which they must work. The sub-contractors can
then arrange their schedules to incorporate this time window.
637
Worked example 8
The chart at right has been given

to an operations manager. The
activities have been simplified
to letter names. The manager
is required to find all critical
activities and the earliest
completion time for the project
by:
a creating a network diagram
b completing a forward scan and
determining the earliest
completion time
c completing a backward scan
and identifying the critical path
d calculating the float times for
each activity.
Think
a Construct the network diagram
TUTorial
eles-1321
Worked example 8
Activity letter
Immediate
predecessor
Time (days)
15
C, G
F, H
D, I
D, I
WriTe/draW
from the table.
J, 3
M, 2
K, 4
N, 3
D, 15
A, 3
E, 4
H, 4
G, 2
B, 4
I, 2
F, 7
C, 6
b 1 Draw boxes and triangles
at each node. Forward scan

through the network.
Start at zero for the first
node and then add the times
taken for a path (TX) and
write it in the triangle at the
next node (ESTY).
Adding the times of the
paths (TX) to the times in
the triangle at the previous
node (ESTX) gives the next
value to be entered (ESTY).
When two paths converge
at a node, the largest time
value is entered as all
immediate predecessors
need to be completed before
the next activity can begin.
638
b A = 3 days
AE = 3 + 4 = 7 days
B = 4 days
The blue triangle (ESTH) may be reached by following
two paths:
AEG = 3 + 4 + 2
= 9 days
BC = 4 + 6
= 10 days, thus the larger of the times, 10, is entered
in the triangle.
21
3
18
J, 3
M, 2
D, 15
A, 3
0
F, 7
E, 4
G, 2
B, 4
4
C, 6
H, 4
10
25
I, 2
14
N, 3
K, 4
22
The earliest completion time

can be read from the last
triangle.
c 1 Starting at the end node,
begin the backward scan.

Enter the earliest completion
time in the last box. Subtract
the times of any paths
ending at this node (M and
N) from the value in the
last box and enter the result
in the appropriate boxes to
calculate the latest start time
(LST) of that activity.
Earliest completion time = 25 days
c Aqua box value (LSTM) = 25 2
= 23 days
Purple box value (LSTN) = 25 3
= 22 days
3
18
Repeat the process

backwards through the
network diagram. Where the
paths converge the smallest
value is entered in the box.
J, 3
M, 2
D, 15
A, 3
0
F, 7
E, 4
G, 2
B, 4
C, 6
21
23
25
I, 2
H, 4
25
N, 3
K, 4
14
22
22
10
Backtracking to the pink box (LSTJ) via activity

J = 23 3
= 20
Backtracking to the pink box (LSTK) via activity
K = 22 4
= 18
Enter the smaller of the values (18) in the pink box.
21
23
3
18
18
D, 15
A, 3
0
F, 7
E, 4
G, 2
B, 4
C, 6
N, 3
K, 4
H, 4
14
25
25
22
22
10
21
23
3
A, 3
0
18
5
9
G, 2
B, 4
4
C, 6
10 F, 7
H, 4
J, 3
M, 2
18
D, 15
7
E, 4
Nodes which have the

earliest start time (triangles)
equal to the latest start times
(boxes) are identified as
being on the critical path.
M, 2
J, 3
I, 2
Repeat the process back

through all paths.
3
20
I, 2
25
25
N, 3
K, 4
14
22
22
16
10
12
ADKN is the critical path.

21
23
3
18
A, 3
0
E, 4
B, 4
4
F, 7
G, 2
H, 4
C, 6
J, 3
M, 2
18
D, 15
I, 2
14
16
25
25
N, 3
K, 4
22
22
10
12
639
d 1 (a) The float times for
each of the activities

are calculated using the
formula.
(b) The section showing
activity A from part c,
step 4 clearly shows the
latest start time
of the following
activity (LSTY) (pink),
the earliest start time
(ESTX) (blue) and
the activity time (TX)
(green).
(a) The best way to keep

organised and to
calculate float times is
to set up a table.
(b) Add columns for
earliest start times
(EST), latest start times
(LST) and float times to
the original table.
Repeat step 1 for all
activities.
d Float time of X = LSTY ESTX TX
Float (A) = 3 0 3 = 0
A result of zero indicates that
activity A is on the critical path
with no float time available.
A, 3
0
0
Activity Immediate
Float timeX =
letter predecessor TX ESTX LSTY LSTY ESTX TX
A
303=0
604=2
12
12 4 6 = 2
15
18
18 3 15 = 0
934=2
16
16 7 7 = 2
12
12 7 2 = 3
C, G
10
16
16 10 4 = 2
F, H
14
18
18 14 2 = 2
D, I
18
23
23 18 3 = 2
D, I
18
22
22 18 4 = 0
21
25
25 21 2 = 2
22
25
25 22 3 = 0
Note that all activities that were on the critical path have float times of zero. It is important to note that if
even a single activity is floated by having its start delayed, then the entire network diagram should be
re-drawn and float times recalculated.
If the manager employed extra workers for a critical activity, its duration time could be reduced,
hence reducing the completion time for the project. The reduction in the duration time of an activity
is called crashing. Crashing may result in a different critical path. This will be explored further in a
later section.
dummy activities
A dummy activity is an edge that must be added to avoid a network with two or more activities having
the same name or occurring in parallel.
Earlier in this section we set up two rules:
Rule 2. An activity must be represented by exactly one edge.
A table and a drawing were presented in which there were parallel edges (breaking Rule 1). A method,
explained by example, will be given to overcome this problem.
640
Worked example 9
A, 5
Introduce a dummy edge to the network diagram at right.

Activity letter
A
B
C
A, B
Time (min)
5
4
6
Think
1
C, 6
B, 4
WriTe/draW
Construct edges A and B.

C must follow both A and B. This is clearly a
problem causing parallel edges (violating Rule 1
for networks).
A, 5
B, 4
2
Construct C after activity A. Introduce a dummy

activity (B) label and allocate a time of zero.
Note: Use dotted line to show dummy activity.
Therefore, not only is A the immediate predecessor
of C, but B (via B with a time = 0) is also
effectively the immediate predecessor of C.
A, 5
C, 6
B', 0
B, 4
The introduction of the dummy activity with a time value of zero enables scanning to take place along
both edges, A and B. Additionally, the critical path can be shown more clearly.
Worked example 10
From the table below construct a network diagram.

Activity letter
A
B
C
D
A, B
B
Think
1
Time (days)
5
4
4
6
WriTe/draW
Construct edges A and B.

A, 5
B, 4
2
Construct edge D following B as it has only one

immediate predecessor.
A, 5
B', 0
C must follow both A and B (clearly a problem).

Construct C after activity A. Introduce a dummy
activity (B) from B to C and allocate it a time of
zero.
B, 4
D, 6
A, 5
C, 4
B', 0
B, 4
D, 6
641
Worked example 10 provides a method of not only avoiding parallel edges but also avoiding A being
shown as the immediate predecessor of D, which (from the table) it clearly is not.
Once any required dummy activities have been defined, it is possible, using forward and backward
scanning, to determine the earliest completion time for the project and float times for each non-critical
activity, as per the methods of Worked example 8.
Crashing
As discussed earlier, crashing is a method of speeding up the completion time of a project by shortening
the critical path. Follow the same method as in previous sections to calculate the new critical path and
minimum completion time.
Worked example 11
Take the critical path found in the network in

Worked example 8 reproduced below.
To shorten the overall completion
3
3
time of the project, activity A
is to be shortened to 2days
A, 3
and activity D is to be
0
E, 4
shortened to 12days.
0
Determine the new critical
B, 4
path and the new minimum
completion time for the project.
4
6
Think
1
21
23
18
18
D, 15
7
9
G, 2
C, 6
F, 7
H, 4
I, 2
M, 2
J, 3
25
25
N, 3
K, 4
14
16
22
22
10
12
WriTe/draW
Redraw the network with

the new completion times.
M, 2
J, 3
D, 12
A, 2
E, 4
F, 7
G, 2
B, 4
I, 2
N, 3
K, 4
H, 4
C, 6
Recalculate the earliest

start times (EST) and
latest start times (LST) by
completing forward and
backward scanning.
19
21
2
3
0
0
A, 2
E, 4
4
4
642
Write the answer.
6
7
G, 2
B, 4
16
16
D, 12
C, 6
F, 7
H, 4
I, 2
14
14
M, 2
J, 3
23
23
N, 3
K, 4
20
20
10
10
The new critical path is BCHIKN. The minimum finishing time

is 23 days.
Critical path analysis with backward

exercise 15C
1 We7 For the network diagram shown, use forward and backward scanning to clearly display the
critical path and to list any float times. Times are in minutes.
C, 4
E, 3
A, 12
B, 9
D, 11
2 For the network diagram shown, use forward and backward scanning to clearly display the critical path
and to list any float times for non-critical activities. Times are inhours.
A, 3
C, 7
D, 6
E, 2
B, 4
G, 6
F, 3
3 mC The earliest completion times for questions 1 and 2 respectively, are:

a 13 min; 19 h
d 20 min; 13 h
b 17 min; 10 h
e 19 min; 8 h
C 20 min; 12 h
4 Complete the figure at right by forward and backward
scanning and hence:

a determine the earliest completion time
b indicate the critical path.
Times are in days.
c Imagine now that activity E can be completed in
9 days. How does this affect the answers to
parts a and b?
B, 11
F, 6
D, 3
A, 7
C, 4
G, 8
E, 12
5 mC The float time for activity D in question 4 is:

a 1 day
d 4 days
b 2 days
e 7 days
C 3 days
6 mC The latest start time for activity D in question 4 is:

a 18 days
d 25 days
b 21 days
e none of these
C 22 days
7 We8 The manufacturing of bicycles can be considered as a 7-step process:
A Collect all the parts 12 minutes

B Paint frame 35 minutes
(requires A to be completed first)
C Assemble brakes 16 minutes
(requires A to be completed first)
D Assemble gears 20 minutes
(requires B to be completed first)
E Install brakes 12 minutes
(requires C to be completed first)
F Install seat 5 minutes
(requires C to be completed first)
G Final assembly 18 minutes
(requires D and E to be completed first)
a
b
c
d
Construct an activity chart.

Construct a network diagram.
Determine the earliest completion time using forward and backward scanning.
Determine the critical path.
643
8 mC In the bicycle manufacturing system described in question 7,
activities with float time are:

a A, B, C, D, E, F, G
C C, E, F
e none
b A, B, D, G
d C only
9 In question 7, determine the amount of time saved, as a percentage, using the critical path approach
versus completing each task sequentially.

D, 7
10 From the network diagram at right:

a produce an activity table
b complete a forward scan and hence determine
J, 11
A, 3
the earliest completion time
B, 4
c complete a backward scan and hence
E, 8
F, 5
K, 10
determine the critical path
L, 3
d use the activity table from a to calculate
C, 6
float times for all non-critical activities.
G, 12
11 From the following activity table:

H, 2
a construct a network diagram
b determine the earliest completion time
c by forward and backward scanning, determine the critical path
d determine the float time for all non-critical activities.
Activity
letter
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
N, 6
M, 9
Immediate
predecessor
A
A
B
C
D, E
G
G
F, H
Time
(h)
5
3
4
7
4
9
5
3
6
4
12 We9 Re-draw the network diagram below, inserting any necessary dummy activities so that rule 1 for
critical path problems is not violated.

G
F
B
A
C
D
13 Re-draw the network diagram below, inserting any necessary dummy activities so that rule 1 for critical
path problems is not violated.

D
A
E
F
J
G
644
14 We 10 From the following activity table construct a network diagram and indicate the location and
direction of the dummy activity.

Activity
letter
Immediate
predecessor
Time
(h)
B, C
D, E
15 From the following activity table:

a construct a network diagram, adding any dummy activities that may be required
b determine the earliest completion time
c determine the critical path by forward and backward scanning
d determine the float time for all non-critical activities.
Activity
letter
Immediate
predecessor
Time
(h)
11
12
E, F, G
16 Consider Worked example 6 on page 631.

a Re-draw the network diagram, indicating any dummy activities.
b Hence, by scanning, determine the earliest completion time and critical path.
c Determine float times for all non-critical activities.
17 From the network diagram below (activity times are recorded in days):
a forward scan to determine the earliest completion time
b backward scan to determine the critical path
c determine the float time for activity X
d We 11 imagine that crashing results in J being completed in 5 days. How does this affect the
earliest completion time and the critical path?

E, 5
G, 9
B, 4
X, 3
C, 10
A, 15
F, 9
H, 5
J, 7
D, 3
K, 5
P, 10
N, 6
M, 4
Q, 5
L, 3
645
18 Given the network diagram below, determine the:

a four missing values in the boxes
b critical path
c float time for activity F.
10
10
C, 7
D, 6
A, 10
16
17
17
J, 8
D', 0
G, 4
I,
E, 1
B, 8
24
24
F,
K, 5
29
29
8
15
19 Given the network diagram below, determine the:

a four missing values in the boxes
b critical path
c float time for activity F.
12
H, 18
A, 12
0
0
B, 10
C, 15
10
14
30
30
G, 20
I, 8
F, 16
E,
B, 0
K,
38
38
44
44
J, 13
15
D, 9
24
25
20 The network diagram at right shows the activities, along
with the times (in hours), needed to complete a

particular project. Also drawn below is the corresponding
activity chart showing earliest start times rather than
activity times. There is an activity X, which is yet to be
drawn on the network diagram.
D, 4
G, 8
E, 2
H, 9
Immediate predecessor(s)
EST
I, 4
J, 5
K, 7
646
B, 3
F, 3
Activity
a
b
c
d
C, 4
A, 5
12
G, I, X
17
C, D
Use the information in the network diagram to complete the table above by filling in the shaded boxes.
Draw and label activity X on the network diagram, including its direction and time.
What is the critical path?
Determine the latest start time for activity H.
21 A school is building a new library. The separate stages required for construction and the number of
weeks taken to complete them are shown on the directed network below.
DIGITAL DOC
doc-9516
WorkSHEET 15.1
G, 6
A, 3
Start
F, 5
Finish
I, 5
B, 3
C, 5
a
b
c
d
e
f
H, 3
E, 2
Units: 3 & 4
D, 4
What is the earliest start time for stage F?

What is the minimum time it will take to build the library?
What is the critical path?
What is the slack time for stage H?
If the overall time of the project was to be reduced, which stages could be shortened?
If stage A was reduced to 2 weeks and stage F was also reduced to 2 weeks, what would be the
new critical path and the new minimum time for completion of the library?
Network flow
15D
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with network flows.
There are many examples of networks throughout the modern world. The road and rail systems that link
all parts of our country, such as the one at right and the airline flight paths that not only link us to other
places within the country but also to places overseas, are examples of networks that
move people and products. Other networks such as the information superhighway
(the internet), telephone lines and the postal system allow the transfer of
information.
All these networks have common attributes. The attribute dealt with in this
section is network flow. There are networks that allow for the flow to be in both
directions along a path and those that allow for flow in one direction only. The
direction of flow needs to be displayed clearly on any diagram: simple arrows on
the path suffice. The quantity of flow is just as important.
Flow capacities and maximum flow

The networks starting node(s) is called the source. This is where all flows
commence. The flow goes through the network to the end node(s) which is called
the sink.
The flow capacity (capacity) of an edge is the amount of flow that an edge can
allow through if it is not connected to any other edges.
The inflow of a node is the total of the flows of all edges leading into the node.
The outflow of a node is the minimum value obtained when one compares the
inflow to the sum of the capacities of all the edges leaving the node.
Consider the following figures.
D
A
Source
F
Sink
E
All flow commences at A. It is
therefore the source. All flow
converges on F indicating it is the sink.
100
30
20
80
B still has an inflow of 100 but

now the capacity of the edges
leaving B is 130 (80 + 20 + 30).
The outflow from B is now 100.
100
30
20
10
INTERACTIVITY
int-0196
Maximum flow
B has an inflow of 100. The flow

capacity of the edges leaving B is
30 + 20 + 10 = 60. The outflow is
the smaller of these two total values,
which is 60.
CHAPTER 15 Directed graphs and networks
5_61_17866_MQ12_FM_4E_15.indd 647
647
23/11/12 3:39 PM
Worked example 12
Convert the information presented in the following table to a network

diagram, clearly indicating the direction and quantity of the flow.
From
Quantity
(litres per minute) Demand (E)*
To
Rockybank Reservoir (R) Marginal Dam (M)
1000
Marginal Dam
(M) Freerange
(F)
200
200
Marginal Dam
(M) Waterlogged
(W)
200
200
Marginal Dam
(M) Dervishville
(D)
300
300
Think
TUTorial
eles-1322
Worked example 12
WriTe/draW
Construct and label the required number of nodes.

Note: The nodes are labelled with the names of the
source of the flow and the corresponding quantities
are recorded on the edges. Link the nodes with edges
and record flow direction and quantity on these.
F
200
1000
200
200
200
300
300
* In this example there does not exist a location called Demand (E). It is preferable for a network diagram to have
both a single source and a single sink, so the Demand (E) was included to simplify the diagram. The reason for this
will become clear in the following worked examples.
Worked example 12 is a simple case of a network in which the direction and quantity of flow are evident.
Such a network diagram allows for analysis of the flow in the network; it allows us to see if various
edges in the network are capable of handling the required flow.
The flow capacity of the network is the total flow possible through the entire network.
Worked example 13
Use the information from Worked example 12 to determine, by inspection:

a the flow capacity of the network
b whether the flow through the network is sufficient to meet the demand of all towns.
Think
a 1 Examine the flow into and out of the
Marginal Dam node. Record the smaller of

the two at the node. This is the maximum
flow through this point in the network.
WriTe/draW
F
200
1000
200
300
Even though it is possible for the reservoir

to send 1000 L/min (in theory), the
maximum flow that the dam can pass on
is 700 L/min (the minimum of the inflow
and the sum of the capacities of the edges
leaving the dam).
648
In this case the maximum flow through

Marginal Dam is also the maximum flow of
the entire network.
b 1 Determine that the maximum flow through
Maximum flow is 700 L/min.
Marginal Dam meets the total flow

demanded by the towns.
200
200
200
200
300
300
Flow through Marginal Dam = 700 L/min

Flow demanded = 200 + 300 + 200
= 700L/min
2
If the requirements of step 1 are able to be

met then determine that the flow into each
town is equal to the flow demanded by them.
By inspection of the table in Worked

example12, all town inflows equal town
demands (capacity of edges leaving the
town nodes).
Consider what would happen to the system if Rockybank Reservoir continually discharged 1000L/min
into Marginal Dam while its output remained at 700 L/min.
Such flow networks enable future planning. Future demand may change, the population may grow or
a new industry that requires more water may come to one of the towns. The next worked example will
examine such a case.
Excess flow capacity is the surplus of the capacity of an edge less the flow into the edge.
Worked example 14
A new dairy factory (Creamydale (C)) is to be set up on the outskirts of Dervishville. The factory will
require 250 L/min of water.
a Determine whether the original flow to Dervishville is sufficient.
b If the answer to part a is no, is there sufficient flow capacity into Marginal Dam to allow for a new
pipeline to be constructed directly to the factory to meet their demand?
c Determine the maximum flow through the network if the new pipeline is constructed.
Think
a 1 Add the demand of the new factory to
Dervishvilles original flow requirements. If

this value exceeds the flow into Dervishville
then the new demand cannot be met.
WriTe/draW
F
200
1000
200
200
200
300 + 250
300
D
2
The new requirements exceed the flow.
The present network is not capable of meeting

the new demands.
M
E
550
300
649
b 1 Reconstruct the network including a new
edge for the factory after Marginal Dam.
200
1000
200
200
200
300
300
250
250
C
2
Marginal Dam inflow = 1000

F
Marginal Dam outflow
200
= 200 + 200 + 300
1000
200
+ 250
R
M
W
= 950
Repeat step 1 from Worked example 13 to

find the outflow of node M.
300
250
D
C
Determine if the flow is sufficient.
c This answer can be gained from part b step 2
There is excess flow capacity of 300 into

Marginal Dam which is greater than the 250
demanded by the new factory. The existing flow
capacity to Marginal Dam is sufficient.
c The maximum flow through the new network is
950.
above.
The maximum flow through most simple networks can be determined using these methods, but more
complex networks require different methods.
minimum cutmaximum flow method

To determine the maximum flow, the network first needs to be divided or cut into two parts. A cut in a
network diagram is a line drawn through a number of edges which stops all flow from the source to the
sink.
The value of the cut is the total flow of the edges that are cut.
The minimum cut is the cut with the minimum value.
The maximum flow through a network is equal to the value of the minimum cut.
Worked example 15
For the network diagram at right:

a make three cuts
b calculate the value of each cut
c determine the value of all possible cuts to give
the value of the minimum cut and hence the
maximum flow through the network.
leaving it.
Cut 1 = {AB, AC, AD}
TUTorial
eles-1323
Worked example 15
WriTe/draW
Cut 1
8
3
A
7
650
4
3
Think
a 1 Isolate the source, A, by cutting any edges
C
D
4
3
5
Isolate the sink, E, by cutting any edges

leading into it.
Cut 2 = {BE, CE, DE}
Cut 1
8
3
A
7
Place a cut through each of the three paths

going from A to E.
Cut 3 = {AD, AC, BE}
Cut 1
8
3
Cut 2
4
3
Cut 2
E
5
Cut 3
b Add the values of the edges crossed by each of the b Value of cut 1 = 8 + 3 + 7
cuts in a.
= 18
Value of cut 2 = 4 + 3 + 5
= 12
Value of cut 3 = 7 + 3 + 4
= 14
c 1 Identify the cuts in the diagram.
Cut 1 = {AB, AC, AD}

Cut 2 = {BE, CE, DE}
Cut 3 = {AD, AC, BE}
Cut 4 = {AD, CE, BE}
Cut 5 = {AB, CE, DE}
Cut 6 = {AB, AC, DE}
Cut 1 Cut 5
8
3
A
7
Cut 4 Cut 3
Cut 2
4
3
E
5
D
Cut 6
Calculate the value of all cuts.
Value of cut 1 = 8 + 3 + 7
= 18
Value of cut 2 = 4 + 3 + 5
= 12
Value of cut 3 = 7 + 3 + 4
= 14
Value of cut 4 = 7 + 3 + 4
= 14
Value of cut 5 = 8 + 3 + 5
= 16
Value of cut 6 = 8 + 3 + 5
= 16
Select the minimum value as the maximum

flow.
The value of the minimum cut is 12, therefore

the maximum flow through the network has a
value of 12.
As can be seen in Worked example 15, ensuring that all cuts have
been made is a complicated procedure. The diagram becomes cluttered.
There are two cuts missing from the diagram. Can you find them?
Performing cuts at the source and sink first, enables an upper limit
for the value of the minimum cut to be set. In part b, it is clear that the
value of the minimum cut in the diagram must be less than or equal to
12. In this case it was 12.
In some networks it is possible to produce a cut in which an edge
actually heads back inside the cut rather than being directed out of
the cut, as is required and as all edges in Workedexample 15 do. If an
edge does this, then its flow value is ignored in the calculation of the
cut value. The inside of a cut is the side on which the source node lies.
Sometimes the inside of a cut is shaded.
Source
A
7
9
B
8
Cut 1
3
2
E
Cut 2
The shaded section represents the
inside of cut 1.
651
Worked example 16
Determine the values of the cuts made on the network diagram below.
Cut 1
5
D
7
A
6
3
2
B
8
Cut 2 E
Think
WriTe
Determine the overall direction of the flow.
The flow is from A to C, so the inside of the

cut is on the left-hand side where the source
node, A, is.
Determine the edges that are crossed by the

cuts and identify any which head back into
the cut.
Cut 1 = {AE, AB, BD, DC}

BD heads back inside the cut, so ignore its flow
value.
Cut 2 = {AD, BD, BC, BE, AE}
BE heads back inside the cut, so ignore its flow
value. Note that for this cut, BD heads outside
the cut.
Calculate the cut values.
Cut 1 = 6 + 9 + 3 = 18
Cut 2 = 5 + 7 + 2 + 6 = 20
exercise 15d
network flow
1 We 12 Convert the following flow tables into network diagrams, clearly indicating the direction and
quantity of the flow.

a
From
A
A
B
C
D
To
B
C
C
D
E
Flow capacity
100
200
50
250
300
From
R
S
T
T
U
To
S
T
U
V
V
Flow capacity
250
200
100
100
50
From
M
M
N
N
Q
O
R
To
N
Q
O
R
R
P
P
Flow capacity
20
20
15
5
10
12
12
From
To
Flow capacity
E
E
G
G
F
F
J
H
F
G
H
J
H
J
K
K
8
8
5
3
2
6
8
8
2 For node B in the network at right, state:

a the inflow at B
b the edge capacities flowing out of B
c the outflow from B.
B
23
16
D
27
34
C
652
3 Repeat question 2 for the network at right.
B
2
C
2
D
4
5
3
4
4 We 13 For each of the networks in question 1, determine:

i the flow capacity
ii whether the flow through the network is sufficient to meet the demand.
5 Convert the following flow diagrams to tables as in question 1.
a
A
4
5
3
c
A
4
5
3
B
2
C
2
D
3
4
B
2
D
3
d
4
5
4
5
12
7
B
2
C
2
D
3
4
2
6
D
4 F
7
C
E
8
6 Calculate the capacity of each of the networks in question 5.

We14 Introduce new edges, as indicated below, to each of the network diagrams produced in
question 1.
ii Calculate the new network flow capacities.
7 i
From
A
A
B
C
D
B
To
B
C
C
D
E
E
Flow capacity
100
200
50
250
300
100
From
M
M
N
N
Q
O
R
N
To
N
Q
O
R
R
P
P
P
Flow capacity
20
20
15
5
10
12
12
5
From
R
S
T
T
U
S
To
S
T
U
V
V
T
Flow capacity
250
200
100
100
50
100
From
E
E
G
G
F
F
J
H
E
To
F
G
H
J
H
J
K
K
K
Flow capacity
8
8
5
3
2
6
8
8
10
8 mC In question 7c the outflow from N is:

a 5
d 25
b 20
e 18
C 15
We 15, 16 Which of the four cuts shown in the network

at right are invalid?
b Determine the value of each cut.
c What is the minimum cut and hence the maximum flow?
12
9a
Cut 2
8
Cut 3
5
A
Cut 1 9
D
4
12
E
4
C
Cut 4
653
10 a Which, if any, of the five cuts in the
network diagram at right are invalid?

b Determine the value of each cut.
c What is the minimum cut and hence the
maximum flow?
Cut 4
11
Cut 5
Cut 1
11 mC For question 7d the minimum cut is:
b {EK, FH, GH, JK}

e none of these
G
5
10
a {EK, EG, EF}

d {EK, EJ, EG, HK}
13 Cut 3
Cut 2
C {EK, GJ, GH, FH}
12 mC If a new edge from S to V with a value of 50 was added to the diagram in question 7b, which of
the following would be true?

a There would be no effect on the maximum flow.
b It would increase the maximum flow by 50.
C It would increase the maximum flow to 250.
d Both b and C above would be true.
e The time taken to get from S to V would be reduced.
13 mC Which of the following may be true? The inflow to node C in question 7a is:
a 250
d 300
b 200
e none of these
14 For each of the following networks:

i draw in the line of minimum cut
a
Q
14
12
1
11
10
13
R
M
N
P
2
1
8
12
O
c
12
M
9
10
Q
7
N
5
4
O
ii state the maximum flow.

b
Q
40
35
20
55
d
C either 200 or 250
120
95
15 A network diagram of streets and
freeways flowing into a city at peak

hour is shown at right. Copy the
diagram and clearly label the freeways.
100
45
A
75
N
25
10
35
Q
N
25
B
20
110
25
25
60
11
60
P
145
45
45
D
75
50
150
E
50
80
G
45
100
H
60
I
30
16 Refer to the diagram in question 15 and explain what would happen to the traffic at:
a node E
b node H.
diGiTal doC
doc-9517
WorkSHEET 15.2
17 Add a new edge to the diagram in question 15 so that bottlenecks
would not occur at peak hour.
assignment problems and

bipartite graphs
15e
With network flow problems, the task was to find the maximum flow through a network. Another
possible problem could be to determine the exact flows through each path in a network, so that as
much of the capacity of each edge as possible is used. This is a class of situation called assignment
(or allocation) problems. For example, we could be generating electricity at three power plants for
distribution to five towns, so that each town gets the required amount of electricity, regardless of the
plant it came from. To start this technique we need to define the concept of bipartite graphs.
654
50
K
60
bipartite graphs
In the previous section on network flows, the minimum cut method was introduced to help solve the flow
problem. Consider the cut through the network as dividing the network into two parts: flow in and flow
out, or supply and demand. Imagine separating the graph along the cut into its two parts. This graph is
known as a bipartite graph.
A bipartite graph is one where the nodes can be separated into two types of node supply and
demand.
Consider a typical network flow problem with a cut defined in the figure below left. By separating the
graph, as in the figure below right, we have divided the graph into two parts. The supply nodes are M
and W, while the demand nodes are F, D and E.
F
200
200
300
Cut
200
200
200
300
200
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
200
200
300
300
representing information as bipartite graphs

In many practical situations not only flows, but goods, money and even people can be represented by
bipartite graphs.
Worked example 17
The Shiny Shoe Company make shoes at two factories,

one at Alphaville producing 200 pairs per day, the other at
Beta City producing 300pairs per day. It ships them to three
distributors: Fartown, who want 50 pairs per day, Giver River,
who want 250 pairs per day and Hamlet, who want 200 pairs
per day. Represent this information as a bipartite graph.
Think
1
2
Determine all the supply nodes, starting with a

single supply node.
Represent the supply side of the graph.
WriTe/draW
Supply nodes are S, A and B.
200
S
300
3
Determine all the demand nodes, ending with a

single demand node.
Add the demand side of the graph.
Demand nodes are F, G, H and D.
200
H
F
300
200
50
250
655
The next section concerns the problem of allocating the flow of shoes between the suppliers and the
distributors.
Sometimes the supply and demand nodes have quite distinct types. For example, the supply nodes might
be students, while the demand nodes could be the subjects that they study, or even the sports they play. The
key to bipartite graphs is that there is a separation between the two sides and that there is some sort of flow
from supply to demand. The separation does not always have to be literal, as in the next example.
Worked example 18
The following table lists four students and the four subjects offered in the
Science program in Year 12.
TUTorial
eles-1324
a Represent this information as a bipartite graph.
Worked example 18
b Determine whether the following statements are
true or false.
Student
Subjects taken
i Alice studies more Science subjects than
Alice
Biology, Chemistry
Carla does.
Chemistry, Physics
ii Between Carla and Betty, all Science subjects Betty
Carla
Biology, Chemistry, Psychology
are studied.
iii Between Alice and Betty, more subjects are
Diane
Psychology
studied than by Carla.
Think
WriTe/draW
a 1 Determine the supply nodes and represent
b i
ii
iii
a Supply nodes are Alice, Betty,
the supply side of the graph. In this case

they are (arbitrarily) assigned to the
students.
Carla and Diane.
Determine the demand nodes. Represent

the demand side and show the connections
as arrows joining supply nodes to demand
nodes.
Note there is no quantity of flow between
supply and demand.
Demand nodes
are Biology,
Chemistry,
Physics and
Psychology.
Determine the number of subjects

studied by Alice and Carla.
Determine the truth of the statement.
Determine the number of subjects

studied by Betty and Carla.
Determine the subjects studied

between Alice and Betty, and Carla.
(Supply)
Carla
Diane
Alice
Betty
(Supply)
(Demand)
Alice
Biology
Betty
Chemistry
Carla
Physics
Psychology
Diane
b i Alice studies two subjects (Biology and
Chemistry).
Carla studies three subjects (Biology, Chemistry,
Psychology).
Clearly, the statement is false.
ii Betty studies Chemistry and Physics.
Carla studies Biology, Chemistry and

Psychology.
Clearly, the statement is true.
iii Alice and Betty between them study three
subjects (Biology, Chemistry and Physics).

Carla studies three subjects (Biology, Chemistry,
Psychology).
Clearly the statement is false (as both groups
study three subjects).
Note that in part b iii, the fact that Alice and Betty both studied Chemistry does not mean that
two (distinct) subjects were studied.
656
The allocation problem

Consider a situation where there are a number of jobs to be done and the same number of people to do
them. However, each person can do each job in a different amount of time (or at a different cost). How
can the jobs be allocated: one per person, so that time (or cost) is minimised? This is known as optimal
allocation. Sometimes the optimal allocation may be obvious, but in most cases it is not, and may even
require some trial and error work.
In the general case the jobs and people can be put in an allocation matrix as in the example below:
Alan
Bob
Carl
Job X
10
8
9
Job Y
4
11
8
Job Z
9
10
7
So, Alan would take 10 hours to do job X, 4 hours to do job Y and 9 hours to do job Z. Similarly, Bob
would take 8 hours to do job X . . . and so on.
The first step is to perform row reduction by subtracting the smallest value in each row from all the
numbers in that row. This may produce the optimal allocation in one step.
Worked example 19
A building site has three more jobs to be done by the three remaining workers,
Alan, Bob and Carl. The times taken by each to do the three jobs are given in the
table above. Determine the optimal allocation and hence state the minimum time.
Think
1
Generate or write the matrix of people against

job times.
Step 1a. Perform row reduction.

Find the smallest value in each row, and
subtract it from all numbers in that row.
Subtract 4 from each number in row A.
Subtract 8 from each number in row B.
Subtract 7 from each number in row C.
Step 1b. Attempt an allocation.

Cover all the zeroes with the smallest
number of straight (horizontal/vertical,
but not diagonal) lines. If the number
of lines equals the number of jobs to
be allocated, go to step 2
If not, further steps to be taken will
be shown in another worked example.
Step 2a. Produce a bipartite graph.
Show all possible allocations, where
there are zeroes connecting people to
jobs.
Step 2b. List the possible allocations and
determine the smallest total.
WriTe/draW
TUTorial
eles-1325
Worked example 19
X Y Z
A 10 4 9
B 8 11 10
C 9 8 7
The smallest number in row A is 4.
The smallest number in row B is 8.
The smallest number in row C is 7.
A
B
C
X
6
0
2
Y
0
3
1
Z
5
2
0
A
B
C
X
6
0
2
Y
0
3
1
Z
5
2
0
In this case there are three lines and three jobs.
There is only 1 possible allocation:

A Y, B X, C Z
Total time = 4 + 8 + 7 = 19 hours
Hence, the minimum time is 19 hours.
657
This is the simplest possible case: the optimal allocation is almost obvious. Remember to calculate the
total time (or cost) and ensure it is indeed the minimum.
The hungarian algorithm

Unfortunately, there are two cases where the basic algorithm will not produce the optimal allocation:
1. when there are not enough zeros to draw the right number of straight lines in step 1b
2. when there are too many zeros so that one person may be allocated more than one job in step2a.
In either case, we need to use the Hungarian algorithm which involves the following steps, replacing
step 2 of the previous example.
Step 2. Perform column reduction (when there are not enough zeros). This is similar to row reduction
and is performed when step 1 has not produced an optimal allocation. This may produce an
optimal allocation using the method of steps 1b and 1c. If not, proceed to step 3.
Step 3. Modify the original matrix according to the Hungarian algorithm. This involves an addition and
subtraction operation involving various quantities in the matrix from step 2 and will be detailed
in the worked example below. This should produce an optimal allocation.
Step 4. Produce a bipartite graph and list all possible allocations.
Worked example 20
Amy, Beth, Cate and Dana offer quotes on how much each of them will charge to complete four
different jobs, P, Q, R and S. The table below summarises these charges (in dollars). Use the
Hungarian algorithm to minimise the total cost to complete the four jobs, one job per person.
Amy
Beth
Cate
Dana
P
17
25
29
11
Q
24
18
14
20
Think
1
658
Step 1a. Perform row reduction.

Row A: Subtract 17
Row B: Subtract 18
Row C: Subtract 14
Row D: Subtract 11
Draw the minimum number of straight
lines to cover all the zeros.
Step 2a. Perform column reduction.

Column P: Subtract 0 (do nothing)
Column Q: Subtract 0 (do nothing)
Column R: Subtract 1
Column S: Subtract 2
Draw the minimum number of straight
lines to cross out all the zeros.
R
42
19
31
17
S
21
20
22
14
WriTe/draW
A
B
C
D
P Q R
0 7 25
7 0
1
15 0 17
0 9
6
S
4
2
8
3
A
B
C
D
P Q R
0 7 25
7 0
1
15 0 17
0 9
6
S
4
2
8
3
A
B
C
D
P Q R
0 7 24
7 0
0
15 0 16
0 9
5
S
2
0
6
1
A
B
C
D
P Q R
0 7 24
7 0
0
15 0 16
0 9
5
S
2
0
6
1
Only 2 lines
cannot continue
allocation.
Only 3 lines are

required cannot
continue allocation.
Step 3. Perform the Hungarian algorithm.

Step 3a. Find the smallest uncovered number
from step 2b.
Step 3b. Add this number to all covered
numbers in the matrix from step 2b. At
the intersections of straight lines, add
this number twice (circled at right).
P Q R
A 1 8 24
B 9 2 1
C 16 1 16
D 1 10 5
S
2
1
6
1
A
B
C
D
P Q R
0 7 23
8 1
0
15 0 15
0 9
4
S
1
0
5
0
A
B
C
D
P Q R
0 7 23
8 1
0
15 0 15
0 9
4
S
1
0
5
0
Step 3c. Subtract the overall smallest number

from all the numbers in the matrix.
Step 3d. Attempt an allocation.

Repeat step 3 until a possible
allocation is found.

Show all possible allocations, where
there are zeros connecting people to
jobs.
The smallest uncovered number = 1.
Step 4b. List possible allocations and determine

the smallest total.
Byinspection,Cate must be allocated Q
(shes the only one at Q).
BethmustbeallocatedR (shes the only one
at R).
ThereforeDanamustbeallocatedS (shes
the only one left at S).
ThereforeAmymustbeallocatedP.
The smallest overall

number = 1.
In this case there are

4 lines and 4 jobs,
so go to step 4.
Amy P, Beth R, Cate Q, Dana S

Minimum cost = 17 + 19 + 14 + 14 = $64
(numbers from the original matrix in the question)
Sometimes the optimal allocation is carried out to maximise a quantity such as score. In this process, all
elements in the matrix are subtracted from the largest one first, and in doing so, modifying the situation
to a minimisation problem. From then on, the procedure is exactly the same as that set out in the previous
worked example.
assignment problems and

bipartite graphs
exercise 15e
1 We 17 A publisher produces 1000 copies per month of the latest bestseller by Wolf Thomas at
two factories. The first factory produces 400 copies. The books are then distributed to two states
(Queensland and Victoria), with Queensland requiring 350 copies and Victoria getting the rest.
Represent this information as a bipartite graph.
2 An electricity company produces 4000 kWh, 5000 kWh and 6000 kWh at its three hydroelectric plants.
This electricity is supplied to four towns as follows:

20% to Town A, 25% to Town B, 15% to Town C and the rest to Town D. Represent this information
with a bipartite graph.
659
3 We 18a Five diners (Albert, Brian, Chris, David and Earl) go to
Diner
the pub for dinner and place the orders shown in the table at right.
Represent this information as a bipartite graph.
Dishes
Albert Soup, fish

Brian
Fish
Chris
Soup, beef, dessert
David Beef, dessert

Earl
Fish, dessert
mC From the information in question 3, which of the following statements is true?

Albert and Brian between them have more kinds of dishes than Chris and David.
Chris and David between them have tried all the dishes.
David and Earl between them have more kinds of dishes than Brian and Chris.
Brian and Chris between them have more kinds of dishes than David and Earl.
All the above statements are false.
4 We 18b
a
b
C
d
e
5 An oil company supplies petrol to three towns, A, B and C. Within town A there are two sub-depots
where petrol is stored temporarily before being delivered to service stations. The other two towns have
only a single depot. Town A gets 30 000 and 40 000 litres per week for each of its sub-depots, while
town B gets 10 000 litres and town C gets 25 000 litres for its depots. However, the demand for petrol is
as follows; town A: 60 000, town B: 15 000 and town C: 30 000 litres.
a Represent this information in a bipartite graph.
b Suggest a delivery system so that all towns get the required amount of petrol each week.
6 mC Five students have various hobbies as indicated by the bipartite graph below.
Sam
Knitting
Frances
Jogging
Mal
Cooking
Chess
Katherine
Photography
Will
From this graph it can be said that:

a Sam and Mal have all the hobbies between them
b Mal and Frances, in total, have more hobbies than Sam and Will
C Mal and Sam each have the same number of hobbies
d Katherine and Sam, in total, have fewer hobbies than Frances and Mal
e Will had fewer hobbies than all other students
7 We 19 Perform row reduction on the following matrices, which represent times (in hours), and attempt
an optimal allocation for the minimum time. State the minimum time.
a
6 3 7
2 4 5
3 5 2
4 3
9 4
5 6
4 8
8 Draw the bipartite graphs from question 7.
7
6
7
3
3
5
8
5
16
15
19
22
14
16
13
26
20
17
13
20
13
16
18
24
9 A mother wishes to buy presents (a game, a doll and a toy truck) for her three children from three
different stores. The games cost is ($30, $45, $40) from the three stores, the dolls cost is ($50,
$50, $60) while the trucks cost is ($35, $30, $30). Show that the optimal allocation yields a total
of $110.
10 mC Given the matrix at right, the total value of the optimal allocation is:
a
b
C
d
e
660
9
11
15
16
19
7 3 7
3 3 5
6 5 5
11 A government department wishes to purchase five different cars for its fleet. For reasons of fairness it
must not purchase more than one car from any dealer. It receives quotes from the dealers according to the
following table (cost in thousands of dollars).
a Perform row and column reduction.
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
b Draw the bipartite graph after reduction.
Car 1 20 15 17 16 18
c
i Find the optimal allocation.
Car 2 17 15 19 17 16
ii State the minimum cost.
Car 3 18 19 16 19 16
Car 4 19 19 17 21 17
Car 5 24 19 17 17 17
12 We20 Perform an optimal allocation on the following matrices by:
i row reduction, then
ii column reduction, then
iii the Hungarian algorithm.
State the minimum total allocation and at which stage each matrix was solved.
a
10
15 12
17 21 19
16 22 17
23 26 29
17
14
19
27
b
6
9 9
10 9 9
4 9 6
5 8 8
c
5
4
7
3
6
d
12
10 11 13 11
11 11 13 12 12
12 16 13 16 12
9 10
9 11
9
14
11
11
11
11
13 mC In an allocation problem with four people for four jobs, the minimum number of straight lines
that cross out all the zeros in the matrix must be what value before an optimal allocation can be
performed using bipartite graphs?
a 0
b 1
C 2
d 4
e It depends on the problem.
23 19 4
11 29 6 14
21 17 14 13
20 27 22 8
14 A company wishes to hire four computer programmers (A, B, C and D) to develop four software
packages. Because of time constraints each programmer can accept at most one job. The quotes (in
weeks) given by the four programmers are shown in the following table.
Job 1 Job 2 Job 3 Job 4
A
30
40
50
60
70
30
40
70
60
50
60
30
20
80
50
70
a Perform row (and if necessary, column)
reduction.
b Perform the Hungarian algorithm (if
necessary).
c Display possible allocations using a bipartite
graph.
d Determine:
i the optimal allocation
ii the total time required to complete the four tasks.
Job 1 Job 2 Job 3 Job 4
15 Four workers (Tina, Ursula, Vicky, Wendy) need to be optimally
allocated four tasks (one per worker). The times (in minutes) that
each worker takes are shown in the table at right.
Perform an optimal allocation stating:
a the tasks allocated to each worker
b the total time required to complete all tasks.
T
U
V
W
100
60
40
70
50
45
70
50
35
70
50
70
55
55
30
70
661
16 David Lloyd George High School will be
Algebra Calculus
competing in a Mathematics competition.
60
78
There are four categories: Algebra, Calculus, Ken
Functions and Geometry and four possible
Louise
45
80
competitors: Ken, Louise, Mark and Nancy
Mark
60
35
one per category. To determine the best
competitor for each category, a test is given
Nancy
42
66
and the results (as percentages) for each
student recorded.
a Determine the row-reduced matrix.
b Determine the column-reduced matrix.
c Determine the optimal allocation using a bipartite graph.
d Determine the average score for the team.
17 In a Meals-on-Wheels program in a remote region of Victoria, there are four
elderly people (P1, P2, P3, P4) who require meals to be delivered. There are
four volunteers (V1, V2, V3, V4) who live at varying distances (specified in
kilometres) away.
a Determine the optimum allocation.
b State the total distance travelled given that each volunteer delivers
exactly one meal.
662
Functions Geometry
67
37
70
90
70
86
54
72
P1 P2 P3 P4
V1 13 17 14 23
V2 8 12 17 9
V3 9 17 14 11
V4 21 16 13 14
Summary
reachability and
dominance in directed
networks
A directed graph (or digraph) is a graph or network where every edge has a direction.
Reachability is the concept of how it is possible to go from one vertex in a directed network
to another.
A one-stage pathway is one that includes one edge only and a two-stage pathway is one that
includes two edges.
The pathways of a directed network can be represented as a matrix. The adjacency matrix A
represents all of the possible one-stage pathways in a network and the matrix A2 represents all of
the possible two-stage pathways in a network.
If an edge in a directed network moves from A to B, then it can be said that A is dominant, or has a
greater influence, over B.
Two possible techniques for determining the dominant vertex in a directed network include:
(a) simple inspection of the network
(b) finding the matrix addition A + A2 and summing the rows of this resultant matrix. The row with
the highest sum corresponds with the dominant vertex.
Directed networks have edges whose associated quantity also has an implied direction.
The edges represent activities whose associated quantity, activity time, is the time it takes to
complete the task. Directional arrows on the edges indicate the sequence of activities.
Nodes represent the end of one activity and the start of subsequent activities.
The immediate predecessor(s) of an activity is an activity (activities) that must be completed
immediately before the next activity can commence.
The earliest start time (EST) is the earliest that any activity can be started after all prior activities
have been completed.
The earliest completion time is the earliest time in which all activities in the network can be
finished after taking into account all activities that can run simultaneously.
Forward scanning through a network allows for the calculation of earliest start times for each
activity and the earliest completion time for the entire project.

with backward
The critical path is the path through the network along activities that cannot be delayed without
delaying the entire project and is identified by finding nodes in acritical path diagram where the
number in the triangle equals the number in thebox.
The latest start time (LST) is the time by which an activity must be started to avoid delaying the
entire project.
Float time (slack) is the maximum amount of time for which an activity can be delayed without
delaying the entire project.
Rules for network construction:
Rule 2. An activity must be represented by exactly one edge.
Backward scanning starts at the end node and moves backward through the network, subtracting
the time for each edge from the earliest start time of each succeeding node.
The earliest finish time (EFTX) for an activity X is equal to the earliest start time (ESTX) plus the
duration of the activity (TX).
Float time for X = LSTY ESTX TX, where activity Y directly follows activity X.
Crashing involves shortening the critical path to speed up the completion time of a project. This
results in a new critical path being formed.
network flow
The edges have quantities that indicate rates of flow, for example, litres per minute, cars per
second, people per hour and so on.
The starting node(s) is called the source, from which all flows commence.
The flow goes through the network to the end node(s) which is called the sink.
The flow capacity of an edge is the amount of flow which an edge would allow if it were not
connected to any other edges.
The flow capacity of the network is the total flow possible through the entire network.
663
The inflow of a node is the total of the flows of all edges leading into the node.
The outflow of a node is the minimum of either the inflow or the sum of the capacities of all the
edges leaving the node.
Excess flow capacity of an edge equals the flow capacity of an edge minus the flow into the edge.
A cut in a network diagram is a line drawn through a number of edges which stops all flow from
the source to the sink. Networks will have many (valid) cuts.
The value of a cut is the total capacity of the edges which are cut.
The cut with the smallest value is called the minimum cut.
Maximum flow = Minimum cut value
The inside of a cut is the side on which the source node lies.
The flow value of an edge, which heads back inside a cut, is excluded.
assignment problems
and bipartite graphs
664
Bipartite graphs have nodes that can be separated into two types supply and demand.
Allocation problems involve directing the flow from the supply to the demand. Each supply node is
directed to exactly one demand node.
An optimal allocation is one that generally minimises the cost (or time) for the flow. Sometimes it
maximises a quantity, such as score.
An allocation matrix has the source nodes as rows and the demand nodes as columns and is
(generally) a square matrix.
To determine optimal allocation:
Step 1a. Perform row reduction by finding the smallest number in each row, and subtracting this
number from all numbers in that row.
Step 1b. Attempt an allocation by covering all the zeros in the row-reduced matrix. Proceed to step
2 if the minimum number of lines equals the number of rows in the matrix.
Step 2b. List all possible allocations and determine the smallest total.
If step 1 fails to produce a possible optimal allocation, perform the Hungarian algorithm.
Step 2a. Perform column reduction.
Step 2b. Attempt an allocation as for row reduction. If it is not possible, proceed to step 3.
Step 3a. Find the smallest uncovered number from step 2b.
Step 3b. Add the smallest uncovered number to all covered numbers (twice at intersections).
Step 3c. Subtract the overall smallest number in the matrix from all numbers in the matrix.
Step 3d. Attempt an allocation as for row reduction. If it is not possible, repeat step 3. If it is
possible, proceed to step 4.
Step 4b. List all possible allocations and determine the smallest total.
To maximise a quantity in an optimal allocation, subtract all elements in the matrix from the largest
one first then proceed as if for a minimisation problem.
Chapter review
1 The two-stage pathway(s) from A to C in the directed graph shown is/are:
A
a ABC
b
C
d
e
AEBC
ADBC and ABC
ABC and ADC
ADC
m U lTip l e
C ho iC e
E
D
B
Questions 2 to 5 refer to the following table:

Activity
Time
12
11
13
24
A, C
11
D, B
21
2 Using the table above, the activities that come before activity E are:
a D and B
C A, B, C and D
e F
b A, D and B
d A, C and D
3 The correct diagram for the table above is:

a
A, 12
B, 11
E, 11
F, 21
A, 12
A', 0
C, 13
C
E, 11
F, 21
E, 11
F, 21
C', 0
D, 24
A, 12
B, 11
B, 11
C, 13
E, 11
F, 21
D, 24
A, 12
B, 11
A', 0
C, 13
e
C, 13
D, 24
A, 12
B, 11
E, 11
D, 24
F, 21
A'
C, 13
D, 24
4 The earliest start time for activity E is:

a 23
d 36
b 24
e none of these
C 37
5 The earliest completion time for the network is:

a 56
d 69
b 55
e 70
C 68
665
6 The times missing from the table below for activities B and C respectively are:
Activity
Activity time
Earliest
start time
Earliest
finish time
Float time
B
C
a 5 and 9
b 5 and 8
0
9
C 0 and 9
d 9 and 5
e 9 and 0
7 The source and sink, respectively, for the
network flow diagram at right are:

a V and U
b U and V
C S and V
d V and S
e R and S
R
2
5
V
3
35
27
31
24
more than 1 possible outflow
R
22
N
10
16
4
13
N
10
13
J
12
K
23
16
Q
17
16
L
N
4
10
O
3
2
P
14
13
K
23
17
16
Q
N
10
12
16
17
P
J
12
23
14
13
O
2
666
17
16
L
4
3
O
2
12
16
4
12
14
16
10
3
2
J
12
23
S
b
14
12
2
4
30
9 The diagram that shows the minimum cut is:

J
15
35
3
8 The outflow from node T is:

a
b
C
d
e
16
L
4
3
O
2
P
14
13
K
23
17
16
Q
10 Which of the following do not show valid cuts?

a a and c
b d and e
C a and d
d c only
e They are all cuts.
R
2
5
T
4
T
4
V
3
1
T
4
4
S
1
5
R
2
S
d
2
U
1
2
T
4
U
4
Questions 11 and 12 refer to the following matrix.
15 11 16 6
13 5 2 12
4 2 11 14
12 7 12 10
11 Which of the following is the row-reduced matrix for the matrix above?
a
9 5 10
11 3
2 0
5 0
d
9
10
12
e
6
11 3 2 10
2 2 9 12
7 5 5 5
12 After column reduction, the matrix is:

a
5 10
11 6 14 0
9 3 0 6
0 0 9 8
8 5 10 4
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
7
9
0
5
3
1
0
3
8
0
7
3
1
5
7
0
11 6 14 0
9 3 0 6
0 0 9 8
8 5 10 4
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
9 3
0 0
3 0
0 10
9 12
5 3
9 5 10
11 3
2 0
5 0
0 10
9 12
5 3
7 5 10
9 3 0 10
0 0 7 12
3 0 3 5
7 5 8
667
13 For the graph of flights between cities at right, which statement
Sydney
is not true?
Melbourne
a There are more flights leaving Melbourne and Brisbane
than there are leaving Sydney and Perth.
Brisbane
b Brisbane has the least flights leaving it.
C All destinations have the same number of flights arriving.
Perth
d Melbourne has twice as many flights leaving it as does Brisbane.
e Sydney has twice as many flights leaving it as does Brisbane.
Sh orT
anS Wer
Gold Coast
Canberra
Hobart
Adelaide
1 The hierarchy of a business is outlined by the directed network below, where each vertex represents an
employee.
A
F
C
A
means A manages C
a Determine which employees are dominant over employee D.

b Which employee has the greatest influence?
c Which employee has the least influence?
The following information relates to questions 2 to 5. The following precedence table has been
provided for the movement of stock within a store during a refit. The junior manager has been
given the task of planning the operation so that the total time taken by the project is at a minimum
and that staff are used most efficiently. All time is in hours.
Task
Time
Immediate
predecessor
A, B
D, G
F, J
2 Produce a network diagram from the information in the table.

3 Determine, by forward scanning, the earliest completion time for the refit.
4 Perform a backward scan and clearly show the critical path.
5 Copy the table, adding columns for earliest start, earliest finish and float times. Complete the table.
668
6 From the following flow table produce a network flow diagram.
From
To
Flow quantity
13
10
14
10
15
7 a Show the minimum cut on your diagram from question 6.

b Hence, state the maximum flow.
The table below is for use in questions 8 and 9.
From
To
Flow quantity
13
16
10
14
10
15
10
13
8 Draw the network flow diagram for the table above.

9 a Find the maximum flow.
b Show the minimum cut.
The following data refer to questions 10 to 13. A gymnastics team of four Annie, Beth, Consuela
and Dianelle has been selected. The team has been rated on four pieces of apparatus as follows:
Annie
Beth
Consuela
Dianelle
Vault Uneven Beam

5
7
5
6
10
10
7
5
3
7
8
8
Floor
9
7
8
9
10 Convert the table for a minimisation problem.

11 Perform a row reduction on the matrix.
12 Perform a column reduction on the matrix produced for question 11.
13 a Apply the Hungarian algorithm.
b Hence, state the optimum team make-up.
669
e x T ended
r e SponS e
1 The following network diagram was produced
12
by a manager of a construction project.

14
10
T
Unfortunately, he is not very competent
and has forgotten to write the times for
O, 4
U
5
S
the activities on the diagram.
5
0
12
P
S
He has also lost most of the
12
0
information from the original table
Q
V
that was used to produce the diagram.
M
Q
All the information thats left is in the
table on the next page. He has decided
R
W
5
14
that if he is to lose his job then you, as
5
14
his junior, will go too, unless you can
fill in the information missing from the diagram and the table.
24
24
Z
32
32
X
16
21
Activity
letter
Immediate
predecessor
P, Q
S, T
R, M
R, M
U, V
X, Y
Time
Earliest
start time
17
17
Latest
finish time
Float time
Copy the diagram and indicate the (one) critical path. Copy the table.
First complete the missing float time column in the table.
Complete the earliest start time column in the table.
Complete the latest finish time column in the table.
Now, complete the time column for each activity and put these times into your copy of the
diagram.
2 A Lepidoptera and Arachnid building is to be set up at the
Moths
zoo. The floor plan is shown at right.
Tour
The building is to be designed so that the people can
Entry
information
Butterflies
Butterflies
flow through in one direction only. Each doorway will
(Rainforest)
(Temperate)
open only one way and is designed to ensure that there
is no mixing of the exhibits.
Arachnids
Glow(Scorpions)
Arachnids
a Draw the doors leading from one section to the next,
worms
(Spiders)
(Caves)
Exit
clearly indicating in which direction they open. (The
entry and exit doors have been completed for you.)
a
b
c
d
e
670
An analysis of the times spent in similar exhibits in zoos in other cities has provided the following
table.
Section from
Section to
Arrival rate
Entry
Tour information
12
Tour information
Rainforest butterflies
13
Rainforest butterflies
Temperate butterflies
12
Moths
Glow-worms
Arachnids
Moths
Glow-worms
Glow-worms
Spiders
Spiders
Scorpions
Scorpions
Exit
12
b If the doors at the entry can be represented by an edge (A) with a capacity of 12, convert the
information given in the chart and plan to a network flow diagram using the letters A to J.
c Analyse the inflows, capacities and outflows and then describe what would happen to the number
of people in the Rainforest Butterflies room.

d i Draw the minimum cut.
ii State at what rate people should be admitted so that they can flow smoothly through the building.
3 Imagine it is the year 2031, and the Australian Democrats have won the Federal election with
71members in the House of Representatives and 29 Senators. The party has decided to do things
differently when it comes to selecting its top four officials, namely Prime Minister, Treasurer, Foreign
Minister and Speaker of the House. It will allow each of the 100 members of the caucus to elect them
according to the following rules:
i Anyone can nominate for all positions.
ii Members cast one vote for each position, but can pick a person for two or more positions.
iii The four winners will be selected so that the total number of votes received for the four positions
is a maximum.
There were five candidates in all Alice Anderson, Boris Bologna, Cristina Colokis, Daniel Davis
and Emily Eastwood and the results of the poll were:
A. Anderson
B. Bologna
C. Colokis
D. Davis
E. Eastwood
Prime Minister
48
1
8
2
41
Treasurer
35
10
35
9
11
Foreign Minister
31
5
31
15
17
Speaker
22
4
22
39
8
671
a Since there are five people and only four positions, what should be done to the matrix so that an
allocation algorithm can be applied?

b Since the problem requires a maximum total, what should be done next so that the allocation
algorithm can be applied?

Perform row reduction on your modified matrix.
Perform column reduction (if required) on your modified matrix.
Perform the Hungarian algorithm (if required) on your modified matrix.
Determine the optimal allocation.
Discuss the implications of the result in terms of candidates who got the most votes for a position
(for example, D. Davis for Speaker) actually getting the position.
h If your answer to part g was negative, discuss why this might have happened.
4 The network diagram below represents the flow of salmon up the main tributaries of a river system
during their spawning run, which leads from the estuary, E, to the lake, L. The figures represent the
number of fish that pass along each section of the system every hour.
c
d
e
f
g
A
51
31
16
10 19
F 88
B
Estuary, E
62
74
25
49
C
23
Lake, L
12
a Which are the source and sink nodes?

b Determine the inflow and outflow for all other nodes.
c Does a pattern exist between the inflows and outflows? If so, give a possible reason for the
pattern.
d Determine the flow capacity of the river network.
e Find the maximum flow for the network.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Practice
VCE exam
questions
Use StudyON to
access all exam
questions on this
topic since 2002.
diGiTal doC
doc-9518
Test Yourself
Chapter 15
672
ICT activities
Chapter opener
diGiTal doC
directed graphs and networks. (page 621)
15b
TUTorial
We 3 eles-1320: Watch a tutorial on forward scanning to determine
the earliest completion time. (page 628)
15C Critical path analysis with backward scanning

and crashing
diGiTal doC
WorkSHEET 15.1 doc-9516: Forward and backward scanning,
earliest completion time, critical paths and float times (page 647)
TUTorial
We 8 eles-1321: Watch a tutorial on creating a network,
completing a forward scan to determine the earliest completion
time, completing a backward scan to determine the critical path and
calculating float times for each activity. (page 638)
15d
network flow
diGiTal doC
WorkSHEET 15.2 doc-9517: Earliest completion time, minimum cuts
and maximum flow (page 654)
TUTorialS
We 12 eles-1322: Watch a worked example on creating a directed
network diagram with quantity flow from a table. (page 648)
We 15 eles-1323: Watch a worked example on finding the
minimum cut to determine the maximum flow. (page 650)
inTeraCTiViTY
Maximum flow int-0196: Use the interactivity to help consolidate your
understanding of minimum cuts and maximum flows in a directed
network. (page 647)
15e
assignment problems and bipartite graphs
TUTorialS
We 18 elels-1324: Watch a worked example on how to use a
bipartite graph to verify true/false statements. (page 656)
We 19 eles-1325: Watch a tutorial on determining the minimum
time for job completion. (page 657)
Chapter review
diGiTal doC
673
Answers CHAPTER 15
direCTed GraphS and
neTWorkS
6 a First: D, second: C, third: B and
0
1
2
3
exercise 15a
reachability and
dominance in directed networks
1 a i AD (1)
ii ABD, ABD, ACD,
ACD (4)
iii none possible
b i AD, AD (2)
ii ACD, AED (2)
iii ABED (1)
c i AD (1)
ii ABD, AED, ACD,
ACD (4)
iii ACED, ACED (2)
d i AD (1)
ii ABD, ACD, ACD,
AED (4)
iii ACED (1)
2 a A=
b A=
c A=
d A=
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
1
2
, A2 =
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
2
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
b A + A2 =
0
0
1
2
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
1
1
0 , A2 =
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1 , A2 =
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
1
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
2
0
1
1
0
0 , A2 =
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 1 0 2 0
0 0 0 1 0
b A + A2 = 2 3 0 4 1
0 0 0 0 0
1 2 0 3 0
Sum of the first row is 3, A is placed third.
Sum of the second row is 1, B is
placed fourth.
Sum of the third row is 10, C is
placed first (as it has the highest sum).
Sum of the fourth row is 0, D is
placed fifth.
Sum of the fifth row is 6, E is
placed second.
8 a C
b P
c Z
d E
9 D
10 a F
b A and C
c F, E, D, B and A/C
exercise 15b
1
2
3
4
Two-stage routes: L1BL2, L1AL2,

L1AL2 (3)
Three-stage routes: L1ABL2,
L1ABL2 (2)
6 routes overall.
4 a ABD
b DCA
c DCB, DCAB
5 a i OG
ii ORG
iii OCRG, OCOG, OSOG
b i none possible
ii RCS
iii RGOS, RCOS
c i none possible
ii SOR
iii SOCR

b D
b B, C, E, F, G
a B
a 23 minutes
ACF
a E
c A
b D
5 a
41
25
52
J, 11
D, 8
B, 15
A, 10
0
C, 12
10
G, 6
E, 10
22
Activity
letter
0
0
0
0
Sum of the first row is 0, A is

placed fourth.
Sum of the second row is 1, B is
placed third.
Sum of the third row is 3, C is
placed second.
Sum of the fourth row is 6, D is
placed first (as it has the highest sum).
7 a First: C, second: E, third: A, fourth: B
and fifth: D
3 One-stage routes: L1 L2 (1)
674
fourth: A
L, 8
M, 7
H, 10
35
K, 9
49
61
Immediate
predecessor
Time
B, F
18
Activity
letter
Immediate
predecessor
Time
10
15
12
10
25
D, E, F
D, E, F
10
11
H, L
9 a ADG
b Float (H) = 1, Float (J) = 3,
Float (E) = 1,
Float (B) = 10, Float (C) = 1,
Float (F) = 1
c Activity B can be delayed 10 minutes,
activity C can be delayed 1 minute,
activity E can be delayed 1minute,
activity F can be delayed 1 minute,
activityH can be delayed 1 minute,
activity J can be delayed 3 minutes.
10 a AFGJK
b M, L, H, C, E, B, D
11 a
F, 25
B
A
b 61 minutes
6
Activity
letter
Immediate
predecessor
Time
12
C, D
F
c
C
A
E
F
J
G
O
S
U V
Y
12 a
10 a, d
B, 20
D, 5
F, 5
A, 2
Activity Immediate
Float
letter predecessor Time time
A
3
2
B
4
0
C
6
2
D
A
7
2
E
B
8
0
F
B
5
4
G
C
12
2
H
C
2
3
J
D, E
11
0
K
F
10
4
L
G, M
3
2
M
H
9
3
N
J, K, L
6
0
G, 10
H, 12
C, 4
E, 3
b 49 minutes
exercise 15C
Critical path analysis with

backward scanning and crashing
1 Critical path = BD; Float (E) = 1 min,
Float (C) = 1 min, Float (A) = 1 min
2 Critical path = BFG; Float (C) = 3 h,
Float (E) = 5 h, Float (A) = 3 h,
Float (D) = 5 h
3D
4 a 31 days
b Critical path = ACEG
c The completion time is reduced to
28 days.
The critical path is not affected.
5D
6C
7 a Activity
letter
Activity
Collect
parts
12
Paint
frame
35
Assemble
brakes
Assemble
gears
Install
brakes
Install
seat
D
E
F
G
A, 5
16
B, 35
D, 20
A, 12
12
C, 16
18
14
A, 3
28
55
8C
9 28%
F, 5
b 28 h
B, 9
C, 2
13
G, 9
C, 10
H, 5
F, 9
10
P, 10
J, 7
D, 3
N, 6
19
19
M, 4
26
26
K, 5
L, 3
35
35
Q, 5
30
30
completion time is reduced to 34 days.

The critical path becomes CFHP.
18 a
10
10
A, 10
0
B, 8
6
17
C, 7
D, 6
E, 1
17
17
J, 8
D', 0 I, 7
G, 4
K, 5
24
F, 9 24
b ACIK
c Float (F) = 7
19 a
12
12
F, 3
16
D, 5
25
10
A, 15
24
X, 3
d When J is reduced to 5 days, the earliest
F, 2
29
29
E, 12
21
0
0
G, 3
21
21
E', 0
H, 4
J, 7
30
30
H, 18
G, 20
A, 12
21
18
14
16
E, 5
B, 4
18
13
85
11
13
85
H', 0
18
24
E, 1
15 a
A, 11
20
8
15
D, 7
11
F, 2
c 3 days
G'
B', 0
67
H, 2
C, 7
B, 5
G, 18
G', 0
20
18
27
E'
18
C, 6
12
15
D'
67
E, 12
G, 1
F, 5
47
12
12
B, 2
24
Critical path =
GOOG
E, 4
D, 4
16
H', 0
A, 4
24
12
F, 2
G'
47
C, 6
H, 2
G', 0
12
20
G, 18
E, 4
B, 2
G, 1
13
D, E
D, 4
A, 4
Float (C) = 2,
Float (F) = 2, Float (J) = 1
D, 20
12
J, 6
17
17
E, 12
G, 5
b 24 hours
c ADGHK
C, 16
12
16 a
K, 4
H, 3
12
c 85 minutes
d
E, 4
20
d Float (B) = 5, Float (E) = 5,
Final
assembly
B, 35
A, 12
F, 9
D, 7
B, 3
11
C, 4
Float (F) = 5, Float (D) = 2,

Float (G) = 2, Float (H) = 3
c Float (G) = 7, Float (H) = 4, Float (B) = 6

17 a 35 days
b CFJMQ
20
Immediate
predecessor Time
b 29
c BEJN
11 a
5
c BEEJ
d Float (A) = 2, Float (C) = 5,
B, 10
B', 0
C, 15
10
14
15
16
I, 8
F, 16
E, 11
D, 9
J, 13
K, 6
38
38
44
44
24
25
28
28
b AHIK
c Float (F) = 12
675
20 a C: A; F: C, D; EST G = 3; EST K = 14
b
C, 4
F, 3
A, 5
D, 4
B, 3
X, 8
G, 8
I, 4
From
To
Flow
capacity
J, 5
K, 7
E, 2
H, 9
c
d
21 a
c
e
ACXJ
Latest start time for H = 6
5 weeks
b 15 weeks
AEFI
d 3 weeks
A, E, F, I
f CDI, 14 weeks
exercise 15d
1 a
network flow
100
B
50
200
C
b
250
250
200
100
300
15
20
Q
G
676
From
A
A
A
B
C
C
D
D
From
A
A
A
B
B
C
D
D
ii
ii
ii
ii
8
2
No
Yes
Yes
No
7 a i
c 16
c 3
7
12
C
b i
To
B
C
D
E
B
E
C
E
Flow
capacity
4
5
3
3
2
4
2
6
To
B
C
D
E
C
E
C
E
Flow
capacity
4
5
3
3
2
4
2
6
250
250
200
300
100
100
20
15
ii 150
12
20 Q
d i
Q
12
cut 5 = 29
c Maximum flow = 20
7
9
N
5
10
6
O
ii Maximum flow = 18
d i
Q
120
95
60
N
60
110
25
25
145
45
45
ii 29
B
20
C
45
D
75
50
150
Freeway
E
50
80
F
G
45
100
Freeway
H
60
50
K
30
J
60
16 a There would be a traffic jam.

b The traffic should flow smoothly as the
inflow is less than the capacity of flows

leading from H.
17
ii 25
45
A
5
F
75
75
8 B
9 a Cut 2
b Cut 1 = 28, cut 3 = 28, cut 4 = 27
c Maximum flow = 24
10 a Cut 4
b Cut 1 = 25, cut 2 = 26, cut 3 = 24,
12
10
10
25
c i
50
25
11
15
V
c i
35
E
U
10
100
100
40
20
100
D
10
ii 300
50
55
b 10
d 22
200
Q
M
11
35
14
100
13
b i
6 a 10
c 18
b 16
b3
E
B
F
K
C
D
12
2 a 23
3 a 6
4 a i 250
b i 150
c i 24
d i 15
5 a
R
3
12
10
E
8
12
To
50
M
20
a i
From
V
c
B
B
C
12
Flow
capacity
100
11
12
13
14
B
20
C
40
45
D
75
150
Freeway
E
50
80
F
G
45
50
100
Freeway
H
60
50
K
30
J
60
exercise 15e assignment problems and

bipartite graphs
400
f1
Q
350
S
600
D
650
f2
11 a
A
p1
3000
4000
3
0
0
0
5
3750
S
5000
p2
2250
6000
C
p3
0
0
3
2
2
2
4
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
0
3
1
0
0
0
b Car 1
D1
Car 2
D2
Car 3
D3
Car 4
D4
Car 5
D5
6000
B
S
c i C1 D2, C2 D1, C5 D4,
D
B
E
4D
5 a
12 a
b
c
d
13 D
s1
A
30 000
s2
60 000
40 000
10 000
15 000
14 a
30 000
25 000
C
C
b
b Send 30 000 from S1 to A, 30 000 from
S2 to A, 10 000 from S2 to B, 5000 from

B to B, 5000 from B to C and 25 000
from C to C. (This may not be the
cheapest method.)
6B
7 a 7
b 15
c 61
8 a 1
C3 D3, C4 D5 or C1 D2,
C2 D1, C5 D4, C3 D5,
C4 D3
ii Total = $82 000
67 column reduction
24 Hungarian algorithm
36 column reduction
53 row reduction
c A
4
c 1
9 Answers will vary.

10 B
Mark
Functions
Nancy
Geometry
ChapTer reVieW
mUlTiple ChoiCe
1
4
7
10
13
D
C
D
A
D
2
5
8
11
1 a A and B
2
15 a T 3, U 1, V 4, W 2
b 175 minutes
K
L
M
N
A C
0 0
27 10
8 51
12 6
F G
0 41
9 0
5 0
7 0
b B
D, 8
(one possible result)
A, 3
c F
E, 1
F, 1
H, 3
13
K, 3
J, 4
14
D, 8
E, 1
5
5
A, 3
0
0
C, 4
D, 8
5
5
C, 4
23
K, 3
J, 4
16
13
13
E, 1
14
19
F, 1
H, 3
B', 0 G, 2
B, 5
20
F, 1
H, 3
B', 0 G, 2
B, 5
A 3, B 2, C 4, D 1
K
16 a L
M
N
A
A
E
A
C, 4
ii Total = 130 minutes
3
6
9
12
B', 0 G, 2
A C F G
18 0 11 41
45 10 20 0
26 51 16 0
30 6 18 0
C
D
E
C
ShorT anSWer
B, 5
d i A 2, B 3, C 4, D 1 or
Calculus
Louise
A, 3
0 10 10 30
40 0 0 40
30 20 20 0
0 60 20 50
0 0 0 20
50 0 0 40
40 20 20 0
0 50 10 40
Algebra
Ken Algebra, Louise Geometry,

Mark Functions, Nancy Calculus
d 71.5%
17 a V1 P2, V2 P4, V3 P1,
V4 P3 or V1 P3, V2 P4,
V3 P1, V4 P2
b Total = 48 km
D
3
Ken
9
11
20
20
K, 3
23
23
J, 4
16
16
Activity
Float Immediate
X
TX ESTX LSTY time predecessor
A
11
D
E
13
A, B
13
19
D, G
14
20
13
13
16
D, G
16
20
20
23
F, J
677
13
B
6 10
C
7 a
1
4
10
10
Q', 0
Q, 5
15
E
14
10
G
16
13
B
10
10
D
3
15
9 a The maximum flow is 33.

b
10
G
16
A
13
6
B
10
10
D
3
14
15
E
5
0
7
2
3
0
5
2
5
4
3
3
Annie
Beth
Consuela
Dianella
1
3
2
1
4
0
5
1
2
0
3
1
4
4
1
2
Annie
Beth
Consuela
Dianella
0
3
0
0
Vault Uneven Beam Floor
12
Annie
Beth
Consuela
Dianella
4
0
5
1
2
0
3
1
3
3
0
1
14
P, Q
12
14
S, T
12
17
12
14
R, M
14
17
R, M
14
21
16
24
U, V
17
24
X, Y
24
32
2 a
Moths
0
3
0
0
Annie
Beth
Consuela
Dianella
2
3
0
0
1
0
3
0
3
0
5
0
0
4
1
0
Butterflies
(Rainforest)
Arachnids
(Scorpions)
Arachnids
(Spiders)
b A F, B U, C V, D B or
A F, B B, C V, D U
D, 2
A, 12
B, 13
C, 12
candidate 0 votes for it.
A
B
C
D
E
F, 2
H, 6
I, 5
c The room would quickly become
crowded.
0
47
40
46
7
13
38
13
39
37
17
43
17
33
31
26
44
26
9
40
48
48
48
48
48
PM Treas FS Spkr Dummy
A
B
C
D
E
0
9
27
37
0
13
0
0
30
30
17
5
4
24
24
26
6
13
0
33
48
10
35
39
41
A
B
C
D
E
0
9
27
37
0
13
0
0
30
30
13
1
0
20
20
26
6
13
0
33
38
0
25
29
31

A
B
C
D
E
0
22
40
50
0
0
0
0
30
17
0
1
0
20
7
13
6
13
0
20
25
0
25
29
18
Glowworms
(Caves)
Dummy column)
D Speaker (its the only 0 in the
Speaker column)
E PM (its the only 0 in the row)
A Treasurer, C Foreign Secretary
or
C Treasurer, A Foreign Secretary
g PM not given to the top vote getter.
J, 12
Because of the tie between A and C,

either the Treasurer or the Foreign
Secretary not given to the top vote
getter.
G, 6
E, 4
I, 5 J, 12
f B Dummy (its the only 0 in the
Butterflies
(Temperate)
Exit
H, 6
in the matrix(48). The resultant matrix

is:
10
Tour
information
G, 6
E, 4
b Subtract each element from the largest
16
21
13 a
678
32
32
X, 3
Entry
C, 12
ii Five people per minute

3 a Add a dummy position, giving each
11
W, 2
14
14
Z, 8
10
17
17
V, 3
24
24
13
Y, 7
14
U, 3
12
12
Activity Immediate
Float
X
predecessor TX ESTX LSTY time
B, 13
F, 2
a Critical path = QQSMVYZ

b , c, d, e
13
12
14
M, 2
R, 3
5
5
5
5
D, 2
A, 12
S', 0
S, 7
P, 4
0
0
b The maximum flow is 19.

8
T, 4
O, 4
B
6 10
d i
exTended reSponSe
F
15
14
13
10
D definitely deserved Speaker, B

definitely deserved Dummy.
h Although apparently democratic, it
rewards candidates who are relatively

unpopular over the range of positions
(particularly candidate E ) who only
get a lot of votes for 1 position, and
punishes those (particularly candidate
A) who do get lots of votes across the
positions. One could argue, in this case,
that E got PM as she could do the least
damage in that job!
4 a Source = estuary, E; sink = lake, L

b
Node
Inflow
Outflow
A
B
C
D
F
G
51
87
49
31
108
23
47
74
48
29
88
20
c The outflow for every node is less than
the inflow. This may be due to the death

of some fish on their way upstream or
it may be due to the fish slowing down,
the further upstream they go.
d 162 fish/hour
e 119 fish/hour
679
Exam practice 6 CHAPTERS 1 4, 14 AND 15

Core and module 5 networks and decision
mathematics
m U lTip l e
C ho iC e
12 minutes
1 A sample is taken from a population with a mean of 102 cm and a standard deviation of 5.4 cm. What
percentage of values will be greater than 107.4 cm?

a 2.5%
b 5%
C 16%
d 32%
2 A complete graph has 6 vertices. The degree of each vertex would be:
a 3
b 4
C 5
d 6

one mark.
e 34%
e 7
The graph at right relates to questions 3 and 4.

3 For the graph above, which of the following is a Hamiltonian circuit?
B-A-C-D-F-E
C-A-B-E-B-C-D-F-E-D
D-F-E-D-C-A-B-C
A
B-C-D-E-F-B
A-B-E-F-D-C-A
C
4 For an Euler circuit to exist in the graph, an edge needs to be added
between which two vertices?
a D and B
b C and D
C C and F
d E and F
e A and D
5 The length of the minimum spanning tree for the graph shown is:
a 17
6
b 18
C 19
d 20
4
e 21
a
b
C
d
e
6 The maximum flow for the directed graph shown is:
2
4
3
4
12
8
17
6
19
Source
Sink
30
5
8
20
15
8
22
5
23
7 The matrix below is a cost matrix in an allocation problem. The optimal allocation is represented as:
a A4, B1, C3, D2
1 2 3 4
A 13 15 12 9
b A2, B3, C1, D4
B 7 11 14 10
C A4, B1, C2, D4
C 12 15 10 11
d A2, B1, C3, D4
D 13 15 11 8
e A3, B2, C1, D4
Total marks = 7
a
b
C
d
e
1 The network below shows the capacity, in 1000s of letters, of the mail network of a small town at different
stages.
a What is the maximum capacity of the network?
b Due to cutbacks, the edge between vertices 2 and 3 is removed from the mail network.
What is the new maximum capacity?
6
Source 1
16
ex Ten d ed
r eS p o n S e
30 minutes
[2 marks]
[1 mark]
7
4
10
7 Sink
3
5
Exam practice 6
681
2 The small town is serviced by four postal workers, Atsuko, Badra, Cassie and Dennis. The four postal
routes within the town are called 1, 2, 3 and 4. Atsuko, Badra, Cassie and Dennis want to be allocated
the routes that are closest to their homes to minimise their travelling distance home at the end of the
day. The bipartite graph below shows each of the four postal workers and their distances, in kilometres,
from the end of each of the four postal routes.
a Complete the allocation matrix depicting this information.
1 2 3 4
A 3
3
B
Atsuko
1
C
5
2
4
D
[1 mark]
b Allocate each of the postal workers to one route
0.5
2
Badra
so that the total distance travelled to begin the
2
3
routes will be minimised.
[2 marks]
4
c What is the longest distance any of the four need
1 4
to travel home at the end of their route?
[1 mark]
2
Cassie
1
0.5
2
2
Dennis
3 Cassies mail route covers the streets shown at right, where
the edges represent streets and the vertices represent

intersections.
a Cassie wants to cover each street exactly once.
Explain the features of the graph that show Cassie
this is possible.
b List a route that has Cassie cover each street
exactly once.
D
A
[1 mark]
[1 mark]
I
J
M
H
K
L
4 Denniss mail route has him visiting 7 major destinations,
represented by the vertices in the graph at right. Distances

are in kilometres.
a Find the shortest circuit, starting at G, that has
Dennis visiting each destination exactly once.
What is the length of this circuit?
[2 marks]
b What is the name of this type of circuit?
[1 mark]
A
3
4
8
2
D
2
E
5 The network at right shows the activities required to
diGiTal doC
doc-10196
Solutions
exam practice 6
682
process the mail, between getting posted and being

delivered. Times are in hours.
a List the immediate predecessors for
activity H.
[1 mark]
b Find the earliest start times for
activities E and H.
[2 marks]
c The critical path is A-B-D-G-H-K.
What is the minimum amount of time
processing the mail can take?
[1 mark]
Total marks = 16
C
4
4
2
3
5
E, 2
I, 2
D, 4
B, 3
A, 2
F, 1
C, 4
G, 3
K, 3
H, 2
J, 2
ChapTer 16
Matrices
diGiTal doC
doc-9519
10 Quick Questions
ChapTer ConTenTS
16a
16B
16C
16d
16e
16F
Matrix representation
Addition, subtraction and scalar operations with matrices
Multiplying matrices
Multiplicative inverse and solving matrix equations
Application of matrices to simultaneous equations
Transition matrices
16a
Units: 3 & 4
A matrix (plural matrices) is a rectangular array of numbers arranged in rows and columns. The numbers
in a matrix are called the elements of the matrix.
The matrix shown below has 3 rows and 2 columns. We say that it is a 3 2 rectangular matrix and its
order is 3 by 2.
2
A = 1
0
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
1
4
Capital letters will be used to represent matrices.

In general, a matrix with m rows and n columns is known as a m n matrix.
The elements in a matrix are referred to by the row and then by the column position.
The element in the second row and the first column of matrix A above is 1. This is represented as
a21 = 1 or the 2, 1 element.
In general, the elements of matrix A are referred to as ai j, where i refers to the row position and j refers
to the column position.
a11
a21
That is, A =
a31
a12
a22
a32
.
a13
a23
a33
.
a14
a24
a34
.

amn
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
See more
Watch
a video about
defining matrices.
for the matrix of order m n.
The 2, 1 element is a21 and the 3, 2 element is a32.
row, column and square matrices

A matrix with one row is called a row matrix or row vector.
B = 2 1 3 is a 1 3 row matrix.
A matrix with one column is called a column matrix or column vector.
2
C = 1 is a 3 1 column matrix.
3
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
ChapTer 16 Matrices
683
A matrix with an equal number of rows and columns is called a square matrix.
2
D= 1
E=
5
2
2
4
is a 3 3 square matrix.
2 is a 2 2 square matrix.
4
5
A square matrix that has non-zero elements on the main diagonal only is called a diagonal matrix.
7 0 0
F = 0 5 0 is a 3 3 diagonal matrix.
0 0 6
Two matrices are equal if they are of the same order and all corresponding elements are equal.
A
B
1
0 2 4 1
=
3 5 2
0 2 4
3 5
These two 2 4 matrices are equal as the corresponding elements are equal; that is, A = B as a11= b11 = 1,
a12 = b12 = 0 . . .
Worked example 1
For each of the following matrices, give the order and an appropriate name (if it can be
categorised). Where possible, write the 2, 1 element and the position of the number 3 in xi j form.
7 0 0
A = 2 1 3 , B = 0 5 0 , C =
0 0 3
, D = 1
2
3
Think
1 2 3
0 2 4
E
=
,
1
1 3 5
3 4
WriTe
A has 1 row and 3 columns of numbers.

(Therefore, no 2, 1 element exists.) The
number 3 is in row 1, column 3.
A is a 1 3 row matrix.
The number 3 is represented by a13.
B has 3 rows and 3 columns of numbers with

non-zero numbers only on the diagonal. The
element in row 2, column 1 is 0. The number
3 is in row 3, column 3.
B is a 3 3 diagonal matrix. The element in the 2, 1

position is 0 and the number 3 is represented by b33.
C has 3 rows and 1 column of numbers. The

C is a 3 1 column matrix. The element in the 2, 1

position is 1 and the number 3 is represented by c11.
D has 2 rows and 4 columns of numbers. The

D is a 2 4 matrix. The element in the 2, 1 position

is 2 and the number 3 is represented by d23.
E is not a matrix as all positions are not filled.
E is not a matrix.
Using matrices to store data

Matrices are useful for recording and storing bivariate data (data that depend on two categories). They
can also keep track of the coefficients of systems of numbers in a simple two-dimensional format. For
storing data, whether the data are organised in a row or column need not be specified; they are shown in
the same manner as the original data format.
684
Distances between 3 local townships

(kilometres)
Town A
Town B
Town C
Town A
23
17
Town B
23
43
Town C
17
43
0 23 17
23 0 43
17 43 0
Labelling convention is not important as the matrix
is simply being used to store data.
However, when performing mathematical processes using the data stored in matrices, the defining
of the rows and columns must follow formal conventions. Two common examples where the columns
and rows must follow a well-established convention are two-way frequency tables and simultaneous
equations.
Two-way frequency tables follow the convention of organising independent variable headings in the
columns and dependent variable headings in the rows.
Attitude Primary Secondary
Fewer
Same
29
More
33
36
Total
67
47
5 2
29 9
33 36
67 47
Simultaneous equations follow the convention of organising the variables into columns and the
coefficients into rows.
3x + 2y = 5 3
=
2x 6y = 2 2
2 x 5
y =
2
Matrices are usually presented without headings or labels on the rows and columns.
Worked example 2
a Generate a matrix to show the number of major country roads between
five nearby townships in the network at right.

b Generate a matrix to represent the following two-way frequency table for
party preferences of females and males.
Party preference
Female
Male
Labor
18
12
Liberal
16
11
Total
34
23
c Generate a 2 2 matrix to represent the information provided in the following scenario. Omit
the totals from your matrix.

In a survey, 139 women and 102 men were asked whether they approved or disapproved of a
proposed freeway. Thirty-seven women and 79 men approved of the freeway.
Think
a 1 Set up a blank 5 5 matrix. Thus, there are 25entries
inside the matrix. Label the rows and columns for

accuracy.
WriTe
1 2 3 4 5
1
2
3
4
5
ChapTer 16 Matrices
685
Consider vertex 2. It is connected to itself once and

vertices 1, 4 and 5 once each. Put a 1 in the corresponding
columns of row 2 (shown in red) and in the corresponding
rows of column 2 (shown in black).
Note: Some elements, such as m12 and m21, will have
been previously filled.
1 0 1
1 1 0 1 1
0 0 0 0 0
1 1 0
1 0
1
2
3
4
5
1 0 1
1 1 0 1 1
0 0 0 0 0
1 1 0
3
1 0 3
1
2
3
4
5
1 2 3 4 5
Remove the labels to complete the matrix. Check your

result by comparing the entries in the matrix with the
original network representation. This is best done on
a vertex-by-vertex basis.
may label the rows and column but remember to remove

them in your final answer. Record the independent
variable, the respondents gender, in the columns and the
dependent variable, party preference, in the rows.
1
2
3
4
5
1 2 3 4 5
1
1
1 1
1 1
1 1
1 2 3 4 5
Vertex 5 has all its connections already entered, as they

were considered in previous steps, so complete the matrix
by placing a 0 in all unoccupied places, indicating no
connections between the vertices.
c 1 Set up a 2 2 matrix to record the data. For accuracy, you
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
Vertex 4 is connected to vertices 1 and 2 once. This was

recorded in previous steps. Vertex 4 is also connected to
vertex 5 three times, so put a 3 in elements m45 and m54
(shown in red).
labels removed.
1
2
3
4
5
1 2 3 4 5
Vertex 3 is not connected to any other vertex, so fill in

column 3 and row 3 with zeros (shown in red).
b Set up a 3 2 matrix and record the data as shown with
686
1 2 3 4 5
Consider vertex 1. It is connected to vertices 2 and 4 once

each, so put a 1 in the corresponding columns of row 1
(shown in red) and in the corresponding rows of column 1
(shown in black).
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0 1 0
0 1 1
0 0 0
0 0 3
0 3 0
0 1 0
0 1 1
0 0 0
0 0 3
0 3 0
b 18
12
16 11
34 23
approve
disapprove
m f
We know that, of the 139 females, 37 approved of the

freeway and the remainder (139 37 = 102) disapproved
of the freeway. Enter this information into m12 and m22.
We also know that, of the 102 males, 79 males approved
of the freeway and the remainder (102 79 = 23)
disapproved of the freeway. Put thisinformation into m11
and m21. Remove any labels on the rows or columns to
complete the matrix.
approve
disapprove
f
37
102
79 37
23 102
Matrices are not just useful for storing data. They can be added, subtracted, multiplied (but not divided)
and generally manipulated to extract greater information from the data. For example, we can use
matrices to quickly calculate percentages in the two-way frequency table used in the previous worked
example. This will be examined more closely later in the chapter.
exercise 16a
1 We1
i
ii
iii
For each of the following:

state the order and type of the matrix
where possible, write the 2, 1 element
state the position of the number 3 in xij form.
3
0
3
1
2
2
0
b 0
2
1 0
2 1
0 3
c
1 4 2
3
d 3
2 State the a21 element in each of the matrices given.

a
b
1
5
30
5 1
6 3
0.5
2.0
3.7
2
3
5
6
9 2 5

5 4 2
12 3 0
1
2
0 2 4
0.2 0.5 3.1 2.9

3.5 2.1 0.1 0.8 x
3
1
e 3 1 2
3 For each of the matrices given in question 2, state the ones in which x32 exists.
4 mC The value of a21 in the matrix at right is:
a 3.6
C 0.5
e 2.4
B 1.6
d 0
2.4 3.6
1.6
1.6
0
2.5 2.4
0.5
5 mC The number 3 in the following matrix can be represented using the notation:
a a23
C a22
e none of these
B a32
d a12
2
1
1
2
2 1
0 0
3 2
5 4
ChapTer 16 Matrices
687
6 Using the values 0 and 1 only, state the 4 4 diagonal matrix.

7 We2a The figure shown represents the number of routes between four towns.
B
A
D
C
Represent the possible routes as a 4 4 matrix in the following form.

Number of
routes to
Number of
routes from
8 We2b Represent the following two-way frequency table as a 3 3 matrix.
Rent preference
Live independently
Share with friends
Total
Men
12
9
21
9 Represent the final score at an AFL match as a matrix.
Geelong
Carlton
Goals
15
12
Women
23
16
39
Behinds
10
15
Total
35
25
60
Points
100
87
10 The following information represents the goods to be delivered from a warehouse to individual
suppliers.
To supplier A:
To supplier B:
To supplier C:
5 bicycles
7 bicycles
15 bicycles
12 helmets
2 helmets
7 helmets
6 tyres
15 tyres
0 tyres
Present the information as a matrix with the suppliers placed in the columns.
11 Represent the following coordinates of Cartesian points as a 4 2 matrix.
(3, 2), (4, 1), (4, 1), (4, 1)
addition, subtraction and scalar

operations with matrices
16B
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
addition and subtraction
Concept:
Matrices can be added or subtracted by applying the usual rules of arithmetic on corresponding elements
of the matrices. It follows that:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
688
1. Addition and subtraction of matrices can be performed only if the matrices are of the same
order.
2. Addition and subtraction of matrices is performed by adding or subtracting corresponding
elements.
Worked example 3
Given the following matrices

2
A=
3
1 6
2
3
, B =
, C =
8
2
4
2
find, if possible:
a A+B
b B+A
c BC
4
2
5
, D =
5
4
Think
a 1 A and B are both of the same order 2 2, so
they can be added.

2
Add the numbers in the corresponding

positions of each matrix.
2
2
3
,
d BA
e D C.
WriTe
2
3
a A+B=
4 1 6
+ 8 2
2 +1
=
3+8
4+6
2+2
3 10
=
11 0
b 1 B and A are both of the same order 22, so
they can be added.
Add the numbers in the corresponding

1 6 2
+
8 2 3
b B+A=
1+ 2 6 + 4
=
8+3 2+ 2
3 10
=
11 0
c The subtraction cannot be performed since the
order of B is 2 2 and the order of C is 2 3.
c B C cannot be calculated since B and C are
of different orders.
1 6 2

8 2 3
d Subtract the numbers in the corresponding positions d B A =
of each matrix as B and A are of the same order.
1 2
64
=
83 2 2
= 1
5
e 1 D and C are both of the same order 23, so
they can be subtracted.
Subtract the numbers in the corresponding

5
4
e DC=
5 2
=
4 4
3
=
0
3 2

4
2
2
23
2 2
3 1
25
3
2
Notice in parts a and b that the resulting matrices are both the same. In general, A + B = B+A when A
and B are of the same order; that is, matrix addition is commutative. Try this for other matrices. Using
the matrices from above, try A B. What do you notice about B A and A B?
ChapTer 16 Matrices
689
Scalar multiplication
As we have seen in arithmetic, repeated addition can be more efficiently calculated using multiplication.
For example, 2 + 2 + 2 = 3 2.
1
5
A similar approach applies to matrices. Consider the matrix A =
.
2
4
To find the addition of A + A + A, the simplest approach is to find 3A. This is achieved by multiplying
each element of A by 3.
1
A+A+A=
4
5 1
+
4
1+1+1
=
4+4+4
5 1
+
4
1
3A = 3
4
31
35
=
3 4 3 2
5+5+5
2+ 2+ 2
3 15
3 15
=
=
6
6
12
12
In the term 3A, the number 3 is called a scalar, and the term 3A is an example of scalar multiplication of
matrices.
Scalar multiplication applies to matrices of any order. The scalar quantity can be any number
positive or negative, fraction or decimal, real or imaginary. This can be generalised asfollows.
a11
a21
c
a
31
.
a12
a13
a14
a22
a23
a24
a32
a33
a34
... c a11

... c a21
=
... c a31
.
amn
c a12
c a13
c a14
c a22
c a23
c a24
c a32
c a33
c a34
...
...
...
c amn
When a matrix is multiplied by a scalar, each element in the matrix is multiplied by the scalar. The order
of the matrix remains unchanged.
Worked example 4
Given the following two matrices

3 6
2 6
A=
and B = 1 3 ,
1 3
calculate:
a 2A
b 0.4B
c 3A + 4A
Think
a Multiply each element of A by 2.
1
3
d A+ B
e 3(A + B).
WriTe
2 6
1 3
a 2A = 2
22 26
=
2 1 23
b Multiply each element of B by 0.4.
4 12
6
3 6
b 0.4B = 0.4
1 3
2
0.4 3 0.4 6
=
0.4 1 0.4 3
1.2 2.4
=
0.4 1.2
690
c 1 3A + 4A simplifies to 7A.
2
c 3A + 4A = 7A
2 6
7A = 7
1 3
Multiply each element of A by 7.
14 42
=
7 21
1
3
d 1 Find B by multiplying each element of B
by
1
.
3
1
B
3
1 3 6
=3
1 3
3
3
6
3
1
3
3
3
1 2
= 1 1
2 6 1 2
1
A + 3B =
+ 1
1 3 3 1
Complete the addition by adding A to 13 B.
e 1 Find the sum of A and B.
3 8
2
4
3
2 6 3 6
A+B=
+
1 3 1 3
5 12
=
0 6
Multiply this matrix by 3.
5 12
3(A + B) = 3
0 6
15 36
=
0 18
proper ties of addition of matrices

The following list is a summary of properties of addition of matrices. These properties hold true when
A, B and C are m n matrices, k and c are constants and O is a zero or null matrix (a matrix with all
elements equal to zero).
Property
Commutative (does not matter which order the matrices are operated on)
Associative (does not matter where the brackets are placed)
Example
A+B=B+A
(A + B) + C = A + (B + C)
(k c) A = k (c A)
Identity
A+O=A=O+A
Inverse
A + A = O = A + A
Distributive
k A + k B = k (A + B)
k A + c A = (k + c) A
Note: For subtraction, matrices do not obey the associative or the commutative laws.
For example, A B B A and (A B) C A (B C).
ChapTer 16 Matrices
691
Simple matrix equations

To solve an algebraic equation such as 4x 3 = 5
1. add 3 to both sides to obtain 4x 3 + 3 = 5 + 3 or 4x = 8
2. divide both sides by 4 (or multiply by 1 ) to obtain x = 2.
4
Simple matrix equations that require the addition or subtraction of a matrix or multiplication of a scalar
can be solved in a similar way.
Worked example 5
Solve the following matrix equations.

Units: 3 & 4
20 15
5 0
a 5E =
AOS:
Topic:
c If A =
Concept:
Think
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
12
2
3
b D+
7 2
=
2 1 5
2 6 and B = 3 6 , find C if 2C + A = 3B.
1 3
1 3
WriTe
a 1 To get E by itself, multiply both sides by 1 .

5
20 15 5
5 0 12
a 5E =
E=
TUTorial
eles-1326
Worked example 5
20 15 5
5 0 12
4 3 1
E=
1 0 2.4
Simplify the matrix E.
2
b 1 To get D by itself, subtract
3
from both sides.
1
5
2
3
bD+
7 2
=
2 1 5
7 2 2
D=

1 5 3
2
c 1 First solve algebraically to get C by itself.
D=
Simplify the matrix D.
Find the value of 3B A.
5 6
2 3
c C + A = 3B
2C = 3B A
1
C = 2 (3B A)
9 18 2 6
3B A =

3 9 1 3
7 12
=
4 6
Multiply this by 2 to solve for C.
1 7 12
C=2
4 6
3.5 6
=
2 3
The matrix operations involving addition, subtraction and scalar multiplication can be applied to practical
situations such as stock inventory, price discounting and marking up of store prices.
692
Worked example 6
A retail chain of three stores has an inventory of three models each of televisions and DVD players,
represented as matrices as follows. The first column represents the televisions and the second
column represents the DVD players. Each row represents a different model.
12 21
Store A = 5 12 , Store B =
3 7
23 32
Store C =
8 15 ,
1 11
5 17
2 12
0 14
a If the third row represents the most expensive models, which store has the most models of
expensive televisions?
b Give the matrix that would represent the total stock of televisions and DVD players for all
three stores.
The wholesale price (in dollars) of each model of television and DVD player is presented in the
following matrix.
100 30
250 80
400 200
c If the wholesale prices are marked up by 50%, calculate the recommended retail prices.
d Store C wishes to have a sale. If it discounts all retail prices by 10%, represent the discounted
prices as a matrix.
Think
a The first column represents the
WriTe
a Store A has the greatest number of expensive televisions.
televisions and the third row represents

the most expensive model (a31). Store A
has 3 expensive televisions, Store B has
1 expensive television and Store C has
0 expensive televisions.
b The total stock of televisions and DVD
players for all three stores is given by

the sum of the three matrices. Add the
matrices and simplify.
b Total inventory = A + B + C
12 21 23 32 5 17
= 5 12 + 8 15 + 2 12

3 7 1 11 0 14
12 + 23 + 5 21 + 32 + 17
= 5 + 8 + 2 12 + 15 + 12
7 + 11 + 14
3 + 1 + 0
40 70
= 15 39
4 32
c 1 A mark-up of 50% represents
150% of the wholesale prices.

2
Multiply each element of the

wholesale price matrix by 1.5
(150%).
d 1 A discount of 10% represents 90%
of the retail price.
c 50% + 100% = 150%
100 30
150% of 250 80
400 200
= 1.5
100 30
250 80
400 200
150 45
= 375 120
600 300
d 100% 10% = 90%
ChapTer 16 Matrices
693
150 45
90% of 375 120 = 0.9
600 300
Multiply each element of the retail

price matrix by 0.9 (90%).
150 45
375 120
600 300
135
40.5
= 337.5 108
270
540
addition, subtraction and scalar

operations with matrices
exercise 16B
Given the following matrices
1 We3
3
1 5
0
A=
, B =
2
5
3
2
calculate, if possible:
a A+B
b A+A
2
1
, C =
3
4
5 0
, D =
3 3
3
c BC
2
2
2
,
d BA
Use the matrices from question 1 to show that

b ABBA
a A+B=B+A
e D C.
c D C C D.
3 mC The solution to F E, given the matrices
E=
1.2
3.6
3.5
1.0 0
1.2 2.5
3.5 1.1
1.0
d 1.2
3.5
0.5
5.0
2.2
0.2
and F = 2.4
0
2.5
1.1
2.5 is:
1.1
0.5
1.4
6.0
3.5
1.0
1.0
1.2
3.5
1.0
7.5
3.3
1.0
C 1.2
3.5
2.5
1.1
1.0
2.5
1.1
4 The cost price (C ) and sale price (S ) of four items at an electrical appliance store are given as follows.
C = [23.50 45.00 87.50 140.00]
S = [49.50 135.00 169.00 299.95]
Calculate and show as a matrix, the profit made on the sale of these four items.
5 We 4 Given the following two matrices
4 8
4 5
A=
and B =
,
2 6
1 2
calculate:
a 3A
c 2A + 3A
b 0.1B
d A + 4B
e 2(A + B)
1
2 (3A
1
2 (C
B).

6 Given the following two matrices
4 6
0
2
3
4
3 0
2
3
2 2
8
5 1
use a CAS calculator to evaluate the following:
C=
1
2
1
2
1
3
2
0
1
1
0
4
2
3
5
a 4C
694
2
1
1
1
1
2
3
1
0
1
and D =
0.1D
c 3C 3D
1 2
1 3
1
1 ,
1 10
1 0
d 2(D + 3C)
3D).
7 We 5 Solve the following matrix equations.
24 42
6 0
a 6E =
12
1 5 6 2
=
4 2 8 5
b D+
4 8
4 5
and B =
, calculate C if 2C + A = 4B.
2 6
1 2
c If A =
8 The order of five matrices is given as follows
A = 3 2, B = 2 3, C = 3 2, D = 3 3 and E = 3 2.
Which of the following cannot be calculated?
a 0.3C
b D+A
c 2C 3A
d 2(E + 3C)
e
1
2 (A
3B)
A+CE
9 We 6 A car dealership has three new car sales centres where they stock three models each
of 4-wheel-drives and sedans, represented as matrices as follows. The first column represents
the 4-wheel-drives and the second column represents the sedans. Each row represents a different
model.
7 16
Centre A = 5 8 , Centre B =
2 4
13 12
8 15 , Centre C =
3 1
14 7
12 12
9 4
a If the third row represents the most expensive models, which centre has the most models of
expensive sedans?
b Give the matrix that would represent the total stock of 4-wheel-drives and sedans for all three
centres.
The wholesale price (in dollars) of each model of 4-wheel-drives and sedans is presented in the
following matrix.
20 000 13000
25000 18000
40 000 28000
c If the wholesale prices are marked up by 100%, calculate the recommended retail prices.
d Centre B wishes to have a clearance sale. If it discounts all retail prices by 10%, represent the
discounted prices as a matrix.

10 The percentages of households in a township that own no pets
is 25%, households with one pet is 40%, those with two pets
is 20% and more than two pets is 15%.
a Set up a 1 4 matrix to represent the percentage
ownership of pets.
b Write an equation that will enable you to
calculate the number of households
for each category, given that there
are 800 households in the town.
c Evaluate the number of households
for each category as a 1 4 matrix.
11 Explain why the following matrix equation
has no solution.
4 8 24 42
4 5
3
2A +
=
2 6 6 0
1 2
12
6
ChapTer 16 Matrices
695
12 A student has kept records of her test results in
matrix form. In semester 1, for English tests she

got 72%, 76% and 81% and for Further Maths tests
she got 84%, 68% and 82%. In semester 2, for
English tests she got 78%, 76% and 89% and for
Further Maths tests she got 74%, 77% and 85%.
a Write the semester results in two separate
3 2 matrices.
b State the matrix equation that would give the
average for each test of the two subjects.
c Calculate the average result from the two
semesters and present it as a 3 2 matrix.
13 a Place the following football teams total season
score in a suitable matrix format.
Away games total score:
154 goals 214 behinds 1138 points
Home games total score:
207 goals 180 behinds 1422 points
b Present the average game score for away
games and home games as a suitable matrix.
There are 11 away games and 11 home games.
14 The stock on hand (S) of items in a warehouse
is summarised as a matrix as follows:
S=
diGiTal doC
doc-9520
WorkSHEET 16.1
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Do more
Interact
with multiplying
matrices.
23
35
45
32
77
150
210
230
700
420
112
145
130
230
160
5 1090
4 800
8 1200
4 400
7 850
a For the companys plans to reduce costs, complete the following matrix equation if the new stock
levels are to be set at 40% of the current stocks.

New stock level (N ) = __________ of current stock levels (matrix __________)
= __________ __________.
b Evaluate the new stock levels and display as a matrix. (Round answers to the nearest whole number.)
15 Use a CAS calculator to store three 3 2 matrices as A, B and C (they can contain any numbers).
Check to see whether the following are true.
a A+B=B+A
b AB=BA
c (A B) C = A (B C)
d 3A + 3B = 3(A + B)
16C
multiplying matrices
In the previous section, we discussed the multiplication of a matrix by a scalar. In this situation, each
element of the matrix is multiplied by the scalar, and the order of the matrix remains unchanged. Now
we wish to investigate the multiplication of a matrix by another matrix.
The multiplication rule

Two matrices can be multiplied if the number of columns in the first matrix is equal to the number of
rows in the second matrix. Consider the following matrix multiplication
1
1 2 3
2 4 5 2
3
696
2 3 4
0 1 6
4 0 8
The number of columns in the first matrix is 3 and the number of rows in the second matrix is3. It is
possible for these two matrices to be multiplied. A way to remember this is to write the order of each
matrix beside each other as shown.
2334
The order of the first matrix is 2 3 and the order of the second matrix is 3 4. If the two inner numbers
(shown in bold) are the same, it is possible to multiply the matrices. If they are not the same, then it will
not be possible to multiply the matrices.
The resulting matrix will be of order 2 4 the outer two numbers in the multiplication shown
above.
If matrix A is of order m n and matrix B is of order n p, then A B exists and its order is m p.
The following matrix multiplication is not possible because the number of columns in the first matrix
is not equal to the number of rows in the second matrix.
1
2
2 3
1 2 3
0 5
2 4 6
4 2
3323
The two inner numbers are not the same.

The following example shows how two 2 2 matrices are multiplied. (The resulting matrix will be of
order 2 2.)
5 7
1 2
3 4 6 8
Each row of the first matrix is multiplied by each column of the second matrix:
r1c1 r1c2
1 5 + 2 6 1 7 + 2 8
gives
r
c
r
c
2
1
2
2
35+ 46 3 7+ 48
5 + 12 7 + 16
and simplified as follows:
15 + 24 21 + 32
17 23
=
39 53
As long as the number of columns in the first matrix is equal to the number of rows in the second matrix,
the method highlighted above can be used to multiply the matrices.
The procedure is repeated for two 3 3 matrices as shown below.
b11 b12
b21 b22
b31 b32
a11 a12
If A = a21 a22
a31 a32
a13
a23
a33
and B =
a11 a12
A B = a21 a22
a31 a32
a13
a23
a33
b11 b12

b21 b22
b31 b32

b13
b23
b33
b13
b23
b33
, then
a11 b11 + a12 b21 + a13 b31 a11 b12 + a12 b22 + a13 b32
= a21 b11 + a22 b21 + a23 b31 a21 b12 + a22 b22 + a23 b32
a31 b11 + a32 b21 + a33 b31 a31 b12 + a32 b22 + a33 b32
a11 b13 + a12 b23 + a13 b33

a21 b13 + a22 b23 + a23 b33
a31 b13 + a32 b23 + a33 b33
The rows of the first matrix are multiplied by the columns of the second matrix.
When preparing to multiply two matrices, the order of the resultant matrix should be established first.
ChapTer 16 Matrices
697
Worked example 7
Given three matrices

2
1 4
,
A=
B
=
1
3
0
1
3 2
, C = 4 1 ,
a write the order of the three matrices

b find which of the following products exist
i AB
ii AC
c write the order for the products that exist
d calculate the products that exist.
iii BA
Think
iv CA
WriTe
a 1 Matrix A has 2 rows and 2columns.
a Matrix A is a 2 2 matrix.
Matrix B has 3 rows and 2columns.
Matrix B is a 3 2 matrix.
Matrix C has 2 rows and 2columns.
Matrix C is a 2 2 matrix.
i AB is the product of a 2 2 and a 32 matrix.
i AB does not exist.
The inner numbers arenot the same, so AB does

not exist.
ii AC is the product of a 2 2 and a 22 matrix.
ii AC exists.
The inner numbers arethe same, so AC does

exist.
iii BA is the product of a 3 2 and a 22 matrix.
iii BA exists.
The inner numbers arethe same, so BA exists.

iv CA is the product of a 2 2 and a 22 matrix.
iv CA exists.
The inner numbers are the same, so CA exists.

c Identify the order of the products that exist by looking
at the two outer numbers.
ii
Multiply the rows of matrix A by the columns

of matrixC.
The order of AC is 2 2.
The order of BA is 3 2.
The order of CA is 2 2.
1 4
3 2
0
4 1
ii AC =
3
1 3 + 4 4 1 2 + 4 1
=
3 3 + 0 4 3 2 + 0 1
iii
Simplify AC.
Multiply the rows of matrix B by the columns

of matrixA.
Simplify BA.
19 6
=
9 6
2
iii BA = 1
1
1 4
3 0
4
2 1+1 3
2 4 +1 0
= 11+ 2 3 1 4 + 2 0
3 1 + 4 3 3 4 + 4 0
5 8
= 5 4
15 12
698
iv
Multiply the rows of matrix C by the columns

of matrixA.
3 2 1 4

4 1 3 0
iv CA =
3 1+ 2 3 3 4 + 2 0
=
4 1+1 3 4 4 +1 0
2
Simplify CA.
9 12
=
7 16
The identity matrix

In Worked example 7, you would have noticed that the results of the multiplication of AC and CA did not
produce the same answer. It can be said that matrix multiplication is not commutative.
In general, for two matrices A and B, AB BA.
However, there is one exception where a matrix multiplication is commutative. The following
situation demonstrates this.
1 0
1 4
Let A =
and B = 0 1
3
5
1 4
AB =
1 0
3 5
0 1
11+ 4 0 1 0 + 4 1
=
3 1+ 5 0 3 0 + 5 1
1 0 1 4
BA =

0 1 3 5
11+ 0 3 1 4 + 0 5
=
0 1+1 3 0 4 +1 5
1 4
1 4
=
=
3 5
3 5
Look closely at matrix B. A square matrix with the number 1 for all the elements on the main diagonal
and 0 for all the other elements is called an identity matrix. The identity matrix can only be defined for
square matrices; that is, for matrices of order 1 1, 22, 3 3, 4 4 and so on. The identity matrix is
commonly referred to as I.
From this, it can be stated that AI = IA = A. The identity matrix I acts in a similar way to the number 1
when numbers are being multiplied (for example, 2 1 = 1 2 = 2).
AI = IA = A where A is a square matrix and I is the identity matrix of the same order as A.
proper ties of multiplication of matrices

The following list is a summary of properties of multiplication of matrices. These properties hold true when
A, B and C are m n matrices, I is an identity matrix and O is a zero or null matrix (a matrix with all elements
equal to zero).
Property
Example
Associative
(AB)C = A(BC)
Identity
AI = A = IA
Distributive
(A + B)C = AC + BC
C(A + B) = CA + CB
Zero matrix
AO = O = OA
Worked example 8
Soundsmart has three types of televisions priced at $350, $650 and $890 and three types of
DVD players priced at $69, $120 and $250. The store owner wishes to mark up the prices of the
televisions by 12% and mark down the prices of the DVD players by 10%.
a Show the prices of the televisions and the DVD players as a suitable matrix.
b Show the matrix obtained by marking up the prices of the televisions by 12% and marking
down the prices of the DVD players by 10%.
c Use matrix multiplication to calculate the new prices (to the nearest dollar).
ChapTer 16 Matrices
699
WriTe
Think
a 350
a Place the televisions and the DVD
players in columns and the prices inthe

rows. This results in a 32matrix.
b 1 A 12% mark-up is equivalent to
112% or 1.12. A markdown of

10% is equivalent to 90% or 0.9.
We need to multiply the first
column of the price matrix from
a by 1.12 and multiply the second
column by 0.9. This is a diagonal
matrix.
c 1 Multiply the two matrices to
calculate the new prices. The order

of the first matrix is 32 and the
order of the second matrix is 2 2.
The resulting matrix will be of
order 3 2.
69
650 120
890 250
b 12% + 100% = 112%, 100% 10% = 90%
1.12
0
0 0.90
350
69
120
890 250
c New prices = 650

0
1.12
0 0.90

350 1.12 + 69 0 350 0 + 69 0.9

= 650 1.12 + 120 0 650 0 + 120 0.9
890 1.12 + 250 0 890 0 + 250 0.9

392 62.1
= 728 108
996.8 225
Round the answers to the nearest

dollar.
The marked-up prices for the three types of televisions will

be $392, $728 and $997. The marked-down prices for the
three types of DVD players will be $62, $108 and $225.
Worked example 9
The number of desktop and notebook computers sold by four stores is given in
the table below.
Store A
Store B
Store C
Store D
Desktop
10
4
5
3
Notebook
4
5
10
2
TUTorial
eles-1327
Worked example 9
If the desktop computers were priced at $1500 each and the notebook computers at $2300 each,
use matrix operations to find:
a the total sales figures of each computer at each store
b the total sales figures for each store
c the store that had the highest sales figures for
i desktop omputers
c
ii total sales.
700
Think
a 1
WriTe
Set up a 4 2 matrix to represent the sales figures a Sales matrix =
and a 2 2 matrix to enable us to determine the
total sales of each computer at each store.
10 4
4 5
,
5 10
3 2
1500
0
price matrix =
2300
0
2
Multiply the two matrices. The resultant

matrix displays the total sales of each
computer at each store.
Total sales figures at each store

10 4
1500
0
= 4 5
0
2300
5 10
3 2
b 1 Use the 4 2 sales matrixfrom part a and a
2 1 column matrix to calculate the total

sales figure for each store.
1500
2300
b Matrix to determine the total sales =
Total sales =
Multiply the matrices. The resultant matrix

displays the total sales at each store.
Note: A CAS calculator can be used to
perform the multiplication.
i Examine the matrix from part a. The highest
i Store A has the highest sales figure for
desktop computers: $15 000.

ii Store C has the highest total sales figure:
with the highest total sales figure is the row

with the highest number.
exercise 16C
10 4
1500
4 5

5 10
2300
3 2
24 200
17500
=
30500
9100
The total sales figure for store A was $24 200,
store B was $17 500, store C was $30 500 and
store D was $9100.
sales figure for desktop computers is the highest

number in the first column.
ii Examine the matrix from part b. The store
9200
6000 11500
7500 23000
4500
4600
15000
$30 500.
1 We 7 Given three matrices
2 4
2 2 0
0 2
A=
, B =
and C =
1 4
5
3 3
3
3
a write the order of the three matrices
b find which of the following products exist
i AB
ii BA
iii AC
iv CA
c write the order of the products that exist
d calculate the products that exist.
v BC
vi CB
ChapTer 16 Matrices
701
4 5
1 3
and N =
For M =
, show all working and find the following products:

3 2
2 1
a MN
b NM.
1
0
3
For M = a b and N =
, show all working and find the following products:
c
d
0 1
a MN
b NM
c Explain why MN = NM (from parts a and b above), but MN NM in question 2.
2
4 mC If A = B C, then the element a31 is the result of:

a multiplying the third row by the first column
C multiplying the third column by the first row
e multiplying the third row by the first row
B multiplying the first row by the third column

d multiplying the first column by the third row
5 mC Use the following matrices to answer question 5.
4 1
1 4
1
2 3 1
3 1
1 2 3 4
,
A=
, B = 3 0 , C =
D = 0 5 2 , E =
2
5
1
4
5
0 1 1 4
2 1
3 6 3
a Which one of the following products does not exist?
a AB
B BC
C CA
d DE
e CE
b The order of the matrix BE is:
a 34
B 22
C 43
d 32
e 24
c Which of the following products gives a matrix of order 2 2?
a BA
B BC
C CA
d AB
e BD
d The matrix CE is:
3 2
7 9
1 5 0 16
2 9 1 28
a
B
C
3 7 8 16
8
1
5
12
13
28
16 28
2 3
9 7
3 7 8 16
d 1
e
2 9 1 28
28 16
e The matrix D2 is:
4 30 12
a 6 37 16
12 60 24
4 30 6
6 37 4
6 24 24
4 30 6
4
C 6 37
0 24 24
4 30 6
d 6 37
4
6 24 24
4 2 30 30 6 12
e 6
6 37 24 4 8
6 12 24 36 24 12
6 Simplify the expressions below for the matrices
2 4
A=
, B =
3 3
a 2A + AB
1
4 5
0 2
3
3 2 , C =
, and D =
2 1
3
b A(B + C)
c AB + CD
d BA + DC
e 2DB D.
7 We8 A supermarket has three types of apples priced at
$2.50, $3.50 and $4.00 per kilogram and three types of

avocados priced at $0.90, $1.90 and $2.50. The manager
wishes to mark up the prices of the avocados by 15% and
mark down the prices of the apples by 15%.
a Show the prices of the apples and avocados as a
suitable matrix.
b Show the matrix obtained by marking down the prices of the apples by 15% and marking up the
prices of the avocados by 15%.
c Use matrix multiplication to calculate the new prices (to the nearest cent).
702
8 A sports store has four types of tennis racquets priced at $25.00, $35.00, $95.00
and $140.00 and four types of footballs priced at $9.90, $19.90, $75.00 and
$128.00. The manager wishes to mark down the prices of all items by 20% in
preparation for a sale.
a Show the prices of the tennis racquets and footballs as a suitable matrix.
b Show the matrix obtained by marking down the prices by 20%.
c Use matrix multiplication to calculate the sale prices (to the nearest ten
cents).
9 We9 The number of pies and cans of soft drinks sold to four year-level groups
at the canteen on a particular day is given in the table below.

Year
Year 12
Year 10/11
Year 8/9
Year 7
Pies
10
25
22
5
Soft drinks
26
45
30
22
If the pies were priced at $2.50 each and the soft drinks at $1.00 each, use matrix operations to find:
a the total sales figures of each food item for each year-level group
b the total sales figures for each year-level group
c the year-level group that had the highest sales figures for
i pies
ii total sales.
10 Four golf shops, A, B, C and D are supplied with boxes of different brands of golf balls (Longer,
Higher, Further and Straighter) as shown in the table.

Shop
Shop A
Shop B
Shop C
Shop D
Longer
12
15
10
8
Higher
10
25
10
20
Further
10
15
10
5
Straighter
12
25
10
18
The cost of the golf balls, per box, is:

Longer: $15
Higher: $20
Further: $30
Straighter: $32
a Present the stock of golf balls for the four shops as a 4 4 matrix.
b Write the costs as a matrix.
c Use matrix multiplication to determine the total value of each golf ball brand at each shop.
d Calculate the total value of golf balls at each shop.
11 The sales figures (in dollars) for three months, at three stores, of three brands of mobile phones are
shown in the following tables.

February
Store A
Store B
Store C
Mobile A ($)
600
480
240
Mobile B ($)
500
750
1000
Mobile C ($)
0
840
0
March
Store A
Store B
Store C
Mobile A ($)
1200
840
1200
Mobile B ($)
1000
1500
1750
Mobile C ($)
420
1260
0
April
Store A
Store B
Store C
Mobile A ($)
1440
600
1560
Mobile B ($)
750
1500
250
Mobile C ($)
1680
2100
420
ChapTer 16 Matrices
703
a Write a matrix to represent the sales figures for each month.

b Use a suitable matrix operation to show the total sales figures ($) for the three months by store
and mobile phone brand.

c If brand A mobile phones cost $120, brand B mobile phones cost $250 and brand C mobile
phones cost $420, use an appropriate matrix operation to calculate how many mobile phones of
each brand were sold in total by each store, for the three months.
d Calculate the total sales for each store for the three months.
12 The Fibonacci numbers are a part of an interesting sequence of numbers that have been the focus of
a great deal of study over the years. The first 12 numbers of the sequence are presented in the table
below.
Term
10
11
12
Number
13
21
34
55
89
144
The matrix 1 1 can be used to find terms of the Fibonacci sequence.

1
0
1 1
a Let A =
and complete the following calculations on a CAS calculator.
1 0
ii A3
iii A4
iv A5
i A A, that is, A2
b Study each of the answers found in part a carefully. How do the elements in each answer and the
power in the question relate to the Fibonacci numbers?

Using your finding from part b (that is, without performing any calculations) what will be the
elements in the matrix A8?
d Use a CAS calculator and matrix methods to find the 30th Fibonacci number.
c
2 1 4
3 2 and the matrix product AX =
1 1 0
B 23
C 32
13 mC If A = 0
a 33
5 8
1 2 , then the order of matrix X is:
7 3
d 22
e 11
14 mC A matrix of 3 3 order is the product of three matrices S, E and N in that order (S E N).
2 1 4
If matrix E is E = 0 3 2 then the order of matrix N is:
1 1 0
a 32
B 23
C 33
d 22
e Not enough information. Need order of matrix S
inTeraCTiViTY
int-0197
Solving matrix
equations
multiplicative inverse and

solving matrix equations
16d
Recall from arithmetic that any number multiplied by its reciprocal (multiplicative inverse) results in 1.
1
For example, 8 8 = 1.
Now, consider the matrix multiplication below.
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
704
2 3
3 5

5
3
2 5+ 3 3 2 3+ 3 2
=
2 3 5 + 5 3 3 3 + 5 2
1 0
=
0 1
Notice that the answer is the identity matrix (I).
This means that one matrix is the multiplicative inverse of the other. In matrices, we use the symbol
A 1 to denote the multiplicative inverse of A. A must be a square matrix.
If AA 1 = A 1A = I, then A 1 is called the multiplicative inverse of A.
Finding the inverse of a square 2 2 matrix

In matrices, we are often given a square 2 2 matrix and are asked to determine its inverse. The
following notes display how this is achieved.
a b
Let A represent a matrix of the form
.
c d
1. Swap the elements on the main diagonal and multiply the elements on the other diagonal by 1. This
results in the matrix
2. Multiply this matrix by
d
c
.
a
1
ad bc
ad bc ad bc
d
a
c a
ad bc ad bc
Note: The value of ad bc is known as the determinant of matrix A. It is commonly written as det A or A .
A 1=
ad bc
Worked example 10
Calculate the determinants of the following matrices.
A= 3
2
4 B = 6 3 and C = 4 8
3 6
2 2
Think
1
a b
For a matrix of the form
, the
c d
determinant is given by ad bc.
Calculate the determinant for each of the
three matrices.
WriTe
det A = ad bc
det A = 3 3 4 2
= 17
det B = 6 2 3 2
=6
det C = 4 6 8 3
=0
Singular and regular matrices

Notice that the determinant of matrix C in Worked example 10 was 0. For any matrix that has a
determinant of 0, it is impossible for an inverse to exist. This is because 10 is undefined. A matrix with a
determinant equal to 0 is called a singular matrix.
If the determinant of a matrix is not 0, it is called a regular matrix.
Worked example 11
3 5
If A =
, find its inverse, A 1.
2 4
Think
1
Calculate the determinant of A. (If the

determinant is equal to 0, the inverse will
not exist.)
TUTorial
eles-1328
Worked example 11
WriTe
det A = ad bc
=3452
=2
ChapTer 16 Matrices
705
Use the rule to find the inverse. That is,

1 d b
A 1=
. Swap the elements

ad bc c a
on the main diagonal and multiply the
elements on the other diagonal by 1.
1
.
Multiply this matrix by
ad bc
A 1=
4
2
Note: Fractional scalars can be left outside the

matrix unless they give whole numbers when
multiplied by each element.
For matrices of a higher order than 2 2, for example, 3 3, 4 4, and so on, finding the inverse
(and determinant) is more difficult and a calculator is required.
Fur ther matrix equations

Recall from algebra that to solve an equation in the form 4x = 9, we need to divide both sides by 4
1
9
(or multiply both sides by 4 ) to obtain the solution x = 4 .
A matrix equation of the type AX = B is solved in a similar manner. Both sides of the equation are
multiplied by A 1. Since the order of multiplying matrices is important, we must be careful of the
position of the inverse (remember that the products of AX and XA are different).
Solving for X in the following situations:
1. For AX = B
A 1AX = A 1B
Pre-multiply by A 1
since A 1A = I
IX = A 1B
1
since IX = X
X=A B
2. For XA = B
Post-multiply by A 1 XA A 1 = B A 1
XI = B A 1
since A A 1 = I
1
since XI = X
X=BA
In summary:
1. If AX = B, then X = A 1B
2. If XA = B, then X = B A 1
Worked example 12
For the given matrices
A=
solve for the unknown matrix X if:
16
2 5
and B =
3
3
13
.
a AX = B
b AX =
Think
WriTe
a 1 We are required to pre-multiply by A 1 to get
matrix X by itself.
2
Find A 1. First calculate the determinant. Then

swap the elements on the leading diagonal
of A and multiply the elements on the other
diagonal by 1.
AX = B
A 1AX = A 1B
X = A 1B
det A = ad bc
= 2 3 5 1
= 11
1
1 d
A =
ad bc c
=
706
1 3
11 1
X=A 1B
1 3
=
11 1
Write the equation to be solved and substitute

in the matrices.
Calculate the product of A 1 and B. Multiply

each element by the fractional scalar as they
will all result in whole numbers.
1 33
11 22
= 3
2
b 1 We are required to pre-multiply by A 1 to get
matrix X by itself.
16

2 3
44
11
13
AX =
1
13
A 1AX =
1
13
X=A 1
1
Use A 1 from part a. Calculate the product of
A1
13
and . Multiply each element by the
1
fractional scalar.
1 3
11 1
13

2 1
1 44
11 11

= 4
1
multiplicative inverse and solving

matrix equations
exercise 16d
1 We10
Calculate the determinants of the following matrices.
9 8
a A=
7 5
1
2
b B=
1
1
6
1
3
5 9
8 3
c C=
d D=
3 6
2 4
2 State which matrices from question 1 will not have an inverse. Explain your answer.
9 5
, find its inverse, C 1.

5
3
4 Calculate the inverse matrix for each matrix (where possible) in question 1.
3 We11 If C =
5 Given the two matrices below, show that A and B are inverses of each other.
11 12
A=
and B =
10 11
6 mC If T =
4 2
4 3
3
2
2
5
11

10
12
11
1
2 3
, then T is equal to:
2 5
1 5
4 2
1 5 3
4 2 2
5
2
ChapTer 16 Matrices
707
12
7 mC If P =
12
1
2
1
6
1
2
1
4
0.3
0.5
1
4
, then P could be:
0.2
0.5
1
4
1
6
1
2
1
2
1
4
1
6
1
2
1
2
1
20
1
30
1
10
1
10
0.1 0.2
:
0.25 0.45
8 For the matrix
a calculate the determinant
ad
bc
b state the inverse in the form

c
ad bc
ad bc
.
a
ad bc
b
9 Use a CAS calculator to find:

i the determinant
ii the inverse matrix
for each of the following matrices.

5
6
a A=
b B=
0.4 1.0
0.2 0.25
d D=
e E=
4 6 8
g G= 6 4 6
8 6 4
h H=
6
2
5
10
12 8 0 4
8 4 8 8
4 12 8 12
8 4 4 8
5 3
7 4
c C=
0.3 0.48
F=
0.5 0.8
I=
0 1 3 4
2 0 3 4
2 1 0 4
2 1 3 0
1 4
J= 5 3
6 3
10 We12 For the given matrices
5 0
3
5 5
,B= 6
A=
and C =
3
3 6
0 6
3
solve for the unknown matrix X if:
a AX = B
4
3
11 If F =
b XA = B
0.2
3
and G =
0.1
708
a FX =
c XC = A
1.2
, solve the following matrix equations.
2.8
1.0
2.9
b GX =
100
.
120
d CX =
application of matrices to
simultaneous equations
16e
When solving equations containing one unknown, only one equation is needed. The equation is
transposed to find the value of the unknown. In the case where an equation contains two unknowns, two
equations are required to solve the unknowns. These equations are known as simultaneous equations.
You may recall the algebraic methods of substitution and elimination used in previous years to solve
simultaneous equations.
Matrices may also be used to solve linear simultaneous equations. The following technique
demonstrates how to use matrices to solve simultaneous equations involving two unknowns.
Consider a pair of simultaneous equations in the form:
ax + by = e
cx + dy = f
The equations can be expressed as a matrix equation in the form AX = B
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
a b x e
c d y = f
e
x
a b
is called the coefficient matrix, X = y and B = f .
where A =
c d

Notes
1. A is the matrix of the coefficients of x and y in the simultaneous equations.
2. X is the matrix of the pronumerals used in the simultaneous equations.
3. B is the matrix of the numbers on the right-hand side of the simultaneous equations.
As we have seen from the previous exercise, an equation in the form AX = B can be solved by
pre-multiplying both sides by A 1.
A 1 AX = A 1B
X = A 1B
Simultaneous equations are not just limited to two equations and two unknowns. It is possible to have
equations with three or more unknowns. To solve for these unknowns, one equation for each unknown is
needed.
Simultaneous equations involving more than two unknowns can be converted to matrix equations in a
similar manner to the methods described previously.
Let us consider an ancient Chinese problem that dates back to one of the oldest Chinese mathematics
books, The Nine Chapters on the Mathematical Art.
There are three types of corn, of which three bundles of the first, two of the second, and one of the
third make 39 measures. Two of the first, three of the second and one of the third make 34 measures.
And one of the first, two of the second and three of the third make 26 measures. How many measures of
corn are contained in one bundle of each type?
This information can be converted to equations, using the pronumerals x, y and z to represent the three
types of corn, as follows:
3x + 2y + 1z = 39
2x + 3y + 1z = 34
1x + 2y + 3z = 26
(Note the importance of lining up the pronumerals on the left side and the numbers on the right side.)
As was the case earlier with two simultaneous equations, this system of equations can also be written
as a matrix equation in the form AX = B as follows:
3 2 1
2 3 1
1 2 3
x 39
y
= 34
z 26
X can be solved by pre-multiplying both sides of the equation by A 1. As the order of A is greater than
(2 2), a CAS calculator should be used to find the inverse (A 1). Try to solve this problem for yourself
after reading the following worked example.
ChapTer 16 Matrices
709
Worked example 13
a Solve the two simultaneous linear equations below by matrix methods.
2 x + 3y = 13
5 x + 2y = 16
b Use matrix methods to solve the following system of equations.
x 2y + z = 2
2x + 3y = 3
2x z = 4
Think
WriTe
a 1 Write the simultaneous equations as a matrix equation
in the form AX = B. Matrix A is the matrix of the

coefficients of x and y in the simultaneous equations, X
is the matrix of the pronumerals and B is the matrix of
the numbers on the right-hand side of the simultaneous
equations.
2 3 x 13
5 2 y = 16

Matrix X is found by pre-multiplying both sides by A 1.
Calculate the inverse of A.
AX = B
X = A 1B
det A = 2 2 3 5
= 11
1 2 3
The inverse (A 1) is 11
5 2
X = A 1B
Solve the matrix equation by calculating the product
of A 1 and B and simplify.
11
2
5
13

2 16
22
11
33
2
=
3
5
Equate the two matrices and solve for x and y.
Write the answers.
b 1 Use the information from the equations to construct
a matrix equation. Insert a 0 in the coefficient matrix

where the pronumeral is missing.
The solution to the simultaneous

equations is x = 2 and y = 3.
b
1
2
3
0
1
0
1
x
y
=
z
1
To solve, premultiply both sides by the inverse of the

coefficient matrix.
x
y =

z
Use a calculator to evaluate the right-hand side.
x 0
y =
1
z 4
Interpret the results and answer the question. You can

double-check your answer by substituting these values
into the original equations.
The values of the pronumerals are

x = 0, y = 1 and z = 4.
710
x 2
y =
3
1
2
2
3
0
1
0
1
Remember that if the determinant of a matrix equals zero, the inverse will not exist. When this
happens there will not be a unique solution (i.e. one solution) for the system of simultaneous equations.
It means there is either no solution (i.e. the equations dont intersect) or there are infinite solutions (the
equations draw the same line).
Worked example 14
Use a matrix method to decide if the simultaneous equations have a unique solution.
i 2x y = 8
ii 2x + 4y = 12
x+y=1
3x + 6y = 8
Think
i 1 Write the simultaneous equations as a
matrix equation in the form AX = B.
WriTe
AX = B
x 8
=
1 y 1
Find the determinant of the matrix A.
det A = ad bc
= (2 1) (1 1)
= 2 1
=3
Write the answer.
Since det A 0, a unique solution can be found.
ii 1 Write the simultaneous equations as a
matrix equation in the form AX = B.
AX = B
ii
2 4 x 12
3 6 y = 8
Find the determinant of the matrix A.
det A = ad bc
= (2 6) (3 4)
= 12 12
=0
Write the answer.
Since det A = 0, a unique solution cannot be found.
Matrix mathematics is a very efficient tool for solving problems with two or more unknowns. As a result, it
is used in many areas such as engineering, computer graphics and economics. Matrices may also be applied
to solving problems from other modules of the Further Mathematics course, such as break-even analysis,
finding the first term and the common difference in arithmetic sequences and linear programming.
When answering problems of this type, take care to follow these steps:
1. Read the problem several times to ensure you fully understand it.
2. Identify the unknowns and assign suitable pronumerals. (Remember that the number of equations
needed is the same as the number of unknowns.)
3. Identify statements that define the equations and write the equations using the chosen pronumerals.
4. Use the matrix methods to solve the equations. (Remember, for matrices of order 3 3 and higher, use
a CAS calculator.)
Worked example 15
A bakery produces two types of bread, wholemeal

and rye. The respective processing times for each batch
on the dough-making machine are 12 minutes and 15
minutes, while the oven baking times are 16 minutes and
12minutes respectively. How many batches of each type
of bread should be processed in an 8-hour shift so that
both the dough-making machine and the oven are fully
occupied?
ChapTer 16 Matrices
711
WriTe
Think
1
Identify the unknowns and choose a suitable

pronumeral for each unknown.
We need to determine the number of batches

ofwholemeal bread and the number of batches of
rye bread.
Let x = the number of batches of wholemeal bread.
Let y = the number of batches of rye bread.
Write two algebraic equations from the given

statements. All times must be expressed in
the same units. (8 hours = 480 minutes)
12x + 15y = 480

16x + 12y = 480
Write the simultaneous equations as a matrix

equation in the form AX = B.
AX = B
12 15 x 480
16 12 y = 480
Solve the matrix equation to find the values

for x and y.
x
y =

=
1 12
96
16
480
12 480
15
1 1440
96
1920
15
=
20
5
Write your answer, relating the pronumerals

to the original problem.
x = 15 and y = 20. To fully utilise the dough-making

machine and the oven during an 8-hour shift,
15 batches of wholemeal bread and 20batches of
rye bread should be processed.
exercise 16e
Solve each of the following matrix equations.
2 3 x 2
=
3 5 y 2
7 x
y =
5

15
21
2
4
3 x 13
y =
5
15
1
3
x 10
=
5 y 21
2 We13 Solve the following simultaneous linear equations by matrix methods.

x + 2y = 0
+ 7y = 65
b 3x + 2y = 9
c
+ 6y = 15
6x + 4y = 22
6x + 14y = 2
d 4x y = 3
e x + y = 12
f 6x + 2y = 30
3x y = 1
x + 4y = 36
2x y = 10
g Use a CAS calculator and matrix methods to solve the following system of equations.
2x + y + 4z = 17
3x y = 3
x + 4y + 5z = 7
3x
9x
3 Use a CAS calculator to solve the following matrix equations.
a 3
1
712
1 4
0
4 5
x 17
y =
3
z 7
2 1 1
b 1 1 2
1 2 1
x 22
y = 18

z 20
c 1
1
d 1
1
x 6
y = 2

z 3
3
3
2
2
x
y =

z
15
6
20
4 We14 Use a matrix method to decide whether the simultaneous equations have a unique solution.
a 2x + 2y = 4
b x 3y = 4
3x
2x
+ y = 14
c 6x + 9y = 17
2x + 3y = 6
+ 6y = 12
d x + 2y = 5
2x
+y=2
5 mC For the system of simultaneous equations:
x 2z = 1
x + y 3z = 2
3x 2y + z = 6
a the coefficient matrix is:
a 0
3
0
0
1
1
1
3
1
2
3
1
0
3
1
0
1
3
0
B 1
3
1
1
2
d 1
3
0
1
3
1
b the solution matrix is:
3
2
a

1
1
2
B

3
1
3
C

2
3
1
d

2
e there is no solution
6 Consider the following two pairs of simultaneous linear equations.

i 6x + 2y = 4
a
b
c
d
e
ii
1
x
2
3
x
2
y=3
9x + 3y = 14
3y = 9
Write each pair of simultaneous equations as a matrix equation in the form AXB.
Calculate the determinant for both coefficient matrices.
Find the solution for each pair of simultaneous equations. What do you notice? Suggest a reason
for this.
Transpose the two equations in i into y = mx + c form and graph them both on a CAS calculator.
How do these graphs relate to your answer from part c?
Transpose the two equations in ii into y = mx + c form and graph them both on a CAS calculator.
How do these graphs relate to your answer from part c?
7 Consider the pair of simultaneous equations:
y = 2x + 3
y=x+1
a Transpose the equations so that they are in the form ax + by = c.
b Write the simultaneous equations as a matrix equation in the form AX = B.
c Solve the matrix equation, writing the solution in coordinate form.
ChapTer 16 Matrices
713
8 Solve the following set of simultaneous equations using matrix methods on a CAS calculator.
2a 3b + 6c + 2d = 16
2b + 4c d = 3
a b c d = 4.5
0.1a + 0.4b 0.6c + 1.2d = 3.1
9 Consider the following problem studied by the Babylonians. (Note: We have substituted square
metres, instead of square yards, as the units of area.)

There are two fields whose total area is 1800 square metres. One produces grain at the rate of
2
3
of
a bushel per square metre while the other produces grain at the rate of 1 a bushel per square metre. If
2
the total yield is 1100 bushels, what is the size of each field?
Use matrix methods to solve the problem.

10 The sum of two numbers is 79 and their difference is 25. Find the two numbers by setting up two linear
simultaneous equations and solving them using matrix methods.

11 An arithmetic sequence has the fifth term equal to 13.5 and the twelfth term equal to 31. To find the
first term, a, of this sequence and the common difference, d, the following two equations can be used:
a + 4d = 13.5
a + 11d = 31
Use matrix methods to find the first term and the common difference for this arithmetic sequence.
12 We15 At a car spray-painting company, each car receives two coats of paint, which have to be completed
within one day. There are two types of cars that this company spray paints sedans and utilities.
The times are displayed in the following table.
Stage of painting
Sedan
Utility
Total time available for each stage
1st coat
5 minutes
7 minutes
140 minutes
2nd coat
9 minutes
8 minutes
183 minutes
To fully utilise the companys time, how many sedans and utilities should be planned for in a day?
13 mC In an alternative to the scoring for Australian Rules, a team gains g points for a goal and b
points for a behind. In a recent match, Geelong obtained 69 points for scoring 7goals and 3 behinds
and Collingwood obtained 113 points for scoring 11 goals and 7behinds.
a Which of the following matrix equations describes the scoring in this game?
a
7 3 b 69
11 7 g = 113

7 3 b 113
11 7 g = 69

e None of these
714
7 3 g 113
11 7 = 69
11 7 g 113
=
7 3 b 69
b The number of points awarded for each goal is:

a 6 points
B 7 points
C 8 points
d 9 points
e 10 points
14 The cost (in dollars) of manufacturing electronic components, d, is related to thenumberof components
produced, n, by the formula d = 6000 + 2.5n. The revenue, d (in dollars), generated from selling n
components is given by the formula d=4.5n 8000. Use matrix methods to calculate the number of
components that need to be manufactured so that the manufacturing cost and revenue are equal.
15 The table below displays the attendance numbers and the box-office takings for the first three shows of
a new stage play.

Show
First
Second
Third
Adults
40
50
30
Children
20
15
0
Pensioners
5
15
40
Box-office takings ($)

945
1165
800
Use matrix methods and a CAS calculator to calculate the ticket prices for adults, children and
pensioners.
16 Use matrix methods to find two numbers, where twice a number plus three times another number is
166 and the sum of the two numbers is 58.

17 A factory produces two different models of transistor radios. Each model requires two workers to
assemble it. The time taken by each worker varies according to the following table.
Worker 1
Worker 2
Model A
5 minutes
5 minutes
Model B
18 minutes
4 minutes
360 minutes
150 minutes
Maximum time available for each worker
a Use matrix methods to calculate how many of each model should be produced so that each worker
is used for the total time available.

b If the company makes $2.50 on each model A sold and $4.00 on each model B sold, what is the
maximum amount of revenue from the sales?

18 The sum of the first 15 terms in an arithmetic sequence is 633 and the 30th term is 187.4. To find
the first term, a, of this sequence and the common difference, d, the following two equations can
be used
15a + 105d = 633
a + 29d = 187.4
Use matrix methods to find the first term and the common difference for this arithmetic sequence.
16F
diGiTal doC
doc-9521
WorkSHEET 16.2
Transition matrices
Andrei Markov was a Russian mathematician whose name is given to a

technique that calculates probability associated with the state of various
transitions (which can be represented in matrix form). It answers
questions such as, What is the probability that it will rain today given
that it rained yesterday? or What can be said about the long-term
prospect of rainy days?
Units: 3 & 4
powers of matrices
Throughout this section, it will be necessary to evaluate a matrix
raised to the power of a particular number, for example M 3. Only
square matrices can be raised to a power, asthe order of a non-square matrix does not allow for
repeated matrix multiplication. For example, a 2 3 matrix cannot be squared, because using the
multiplication rule, we see the inner two numbers are not the same (2 3 2 3).
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
ChapTer 16 Matrices
715
Worked example 16
For the given matrices
eleSSon
eles-0052
Transition matrices
0.6 0.1 0.3

0.7 0.4
0.81 0.6
A=
and C = 0.3 0.6 0.1
,B=
0.3 0.6
0.19 0.4
0.1 0.3 0.6
use a CAS calculator to:
a evaluate i A3 ii B2 iii C 0
b evaluate C 40, expressing the matrix in whole numbers multiplied by a fractional scalar.
Think
i Enter matrix A in your calculator and raise it
WriTe
to the power of 3.
A3
0.7 0.4
=
0.3 0.6
= 0.583 0.556
0.417
0.444
ii Enter matrix B in your calculator and square it.
0.81 0.6
0.19 0.4
ii B2 =
0.7701 0.726
=
0.2299 0.274
iii Enter matrix C in your calculator and raise it
to the power of 0.
5.6 0.1 0.3
0
iii C = 0.3 0.6 0.1
0.1 0.3 0.6
1 0 0
= 0 1 0
0 0 1
b 1 Raise matrix C to the power of 40.
0.6 0.1 0.3
40 =
C
b
0.3 0.6 0.1
0.1 0.3 0.6
40
0.333333 0.333333 0.333333
= 0.333333 0.333333 0.333333

0.333333 0.333333 0.333333
Identify the fractional scalar common to each

element and place it outside the matrix to give
your answer using whole number elements.
C40
1 1 1
1
= 3 1 1 1
1 1 1
markov systems and transition matrices

A Markov system (or Markov chain) is a system that investigates estimating the distribution of states of
an event, given information about the current states. It also investigates the manner in which these states
change from one state (condition or location) to the next, according to fixed probabilities. Matrices can
be used to model such situations where:
therearedefinedsetsofconditionsorstates
thereisatransition from one state to the next, where the next states probability is conditional on the
result of the preceding outcome
716
theconditionalprobabilitiesforeachoutcomearethesameoneachoccasion;thatis,thesamematrix
is used for each transition
informationaboutaninitial state is given.
A Markov system can be illustrated by means of a state transition statement, a table or a diagram. The
following transition statements describe the movement of delivery trucks between two locations.
A group of delivery trucks transfer goods between two warehouses A and B. They start the day at
either warehouse and finish the day parked at one of them.
70% of the trucks that start at A will park at A that night and 30% will park at B.
60% of the trucks that start at B will park at B that night and 40% will park at A.
This is how the statements are represented as a table and as a diagram. (Inboth, the values have been
expressed as probabilities.)
Transition table
Transition diagram
0.3
Transition
TO
Transition FROM
Warehouse A Warehouse B
Warehouse
A
Warehouse
B
0.7
0.4
0.3
0.6
0.7
0.6
A
B
0.4
The statements, the table and the diagram all represent the same information. They can all be summarised
as a transition matrix as shown below. Throughout this section, the transition matrix will be denoted as T.
0.7 0.4
T=
0.3 0.6
Note that each of the columns of a transition matrix must add up to 1.
Worked example 17
Represent each of the following as a transition matrix.

a
0.68
0.32
TUTorial
eles-1330
Worked example 17
0.55
A
B
0.45
b There are a number of train carriages operating between two depots, North depot and South
depot. At the end of each week, 40% of the carriages that started at North depot end up at
South depot and 25% of the carriages that started at South depot end up at North depot.
Think
a 1 Identify there are two states, A and B. Enter the
WriTe
values in the correct manner; that is, from the

column to the row. 0.32 from A to A and 0.68 from
A to B. 0.55 from B to B and 0.45 from B to A.
2
b 1
Check that each column adds up to 1 and remove

any labels.
Identify there are two states, North depot and South
depot. Enter the given percentage probabilities in
decimal form.
The missing values can be calculated knowing the

columns must add up to 1. Remove any labels.
From
A
B
A 0.32 0.45
To
B 0.68 0.55
0.32 0.45
T=
0.68 0.55
From
North
South
North
0.25
To
South 0.40
0.60 0.25
T=
0.40 0.75
ChapTer 16 Matrices
717
distribution vector and powers of

the transition matrix
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
A distribution vector is a column vector with an entry for each state of the system. It is often referred to
as the initial state and is denoted by S0.
If S0 is a n 1 initial distribution vector state involving n components and T is the transition matrix,
then the distribution vector after 1 stage is the matrix product T S0.
Distribution after 1 stage: S1 = T S0
The distribution one stage later is given by
Distribution after 2 stages: S2 = T S1
= T (T S0)
= (T T ) S0
= T 2 S0
Similarly, the distribution after n stages can be obtained by premultiplying S0 by T, n times or
multiplying T n by S0.
Distribution after n stages: Sn = T Sn 1
= T n S0
The sequence of states, S0, S1, S2, . . . , Sn is called a Markov chain.
The new state matrix can be calculated using the formula Sn = T n S0, where Sn is the new state,
n transitions after the initial state, S0 or Sn = T Sn 1, where Sn 1 is the previous state.
applications to marketing
One common use for the above approach is in marketing, where organisations can predict their
share of the market at any given moment. Marketing records show that when consumers are able
to purchase certain goods for example, groceries from competing stores A and B, we can
associate conditional probabilities with the likelihood that they will purchase from a given store, or
its competitor, depending on the store from which they had made their previous purchases over a set
period, such as a month.
The following worked example highlights the application of transition matrices to marketing.
Worked example 18
A survey shows tthat 75% of the time, customers will continue to purchase their groceries from
store A if they purchased their groceries from store A in the previous month, while 25% of the
time consumers will change to purchasing their groceries from store B if they purchased their
groceries from store A in the previous month. Similarly, the records show that 80% of the time,
consumers will continue to purchase their groceries from store B if they purchased their groceries
from store B in the previous month.
a How many customers are still purchasing their groceries from A and B at the end of two
months, if 300 customers started at A and 300 started at B?
b What percentage (in whole numbers) of customers are purchasing their groceries at A and B at
the end of 6 months, if 50% of the customers started at A?
Think
a 1 Set up the transition matrix using the
correct methods. Complete any missing

probabilities knowing the columns must add
up to 1.
718
Set up the initial state matrix. The elements

for this matrix are the initial number of
customers for each store.
WriTe
A
B
A 0.75 0.2
T=
B 0.25 0.8
0.75 0.20
T=
0.25 0.80
S0 = 300
300
The number of transitions is 2. Calculate the

number of customers still purchasing at A
and B by using the formula Sn = T n S0.
Use a calculator to evaluate S2.
Interpret the answer represented by S2.
b 1 Identify that after 6 months, n = 6. The
initial state matrix contains the percentage of

customers for each store at the start.
2
Use the formula to set up the matrix

calculation.
Sn = T n S0
S2 = T 2 S0
2
300
= 0.75 0.20
300
0.25 0.80
276.75
S2 =
323.25
After 2 months, 277 customers will be
purchasing their groceries from store A and 323
will be purchasing their groceries from store B.
Units: 3 & 4
50
50
b S0 =
S0
Sn =
S6 = T 6 S0
6
Use a calculator to evaluate S6.
Interpret the answer represented by S6.

(Round to the nearest percent.)
Topic:
Concept:
Concept
summary
Read a summary
of this concept.
Tn
0.75 0.20 50
=

0.25 0.80 50
3
AOS:
See more
Watch a
video about steady
state.
44.5982
S6 =
55.4018
After 6 months, 45% of the customers will be
purchasing their groceries from store A and
55% of the customers will be purchasing their
groceries from store B.
Steady state
As higher and higher powers of T are taken, we find the values of the elements in the transition matrix
show no noticeable difference, and approach a fixed matrix T . We refer to T as the steady state or
long-term transition matrix. To test for steady state, a suitable value of n to test is 50. Then test n = 51. If
the elements in the matrix havent changed, then a steady state has been reached.
When there is no noticeable change from one state matrix to the next, the system is said to have
reached its steady state.
If a Markov system is regular, then its long-term transition matrix is given by the square matrix,
whose columns are the same and equal to, the steady state probability vector. This occurs as long as the
transition matrix squared, T2, has no zeros.
If T2 contains any zeros, then it is not possible to reach a steady state.
T
T2
T3
T4
0.75 0.2
0.25 0.8
0.6125 0.31
0.3875 0.69
0.536875 0.3705
0.463125 0.6295
0.49528125 0.403775
0.50471875 0.596225
T8
T 16
T 50
T 51
0.449096.. 0.440722..
0.550903.. 0.559277..
0.44448.. 0.44441..
0.55551.. 0.55558..
4
9
4
9
5
9
5
9
4
9
4
9
5
9
5
9
These probabilities can be easily expressed as fractions if n is very large.

ChapTer 16 Matrices
719
applications to weather
Predicting the long-term weather forecast is important to insurance companies who insure event organisers
against losses if the event is rained on. To do this they need to predict the long-term probability of there
being rain. Suppose that for a Melbourne spring, long run data suggest that there is a 65% chance that if
today is dry, then the next day will also be dry. Conversely, if today is wet, there is an 82% chance that the
next day will also be wet. What is the long-term probability for it being a wet day if the initial day was dry?
This style of problem is highlighted in the following worked example.
Worked example 19
An insurance company needs to measure its risk if it is to underwrite a policy for a major
outdoor event planned. The company used the following information about the region.
Long run data gathered about the regions weather suggests that there is a 75% chance that if
today is dry, then the next day will also be dry. Conversely, if today is wet, there is a 72% chance
that the next day will also be wet. This information is given in the table below.
Next day dry
Next day wet
Today is dry
0.75
0.25
Today is wet
0.28
0.72
a Find the probability it will rain in three days time if initially the day is dry.
b Find the long-term probability of rain if initially the day is wet.
c If the company insures only if they have the odds in their favour, will they insure this event?
Think
a 1 Set up the transition matrix.
WriTe
dry ewt
dry 0.75 0.28
T=
wet 0.25 0.72

0.75 0.28
T=
0.25 0.72
720
Set up the initial state matrix. For the initial

day being dry, set dry as 1 and wet as 0.
Identify that in three days time, n = 3.

Substitute the matrices and use a CAS
calculator to evaluate S3.
1
S0 =
0
S3 = T 3 S0
0.75 0.28 1
0
0.25 0.72

0.577 275
0.422 725
Interpret the answer represented byS3.
b 1 Identify that for a long-term steady state, n
needs to be large, say n = 50. (Test that the

same result is obtained when n = 51.)
Set up the initial state matrix. For the initial

day being wet, set dry as 0 and wet as 1.
Substitute the matrices and use a CAS

calculator to evaluate S50 and S51.
The probability of a dry day, three days after a

dry day, is 57.7%.
b S50 = T 50 S0
0
S0 =
1
S50 = T 50 S0
0.75 0.28
=
0.25 0.72
0.528 302
=
0.471 698
S51 = T 51 S0
50
0

1
0.75 0.28
=
0.25 0.72
51
0

1
0.528 302
=
0.471 698
4
As there is no change from S50 to S51, a

steady state has been reached. Interpret the
answer.
c For it to be in the insurers favour, there must be
In the long run, there is a 47.2% chance it will

be a wet day (or 25 in 53 chance) if the initial
day is wet.
c In the long run, there is a 52.8% chance it will
more than a 50% chance of it being dry.
be a dry day. The odds are slightly in favour

of the insurance company. Therefore, they will
insure this event.
Other well-known examples of the application of transition matrices are to population studies, stock
inventory and sport.
exercise 16F
Transition matrices
The following matrices are required to answer questions 1 to 8. Define them in your CAS calculator to
assist with your calculations.
0.7 0.1 0.2
0.75 0.25
0.5 0.5
0.8 0.2
0.2 0.7 0.1
,
,
and
D
=
B
=
C
=
A=
0.25 0.75
0.2 0.8
0.5 0.5
0.1 0.2 0.7

1 We 16 Use a CAS calculator to:
a evaluate (correct to 2 decimal places)
i A3
ii B2
iii C4
iv C8
b evaluate C46, expressing the elements of the matrix as whole numbers.
2 Use a CAS calculator to perform the following matrix operations.
a A0
b B0
c C0
d D0
3 Describe the type of matrices produced in question 2.

4 Evaluate A1, A2, A3 and A4 and complete the following sentence, choosing from the list of words.
steady
initial
same
different
equal
not equal
In a transition matrix whose elements are all __________, the steady state is the __________ as the
__________ state.
ChapTer 16 Matrices
721
5 State the type of matrix represented by B, C and D.

6 Evaluate the following matrices: B2, B10, B20, B50, C2, C10, C20 and C50. Give the elements correct to
4 decimal places or, where possible, express all elements as fractions.

7 Use your results from question 6 to complete the following sentence, choosing from the list of words.
large
initial
small
same
long
different
short
row
steady
column
For transition matrix, T n where n is __________; that is, a __________-term transition matrix, the
steady state has the __________ probabilities across each __________.
8 Raise D to a power that results in an equal proportion steady state matrix. Express the result in fraction
form. Explain why the proportion is different to that in question 6.
9 We17 Represent each of the following as a transition matrix.
a
0.32
0.68
0.77
A
B
0.23
b There are a number of train carriages operating between two depots, North depot and
South depot. At the end of each week, 20% of the carriages that started at North depot end up
at South depot and 15% of the carriages that started at South depot end up at North depot.
10 mC Using the following table of events and their transition probabilities, find the correct transition
matrix.
Percentage of customers and their choice of shopping the next time
Shop A
Shop B
Shop A
85%
Shop B
10%
60%
Shop C
5%
20%
20%
75%
0.85 0.2 0.2

0.1 0.6 0.3
a
0.05 0.2 0.75
0.85 0.2 0.2

0.1 0.6 0.05
B
0.5 0.2 0.75
0.85 0.2 0.2

0.1 0.6 0.05
C
0.05 0.2 0.75
0.85
d 0.1
0.05
Shop C
0.05
0.6
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.75
85 20 20
10 60
5
5 20 75
11 mC The missing elements in the following transition matrix are:
0.3 0.2
a t31 = 0.3 and t13 = 0.5

B t13 = 0.3 and t31 = 0.5
T = 0.3 0.7 0.3
C t13 = 0.5 and t31 = 0.4
d t31 = 0.4 and t13 = 0.1
e t13 = 0.4 and t13 = 0.1

0.1 0.6
12 Write the transition matrices to represent the following tables of events and their transition probabilities.
Complete any missing information.
a
From
Dry
Wet
To
722
Dry
85%
70%
Wet
15%
30%
To
Shoe brand
Gulius
Grasby
Warlow
Gulius
0.65
0.15
From
Grasby
0.68
0.12
Warlow
0.03
0.97
13 We18 A railway knows that 250 goods wagons will be needed to carry goods from point A to point B.
At the end of each week, it finds that 10% of the wagons that started the week at point A, ended at
point B, and 8% of the wagons that started at point B ended at point A.
a Write a transition matrix to represent this situation.

b How many wagons are located at point A and point B at the end of two weeks, if 125 wagons
started at point A and 125 wagons started at point B?

c What percentage (in whole numbers) of wagons will be at point A and point B at the end of 6 weeks,
if 40% of the wagons started at A?

14 mC A transition analysis of the movement of a population of people at the Tamworth Country Festival
4
0.5 0.2 10 000
is given by S4 =

0.5 0.8 12000
. The most correct answer for S4 is:
6300
15700
6288
15711
6315.8
15684.2
28.7
71.3
6320
15690
15 The following information relates to a survey conducted in October 2012 on supermarket shopping.
12%ofstoreAcustomerswillshopatstoreBthefollowingmonth.
36%ofstoreAcustomerswillshopatstoreCthefollowingmonth.
40%ofstoreBcustomerswillshopatstoreBthefollowingmonth.
44%ofstoreBcustomerswillshopatstoreCthefollowingmonth.
14%ofstoreCcustomerswillshopatstoreAthefollowingmonth.
7%ofstoreCcustomerswillshopatstoreBthefollowingmonth.
a Represent this information as a transition matrix.
b If the market share at the time of the survey showed that 1200 customers shopped at store A,
800 customers shopped at store B and 1000 customers shopped at store C, find the number of
customers expected to be shopping at each store in March 2013.
c Calculate the long-term share of the customers shopping at each store as a percentage (correct to
1 decimal place).
d Express the answer for part c as a fraction of the customers shopping at each store.
ChapTer 16 Matrices
723
16 We19 An insurance company needs to measure its risk if it is to underwrite a policy for a major
outdoor event planned. The company used the following information about the region where the event
was to take place.
Long run data gathered about the regions weather suggests that there is a 95% chance that if
today is dry, then the next day will also be dry. Conversely, if today is wet, there is a 45% chance that
the next day will also be wet. This information is given in the table below.
Today is dry
Today is wet
Next day is dry
0.95
0.55
Next day is wet
0.05
0.45
a Find the probability it will rain in three days time if initially the day is dry.
b Find the long-term probability if initially the day is wet.
c If the company insures only if the odds are in its favour, will the company insure this event?
17 If a train is late on one day, there is a 15%
probability that the same train will be late

the next day. If the train is on time one
day, there is a 40% chance that it will be
late the next day.
If, in a given week, a train arrives on
time on Monday, calculate:
a the probability that the train will be
on time on the following Friday
b the probability that the train will
be late on the following Monday
(assume that there are no trains
operating on weekends).
0.5 0.2 0.3
0.8 0.3 and
0 0.4
0.2
18 mC For T = 0.3
100
S0 = 50 , the steady state distribution vector is:
80
a
0.3
0.6
0.1
69
138
23
70
135
25
100
50
80
30
60
100
19 Many Victorians have been retiring and moving to Queensland, yet only some have come from
Queensland to retire in Victoria. The government of Victoria wants to investigate the expected longterm transition using the following information.
6000VictoriansmovedtoQueenslandin2009.
400QueenslandersmovedtoVictoriain2009.
73%ofVictorianswhomovedtoQueenslandstayed.
27%ofVictorianswhomovedtoQueenslandeventuallyreturnedtoVictoria.
10%ofQueenslanderswhomovedtoVictoriastayed.
90%ofQueenslanderswhomovedtoVictoriareturnedtoQueensland.
The government wants to budget for its proposed aged care program and needs to find out the longterm impact on numbers the 2009 transition will have. Calculate the net gain or loss of retirees to the
state of Victoria.
724
20 The following transition table describes the proportion of customers that purchase fuel from four
nearby petrol stations each week.

Petro
Texcal
Oilmart
Petro
0.6
0.1
0.05
Texcal
0.2
0.8
0.05
Oilmart
0.1
0.1
0.9
CP
0.1
0.05
0.95
a Represent the information as a transition matrix.
4500
4000
b If the initial customer base is represented by the matrix
2000
largest customer base (include how many):
1500
i after 2 weeks?
ii after 8 weeks?
iii in the long term? (Hint: Investigate large values of n.)
21 For the transition matrix
T=
0.6
0.2
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.8
0.1
0
0
0
1
0
0.05
0
0
0.95
CP
, which petrol stationhas the
a State the matrix T 2.

b State why this matrix (T ) has no steady state.
22 mC The transition matrix that matches the following transition diagram is:
0.7
0.75
0.1
0.25
0.7 0.1 0.25

0.2 0.9 0
0.75
0.1 0
0.7 0
0.25
d
0.2 0.9 0
0.1 0.1 0.75
0.1
0.9
B
0.2
0.7 0.1 0.25

0.2 0.9 0.45
0.1 0.2 0.75
0.7 0.1 0.75

0.2 0.9 0
0.25
0.1 0
0.7 0.1 0.25

0.1 0.9 0
0.75
0.2 0
ChapTer 16 Matrices
725
Summary
A matrix is a rectangular array of numbers arranged in rows and columns.

The numbers in a matrix are called the elements of the matrix.
A m n matrix contains m rows and n columns. The order of this matrix is m byn.
The elements in a matrix are referred to by the row and then by the column position. For example,
the elements of matrix A are referred to as ai j, where i refers to the row position and j refers to the
column position in the matrix.
Matrices may be classified according to their type.
1. A matrix with one row is called a row matrix or row vector.
2. A matrix with one column is called a column matrix or column vector.
3. A matrix with an equal number of rows and columns is called a square matrix.
4. A square matrix that has non-zero elements on the main diagonal only is called a diagonal matrix.
5. Two matrices are equal if they are of the same order and all corresponding elements are equal.
addition, subtraction
and scalar operations
with matrices
Addition and subtraction of matrices can be performed only if the matrices are of the same order.
Addition and subtraction of matrices is performed by adding or subtracting corresponding elements.
When a matrix is multiplied by a scalar, each element in the matrix is multiplied by the scalar. The
order of the matrix remains unchanged.
The matrix operations involving addition, subtraction and scalar multiplication can be applied to
practical situations such as stock inventory, price discounting and marking up of store prices.
The following list is a summary of properties of addition of matrices. These properties hold true
when A, B and C are m n matrices, k and c are constants and O is a zero or null matrix (a matrix
with all elements equal to zero).
Property
Commutative (does not matter which order the
matrices are operated on)
Associative (does not matter where the
brackets are placed)
Identity
Inverse
Distributive
Example
A+B=B+A
(A + B) + C = A + (B + C)
(k c) A = k (c A)
A+O=A=O+A
A + A = O = A + A
k A + k B = k (A + B)
k A + c A = (k + c) A
For subtraction, matrices do not obey the Associative or the Commutative laws. For example,
A B B A and (A B) C A (B C).
Two matrices can be multiplied if the number of columns in the first matrix is equal to the number
of rows in the second matrix.
If matrix A is of order m n and matrix B is of order n p, then A B exists and its order is m p.
When multiplying two matrices, the rows of the first matrix are multiplied by the columns of the
second matrix.
The following list is a summary of properties of multiplication of matrices. These properties hold
true when A, B and C are m n matrices, I is an identity matrix and O is a zero or null matrix
(a matrix with all elements equal to zero).
Property
Associative
Identity
Distributive
Example
(AB)C = A(BC)
AI = A = IA
(A + B)C = AC + BC
C(A + B) = CA + CB
Zero matrix
AO = O = OA
For multiplication, matrices do not in general obey the commutative law. For example, AB BA.
726
multiplicative inverse
and solving matrix
equations
The inverse of matrix A is commonly written as A 1.
If AA 1 = A 1A = I then A 1 is called the multiplicative inverse of A.
For a matrix of the form a b :

c
d
(a) A1 =
ad bc
(b) The value of ad bc is known as the determinant of matrix A. It is commonly written as det A
or | A |.
A matrix with a determinant equal to 0 is called a singular matrix. For any matrix that has a
determinant of 0, it is impossible for an inverse to exist.
If det A 0, A is called a regular matrix.
When solving matrix equations:
(a) If AX = B, then X = A 1B
(Pre-multiply both sides by A 1)
1
(b) If XA = B, then X = BA
(Post-multiply both sides by A 1)
application of matrices
to simultaneous
equations
A pair of simultaneous equations containing two unknowns in the form:

ax + by = e
cx + dy = f
can be expressed as a matrix equation in the form AX = B
a b x e
c d y = f
e
x
a b
Where A =
is called the coefficient matrix, X = y and B = f .
c d

A CAS calculator is used to solve simultaneous equations in matrix form when the order is 3 3 or
greater.
When answering problems of this type, take care to follow these steps:
(a) read the problem several times to ensure you fully understand it
(b) identify the unknowns and assign suitable pronumerals. (Remember that the number of
equations needed is the same as the number of unknowns.)
(c) identify statements that define the equations and write the equations using the chosen
pronumerals (align the pronumerals)
(d) use the matrix methods to solve the equations.
Transition matrices
Only square matrices can be raised to a power.

A Markov system is a system that investigates the distribution of states of an event, given initial
information. It also investigates the manner in which these states change from one to the next,
according to fixed probabilities.
The changes within a system can be represented as a transition matrix. Each column of a transition
matrix must add up to 1.
A distribution vector is a column vector with an entry for each state of the system. It is often
referred to as the initial state and is denoted by S0.
The matrix for the new state can be calculated using the formula Sn = T n S0, where Sn is the new
state, n transitions after the initial state, S0, or Sn = T Sn1, where Sn1 is the previous state.
When there is no noticeable change from one state to the next, the system is said to have reached
its steady state. Two suitable values of n to test are n = 50 and n = 51.
The steady state can be defined as S = T S0.
ChapTer 16 Matrices
727
Chapter review
m U lT ip l e
C h oiCe
1 The a12 element in the following matrix is:
A=
a 3.6
B 1.6
d 0
e 2.4
1.6
0
2.4
0.5
2.4
3.6
1.6
2.5
C 0.5
2 The number 0 in the following matrix can be represented using the notation:
A=
2 1
0 2
3 2
5 4
2
1
1
2
a a23
B a32
d a12
e none of these
C a22
3 The solution to E F given the matrices
E =
1.2
3.6
3.5
1.0
0
1.2 2.5
3.5 1.1
1.0
1.2
3.5
0.2
and F =
2.4
0.5
5.0
2.2
0.5
2.5
1.1
is:
2.5
1.1
1.0
1.0
1.2
3.5
2.5
1.1
1.0
4 If A = B C, then the element a13 is the result of:

a multiplying the third row by the first column
B multiplying the third column by the first row
C adding the first row to the third column
d multiplying the first row by the third column
e multiplying the first column by the third row
Use the following matrices to answer questions 5 to 8.
728
1 4
A= 0 5
3 6
1
2
3
1 2
D=
0 1
3 4
1 4
3 1
B=
2 5
4
E= 3
2 3 1
C=
1 4 5
1
0
1
1.4
6.0
3.5
1.0
1.2
3.5
7.5
3.3
1.0
0
2.5
1.1
5 Which of the following products does not exist?

a AB
d ED
6 The order of the matrix BD is:

a 22
d 34
B BC
e CE
C CA
B 42
e 24
C 44
7 Which of the following products gives a matrix of order 2 2?

a BA
d AC
B EC
e CE
C CA
8 The matrix ED is:

a
4 9 11 20
3 6 9 12
2 3 6 4
4
3
4 9 11 20
3 6 9 12
2 3 7 4
3 7 8 16
2 9 1 28
9
6
3
11 20
9 12
7
4
4 9 11 20
3 6 9 12
2 3 7 12
8 is:
5 6
9 The determinant of the matrix 9

a
1
14
1
14
C 14
1 1
10 If P =
, its inverse P
1 0
a
0

1
1 1
1 0
e 8
d 104
is equal to:
cannot be found.
1
1
1

1
Use the pair of simultaneous equations below to answer questions 11 and 12.
y = 3x 2
y = 2x
11 The correct matrix equation to solve this system of linear equations is:
a
3 1
=
2 1
1 y =

2 1 x
1 x
=
2 1 y
x
y

1 x
=
1 1 y
1 3 x
=
1 y
12 The solution, written in coordinate form, is:

a (0.4, 0.8)
(25 , 45)
(25 , 45 )
( 45 , 25)
C (2, 4)
ChapTer 16 Matrices
729
13 For the system of simultaneous equations
3x 2y + z = 1
+ 4y 3z = 2
3x + z = 6
the coefficient matrix is:
x
3

1
3
3

1
3
4
0
1
3
1
1
4 2
0 6
3

1
3
1
4 3
1 0
3

1
3
4
1
3 2 1
1 4 3
3 0 1
14 A railway goods distribution company has 300 wagons that transport coal from the coalfields at station A
to the electricity generation plant at station B. At the end of each week, it is known that 20% of the wagons
that started the week at station A endthe week at station B and 30% of the wagons that started the week at
station B end the week at station A. The transition matrix that describes the distribution of wagons is:
Sh orT
anS Wer
0.8 0.2
0.3 0.7
0.2 0.7
0.8 0.3
0.7 0.2
0.8 0.3
120
180
0.8 0.3
0.2 0.7
1 For the following two matrices
10
A= 5
7
5
2
and B =
0
5
1 0
3 1
0 3
a state the order and type of matrix

b where possible, write the 3, 2 element
c state the position of the number 5 in xi j form.
2 Given the following matrices
1
3 0
and C =
A = 1 5 , B =
5 2
3
3 2
find, if possible:
a A+B
3 3
b BC
3 The matrix below represents the prices (in dollars) of some
mobile phone options. The first column displays the costs of

two types of pre-paid mobile phones and the second column
represents two types of 12-month-plan mobile phones.
249 29
680 49
The company wants to increase the price of the

pre-paid mobile phones by 12% and decrease the cost of
the 12-month-plan mobile phones by 5%.
a Show the matrix used to represent the price changes as a
2 2 matrix.
b Use matrix multiplication to calculate the new prices.
730
c 2C.
4 In the matrix multiplication A B = C, the order of B is 2 3 and the order of C is 43. What is the
order of matrix A?
0 2
2 4
and T=
, find matrix R.
2 0
1 3
6 The food-vending machine at an office building had three varieties of potato chips that were restocked
at the end of each day. The cash box was emptied at the same time. The number of packets sold and the
cash takings for five days are shown in the table.
5 For the matrix equation RS = T where S =
Day
Plain
Salt and vinegar
Jumbo pack
Cash takings
Monday
30
20
10
$68.00
Tuesday
22
17
$38.00
Wednesday
20
15
$44.00
Thursday
15
$20.00
Friday
32
20
$63.60
a Use the data from Monday to Wednesday to find the price of each variety of chips.
b Select any other combination of three days and show that the answer obtained is the same as in
part a.
7 A survey shows that 85% of the time, customers will continue to purchase their groceries from store A if
they purchased their groceries from store A in the previous month, while 15% of the time consumers will
change to purchasing their groceries from store B if they purchased their groceries from store A in the
previous month. Similarly, the records show that 60% of the time, consumers will continue to purchase
their groceries from store B if they purchased their groceries from store B in the previous month.
a How many customers are still purchasing their groceries at A and B at the end of three months, if
200 customers started purchasing at A and 200 started at B?
b What percentage (in whole numbers) of customers are purchasing their groceries at A and B at the
end of 6 months, if 40% of the customers started at A?
1 The owner of a chain of three local video stores is doing the bookkeeping for the months of January,
e x Ten d ed
reS p o n S e
February and March. The number of hires of video games, weekly DVDs and overnight DVDs for the
three stores are given in the table below.
January
February
March
Video
games
Weekly
DVDs
Overnight
DVDs
Video
games
Weekly
DVDs
Overnight
DVDs
Video
games
Weekly
DVDs
Overnight
DVDs
Store A
450
1200
1500
320
600
900
540
1300
1400
Store B
310
1000
1200
158
580
920
212
1080
1569
Store C
250
750
600
130
345
700
278
850
900
a Represent the number of hires from each store as a 3 3 matrix for each month.
b Write a matrix equation to calculate the total number of each hire option for the three stores
during this three-month period.

The owner has a profit margin for each type of hire as follows: Video games at $0.50 each, weekly
DVDs at $1.50 each and overnight DVDs at $4.50.
c Show the hire profit margins as a 3 1 matrix and use it to calculate the total profit for each of the
stores at the end of this three-month period.
d Calculate the total profit made by the owner of the chain, during this three-month period.
The owner has just bought 120 copies of a new-release blockbuster on DVD. He delivers an equal
quantity to each outlet. However, over the years he has determined that after a period of a week, 80%
ChapTer 16 Matrices
731
of hires from store A are returned to store A while 15% are returned to store B and the remainder to
store C. For hires from store B, 70% are returned to store B, while 25% are returned to store C and
the remainder to store A. Similarly for store C, 60% are returned to store C, while 30% are returned
to store B and 10% are returned to store A.
e Represent this information as a transition matrix.
f Calculate the number of copies of the new-release blockbuster at each store after 2weeks.
g Use appropriate calculations to suggest how the 120 copies could have been distributed among the
stores initially, and thus avoid the slow transition of copies to a long-term steady state.
2 Another video store surveys its customers to establish the type of movie each customer prefers. The
results have been summarised in the following two-way frequency table.
Men
14
43
32
51
140
Romance
Sci-fi
Comedy
Dramas
Total
Women
76
16
24
44
160
Children
14
86
152
28
280
a Use matrix methods to represent the figures in the table as percentages. That is, the percentage
diGiTal doC
doc-9522
Test Yourself
Chapter 16
of men who prefer romance movies, the percentage of men who prefer sci-fi movies, and so on,
through to the percentage of children who prefer dramas.
b From the table calculated in a, what percentage of women prefer romance movies?
The computer system crashed for three days and the owner had only the following figures recorded
by his sales assistants. Unfortunately, they forgot to label the type of hire as shown in the table
below.
Day 1
Day 2
Day 3
Units: 3 & 4
AOS:
Topic:
Practice
VCE exam
questions
Use StudyON to
access all exam
questions on this
topic since 2002.
732
210
110
350
36
110
140
340
110
420
Takings
$2835.00
$1457.50
$4375.00
The hire charge fees for video games are $2.50, overnight DVDs are $7.00 and weekly DVDs
are $3.75.
c Use this information to determine the type of hire that each of the columns in the table represent.
d How many overnight DVDs were hired during this three-day period?
The owner needs to increase all hire charges by 14.5%.
e Using a 1 3 matrix to represent the hire charges, calculate the new hire charges to the nearest
10 cents. Show your working.
On average, each hire cost, costs the owner in overheads and staff wages: $0.75 for video games,
$2.25 for weekly DVDs and $5.00 for overnight DVDs.
f Use matrix methods to calculate the new profit margins for each type of hire.
ICT activities
Chapter opener
diGiTal doC
matrices. (page 683)
16B addition, subtraction and scalar operations

with matrices
diGiTal doC
WorkSHEET 16.1 doc-9520: Identify the order of matrices, addition
and subtraction of matrices and multiplication by a scalar.
(page 696)
TUTorial
We5 eles-1326: Watch a worked example on solving equations
involving matrices. (page 692)
16C
TUTorial
We9 eles-1327: Watch a worked example on how to multiply
matrices. (page 700)
16d multiplicative inverse and solving matrix

equations
TUTorial
We 11 eles-1328: Watch a tutorial on how to find the inverse of a
2 2 matrix by hand. (page 705)
inTeraCTiViTY
Solving matrix equations int-0197: Use the interactivity to consolidate
your understanding of solving matrix equations. (page 704)
16e application of matrices to simultaneous

equations
diGiTal doC
WorkSHEET 16.2 doc-9521: Classifying matrices, matrix
multiplication, determinants and inverses and solving simultaneous
equations. (page 715)
16F
Transition matrices
TUTorialS
We 17 eles-1330: Watch a tutorial on how to use a matrix to
represent directed networks and a Markov system. (page 717)
eleSSon
Transition matrices eles-0052: Learn how to use transition matrices
to solve problems by watching the animation. (page 716)
Chapter review
diGiTal doC
ChapTer 16 Matrices
733
Answers CHAPTER 16
maTriCeS
exercise 16a
1 a i 4 2 rectangular matrix
ii 2
iii a22
b i 3 3 square matrix
ii 0
iii b33
c not a matrix
d i 3 1 column matrix
ii 3
iii d21
e i 1 3 row matrix
ii Does not exist
iii e11
2 a 1
b 5
c 2
d 2.1
e Does not exist
f Does not exist
g 3
h 3.5
3 a, b and g
4C
5 B
1 0 0 0
0 1 0 0
0 0 1 0
9 16 25
10
12
2 7
12 15
3
20 25
5 10
16 26
6 16
0.2 0.6
5
1.5 3.5
4
3.5
0.5
11
Semester 2 76 77
89 85
0.1
0.3
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0 3 2 1
0.2
0.1
3 0 1 1
0.5
0.1 0.8 0.1
0.2
0.3
0.2
12
0.1
0.1
0.3
0.2
75 79
b C=
13 a
2 a
24 0
18 0 30
9
14 30 0 14 8
4 1
d
0 1
734
0 1
4 5
1911 10311
9
1811 1611 12911

stock levels
(matrix S)
= 0.4 S
0.5
3.5
2.5
15
0.5
7 a E=
90.00
c C=
81.50
159.95]
4 7 1
b D=
1 0 2
15 a
b
c
d
84 58 2 320
18
92 52 3 480
True
Not true
Not true
True
exercise 16C
5 3
CB = 2 3
4 3
d AB =
13.5
3.5 11
34 35
25 35
14 9
CA =
40 000
26 000
50 000
36 000
80 000
56 000
1 a A=22 B=23 C=22

b i, iii, iv and vi
c AB = 2 3 AC = 2 2 CA = 2 2
8 b, e
9 a Centre A and Centre C
b
60 45 2 436
31 180 64 3 340
7.5
9.5
9
14
13 280 92 2 160
8 46 8 6
5.5
2 0
3 D
4 [26.00
3 3 2
207 180 1422
14 a New stock level (N ) = 40% of current
0 8 8 4
12
16
2 0
85 83.5
16 18 16 8 24
76 72.5
(A + B)
154 214 1138
14
4 1
2 10
4 5
1
2
0 3 12
12
78 74
4 4 20 4 4
76 68
81 82
4 1
2 0
72 84
3 2
4 5
10 a [0.25 0.40 0.20 0.15]

b A = 800B
c [200 320 160 120]
11 All the matrices are not of the same order.
4 0 8 4 4
0.6
c Not possible
d
72 000 50 400
8 4 12 4 0
exercise 16B addition, subtraction and

scalar operations with matrices
45 000 32 400
8 8 16 4 12
6 a
16 10 12 8 20
12 a Semester 1
4 12 0 8 8
12 15 87
6 15 0
1 a
36 000 23 400
0.4 0.8
0.4
15 10 100
21 39 60
7 15
1 1 1 0
12 23 35
2 1 0 1
0 0 0 1
5 a
2 a
14 7
7 7
16 0 16
3 9 12
6
9
27
12 16
AC =
9 21
CB =
21
20
13 11
5
3 a
a b
c d
180 200 300 384
a b
c d
c N in question 3 is the identity matrix

4A
5 a D
bA
c D
d E
e B
6 a
24 26
9
16 20
10
6 12
970
11 a February =
March =
0
1.15
25.00
9.90
35.00
19.90
95.00
75.00
inverse because it is a singular matrix, that

is, its determinant is equal to 0.
1
3 2
420
28.00
15.90
76.00
60.00
2 1
12 a i
51.00
62.50 45.00
107.50
c i Year 10/11
ii Year 10/11
12 10 10 12
Store A sold $7590

Store B sold $9870
Store C sold $6420
9870
6420
25.00 26.00
55.00 30.00
85.00
34.50
5 3
iii
0 20 0 0
0 0 30 0
0 0 0 32
iv
3 2
2 1
c A8 =
Fn + 1
Fn
Fn
Fn 1
F9 F8
1
11
1
13
1
3
b 3
5 3
8 a 0.005
21 13
1
2
No inverse exists.
90
ii
b i6
ii
2

1
1 1
2
2
c i 1
ii
d i 0.1
ii

2.5
9 a
40
50
i 28
1
14
3
14
20
28
5
28
10
e i 0
ii Does not exist singular matrix
f i 0
ii Does not exist singular matrix
F8 F7
34 21
1
6
5 AB = BA = I.
6 A
7 E
8 5
matrix are Fibonacci numbers. If we let

Fn represent the nth Fibonacci number,
then the situation can be represented as
follows.
1 1
, then An can be
For a matrix A =
1 0
written as
3
5
3 2
b The numbers produced in the solution
5 18
15 0 0 0
ii
1 1
15 25 15 25
10 10 10 10
25 12 1
7.90
4 a
16 15 10
0.80
20.00
exercise 16d multiplicative inverse and

solving matrix equations
1
1 a 11
b
3
c 13
d 0
27 9 5
7590
12.50 22.00
250
13 C
14 C
2 a, b and c will have an inverse; d has no
750 1680
3000 3000 420
0.80 0
8 20
1920 3750 4200
112.00 102.40
10 a
420
3240 2250 2100
140.00 128.00
9 a
600 1500 2100

1560
840 1500 1260
April =
2.98 2.19
750 840
1440
3.40 2.88
500
480
1200 1750
0.85 0
2.13 1.04
8 a
600
1200 1000
F31 F30 , the 30th

F30 F29
Fibonacci number, F30 is 832 040.
1246
8 17
4.00 2.50
Given that A30 =
1975
240 1000
3.50 1.90
832 040 514 229
1064
2 44
3
1 346 269 832 040
120 400 150 576
30
1 0
150 200 300 320
25 19
2.50 0.90
7 a
32 34
225 500 450 800
1 1
d A30 =
g i 96
ii
24
1
4
1
24
1
4
1
2
1
4
1
24
1
4
5
24
ChapTer 16 Matrices
735
h i 3072
ii
i 72
ii
1
1
16
16
1
0
12
1
0
5 3
48
16
16
1
12
0
1
6
1
4
1
3
1
48
1
1
1
1
6
6
6
3
1 2
1
1
3
3
3
3
1
1 2
1
9
9
9
9
1
1 1
1
12 12 12
6
i and ii Not possible J is not a
square matrix.
10 a X =
1 21
30 15
33
b X=
1 36
30 18
45
c X=
d X=
11 a X =
30
0.7
=
15 0.5

0.5
1.1
1.2
=
0 0.6

15 25
=
18 30

1.5
0.33
0.5
0.6
10
1
b X=
2 a
1
8
9
x
y
x
y
11
14
2
b Cannot be
solved
1
2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
11
4
c 3
19
3
736
x 3
2 1 x 3
y = or
=
1 1
1 1 y 1
c (2, 1)
a = 2, b = 1, c = 0.5 and d = 3
Field 1: 1200 square metres; field 2:
600 square metres
52 and 27
a = 3.5 and d = 2.5
7 sedans and 15 utilities
a D
b D
The costs and revenue are equal
($23 500) when 7000 components are
manufactured.
Adults: $20, Children: $6, Pensioners: $5
8 and 50
a Model A: 18, Model B: 15
b $105
a = 4 and d = 6.6
exercise 16F
1 a i
2 a
5
3
b
0.5
1.5
5.5
Transition matrices
0.5 0.5
0.5 0.5
ii
0.63 0.38
0.38 0.63
0.5 0.5
A1 =
0.56 0.44
0.44 0.56
1 1 1
2 1 1
iv
0.51 0.49
0.49 0.51
0.5 0.5
A3 =
1 0
0 1
0.5 0.5
0.5 0.5
and A4 =
0.5 0.5
2
B =
B20 =
2
C =
C20 =
0.5 0.5
5
8
3
8
3
8
5
8
10
B =
1025
2048
1023
2048
0.5000 0.5000
0.5000 0.5000
17
25
8
25
8
25
17
25
C10 =
0.5000 0.5000
0.5000 0.5000
1023
2048
1025
2048
and
50
B =
1
2
1
2
0.5030 0.4970
0.4970 0.5030
and
50
C =
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
7 For transition matrix, T n where n is large;
that is, a long-term transition matrix, the

steady state has the same probabilities
across each row.
1 1 1
3 3 3
1 1 1
8
.
3 3 3
1 1 1
3 3 3
1
The equal proportion for three states is 3 ,
1
whereas for two states it is 2 .
B
9 a A 0.68 0.23
B 0.32 0.77
North South
b North
0.80 0.15
South
0.20 0.85
10 C
12 a
0 1
1 0
0.5 0.5
In a transition matrix whose elements are

all equal, the steady state is the same as
the initial state.
5 The elements are symmetrical about
the main diagonal. (These are known as
triangular matrices.)
1 0
0 1
, A2 =
0.5 0.5
10
3 The identity matrix
0 0 1
iii
1 0 0
0 1 0
31
3
g 7
72
3
3 a
Unique solution
No unique solution
No unique solution
Unique solution
D
A
1
6 2 x 4 2 1 x 3
9 3 y = 14 , 3 y = 9
2 3
b The determinant for both coefficient

matrices is 0.
c No solutions. As the determinant is 0,
(singular matrix), the inverse does not
exist.
d The two graphs are parallel and do not
intersect. Therefore, there is no solution.
e The two graphs are the same line.
7 a 2x y = 3
2x + y = 3
or x + y = 1
x y = 1
20
exercise 16e
1 a
4 a
b
c
d
5 a
b
6 a
11 D
0.85 0.7
0.15 0.3
0.65 0.20 0.03
0.15 0.68 0
0.20 0.12 0.97
13 a
ChapTer reVieW
0.9 0.08
b 120 wagons at point A and 130 wagons
at point B
c 43% of the wagons at point A and 57%
of the wagons at point B
14 A
0.52 0.16 0.14
15 a T = 0.12 0.40 0.07
0.36 0.44 0.79

b Store A will have 694 customers, store B
c
d
16 a
b
c
will have 369 customers and store C will

have 1937 customers.
Store A: 23.0%, store B: 12.2%, store C:
64.9%
24
17
9
Store A: , store B: , store C:
37
74
74
0.078
1
11
dry: , wet:
12
12
They should insure the event as there is
a very good chance that the day will be
dry.
68.1%
32.0%
17 a
b
18 B
19 Loss of 5229 (6000 771) Victorians to
Queensland
0.05
0.2 0.8 0.05 0

0.1 0.1 0.9
0.1 0
0.05 0.95
b i Texcal, 4128 customers

ii Oilmart, 4116 customers
iii CP, 5600 customers
0.385 0.14 0 0.0775

21 a
0.28
0.66 0 0.01
0.18
0.19 1 0.005
0.155 0.01 0 0.9075

b T has no steady state because the matrix
T 2 contains zero elements
22 A
1
4
7
10
13
C
D
B
B
A
2
5
8
11
14
C
A
D
E
C
3
6
9
12
A
E
C
B
b A+B+C=
0.50
c
1.50
4.50
1 a A: is a 3 2 rectangular matrix
B: is a 3 3 square matrix
b a32 is 2, b32 is 0
c a21, b31
2 a
Store A: $22 405, store B: $20 930.50,

store C: $13 146.50
d $56 482
4 5
0.80 0.05 0.10
8 4
e T = 0.15 0.70 0.30
0.05 0.25 0.60
b Not possible
c
3 a
680 2660 3689

658 1945 2200
ShorT anSWer
f Store A: 36, store B: 49, store C: 35

g Store A: 31, store B: 52, store C: 37
2 10 0
6
6 6
10
1.12 0
0
0.95
278.88 27.55
761.60 46.55
5 R=
2 a
47.5 5
30.7 10
30.7
22.9 15
54.3
36.4 27.5 10
4 42
1
b 47.5%
c The first column represents the
3 4
6 a Plain: $0.80, Salt and vinegar: $1.20,
Jumbo: $2.00
b Plain: $0.80, Salt and vinegar: $1.20,
0.6 0.1 0
20 a
1310 3100 3800
mUlTiple ChoiCe
0.1 0.92
Jumbo: $2.00
7 a Store A: 283, store B: 117

b Store A: 72.5%, store B: 27.5%
exTended reSponSe
overnight DVDs, the second column

represents the videos and the final
column represents the weekly DVDs.
d 670
e Videos: $2.90, overnight DVDs: $8.00,
weekly DVDs: $4.30
f Videos: $2.15, overnight DVDs: $3.00,
weekly DVDs: $2.05
450 1200 1500

1 a January: A =
310 1000 1200 ,

250 750 600
320 600 900
February: B = 158 580 920 ,

130 345 700
540 1300 1400
March: C = 212 1080 1569
278 850 900
ChapTer 16 Matrices
737
Exam practice 7 CHAPTERS 14 AND 16

Core and module 6 matrices
2
0
1 Given the matrices C =

a
and D =
5
2 4
3
0 30
6 2
, the solution to C D is:

6
3 11
d
m U lTip l e
C ho iC e
one mark.
2 4
3 1
2 3 4 1
0 5 3 6
3 1
2 Consider the following simultaneous equations.
3x + y z 1 = 0
5y + 2z 3 = 0
x 8z + 30 = 0
The solution is:
a x = 1, y = 1, z = 3
C x = 6, y = 0, z = 3
e x = 2, y = 1, z = 4
B x = 0, y = 5, z = 2
d x = 3, y = 2, z = 10
3 A 2 4 matrix is multiplied by another matrix. The order of the resultant matrix is 2 5. The order of
the second matrix is:

a 54
d 25
B 45
e 42
C 22
4 Three students recorded the number of hours they each exercised over 3 consecutive weeks.
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
15
20
12
11
14
16
Alfons
Bai
Cornelia
The 3 1 matrix that shows the total number of hours each student exercised over the 3 weeks is:
a
15 20 12
8 5 11
14 6 16
47
24
36
47 24 36
15 8 14
15
8
14
5 A bike store offers 3 different kinds of bike services; basic, complete and extensive.
The number of each of the three services performed in one week is displayed in the following matrix.
73 45 12
A basic service costs $25, a complete service costs $35 and an extensive service costs $47. A matrix
product that gives the total income that week for bike services is:
a 73 45 12
25 35 47
B
25
35
47
73
45
12
73 45 12
25
35
47
73 45 12
73
45
12
25
35
47
25 35 47
Exam practice 7
739
6 For the initial state matrix
124
S0 = 251 and the transition matrix
189
0.2 0.5 0.6
T = 0.7 0.2 0.1 , the steady state matrix is:
0.1 0.3 0.3

a
264
156
144
124
251
189
226
214
124
217
230
117
7 The inverse matrix of A =
2 3
is:
0
1
1
6
25
176
19
1 2 3
3 1 0
0
1
3
1 0
3 1
1 0
1
3 3
2
2
3
Total marks = 7
e x T ended
r e SponS e
1 A pizza shop sells the following numbers of pizzas over four nights each week for 3 weeks.
Night
Number of pizzas sold
T
98
Week 1
F
S
112 156
S
123
T
128
Week 2
F
S
136 197
S
141
T
139
Week 3
F
S
192 222
S
160
a Find the mean and standard deviation of the number of pizzas sold. Write your answers correct
[2 marks]
b The data is smoothed using a 4-point moving mean. Find the smoothed value for
Friday week 2.
[1 mark]
2 The pizza shop sells small, medium, large and family sized pizzas. The number of pizzas sold over
4 nights is shown below.

Small
Medium
Large
Family
Thursday
25
48
51
15
Friday
32
76
56
28
Saturday
46
72
74
30
Sunday
31
65
42
22
a Construct a 4 2 matrix that displays the different sized pizza sales on Saturday and Sunday
(place the days of the week in columns).
[1 mark]
b The cost of each of the different sized pizzas in dollars can be represented by the
matrix [7 12 15 18]. By multiplying this matrix by the matrix in part a, what information
is acquired?
740
[1 mark]
c Perform the matrix multiplication.

d What is the total sales in dollars for Saturday and Sunday?
[1 mark]
[1 mark]
3 The pizza shop owner observes the purchasing habits of his regular Saturday night customers and
realises there is a pattern to their pizza selections. For purchases of the three most popular pizzas,
Americana, Hawaiian and Capricciosa, he discovers:
ofcustomersthatpurchaseanAmericanaoneweek,70%purchaseanAmericanathenextweek,
10% purchase a Hawaiian and 20% purchase a Capricciosa
ofcustomersthatpurchaseaHawaiianoneweek,30%purchaseaHawaiiannextweek,45%
purchase an Americana and 25% purchase a Capricciosa
ofcustomersthatpurchaseaCapricciosaoneweek,55%purchaseaCapricciosanextweek,15%
purchase an Americana and 30% purchase a Hawaiian.
a Write a transition matrix to represent this information. Express it in the format below.
[2 marks]
This week
A H C
A
H Next week
T=
C
On one Saturday night, he recorded the number of orders for A, H and C. The information is shown
in the initial state matrix.
35
S0 = 28
61
b How many Americana pizzas were purchased that night?
[1 mark]
c i Use T and S0 to write a matrix product.
ii Evaluate to determine how many of each type of pizza were sold
2 weeks later.
[1 + 1 = 2 marks]
d If this pattern continues, in the long term how many of each of these three pizzas could the owner
expect to sell on a Saturday night?
[1 mark]
Total marks = 13
diGiTal doC
doc-10197
Solutions
exam practice 7
Exam practice 7
741
Answers EXAM PRACTICE 17

EXAM PRACTICE 1
MULTIPLE CHOICE
B
C
D
A
A
A
2
4
6
8
10
12
C
E
E
B
A
C
EXTENDED RESPONSE
a Job satisfaction = 5.53 + 0.28 hours

b i The residual scatterplot shows a pattern
with points below the horizontal

axis initially, then above the axis,
then below again. This suggests the
relationship between variables is
probably non-linear.
ii 0.60
iii Job satisfaction = 3.58 + 5.30 log10
(hours)
EXAM PRACTICE 2
MULTIPLE CHOICE
1
3
5
7
9
C
C
B
A
C
2
4
6
8
1
3
5
7
C
E
B
B
2
4
6
8
1 a
b
c
2 a
146
Dn = 100 1.1n 1
16 deer
During 2013
r = 1.1, d = 20
104
2011
0.98
Wn = 550 + 30n
During 2013
174
12
1550 m
4.75 km
5 a
b
6 a
b
2
4
6
8
10
EXTENDED RESPONSE
1 a
b
c
2 a
b
1.06
Quarter 1
1410
3.14 m2
i 0.55 m
ii 1.20 m3
80 100
Number of calls (n)
ii More than 80
3 a y 2x
b (14, 28)
c i, ii
MULTIPLE CHOICE
1 C
4 B
7 D
c
3 a
4 a
y = 2x
x+y = 42
42 x
Feasible region
d P = 3x + 2y
e i Eshe should work 14 hours at home
A
B
A
B
D
and 28 hours from the office.

ii 98 quotes
EXAM PRACTICE 5
MULTIPLE CHOICE
1
3
5
7
9
E
C
D
D
C
3 E
6 B
2
4
6
8
10
D
C
C
D
A
b
5 a
b
c
2
5
2
4
0.5
3
4
3
2
2
4
2
4
1
3
Atsuko, route 4
Badra, route 1
Cassie, route 3
Dennis, route 2
2 km
All vertices are of even degree, except
for 2 that are of odd degree.
Many answers are possible. One
possible answer is BCFEDCG
HIJKHBAMLJ.
GBACDEFG or GFEDC
ABG.
The circuit is 22 km.
A Hamiltonian circuit.
C and G.
E, 5 hours; H, 12 hours
17 hours
EXAM PRACTICE 7
MULTIPLE CHOICE
1 D
4 B
7 B
2 E
5 C
3 B
6 D
EXTENDED RESPONSE
1 a mean = 150.33,
standard deviation = 35.41
b 148.25
46 31
EXTENDED RESPONSE
1 m = 56.4 + 5.9t
2 a a = 74.1, b = 3.9
b y = 60.8 + 33.8 log10 (x)
1
3
0.5
1
2
b The optimal allocation is:
(14, 28)
2 C
5 B
A
2 a B
C
D
42
MULTIPLE CHOICE
E
B
C
D
C
CA = 52 + 0.15n
52
EXAM PRACTICE 3
1
3
5
7
9
CB = 64n
67
64
EXAM PRACTICE 6
1 a 15 000 letters
b 9000 letters
b i
D
A
C
A
$415.91
$4026
4 years
i $300
ii 9600
24 days
$25.64
$585 000
i $4966.24
ii $513 448
iii 8.5 years
EXTENDED RESPONSE
$122
$1162
$88
C = 52 + 0.15n
121
= 1.1, 110
= 1.1
b
c
d
e
3 a
b
c
4 a
b
c
E
A
B
D
EXTENDED RESPONSE
1 a mean = 69.5, standard deviation = 17.9

b 0.4
c 84%
110
100
5 a
b
6 a
b
MULTIPLE CHOICE
EXTENDED RESPONSE
2 a
3 a
b
4 a
b
EXAM PRACTICE 4
Cost ($)
1
3
5
7
9
11
c i 1.33 1.9 = 0.7

ii 0.41 m3
3 a 105
b 64.3 m
c 56
d 584.4 m2
e 438.3 m2
4 a 2.2 km
b i 3.3 km
ii 060T
2 a
72 65
74 42
30 22
ANSWERS Exam practice 17
743
b Multiplying these two matrices
together will result in a matrix with

two values. One value will give the
total pizza sales in dollars on Saturday
and the other will give the total sales
on Sunday.
c [2836 2023]
d $4859
744
3 a
This week
A H
C
0.7 0.45 0.15 A
T = 0.1 0.3
0.3
H Next week
0.2 0.25 0.55 C

b 35
c i S2 = T 2 S0
Two weeks later, 53

Americana,
ii 28
28 Hawaiian and 43
Capricciosa pizzas were
43
sold.
d In the long term he could expect to sell
58 Americana, 26 Hawaiian and 40
Capricciosa pizzas on a Saturday night.
53
Index
3-median method, straight lines, fitting
97102
689599.7% rule 313, 44
activity charts, and networks 6267
acute angles 254
alternative angles 255, 349
angles
adding 348
converting 3478
of depression 3526, 385
of elevation 3526, 385
laws 34950, 385
measurement 347
properties of 2538
subtracting 348
annuities formula 4915
annuities investment 5239
introduction to 490
retirement planning 5236
superannuation 5213
area 254
circles 259
common shapes 259
composite figures 260
conversion of units of 2601
parallelograms 259
rectangles 259
similar figures 2835
squares 259
trapeziums 259
triangles 259, 3315, 337
see also total surface area (TSA)
arithmetic sequences
arithmetic patterns in graphs
202, 207
contrasting with geometric sequences
through graphs 2025, 207
first order difference equations, relationship
with 21820, 242
first order difference equations, setting
up 2234, 243
recognition 1714, 206
terms 1758, 206
terms, sum of given number of
17882, 206
assignment (allocation) problems, and
bipartite graphs 65462
back-to-back stem plots 5962, 82
bank accounts 5418, 569
credit cards 5435
savings accounts 5413
bar charts 9
segmented bar charts 910, 669, 82
bearings 356, 3601, 385
other compass bearings 357
standard compass bearings 357
true bearings 3589
bell-shaped curves 31
allocation problem 6578
and assignment problems 65462
Hungarian algorithm 6589
representing information as 6556
bivariate data 1
coefficient of determination (r2),
calculating 7881
correlation and causation 78
dependent variables 579, 82
independent variables 579, 82
parallel boxplots 625, 82
Pearsons product-moment correlation
coeffient 736, 823
coefficient, calculating r 768
scatterplots 6973, 82
segmented bar charts 669, 82
storage in matrices 6847
straight lines, fitting to 95
two-way frequency tables 656, 679, 82
box-and-whisker diagrams see boxplots
boxplots 1921, 434
break-even analysis, simultaneous
equations 41516
capital gains 552
categorical data 12
circles
area 259
circumference 258
scale factors 284
circuits
Euler circuit algorithm 5945
Euler circuits 5934
Hamiltonian circuits 596
circumference 258
co-interior angles 255, 349
column matrices 683
complementary angles 255, 349
complete graphs 5878
composite objects
area 260
volume 2712
compound interest 1956, 207, 48390, 529
finding time in 4878
cones
total surface area 263
volume 270
connected graphs 593
continuous data 2
contour maps 37884, 386
average slope 37882
contour lines and intervals 3789
map scales 379
correlation 69
and causation 78
strength of linear relationships 73
correlation coefficient, Pearsons productmoment correlation coeffient 736, 823
corresponding angles 255, 349
cosine ratio 312
cosine rule 316, 3248, 337
triangulation 36875, 386
credit cards 5435
critical path analysis
activity charts and networks 6267
backward scanning 63540
crashing 642
dummy activities 6402
float time 6301
forward scanning 62730
latest start time 6301
network diagrams, drawing 6312
requirements for 635
cubes
volume 286
cuboids, total surface area 263
cycles 599
cyclic trends 130
cylinders, total surface area 263
data
categorical 12
comparing 35
continuous 2
discrete 2
displaying 412
numerical 1
types of 12, 43
debentures 480
decay in business 475
models of decay 475
degenerate graphs 587
depreciation 475, 554, 569
effective life 561
flat rate (straight line) depreciation
5558, 569
reducing balance 55862, 570
unit cost depreciation 5636, 570
diagonal matrix 684
difference equations first order
arithmetic sequence, practical
situation 2234, 243
arithmetic sequences, relationship
with 21820, 242
combined arithmetic and geometric
sequences, practical situation
226, 243
geometric sequence, practical
situation 225, 243
geometric sequences, relationship
with 2212, 242
graphical representation of
sequences 22832, 243
graphs, interpretation of 2326, 243
practical situations, representing 2238,
2423
starting term 21617
terms of sequence, generating 21518,
242
difference equations second order,
Fibonacci sequences 23741, 243
directed networks
assignment problems and bipartite
graphs 65462, 664
critical path analysis 62647, 663
dominance 6234, 633
network flow 64754, 6634
reachability 6212, 633
discount 5489
discrete data 2
Index
745
dominance 6234, 663

dot plots 7
duty 5501
effective rate of interest 51617, 530
equation of a straight line 401
equilateral triangles 254
Euler circuit algorithm 5945
Euler circuits 5934
Euler paths 593
Eulers formula 5901, 609
even point smoothing 1415
exterior angles 255
extrapolation 107
Fibonacci numbers 2378
Fibonacci sequences 23741, 243
financial computations
capital gains 552
discount 5489
duty 5501
Goods and Services Tax (GST) 54950
fitting a straight line
3-median method 97102
by eye 957
least-squares regression 1026
least-squares regression line, calculating
by hand 1034
to bivariate data 95106
flat rate loans, compared to reducing
balance loans 51215, 530
flat rate (straight line) depreciation
5558, 569
forecasting
and association tables 1345
trend lines 1337
frequency histograms 78
functions 401
geometric sequences
compound interest 1956, 207
first order difference equations, relationship
with 2212, 242
first order difference equations, setting up
225, 243
geometric decay 194
geometric growth 194, 1956
graphs, contrasting geometric with
arithmetic sequences 2025, 207
graphs, geometric patterns on
2023, 207
recognition 1836, 206
recurring decimals, converting to
fractions 2001
sum of given number of terms 1913, 206
sum to infinity 198202, 207
terms 18691, 206
geometry 253
angles, properties of 2537
area and perimeter 25862, 291
definitions of common terms 254
notations 2545
polygons, properties of 2538
rules 2545
scale factors, area and volume 28390
similar figures 2759, 292
similar triangles 27983
triangles, properties of 2537
volume 26875
746
Index
Goods and Services Tax (GST) 54950

graphs
arithmetic patterns in 202, 207
contrasting arithmetic and geometric
sequences 2025, 207
first order difference equations
22836, 243
40913, 427
non-linear, interpreting 41822, 427
non-linear relations and graphs,
constructing 4226, 427
planar graphs 58790, 609
simultaneous equations and break-even
point 41418, 427
straight-line graphs, constructing and
interpreting 4019, 427
subgraphs 599
growth in business 475
models of growth 475
Hamiltonian circuits 596
Hamiltonian paths 5956
hexagonal pyramids, volume 270
hire-purchase 5089
weekly instalment advertising 50910,
530
histograms
skewed distributions 1214
symmetric distributions 11, 1214
Hungarian algorithm 6589
inflation 5668, 570
interest
effective rate of 51617, 530
see also compound interest; investment;
loans; simple interest
interest only loans 504
interpolation 107
interpretation, slope and intercept
(m and c) 1067
interquartile range 1617
investment
annuities 530
bonds 529
debentures 529
perpetuities 51821, 530
term deposits 480, 529
investment bonds 4812
isosceles triangles 254
line segments 254
and step functions 40913
linear equations, solving 41415
linear functions 401
linear inequations 439, 462
graphing 43941
simulaneous 4424, 462
linear programming 445, 4513, 462
applications 45461
blending problems 4546
constraints 4457
decision variables 445
graphing constraints 447
limitations of techniques 4589
manufacturing problems 458

objective function 445, 44751
transportation problems 4568
lines, equation of a straight line 401
loans see flat rate loans; hire-purchase;
location, specification of see navigation
logarithmic transformations 114
Lucas numbers 238
Markov systems, and transition
matrices 71617
matrices
addition 68896, 726
column matrices 683
diagonal matrix 684
further equations 7067
identity matrix 699
multiplication rule 6969
multiplicative inverse and solving
equations 7048, 727
multiplying 696704, 726
powers of 71516
properties of addition of 691
properties of multiplication of 699700
regular matrices 705
representation 6838, 726
row matrices 683
scalar multiplication 6901
simple equations 6924
simultaneous equations, application
to 70915
singular matrices 705
square matrices 684
storing bivariate data 6847
subtraction 6889, 726
transition matrices 71525, 727
mean 248, 44
median 15
median smoothing 1458, 156
from graphs 1467
from tables 1456
mode 18
moving averages
number of points in 139
prediction using 1389
moving-average smoothing 137, 156
using spreadsheets 139
with odd number of points 138
multivariate data 1
navigation 3618, 386
network flow 647
flow capacity and maximum flow
minimum cutmaximum flow
method 6502
networks
basic concepts 5817, 609
definition 5812
degree of a vertex 582
edges 581
Euler paths 593
Eulers formula 5901, 609
matrix representation of 5845
nodes 581
paths and circuits 5929, 609
planar graphs 58790, 609
representations of 5834
64750
trees and their applications 599608, 610

vertices 581
see also directed networks
non-linear graphs
constructing 4226, 427
interpreting 41822, 427
relations of form y = kxn 423
non-linear relations, finding using
linear graphs 424, 427
non-right-angled triangles
ambiguous case of sine rule 3224, 336
area of 3315, 337
cosine rule 316, 3248, 337
sine rule 316, 31722, 336
special triangles 32830, 337
numerical data 1
obtuse angles
254

parallel lines 254
parallelograms, area 259
paths 592
Euler paths 593
Hamiltonian paths 5956
shortest path algorithm 6012
shortest paths 600
coeffient 736, 823
calculating 768, 83
perimeter
circles 258
rectangles 258
squares 258
perpendicular lines 254
perpetuities 51821, 530
planar graphs 5878
converting non-planar graphs 5889
converting three-dimensional
solids to 590
Eulers formula 5901
regions of 588
polygons, properties of 2538
polygons, interior angles of 2534
populations 40, 44
prediction, using moving averages 1389
Prims algorithm 602
prisms, volume 26870
pyramids
types 270
volume 2701
Pythagoras theorem 3014, 336
three-dimensional 30710, 336
Pythagorean triads 3056, 336
quadratic transformations
114
random trends 1301, 133

range 17
reachability 6212, 663
reciprocal transformations 114
rectangles
area 259
perimeter 258
rectangular prisms, volume 286
recurring decimals, converting to
fractions 2001
reducing balance depreciation 55862, 570

annuities formula 4915
changing rate of interest 5024
changing repayments 4979
compared to flat rate loans 51215, 530
frequency of payments 499501
interest-only loans 504
number of repayments 4957
reflex angles 254
regression
fitting lines by eye, method for 96
fitting straight lines to bivariate data
95106
interpretation, interpolation and
extrapolation 1069, 120
residual analysis 10913, 120
transforming to linearity 11419, 121
regular matrices 705
residual analysis 109
introduction to 11013
residual plots, types of 11112
residuals 109
calculating 10910
right angles 254
right-angled isosceles triangles 254
three-dimensional Pythagoras
theorem 30710, 336
trigonometric ratios 310, 336
row matrices 683
samples 40
savings accounts
daily balances 5423
minimum monthly balances 5412
scale factors
circles 284
squares 284
scalene triangles 254
scatterplots 6973, 82
seasonal adjustment
deseasonalising time series 14850
forecasting with seasonal time series
1512
seasonal indices 1523
spreadsheet solution 1501
seasonal trends 130
secular trends 129, 133
segmented bar charts 910, 669, 82
similar figures
area 2835
properties of 275
scale factor, k 2757
volume 2867
similar triangles 27983
simple interest 47680, 529
finding P, r and T 478
transposed simple interest formula
4789
simple random samples 40
break-even analysis 41516
linear equations, solving 41415
matrices, application of 70915
simultaneous linear inequations 442, 462
graphical solution of 4424
sine ratio 311

sine rule 316, 31722, 336
ambiguous case 3224, 336
triangulation 36875, 386
singular matrices 705
689599.7% rule 313, 44
smoothing time series
even point smoothing with
spreadsheets 1434
moving-average smoothing 137
moving-average smoothing with odd
number of points 138
smoothing with an even number of
points 1415
spanning trees 602
minimum spanning tree and Prims
algorithm 602
spheres
volume 271
square matrices 684
square-based pyramids, volume 270
squares
area 259
perimeter 258
scale factors 284
standard deviation 2831, 44
standardised score see z-scores
stem plots 37, 43
skewed distributions 1214
systematic distributions 11, 1214
stem-and-leaf plots see stem plots
step functions, and line segments 40913
straight angles 254
straight line depreciation 5558, 569
applications 4056
constructing and interpreting 4019, 427
extrapolation 4067
interpolation 4067
sketching 4025
sketching, gradient-intercept method 403
sketching line over required interval 403
sketching, x- and y-intercept method 403
subgraphs 599
supplementary angles 255
tangent ratio 313
term deposits 480
three-dimensional solids, converting to
planar graphs 590
3-median method
arithmetic approach 98
CAS calculator, using 98100
fitting a straight line 97102
graphical approach 98
time series 156
median smoothing 1458
plotting 1312
seasonal adjustment 14855, 156
smoothing 13741, 156
smoothing with even number of
points 1414
trend lines 12933
total surface area (TSA)
common objects, formula for 263
cones 263
cubes 263
Index
747
total surface area (TSA) (continued)

cuboids 263
cylinders 263
net, using a 2646
spheres 263
transformations
logarithmic transformations 114
quadratic transformations 114
reciprocal transformations 114
transforming to linearity 114
correct transformations, choosing 114
predictions, using transformed line for
11617
testing transformations 11516
transition matrices 71525, 727
distribution vector and powers of 71819
marketing, applications to 71819
Markov systems 71617
steady state 71921
weather, applications to 7201
trapeziums, area 259
trees 599600
cycles 599
graphs 599
minimum spanning tree and Prims
algorithm 602
shortest path algorithm 6012
shortest paths 600
spanning trees 602
subgraphs 599
trend lines
fitting and forecasting 1337
time series 12933
trends
cyclic trends 130
random trends 1301, 133
seasonal trends 130
748
Index
secular trends 129, 133

types of 129
triangles
area 259, 3315, 337
properties of 2537
see also non-right-angled triangles;
triangles in a semicircle 349
triangular pyramids, volume 270
triangulation
cosine and sine rules 36875, 386
similarity 3758, 386
trigonometric ratios 310
cosine ratio 312
labelling conventions 310
length of sides 31011
sine ratio 311
tangent ratio 313
unknown angle, finding 314
trigonometry 301
area of triangles 3315, 337
cosine rule 316, 3248, 337
labelling conventions 301
sine rule 316, 31722, 336
sine rule, ambiguous case 3224, 336
special triangles 32830, 337
three-dimensional Pythagoras
theorem 30710, 336
see also trigonometric ratios
two-way frequency tables 656, 679, 82
univariate data 1
689599.7% rule
bar charts 9
boxplots 1921
313, 44
comparing data 35
data types 12, 43
displaying the data 412
dot plots 7
frequency histograms 78
histograms, shape of 1114
interquartile range 1617
mean 248, 44
median 15
mode 18
outliers 22
populations 40, 44
range 17
samples 40
segmented bar charts 910
skewed distributions in stem plots and
histograms 11, 1214
standard deviation 2831, 44
standard z-scores 345
stem plots 37, 43
stem plots, shape of 1114
symmetric distributions in stem plots and
histograms 11, 1214
vertically opposite angles 255, 329
vertices, degree of a vertex 582
volume 268
composite objects 2712
conversion of units of 268
cubes 286
prisms 26870
pyramids 2701
rectangular prisms 286
similar figures 2867
spheres 271
z-scores
345

5 61 17866 MQ12 FM 4E Book

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

5 61 17866 MQ12 FM 4E Book

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

5 61 17866 MQ12 FM 4E Book

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

4TH EDITION

Fourth edition published 2013 by

Fitting straight lines to bivariate data 95

4A Time series and trend lines

4B Fitting trend lines and forecasting

2A Dependent and independent

3A Fitting a straight line by eye

Arithmetic and geometric sequences

5A Recognition of arithmetic sequences

Geometry: similarity and mensuration

by a first order difference equation 215

6A Generating the terms of a sequence defined

7A Properties of angles, triangles and polygons

Applications of geometry and

Based on Chapters 14, 1011

Loans and investments

Construction and interpretation of

Introduction to growth and decay in

Financial transactions and asset

13A Bank accounts

Linear inequations and linear

Based on Chapters 14, 79

11A Linear inequations

13E Unit cost depreciation

15D Network flow

Exercise 13E 564

Based on Chapters 14, 14 and 15

Undirected graphs and networks

Exercise 14A 585

Directed graphs and networks

16A Matrix representation

16B Addition, subtraction and scalar operations with

15A Reachability and dominance in directed

14A Basic concepts of a network

Based on Chapters 14, 12 and 13

Based on Chapters 14 and 16

Student website eBookPLUS

teacher website eGuidePLUS

Using the JacarandaPLUS

Using eBookPLUS references

numerical and categorical data

ChapTer 1 Univariate data

discrete and continuous data

1 Write whether each of the following represents numerical or categorical data.

attitude to 4-yearly elections (for or against)

was recorded. This is an example of:

Maths Quest 12 Further Mathematics

A stem-and-leaf plot, or stem plot for short, is a way of displaying a set

Key: 2|2 = 22 years old

In this example the observations are one- or

Before we construct an ordered stem plot,

Now rearrange the leaf digits in numerical

ChapTer 1 Univariate data

Display the data in a stem plot.

In this case the observations contain 3 digits. The

Lowest number = 65.1

Construct an unordered stem plot. Note that the

Construct an ordered stem plot. Provide a key.

Maths Quest 12 Further Mathematics